Translocality Studies in Global Social History

Series Editor Marcel van der Linden International Institute of Social History, Amsterdam, Th e Netherlands

Editorial Board Sven E. Beckert Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, USA Philip Bonner University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, South Africa Dirk Hoerder University of Arizona, Phoenix, AR, USA Chitra Joshi Indraprastha College, Delhi University, India Amarjit Kaur University of New England, Armidale, Australia Barbara Weinstein New York University, New York, NY, USA

VOLUME 4 Translocality

Th e Study of Globalising Processes from a Southern Perspective

Edited by Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen

LEIDEN • BOSTON 2010 Cover illustration: World Map by al-Idrisi, 1154 A.D. Oxford Pococke Manuscript, Th e Bodleian Library, University of Oxford (MS. Pococke 375, fols. 3c–4r).

Th is book is printed on acid-free paper.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Translocality : the study of globalising processes from a southern perspective / edited by Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen. p. cm. — (Studies in global social history, ISSN 1874-6705 ; v. 4) Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978-90-04-18116-8 (hardback : alk. paper) 1. Emigration and immigration—Social aspects. 2. Africa—Emigration and immigration-Social aspects. 3. Asia—Emigration and immigration—Social aspects. 4. Middle East-Emigration and immigration—Social aspects. I. Freitag, Ulrike. II. Oppen, Achim von.

JV6121.T73 2010 304.8’2—dc22

2009046271

ISSN 1874-6705 ISBN 978 90 04 18116 8

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission from the publisher.

Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use is granted by Koninklijke Brill NV provided that the appropriate fees are paid directly to Th e Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Suite 910, Danvers, MA 01923, USA. Fees are subject to change. printed in the netherlands CONTENTS

Acknowledgments ...... ix List of Contributors ...... xi List of Maps ...... xvii Note on Transliteration ...... xix

Introduction: ‘Translocality’: An Approach to Connection and Transfer in Area Studies ...... 1 Ulrike Freitag/Achim von Oppen

PART ONE: MARGINAL MOBILITIES

Wodaabe Women and the Outside World ...... 25 Elisabeth Boesen

Chinese Women in the New Migration Process to Europe: Marginal or Main Actors? ...... 55 Carine Pina-Guerassimoff

Proud Fighters, Blind Men: World War Experiences of Combatants from the Arab East ...... 83 Katharina Lange

‘Following the Hills’: Gold Mining Camps as Heterotopias ...... 111 Katja Werthmann

PART TWO: SPACES ON THE MOVE

Mapping the Ocean: Visual Representations of the Indian Ocean in the Swahili Military Press during World War II ...... 135 Katrin Bromber vi contents

Regional Attractions: World and Village in Kabylia (Algeria) ...... 159 Judith Scheele

Translocal ‘Kinship’ Relations in Central African Politics of the 19th Century ...... 179 Beatrix Heintze

PART THREE: LOCALITY AND BEYOND

Autochthony: Local or Global? ...... 207 Peter Geschiere

Heritage and the Making of (Trans-)local Identities: A Case Study from the Curonian Spit (Lithuania) ...... 229 Anja Peleikis

Shift ing Globalities—Changing Headgear: Th e Indian Muslims between Turban, Hat and Fez ...... 249 Margrit Pernau

Reclaiming the African City: Th e World and the Township ..... 269 Terence Ranger

PART FOUR: ALTERNATE GLOBALITIES

‘Alternate’ Globalities? On the Cultures and Formats of Transnational Muslim Networks from South Asia ...... 293 Dietrich Reetz

Globalisation in the Making: Translocal Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies ...... 335 Gudrun Lachenmann

About ‘Turks’ and ‘Germans’: Th e Turkish Press in Germany and the Construction of Multiple Memberships ...... 369 Christoph Schumann contents vii

Bibliography ...... 401

Indices ...... 441 Index of Personal Names ...... 441 Index of Place Names ...... 444

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Th is volume is in more than one sense a collective eff ort. Th e concept of Translocality, as discussed in this volume, has been developed and applied in an extensive research programme at Zentrum Moderner Orient (ZMO), Berlin. We express our gratitude to the main sponsors of this programme, the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (DFG) and the Senate of Berlin. All those who participated in this programme in its diff erent stages between January 2000 and June 2008 as research fellows, visiting scholars or lecturers, have contributed considerably to the gradual development of the concept and its ramifi cations. We are particularly grateful to everyone who took part in the Confer- ence “Translocality: An Approach to Globalising Phenomena?” held at ZMO (September 26–28, 2006). Although it was not possible to include in this volume all papers presented at that conference, their discussions were crucial to the shaping of this book. Th e process of turning a set of papers into a book is always lengthy and arduous. Had it not been for the patient and good-humoured support and co-ordination by Bettina Gräf, Sarah Jurkiewicz and Leyla von Mende, the editors might well have been lost in the process. Joy Adapon did most of the language-editing. We are grateful to Mar- cel van der Linden for the inclusion of this volume into his Studies in Global Social History series, and to Nienke Brienen-Moolenar and Hylke Faber for their support at Brill.

Th e Editors, Berlin and Bayreuth, June 2009

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS

Elisabeth Boesen studied Social Anthropology at Freie Universität Berlin and at the University of Bayreuth where she obtained her Ph.D. on the topic of “Identity and Symbolic Forms of Expression among the Fulbe of Northern Benin”. As a member of a research group on modern migrations among Sahelian nomadic populations based at the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies in Berlin she continued working on the Fulbe and especially the Nigerien Wodaabe. Recently she joined a research project on identity and memory at the Université du Lux- embourg. Her publications include Mobilité et nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas (2007; co-edited with Laurence Marfaing).

Katrin Bromber received her Ph.D. in African Linguistics from the University of Leipzig (Germany) and her habilitation degree from the University of Vienna (Austria). She specializes in Swahili Studies with a methodological preference for text linguistics and discourse analysis. Currently she works as a research fellow at the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies in Berlin. Her books include Th e Juristiction of the Sultan of Zanzibar and the Subjects of Foreign Nations (2001), Kala Shairi: German East Africa in Swahili Poems (2003, co-edited with Gudrun Miehe, Said Khamis and Ralf Großerhode), and Globalisation and African Languages: Risks and Benefi ts (2004; co-edited with Birgit Smieja).

Ulrike Freitag studied History and Islamic studies at Bonn, Damas- cus and Freiburg, where she obtained her Ph.D. with a thesis on Syr- ian historiography in the 20th century. She then taught at the School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS) in London from 1993 until becoming director of the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies (ZMO) in 2002, in combination with a chair at the Department of Islamic Studies of the Freie Universität Berlin. Among her publications on the modern history of the Middle East and beyond is Indian Ocean Migrants and State Formation in Hadhramaut (2003), based on extensive research in Jemen, Singapore and Java and Hadhrami Traders, xii list of contributors

Scholars and Statesmen in the Indian Ocean, 1750s–1960s (1997; co- edited with William Clarence-Smith).

Peter Geschiere is professor of African Anthropology at the Uni- versity of Amsterdam (earlier at Leiden University). Since 1971 he undertook historical-anthropological fi eld-work in various parts of Cameroon and elsewhere in West Africa. His publications include Th e Modernity of Witchcraft : Politics and the Occult in Post-colonial Africa; Globalization and Identity: Dialectics of Flow and Closure (1997; co- edited with Birgit Meyer); Th e Forging of Nationhood (2003; co-edited with Gyan Pandey); and Th e Perils of Belonging: Autochthony, Citizen- ship and Exclusion in Africa and Europe (2009). He has also written numerous essays on various aspects of economy, society, and culture in West Africa.

Beatrix Heintze has been researcher and editor of the Frobenius Institute in Frankfurt am Main from 1969 to 2004. She published many historical and anthropological studies and source editions on West Central Africa, among them the books Fontes para a História de Angola do Século XVII (1985–1988), Deutsche Forschungsreisende in Angola (1999/2007), Pioneiros Africanos: Caravanas de carregadores na África Centro-Ocidental (entre 1850 e 1890) (2004), Angola nos séculos XVI e XVII: Estudos sobre Fontes, Métodos e História (2007) and Angola on the Move: Transport Routes, Communications, and His- tory (2008; co-edited with Achim von Oppen).

Gudrun Lachenmann has been a professor at the Faculty of Sociol- ogy in the Sociology of Development and Research Centre at Bielefeld University since 1992, emerita since March 2006. She studied Sociol- ogy, Political Science, and Economics at the University of Konstanz, Germany. Th ere she received her doctorate in 1982 and her habilitation in 1989 from Freie Universität Berlin. Her current research interests include global and local networking for engendering development policy, civil society, transformation processes, women’s and peasant movements in Africa, engendering the embeddedness of economy, and the methodology of multi level fi eld research. Her publications are i.a. Negotiating development in Muslim societies: Gendered spaces and translocal connections (2008; co-edited with Petra Dannecker) and Die geschlechtsspezifi sche Einbettung der Ökonomie: Empirische Unter- suchungen über Entwicklungs- und Transformationsprozesse (2001; co- edited with Petra Dannecker). list of contributors xiii

Katharina Lange studied Social Anthropology at the University of Tübingen, Reed College (USA) and the University of Leipzig where she obtained her Ph.D. in 2002 with a thesis on approaches to the indigenisation of Arabic anthropology. Since then she has done fi eldwork on memory and representations of history in Syria, working on representations of tribal history and social change, as well as memories of the world war period. Currently she works as a research fellow at the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies in Berlin. Her publications include „Zurückholen, was uns gehört“: Indigenisierungstendenzen in der arabischen Ethnologie (2005).

Achim von Oppen is professor of African History at Bayreuth Uni- versity (Germany). He has worked and published widely about social and spatial history in Central and East Africa. Between 2001 and 2007, he has been deputy director of the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies (Berlin), where he has coordinated the research programme. Th ere, he was also involved in a collaborative research project on Muslim and Christian practices of conversion in 20th century Tanzania, while also teaching History of Africa at Humboldt University, Berlin. Among his publications is Terms of Trade and Terms of Trust: Th e History and Contexts of Pre-colonial Market Production around the Upper Zambezi and Kasai, c. 1790 to 1910 (1993).

Anja Peleikis is a senior research fellow at the Institute of Social Anthropology at Martin Luther University of Halle-Wittenberg, where she co-directs the project “Aft er the Survivors: Performing the Holo- caust and the Jewish Past in the New Yad Vashem Museum and in the Jewish Museum, Berlin.” She gained her Ph.D. degree from the Uni- versity of Bielefeld and led research projects at the Centre for Mod- ern Oriental Studies, Berlin and the Max Planck Institute for Social Anthropology, Halle/Saale. Her research interests include translocal migration, memory, tourism and the anthropology of museums. She has carried out fi eldwork on these topics in West Africa, Lebanon, Lithuania and Berlin/Jerusalem. She is author of the book Lebanese in Motion: Gender and the Making of a Translocal Village (2003).

Margrit Pernau is senior researcher at the Centre for the History of Emotions (Director Prof. Dr. Ute Frevert) at the Max Planck Institute for Human Development in Berlin. She studied History and Public Law at the University of Saarland and University of Heidelberg where she obtained her Ph.D. in 1991. 1997–2003 Margrit Pernau conducted xiv list of contributors research in Delhi on “Plural Identities of Muslims in Old-Delhi in the 19th century” and has been research fellow at the Social Science Research Centre Berlin and at the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies in Berlin. Beside the history of emotions her areas of interest include modern Indian history, the history of modern Islam, historical semantics, comparative studies, and translation studies. Among her publications is Bürger mit Turban: Muslime in Delhi im 19. Jahrhundert (2008).

Carine Pina-Guerassimoff holds a Ph.D. in Law and Economic Development Studies, is a sinologist and politologist. She is working on Chinese international migration policies and relations between migration and development. She is an affi liated fellow at the Laboratory SEDET (Société en Développement dans l’Espace et dans le Temps), CNRS-UMR 7135. University of Paris VII, actually researcher for and at UE/Equal Programme “Long March” on the migration process of Chinese women. Her publications include “Le renouvellement des perspectives transnationales de la Chine,” Critique Internationale 32 (2006), 39–52 and “Genre et réseaux migratoires: Jalons pour une approche institutionnaliste des nouvelles migrations chinoises,” Migra- tions-Société 18 (2006), 17–32.

Terence Ranger is emeritus professor of African Studies at the Uni- versity of Oxford. He has been working on southern Africa since 1957 focusing especially on the modern history of Zimbabwe. His ten mono- graphs and twenty edited collections have explored African resistance, the creation and consciousness of peasantries, the dynamics of African religion and its interaction with Christianity, landscape and its interaction with politics and society, violence and memory, ethnicity and ‘tradition’, epidemic and ideas. Since 1999 he has been working on Zimbabwean urban history and is completing Bulawayo Burning: Th e Social History of a Southern African City, 1893–1960. Th e publication that brought Terence Ranger fame also in non-africanist circles was Th e Invention of Tradition (1983; co-edited with Eric Hobsbawm).

Dietrich Reetz is research fellow at the Centre for Modern Oriental Studies and senior lecturer (Privatdozent) of Political Science at Freie Universität Berlin. His specialisation is international politics and modern history of Islam in South Asia with its global connections. He is currently co-ordinating a collaborative project on Muslims in Europe list of contributors xv and their countries of origin in Asia and Africa. His latest monograph is Islam in the Public Sphere: Religious Groups in India, 1900–1947 (2006).

Judith Scheele is a social anthropologist and post-doctoral research fellow at All Souls College, Oxford. Her doctoral research focussed on notions of knowledge, political legitimacy and community in Kaby- lia, a Berber-speaking area in north-eastern Algeria. Current research investigates trans-Saharan connections of all kinds, including legal and illegal trade, migration, and scholarly links, with particular emphasis on southern Algeria and northern Mali. She has conducted extensive fi eldwork in both countries. Her publications include Village Matters: Knowledge, Politics and Community in Kabylia (2006), and various related book chapters and articles.

Christoph Schumann is professor of Politics and Contemporary History of the Middle East at the University of Erlangen-Nürnberg, Germany. His publications include Radical Nationalism in Syria and Lebanon: Political Socialization and Elite Formation, 1930–1958 (2001 in German); From the Syrian Land to the States of Syria and Lebanon (2004; co-edited with Th omas Philipp); and Liberal Th ought in the Eastern Mediterranean: Late 19th century until the 1960s (2008; ed.).

Katja Werthmann is assistant professor at the Department of Anthro- pology and African Studies at the Johannes Gutenberg University of Mainz, Germany. She has done fi eldwork in Nigeria on Islam, gender segregation, and urban identity; and in Burkina Faso on land rights, development issues, interethnic relations, and informal gold mining. She is currently working on Islam in western Burkina Faso. Her most recent publications include “Islam on Both Sides: Religion and Local- ity in Western Burkina Faso,” in Dimensions of Locality: Th e Making and Remaking of Islamic Saints and their Places, eds. Samuli Schielke and Georg Stauth (2008), 125–147; “Working in a Boom-town: Female Perspectives on Gold-mining in Burkina Faso,” Resources Policy 34 (2009), 18–23; and Staatliche Herrschaft und kommunale Selbstverwal- tung in Afrika: Dezentralisierung in Kamerun (2008; co-edited with Gerald Schmitt).

LIST OF MAPS

1. Travel Destinations of Wodabee maagani-Vendors (Cartography: Elisabeth Boesen) ...... 38

2. People’s Republic of China’s Administrative Provinces (Cartography: Carine Pina-Guerassimoff ) ...... 60

3. East African Colonies (Kenya, Uganda, and Northern Rhodesia) and Tanganyika Territory, in Askari (July 25, 1946), 3 ...... 147

4. Indian Ocean, in Heshima (August 11, 1943), 7 ...... 150

5. Japanese and Allied Held Areas in the Pacifi c Ocean (Vectorised Map), in Heshima (June 27, 1945), 4 ...... 152

6. Pacifi c (Vectorised Map), in Heshima (June 20, 1945), 3 ... 153

7. Bay of Bengal (Andaman Islands), in Heshima (December 15, 1943), 3 ...... 154

8. Kabylia and Other Places Mentioned in the Text (Cartography: Judith Scheele) ...... 161

9. Principal Long-distance Caravan Routes in West Central Africa (1850–c. 1890), in Beatrix Heintze and Achim von Oppen, eds., Angola on the Move: Transport Routes, Communications and History, Frankfurt a.M.: Lembeck, 2008, p. 146 ...... 182

10. Th e Curonian Lagoon Region and the Position of Nida (Cartography: Jutta Turner, Max-Planck-Institut, Halle/Germany) ...... 231

NOTE ON TRANSLITERATION

Th is volume contains contributions quoting from a variety of non- European languages and scripts. As the authors also come from diff erent philological traditions, the editors decided aft er some deliberation to forsake the usual imposition of one coherent set of transliteration. We have tried to ensure, however, that each contribution is coherent in itself.

INTRODUCTION ‘TRANSLOCALITY’: AN APPROACH TO CONNECTION AND TRANSFER IN AREA STUDIES

Ulrike Freitag/Achim von Oppen1

“What”, asked the eminent historian of Africa, Frederick Cooper, a few years ago, “is the concept of globalization good for?”2 Cooper’s criticism of the concept does not argue with the quest to understand how diff erent parts of the world have been interconnected. However, he criticizes the lack of historical depth implicit in many uses of the term, and the oft en underlying assumption of a single process encompassing the whole world. Th is perspective, Cooper argues, obscures the very unevenness of a variety of processes which create cross-territorial linkages and fl ows. Th is vision also obfuscates that such processes go hand in glove with specifi c limitations to and blockages of such connections. Obviously, historians of global history have attempted to grapple with some of the shortcomings of globalisation theory. Th us, Janet Abu Lughod confronted the clearly eurocentric focus of world system theory, which implicitly still underlies much of globalisation theory. She argued that before the capitalist world system discussed by Wallerstein, there already existed an earlier, Islamic world system encompassing and linking much of the “old world” of Asia, Africa and Europe.3 More recently, global history has been understood as a history of entanglement and interconnectedness. Th is meant to break up both the limitations of nationalist historiographies as well as a historical

1 We thank Elisabeth Boesen, Katrin Bromber, Bettina Gräf, Sarah Jurkiewicz and Dietrich Reetz for their contribution and comments on this chapter. As it is the outfl ow of ZMO’s research programme, the chapter is a truly collective eff ort and the authors only take credit for summing up collective work and discussions. 2 Frederick Cooper, “What is the Concept of Globalization Good for? An African Historian’s Perspective,” African Aff airs 100 (2001), 189–213. 3 Immanuel Wallerstein, Th e Modern World System, 3 vol. (San Diego, 1974, 1980, 1989); Abu Lughod, Before European Hegemony: Th e World System A.D. 1250–1350 (Oxford, 1989). 2 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen meta-narrative of “global” developments.4 Th is approach—to be distinguished from “globalisation history”, which studies the emergence and transformations of connectedness on the global level5—has been elaborated on quite diff erent scales. A regionally limited but highly refi ned—if methodologically perhaps overly complex—variant is the concept of Histoire Croisée which was developed for the investigation of Franco-German relations in history, relating both to the history of events and to historical perceptions.6 On a larger and therefore less detailed scale, the “new imperial history”, infl uenced by postcolonial studies, builds on notions of cultural infl uences operating quite independently of the economic and political developments which used to be highlighted by conventional historiographies of empire and imperi- alism.7 Another approach to overcoming the monopolar and eurocentric vision of globalisation is the attempt to study global connections of specifi c historical actors as well as historical moments of global importance. Such global moments oft en sparked international networking as, for example, the Russo-Japanese war of 1905 or Wilson’s declaration of the right to self-determination.8 Such approaches have opened important new perspectives on entangled and/or shared histories. Moreover, they can, as the study of non-Western experiences of the World Wars illustrates, signifi cantly

4 Literature in this fi eld is abundant and cannot be reviewed here in detail. Useful surveys with abundant bibliographical detail can be found in Bruce Mazlish and Akira Iriye, eds., Th e Global History Reader (London, 2005), see also A.G. Hopkins, ed., Glo- balization in World History (New York, 2002). On entangled history, see Shalini Ran- deria, “Entangled Histories of Uneven Modernities: Civil Society, Caste Solidarities and the Post-Colonial State in India,” in Unraveling Ties, eds. Yehuada Elkana et al. (Frankfurt a.M., 2002), Sebastian Conrad and Shalini Randeria, “Einleitung: Geteilte Geschichte—Europa in einer postkolonialen Welt,” in Jenseits des Eurozentrismus, eds. idem (Frankfurt a.M., 2002), pp. 9–49 and Sebastian Conrad and Andreas Eckert, “Globalgeschichte, Globalisierung, Multiple Modernen,” in Globalgeschichte: Th eorien, Ansätze, Th emen, eds. idem and Ulrike Freitag (Frankfurt, 2007), pp. 7–49. 5 E.g. Jürgen Osterhammel and Niels P. Petersson, Globalization: A Short History (Princeton, 2005). 6 Michael Werner and Bénédicte Zimmermann, eds., De la comparaison à l’histoire croisée, (Le Genre humain) 42 (Paris, 2004), pp. 15–49. 7 For example Kathleen Wilson, ed., A New Imperial History: Culture, Identity and Modernity in Britain and the Empire, 1660–1840 (New York, 2004). 8 Erez Manela, “Dawn of a New Era: Th e ‘Wilsonian Moment’ in Colonial Contexts and the Transformation of World Order, 1917–1920,” in Competing Visions of World Order: Global Moments and Movements, 1880s–1930s, eds. Sebastian Cornad and Dominic Sachsenmaier (New York, 2007), pp. 121–149 and Rebecca E. Karl, “Creat- ing Asia: China in the World at the Beginning of the Twentieth Century,” American Historical Review 103 (1998), 1096–1118. introduction: ‘translocality’ 3 enhance our understanding of global social history.9 What they are less apt at doing, however, is to establish links between the multitude of connections and fl ows below the elite level which are encountered by historians, anthropologists, geographers or political scientists working on various regions of this world, past and present. To do so seems of particular relevance for those whose investigation focuses on regions outside ‘the West’ (or ‘the North’). Here, perhaps, it is less easy than in the Western context to relate connections between regions and places to the grand processes of ‘globalisation’ due to the assumed rootedness of these processes in ‘the North’. If, however, one takes seriously the claim to ‘global’ in global history, one will need to consider the role of actors, places and processes in those regions which are commonly not discussed in the context of ‘History’ but of ‘histories’ discussed by scholars of Asia, Africa and Latin America.10 Th is volume is an exercise in taking such a perspective from regions in Asia, Africa and the Middle East which have a long history of connections both within each of these regions as well as between them. Th is requires fi rstly a particular methodological sensorium for detect- ing connections beyond the ‘local’, which has been privileged in studies of the non-European world. Th ey present an important challenge for the area studies of those regions, which have long promoted localism and regional limitation while, at the same time, being methodologically so well equipped for in-depth empirical enquiry. Secondly, what is also needed is an intermediary concept which helps to better understand and conceptualise connections beyond the local which are, however, neither necessarily global in scale nor necessarily connected to global moments. What we want to off er here as a terminological approach towards such a concept is ‘translocality’. In the following, we understand ‘translocality’ both as a descriptive tool that seems to be more adapted to the specifi c empirical realities in Africa, Asia and the Middle East than related terms established with regard to the West, and as a perspective to conceptualise research on these realities.11 While only part of the contributions in this volume explicitly

9 Heike Liebau, Katrin Bromber, Katharina Lange, Dyala Hamzah, and Ravi Ahuja, eds., Th e World in World Wars: Experiences, Perceptions and Perspectives from Africa and Asia (Leiden, forthcoming). 10 Dipesh Chakrabarty, Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Th ought and Historical Diff erence (Princeton, NJ, 2000). 11 Th is understanding of ‘translocality’ has been elaborated through a series of research programmes at the Zentrum Moderner Orient (Berlin) funded by Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft , between 2000 and 2007. 4 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen refer to this term, all of them share the theoretical and methodological concerns expressed by it.12 Th is volume is organised in four sections, each of them combining a variety of diff erent regional and historical contexts under one particular theme. Each of them implicitly addresses one particular aspect of the ‘globalisation’ paradigm and off ers alternative perspectives which can be subsumed under ‘translocality’ as we understand it. ‘Marginal Mobilities’ (Section One) explores modes of movement and mobility by seemingly marginal, “local” actors which are oft en regarded as erratic, accidental, and hence at odds with mainstream globalisation. Despite the lack of attention, or even repressive intervention, by more dominant social actors, these mobilities can be seen to constitute signifi cant and lasting connections between particular places and regions. Section Two, ‘Spaces on the Move’, shows how very specifi c (rather than simply ‘global’) spaces and scales are created through marginal as well as non-marginal fl ows of peoples, goods and ideas, and how they change historically in accordance with a variety of internal and external developments. Th e complicated relationship between locality and translocal connectedness is the theme of Section Th ree. Its chapters show that localising tendencies are not opposed to but strongly rely on trans-local connections of sometimes even a global reach. Instead of producing inclusive, truly cosmopolitan cultures of place, however, these connections have oft en been translated into social exclusion and hierarchy. Th e fourth and last section of the book is dedicated to the discussion of a number of signifi cant notions of globality emanating from Asian and African contexts, notably shaped by Islam. Here it is argued that such notions cannot be understood, as they sometimes present themselves, as fundamentally diff erent from ‘Western’ ones; diff erent globalities should therefore rather be seen as ‘alternate’ to and intersecting with each other. As ‘translocality’ is used as a key to the common concerns of this book, this introduction needs to off er a more systematic discussion of this conceptual approach than the individual contributions can provide. As stated earlier, ‘translocality’ is used here to account better

12 Most contributions to this volume were originally presented and discussed at a conference on “Translocality: An Approach to Globalising Phenomena?”, held at Zentrum Moderner Orient in 2006. Th ey were selected for this volume as they help to illuminate the particular systematic aspects of translocality spelled out here. introduction: ‘translocality’ 5 for the diversity of Asian and African experiences and agency in the transformatory process oft en subsumed under the blanket term of globalisation. Th us, any attempt at defi ning translocality needs to relate it to kindred concepts such as locality, transnationalism and globalisation. As translocality very consciously attempts to transcend the elitist focus of much of global history, its contribution to a social history ‘from below’ is then discussed, before methodological considerations related to the application of the concept are presented. To illuminate these conceptual and methodological considerations, the diff erent sections of this volume and specifi c contributions will be referred to in the following discussion where appropriate.

Translocality as an Object of Enquiry and as a Research Perspective13

Th e notion of ‘translocality’ both as a tool to describe certain empirical phenomena, and as a perspective to conceptualise research on these phenomena, diff ers and, we would argue, is wider and theoretically more ambitious than the employment of the term by other authors who have spoken of ‘translocalities’ as specifi c areas or border zones with intense interaction.14 In the descriptive sense, we refer to translocality as the sum of phenomena which result from a multitude of circulations and transfers. It designates the outcome of concrete movements of people, goods, ideas and symbols which span spatial distances and cross boundaries, be they geographical, cultural or political. Trans- locality as a research perspective, in contrast, more generally aims at highlighting the fact that the interactions and connections between places, institutions, actors and concepts have far more diverse, and oft en even contradictory eff ects than is commonly assumed. Draw- ing on a number of related new conceptual approaches to this topic,

13 Th e following argument is based on Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen, “Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verfl echtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), http://hsozkult.geschichte.hu-berlin.de/forum/type=artikel&id=632 (accessed June 27, 2009). 14 Arjun Appadurai, “Sovereignty without Territoriality: Notes for a Postnational Geography,” in Th e Geography of Identity, ed. Patricia Jaeger (Ann Arbor, 1996), pp. 40–58. Appadurai’s use of translocality here approaches that of the non-place discussed above. Cf. Peter Mandaville, “Territory and Translocality: Discrepant Idioms of Political Identity,” Paper presented at the 41st Annual Convention of the International Studies Association, Los Angeles, March 14–18, 2000. 6 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen

‘translocality’ therefore proposes a more open and less linear view on the manifold ways in which the global world is constituted: through the trans-gression of boundaries between spaces of very diff erent scale and type as well as through the (re-) creation of ‘local’ distinctions between those spaces. As can be seen from the following chapters in this book, the perspective of translocality encourages empirical research of globalising processes in a number of important directions. Research about translocality, for instance, addresses connections and fl ows of people and goods, but also processes of cultural exchange and transfer, such as the notions of heritage discussed by Anja Peleikis, or of gender concepts and norms between local contexts and global discourses, as in the contribution by Gudrun Lachenmann. It also situates social actors in translocal and transnational networks as well as in the diff erent local contexts in which they operate. Th is is well exemplifi ed by the contributions to Section One of this volume which discuss the cases of the Woodabe nomadic women (Elisabeth Boesen), of Chinese immigrant women in France (Pina-Guerassimoff ) or workers in the mines of Burkina Faso (Katja Werthmann). Th ey also show, however, that translocality is no mere synonym for spatial mobility or cultural transfer.15 Th is becomes clear, for instance, in Katharina Lange’s chapter on the oft en very local experiences of Arab combatants in the World Wars. Rather, the term refers explicitly and critically to the local adaptation, re-structuring and limitation of translocal experiences in particular settings. Th us, it breaks with the tradition of studies of the ‘local’ as a self-contained unit which developed its inherent structures and events. Instead, it looks at the ‘local’ from the perspective of the aforementioned spatial movements. Such an approach might not surprise in the case of the mining camps in Burkina Faso. It appears perhaps more surprising in the case of cities which are studied not as microcosms of their own but from the vantage point of their integration into migratory networks. Th us, their spatial and administrative organisation is considered primarily from the perspective of migration, which opens a wide potential for innovative questioning.16

15 For the latter use of the term, see Stephen Greenblatt, “Culture,” in Critical Terms for Literary Study, eds. Frank Lentricchia and Th omas McLaughlin (Chicago, 1995) (1st ed. 1990), pp. 225–232. 16 See the forthcoming volume by Ulrike Freitag, Malte Fuhrmann, Nora Lafi and Florian Riedler, Migrations and Urban Government in the Ottoman Empire. See also, introduction: ‘translocality’ 7

Th e above examples further point to one important aspect of research on translocality, namely the processes of the establishment and institutionalisation of cultural, social and political structures resulting from translocal practices. Th ese processes are interpreted as attempts by the actors to develop or conserve specifi c patterns or models of action and communication, i.e. a certain order, in an overall situation which is characterised by mobility, fl ows and transition. However, it needs to be noted that connectedness does not necessarily result in new order, institutionalisation, socio-economic or political development. Rather, it seems that translocality is oft en marked by transient, non-permanent and unordered spaces. Th is can be noted in border zones such as refugee camps, it can also be observed among nomads such as the Wodaabe. Spaces which are characterised by the transit of large numbers of people, such as airports and shopping malls, have been conceptualised as “non-places”.17 It might be worthwhile to consider the extension of this concept to a wider variety of transient structures as well. An historical example could be the quarantine stations founded in 19th century attempts at the international control of epidemics, while the camps of migrant labourers in Algeria18 or on the outskirts of Spanish cities19 are more recent illustrations of this point. Th e idea that translocality fi nds expression in spaces of its own has a prominent example in the case of the Indian Ocean. Here, recent research has conceived the notion of a seascape, i.e. a space the shape of which was developed through concrete interactions, rather than geographical determinism (such as “areas adjacent to the Indian Ocean”).20 A similar translocal space (a desertscape, as it were) is constituted

Florian Riedler, “Public People: Seasonal Work Migrants in Nineteenth Century Istanbul,” in Public Istanbul: Spaces and Spheres of the Urban, eds. F. Eckardt and K. Wildner (Bielefeld, 2008), pp. 233–53; Malte Fuhrmann and Lars Amenda, Hafen- städte: Mobilität, Migration, Globalisierung, special issue of Comparativ—Zeitschrift für Globalgeschichte und vergleichende Gesellschaft sgeschichte 17, 2 (2007); Nelida Fuc- caro, “Understanding the Urban History of Bahrain,” Journal of Critical Studies of the Middle East (Critique) 17, 2 (2000), 49–81. 17 Marc Augé, Non-places: Introduction to an Anthropology of Supermodernity, trans. John Howe (London, 1995). 18 See the project on “Th e Emergence of New Translocal Labor Markets in Algeria” by Dalila Nadi at ZMO (2006–2008). 19 See the ongoing research project “Migration als postkoloniale Praxis: Lebens- geschichte und Gesellschaft stheorie aus der afrikanisch-europäischen Grenzzone” by Knut Graw at ZMO. 20 Jan-Georg Deutsch and Brigitte Reinwald, eds., Space on the Move: Transformations of the Indian Ocean Seascape in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Century (Berlin, 2002). 8 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen by transsaharan networks which have attracted another set of studies in recent years. With regard to Africa, these investigations have also highlighted the need to diff erentiate patterns of translocality north and south of the Sahara.21 Th ese refl ect the diff erent political and economic relations and interests of the populations, as well as the diff erent layers of migration from slavery to legal and illegal migration, which produce diff erent spaces of economic and cultural exchange. In this book, the chapters contained in Section Two exemplify some of the dimensions and ramifi cations of such a dynamic understanding of geographical space. Th us, Bromber’s contribution on visual representations of the Indian Ocean during World War II takes up the notion of seascape. Th e dynamics of migration by Kabylian villagers in Algeria (Judith Scheele) illustrates the plurality of spaces and scales created by translocal connections. Th e construction and representation of kinship relations among precolonial rulers in Central Africa (Beatrix Heintze) illustrate the shift ing scales of political spaces. Other studies have pursued the overlapping of religious spheres created by the advance of both Islam and Christianity in modern East Africa.22 Th ese works provide ample evidence not only of a widening of spatial horizons and of a transgression of spatial boundaries, but of the establishment of new frontiers, diff erentiations and regulations which impose new limitations and exclusions. Th us, translocal processes can lead to the emergence of widely disparaging experiences and practices of space—a diff erentiation which would hardly emerge if one were to use the far wider label of ‘globalisation’. Th e perspective of translocality, it should have become clear by now, focuses neither exclusively on movement, broadly conceived, nor on a particular order, real or imagined. Rather, it investigates the tensions between movement and order. In comparison to the discussions under the paradigm of globalisation, which emphasise mobility, fl ows and the transgression of boundaries, translocality conceptually addresses the attempts to cope with transgression and with the need for localizing some kind of order. Th is aspect comes out particularly well, for instance, in Lachenmann’s contribution, in which she avoids both

21 Laurence Marfaing and Steff en Wippel, eds., Relations transsahariennes aux 20ième et 21ième siècles: Réorganisations et revitalisations d’un espace transrégional (Paris, 2004). 22 See the project on “Islamic Missions in the Multireligious Context of East Africa” by Chanfi Ahmed, Achim von Oppen and Tabea Scharrer at ZMO (2004–2007). introduction: ‘translocality’ 9 a linear consideration of mobility as well as a priori value judgements about the pros and cons of movement and mobility. We now turn to several related concepts or paradigms which need to be mentioned as referents for our perspective of translocality.

Transcending the Local

Th e term ‘translocality’ points out that, in the opinion of the authors of this volume, the notion of the ‘local’ remains a critical one. Criti- cism of the earlier view of places, communities and cultures as bounded and fi xed localities sparked numerous debates.23 It has become mostly accepted by now that locality is “produced” socially and culturally, oft en in contexts of heightened mobility of diff erent scale, and of transgression of boundaries, which were already noted to be central to translocal perspectives on localities.24 However, bounded identities of place or region and related senses of belonging are oft en fuelled by increased mobility of people and transfers of goods, values and discourses. Section Th ree of this book discusses how localising responses to translocality may assume very diff erent forms or ‘modes’ in diff erent situations. One kind of response, for instance, is an emphasis on the essence of locality, notably place and land, to which notions of ‘authochtony’ are becoming attached. While Peter Geschiere’s contribution theorises this process with special reference to Africa, Anja Peleikis shows the contributions of a variety of actors from diff erent places to the making of ‘local’ heritage in a Lithuanian village. Her chapter not only demonstrates the similarities of such processes in very diff erent global peripheries, and thus introduces a crucial comparative perspective in a volume otherwise centring on non-Euro- pean developments. It also illustrates how the distance of actors from

23 Eric Wolf, “Inventing Society,” American Ethnologist 15 (1988), 752–761; Marc Augé, Orte und Nicht-Orte: Vorüberlegungen zu einer Ethnologie der Einsamkeit (Frankfurt a.M., 1994); George Marcus, “Ethnography in/of the World System: Th e Emergence of Multi-Sited Ethnography,” Annual Review of Anthropology 24 (1995), 95–117; Akhil Gupta and James Ferguson, “Discipline and Practice: ‘Th e Field’ as Site, Method and Location in Anthropology,” in Anthropological Locations: Boundaries and Grounds of a Field Science, ed. idem (Berkeley, 1997), pp. 1–46. 24 Arjun Appadurai, “Th e Production of Locality,” in Modernity at Large: Cul- tural Dimensions of Globalization, ed. idem, Public Worlds 1 (Minneapolis, 1996), pp. 178–199. 10 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen a certain locality is not only a spatial but also a temporal category—in other words, somebody who returns to a place aft er an absence does so as a changed person returning to a changed place. In consequence, this necessitates a spiral conception of the production and reconfi guration of spaces. Peleikis’ study of developments in Lithuania thus builds conceptually on work relating to Lebanese migrants in West Africa and their links to their village or origin.25 Locality can also become associated with an outdated past that needs to be transcended, oft en in the name of a newly found globality. isTh has also been demonstrated in research on conversion or on global Islamic reform movements.26 Margrit Pernau’s chapter approaches the issue of locality equally from a global perspective: she describes how Indian Muslims eff ectively localised a headgear that was conceived to be a symbol of Islamic unity. Finally, Terence Ranger’s chapter restores the African city, or more precisely African urban dwellers, to their place in history by framing them in the same terms as urbanites elsewhere. By describing them as “simultaneously global and local people”, he recognises their translocal position, against attempts to see them as a priori alien to an urban milieu. Frontiers as well as urban contexts oft en provide privileged spaces for the manifestation of translocality. Recent discussions about cosmopolitanism seem to point to a related, and interesting, framework.27 However, a closer investigation reveals cosmopolitanism to be a concept fraught with strong normative judgments, be they positive, as

25 Anja Peleikis, Lebanese in Motion: Gender and the Making of a Translocal Village (Bielefeld, 2003). 26 Chanfi Ahmed, Les conversions à l’Islam fondamentaliste en Afrique et au sud du Sahara: Le cas de la Tanzanie et du Kenya (Paris, 2008). 27 See the contributions in Steven Vertovec and Robin Cohen, eds., Conceiving Cosmopolitanism: Th eory, Context, and Practice (Oxford, 2002); Ulrich Beck, “Th e Cosmopolitan Perspective: Sociology in the Second Age of Modernity,” pp. 61–85; Ayşe Çağlar, “Media Corporatism and Cosmopolitanism,” pp. 180–190; and also Sami Zubaida, “Cosmopolitanism and the Middle East,” in Cosmopolitanism, Identity and Authenticity in the Middle East, ed. Roel Meijer (Surrey, 1999), pp. 15–33; Th omas Turino, Nationalists, Cosmopolitans, and Popular Music in Zimbabwe (Chicago, 2000); Werner Schiff auer, “Cosmopolitans are Cosmopolitans: On the Relevance of Local Identifi cation in Globalizing Society,” in Worlds on the Move, eds. J. Friedman and Shalini Randeria (London, 2004), pp. 91–101; Henk Driessen, “Mediterranean Port Cities: Cosmopolitanism Reconsidered,” History and Anthropology 16, 1 (2005), 129–141(13), as well as with specifi c reference to port cities the contributions in Lars Amenda and Malte Fuhrmann, eds., Hafenstädte: Mobilität, Migration, Globalisierung, special issue of Comparativ 17, 2 (2007). introduction: ‘translocality’ 11 in the current context of globalisation, or negative, as in the ages of nationalism, fascism and socialism.28 Th is ideological baggage, mainly developed in the European Age of Enlightenment and—later—the emergence of nation states opposed to groups and individuals with strong links and loyalties beyond the borders—makes the transmission of the concept to non-Western societies particularly problematic. Moreover, although the concept of cosmopolitanism was partly developed with reference to the Ottoman Empire,29 comparable concepts did not emerge outside the specifi c European context. It is all the more interesting that in its drive to mobilise African soldiers for out of area missions during World War II, Britain propagated the educated, travelling and modern—i.e. in all but name cosmopolitan—African soldier as (almost) equivalent to the British, who were otherwise portrayed as members of a superior colonial race compared to Africans with a limited and localised outlook.

Translocality and Transnationalism

Th e choice of the term ‘translocality’, rather than the more common ‘transnationalism’, is not the result of a fashionable neglect of the nation-state in the age of globalisation. Nor does it refl ect a tendency to privilege places or regions over states. Rather, it emerged as a consequence of the study of Asia, Africa and the Middle East. Th e so- called nation-states of these regions were usually created in the 20th century, and correspond even less to “imagined (national) communities” (Anderson) than this might be the case in Europe. Many authors tend to merge ‘translocality’ and ‘transnationality’, notably when dealing with modern political realities.30 Th is is partly due to disciplinary

28 For contributions with strongly positive normativity, see Beck, “Th e Cosmopoli- tan Perspective,” p. 414 and Kwame Anthony Appiah, Cosmopolitanism: Ethics in a World of Strangers (New York, 2006). For a discussion of nationalism and cosmopolitanism see Friedrich Meinecke, Cosmopolitanism and the National State (Princeton, 1970) and Brett Bowden, “Nationalism and Cosmopolitanism: Irreconcilable Diff erences or Possible Bedfellows?” National Identities 5 (2003), 235–249, where the potential dangers of both paradigms are discussed. 29 Linda T. Darling, “Ottoman Politics through British Eyes: Paul Rycaut’s Th e Present State of the Ottoman Empire,” Journal of World History 5 (1994), 71–97. 30 Peter Mandaville, Transnational Muslim Politics: Reimagining the Umma (Lon- don, 2001) and idem, “Territory and Translocality: Discrepant Idioms of Political Identity,” Paper presented at the 41st Annual Convention of the International Studies 12 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen conventions, notably among political scientists who usually deal with present-day states. However, it can also be found among historians.31 Even when used for Europe, where nation-states were formed earlier than in the regions privileged in this collection, the term ‘transnationalism’ can be highly problematic. It not only presupposes the existence of nation-states but also privileges the perspective of national elites. What, for example, of the internal cultural boundaries in France between Paris and the regions which were rather forcefully subdued in the 19th century and nevertheless reappeared in the context of a “Europe of the Regions” in the late 20th?32 In contrast, links between Paris and Berlin sometimes seem to be of more importance than those of the capitals to their respective hinterlands. Th ere is of course the rather obvious observation that nation-building processes outside Europe did not only occur later, but have proven to be even more precarious. Apart from this, however, translocality also emphatically emphasises the fact that political boundaries might be one of many potentially signifi cant boundaries for the processes at stake. Th is is not to deny the states’ well recognised means of regulation. Nevertheless, the concept of translocality assumes a multitude of possible boundaries which might be transgressed, including but not limiting itself to political ones, thus recognising the inability even of modern states to assume, regulate and control movement, and account- ing for the agency of a multitude of diff erent actors. As outlined above, it takes many diff erent possible spatial orders as its starting point, and most notably pays close attention to the notions of the relevant historical and present actors. Transnationalism in this perspective appears more as a special case of translocality than as its equivalent. Th e interaction between ‘transnational’ and other crosscutting relationships is addressed in a number of contributions to this volume, e.g. those by Scheele, Geschiere and Peleikis.

Association, Los Angeles, March 14–18, 2000; John R. Bowen, “Islam in/of France: Dilemmas of Translocality,” Paper presented at the 13th International Conference of Europeanists, Chicago, March 14–16, 2002. 31 See the very title of the web portal geschichte.transnational (http://geschichte- transnational.clio-online.net/), but also Jürgen Osterhammel, “Transnationale Gesell- schaft sgeschichte: Erweiterung oder Alternative?” Geschichte und Gesellschaft 27 (2001), 464–479, Sebastian Conrad and Jürgen Osterhammel, Das Kaiserreich transnational (Göttingen, 2004). 32 For a description of this process, see Eugen Weber, Peasants into Frenchmen: Th e Modernization of Rural France, 1870–1914 (Stanford, 1976). introduction: ‘translocality’ 13

Translocality and Globalisation

Our emphatic distinction between translocality and globalisation does not exclude, of course, that the two concepts cannot be tested for their connections. Like transnationalism, globalisation can be regarded as one form of translocality. A privileged site of investigation are translocal networks which form part of processes which can be squarely placed in the context of the economic and political processes commonly regarded as globalisation since the age of empire. Th us, networks of merchants or migratory movements inspired by imperial expansion fall squarely into an investigation of both translocality and globalisation.33 In the Muslim world, scholarly networks have become an important link between people living in diff erent regions and continents. Sometimes, these networks served to strengthen the ties of diasporic communities across continental divides, as in the case of the South Yemeni Hadhramis or the Indian Ismailis.34 In other instances, translocal networks of learning or more formal institutions such as Sufi orders have established far-reaching connections.35 Nowadays, their cross-cutting role is oft en taken by the new movements described

33 See, for example, Ulrike Freitag, Indian Ocean Migrants and State Formation in Hadhramaut (Leiden, 2003); Ravi Ahuja, “Mobility and Containment: Th e Voy- ages of South Asian Seamen, c. 1900–1960,” International Review of Social History 51 (2007), 111–141; Ulrike Freitag, “Inter-Oceanic Migrations from an Indian Ocean Perspective,” in Connecting Seas and Connected Ocean Rims, eds. Marcel van der Lin- den, Dirk Hoerder, and Gisela Mettele (Leiden, forthcoming); Edward Simpson and Kai Kresse, eds., Struggling with History: Islam and Cosmopolitanism in the Western Indian Ocean (London, 2007). 34 Freitag, Indian Ocean Migrants; Engseng Ho, Th e Graves of Tarim: Genealogy and Mobility across the Indian Ocean (Berkeley, 2006); Christine Dobbin, Asian Entre- preneurial Minorities: Conjoint Communities in the Making of the World-Economy, 1570–1940 (Richmond, 1996); J.C. Penrad, “La présence isma’ilienne en Afrique de l’est: Note sur l’histoire commerciale et l’organisation communautaire,” in Marchands et hommes d’aff aires asiatiques dans l’Océan Indien et la Mer de Chine 13e–20e siècles, eds. Denys Lombard and Jean Aubin (Paris, 1988), pp. 221–236. 35 For scholarly networks, cf. Michael F. Laff an, Islamic Nationhood and Colonial Indonesia (London, 2003); Ahmed Chanfi , “Entre Da’wa et Diplomatie: Al-Azhar et l’Afrique au Sud du Sahara d’après la revue Madjallat al-Azhar dans les années 1960 et 1970,” Islam et Sociétés au Sud du Sahara 14–15 (2000–2001), 57–80; for Sufi orders, e.g. Rex S. O’Fahey, Enigmatic Saint: Ahmad Ibn Idris and the Idrisi Tradition (Lon- don, 1990), for modern movements see Dietrich Reetz, “Th e ‘Faith Bureaucracy’ of the Tablighi Jama‘at: An Insight into their System of Self-Organisation (Intizam),” in Colonialism, Modernity, and Religious Identities: Religious Reform Movements in South Asia, ed. Gwilym Beckerlegge (Oxford, 2008), pp. 98–124; Marloes Janson, “Roaming about for God’s Sake: Th e Upsurge of the Tabligh Jama‘at in eTh Gambia,” Journal of Religion in Africa 35, 4 (2005), 450–481 and the contributions in Dietrich Reetz and 14 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen by Dietrich Reetz in this volume which promote specifi c theological and/or ideological and political positions. While this phenomenon has led John Voll to assume the existence of a religiously and culturally based “Muslim world system”, Engseng Ho has, perhaps more convincingly, shown how a counter narrative of globality can emerge in such circles.36 Th e emergence of alternate globalities, i.e. of diff erent types of globalising processes which are oft en competing with each other and, commonly, with ‘the West’, is the focus of the chapters in Section Four. It focusses on processes which either emanate from non-West- ern countries (Dietrich Reetz) or which demonstrate the interaction between non-Western and Western societies (Gudrun Lachenmann and Christoph Schumann). Th is can occur on a large scale, as in the case of the South Asian religious movements studied by Dietrich Reetz, however, it might also occur on the micro level. At the discursive level, some of the movements studied here can be described as ‘alternate’, in the sense of seeing themselves in opposition to western-led globalisation while adopting an increasingly global outreach of their own. Even where they promote notions which are discussed globally—as in the case of the concepts of gender described by Lachenmann—they need to be careful not to be associated too closely with the West in order not to lose their credibility in a world where ‘the West’ is oft en perceived as a cultural and political challenge or even threat.37 A key resource for present-day globalising actors of any denomination are new media of mass communication that are capable of operating across political and geographical boundaries. For most inhabitants of the world, globality is very much a mediated experience.38 Where in earlier times legal opinions were demanded over long distances only in cases of serious dispute, and obtained through the sending of letters which sometimes took months to arrive, websites such as the web- portal Islam.Online.net, supported by the so-called global muft i Yusuf

Bettina Dennerlein, eds., South-South Linkages in Islam, special issue of Contemporary Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East 27, 1 (2007). 36 John Voll, “Islam as a Special World System,” Journal of World History 5, 2 (1994), 213–226; Engseng Ho, “Empire through Diasporic Eyes: A View from the Other Boat,” Comparative Studies in Society and History 46 (2004), 210–246. 37 Cf. Henner Fürtig, Abgrenzung und Aneignung in der Globalisierung: Asien, Afrika und Europa seit dem 18. Jahrhundert. Ein Arbeitsbericht (Berlin, 2001). 38 See Ulf Hannerz, “Media and the World as a Single Place,” in idem, Foreign News (Chicago, 2004), pp. 15–38. introduction: ‘translocality’ 15 al-Qaradawi, have turned the process into a matter of a few hours or days at most.39 In recent years the mobilising power of internationally operating media has been recognized.40 Th e mobilisation following Salman Rushdie’s publication of the Satanic Verses (1988) or the controversy about the publication of carricatures of the Muslim Prophet Muhammad in Denmark (2005–2006) provide only the most striking illustrations of how ‘alternate’ globalities can be mobilised and actualised.41 In most translocal cases, however, media play a far less dramatic, if not less formative role. Christoph Schumann’s chapter shows how, over the past few decades, the importance of such media—in his case study the Turkish press in Germany—has contributed to and accompanied the process of the transformation of temporary Turkish immigrants into Germany into a community distinct both from German and Turkish majority societies. Indeed, globalisation and new technologies of communication and transport have enabled groups such as the ‘Germano-Turks’ to act as brokers of knowledge in all directions— among themselves, with regard to the societies they inhabit and with the ones they originate from. Th us, the press as well as other translocal media such as radio, satellite television and most recently the internet are now a crucial factor in the generation and reproduction of shared identities and multiple claims for membership in an increasingly globalised world. Schumann’s chapter raises the question as to what extent they actually help to collapse boundaries of time/space, as well as of geo-political, national and territorial spaces. Do they create translocal spaces that represent a terrain of its own, with their own modes of inclusion and exclusion, and can we even begin to talk about

39 For the earlier practice, see Nico Kaptein, ed. and introd., Th e Muhimmât al- Nafâ’is: A Bilingual Meccan Fatwa Collection for Indonesian Muslims from the End of the Nineteenth Century (Jakarta, 1997), for the latter, Bettina Gräf, “IslamOnline.net: Independent, Interactive, Popular,” Arab Media and Society (January 2008), http:// www.arabmediasociety.com/?article=576 (accessed November 10, 2008). 40 Birgit Meyer and Annelies Moors, eds., Religion, Media, and the Public Sphere (Bloomington, 2006); Naomi Sakr, Satellite Realms: Transnational Television, Glo- balization and the Middle East (London, 2001) and idem, Arab Television Today (London, 2007). 41 See Anne Schönfeld, Islamdebatten in der deutschen Öff entlichkeit (unpubl. MA thesis, Freie Universität Berlin, 2008); Farish A. Noor and Sophie Lemiere, “Charting the New Jihadi-scape of Political Islam: Th e Pan-ASEAN Reaction to the ‘Muhammad Cartoon Controversy’ of 2005–2006 and its Mediatic Dimension,” Paper presented at “Translocality: An Approach to a Globalising Phenomen?” Tenth Anniversary Con- ference of Zentrum Moderner Orient (ZMO), Berlin, September 26–28, 2006. 16 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen mediated identities as a distinct analytical category? Many Muslims, at any rate, have begun to place fresh emphasis on translocal connectivity and globalised concepts of belonging at diff erent scales—from ethnicity and citizenship up to the umma—in their own discourses and politics.

Th e Contribution of Translocality to Global Social History

As the preceding development of the concept of translocality has shown, we consider it to be a suitable tool to grapple with a variety of cross-territorial linkages and fl ows, as well as with the specifi c limitations to such connections. It thus contributes to a better understanding of a multitude of diff erent processes which—in their overall addition—constitute a global web of layers of connectedness. Obviously, not all the diff erent aspects of this process are relevant to social history in the more conventional sense. Th is impression changes, however, once the very foundations of social history are understood to be constituted by translocal processes. Th e above discussion of cities and migration is a case in point. Pina-Guerassimoff illustrates not only the link between local situations in China and France and Chinese women’s decision to migrate. By discussing working life in Paris through the lens of the Chinese immigrants, a social milieu as well as strategies for economic and social advancement in a precarious social situation become visible which more conventional social history might not even touch. Th e very fabric of cities not only in their socio-economic, but even their physical set-up is questioned by urban street camps and the ostentative foreignness of the Woodabe women in Burkina Faso investigated by Elisabeth Boesen. Th e investigation of such translocal practices needs to be the fi rst step- ping stone for an exploration aiming at identifying what has been called the “new proletariat”.42 It may not only be the lack of freedom to dispose of one’s labour, the absence of industrial employment, and the need to consider families and households as the primordial units of analysis, but also conditions of precariousness and informality which shape the experience of many involved in translocal migration. In addition, the questions relating to translocal identities and consciousness shaped by

42 Marcel van der Linden, Global Labour History: Th e IISH Approach (Amsterdam, 2002), http://www.iisg.nl/publications/globlab.pdf (accessed October 26, 2008), p. 7f. and idem, Workers of the World: Essays toward a Global Labor History (Leiden, 2008). introduction: ‘translocality’ 17 media, so pertinently discussed by Christoph Schumann, also need to be considered when social actions are to be understood properly. Finally, global social history investigates transnational modes of labour control. However, of equal interest might be the translocal negotiation of international norms relevant to labour organisation. Lachenmann’s discussion of concepts of gender in translocal contexts not only contributes to this issue, but also raises important questions pertinent to other contexts where international norms are localised, namely to the respective and intricate processes of negotiation at all levels relevant for the generation, dissemination and application of such norms. Her contribution shows how only a close reading of interaction at a variety of levels explains the genesis and regional variations of such norms. Th e above are only some of the most pertinent contributions which a concept of translocality can make to global history. It demands attention to concrete processes and networks, rather than abstract local processes. We thus hope that this volume will contribute to the advancement of global social history, but also to a diff erentiation of developments commonly lumped together as ‘globalisation’.

Methodological Considerations for Research on Translocality

While the above discussion argues for a privileging of the concept of translocality for research on processes of spatial connectedness, such an approach has, however, a number of important methodological preconditions. Many of these should have become visible in the above discussion and will be exemplifi ed further in the following chapters. Still, they deserve more explicit mention. Without claim to comprehensiveness in what is and—we would argue—by its very nature must be an approach encompassing various disciplines and regional expertises, we wish to conclude this introduction by raising three specifi c types of refl exivity which seem to be needed for a translocality perspective. A fi rst important methodological impulse in the fi eld of history doubt- lessly emanates from the already mentioned approach of Histoire Croi- sée.43 In many ways it follows what has been postulated in discussions

43 See note 4 and also Michael Werner and Bénédicte Zimmermann, “Beyond Comparison: Histoire Croisée and the Challenge of Refl exivity,” History and Th eory 45 (2006), 30–50. 18 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen of social and cultural anthropology, namely that research into cross- border processes has to refl ect the plurality of perspectives related to the various locations, and should confront these with each other.44 Th is need for a multiperspectivity concerns, fi rst of all, the perspectives of the sources and historical or contemporary actors—be they written or oral. To refl ect the polysemy of the historical situation seems particularly relevant in historical contexts where actors come from widely diff ering semantic and symbolic contexts.45 Such contexts seem to be particularly numerous in the modern history of encounters between ‘Southern’ and ‘Northern’ actors. Consequently, in cases where the transfer of knowledge and the formation of concepts of reform are concerned, specifi c attention to semantics is necessary. Lachenmann’s discussion of the connotations attached to terms such as ‘feminism’ or ‘gender’ in diff erent regional contexts serves to elucidate this point. Similarly, concepts such as ‘secular’, ‘modern’ or ‘reform’ require as careful a semantic context analysis as do sartorial codes, as is so aptly demonstrated by Margrit Pernau in her article. Th e need for refl exivity concerns, on a basic level, the categories used for analysis, which need to be refl ected in their temporal and spatial boundedness.46 Th e ‘crossing’ of such bounded perspectives also requires close attention to the role, position and concepts of the observer. Marcus has pointed to the “circumstantial activism” which may result in the researcher’s involvement due to manifold transgres- sions of boundaries, the formation of a multitude of relations and the need for regular repositioning, all resulting from the requirements of multisited ethnography.47 Th e close cooperation with partners from ‘the fi eld’, or, if possible, the joint conduct of research particularly refl ected upon in Lachenmann’s contribution, adds to this need, but also helps to include this refl exivity in every step of the research process. A second central demand which has been alluded to a number of times in this introduction is again owed to the proponents of Histoire Croisée. It concerns the need for the systematic linking of diff erent

44 Cf. James Cliff ord, ed., Routes: Travel & Translation in the Late 20th Century (Cambridge, 1997), pp. 299–347. 45 E.g. Ulrike Freitag, “Der Orientalist und der Muft i: Gelehrtenbeziehungen im Mekka des 19. Jahrhunderts,” Die Welt des Islams 43, 1 (2003), 37–60. 46 Philipp Sarasin, “Diskurstheorie und Geschichtswissenschaft ,” in Handbuch Sozi- alwissenschaft liche Diskursanalyse, 1 (Opladen 2001), pp. 53–79. 47 Marcus, “Ethnography in/of the World-System.” introduction: ‘translocality’ 19 scales, both at the level of observation and at that of analysis. Th is jeu d’échelles (Revel) also permits us to see ‘local’ and ‘global’ not as two diff ering poles but rather as the intersection of connections and horizons of action and perspective of very diff erent reaches. A translocal perspective usually requires multi-sited fi eldwork or, as Boesen has practised in her work with the Woodabe, mobile fi eldwork. Th is not only infl uences the position of the researchers and has methodological implications for ‘participant observation’, but adds to the need for refl exivity on a variety of levels both on the part of the researcher and those observed by him.48 In general, the study of ‘shift ing locations’ instead of ‘bounded fi elds’ requires a greater ex-fl ibility by the researcher and a greater openness for a variety of methods.49 Th is leads to a third level of refl exivity in translocal research, namely a more systematic refl ection on the methods and concepts in the social sciences and humanities that have to be adapted across disciplinary boundaries. Th is need for a refl ective interdisciplinarity most prominently concerns History, Anthropology, Human Geography and Economics. Th at multisitedness is not just a problem of anthropologists and sociologists, but concerns historians as well becomes clear once we approach Asian or African history. Once historians decide to give up their exclusive reliance on colonial archives and to ‘cross’ that perspective with local views, they fi nd themselves oft en enough forced to embark on veritable fi eldwork in the quest for local sources, which are not necessarily as neatly preserved in national archives as students of European history would expect. Th ey thus need to ‘create’ their ‘archives’ through seeking access to private papers and recording oral history. In practice, this frequently leads to a rapprochement of the approaches used by historians and anthropologists.50 It might go without saying, and is illustrated by a number of contributions to this volume, most notably perhaps by those by Scheele, Heintze and Pina-Guerassimoff , that the concept of ‘network’ enjoys a particularly prominent position in the research on translocality. While

48 On multi-sited fi eldwork and its implications see Cliff ord, Routes, pp. 52–91, Gupta and Ferguson, “Discipline and Practice” and David Parkin, “Fieldwork Unfold- ing,” in Anthropologists in a Wider World, eds. Paul Dresch, Wendy James and David Parkin (New York, 2000), pp. 259–273. 49 Gupta and Ferguson, “Discipline and Practice.” 50 Baz Lecoq, “Fieldwork ain’t always Fun: Public and Hidden Discourse on Field- work,” History in Africa—A Journal of Method 39 (2002), 272–283. 20 ulrike freitag/achim von oppen strictly empirical and analytical network analysis based on quantitative data is oft en well nigh impossible as such data oft en simply cannot be obtained, a looser, qualitative and metaphorical approach to network analysis is highly valuable for the understanding and description of translocal connectedness. Usually, qualitative network analysis needs to be combined with a host of diff erent methods and approaches to yield insights about the quality of relations across boundaries.51 In conclusion, it can be noted that ‘translocality’ provides a useful conceptual perspective for multi-range analysis which allows to bridge the gap between approaches in both anthropology and history that focus on either the ‘local’ or the ‘global’ or on an assumed polar- ity between the two. For the disciplines of history, political science and economy, most notably, this means that they have to widen their scope not merely geographically. Th ey cannot simply write a kind of broadened history of expansion, a story of globalising markets and modernising societies and politics, but must question the linearity and limitation of established perspectives and thus of some basic tenets of their disciplines, both conceptually and methodologically. Today, as global phenomena and ‘globalisation’ dominate the agenda, ‘translocality’ redirects our attention to the fact that this is a much more complex and contradictory process than is oft en assumed. eTh dialectics of movement and institutionalisation, of transfer and rejection need to be given special attention, in order to avoid a simplistic and teleological account of ever-increasing ‘integration’. Th e debate on new types of border-drawing and distancing provides an important corrective to this trend.52 Th e global world consists of multiple spaces and connections. Th ese partly overlap with, partly counteract each other.53 Such multiplicity and contradictions are to be found not only in the ‘North’, but perhaps even more in the ‘South’. Translocality

51 Roman Loimeier, Die islamische Welt als Netzwerk: Möglichkeiten und Gren- zen des Netzwerkansatzes im islamischen Kontext (Würzburg, 2000), notably article by Cilja Harders, “Dimensionen des Netwerkansatzes: Einführende theoretische Überlegungen,” pp. 17–51. 52 See James Ferguson, “Of Mimicry and Membership: Africans and the ‘New World’ Society,” Cultural Anthropology 17, 4 (2002), 551–569 with his criticism of Charles Piot, Remotely Global: Village Modernity in West Africa (Chicago, 1999). Cf. Ho, “Empire through Diasporic Eyes.” 53 Michael Mann, “Globalizations: An Introduction to the Spatial and Structural Networks of Globality,” (2000), www.sscnet.ucla.edu/03F/soc197h-1/Globalizations. htm (accessed October 8, 2008); Beck, “Th e Cosmopolitan Perspective.” introduction: ‘translocality’ 21 encompasses a variety of truly multipolar processes, and the following chapters provide compelling evidence of this. To “provincialise Europe” (Chakrabarty) by taking Asia, the Middle East and Africa as their vantage points for global processes is both an initial concern and a result of these studies.

PART ONE

MARGINAL MOBILITIES

WODAABE WOMEN AND THE OUTSIDE WORLD

Elisabeth Boesen Université du Luxembourg

Migration and Female Sedentarity

Interest in female migration has grown steadily in the last few decades. Today we dispose of a signifi cant number of studies on female immigration in Europe and North America and on the situation of mobile women in other parts of the world, e.g. West Africa.1 Th is profusion of studies has not, however, led to general recognition of the inherent gender aspect of migration processes. In 1984, Mirjana Morokvasic made the observation that “in spite of the growing evidence of women’s overwhelming participation in migratory movements” research on migration is still characterised by a male bias.2 Her fi ndings twenty years later were almost identical, stating that “la féminisation des cou- rants migratoires” is still presented as a novel phenomenon and the

1 See i.a. Aderanti Adepoju, “Patterns of Migration by Sex,” in Female and Male in West Africa, ed. Christine Oppong (London, 1983); Mirjana Morokvasic, “Women in Migration: Beyond the Reductionist Outlook,” in One Way Ticket: Migration and Female Labour, ed. Annie Phizacklea (London, 1983); Lynne Brydon, “Who Moves? Women and Migration in West Africa in the 1980s,” in Migrants, Workers, and the Social Order, ed. Jeremy Eades (London, 1987); Marta Tienda and Karen Booth, “Gen- der, Migration and Social Change,“ International Sociology 6 (1991), 51–72; Sylvia Chant and Sarah A. Radcliff e, “Migration and Development: Th e Importance of Gen- der,” in Gender and Migration in Developing Countries, ed. Sylvia Chant (London, 1992); Cindi Katz and Janice Monk, eds., Full Circles: Geographies of Women Over the Life Course (London, 1993); Gunilla Bjerén, “Gender and Reproduction,” in Interna- tional Migration, Mobility and Development: Multidisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Tomas Hammar et al. (Oxford, 1987); Jacqueline Knörr and Barbara Meier, eds., Women and Migration: Anthropological Perspectives (Frankfurt a.M., 2000); Dennis Cordell and Victor Piché, “Un siècle de migration au Burkina: Inclusion ou exclusion,” in Être étranger et migrant en Afrique au XXe siècle: Enjeux identitaires et modes d’insertion, 2, Dynamiques migratoires, modalités d’insertion urbain et enjeux d’acteurs, ed. Cathé- rine Coquery-Vidrovitsch (Paris, 2003); Christine Catarino and Mirjana Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre, migration et mobilités,” Revue européenne des migrations internationales 21 (2005), 7–72. 2 Mirjana Morokvasic, “Birds of Passage are also Women,” International Migration Review (special issue: Women in Migration) 18 (1984), 899. 26 elisabeth boesen category of ‘gender’ largely ignored in mainstream migrant research.3 It would be futile to join in this long-standing complaint and lament that female migrants have been utterly neglected or at best viewed as dependants. It seems more compelling to consider the persistent male bias in migration theory in the context of general post-modern cultural and social theory. Th e mobile protagonists presented as paradigmatic in this theoretical strand also bear conspicuously male traits. Even more so than in the conception of the migrant, these traits appear in the metaphors designed to inform us of the fundamentally mobile nature of post-modern man, for instance that of the ‘traveller’ by James Cliff ord.4 Th e author himself acknowledges that the notion of “travel” is gender-specifi c—and class-specifi c—in that it is strongly infl uenced by the old form of “gentlemanly occidental travel”, and that his endeavours to free the “term ‘travel’ from a history of Euro- pean, literary, male, bourgeois, scientifi c, heroic, recreational meanings and practices” were never quite successful.5 Closely related to the ‘traveller’ is the fi gure of the ‘ethnographer’. It too is endowed with male characteristics. Both represent the romantic idea of the personal grandeur and accomplishment gained by travelling to far away places and, especially in the case of the ethnographer, by enduring physical hardship.6 Another ubiquitous fi gure is the ‘nomad’.7 In both instances, movement is presented as a process of appropriation; unlike the traveller and the ethnographer, however, the nomad does not take possession of the world through contemplation but by employing cunning and

3 Catarino and Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre,” p. 7f. 4 James Cliff ord, “Traveling Cultures,” in Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century, ed. idem (Cambridge, Mass., 1997). According to Janet Wolff , the metaphors of space and movement characterising post-modern theory are evidence of an “exclusionary move in the academy”; “. . . just as women accede to theory, (male) theorists take to the road . . . Th e already-gendered language of mobility marginalises women who want to participate in cultural criticism”; Janet Wolff , “On the Road Again: Metaphors of Travel in Culture Criticism,” Cultural studies 7 (1993), 234. 5 Cliff ord, “Traveling Cultures,” pp. 31, 33. 6 Cf. Akhil Gupta and James Ferguson, “Discipline and Practice: ‘Th e Field’ as Site, Method, and Location in Anthropology,” in Anthropological Locations: Boundaries and Grounds of a Field Science, eds. idem (Berkeley, 1997), p. 17. 7 Cf. Tim Cresswell, “Imagining the Nomad: Mobility and the Postmodern Primi- tive,” in Space and Social Th eory: Interpreting Modernity and Postmodernity, eds. Georges Benko and Ulf Strohmayer (Oxford, 1997). wodaabe women and the outside world 27 tactics and even violence.8 Finally, yet another prominent and similarly male character should be mentioned here, the ‘fl aneur’.9 Th e essay of Felicitas Edholm on a female fl aneur, a young woman from the lower classes who lived in Paris a few decades aft er Baudelaire, the proto- typical fl aneur, is revealing in our context in as much as this woman’s capacity to ‘appropriate’ urban space is decidedly limited, giving her far more in common with the female migrants under review here than with Baudelaire. She cannot aff ord to stroll casually along the boule- vards or let her eyes wander, since the risk of being abused, particularly in terms of sexual harassment, forces her to be constantly on the alert and to avoid certain places and the gazes of male passers-by.10 It seems remarkable that the occidental notion of travel and its association with ideas of male autonomy and self-realisation11 should have such an impact on current debates on mobility and on migrant research in particular. Are we to conclude from this that women have as yet been unable to free themselves from their genuine sedentarity? Although they have managed in many instances to overcome immediate physical restraints—ranging from seclusion to bodily mutilation12—one could gain the impression that they have failed to free themselves of their more fundamental bonds. Paradoxically, this impression is also produced by studies that focus on female migration. By concentrating primarily on the domestic consequences of migration, i.e., on the problem of linking reproductive and productive functions, plainly visible in the phenomenon of ‘transnational

8 Cf. Michel de Certeau, L’invention du quotidien, 1, Arts de faire (Paris, 1980); Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari, Mille plateaux: Capitalisme et schizophrenie (Paris, 1980). 9 See for example Zygmunt Baumann, “Vom Pilger zum Touristen,“ Das Argu- ment 36 (1994), 389–408. 10 Felicity Edholm, “Th e View from Below: Paris in the 1880s,” in Landscape, Poli- tics and Perspectives, ed. Barbara Bender (Oxford, 1994). 11 Cf. Eric J. Leed, Die Erfahrung der Ferne: Reisen von Gilgamesch bis zum Touris- mus unserer Tage (Frankfurt a.M., 1991). 12 Th ink of the Chinese ‘lotus foot’ or the adiposity of Berber women—cultural predilections elaborated on the female body are not only supposed to underline the idle status of noble women but must also be seen as a sign of female immobility; see Shirley Ardener, “Ground Rules and Social Maps for Women: An Introduction,” in Women and Space: Ground Rules and Social Maps, ed. idem (New York, 1993), pp. 21f. 28 elisabeth boesen motherhood’,13 these studies contribute “à enfermer les femmes migrantes dans le rôle de ‘mères nourricières’ ”.14 One of the key questions treated in studies on female migration is whether mobility has an emancipating eff ect. Is it true that women migrants gain more social and economic autonomy?15 Recent research has increasingly questioned the idea that women are fi rst and foremost the passive companions or dependants of male migrants. Th e authors explicitly criticise the “victimization des femmes en migration”16 and the associated confi nement to certain sectors of female migrant activities, i.e., caring or household chores.17 Even the classic victim role, such as that of the prostitute, involves female ‘agency’ according to the authors.18 Th is diff erent mode of perception also implies that migration is no longer identifi ed with a radical change between two lifestyles, e.g., rural versus urban life, and as inevitably involving a biographical break.19 Female migration and in particular female urban migration has undoubtedly increased in recent years but does not represent an altogether new phenomenon. One example of long-standing female economic migration in West Africa are the Jola of the Casamance, where the young women were among the pioneers of urban migration and

13 Cf., for instance, the contributions to ‘Global Women’, Barbara Ehrenreich and Arlie Russell Hochschild, eds., Global Women: Nannies, Maids and Sex Workers in the New Economy (New York, 2002). 14 Catarino and Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre,” p. 14. Male migrants who, like women, cannot divest themselves of their reproductive function also remain comparatively invisible in research, although it is these marginal or “small migrants” who, according to Alain Tarrius, constantly bring about new “territories of circulation”; Alain Tarrius, Les nouveaux cosmopolitismes: Mobilités, identités, territoires (Paris, 2000); cf. Schmoll on ‘cosmopolites de circonstance’; Camille Schmoll, “Cosmo- politisme au quotidien et circulations commerciales à Naples,” Cahiers de la Méditer- ranée 67 (2003), 345–360; idem, “Pratiques spatiales transnationales et stratégies de mobilité des commerçantes tunisiennes,” Revue européenne des migrations internationales 21 (2005), 131–154; but see also Hily and Rinaudo on the relation between ethnicity and cosmopolitanism; Marie-Antoinette Hily and Christian Rinaudo, “Cos- mopolitisme et altérité: Les nouveaux migrants dans l’économie informelle,” Tsantsa 8 (2003), 48–57. 15 Cf. Tienda and Booth, “Gender, Migration.” 16 Catarino and Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre,” p. 16. 17 See, for instance, Ehrenreich and Hochschild, eds., Global Women. 18 See, for instance, Pittin on Hausa women in Katsina, Nigeria; Renée Pittin, “Migration of Women in Nigeria: Th e Hausa Case,” International Migration Review (special issue: Women in Migration) 18 (1984), 1293–1314. 19 For a critique of this idea see Mirjam de Bruijn, Rijk van Dijk and Dick Foeken, Mobile Africa: Changing Patterns of Movement in Africa and Beyond (Leiden, 2001). wodaabe women and the outside world 29 successfully defended their new mobility against the various attempts at its restriction.20 Traditional forms of female movement, such as the namadé system of the Malian Bambara, where young girls are allowed to provide for their dowry by engaging in mobile seasonal agricultural work21 have been ignored to a large extent in migrant research up to now. Th e fact that female migration has hitherto received scant attention is perhaps related to the notion of specifi c female migration motives, for example the desire for an appropriate dowry. Th e social and economic relevance of these motives was considered secondary to the responsibilities of the male breadwinner. Although we know that male migrant remittances are oft en negligible22 and that, on the other hand, more and more female migrants provide for their families back home, ‘female-specifi c migration’ is primarily identifi ed with personal, familial or even mental problems—sexual repression being regarded as a personal motive—whereas male mobility is seen as related to ‘external factors’, i.e., to economic and political circumstances. Another form of female mobility should be mentioned in this context, namely the move from the parents’ to the husband’s house, which in many instances entails considerable spatial mobility. Women appear here as passive wanderers, as objects of exchange, while in reality marriage is frequently a conscious act of migration. Th e Muslim Hausa women of Northern Nigeria are a case in point. With their choices of marriage partners, these women bring about a move to the city. Th is induced Renée Pittin to refer to them as “permanent migrants” despite the fact that most of the women in question live in seclusion.23

20 Cf. Alica Hamer, ”Diola Women and Migration: a Case Study,” in Th e Uprooted of the Western Sahel: Migrants Quest for Cash in the Senegambia, eds. Lucie Gallistel Colvin et al. (New York, 1981); Michael C. Lambert, Longing for Exile: Migration and the Making of a Translocal Community in Senegal, West Africa (Portsmouth, 2002). It is not rare for women to form the vanguard of a more general migratory wave; cf. Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales,” see also Schiff auer on Turkish immigrants to Germany; Werner Schiff auer, Die Migranten aus Subay: Türken in Deutschland: Eine Ethnogra- phie (Stuttgart, 1991), p. 201; the reasons for this are frequently associated with the visa regulations of the receiving countries. 21 Cf. Arjan DeHaan, Karen Brock and Ngolo Coulibaly, “Migration, Livelihoods and Institutions: Contrasting Patterns of Migration in Mali,” in Labour Mobility and Rural Society, eds. Arjan De Haan and Ben Rogaly, Development Studies 38 (London, 2002). 22 Cf. David A. Cleveland, “Migration in West Africa: A Savanna Village Perspec- tive,” Africa 61 (1991), 222–246; Hans Peter Hahn, “Zirkuläre Arbeitsmigration in Westafrika und die ‚Kultur der Migration‘,” Afrika Spectrum 39 (2004), 381–404. 23 Pittin, “Migration,” p. 1298. Cf. Cooper’s characterisation of Hausa women as “perennial migrants”; Barbara Cooper, “Gender, Movement, and History: Social and 30 elisabeth boesen

Another example that stems from a society infl uenced by Islam, where women play an extremely active part in marriage arrangements and the spatial mobility that goes with them, are the Fulbe-Wodaabe from Niger, who will be examined more closely in the following pages. Suffi ce it to say for the moment that the Wodaabe practise two distinct, even contradictory forms of marriage. Th e fi rst marriage of a woman is always an endogamous union (koobgal) arranged by the parents, where the marriage partners themselves have no say in its establishment. Th is type of marriage is characterised by a high degree of immobility in so far as the woman as well as her heritage, that is, her cattle, are prevented from leaving the patrilineage. Parallel to this the Wodaabe practice a customary form of second or further marriage, the so-called teegal, which, contrary to the fi rst type, must be exogamous, i.e., it is only legitimate when the partners belong to diff erent maximal lineages. Th is marriage variant endows the woman with a more active and more mobile role. Although she is considered as being taken by another man (o tee’aama), the marriage itself being associated with theft (guyka debbo), in actual fact the woman oft en leaves her husband and her group by fl eeing to another man, another lineage (o dillii)—without, however, ultimately dissolving the bond with her fi rst husband (koowaado). Th e woman’s fl ight and re-marriage oft en entails long spatial separation from her family and group of origin, which fi nds expression in the designation debbo ladde, ‘woman of the bush’, used to characterise these runaway women, who themselves describe running away from their lineage as “going into the bush”. Th e example of Wodaabe marriages shows that female mobility is, on the one hand, constitutive of social relations. By creating exogamous unions, runaway women are an important factor of social cohesion on the level of the Wodaabe society as a whole. On the other hand, their movement must also be regarded as profoundly anti-social; they simply leave their husbands and children and go ‘into the bush’. Th is ambivalence is also mirrored in migrant research fi ndings. Women are presented as more sedentary, their ties to the community of origin in the case of migration are more solid, and, as regards remittances, are considered more reliable.24 At the same time, it has been established

Spatial Transformations in 20th Century Maradi, Niger,” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 15 (1997), 195–221. 24 Cf. Morokvasic, “Birds of Passage,” p. 896. wodaabe women and the outside world 31 that women are more prepared to undertake defi nitive migration, i.e., to settle in a new place25—a fact that some authors in turn interpret as proof of the genuine sedentarity of women, who, contrary to men, do not invest in translocal networks but are eager to settle down in the given place.26 In other cases, such as the one under review, we are confronted with female migrants who have no desire to settle, or, more precisely, with women who settle down in mobility, as it were.27 Th ey lead their lives between their families in the region of origin and their various migrant places. Th ese women develop “un goût de voyage”, as Schmoll formulates with a view to female Moroccan merchants; they cannot endure staying at home for long but need to set out again on their commercial journeys.28 It follows from what has been said that generalisations about female migration should be viewed with caution. First of all, however, it has become quite clear that women are not immobile by nature. Th e migrations of Wodaabe women, to which I will now turn, represent an extreme case in some respects, but are nonetheless highly suited to challenging the idea of female immobility. My contribution is based on fi eldwork in various Nigerien Wodaabe groups or lineages. Apart from several stays in Central Niger (especially in the regions of North Dakoro and Abalak) my investigation included travelling with female migrants and brief research visits to several urban migrant localities (Bamako, Dakar, Freetown). Accordingly, my method entailed ‘following the people’.29 Whether it can be considered ‘multi-sited fi eldwork’ and, if so, in what sense is debatable. Th e object of my research was neither a village nor a region but an ethno-cultural group, the Wodaabe, who are genuinely mobile. Th e changes of place modifi ed

25 See Ludwar-Ene on the mobility of Nigerian women; Gudrun Ludwar-Ene, “Sind Frauen urbaner als Männer? Eine Th ese zum Urbanisierungsprozeß im subsaharischen Afrika,” in Ethnologische Stadtforschung: Eine Einführung, eds. Waltraud Kokot and Bettina C. Bommer (Berlin, 1991). Hellermann presents a more distinctive approach in her study on female immigrants in Portugal; the attitudes and aspirations of these women are highly dependent on their economic obligations vis-à-vis their families back home; Christiane Hellermann, “Gendered Margins: Immigrant Women in Portugal,” Ethnologia europaea 34 (2004), 17–28. 26 Catarino and Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre,” p. 12f. 27 “Des femmes qui migrent pour ne pas partir”, as Catarino and Morokvasic put it; Catarino and Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre,” p. 11. 28 Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales,” p. 138. 29 George E. Marcus, “Ethnography in/of the World System: Th e Emergence of Multi-Sited Ethnography,” Annual Review of Anthropology 24 (1995), p. 106. 32 elisabeth boesen this object as new facets became visible, but they did not bring forth a new object. In view of the specifi c commercial activities of Wodaabe migrants, such an emerging object might have been ‘transnational medicines’, in other words the mobility of a limited group of medicine sellers could well have been the starting point for a study on global systems of medical ideas and practices. However, the Wodaabe and their forms of mobility were to remain the centre of my research endeavour. Another trait of the ‘traveller’, which makes this fi gure an inadequate metaphor for certain mobility phenomena, is the fact that he appears as an individual, or even, in a sense, epitomises the process of individuation. As we will see in the following, Wodaabe migrants, and perhaps female migrants in particular, are, in a specifi c sense, ‘alone’. Although travel is realised collectively, it is an overtly particularistic endeavour which implies a certain degree of rivalry and secrecy among the migrants and contrasts with the communal ethos of the pastoral lineage. At the same time the individual migrant is part of a phenomenon which is essentially collective. Th e ‘exodus’ of Wodaabe women at the end of the rainy season, the sight of huge migration groups camping in car terminals and of long-distance buses brimming over with Wodaabe are all unmistakable manifestations of the communal and ethnic dimensions of these migrations. Th e following description of female migrants and their mobility practice will treat the tension between the community and the tendency for individual autonomy or even isolation—one could also say, between asabiya (Ibn Khaldun) and ‘the freedom of the migrant’.30 As will become clear, this tension is at the base of a certain mode of foreignness (Fremdheit), i.e. of resistance against the identifi catory power of place. Following a short description of Wodaabe women’s seasonal migration, its historical context and socio-economic impact, the contribution treats the savoir circuler and the specifi c sociability of these women. Th e concluding remarks will be on the relation between social embeddedness and autonomy which emerges in these female mobility processes.

30 Villem Flusser, Von der Freiheit des Migranten: Einsprüche gegen den National- sozialismus (Cologne, 1994). wodaabe women and the outside world 33

Intermittent Cosmopolitans

Th e Wodaabe (sing.: Bodaado) belong to the Fulbe people scattered throughout West Africa, extending across the continent to the eastern parts of the Republic of Sudan. Th ey represent a relatively small group compared to the Fulbe as a whole, numbering hardly more than a hundred thousand of a total population estimated at between nine and seventeen million.31 Most of the Wodaabe live in the Republic of Niger; smaller groups are found in northern Cameroon and Nigeria. As the ‘pure’ nomads among the Fulbe, the Wodaabe enjoy a unique status in Fulbe ethnography; at the beginning of the 1950s they became the subject of the fi rst fi eld research on the Fulbe.32 Th eir marked mobility, however, is quite a recent phenomenon. It emerged as a result of the jihad that affl icted the area of present-day Northern Nigeria and Northern Cameroon in the nineteenth century and of the colonial ‘pacifi cation’ of the region.33 Mobility has since become a key element of Wodaabe identity and has remained so despite the devastating droughts of the 1970s and 1980s. Impoverished as a result of these droughts, herd owners began to develop new forms of mobility rather than turn to agricultural activities; alongside their pastoral nomadism, many of them—and especially Wodaabe women—undertake seasonal trade journeys to urban centres such as Dakar or Abidjan. Th ese modern migrations have rarely been the subject of ethnographic research up to now, although occasional hints at new mobile forms of economic diversifi cation and crisis management can be found.34 Neither has general migration research taken note of the new forms of mobility developed by African pastoralists.35 Th is is even more

31 Victor Azarya, “Th e Nomadic Factor in Africa: Dominance or Marginality,” in Nomads in the Sedentary World, eds. Anatoly M. Khazanov and André Wink (Rich- mond, 2001), p. 263. 32 See Marguerite Dupire, Peuls nomads: Etude descriptive des Wodaabe du Sahel nigérien (Paris, 1962) and Derrick Stenning, Savannah Nomads (London, 1959). 33 Cf. Bonfi glioli’s study on the migrant history of a Wodaabe family; Angelo Bon- fi glioli, Dudal: Histoire de famille et histoire de troupeau chez un groupe de Wodaabe du Niger (Oxford, 1988). On the Fulbe population of Central Niger in general see Elisabeth Boesen, “Identität und Pluralität: Die Fulbe in Zentralniger,” Paideuma 50 (2004), 101–126. 34 Cf. Cynthia White, “Th e Eff ect of Poverty on Risk Reduction Strategies of the Fulani Nomads in Niger,” Nomadic Peoples n.s. 1 (1997); Kristin Loft sdóttir, “Know- ing What to Do in the City,” Anthropology Today 18 (2002), 9–13. 35 On labour migration among Fulbe societies from Burkina Faso see Kate Hamp- shire and Sara Randall, “Seasonal Labour Migration Strategies in the Sahel: Coping 34 elisabeth boesen true with regard to female migrants.36 Th e social and economic situation of Wodaabe women has on the whole received little academic attention,37 an astonishing fact considering their complicated marriage practices, which allow women to have two legitimate husbands at one and the same time.38 All in all, we must conclude that not only have nomadic women been more or less invisible where relations with the ‘outside world’ are concerned—there is no mention of female involvement in trade activities, for instance, in Khazanov’s classic work—but they have also been unduly ignored in studies on internal relations.39

with Poverty or Optimising Security,” International Journal of Population Geography 5 (1999), 367–385; Kate Hampshire, “Fulani on the Move: Seasonal Economic Migra- tion in the Sahel as a Social Process,” Journal of Development Studies 38 (2002), 15–36 and Werner Heuler-Neuhaus, “Mit den Frauen verliert auch die dörfl iche Gemein- schaft die Initiative: Gesellschaft liche und ökologische Auswirkungen von Emigration in der Provinz Yatenga (Burkina Faso),” in Wandern oder bleiben? Veränderung der Lebenssituation von Frauen im Sahel durch die Arbeitsmigration der Männer, ed. Elke Grawert (Münster, 1994). On the signifi cance of wage labour among East African pastoralists see Louise Sperling and John G. Galaty, “Cattle, Culture, and Economy: Dynamics in East Africa,” in Th e World of Pastoralism: Herding Systems in Compara- tive Perspective, eds. John G. Galaty and Douglas L. Johnson (New York, 1990); on Tuareg migrations see Georg Klute, “Flucht, Karawane, Razzia: Formen der Arbe- itsmigration bei den Tuareg,” in Systematische Völkerkunde: Völkerkundetagung 1991, eds. Matthias S. Laubscher and Bertram Turner (München, 1994); on urban-based pastoralism in East Africa cf. also Mohamed A. Mohamed-Salih, “Pastoralist Migra- tion to Small Towns,” in Th e Migration Experience in Africa, eds. Jonathan Baker and Tade Akin Aina (Stockholm, 1995) and Anders Hjort af Arnäs, “Town-Based Pasto- ralism in Eastern Africa,” in Small Town Africa: Studies in Rural—Urban Interaction, ed. Jonathan Baker (Uppsala, 1990). 36 For an exception to the rule, see Schultz on Turkana women; Ulrike Schultz, Nomadenfrauen in der Stadt: Die Überlebensökonomie der Turkanafrauen (Berlin, 1996); idem, “‘One Day We Will Return Home’: Turkana Women Migration and Remigration,” in Women and Migration: Anthropological Perspectives, eds. Jacqueline Knörr and Barbara Meier (Frankfurt a.M., 2000). 37 See however Dupire’s early article on Wodaabe women; Marguerite Dupire, “Situation de la femme dans une société pastorale (Peul WoDaaBe, nomade du Niger),” in Femmes d’Afrique Noire, ed. Denise Paulme (Paris, 1960). 38 Cf. Dupire, “Situation de la femme”; idem, Peuls nomades, pp. 247ff .; see also Stenning, who suggested the term “cicisbean marriage” for the second type of marriage; idem, Savannah Nomads, p. 140ff . 39 On the economic situation of Fulbe women in Burkina Faso see Mirjam de Bru- ijn, “Nobility and Survival: Coping with Insecurity of Pastoral Fulbe Women, Cen- tral Mali,” Unpubl. paper presented at the meeting of the “International Union of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences” (Lucca 1995); idem, “Th e Hearthhold in Pastoral Fulbe Society, Central Mali: Social Relations, Milk, and Drought,” Africa 67 (1997), 625–651; Solveig Buhl and Katherine Homewood, “Milk Selling Among Fulani Women in Northern Burkina Faso,” in Rethinking Pastoralism in Africa: Gender, Cul- ture, and the Myth of the Patriarchal Pastoralist, ed. Dorothy L. Hodgson (Oxford, 2001); Solveig Buhl, “Gender Equality? No! What Fulbe Women Really Want,” in wodaabe women and the outside world 35

What we do fi nd are some scattered hints at the mobile activities of women in other Fulbe groups, e.g., the repairing of calabash-recipients,40 an activity that is pursued by Fulbe and especially Wodaabe women in Central Niger as well41 and should be regarded as the starting point of their itinerant commerce. Th at the city of Niamey has become the seasonal residence of the female members of certain Fulbe groups from the south-western parts of Niger should also be mentioned in this context. Together with their small children they make an eff ort to earn a living in town as beggars. Th is sparse information indicates that in the context of crisis and migration Fulbe women tend to engage in non-productive activities, and in this sense preserve an attitude that originated when Fulbe pastoralists were relieved of manual labour by members of dependent groups. Up to a point this attitude is independent of concrete material relations of dependency, in other words, it does not necessarily become obsolete in situations of crisis as they have been provoked by the Sahel droughts.42 Th e status relations in question are shaped i.a. by the geographic/ ecological conditions of the region, i.e., by what Gallais called the condition sahelienne43 which is at the base of the highly opportunistic territorial behaviour of the diff erent Sahel populations.44 Th is behaviour includes mobile trade activities as well as diverse and reciprocal itinerant services. Th e sphere of these services has hardly been studied up to now, which partly explains that the category of ‘peripatetics’ is rather narrowly defi ned, and more or less identifi ed with caste-like client

Rural Resources and Local Livelihoods in Africa, ed. Katherine Homewood (New York, 2005). On ‘the myth of the patriarchal pastoralist’ see Dorothy L. Hodgson, “Gender, Culture and the Myth of the Patriarchal Pastoralist,” in Rethinking Pastoralism in Africa, ed. idem (Oxford, 2000). 40 See de Bruijn, “Nobility and Survival ” on the Fulbe of the Hayre, Mali. 41 Cf. Loft sdóttir, “Knowing What to Do.” 42 See de Bruijn, “Nobility and Survival” on crisis strategies of Fulbe women in the Hayre, who at best accept begging; see also Lohnert on Kunta women, whose noble status implies that begging is the only activity they can turn to once they have become impoverished as a result of drought; Beate Lohnert, “Städtische Marginal- ität und Sozialpolitik: Die Lebenswelt von Dürrefl üchtlingen im Sahel. Beispiele aus Mopti/Mali,” in Staat und Gesellschaft in Afrika, ed. Peter Meyns (Münster, 1996). 43 Jean Gallais, Pasteurs et paysans du Gourma: La condition sahelienne (Paris, 1975). 44 Cf. Mirjam de Bruijn, Han van Dijk and Rijk van Dijk, “Cultures of Travel: Fulbe Pastoralists in Central Mali and Pentecoastalism in Ghana,” in Mobile Africa: Chang- ing Patterns of Movement in Africa and Beyond, eds. Mirjam de Bruijn, Rijk van Dijk and Dick Foeken (Leiden, 2001). 36 elisabeth boesen groups in the West African context.45 Inter-ethnic exchange relations in the West African Sahel and the associated territorial practices of the diff erent groups suggest, however, that the concept of peripatetics should be delineated more broadly and the rigid diff erentiation between farming, pastoral and peripatetic groups discarded.46 Th e case under review is illuminating in this regard in that the Wodaabe must be considered a paragon of the proud, independent pastoral nomad, but are at the same time engaged in peripatetic activities. Other examples which call for a rethinking of the concept of the peripatetic are the post-modern nomads that have increasingly become the focus of migration studies, like for instance Polish charwomen in Berlin47 or Romanian maids in Portugal.48

Translocal Medicine Sellers Th e Wodaabe are also deserving of attention in so far as they have developed forms of mobility that can be rightly regarded as extreme. Although this is true for both their modern and their pastoral migrations, I will limit my remarks to the former. Th e demographic dimensions of their urban migrations, the spatial distances covered, and not least the fact that migrants are mostly women and that elderly women were the pioneers make the case unique. Th e economic specialisation of Wodaabe migrants is also remarkable. While continuing to off er the classic services such as calabash repairs and hair-braiding, the Wodaabe are on the move today primarily as traders, concentrating on one particular commodity, namely traditional medicines and charms, which are designated by the Hausa term maagani.49 Th is commerce

45 See Michael Bollig, “Ethnic Relations and Spatial Mobility in Africa: A Review of the Peripatetic Niche,” in Th e Other Nomads: Peripatetic Minorities in Cross-Cultural Perspective, ed. Aparna Rao, Kölner ethnologische Mitteilungen 8 (Cologne, 1987); idem, “Th e Metamorphosis of Peripatetic Peoples in Africa,” in Customary Stran- gers: New Perspectives on Peripatetic Peoples in the Middle East, Africa, and Asia, eds. Joseph C. Berland and Aparna Rao (London, 2004). 46 For a standard defi nition of ‘peripatetic people’ see Aparna Rao, “Des nomades méconnus: Pour une typologie des communautés péripatétiques,” L’homme 95 (1985), 97–120; idem, “Th e Concept of Peripatetics: An Introduction,” in Th e Other Nomads: Peripatetic Minorities in Cross-Cultural Perspective, ed. idem (Cologne, 1987). 47 Malgorzata Irek, Der Schmugglerzug: Warschau—Berlin—Warschau: Materialien einer Feldforschung (Berlin, 1998). 48 Hellermann, “Gendered Margins.” 49 Migrants also use the respective local Fulfulde terms, e.g., saafaare or lekki. wodaabe women and the outside world 37 and the travels that go with it are called tigu, a term meaning ‘trade’ and ‘peddling’ in other Fulbe communities as well.50 Similar to the other activities mentioned above, this trade originally led Wodaabe women to neighbouring regions, i.e., to Hausa villages and towns in the border zone of Niger and Nigeria. Th e migrations lasted merely a few weeks, with trade carried out essentially in the form of direct exchange and the women’s remuneration consisting principally of small amounts of millet. As early as the beginning of the 1960s, some Wodaabe women started travelling to the big coastal cities. Th e Sahel droughts of the 1970s and 1980s fi nally turned the long-distance itinerant maagani trade into a mass phenomenon. Ever since, men and young women have also engaged in these activities. What is more, almost all Wodaabe lineages from Central Niger have now been pulled into this kind of mobile activity. Th e example of one group (the Taanira’en Isaw of the Kasawsaawa lineage), where women and men have been active maagani sellers for several decades, may give an impression of the economic and social signifi cance of these migrations. Over fi ft y percent of the adults in more than one hundred households interviewed had regularly undertaken tigu journeys of several months in the previous fi ve years. Although it is evident that migration involves the entire Wodaabe community of Central Niger, general statements on the economic situation of the migrants, their average income and the eff ects of migration on the economic development of the household are almost impossible to make. In our context it is important to underline that female trade journeys cannot be regarded as part of a strictly organised ‘household economy’.51 On the whole, women manage their journeys and activities independent of their husbands. Th e latter do not normally object to their wives’ travelling and would in fact be unable to prevent them. One factor that hampers women’s mobility is their concern for the well-being of their children.

50 Cf. Christiane Seydou, Dictionaire pluridialectale des racines verbales du peul (Paris, 1998), p. 711. 51 Compare Chant and Radcliff e, “Migration and Development” on the ‘household strategies approach’ as the most appropriate model for research on ‘gender selective mobility’; see also de Haan, Brock and Coulibaly, “Migration”. For a feminist critique of the ‘livelihood strategy’ approach see Rebecca Elmhirst, “Daughters and Displace- ment: Migration Dynamics in an Indonesian Transmigrant Area,” Th e Journal of Development Studies 38 (2002), 143–166. 38 elisabeth boesen

Mali Niger

Senegal Dakar Tahoue Dakoro Niamey Bamako

Freetown Benin Sierra Leone Ghana Nigeria Ivory Coast Liberia Cameroun

Map 1. Travel Destinations of Wodabee maagani-Vendors (Cartography: Elisabeth Boesen) wodaabe women and the outside world 39

While babies accompany their mothers on the journeys, young children remain in the custody of an older sister, a grandmother or an aunt. Th ey may also stay with the mother’s co-wife. In many polygy- nous households wives travel in shift s, taking care of the children and the household in rotation. Not infrequently, however, the husband is charged with these tasks. Hence, in the Wodaabe case, men not only tolerate female migration but occasionally support it actively. Many of the elderly Wodaabe recount that their fathers performed the household chores during their childhood while their mothers were away. Another means of supporting their wives is to supply the necessary seed capital for their journey. Th e women in turn have social obligations and are more or less exposed to the demands of their husbands and other family members. Successful female traders pay for staple food (i.e., millet) and provide their families, relatives and neighbours with clothes and other desired goods. Nonetheless, they are free to dispose of their income as they see fi t and can invest, for instance, in their own household equipment52 and the dowry of their daughters. Th e money can also be used to buy cattle and build up a herd of their own. Hence these trading journeys off er Wodaabe women the prospect of acquiring economic independence from their husbands. It should be stressed, however, that the circumstances of the women and their motivation to travel vary widely. In one case regular travels might be crucial to the subsistence of the household, in another a woman may see her income primarily as a—possibly temporary—subsidisation of animal husbandry, while in a third her wish to travel could be motivated by individual consumer desires. Th e example of two women from the same camp is revealing in this respect. One, the mother of eight children, travels to Northern Nigeria (Sokoto) several times a year, whereas the other has no children and undertakes one long journey during the dry season, preferably to Accra. In a discussion between these two women about the advantages and disadvantages of the itinerant maagani trade, the former declared milk-selling—an insignifi cant business among most of the Wodaabe groups in Central Niger—to be a respectable activity she would be very glad to practice instead of having to sell maagani, which she described as mere deceit (Fulfulde: fewre). Th e other woman claimed it would be embarrassing

52 See Elisabeth Boesen, “Gleaming Like the Sun: Aesthetic Values in Wodaabe Material Culture,” Africa 18 (2008), 582–602. 40 elisabeth boesen if other Wodaabe saw her carrying a milk calabash to the nearby markets, whereas a woman trading in faraway cities could not be seen. Th e profi ts migrant women make are as variable as their motives. In the eyes of the Wodaabe income is more dependent on the clever- ness and energy of the traders than on the quality of their products. Luck also plays a role but is itself subject to the eff ects of maagani, the substances and forces each seller employs to his own advantage. Among the members of a tigu group I met in Dakar in 2004 individual gains from two months’ work varied between 100 000 francs CFA (ca. €150) and 750 000 francs CFA. In the latter case the person concerned was a woman but certain male traders are also reputed for their trading skills which allowed them to build up big herds of cattle. Nevertheless, the itinerant trade certainly awards far greater social recognition to women than to men. As we have already seen, the motives of women to undertake a trade journey vary a great deal; a woman can be driven by sheer need or the desire for luxury goods. In both cases her motivation is regarded as legitimate. A woman’s honour is not aff ected when she travels to the cities in order to be able to feed her children—the grandmothers and great-grandmothers of today’s migrants did the same. Th e same holds true for journeys inspired by the desire for certain goods. In marked contrast, the journeys of male Wodaabe, especially of elderly men, who are struggling to maintain their families by selling maagani, amount to an admission of failure. If, on the other hand, men consider their journeys as a form of pas- time or are inspired by consumer desires, they are seen as neglecting their domestic tasks, especially the care for the well-being of the cattle. Contrary to what one would expect, the mobile activities of a trader are more compatible with the role of the mother and housewife than with the position of the household head. Th is discrepancy is of a more general nature and evident in status relations as well; diff erent from women, men experience the joint migration travel, and above all the spatial proximity of younger men, as humiliating and inconsistent with their social status. Hence for men in particular, the mobile maagani trade is an ambivalent activity. Th is explains in part why it is still considered a female activity, although there is only one lineage in which maagani-selling has remained an exclusively female occupation. In general, this type of commerce and the associated divination and healing practices do not constitute a female domain in West Africa. In Dakar, for example, male Hausa traders from Niger and Nigeria off er products and serv- wodaabe women and the outside world 41 ices similar to those of the Wodaabe.53 In the case of the latter, however, these can be characterised as the female domain, based on female skills and relations. Th e medical and magic knowledge of Wodaabe women is related to specifi c sectors,54 fi rst and foremost infant illnesses and suff erings. Wodaabe women are known to possess remedies for teething troubles or retarded walking, as well as talismans that protect children from the eff ects of envy. Th is knowledge opened up a lucrative trading sector to early migrants and is still in demand today. Although migrants now sell all kinds of remedies, their reputation is based on this sphere and some of the elder female traders still restrict themselves largely to it. Wodaabe are also said to dispose of special knowledge in matters of love, a reputation due in part to their notorious theft marriages, but also to the fact that Wodaabe men allow their wives to go on long journeys to distant places in all tranquility—a scandal according to the standards of neighbouring groups. As mentioned earlier, the female pioneers of the early period were followed since the 1970s by a growing number of male migrants, who have also been inspired by medicine sellers and healers from other groups. Many of the early male migrants encountered in the foreign places Hausa healers (Hausa: boka) who subsequently became their mentors. Th e latter not only taught them practical skills, e.g., divination techniques, but also introduced them to their social networks, even sharing clients with them. Th e range of products and services provided by Wodaabe maagani traders increased and today ranges from simple remedies for constipation to divination and spirit exor- cism. Although women and men by and large off er the same products and practices today, the contrasting processes of “initiation” into this domain lead to the expectation that their commercial habits and relations to clients and other urban inhabitants might reveal interesting diff erences as well.

53 On Hausa medicines see Allan C. Darrah, A Hermeneutic Approach to Hausa Th erapeutics: Th e Allegory of the Living Fire (PhD thesis, Northwestern University, Ann Arbor, 1980). Cf. Gemmeke on female Senegalese healers; Amber Gemmeke, “Th e Map of Magic: Migrating Marabouts in Dakar,” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Lau- rence Marfaing (Paris, 2007). See also Knut Graw, “Ritual Praxis as Access to the World: Migration, Globalization, and the Mediation of Prospect in Senegambian Divinatory Praxis,” unpubl. paper presented at ZMO, Berlin, May 2006. 54 Marguerite Dupire, “Pharmacopée Peule du Niger et du Cameroun,” Bulletin de l’IFAN 19 (1957), 382–417. 42 elisabeth boesen

Circulatory Knowledge Extensive trade journeys have become part of Wodaabe tradition (tawaangal Wodaabe) and maagani sellers now dispose of knowledge related to these journeys, which has been handed down to them by their parents and grandparents. Th ey know the travel routes, speak several West African languages to a certain extent (mainly Hausa, Dioula and Wolof ), are more or less acquainted with the topography, including the social topography, of various urban centres as well as with the practical and legal conditions of travel, such as international border controls, customs regulations, and exchange rates. In fact, there is no compulsion for each individual traveller to master this knowledge, since, unlike other commercial migrants, Wodaabe normally form large travel groups of twenty or more people (Fulfulde: laawngol), who live in close proximity throughout the journey. Each group is guided by a mawdo, a head or leader, who can either be a woman or a man. Th e latter not only possesses the knowledge referred to but is also skilled in social intercourse, particularly with strangers. As spokesman or spokeswoman of the group, this person is its representative in relations with the outside world, for instance, with the jatigi, the urban ‘host’ or ‘intermediary’ of the travellers.55 Vital aspects of Wodaabe urban migrations are similar to those of their pastoral movements.56 In both cases they move as a collective under the guidance of a mawdo, who represents the group in certain respects without having decision-making power; travel routes and stops are decided on collectively and on an almost daily basis. Similar to the pastoral group, the migration group normally consists of close relatives. It will become clear however, that there are signifi cant diff erences between female and male migrants in relation to the forms and foundations of such ephemeral communities.

55 Concerning the function of the jatigi see e.g. Jean Schmitz, “Des migrants aux « notables» urbains: Les communautés transnationales des gens du fl euve Sénégal (Sénégal/Mali/Mauritanie),” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing (Paris, 2007); Mirjam de Bruijn, E.A. van Wouter and Han van Dijk, “Antagonisme et solidarité: Les relations entre Peuls et Dogons du Mali Central,” in Peuls et Mandingues: Dialectiques des constructions identitaires, eds. Mirjam de Bruijn and Han van Dijk (Paris, 1997). 56 See Elisabeth Boesen, “Pastoral Nomadism and Urban Migration: Mobility Among the Fulbe-Wodaabe from Central Niger,” in Cultures of Migration: African Perspectives, eds. Hans Peter Hahn and Georg Klute (Hamburg, 2007). wodaabe women and the outside world 43

It goes without saying that there are both advantages and disadvantages to collective travelling. Travelling in a group gives a sense of protection and safety in a foreign country. On the other hand, moving around unnoticed and dissimulating is impossible in a group of twenty people.57 Itinerant maagani trade and the accompanying status of stranger is not without its dangers. Apart from the usual perils of the cities, such as theft , this occupation entails specifi c risks. The products off ered could turn out to be ineffi cient or even noxious, so that the foreign trader becomes a source of evil in the eyes of the locals. Many maagani traders describe situations where they were confronted with anger and even collective rage. Th e outbursts of mass hysteria provoked by the so-called ‘penis-shrinkers’ or rétrécisseurs de sexe 58 at the end of the 1990s in several regions and cities of West Africa are an example of this.59 Th e Wodaabe were among the strangers accused of bringing about the shrinking or complete disappear- ance of someone’s sexual organs simply by greeting the person. Entire migration groups were expelled from towns or had to be taken into protective custody. Another example stems from Freetown, where in 2003 a quarrel between a maagani seller and his client turned into general uproar. Th e Wodaabe in the city were obliged to take refuge in a Hausa mosque. Female maagani vendors, while not completely safe from this kind of reaction, as a rule incite mistrust and fear to a lesser degree than men. Elderly women or women with children are regarded as relatively harmless. Th e story of two Wodaabe men who were among the fi rst male Wodaabe to venture into Dakar in the 1960s is revealing in this respect. Th eir strange attire—leather apron, long braided hair and a straw hat covered with ostrich feathers—caused irritation and fear among the citizens, and led to a dangerous situation. Luckily for them, some elderly Wodaabe women arrived on the scene and succeeded in calming the excited crowd. Th e fact that in many peripatetic societies, e.g., among the gypsies, direct contact with customers and clients is

57 Cf. Boesen on the urban camps of Wodaabe migrants; Elisabeth Boesen, “Des localités nomades: Les ‘maisons’ Wodaabe en brousse et en ville,” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing (Paris, 2007). See also Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales,” p. 143. 58 Mamadou Diouf, “Engaging Postcolonial Cultures: African Youth and Public Space,” African Studies Review 46 (2003), p. 10. 59 See also Ndoye on the foreign réducteur de sexe; Omar Ndoye, Le sexe qui rend fou: Approche clinique et thérapeutique (Paris, 2003), p. 14. 44 elisabeth boesen entrusted to women must be seen against this general background.60 Women, in particular those with small children, are not only harmless but even need protection; it is diffi cult to send them away. One cannot, for example, make them leave a train, as Malgorzata Irek shows in her study on the smuggler train that connected Warsaw with Berlin aft er the opening of the frontier in the early 1990s.61 Here, the weakness and vulnerability of women no longer appears as a handicap to movement but, on the contrary, as an advantage or pouvoir migratoire.62 Th is specifi c quality of female travellers suggests that we might also fi nd specifi c knowledge, a female savoir circuler.63 I will not dwell on the tricks and ploys migrants develop in the face of the authorities and other obstacles; “tactics”64 which seem to be more or less universal.65 Suffi ce it to say that the Wodaabe technique—female and male alike— is fi rst and foremost self-stigmatisation.Maagani sellers, for example, describe how they manage to keep away customs offi cers, gendarmes, etc. by deliberately neglecting their outward appearance or by feigning the dull.66 Women excel in these roles; they sit or lie down in their dirty clothes on the customs offi cer’s camp beds at the control posts, in order to dissuade the latter from undertaking a thorough search through their luggage. Th ey can be confi dent that, as women, whether old and hon- ourable or young and attractive (though dirty), they are fairly safe from the anger of these men. One specifi c advantage of Wodaabe women lies in the fact that they are deemed to be particularly attractive. Many of them come close to the widespread beauty ideal usually associated with the Fulbe: a clear complexion, delicate facial traits and long smooth hair (an attribute that explains their success in selling

60 Cf. Sharon Bohn Gmelch, “Groups that Don’t Want In: Gypsies and Other Arti- san, Trader, and Entertainer Minorities,” Annual Review of Anthropology 15 (1986), 307–330. For immigration politics of European countries, see Schmoll on Italy: “Les femmes, particulièrement les femmes mûres, attireraient peu l’attention: elles obtien- draient facilement les documents necessaires. . . .”; Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales,” p. 139. 61 Irek, Der Schmugglerzug. 62 Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales,” p. 139. 63 Tarrius, Les nouveaux cosmopolitismes. 64 Cf. de Certeau, L’invention du quotidien. 65 See, for instance, Schmoll on “féminité comme tactique de traversée des espaces” and on the “ruses féminines” of the Morrocan female traders she is studying in Naples; idem, “Pratiques spatiales,” p. 145. 66 Cf. Gmelch on the “impression management” of gypsies; Gmelch, “Groups that Don’t Want in.” wodaabe women and the outside world 45 maagani for hair growth). But their attractiveness is not due solely to these physical traits but also to the reputed inaccessibility of the women. Th ey are an enigma; not only do they travel alone, i.e., without a male escort, but they seem to have no interest in men at all. Th eir reserve makes them intriguing and heightens the strangeness to them. But Wodaabe women are desirable for yet another reason; contact, especially sexual contact, with them is regarded as benefi cial, at least in certain West African regions. Th is benefi cial power is also perceived as inherent in their products, which are regarded by many urbanites as more authentic than the products presented by male traders. All things considered, it is not surprising that in certain circles, especially among members of other Fulbe groups, Wodaabe women enjoy a very diff erent, almost reverse reputation, namely that of being responsible for the high degree of HIV infection among Nigerien Wodaabe. Th is view is in accordance with the old topos that equates female urban migration with prostitution.67 Our case is remarkable in so far as ideas and opinions on female Wodaabe migrants are extremely divergent, extending from contempt concerning their reputed prostitution to fas- cination caused by their uncommon reserve and restraint. A fi rst and preliminary conclusion would be that the simultaneous presence of such highly disparate attributes brings about one fundamental quality, namely that of the ‘stranger’, and it might be asked whether women experience and enact this quality diff erently from men.

Female Sociability Travel groups formed by Wodaabe women are generally large, uniting thirty or more individuals. Unlike the members of male migrant parties, women are not necessarily linked by agnatic relations. Th ey are mothers and daughters or sisters as well as close friends, who come together for the purpose of travelling. By doing so, they form a kind of counterpart to the wuro or pastoral camp, the most fundamental entity in Wodaabe social life, which is characterised by patrilineal descent, rigid status relations and an overall reglementation of social intercourse. Even mixed groups, where women travel with men, display a special female commonality. Women are integrated in a closely-knit

67 Cf. Kenneth Little, African Women in Towns: An Aspect of Africa’s Social Revolu- tion (Cambridge, 1973). 46 elisabeth boesen female net; not only does each woman spend her leisure time in the morning and evening in this female group, she is also accompanied by a female friend (possibly her mother or a sister) on her selling tours.68 Th e intimacy and exclusiveness among the women extends to a certain degree to their clients. Although they sell their products to men, their main customers are women. In contrast to male traders, who set up for sale by the roadside, women peddle from door to door. Th is type of interaction is based on their gender identity; unlike men, women can venture into unfamiliar houses or courtyards and try to get acquainted with the female inhabitants. In spite of the social and cultural diff erences and possible linguistic barriers that may exist, traders and customers share a common ground of understanding based on general female predicaments and affl ictions. Apart from the above-mentioned child diseases this means above all social and socio-psychic problems, i.e., jealousy, witchcraft , spirit possession. Women also address male healers in these matters, but the fact that they can have recourse to the services of Wodaabe women in the privacy of their own houses is a signifi cant advantage for some. Th at the transactions between women are oft en in the nature of barter is a further advantage; in exchange for their products Wodaabe women accept clothes, household articles, jewellery etc. If female customers are not obliged to procure money, transactions can be carried out unnoticed by a husband, a co-wife, or a mother-in-law. Th is again enhances the intimacy between trader and client. Moreover, additional female contacts emerge as a result of this kind of barter, since Wodaabe women sell most of the products given to them to other women. Th e camps they install on the street, frequently in the vicinity of a mosque or, in rare cases, in the courtyard of a private house, can acquire the character of a second-hand market. What women obtain during the daytime is examined collectively in the evening, and part of it sold immediately to neighbours and passers-by. Th is ‘business’ leads to a certain liveliness among the women, temporarily transforming their desolate and somewhat uncongenial dwelling into a selling place.

68 Cf. Schmoll on the “hotel-life” of Moroccan female migrants; Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales,” p. 147, but see also Hellermann on female Rumanian migrants in Portugal who tend to restrict as far as possible social intercourse with their compatriots; Hel- lermann, “Gendered Margins,” p. 25. wodaabe women and the outside world 47

Whereas Wodaabe women call on their female customers in the private sphere of their houses, they themselves can only be visited in the quasi-public space of their urban camps. Apart from the fact that the private or domestic life of the traders takes place on the street, exposed to the gaze of others, the individual woman is also literally embedded in her own group.69 Th e migrants share a very narrow space; their crude resting places, consisting of nothing but small plastic mats, are close together so that each woman fi nds herself in a tight circle of other women. With the exception of the selling tours, migrants spend their time exclusively in this circle. Th ey eat and sleep here, produce their amulettes, sell the clothes they earned, and, in rare cases, receive clients. In sharp contrast to female travelling groups which are characterised by closeness and relative ease; male migrants are compelled to observe a certain degree of avoidance. As in other contexts, Wodaabe men depend for urban migration on their close agnatic kin; the travel groups consist of brothers, cousins, even father and son, and are thus highly aff ected by the rules of seniority and respect. Women, on the other hand, can choose between alternative travel groups; rather than join their agnatic relatives or their husband’s family, they frequently prefer, as described above, to be in the company of a uterine group. Due to exogamous marriages, these women belong to diff erent lineages in many instances and may live in diff erent grazing areas, but unite on the occasion of seasonal migration. What has already been shown in the context of marriage practices, i.e., that women in a certain sense dispose of greater social freedom than men, becomes obvious here too. Th ey are allowed to move between diff erent families and groups, and may even constitute exclusively female temporary communities that ignore the patrilineal order of Wodaabe society. Th eir female migration groups are, so to speak, another variant of ‘going into the bush’. Th is high degree of autonomy and freedom is, however, accompanied by strict confi nement to their group.70 As is evident in the spatial structure and public nature of their urban dwellings, female Wodaabe

69 Cf. Boesen on the “public privacy” of Wodaabe urban camps; Boesen, “Des loca- lités nomads.” 70 Compare Marques et al. on female migrants from the Cape Verde islands, who, according to the authors, seek for an “embedded autonomy”, “a balance between closure and disclosure”; Margarida M. Marques et al., “Ariadne’s Th read: Cape Verdean Women in Transnational Webs,” Global Networks 1 (2001), 292. 48 elisabeth boesen migrants are almost completely restricted to the narrow circle of their companions. Men, in contrast, are not only more willing but to a certain degree compelled to engage in individual relationships with others, e.g., with the jatigi or a particular trading partner.71 In interaction with customers and other inhabitants of the city the female trader’s relevant quality is her gender identity; although she is a stranger, she is above all a woman. On the one hand, this quality binds her to other women, i.e., makes her part of a community of understanding and solidarity; on the other hand, as we have seen, it renders her desirable and even benefi cial. Th e situation of the men is profoundly diff erent; they are fi rst and foremost strangers, that is, potentially dangerous. For this reason they have to reveal and identify themselves more explicitly than women—as Muslims, as Fulbe, as herders and victims of the drought.72

Female Travellers: Embedded Autonomy and Foreignness

Th e Wodaabe maagani trade represents a rather special case of migration—special also because of the prominent role played by women in these mobile activities. Despite its particularity, the Wodaabe case is of great interest and instructive when questioning the notion of a genuinely female sedentarity. Wodaabe women refute the idea that specifi c impediments render women more or less immobile, and challenge the stereotype of female sedentarity even in the traditional setting. As we have seen, Wodaabe women are able and willing to leave their family of origin and their lineage to join another group.73 Th is means that women in comparison to men are potentially unsteady. Long years of marriage and the birth of several children do not necessarily lead to

71 Most men in migration cherish the hope of a large coup, for instance a business deal with one of the bulk purchasers who export huge quantities of maagani to Paris or New York. 72 In sharp contrast to Hausa or other West African medicine-sellers or healers, Wodaabe maagani-sellers do not however seek to establish their medicinal competence on acquired, so to speak, academic knowledge by claiming e.g. formal training in a Nigerian institute for pharmacopee or even more intensive mystic studies in India or elsewhere; the grounds of Wodaabe knowledge remain unspecifi ed, somehow linked to a vague notion of remoteness and a state of uncorrupted naturalness. 73 Many women would rather describe this form of mobility as a necessity (Ful- fulde: doole) because it is the only way to bring about a separation from a man no longer loved. wodaabe women and the outside world 49 their social fi xation. Although the ties that bind a woman to her group of origin cannot be ultimately dissolved, i.e., women do not become ‘homeless’ by going ‘into the bush’, the status or quality of ‘stranger’ ( janano) is in a sense inherent in them. In other words, the frontiers of their primary social space do not coincide with the limits of the lineage. Women live within a space of potential relations, i.e., of movement, constituted by the Wodaabe community as a whole. Th e female space of activity is thus diff erently defi ned to that of men.74 Th is also aff ects the domain of migration. Th e problem of “transnational motherhood” mentioned at the beginning is not completely unknown to the Wodaabe in so far as women and children suff er as a result of being separated for several months. Th ere are, however, certain forms of shared child care that enable individual mothers to travel for limited periods of time. Th us in the Wodaabe case, the mother- child bond does not constitute an eff ective restriction on female mobility—a fact that already became apparent in the description of marriage practices, i.e. the so-called ‘theft marriages’. Th e same is true for other aspects of the female status. Th e itinerant maagani trade, regardless of whether it is motivated by subsistence needs or consumer desires, is neither inconsistent with female family tasks nor does it impair the socio-cultural status of Wodaabe women. Men, on the contrary, experience migration as an ambivalent activity that confl icts with the role of cattle-breeder and household head. Th e greater fl exibility of women is also evident in their freedom to form uterine migration groups, which imply the suspension of the strict patrilineal order. In the Wodaabe case, we are led to recognise the high degree of social autonomy associated with the spatial mobility of women and hence to ask how this autonomy impacts on relations between migrants and inhabitants of the city. Th e comparison between female and male travellers has shown that Wodaabe women accommodate themselves diff erently to men in the role of stranger. On the one hand, they are more familiar with the local inhabitants, their gender identity allows for interaction and a certain intimacy, expressed, e.g., by the intru- sion into unknown houses. On the other hand, however, women set clearer boundaries to their interaction with others. Th ey leave their

74 Cf. Ardener on “social maps”, Ardener, “Ground Rules”; compare also Schultz on the “social fl exibility” of Turkana women; Schultz, “One Day We Will Return Home.” 50 elisabeth boesen street camps solely for the purpose of trade. Although devoid of walls or other boundaries, these camps are more or less inaccessible to outsiders. Hence the women are close and at the same time unattainable, and it is this ambivalence that reveals the fundamental boundary between migrants and city dwellers. Th e urban street camps of the Wodaabe women could be characterised as expressing a refusal to engage in interaction and an ostentation of foreignness. While migrants refrain from building up relations with urban inhabitants, their internal relations are to a great extent hidden from the outside world. Female migrants are known to be married but they never appear with their husbands. Th is is even true of mixed travel groups, where the rapport between marriage partners is imper- ceptible to the outsider. Th is, however, is not merely an act of conceal- ment. As I have attempted to show, migrant women actually live in a diff erent social universe, where the complex status relations and rules of conduct that characterise the Savanna camps are absent. Embed- ded in a close circle of female relatives and comrades, these women experience the suspension of relations that normally govern their lives. Th is autonomous state allows for unrestricted ardour, i.e., a devotion free of social and moral scruples to the real purpose of travel, namely trade. However, it also implies deprivation, as illustrated by the utmost frugality of the camp and its complete lack of shelter. Wodaabe women are able to expose themselves to the gaze of others and camp in the street without a roof over their heads because they have nothing to hide. Th ey abstain from their material equipment as well as from the multiple, in part highly formalised, interactions which shape the everyday life in the pastoral wuro. In this sense, their urban camps resemble the ‘places of transit’ described as non-lieux by Marc Augé, meaning by non-lieu “un espace qui ne peut se défi nir ni comme identitaire, ni comme relationnel, ni comme historique.”75 It would, however, be misleading to equate the street camps with airports or other hyper-modern places which inspired Augé, since these camps are created by the Wodaabe themselves. Hence the latter do not entirely lose the ability to express their socio-cultural identity and manifest themselves spatially while being in town. In their case, the appropriation of urban space does not merely occur as a symbolic transforma-

75 Marc Augé, Non-lieux: Introduction à une anthropologie de la surmodernité (Paris, 1992), p. 100. wodaabe women and the outside world 51 tion,76 but rather as a direct physical occupation of space. Nevertheless, the individual migrant does have a certain performative role to play in this process. Th is role is, as it were, the inversion of his representational function in the pastoral camp; instead of wealth and community he is now manifesting defi ciency, non-participation and foreignness. In both cases, the part played by women, i.e. their specifi c performative function, is particularly complex.77 As we have seen, the female migrant’s behaviour in town is ambivalent. She is both near and far, familiar and foreign, an inconsistency which entails that she violates the urban social order governed by a clear distinction between inner and outer, or public and private space more strikingly than men. Here we rediscover that essential quality of the nomad, which has inspired the adoption of the latter as a ubiquitous metaphor, namely his resistance to the order of sedentary society and ultimately to the state. But here, the nomad is predominantly female. Wodaabe women’s attitude of refusal also implies personal privation. Th e female traders refrain from certain forms of interaction and modes of personal identifi cation. What is more, their attitudes and ways of acting in town also aff ect the relations among group members. Th e individual enters a certain isolation and solitude, shown most obviously in the fact that a fundamental form of communality, namely commensality, is abandoned; in town, each woman eats separately.78 Here, we see clearly that, in the Wodaabe case, migration does not only imply a change between diff erent localities—bush and town—but also between diff erent social states. Wodaabe migrants experience seasonal variations of the social morphology comparable to those described by Marcel Mauss (1904–5) concerning Eskimo societies. Th e rainy season spent in the northern grazing areas of the Niger- ien Sahel, with its intensive social and ceremonial life constitutes what Mauss calls des moments d’apogée, whereas the stays in the streets of

76 As an example see Diouf on the mobile Senegalese Murides who in every new place recreate their sacred town of Touba and the ritual community of the Murides; Mamadou Diouf, “Senegalese Murid Trade Diaspora and the Making of a Vernacular Cosmopolitanism,” Public Culture 12 (2000), 679–702. See also Bruno Riccio, “ ‘Trans- migrant’ mais pas ‘nomades’,” Cahiers d’études africaines 46 (2006), 95–114. 77 On the spatial order of the Wodaabe camp see Boesen, “Des localités nomads.” 78 Th e communal meal from one pot and with one spoon, which is normal and obligatory among Wodaabe, would destroy the effi cacy of the magical remedies employed by the individual migrant in order to enhance his luck in trade. Th e activities pursued in town, i.e. the maagani trade, are thus incompatible with the social obligations and needs guiding Wodaabe behaviour in general. 52 elisabeth boesen

Dakar or Bamako during the dry season are accordingly des moments d’hypogée.79 As in the Eskimo case, we are confronted with two different cultures (civilisations); the social relations, the moral orientations and norms are diff erent. According to Mauss, this morphological alternation between phases of divergent spatial density and of varying degrees of social as well as religious and ceremonial intensity is a general feature of social life, a law, while seasonal conditions possibly represent merely accidental circumstances and not causal infl uences. Th is alternation is worth being considered in other cases of migration as well, even in those where the separation from the place of origin is of a more lasting nature. Th e notion of alternation also allows for a slightly diff erent view on the practices of other migrant women. Could it be that they pass through the periods of shortage and defi ciency and privation diff erently from men—for instance, by restricting themselves, like Wodaabe women, to a close female circle, which permits a high degree of detachment from the outside world and an equally high degree of individual autonomy? With regard to the alternation between scarcity and affl u- ence, I will briefl y mention an aspect of migration that has not been dealt with in this article, namely consumer practices. Women’s travel is oft en associated with the purchase of certain goods, and one might sus- pect that the places to which they migrate could be identifi ed with affl u- ence, and with the opportunity to obtain desirable objects. However, in the case of Wodaabe female travellers a closer look at the nature of their purchases reveals that the women barely take note of the consumer off erings of the city.80 Th eir sojourns in town are inspired to an important degree by their striving for the beautifi cation and enrich- ment of their mobile pastoral camps in the Nigerien Sahel. Th eir actual consumer wishes are directed above all towards goods which could be characterised as objets trouvés, like pieces of scrap iron and other shiny materials that may serve to embellish their homesteads, i.e. for the aesthetico-symbolic expression of the affl uence of the pastoral world. Here again we see that the women’s autonomy is founded on their pro-

79 Cf. Mauss: “A une communauté réelle d’idées et d’intérêts dans l’agglomération dense de l’hiver, à une forte unité mentale, religieuse et morale, s’opposent un isolement, une poussière sociale, une extrême pauvreté morale et religieuse dans l’éparpillement de l’été.” Marcel Mauss, “Essai sur les variations saisonnières des sociétés Eskimo: Etude de morphologie sociale,” L’année sociologique 9 (1904–5), 72. 80 On the consumption patterns of Wodaabe migrants see Boesen, “Gleaming Like the Sun.” wodaabe women and the outside world 53 found socio-cultural embeddedness. Th ey are more mobile and, in the sense expounded above, freer than men, since they set up more rigid boundaries to their interactions. For them, the relevant social space corresponds to the community of the Wodaabe—a restriction revealed in their material desires as clearly as in their matrimonial choices.

Conclusion

In conclusion, I want to emphasise that this limitation and self-limitation must not be seen as yet another proof or result of an inborn female sedentarity. As we have seen, Wodaabe women are highly mobile both in a spatial and in a social sense. Th us they are a well chosen case to show that claims on a general female immobility are without foundation. Even allegedly “natural” impedimenta, namely the reproductive function of women, fi rst and foremost their mother tasks, do not render women immobile. In our case, the role of the mother and housewife is more in accord with spatial mobility than the role of the male household head. What is more, the example seems to suggest that women are vagrant in a more genuine way. In their youth Wodaabe women may ‘go to the bush’, i.e. to men belonging to strange lineages; later, even in rather advanced stages of their lives, they may travel to foreign places and countries in order to procure foodstuff s like millet or to earn money. Apart from the fact that Wodaabe women make an exception from the classic association woman/house/private/sedentary, their example also shows that spatial mobility does not necessarily go along with transcending boundaries, with an opening up, with new tendencies or modernisation. In spite of their high mobility these women’s social and cultural orientations remain strikingly stable and focussed on their own community. Rather than being an element of change they are one of maintenance and conservation—by subsidising mobile pastoralism, by preserving Wodaabe material culture and, last but not least, by restricting their matrimonial choices to the exclusive circle of Wodaabe men. However, here too we should refrain from rash generalisations.81

81 See, for example, the female migrants from Marokko described by Schmoll who, in contrast to Wodaabe women, are very much interested in new consumer products and function in this regard as modernisers; Schmoll, “Pratiques spatiales.” 54 elisabeth boesen

Here as in other cases, the categorical diff erentiation mobile / sedentary turns out to be of rather limited analytical value.82 Th e Wodaabe case hints to another seeming dichotomy which might however be of general signifi cance in the context of migration, namely that between individual autonomy and social embeddedness. A comparative analysis of these confl icting tendencies or forces and their socio-cultural manifestations might also allow for interesting insights on gender and mobility. Here again, Wodaabe migrants constitute an illuminating starting point in so far as the tension between individual autonomy or freedom on the one hand and the actual embeddedness of the women and their sense of belonging to their own group on the other entails a certain degree of real isolation. Our analysis of the migrants’ urban space made this predicament plainly visible; their street camps do not allow for the enactment of internal social relations, while they cannot be invested with new relations either. Th e state these female migrants live in can thus rightly be characterised as enduring liminality. Again it could be argued that the Wodaabe case is an exception in that it combines, as we have seen, highly diverse and confl icting attitudes and orientations. On the other hand we may claim that it is exceptionally well suited for the investigation of the more general relation between individual and collective aspects of migration; it shows, besides other things, that we have to go beyond rigid conceptual approaches, like network analysis, meso-level observation, etc.83 by according more importance to the communal or ethnic dimension of migration.

82 Cf. de Bruijn, van Dijk and Foeken, Mobile Africa; Arjan de Haan and Ben Rogaly, eds., Labour Mobility and Rural Society, (Development Studies) 38 (London, 2002). 83 See Schmitz, “Des migrants aux «notables» urbains”; Th omas Faist, Th e Volume and Dynamics of International Migration and Transnational Social Spaces (Oxford, 2000); idem, Transnationale Migration als relative Immobilität in einer globalisierten Welt, (Working Papers, Center for Migration, Citizenship and Development) 11 (Bielefeld, 2006). CHINESE WOMEN IN THE NEW MIGRATION PROCESS TO EUROPE: MARGINAL OR MAIN ACTORS?

Carine Pina-Guerassimoff SEDET Laboratory, CNRS/Université de Paris VII

In the beginning of the twenty-fi rst century, the citizens of the People’s Republic of China made up a huge part of the new migrants moving through the fi ve continents. Since the 1980s, continental China has considerably liberalised international movement of its citizens. In 2003, 220 million people crossed the frontier. Chinese authorities said they delivered four million passports. Partly due to a liberal han- dling of exit visas which gives individuals the chance, China is reviv- ing the tradition of overseas migration with a migration policy dated from the nineteenth century.1 Since the 19th century and to this day, North America has always been the preferred destination for these new migrants. Europe, and France in particular, was for a period in the beginning of the 20th century an arrival area for Chinese migrants. Th ese countries are once again becoming a valued destination.2 Th e current migrants are taking part in the general movement of globalisation, becoming actors of translocality, defi ned as “phenomena resulting from circulation and transfer i.e. from specifi c movements of people, goods, ideas and symbols which occur regularly and cross distances and borders”.3

1 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, L’état chinois et les communautés chinoises d’outre- mer (Paris, 1997) especially pp. 14–23; and for the contemporary policy idem, “Le renouvellement des perspectives transnationales de la Chine,” Critique Internationale 32 (2006), 39–52. 2 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, Eric Guerassimoff , and Nora Wang, La circulation des nouveaux migrants économiques chinois en France et en Europe (Paris, 2002); Chloé Cattelain, ed., Les modalités d’entrée des ressortissants chinois en France (Paris, 2002); Yun Gao and Véronique Poisson, Le trafi c et l’exploitation des immigrants chinois en France (Genève, 2005). Th e fi rst two studies were made on the cover of French institution funds, showing, during this ‘gold’ period, the great interest of the French administration to improve the knowledge on this new ‘immigrants’. Th us, these three fi eldworks were the main pioneer studies. None were published in their initial form, but all were then reworked for articles. 3 Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, “Marginal Actors and Transfers in Mobility Processes,” Unpublished panel introduction, International Conference 56 carine pina-guerassimoff

Th is new population trend is also part of a relatively ‘new’ and important phenomenon: the growing presence of women in international population movements.4 Recent scholarship in the human sciences (history, geography, area studies, gender studies) denounces the fact that women were, and sometimes still are, the voiceless, minor and forgotten actors/subjects of social/economic/cultural and political movements, including migration.5 In fact there are two linked phenomena: on the one hand there is a growing feminisation of international migration fl ows, and on the other the input of the social sciences is to reinterpret all women’s migration movements, allowing us to analyse them anew. Certain actors and categories of actors in mobility process are marginal in the sense that they are dependents of the main actors, or that their economic contribution is regarded as relatively unimportant, their activities are not in accord with social norms or violate notions of decency, they are socially and politically undesired and so on.6 Despite the rise of very recent scholarship on women in migration, including Chinese women,7 they seem to always correspond to this defi nition. Th ere appears to be a lack of practical and theoretical knowledge concerning their roles in the institutions that facilitate migration (migration agencies). In the departure society, generally dominated by patriarchal principles as in all developing societies, women’s migration is perceived as an anomaly: only the socially excluded women (such as prostitutes) are leaving on their own. Also, women are generally not seen as economically active agents: earning money and having salaried work in the public sphere is considered a man’s role and not for women. If the women are leaving instead of the men to make ends meet, the men eff ectively lose all their attributes (albeit imaginary ones). When women are leaving and the men are staying, men are then left in charge of domestic activities, including sometimes childcare. Th us gender relations are overturned by the process of women’s

“Translocality: An Approach to Globalising Phenomena?”, Berlin, Center for Modern Oriental Studies, September 27–28, 2006, 1 p. 4 UNFAP, Vers l’espoir: Les femmes et la migration internationale (Genève 2006). 5 Christine Verschuur and Reysoo Fenneke, eds., Genre, nouvelle division internationale du travail et migrations (Paris, 2005), pp. 14–16. 6 Boesen and Marfaing, “Marginal Actors and Transfers in Mobility Processes.” 7 Délia Davin, Internal Migration in Contemporary China (New York, 1999), pp. 230–240; Jan Ryan, “Chinese Women as Transnational Migrants: Gender and Class in Global Migration Narratives,” International Migration 40 (2002), 93–114. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 57 migration. Has there been a silencing of women’s voices because their border crossing process is closely connected with the internationali- sation/globalisation of certain kinds of economic activities (especially ‘gendered’ ones)?8 Based on recent fi eldwork, the aim of the present article will be to present the profi le of Chinese women in migration, to examine their socio-economic profi les and their activities in the host countries. I will explore how they are still oft en considered as marginal, even socially deviant, and yet they contribute greatly in maintaining the economic viability of the practice of migration.

A Silent Cohort with Diverse Profi les

Since the beginning of the 1990s, migration involving Chinese women to Europe became more signifi cant than migration by men. While offi - cial data taking into account women/men in Chinese migration were on the time of the fi eldwork not available, once can see by the bias of our own data the number of women rising and becoming numerous then men. Th en, some OECD’s states data began to take into account the two categories and the fact was offi cially established.9 When China launched its reform of migration law at the end of the 80s, authorities

8 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, “Gender and Migration Networks: New Approaches on Chinese Migration to France and Europe,” Journal of Chinese Overseas 2 (2006), 134–145. 9 Chinese men, the traditional pioneers in the economy and migration, are now competing with growing female mobility, as has been confi rmed by recent fieldword (see note 2). Until recently, Chinese women did not appear in offi cial European migration data, and it seems that their recent separate mention refl ects their growing presence. Th e latest OECD migration tendency reports highlight the respective numbers of Chinese women and men in some European States, and even if these data can only be taken as indicating a trend (due to the high number of illegal sojourner), they confi rm the above observation For example, in the Netherlands, in 2002, they were 6 700 women for a total of 11 200 persons. Th eir number rose to 7 500 in 2003 for 13 300 persons, and in 2004 to 8 400 women for 14 700 Chinese citizens. In 2002, Ireland reported a total of 5 800 Chinese people, with 2 400 women. In Finland, Chinese women represented half of the total of Chinese population: 1 100 for 2 100 in 2002, 1 200 for 2 400 in 2003 and 1 400 for 2 600 in 2004. In Portugal, Chinese women presence was 3 100 in 2002 (out of a total of 8 300), 3 300 (of 8 700) in 2003 and 2 500 (of 9 200) in 2004. Data given by Spain reported 20 200 women in 2002 (of a total of 45 800), 24 700 in 2003 (of 56 100) and end 32 400 in 2004 (of 71 900). Unfortunately, there was still no gender data concerning Chinese population for France, Germany, Italy and Great Britain. OCDE, Database on Immigrants in OECD (DIOC), http:// www.oecd.org/document/51/0,3343,en_2649_33931_40644339_1_1_1_1,00.html 58 carine pina-guerassimoff allowed only a restricted number of persons to migrate. Th en with the growing integration of China, the reconnection of migration networks, people from migration provinces began to migrate, even illegally, and in classical ways with a majority of men. Th is was the main situation in Europe from the 1980s until the end of the 1990s. In the Mission inter- ministérielle de Recherche et d’études (MiRe) survey (2000) of 987 persons interviewed, 536 were women and 451 men, indicating a tendency for more women than men to migrate.10 In this section I raise three main questions that will contribute to building a profi le of these new migrants, showing their great diversity and the way they are entering the global phenomenon of international (women’s) migration: Who are they? Why are they migrating? How are they migrating?

A Profi le of Chinese Women Migrants Chinese originating from diff erent areas in China have shown different migration patterns as far as gender is concerned, accentuated through the particular migration confi gurations. As discussed below, migrants come from various regions of origin, and a wide range of socio-demographic as well as professional backgrounds.

A Growing Diversifi cation of their Region of Origins Zhejiang remains the principal area of origin of the Chinese women migrants in France and the rest of Europe, but there are growing numbers from other regions. In 1995, Chinese offi cial data estimated emigration from Zhejiang to be 300,000 persons (240,000 from Wen- zhou and 60,000 from Qingtian).11 Th e Zhejiang migration fl ows in the 1980s–90s demonstrates the vitality of old migration centres (Qia- oxiang).12 Data furnished by ASLC (Association de Soutien Linguistique et Culturel) for 2003–2004 concerning Chinese migrants registered as asylum seekers in this association (administrative domicile) also show

(accessed June 11, 2009), november 2008–OCDE; OCDE, OECD, SOPEMI, Perspecti- ves des migrations internationales-Rapport annuel 2006 (Paris, 2006). 10 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, Eric Guerassimoff and Nora Wang, La circulation des nouveaux migrants économiques chinois en France et en Europe (Paris, 2002). 11 Th ese data are based on delivery of passports by offi cial authorities and are, for this reason, certainly fewer in number than total departures. 12 Poisson Véronique, “De la diaspora aux groupes transfrontalières. L’exemple des entrepreneurs en provenance du sud du Zhejiang (1884–2006),” Migrations Société 18, 107 (2006), 171. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 59 the predominance of people from Zhejiang. Of the 5,831 in the sample, 2,782 people came from this province. Women appeared to be in an almost equal proportion to men. As they usually followed only when men were already established, this shows a certain ‘maturation’ of the Zhejiang migration to Europe. Th e second major stream of PRC women migrants, who arrived since the mid-1990s, are from the Northeast Chinese provinces. Th ey originated from Liaoning, Shandong and Heilongjiang/Jilin, commonly known as the Dongbei region (dong means ‘north’ in Chinese). Cit- ies of origin which were quoted most oft en were Qingdao and Yantai (Shandong), Fushun and Shenyang (Liaoning). Recent interviews from associations and social workers in Paris confi rm that Chinese women from Dongbei are still arriving in France and in Europe. None of the localities cited by Chinese Dongbei women are identifi ed as international Qiaoxiang (localities with cultural migration). But it seems that they are nonetheless connected with an important fi rst internal migration. Th e women from Dongbei also came following a first internal (rural/urban) migration, sometimes dating from the beginning of the twentieth century. Other recent Chinese scholarship reveals that women from Shandong were also used to cross-border migration with East Siberia. Nonetheless, as we will explore in detail below, it seems that this new international migration is closely linked to the economic downturns of those old Chinese industrialised regions. A very diff erent range of Chinese localities composes the third group of Chinese women migrants, sustaining the idea of a popularisation of migration in Chinese society.13 Big urban centres like Shang- hai, Tianjin, Guangzhou and Beijing are furnishing a growing number of women migrants to France and Europe accompanied by people from regions that were not concerned until now with international migration, such as Guangxi, Hebei, Jiangsu and Jiangxi. In Europe, one can also fi nd Fujienese women migrants who have a real tradition of migration overseas but who until recently mainly went to South- east Asia and North America. Th e arrival of these migrants from the

13 For a complete view of Chinese migration in Europe during the 80s and 90s, trends and diversity, see in particular: Frank Pieke and Gregor Benton, eds., Th e Chinese in Europe (Basingtoke, 1998); Pal Nyiri and Igor Saveliev, eds., Globalizing Chinese Migration: Trends in Europe and Asia (Aldershote, 2002); Frank Lascko, ed., Understanding Migration between China and Europe, special issue of International Migration 41 (2003). 60 carine pina-guerassimoff

Map 2. People’s Republic of China’s Administrative Provinces (Cartography: Carine Pina-Guerassimoff ) chinese women in the new migration process to europe 61

Fuzhou/Fuqing area (Fujian province) illustrates the reverse process of Europe gradually being incorporated into a global migratory fl ow. If the origin of Chinese women migrants contributes to quite a diversifi cation of Chinese migration trends, one can also observe important changes in their demographic profi les.

Older and Married Women Compared with Young Single Women Fieldwork and scholarship conducted on Chinese migrants in France and Europe tend to focus on two diff erent topics. On the one hand, there is a relative ageing of the Chinese migrant population, especially among the Chinese women from Dongbei. Migrants between the ages of 30 and 39 made up the largest group, followed by those aged 20 to 29, only slightly more than those aged 40 to 50. Th e Chinese women from Northeast China seem to be setting the trend. On the other side of the scale, a growing proportion of Chinese migrants, including female, were aged 18 or younger.14 About 80% of the 1000 women I interviewed declared that they were married before leaving China. Th e remaining women were either single or divorced. Th e great majority of the women interviewed mentioned that they had children, most of whom remained in China. Concerning the Dongbei women, interviews revealed that for many of them, their main link with China was the children. But quite a number of Chinese women (from Zhejiang provinces) also declared that they had children both in China and in France. New Chinese migration trends to Europe also involved women migrants across a much broader spectrum of social origin.

Chinese Women’s Socio-professional Backgrounds Scholarship on Chinese migrants, including my own survey, pictures a growing diversifi cation among socio-professional categories of Chinese women migrants. Nevertheless, the distinctions among them can be related to their regions of origin. Zhejiang women are globally less skilled than their Dongbei counterparts. In China, many worked in small private enterprises, mainly in the garment and textile indus- tries. Some of them also came directly out of schools teaching them needlework. Other young women were employed as saleswomen, factory workers, offi ce workers, nurses, and carers for children, as well

14 See MiRe survey. 62 carine pina-guerassimoff as being housewives or university students. A signifi cant number of them were also entrepreneurs, artisans or traders in large family enterprises. Finally, others worked in restaurants, cafes, etc. A few Zhejiang women said they worked in the family farms. But there were also women who had no regular activities and who had been laid off , similar to women from the northeastern provinces. Many of these women were previously employed in state-owned enterprises or public administration in activities requiring more professional qualifi cations than those occupied by the Zhejiang women; they worked as accountants, secretaries, and company staff . Th ere were also engineers, artists, nurses, and primary school teachers, among other professions.15 Before choosing to migrate, they generally occupied low paid jobs for several months in diff erent insecure sectors, such as in entertainment. Some of them also tried to open small private shops without success. A third group were metropolitan women migrants: these were women with quite a good economic standing such as entrepreneurs, restaurant or shop owners, employees of international fi rms with high salaries, with diverse high qualifi cations. Finally, it would be a mis- take to ignore Chinese students, particularly female, who constituted a migratory fl ow that is not unrelated to other fl ows of ‘new migrants’ from China.

Why Are Th ey Migrating? It is quite diffi cult to distinguish clearly what women’s main reasons are for going abroad because their reasons can oft en be intermeshed. If economic explanations are quite simple to determine, they are also embedded with social, individual and gender issues. Some simplifi cations are nonetheless useful to facilitate a fuller understanding of their conditions.

A Family Strategy Even when women are migrating alone, or when they are not from a ‘cultural’ region of migration, they tend to be ‘sent’ to foreign countries

15 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, “Circulation migratoire chinoise, informations et échanges,” in Migrations internationales, mobilités et développement au sud: les migrants chinois, ouest africains et mexicains, ed. Eric Guerassimoff (Paris, 2004), pp. 169–189. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 63 as part of a household strategy of maintaining, improving or changing the economic/social/cultural situation of all the members of the family. It is seemingly rare to encounter a female (or male) migrant who leaves China without previously having calculated the benefi ts and/or the risks encountered by the whole family in this adventure. Th is is rather important in cultural migration trends. Th is view depicts people who leave and people who stay as sharing their gains from migration in accordance with a logic of co-insurance. Migration is seen in terms of a set of contracts, implicit or explicit, which form the basis of migration transactions between the migrants and their families (non-migrants).16 Th is family strategy of surviving seems even more important in the insecure context of socio-economic changes in China. With the massive withdrawal of Chinese State funding from a large range of social fi elds (education, health, housing, farming and employment), many families are rediscovering or are obliged to count (only) on household (defi ned in large scale) support.17 Th is constitutes the main reason given by Chinese women migrants for their departures: economic goals.

From Economic Insecurity to Cultural Migration As described above, many northeastern Chinese women we met in migration were laid off or were about to be (xiagang) from their work unit. Northeast China has gone through huge changes in their economic structures. Till 1949 these provinces were the basis of the biggest and the more important state-owned enterprises, especially in industrial sectors. Because of economic reforms, quantitative as well as qualitative, many of them closed, downsized or went bankrupt. Many people were laid off or were kept in a situation where they were still offi cially employed but had no work nor salary nor social insurance.18 Women were the fi rst victims of these reforms. Not only in employment, the

16 Eric Guerassimoff , Les dynamiques migratoires chinoises. Propositions pour un renouvellement des approches historiques (Paris, 2004), pp. 41–49; Christophe Guil- moto and Frédéric Sandron, “Approche institutionnelle de la migration dans les pays en développement,” Economie rurale 252 (1999), 47–54. 17 Mark Selden, “Families Strategies and Structures in Rural North China,” in Chi- nese Families in the Post Mao Era, ed. Deborah Davis and Harrell Stevan (Berkeley, 1993), pp. 139–164. 18 Jean-Louis Rocca, La Condition chinoise: Capitalisme, mise au travail et résistan- ces dans la Chine des réformes (Paris, 2006). See in particular Chapter 3 “Marchandi- sation et précarisation des ouvriers,” pp. 105–176. A detailed description of Chinese workers’ precarious situation is made pages 119 to 139. 64 carine pina-guerassimoff women’s situations became even worse: as many state-owned enterprises closed, many social services off ered by the work unit (danwei) also closed, forcing even more women back home. Known as gender-based activities, these were services such as health offi ces, schools, nurseries, and crèches. Although many of these employed women had been well-qualifi ed, their qualifi cations were no longer considered suffi cient in the new Chinese economy or the women were deemed to be too old for retraining. Jobs off ered to them were low paid, unsecured, and generally more in the entertainment industry (and/or prostitution) where the competition with younger, rural and more ‘liberated’19 women was becoming even harder. Working in a foreign country seemed to be the only solution. Economic reasons linking with reforms and insecurity can also be found for the Zhejiang women migrants. Nonetheless, their departures are also closely linked with a cultural character of migration. Some villages and townships in Zhejiang province have integrated internal as well as international mobility into their families’ or their village’s economic strategies to improve their social welfare. What exists is a sort of chain migration, wherein people from these counties benefi t from networks that help them gain information, social and economic opportunities in France and elsewhere in Europe. Emigration becomes a way of life for the community. It takes on a character of its own, overruns economic/political reasons which explained the initial departure, and fi nally forms a specifi c transnational space where women become more and more important. Th eir arrival abroad slots them into an ethnic economic niche demand in France as in other parts of Europe and is fuelled by their own desire for better opportunities to improve their living standards which were not available to them in China.20 Scholarship on Chinese women in the reform era is currently depicting their situation in the labour market as becoming less and less com-

19 Compared with women aged 40–50, these young rural women were more exposed to western customs. For example, having sexual relations before marriage was no longer unthinkable, and they might also have more than one boyfriend. Working and travelling were considered better than marriage. Divorce was also considered a reasonable thing. Having money, being consumers, became supremely important. So exchanging money for sexual services was not a diffi cult thing to do, and they more readily participated in the sexual industry than the older generation. 20 Antonella Ceccagno, “Compressing Personal Time to become Successful Migrants: Ethnicity and Gender among the Chinese in Italy,” Journal of Ethnic and Migration Studies 33 (2007), 635–654. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 65 fortable. In the early years of reform, absolute numbers of women employed in state and collective enterprises increased but offi cial periodicals noted a tendency for urban women workers with small children to be furloughed at partial pay—sent, as Tamara Jacka puts it, “back to the wok”.21 Job discrimination against women in numerous sectors is associated with perceptions that women’s household and child rearing duties incur extra costs for the work unit and make women less productive workers or even that women belong in the domestic domain.22 Women continued to be clustered in collective rather than state-owned enterprises and in lower-paying sectors that could be regarded as an extension of the gendered domestic division of labour: catering, textiles, health, and early childhood education.23 Furthermore, in the 1990s and beyond, in response to management pressure, women retired at earlier ages and at higher rates than men and were laid-off in higher numbers. Yongping Jiang points to increased labour-market stratifi - cation, both between men and women and among women (married vs. unmarried, migrant vs. local).24 Middle-aged and older women, regarded as unskilled and perhaps untrainable, have been treated as the most superfl uous of all workers oft en encountering downward mobility into paid domestic labour. Th e situation of the urban labour market for women can in a great part explain why a growing number of urban women migrated to foreign countries. Th eir economic insecurity is also connected with their ‘individual’ situations.

21 Tamara Jacka, “Back to the Wok: Women and Employment in Chinese Industry in the 1980’s,” Australian Journal of Chinese Aff airs 24 (1990), 1–23 and in particular 1–15. 22 William L. Parish and Sarah Busse, “Gender and Work,” in Chinese Urban Life under Reform: Th e Changing Social Contract, eds. Wenfang Tang and William L. Parish, (Cambridge, 2000), pp. 209–231 and in particular pp. 216–220 for a detailed description of women discrimination in the Chinese labour market. 23 Yianjie Bian, John Logan, and Xialoling Shu, “Wage and Job Inequalities in the Working Lives of Men and Women in Tianjin,” in Re-Drawing Boundaries: Work, Households and Gender in China, eds. Barbara Entwisle and Gail Henderson (Berke- ley, 2000), pp. 111–133. 24 Yongping Jiang, “Employment and Chinese Urban Women under Two Systems,” in Holding up Half the Sky: Chinese Women, Past, Present, Future, eds. Jie Tao, Bijun Zheng, and Shirley Mow (New York, 2004), pp. 207–220. “Statistics from the second survey of the social status of Chinese women conducted by All-China Women’s Fed- eration and the State Statistics bureau show that in 2000, the employment rate for urban Chinese women between the age of eighteen and forty nine was 72.0 percent, a decrease of 16.2 percentage point from 1990”, p. 208. 66 carine pina-guerassimoff

Gender Explanations As many studies now depict, Chinese women migrants oft en had ‘individual’ reasons to leave China. We can explain these individual reasons according to a ‘gender’ bias. In the reform era, changes continue to occur in China concerning gender relations. A growing number of Dongbei Chinese women were divorced, or they had diffi culties with their husbands. In the reform era, divorce seemed to rise: almost two thirds of the divorces initiated by women were on the grounds of incompatibility or a search for more fulfi l- ment.25 At the same time, divorce is oft en portrayed as disadvantageous for women (especially materially and also concerning child bearing), because of the patriarchal and patrilineal aspects of marriage. Once divorced, many women lose their material advantages such as housing and social insurance. Th ey must also continue to look aft er the education and entertainment of the children, even if they remain with the husband’s family (always the case when the child is a boy but not always when it is a girl). Without being divorced some of the women met in surveys also spoke of resurgent diffi culties in their relations with their husbands. Because of the age of the children, their own wishes, and social pressure, they did not want to divorce but would rather spring on an opportunity to fl y away (i.e. to migrate abroad). eseTh relationship confl icts were oft en linked to domestic violence, a subject that is discussed more and more in the public Chinese sphere.26 Young women from urban areas also wanted to escape some heavy patrilineal family contexts. Even if marriage was now based on free choice, the family oft en wanted to interfere in this matter. To escape this social pressure, young women oft en chose to ‘study’ in a foreign country, to take a ‘breath of fresh air’. Nonetheless, during discussions with them, it also appears that marriage (or the expectation of it being imminent) is or can contribute to their reasons to wish to migrate. In China, marriage is always an ‘economic’ strategy for many families (both urban and rural), even in the reform era. In the 1990s, among urban Shanghainese women, James Farrer found that higher up on

25 Yu Xiong, “Th e Status of Chinese Women in Marriage and the Family,” in Holding up Half the Sky, eds. Tao, Zheng, and Mow, pp. 172–178. See in particular pp. 173–175. 26 Xingjuan Wang, “Domestic Violence in China,” in Holding up Half the Sky, ed. Tao, Zheng, and Mow, pp. 179–192. Th e author developed a special chapter on Chi- nese society view of the phenomena pp. 188–192, entitled: “Indigenization in Chinese Research and Th eory.” chinese women in the new migration process to europe 67 the social scale, pressure to marry was defi ned in terms of the market economy.27 Since women are the fi rst to be laid-off when enterprises downsize, they look to men for material security while simultaneously stressing the importance of emotional expressiveness and connections in making a good match. Urban women have also begun to entertain the possibility of transnational upward mobility through marriage to a foreign citizen. Chinese women may represent ‘traditional’ values of support and nurture to bride-seeking men from other Asian states,28 while overseas Chinese and foreign men represent the possibility of modernity and wealth to urban Chinese women.29 Marriage to a country-fellow with overseas connections is also a reason advanced by young Zhejiang women for coming to Europe. In this case, their migration-marriage oft en enters a family strategy to establish close ‘economic’ links with economic partners. Nonetheless, many Zhejiang women were previously married before leaving China, and they oft en had a child. Apart from economic reasons (family enterprises, etc.), these women oft en explained that they (and their families) wanted to escape the Chinese one child policy. Migration to a foreign country signifi ed the possibility of having more children and above all sons. Despite a real liberalisation of Chi- nese birth control, especially in the countryside, the desire for more children collided with the re-emergence of the household as a fundamental unit of production and the dismantling of rudimentary collective welfare guarantees.30 Th e growing revival of the conception of patrilineal society also raised the importance of having sons versus daughters. Because girls do not have ‘economic’ importance for their family (she normally will leave it for her husband’s family), a son is

27 James Farrer, Opening Up: Youth Sex Culture and Market Reform in Shanghai (Chicago, 2002). See in particular pp. 46–47; p. 211 and next for a description of marriage attempts with a foreigner for Chinese young ladies. 28 Constance D. Clark, “Foreign Marriage, Tradition and the Politics of Borders Crossing,” in China Urban: Ethnographies of Contemporary Culture, eds. Nancy N. Chen, Constance D. Clark and Suzanne Z. Gottschang (Durham, 2001), pp. 104–122. See in particular pp. 107–109: “Marriage to a foreigner (shewai) or the securing of a Shenzhen permanent residence permit are two of social mobility through which many women attempt to realize their personal goal”, p. 108. 29 Aihwa Ong, Flexible Citizenship: Th e Cultural Logics of Transnationality(Dur- ham, 1999), see in particular pp. 43–44 and pp. 48–51. 30 Th e more members a household has, especially male ones, the more the well- being of all members can be guaranteed for the future. Each member is a potential for extra income, a connection to a social network, a safeguard against illness, a way to assure education for the youngest etc. 68 carine pina-guerassimoff an insurance for the future. Chinese birth control also, unfortunately, evolved in this sense: as noted by White,31 in the course of the 1980s and 1990s, a policy that had begun as gender-neutral—one child per family—became deeply gendered: a son for every family possible. How many children a woman should bear and the disposition of an individual pregnancy have not been understood in China as a woman’s individual reproductive choice or as a religious issue but as a matter that aff ects and is legitimately aff ected by the family and the state. Many interviewed women simply spoke of their wish to see something diff erent outside, joining the “fever” of leaving China (Chuguo). Th is movement reveals the important changes occurring in Chinese society, closely enmeshed with China’s inclusion in the world society, showing their citizens how people live outside by the great diff usion of information. Despite the fact that all Chinese women can be confronted in China with these situations, and may have the same dream of an outside experience, not all of them can aff ord to migrate. Migration is still reserved for a small number of the whole Chinese population, particularly Chinese women.

How Are Th ey Migrating? Two questions remain important to understand the process of Chi- nese women’s migration: how do they, in China, make their plans to migrate and how do they realise these plans? Answers diff er among Chinese women involved in migration agencies, such as in the Zheji- ang ones and others, but they all take advantage of the liberalisation of Chinese migration policy.

Chinese Migration’s Institutions Compared with other Chinese women migrants, it was quite easy for Zhejiang women to migrate because they had access to a migration institution (agency) or a migration confi guration: “the sum of the social institutions and networks in sending, receiving and transit area that maintain and direct migratory fl ow. It thus constitutes

31 Th yrene White, “Domination, Resistance and Accommodation in China’s One- Child Policy,” in Chinese Society: Change, Confl ict and Resistance, eds. Elisabeth J. Perry and Mark Selden (London, 2003), pp. 183–203; pp. 193–194. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 69 a transnational social cultural space populated not only by migrants, but also travel agents, smugglers, government offi cials, immigration lawyers, immigration services, companies,”32 and information circulation. Th eoretical literature on migration has now depicted the great importance of information in the building and the realisation of the migration project including among the Chinese.33 Because of the presence of country fellows, prospective migrants knew if there were opportunities to migrate (economic, social, etc.) and they knew how to achieve it (obtaining the necessary documents, especially invitation letters). Numerous women told us they obtained information about the way to migrate and the conditions of migration through a family member already in France or in Europe. Belonging to these networks also facilitated the needed monetary funds (composing the debt) to realise the whole migration project. Th ese migration confi gurations were confi rmed by examining the ‘offi cial’ means of sojourn of Chinese migrants to France, obtained mainly through data from the OMI (Offi ce des Migrations Interna- tionales, which recently was renamed ANAEM—Agence Nationale de l’Accueil des Etrangers et des Migrations) and OFPRA (Offi ce Français pour les Réfugiés et les Apatrides), at the end of the 90s and the beginning of the twenty-fi rst century. A considerable proportion of women migrants entered France by means of family reunifi cation (real or built). Between 1990 and 1999, the arrival of 5,601 Chinese migrants were recorded. Among the 2,697 migrants joining their spouses living in France, 78 per cent were women. Another important group includes Chinese migrants whose statuses were regularised through an amnesty proclaimed in 1997. Between 1997 and 2001, 7,674 Chinese migrants benefi tted from the amnesty (Haut Conseil à l’intégration, 2001), where considerations such as family ties established in France were taken into account, making Chinese women one of the largest group among them. Th is also seems to be the case with the recent amnesty (launched in June 2006) for foreign families with children who are engaged in the French school system.

32 Frank Pieke, ed., Recent Trends in Chinese Migration to Europe: Fujienese Migra- tion in Perspective (Geneva, 2002), p. 32. 33 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, “Circulation migratoire chinoise, informations et échanges,” in Migrations internationales, mobilités et développement au sud: les migrants chinois, ouest africains et mexicains, ed. Eric Guerassimoff (Paris, 2004), pp. 169–189. 70 carine pina-guerassimoff

Using Private Migration Intermediaries On the other hand, the Dongbei women, especially the pioneers, had to build and realise their migration process on their own. Th ey largely obtained the necessary information and documents (passports/visas/ invitation/language training) through special migration enterprises. As the migration demands exploded, even in the Northeastern Chi- nese provinces, it became a very lucrative market attracting a wide range of professionals. Some were offi cial legal fi rms who supplied services, like travel agencies or work-overseas agencies. Others belonged to the ‘grey’ sector, or were illegal, off ering migration services because they were well connected with some administration (export/import) that could provide the necessary information and appropriate documents. Of course illegal networks of professional smugglers also tried to attract potential migrants. Some of these agencies provided useful information and services; others painted only partial or totally inac- curate pictures of the host countries. Th ey all tried to attract customers through advertisements in the local newspapers or on local TV. Many women who passed through their hands had generally no real idea (and sometimes very wrong ones) of what they would fi nd once in France or in Europe. We also met some women who told us that they had no choice, nor knowledge of their destination before obtaining visas: all depended on the possibilities of the intermediary and of course on the money they could off er.

Emigration as a Positive ‘Political’ Project Th e existence of these migration agencies, legal and ‘illegal’, is explained mainly by the great liberalisation of Chinese government migration policy. Since the beginning of the nineties, Chinese authorities, national and local, pursued an offi cial policy of allowing a large number of citizens to migrate legally to foreign countries. Th is was facilitated mainly by the easy way Chinese citizens, especially those from urban areas, could obtain a passport. Furthermore, since the 1980s, Chinese authorities more systematically informed its citizens about the diff erent aspects of the emigration/immigration processes. News on the delivery of visas by foreign consulates and embassies, on language tests and visa interviews, on student opportunities, are now regularly and currently published in newspapers and other media and is also available on the internet. Th e Chinese emigration policy was facilitated by the positive view of Chinese immigration existing in certain foreign countries, notably in Europe. In the expectation of chinese women in the new migration process to europe 71 growing exchanges with the dynamic Chinese market, since the eighties many European governments off ered quite a large number of visas for Chinese citizens.34 It is also worth mentioning the importance that migration has been for Chinese authorities, especially the provincial and local ones, in the project to link it with development goals. Improving emigration and at the same time maintaining links with migrants to benefi t directly or indirectly from the manifested returns (remittances, direct investment, foreign economic networks, political lobbying, work supply) are a few of the objectives of the political interest in the Chinese. Because this policy has always been seen as a male-oriented one, the reconsideration of the importance of Chinese women’s migration will certainly have an impact in future. Once in France or in Europe, aft er the expiration of their visas if they had any, the women fi rst incurred what we would consider a precarious administrative status, generally as asylum seekers, and then as illegal migrants. Nonetheless, despite these migration conditions and the relatively important silence around them, Chinese women are major players in the institution of Chinese migration.

Silent Players in the Institution of Migration

Under the infl uence of some new theoretical approaches in the human sciences (micro history, new cultural studies, post-colonial studies and, of course, gender approaches), it is important to give voice to the actors/actresses who for a long time and because of a wide range of reasons remain unheard. Th ese trends, enmeshed with the growing presence of Chinese women in current migration streams, renew the analysis as does an understanding of their respective places in the institution of migration. In fact, these studies enable us to defi ne two main roles sustained by Chinese women in migration: reproduction and production. Repro- duction is generally defi ned as procreating, education, and transmission of cultural and identity values, and this activity is generally

34 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, “République populaire de Chine-Union européenne: Vers un partenariat stratégique en matière migratoire?” Hommes & Migrations (special issue Chinois de France, ed. Véronique Poisson) 1254 (2005), 65–73. 72 carine pina-guerassimoff located in the private sphere. On the other hand, production refers to pursuing economic activities, is generally associated with contractual wage labour activity, and is settled in the public sphere. Th is was a much more unusual (or even unknown) occupation for women. If the second kind of role seems, at fi rst glance, not to be particular to women (the same functions are also expected of men), the way women have come to fulfi l this role is in fact gendered. Both roles intercon- nect and raise the importance of Chinese women in the dynamics of Chinese migration.

Re-discovering the Major Impact of Chinese Women in the Migration Institution Since the end of the 1980s, works on migration history, women’s history or gender studies have also expanded in Chinese area studies.35 Th ey have shed light on the quantitative and qualitative importance of women in migration fl ows since the nineteenth century. Nancy Green points out that such fi ndings have seriously challenged the commonly held notion that men migrate and women stay behind to look aft er the home.36 Historical studies of Chinese women’s migration are very recent and emphasise cases of host countries situated in Southeast Asia or the United States37 because of the existence of rather important archives. Results of these works emphasised the economic role of these voiceless agents. Chinese women were already contributing their labour in the private sphere as well as in the public sphere. Already in the nineteenth century, this kind of Chinese women migrants played an active role in the migration network, especially when they maintained cultural and family cohesion, which were essential elements.38 Th e historiography on Chinese women’s migration shows a preliminary categorisation of women’s roles in Chinese migration, which seems to

35 For a complete, detailed and commented bibliography on the subject, see Gail Hershatter, “State of Field: Women in China’s Long Twentieth Century,” Th e Journal of Asian Studies, 63 (2004), 991–1065. 36 Nancy Green, Repenser les migrations (Paris, 2002), pp. 105–120, p. 107. 37 One can cited between these new studies based on American archives the work done by Judy Yung, Unbound Feet: A Social History of Chinese Women in San Fran- cisco (Berkeley, 1995); Anthony Pfeff er, If Th ey Don’t Bring Th eir Women Here: Chi- nese Female Emigration before Exclusion (Urbana, 1999); and on Southeast Asian ones: James Francis Warren, Ah Ku and Karayaki-san: Prostitution in Singapore 1870–1940 (Singapore, 1993). 38 Huping Ling, Surviving on the Gold Mountain: A History of Chinese American Women and their Lives (New York, 1998), see in particular pp. 83–112 and pp. 128–138. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 73 follow a kind of chronology. Th is classical approach reveals a changing role with diverse time sequences in migration and makes a distinction between three main groups of Chinese women ‘in migration’. Th e fi rst one comprises those who stayed behind in their homes performing domestic functions (economic, educational, cultural, social), to enable the men and families to realise their plans for migration. Women’s immobility is rarely mentioned as a way of controlling the migrant. In fact, this situation forces migrants to come back, and makes unmarried men choose a wife in their home village.39 Th e second group consists of women who migrated with or aft er their husbands or left their counties to be married with a country-fellow. Th e third group of women consists of those who left China on their own. In the nineteenth century, these migrants were made up of students and prostitutes, two categories with particular forms of contractual mobility. Such categorisations or classifi cations, found in historical scholarship, provide useful and interesting background knowledge for the analysis of contemporary Chinese women’s migration.

Agents of Production versus Gender Activities Chinese women migrants in France and other parts of Europe can be fi rstly defi ned as economic actors, and the term breadwinners can also be applied to many of them, especially the Dongbei women. None- theless, for the greater part of them, the way they enter the ‘public’ sphere is still closely connected with gender activities. Th eir occupations are predominantly divided among small-scale jobs in their ethnic economic niche and as domestic help or child-minders. Only highly qualifi ed women seemed to have opportunities to search for other employment.

Ethnic Economic Niches New Chinese women migrants in France, and the rest of Europe, mainly fi nd jobs in their ethnic economy built by their Chinese country fellows. Th ey thus increasingly form an ‘ethnic’ economy which is closely tied to specifi cally ‘ethnic’ products such as Asian food. In the eighties and nineties, their main economic sectors were the garment/

39 See one of the oldest and best documented fi eldwork done on the subject of families relations in migration: Da Chen, Emigrants Communities in South China (New York, 1940). 74 carine pina-guerassimoff textile industry, catering and food services. Since the beginning of the twenty-fi rst century, a growing number of them also found jobs in the entertainment industry (massage parlours, karaoke bars, coff ee shops) and also in import/export activities. Th e entertainment sector seems to have grown recently, attracting young women from urban origins who had sometimes also previously done these kinds of jobs before leaving China. Th e boundaries between these massage/entertainment activities and prostitution seem very fuzzy, as seen below. Women’s bosses generally belonged to the same ‘ethnic’ groups. Because of the pyramidal structure of the garment industry in France and in Italy, some Chinese women were employed by Turkish or Ital- ians.40 Th ey found their jobs through the intermediary of other Chi- nese people. Women employed as seamstresses could work at ‘home’ or in illegal factories. Th ey did piecework, which is also the way women were paid for making jiaozhi (Chinese dumplings). Working as waitresses in Chinese-owned catering businesses or restaurants was another possibility. Tending Chinese groceries or tourist shops (in Spain) were also jobs occupied by these women. A lot of the women we met in fact held two or three jobs at the same time in these diff erent sectors. Many of them dreamt of one day having the opportunity to be their own boss in this ethnic economy. Because of their lack of linguistic skills, they could not enter the employment market to fi nd work in other sectors.

Nannies-domestics Dongbei women had some diff erent employment experiences in their host countries. Many of them talked of their disappointment in their job opportunities. Th ey thought they could easily be employed in the European labour market, but their qualifi cations and their language abilities were insuffi cient. Th eir administrative status also played a role in their lack of job opportunities. Many dreamt of learning the French language, or training in other fi elds to fi nd new work opportunities, but the necessity of earning wages for the family set these dreams aside until an unexpected future. Dongbei women mainly found jobs as nannies or domestics in Zhe- jiang families. Th is kind of activity is very hard: bad conditions, hard

40 Antonella Ceccagno, “Compressing Personal Time to become Successful Migrants: Ethnicity and Gender among the Chinese in Italy,” Journal of Ethnic and Migration Studies, 33 (2007), 635–654. chinese women in the new migration process to europe 75 work, and low pay. Th ey generally had no rest or just a half day a week free. Th ey could be woken up at any hour to take care of the children, or their parents (making dinner or other tasks). One could also say that the Dongbei women were oft en very displeased with working for Zhejiang people, who had a bad reputation (as peasants). For a great number of them, they hoped to be employed by a local family. On the other hand, Dongbei women seemed to have a reputation for being ‘not hard working persons’, of rather being ‘intellectuals’ who push Zhejiang people not to employ them in their main economic activities. Because of this lack of opportunities, some Dongbei women explained that they ‘preferred’ to prostitute themselves (since it was well paid) rather than work as nannies.41

Chinese Women’s Prostitution Since the end of the 1990s, in some Paris streets, one could see groups of Chinese women walking side by side, in twos or threes, dressed in as unsophisticated a way as possible; they off er sexual services. Recent fi eldwork, scholarship and interviews reveal that some of these Dong- bei women enter this occupation without any previous experience in their home countries.42 Most of them have other jobs in the ethnic economic sector and they pursue this activity because of the money they could earn. Th ese prostitutes are now mainly found in local massage or karaoke bars rather than on the streets, because of the new article 50 of the French criminal code (June 2006) against street walkers (accosting). It appears that these women do not belong to any criminal networks, and do not have any pimps. Sometimes, they are subject to extortion (as a kind of payment for their ‘use of the street’) by young men, from diff erent ethnic origins. Th ey say that they do not have nor want Chinese clients, but rather prefer men from other ethnic origins. Some get to know regular clients who, they say, are “kind” to them. Th ey oft en said that they never want their family to know what they are really doing to earn money; the shame and loss of face would be permanent. In any case, they vehemently denied assimilation with professional prostitutes, even Chinese ones. Th is activity was at all times presented as non-permanent, a kind of dark interlude in their life, which they would like to forget once they go back to China,

41 Yun Gao and Véronique Poisson, Le trafi c et l’exploitation des immigrants chinois en France (Genève, 2005), p. 81; Wei Liu, Nouvelle immigration et prostitution chinoise à Paris (Paris, 2005). 42 Ibid. 76 carine pina-guerassimoff once they repay their debt, etc. Prostitution was only a way (albeit the only one) to realise the success of their migration. Returning to China seemed to be one of their major goals. Nonetheless, some of them said they would like to fi nd a “kind” man who will accept to marry them, even if they have to continue prostitution. Th ey oft en dreamed of a freedom of movement between China and Europe. In our point of view, the cases of Dongbei prostitutes (and their experiences) can be compared to many other women migrants staying illegally in Europe, without any possibility of work other than prostitution.43 Th ere are cases of professional Asian prostitutes (traffi cked or of Chinese origins or not) who are generally managed in criminal networks, and about whom knowledge is very limited and highly dependent upon police investigation. A ‘professional’ Chinese (PRC) prostitution has been recently observed to have developed in France as well as in other places in Europe (such as Italy). Some women are entering ‘criminal’ networks of Chinese ‘mammies’ who organise their recruitment in China and the work in Europe, generally in apartments or arranged through new technologies (internet-mobile phone prostitution). Th is can for example be observed in Italy during recent years. But for the moment, only few details are known about these activities and the women involved in it. Another trend also appears with young urban women, who previously engaged in this activity in China, heard of better opportunities in Europe and thus continued in this work, also without pimps. Th ese young women are recognised generally because, contrary to the Dong- bei women, only a short period of time passed between their arrival and their pursuit of prostitution. Th ey also came from big urban centres such as Shanghai or Tianjin where prostitution is of growing importance, as it is in fact in all urban Chinese areas.44 It seems here

43 Th ere is now many studies and work done on the subject. To cite just few of them used in my own research: Sophie Day and Helen Ward, eds., Sex, Work, Mobility and Health in Europe, (London, 2004); Nicola Piper and Prapairat R. Mix, “Does Marriage ‘Liberate’ Women from Sex Work? Th ai Women in Germany,” in Wife or Worker? Asian Women and Migration, eds. Nicola Piper and Mina Roces (Oxford, 2003), pp. 53–71. One can also report to the excellent and original approach and studies made by Laura Maria Augustin, Sex at the Margins: Migration, Labour Markets and the Rescue Industry (London, 2007). Augustin reassembled testimonies of women from diff erent origins which describe their migration process and the place of prostitution in them, which can be on many points compared with Chinese women migrants experiences met in my own fi eldwork. 44 Elaine Jeff reys, China, Sex and Prostitution (London, 2004) see in particular Chapter 4 “Prostitution Debates and a Changing China,” pp. 96–123. Gail Hershat- chinese women in the new migration process to europe 77 that migration is viewed as a means to pursue a resource for higher income. But in this case too, further fi eldwork must be done to know more details of these women and their experiences.

Highly Qualifi ed Women and Students: Playing an Economic Role in Two Places As we have seen, for the past few decades, France and other countries in Europe also encountered the arrival of young Chinese students or women with highly qualifi ed backgrounds. Once in Europe, they try to improve their language skills, to acquire other university degrees, and at the same time, hold a job. As we observed, they fi rst fi nd jobs related with the ethnic economy where more qualifi cations are needed (e.g. travel agencies, computer services, import/export, and language courses). Aft er graduating, they fi nd employment in French or foreign fi rms working in China or in Asia. We also met Chinese women who, aft er getting the necessary long residence permit (through marriage/naturalisation, etc.), want to create their own business, between China/Asia and France/Europe. Interviews held in May 2007 with one of the most important associations dealing with women and business settings, based in Paris (IRFED—Institut de Recherche, de Formation et de Développement), show the growing number of these Chinese women migrants. Th e Chinese women involved with this association held high university degrees (masters or PhDs), in the fi elds of law, architecture, and business. Th e most important point to note here is that these women act outside the Chinese community, wanting to fi nd advice and help through the global work market, becoming agents of the global economy in more ‘offi cial’ ways. New Chinese women migrants in all these cases are economic actresses. Th ey hold an important role in the production activities within the ‘migration institution’. Nonetheless, at the same time, many of them also fulfi l, the more ‘classic’ gender role of reproduction.

Actresses of Reproduction Th e growing engagement of Chinese women migrants in the economic sphere does not exempt them from their duties of reproduction, traditionally focusing on procreating and educating children. ter, “Chinese Sex Workers in the Reform Period”, in Putting Class in its Place: Worker Identities in East Asia, ed. John Perry (California, 1996), pp. 199–224. 78 carine pina-guerassimoff

Procreating As stated above among their reasons for migration, many Zhejiang women joined their husbands or migrated to marry one of their country fellows who was already abroad. Once in Europe, many of them became pregnant very soon, even when in precarious or even illegal administrative situations. Bearing children appeared very important for successful migration. Th ere was a remarkable rise in consultations of pregnant Chinese women at the end of the 1990s. Hospitals in Paris (St. Antoine notably), nurse services, women in social and childcare services began to employ translators, and/or cultural mediators. Th is was coupled with the exemption of payment for medical care introduced for immigrants. Because the existence of well developed services for pregnant women in China were linked with the one child policy, many Chinese women (even from rural areas) were used to the medical follow up and felt reassured by the French medical provisions. It seems very easy and also simplistic, to explain the importance of child-bearing in relation with French immigration law: parents of a child born on French territory cannot be deported. But, if some parents appeared to be informed of this measure during their medical consultations, one child would be suffi cient to secure their case in front of the law. However, Zhejiang women continued to have more than one child. As we explain below, the main objective for them is to bear a son (or more) which would induce a great change in their ‘gender’ status in the family. Migration enables them to escape the one child policy and to fulfi l their ‘main’ role of giving a son to their husband’s family.

Child Bearing and Education Nonetheless, problems occur rapidly with the question of caring for the children. Women still have to work to raise their economic status, or simply to repay their debts. Th eir working hours (early in the morning till late in the night) are not compatible with child rearing. Th ese families oft en had no social networks to help them take care of their children and give them a Chinese cultural education, which they considered important. French childcare institutions did not cater to their working hours and oft en, because of their precarious legal status, they dared not make contact with ‘offi cial’ French institutions. Depend- ing on their fi nancial incomes and social networks, they had several options for helping them cope. If the grandparents were already in France, it was they who would take care of the children, which is also chinese women in the new migration process to europe 79 common in China when women work. Yet in conditions of migration, these very useful social networks were not available for the majority of women migrants. Some families could aff ord to have a nanny at home, but that was not the case for the majority. Most could only aff ord to send their children to a Chinese nanny’s home, where other children spent the whole week and their parents would only see them during the weekends. Finally, those with the lowest incomes preferred to send the children back to China to be educated by their family. Women, as child bearers in migration, were traditionally seen as the main actors to maintain ‘cultural’ links: through language and education (they were mostly in charge of the fi rst contact with Chinese culture through stories, songs, writing and reading). Women also talked with the children about their origin in China and were in charge of their choice of education. But when becoming agents of production, they did not have enough time to fulfi l this cultural role. While in a totally diff erent situation, children’s education and care were also major goals of the migrant Dongbei women. Contrary to the Zhejiang women, who left their children behind at a very young age (under fi ve years old), the children of the Dongbei women were teenagers, or young adults (around 20 years old). Th ey pursued college studies and hoped to enter university. Th eir future, especially their training in education, was oft en cited by them to be a “major economic problem”. Studying at university became, during these last decades, very selective in China: selection is made through an access competition but also by means of high registration fees that must be added to daily expenses (housing/furniture/food). If their parents lost their jobs, many students had to stop studying. Th e departure overseas of many Dongbei was oft en connected with this problem. Chil- dren’s education also entered in a diff erent way in the consideration of migration: many Chinese women of all origins said that they hoped to bring their children to Europe to off er them better training and life opportunities than in China. As pioneer migrants, they oft en saw themselves as trailblazers for their children. If new Chinese women migrants fulfi lled their ‘traditional’ roles of reproduction and education in migration, they closely associated them with their economic productive activity which occupied an ever growing place. In sustaining these roles, they also actively participated to keep alive the links with home and their non-migrant relatives, compelled, as they were, with their contractual family obligations. 80 carine pina-guerassimoff

Maintaining the Migration Institution from Abroad Just as men were, women have now become essential to running the complex of migration. Fulfi lling their duties towards people who stay behind and acting as trail-blazers for future migrants, they actively promote the system of circulatory migration so essential for keeping the system running smoothly.

Migrants because of Non-migrants Th e new Chinese women migrants in France, as in other parts of Europe, are still part of the so-called chain migration, supported by the existence of a network.45 While it mainly concerns Zhejiang migrants, some Dongbei women also now follow this pattern. Upon their arrival in France, women migrants maintain close links with China, especially during the fi rst stage of migration, when most of them have close family members (spouses and children), as well as parents and others siblings who remain in China. It is worth noting that such links are also maintained because of the oft en very high debt many migrants incur before leaving China. In particular, this applies to irregular migrants who are at the mercy of smugglers who helped them go abroad. Th e great majority of women respondents had borrowed money to be able to leave China. Besides using their own savings, many were also able to borrow money from their families and thus avoid professional money lenders and usurers. Financial obligations were also linked with moral ones, for instance when children have been left in the care of family members in China. Contact with them is now easier than before because of the new tele- communications services: migrants can, for very low costs, keep in daily contact with home, and remain present in the everyday life of their family.46

Circulation of Remittances and Goods One of the fi rst consequences of the maintenance of such links is fi nancial fl ows. Th e remittances sent back to China by these women mainly served to pay off their debts. Th ese funds are of course used

45 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, ed., Les nouvelles migrations chinoises en Europe au début du XXIe siècle, special issue of Migrations-Société 15 (2003), 17–32. 46 Carine Guerassimoff -Pina, Eric Guerassimoff , and Nora Wang, La circulation des nouveaux migrants économiques chinois en France et en Europe (Paris, 2002). chinese women in the new migration process to europe 81 to cover the family’s daily expenses and to take care of the children. Aft er repaying the debt, remittances sent by women (as with men) also served to build houses, open small businesses, etc. Various means are used to transfer money back to China. Most of them are informally sent, through friends or channels off ered by their employers. Some interviewed women said that they sometimes sent gift s to their family (such as perfumes), and they generally received goods from China like clothes, foodstuff s, cigarettes and medicines which are cheaper in China than in France, helping them to save more money.

Circulation of Information and the Building of New Networks Chinese women migrants are now becoming major actresses in the circulation of information and the building of new networks (the cases of Dongbei). Th e information transmitted does not always correspond to their reality in France. Oft en, notably in the case of Dongbei, they keep the diffi culty of their situation to themselves, both to avoid losing face if things have not turned out as well as they had hoped and to keep their families from worrying. Nonetheless, some try to paint a more realistic picture of their uneasy immigration conditions, trying to advise other members of their family and friends not to migrate. Th is is diffi cult for them especially when others (including women) return and demonstrate their success and wealth. In the case of women, this success seems to be more ‘gendered’ and is closely connected with ‘good’ marriage and having more children. Information networks are also important relays for exchanging news regarding opportunities, to ask for jobs, or to solicit letters of invitation. In the case of Dongbei, it contributes to the building of a new network. Some recent Chinese women migrants said that they got information through a “sister” who told them there were opportunities to work as nannies or in the entertainment industry. One of the questions in this fi eld remains if we can detect a ‘gender’ bias in the information itself as in the way the information is circulating through women.

Conclusion

Chinese women are, for the moment, still being considered as minor and marginal actors in Chinese migration trends, despite the reality of the growing importance of their role in maintaining the migration institution alive, as we have tried to assert here. Knowledge about 82 carine pina-guerassimoff their migration process and conditions are improving, through fi eldwork and renewal of theoretical approaches about women’s migration. Nonetheless, further research is necessary in this fi eld, to see, for example, how their migration trends contribute to the history of the Chinese migratory institution and the establishment of long-term translocal communities, if the migration process has an impact on their gender relations, and by what means can state migration policies (including the Chinese one) take into account women, and gender processes in migration. Chinese women’s migration is closely linked with the important social changes occurring in China, including changing gender roles. Th ese changes oft en devalue the situation of Chinese women, even making it more insecure, while at the same time off ering more ‘freedom’ or ‘individuality’ to women. Chinese women’s migration is also closely connected with the globalisation of ‘gendered’ economic activities (care, prostitution, factory work) and can be easily compared with the international migration processes of other women. In other words, the character of their migration is shaped by the migratory situation and gender relations more than by cultural factors. Th ese explanations cannot be ignored, while they contribute to the ‘victimisation’ of women in migration. But while they are ‘victims’ in the context of a changing macrolevel,47 Chinese women also have to be understood as voluntary agents of their destiny, as major actors in the migration agencies (at meso and micro levels).48

47 Th omas Faist, “Th e Crucial Meso-Level,” in International Migration, Immobility and Development: Multidisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Tomas Hammar et al. (Oxford, 1997), pp. 187–218. For the presentation of the three levels’ theory, see pp. 194–197. 48 Laura Maria Augustin, “Cessons de parler de victimes, reconnaissons aux migrants leur capacité d’agir,” in Genre, nouvelle division internationale du travail et migrations, eds. Christine Verschuur and Reysoo Fenneke (Paris, 2005), pp. 109–118; Laura Osos Casas, “Femmes, actrices des mouvements migratoires,” in ibid., pp. 35–54. PROUD FIGHTERS, BLIND MEN: WORLD WAR EXPERIENCES OF COMBATANTS FROM THE ARAB EAST

Katharina Lange ZMO, Berlin

Introduction

The world wars of the twentieth century, which were started in Europe, quickly extended to other parts of the world, including the Middle East. As a region of strategic importance, garrison for the warring parties, hinterland for gathering supplies and resources, object of political and propagandistic interventions, and, in consequence, partly as battle field, the Middle East and its populations were directly affected by the wars even where no military action took place. During the Second World War, thousands of men in the Arab East—the Mashriq—alone served in armies which were fighting on both sides of the respective military coalitions. It is the experiences and memories of these Mashriq veterans of the Second World War that are the subject of this chapter. How did they live through the war years, and what lasting effects did this experience have on their lives? Following Samuel Hynes’s insistence on the significance of personal narratives of war experiences, and their distinctness from other forms of ‘remembering’,1 this chapter is devoted to uncovering some—however fragmentary—individual perspectives of Mashriq participants in the world wars. Although the focus of this chapter lies on experiences of the Sec- ond World War, examples from the First World War will be included. Clearly, the two wars differed from each other regarding their effects on the local population. Nevertheless, perceptions of the Second World War were shaped by the experience of the First as some of the accounts presented below will indicate; in many cases, combatants of the Second

1 Samuel Hynes, “Personal Narratives and Commemoration,” in War and Remem- brance in the Twentieth Century, eds. Jay Winter and Emmanuel Sivan, Studies in the Social and Cultural History of Modern Warfare 5 (Cambridge, Eng., 2000), pp. 206ff. 84 katharina lange

World War were veterans of the First. In both conflicts, combatants from the region participated in a war which had been declared between ‘foreign’ powers; most—although not all—of them fought under ‘foreign’ commanders or in armies which were not ‘local’, and many of them were trained, garrisoned or deployed in areas which they had never visited before. In the course of the world wars, Europeans and Non-Europeans interacted both within and across the borders of the participating armies and military coalitions; ideas as well as people and goods were moved across geographic, national and social boundaries; identities, norms, spaces and conditions for new strategies and actions were reformulated in the liminal atmosphere and volatile circumstances created by the wars; political processes and social transformations gained new dynamism.2 Yet boundaries— political or social—by no means disappeared; rather, military discipline and action, violence and the many pressures under which war-related encounters between different actors took place frequently limited, channelled and regulated mobility rather than enhancing it. War experiences were structured by the rhythm of troop movements. Stays in garrisons or training camps, which often lasted weeks or months, were interrupted by the sudden arrival of marching orders and the ensuing troop movements to other garrisons or to the front. Soldiers as well as low ranking officers often were not informed of their units’ destination; this scarcity of information was exacerbated by lack of geographical knowledge or of language skills. Speculations and guesses about a unit’s destination relied on assumptions, rumours and passed-on information about the course of the war.3 The organisation of physical movement of individual combatants as well as troop contingents was strictly reglemented by the military bureaucracies. Travelling soldiers and officers had to carry travel permits, marching orders or permits for leave, which they had to produce at any time during travelling, at the starting points and destinations of their journeys. Violations of these rules could be sanctioned with arrest, court martial, or even death. Nevertheless, desertions and other strategies of

2 Gerhard Höpp and Lutz Rogler, “Weltkriege und Weltsichten: Arabische Wahr- nehmungen des Ersten und des Zweiten Weltkrieges,” funded project proposal to the German Research Association, 2003. 3 As described in Ğūrğ Ḥannā, Qabla’l-maġīb: Tağārub wa-d̠ikrayāt min ḥayātī (Beirut, n.d), p. 160. proud fighters, blind men 85 seeking—at least temporary—reprieve from military service abounded especially in the First, but also during the Second World War. While earlier historiography of the world wars concentrated strongly on European perspectives, more recently non-European combatants have come into focus, yet a systematic analysis of Arab participants’ experiences is still lacking.4 The material presented here comes out of a research project on “Images of War: Arab Participant Experiences in World War I and World War II” which was conceptualised by the late Gerhard Höpp (1942–2003).5 Höpp, taking up earlier lines of research which focus on ‘military history from below’,6 proposed to investigate the experiences of Arab combatants in the two world wars of the twentieth century with a special focus on their translocal dimensions. In Höpp’s and his colleague’s, Lutz Rogler’s, conception, the “norms, rules, regulations and world views, memories and traumas, myths, images and symbols”7 which the wars with their movements of armies, goods and ideas left behind were to be at the centre of investigation. In December 2003, Gerhard Höpp passed away before he could pursue this research agenda in more depth. This article does not claim to realise his initial intentions, but it does take Höpp’s and Rogler’s conceptual layout as its point of departure, asking if, and how, personal war-narratives of Mashriq soldiers reflect the effects of the world wars on individual biographies. How have the manifold ‘translocal flows’ and movements of the world wars affected, and are echoed in, individual experiences of combatants fighting in these wars? Regarded in this way, war-narratives of combatants from the Arab East may be used as a case study which can serve to illustrate scope and limits of ‘translocality’ as outlined by Freitag and von Oppen: it characterises a specific aspect of historical (and ongoing) social or economic processes, namely the connection between regular, persisting or recurrent spatial flows—of ideas, symbols, goods, or people— and resultant social or cultural transformations at the local level.

4 For instance, contributions in Olaf Farschid, Manfred Kropp and Stephan Dähne, eds., The First World War as Remembered in the Countries of the Eastern Mediterra- nean, (Beiruter Texte und Studien) 99 (Würzburg, 2006). 5 The project was financed by the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft and was conducted at Zentrum Moderner Orient, Berlin between July 2004 and June 2006. 6 Wolfgang Wette, ed., Der Krieg des kleinen Mannes: Eine Militärgeschichte von unten, 2nd ed. (München, 1995). 7 Gerhard Höpp and Lutz Rogler, “Weltkriege und Weltsichten.” 86 katharina lange

These transformations are understood very broadly: they may refer to long-term social and cultural change, such as the emergence of new normative systems or symbolic orders. But besides these deep and wide-reaching transformations, ‘consolidations’ which emerge out of translocal processes may also include “attempts by [social] actors [. . .] to develop or preserve certain spaces and patterns of action, communication and representation.”8 In order to explore these questions, I will first introduce motivations for young men from the Mashriq to join the war, relating them to the various contingents in which these soldiers served. Following that, I will turn to structural constraints and spaces of action which shaped combatants’ war experiences. Finally, it will be asked which traces these experiences left in the soldiers’ life-stories. The chapter is based on interviews with veterans in Syria and Jor- dan about their experiences during the Second World War which I conducted between April 2005 and February 2006, as well as archival documents and some published accounts. Syrian and Jordanian combatants’ own perspectives on the world wars may be on record in the form of autobiographical publications. However, this is mainly the case with memories of the First World War, which many Arab politicians, intellectuals and military men mention in the context of the movement for Arab independence from the Ottomans generally, and the Arab Revolt more specifically.9 The Second World War has a less prominent place in autobiographical narratives; the war years are often mentioned mainly as the last phase of the mandate period in the Middle East. In these publications, other armed conflicts in the region such as the revolt in Palestine 1936–39 or the Arab-Israeli war of 1948 often appear as deeper ruptures in the history of the region than the Second World War itself.

8 “[. . .] Einrichtungsprozesse werden zunächst als Versuche der Akteure inter- pretiert, in [. . .] durch Translokalität geprägten Situationen bestimmte Räume und Muster von Handeln, Kommunikation und Vorstellung zu entwickeln oder zu bewah- ren,” Ulrike Freitag, Achim von Oppen, “Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verflechtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), 4. 9 See for instance ʿAlī Muḥammad al-ʿAğlūnī, D̠ ikrayātī ʿan at-t̠ aura̠ al-ʿarabīya al-kubrā (Amman, n.d.); Jafar Pasha Al-Askari, A Soldier’s Story: From Ottoman Rule to Independent Iraq—The Memoirs of Jafar Pasha Al-Askari, trans. Mustafa Tariq Al- Askari, eds. William Facey and Najdat Fathi Safwat (London, 2003); Ḥannā, Qabla’l- maġīb; and Ḫairīya Qāsimīya, ed., Mud̠akkirāt Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī (Beirut, 1975), for memories of military service. proud fighters, blind men 87

“A personal narrative of war”, Samuel Hynes writes, “is what can be made of remembered war”, rather than a ‘realistic’ account of ‘what really happened’.10 Written as well as oral accounts of war experiences are expressed from an—often considerable—temporal distance to the events that are narrated. Thus, the experiences told, as all narrated memories, are subject to later revisions, impressions, and interpretations which may be influenced by considerations located in the present. More recent political processes and circumstances, or biographical developments which occurred after the war years, may influence these accounts which make (implicit as well as explicit) reference to those later developments. Buschmann and others have suggested referring to the category of ‘experience’ in order to gain a new understanding of war perceptions. In their definition, experience is shaped not only by actual events, but also by later interpretations and meanings attributed ‘after the fact’.11 This approach, they argue, would make it possible to focus not only on the description of actual, war-related events, but also to include—at least partly—the subjective interpretations and meanings given to these events, and even point to some of the structural, non- subjective factors which underlie these interpretations and meanings.12 The material presented in this chapter is thus not evaluated in terms of ‘factual accuracy’, but considered primarily as testimony of personal war experiences which are still emerging, being shaped, told and retold in the present, a narrative that documents the process of making sense of what was lived through.

Joining up

In contrast to the First World War, when many inhabitants of the region were drafted against their will into the Ottoman army, Syr- ians and Jordanians who fought in the Second World War, either for the Allies or on the side of the Axis, had joined the respective armies

10 Hynes, “Personal Narratives and Commemoration,” p. 205. 11 Nikolaus Buschmann and Horst Carl, eds., Die Erfahrung des Krieges: Erfah- rungsgeschichtliche Perspektiven von der Französischen Revolution bis zum Zweiten Weltkrieg, (Krieg in der Geschichte) 9 (Paderborn, 2001). 12 Nikolaus Buschmann and Aribert Reimann, “Die Konstruktion historischer Erfahrung: Neue Wege zu einer Erfahrungsgeschichte des Krieges,” in Die Erfahrung des Krieges, eds. Buschmann and Carl, p. 262. 88 katharina lange voluntarily (although it must be asked what ‘volunteering’ to the participating armies meant in each case—or, to be exact, how much ‘free will’ was actually involved in individual decisions to join up). In many cases, soldiers and officers serving in the territorial armies of mandated Syria and Transjordan, respectively, had entered these troops in the interwar years. Many, if not most, of them were motivated by material or financial considerations. Many of the recruits came from a poor background, notably young peasants who either did not own any land themselves or who originated from a poor rural region.13 Long before the beginning of the war, Syrians were recruited to the Troupes Spéciales, local auxiliary troops of the French mandate administration. Often, ethnic minorities were strongly represented in these troops; Druze and Circassians for instance formed the main part of the well-trained and well-equipped cavalry of the Troupes Spécial- es.14 When the French mandate administration in Syria sided with the Vichy government in 1940, these troops became potentially part of the forces on the Axis side. During the war, both the Axis and the Allies used Syria as a manpower reservoir. As late as July 1941, German Foreign Office official Rudolf Rahn managed to recruit 500 Syrian volunteers and swear them to an Arab flag in Aleppo, pledging to fight against the Allied troops.15 It seems that a good part of these volunteers were motivated by material rather than ideological or political considerations; Rahn noted later that “one especially enterprising freedom fighter wanted to sell some of the newly given out rifles at the fence” right after the swearing-in.16 Shortly after, it was the British army which stepped up world war recruitment in Northern Syria. In February 2006, I met Ḫ alīl, a Kurd- ish farmer from the village of Sheikh Hemo, who had served with the British army in World War Two. Ḫ alīl told me the story of his joining

13 For an example from the Druze mountains, see Sulaimān ʿAlī as-Ṣ ̣abbāġ: Mud̠akkirāt ḍābit ̣ ʿarabī bi-ğaiš al-intidāb al-firansī, ed. Ibrāhīm as-Ṣ ̣abbāġ, ([Dam- askus], n.d.), p. 25. 14 For a more detailed account of recruitment and history of the Troupes Spéciales, see Nacklie Elias Bou-Nacklie, “Les Troupes Spéciales: Religious and Ethnic Recruit- ment, 1916–1946,” International Journal of Middle Eastern Studies 25 (1993), 645–660, and idem, “The 1941 Invasion of Syria and Lebanon: The Role of the Local Paramili- tary,” Middle Eastern Studies 30, 3 (1994), 512–529. 15 Hans Werner Neulen, An deutscher Seite: Internationale Freiwillige von Wehr- macht und Waffen-SS (München, 1985), p. 364. 16 Rahn memories, quoted in Neulen, An deutscher Seite, p. 365. proud fighters, blind men 89 up as a consequence of his search for wage labour: an orphan since childhood, he had no land of his own to cultivate and earned his living as a wage labourer in other people’s fields. Hoping to find employment for the day or a longer period, he went into the nearby market town of Afrin where, he said, he was surprised to see a large crowd in front of a coffeehouse. A bystander explained to him that a recruitment drive for the British army had just begun. Ḫ alīl told me that he decided to volunteer when he heard that the English paid good salaries. “I went inside”, he said, “and one of them asked: You English? I said: Naʿam [Arabic: yes]—because at that time, I did not know their language.” Ḫ alīl was recruited on the spot and transferred to a training camp south of Aleppo. From there he was sent on with other Syrian volunteers, first by train to Damascus, then Palestine, then Egypt. In Suez, his unit embarked on a sea journey to Italy. They landed in Bari, where Ḫ alīl remained stationed almost until the end of the war.17 At the time of Ḫ alīl’s recruitment into the British army, Aleppo and the surrounding countryside hosted garrisons for diverse units serving with the Allies. Although military action on Syrian territory, involving the Syrian, North and West African, and French soldiers under Vichy French command, and the Allied troops—among them Free French, British, Transjordanian, and Indian combatants—who had entered Syria a month earlier, had been formally ended with the 14 July 1941 armistice, the Allied armies still feared unrest which would play out in favour of the Axis. Allied troops therefore remained stationed in Syria until 1946, despite promises of independence made by the Allies before their invasion of Syria in 1941. Northern Syria was temporary home to various troops under British command, among them the Trans Jordan Frontier Force, Australian and New Zealand troops. Their duty was to guard the border against suspected infiltration of German agents from Turkey; at the same time, local volunteers were recruited for deployment in the Mediterranean theatre.

17 Interview in the village of Sheikh Hemo, Aleppo Province (February 4, 2006). Names of villages and persons are changed. As is the case with other interviews quoted in this chapter, the description of Ḫ alīl’s wartime experiences is based on his own account. I have not been able to match the details which Ḫ alīl recollects with archival documents pertaining to his individual fate. For a more detailed discussion of war experiences in Ḫ alīl’s region of origin, see Katharina Lange, “Peripheral Experiences: Everyday Life in Kurd Dagh (Northern Syria) during the Allied Occupation in the Second World War,” forthcoming. 90 katharina lange

French sources record British enlistment of Syrian Kurds as early as August 1941,18 yet other Syrian recruits had joined the British forces even earlier, before the Allied invasion of Syria—possibly having deserted from Syrian contingents in spring 1941.19 Shortly after the beginning of the Allied occupation, locals who were already serving in British units circulated in Kurd Dagh, having come home ‘on leave’ to promote service in the British forces and attract volunteers.20 By February 1942, at least a thousand Syrians were reported to serve with the British forces in Palestine; British recruitment of Syrian volunteers was estimated to amount to 15 to 30 young men per day.21 Ḫ alīl was one of them. In other instances, as in the case of the Transjordanian Arab Legion, the decision to join the army appears as a conscious ‘career choice’ of an aspiring new elite, motivated largely by the lack of competitive career alternatives open to graduates of the secondary schools in Jeru- salem, Aley, or Salt.22 A later major general (liwāʾ rukn) of the Jorda- nian armed forces who signed up with the Arab Legion in 1942, for instance, told me “if we did not join the army, the only other possibility was to go into administrative service [with the British]”.23 This career choice may also have been influenced by the fact that the speaker’s older brother who had entered the army some eight years earlier had already risen quickly through the ranks.24 Former ambassador Kamāl

18 Letter from Fauqenot, Free French Délégué-Adjoint for the Governorate of Aleppo, to Lt. Colonel Summerhayes, British Political Officer in Aleppo (February 14, 1942), Centre des Archives Diplomatiques, Nantes (CADN), S-L, 1er vers., c.p., 770. 19 Bulletin d’Information from the Services Spéciaux at Afrin (November 1, 1942); cf. also Report by Captain François, Poste des Services Spéciaux Azaz (February 14, 1942), both CADN, S-L, 1er vers., c.p., 770. 20 The French observed this with suspicion; Delegation d’Alep, Bulletin Hebdo- madaire d’Information N° 40 for the period from October 26 to November 1, 1942; CADN, S-L, 1er vers., rens. et presse, 1997. There is no indication why, or how, these soldiers had joined the British forces in Palestine; possibly, they had been part of the French Troupes Spéciales and were among the deserters who had crossed into Pales- tine before the Allied invasion of Syria; cf. Bou-Nacklie, “The 1941 Invasion of Syria and Lebanon,” p. 514. 21 This was stated by a number of recruits from Kurd Dagh, who returned on leave to their home villages and were questioned by the French security services: List of two Syrians enlisted by British military authorities in Palestine, n.d. [Feb. 1942]; Reports by Captain François, Poste des Services Spéciaux Azaz (February 14 and 17, 1942), all CADN, S-L, 1er vers., c.p., 770. 22 Interview with three Arab Legion veterans in Amman (April 2005). I would like to express my sincere thanks to Jordanian historian, Suleiman Musa, who greatly helped me by facilitating contact with the Jordanian veterans quoted here. 23 Interview in Amman (April 7, 2005). 24 Ṣāliḥ aš-Šaraʿ, Mud̠akkirāt Ğundī ([Amman], 1985). proud fighters, blind men 91 al-Ḥ ammūd, one of the first Arab cadets to pass the very selective entry exam of the Arab Legion officer corps in 1940 and who, like other soldiers, made a career in the diplomatic service after the war, explained his decision with economic and social reasons: his entry salary was high enough to help support his family, and both of his parents expressed a strong preference for a military career for their son.25 According to al-Ḥ ammūd, his father’s ambition for his son to enter into military service stemmed from an experience during the First World War: during three days, their household had hosted Mustafa Kemal (later Atatürk), then an officer in the Ottoman army supervis- ing the troops’ withdrawal from Ajlun mountains. His father, he told me, had been so impressed by this officer’s personality and comport- ment that he strongly wished a military career for his son.26 Formally, the Transjordanian Arab Legion, founded in 1920, whose name went back to units that had participated in the Arab revolt against the Ottomans during the First World War, was the army of the British-mandated emirate of Transjordan. Under the nominal command of ʿAbdallāh b. Ḥ usayn, the emir—later king—of Transjor- dan, the troops were commanded and trained by British and Arab officers,27 the weapons originated mostly with the Ottoman army and had been used in the Arab revolt. Over time, they were supplemented with weapons from British army stock. In April 1939, Major John Bagot Glubb became commander-in-chief; he commanded the army during and after the Second World War. Glubb, who had previously been employed by the British administration in Iraq, had developed a romantic interest, as well as considerable knowledge, about dialect, customs and genealogies of the larger Bedouin tribes. He changed the legion’s recruitment policy to a stronger reliance on recruits from Bedouin tribes whom he considered an example of the ‘martial races’, fighters by virtue of their cultural and ethnic background who should preferably be recruited for military service.28 In 1941, the Arab Legion

25 Personal communication by Kamāl al-Ḥ ammūd who gave the year as 1940; see also Maan Abu Nowar, The Struggle for Independence 1939–1947: A History of the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan (Reading, 2001), p. 49 according to whom the exam took place in 1941. 26 Interview in Amman (April 7, 2005). 27 According to Abu Nowar, The Struggle for Independence, p. 49, the number of Arab officers was relatively small with only 40 in the beginning of 1941. 28 See Glubb’s introductory chapter, “The Martial Race,” in John Bagot Glubb, The Story of the Arab Legion (London, 1948), pp. 17ff. 92 katharina lange consisted of about 1800 officers and soldiers, a third of which were of Bedouin origin.29 One of the Bedouin recruits, who joined the Legion on Septem- ber 15, 1938 as an infantry soldier, was Sheikh Irfaifān Ḫ ālid Ṣafūq al-Ḫ rayšā, born around 1920. My interview with him was accompanied by his eldest son, a physician living in Amman, who mediated the conversation, sometimes repeating and explaining his father’s answers to me, since Sheikh Irfaifān had suffered a stroke some time ago and his speech was still impaired. When I visited Sheikh Irfaifān in his home about 100 km south of Amman, he told me that his decision to join the army was caused by “pride” (iʿtizāz) in being a fighter. This, his son explained, was part of their family and tribal tradition, since they belonged to the al-Ḫ rayšā, the sheikhly lineage of the Banī Ṣaḫr bedouin. I was told that at the beginning of the revolt in Palestine in 1936, Irfaifān had tried to cross into Palestine to support the Arab fighters. When he was caught at the border, one of the officers of the Arab Legion told him and his friends: “Why fight a guerrilla war in Palestine? After all, we do have an army of our own. So if you want to fight, join the army.” Following this advice, Irfaifān entered military service in 1938 and had a successful military career: having started out as foot soldier, he left the army highly decorated with the rank of a brigadier-general (ʿamīd) on 12th July 1964.30 The participation in Habforce, the British force which was sent into Iraq in 1941 to suppress al-Kailānī’s revolt against the British- controlled Iraqi government, was the first out-of-area deployment in military action for the Trans-Jordanian troops that had until then served primarily as a policing and gendarmerie unit. It was mainly members of the Mechanized Desert Force, a 350-strong unit equipped with reinforced Ford lorries with medium-range machine guns, that participated in the actions in Iraq and Syria in 1941.31 The Transjordanian army thus participated unmistakably on the side of the Allies, whom it supported throughout the Second World War in non-combatant duties as well as by providing troops for guard duties for British airfields and support lines in Palestine and then Iraq. This

29 Numbers according to Abu Nowar, The Struggle for Independence, p. 49. 30 Interview in Al-Muwaqqar (April 19, 2005). 31 Glubb, The Story of the Arab Legion, p. 259. proud fighters, blind men 93 policy was in contrast to popular perceptions that Axis policies might be more favorable to Arab interests, since Germany did not have any mandates or colonies in the Middle East and was fighting Britain, who did. Irfaifān, who took part in the fighting in Iraq and Syria and fought on the side of the Allies against the German and Italian armies at El Alamein, let me know that his own political sympathies, like that of many other Jordanians, were with the Germans rather than the Allies: “We liked the Germans. But there was nothing we could do [about it]. [. . .] Orders were orders.” That was military discipline.”32 Nazi Germany’s propaganda in the Middle East sought to exploit the political opposition of many Arabs to the mandate regimes, stressing the supposedly common interests of Arabs and Germans in their enmity to British and Jews, and voicing—if half-hearted and discon- tinuous—support for Arab national independence.33 The cooperation between Nazi Germany and Arab politicians, as well as soldiers, has met with considerable interest from researchers who have partly discussed this cooperation as a point of evidence for a supposed ideological closeness between Arabs (or, in fact, Muslims) and National Socialism.34 Yet despite this cooperation, and the distribution of Nazi propaganda in the Middle East the contingent of Arab soldiers actually serving with the Axis forces during the Second World War was considerably smaller than the number of Arabs fighting for the Allies. German recruitment of Arabs evolved slowly, partly due to political struggles between those Arab politicians in Germany involved in the creation of the unit (notably Ḥ ağğ Amīn al-Ḥ usaynī, Rašīd ʿAlī al-Kailānī and

32 Interview in Al-Muwaqqar (April 19, 2005). 33 For instance in a radio programme transmitted on October 21, 1940 (cf. H. Felmy/ W. Warlimont, “Die deutsche Ausnutzung der arabischen Eingeborenenbewegung im zweiten Weltkrieg,” n.d. [after 1955], German Military Archives Freiburg i. Br. [here- after called BArch-MArch] ZA 1/2257, p. 45); Gerhard Höpp, “Ruhmloses Zwischen- spiel: Fawzi al-Qawuqji in Deutschland, 1941–1947,” in Al-Rafidayn: Jahrbuch zu Geschichte und Kultur des modernen Iraq, 3, ed. Peter Heine (Würzburg, 1995), p. 23 points out the relevance of a second programme transmitted on December 5, 1940, with similar content. 34 A recent review of the discussion, focussing on Palestine, is Gideon Botsch, “Neues vom Mufti? Palästina und der Nationalsozialismus,” Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte 61, 3 (2009), 280–286. For an earlier comment on the debate, see Gerhard Höpp, “Araber im Zweiten Weltkrieg: Kollaboration oder Patriotismus?” in Jenseits der Legenden: Araber, Juden, Deutsche, ed. Wolfgang Schwanitz (Berlin, 1994), pp. 88ff. 94 katharina lange also Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī), but also because of political considerations between the Axis powers.35 In May 1942, only 130 Arab soldiers and non-commissioned officers were being trained by German officers.36 In late 1942, there were about 800 Arab combatants (compared to approximately 500 000 Arab soldiers on the Allied side).37 They were recruited into a special contingent of the German army, the so-called German Arab Training Detachment (Deutsch-Arabische Lehrabteilung), which in Arabic was referred to as the Free Arab Corps (al-mafraza al-ʿarabīya al-ḥurra). It had been established in early 1942 under the auspices of Sonderstab F, a special unit of the German army which had originally been founded in 1941 as ‘Military Mission to Iraq’ for deployment in the Middle East.38 In 1955, the former commander of the unit, general Hellmuth Felmy, solicited a number of letters from former fellow officers—Arab as well as German—about their war experiences, ostensibly in order to write his memoirs of the war years (which were never published). These letters, preserved in the German military archives, show the self- representation of this group ten years after the war. Through the ret- rospective and mediated character of these ‘war memories’, the letters should be read as a source for Arab combatants’ war experiences in the sense outlined above, rather than factual accounts of ‘what really happened’. Part of the Arab volunteers with the German army were recruited among Arab university students in Germany, a group which—according to the post-war recollections of a member of this group— had feared arrest and even deportation to concentration camps due to their unclear status in Germany since the beginning of the war.39

35 See Lukasz Hirszowicz, The Third Reich and the Arab East, (Studies in Political History) (London, 1966), pp. 250ff.; Höpp, “Ruhmloses Zwischenspiel,” pp. 26ff. 36 Hirszowicz, The Third Reich, p. 252. 37 Numbers according to Höpp, “Araber im Zweiten Weltkrieg,” p. 92. At this point, numbers can only be given as preliminary approximations. 38 See Hirszowicz, The Third Reich, pp. 250ff.; Höpp, “Ruhmloses Zwischenspiel,” pp. 26ff.; also Mallmann and Cüppers, Halbmond, pp. 90ff. for brief descriptions of these units and their genealogy. There is no comprehensive and systematic study of the German-Arab Training Detachment yet; an uncritical and descriptive account which is based largely on material of the German military archives (but does not give these references), is A. J. Munoz, Lions of the Desert: Arab Volunteers in the German Army 1941–1945, 2nd revised ed., [2000]. 39 Letter from Maḥmūd Rifāʿī to Felmy from Damascus (February 20, 1955), BArch- MArch ZA 1 / 2728. Indeed in 1944 Arab students who had not joined the army were obliged to serve as labourers (Decree by the German Foreign Ministry of August 6, proud fighters, blind men 95

Some had come from Syria after the capitulation of the Vichy army, a few young Iraqi men were ‘sent’ by Rašīd ʿAlī al-Kailānī, although “some of them claimed after their arrival that they only wanted to study in Germany and had no wish to be soldiers”.40 A very small number were recruited from Arab civilians, notably Egyptians, who had been arrested in Germany as ‘members of enemy states’ immediately following the outbreak of the war. They remained in intern- ment camps until June 1941 when they were released on the initiative of the German Foreign Office; the Minister for Foreign Affairs, Rib- bentrop, urged that this “release” should be “exploited politically”: the former prisoners might be used “for the radio and language service”, and possibly be employed by “military authorities”. However, as Ger- hard Höpp’s research shows, only very few of the released prisoners followed this ‘suggestion’; among other reasons, imprisonment had ruined some of the detainees’ health to a degree which made it impossible to enter military service—not to mention their unwillingness to fight in the service of a state which had made them suffer detention for almost two years.41 Other volunteers were prisoners of war from the British and French armies.42 For the recruits, volunteering for the German army may have appeared to offer a chance to—at least gradually—improve their situation and enhance their chances to return to their homelands, as the Arab recruits were promised to be deployed to the Middle East. How- ever, the unit was sent to the Eastern Front where it participated in

1944, quoted in Neulen, An deutscher Seite, p. 373, n 9). Höpp’s research on Arab prisoners in German concentration camps shows that there were at least 450, probably more, Arab inmates of concentration camps; Höpp notes that the reasons given for their detainment are scarce, but names ‘political’, ‘criminal’ as well as racist reasons; Höpp, Gerhard, “Der verdrängte Diskurs: Arabische Opfer des Nationalsozialismus,” in Blind für die Geschichte? Arabische Begegnungen mit dem Nationalsozialismus, eds. Gerhard Höpp, Peter Wien, and René Wildangel, Studien Zentrum Moderner Orient, Geisteswissenschaftliche Zentren Berlin e.V. 19 (Berlin, 2004), pp. 246ff. 40 Hirszowicz, The Third Reich, p. 251. 41 Höpp, “Der verdrängte Diskurs,” pp. 220f. 42 Interned under most often detrimental hygienic conditions, the mortality rate in the POW camps was high; more than ten thousand Arab POWs had to work on German fortification constructions, armaments industry, and agriculture especially in German-occupied Southern France, receiving minimal wage compensation for eight- to twelve-hour working days, Höpp, “Der verdrängte Diskurs,” p. 299. See pp. 224–231 of the same article for an overview of the situation of Arab POWs in German camps. 96 katharina lange the fighting at Stalino, today Donezk, during the second half of 1942;43 in January 1943, it was transferred to Tunis by way of Sicily. With the capitulation of the German contingents in Tunisia in May 1943, a large number of their Arab soldiers were taken prisoner; the rest were evacuated, supplemented with a newly recruited German-Arab bat- talion and again stationed in Greece where they were charged mostly with guard duties.44 From 1944 on, the unit participated in the slow withdrawal of the German army from Greece over Yugoslavia to Aus- trian and finally German territory. Upon the German capitulation in May 1945, those Arab combatants of the unit who had not fled or deserted, been taken prisoner or been killed during the retreat, were given papers declaring them as ‘foreign workers’; they were left to find their way home.45 The heterogeneous background of the recruits and their mixed motives for joining up were viewed critically by more committed members of the unit, as the comment of Maḥmūd Rifāʿī, an Arab engineer who served as a lieutenant with the German-Arab Training Corps indicates: according to his memories which he conveyed in a letter written to Felmy in 1955, many of the Arab intellectuals after initial expressions of enthusiasm changed their minds about taking active part in the war, while the “persuaded” prisoners of war, former members of a “defeated” army, were neither motivated nor prepared to form a new, “orderly” army: “these people must be considered mer- cenaries, never freedom fighters.”46 The statement of a former German officer who claimed that “even among the volunteers, only few fol-

43 According to Höpp, “Araber im Zweiten Weltkrieg,” p. 92, only German members of the unit were involved in the fighting. 44 Neulen, An deutscher Seite, p. 373. 45 Cf. H. Felmy and W. Warlimont, “Die deutsche Ausnutzung der arabischen Ein- geborenenbewegung im zweiten Weltkrieg,” n.d. [after 1955], BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2257 and letter from G. Schacht, one of the German officers in this unit, to Hellmuth Felmy (July 21, 1955), BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2728; see also Höpp, “Der verdrängte Diskurs,” pp. 224f. 46 “Die studierenden Araber [die bei Kriegsausbruch in Deutschland lebten] ueber- legten es sich noch einmal [. . .] Die ueberredeten Kriegsgefangenen und ehemals unter britischer Fahne kaempfenden Araber. Die nordafrikanischen Arbeiter und Kriegsge- fangenen der geschlagenen französischen Armee. Daraus kann kein ordentliches Heer gestellt werden. Diese Menschen gelten als Soeldner und niemals als Freiheitskaemp- fer.”; Letter from Maḥmūd Rifāʿī to Helmuth Felmy from Damascus (February 20, 1955); similarly Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī in a letter to Felmy, dated Beirut (July 28, 1955), both BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2728. proud fighters, blind men 97 lowed the German flag out of ideological or national idealism” echoes these perceptions.47

Languages and Identities

Language borders, as well as ways to cross them, were an important factor that structured spaces of action for the combatants. Arab soldiers of the Ottoman army, for instance, often learned only during military service to understand enough Ottoman Turkish that they could follow military commands and orders.48 In the Mandate troops of the Second World War, Arabic was the common language during everyday training and military action. Some of the European officers serving in these units were able to speak Arabic (J. B. Glubb, for instance, is said to have been a fluent speaker of Bedouin dialects). Mostly, it was the duty of Arab subaltern officers to translate orders given in English, French or German to the troops. Ḫ alīl, who had an additional language barrier to cross since his native tongue was Kurdish, not Arabic, recalls similar arrangements. For aspiring recruits or cadets, knowledge of a European language was therefore an asset which could enhance their chances of employment with the army, as the autobiographical accounts of several former officers of the Arab Legion show. Of the few German officers serving in theGerman-Arab Training Corps who were able to speak Arabic, many were German nationals from the German-speaking settler communities in Palestine.49 Their language skills were valued by other German officers who were not capable of speaking Arabic. To them, the ‘Palästinadeutschen’ were helpful and efficient translators of military orders (which were given in

47 Warlimont in H. Felmy/W. Warlimont, “Die deutsche Ausnutzung der arabischen Eingeborenenbewegung im zweiten Weltkrieg,” n.d. [after 1955], BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2257, p. 191. 48 See Ḥ annā, Qabla’l-maġīb, p. 144. 49 From 1868 on, a community of German pietists from Württemberg (‘Templer’) had settled in Palestine; Ralf Balke, Hakenkreuz im Heiligen Land: Die NSDAP- Landesgruppe in Palästina (Erfurt, 2001), p. 9. Young men of this community were required by the German authorities to do the obligatory military service in the Ger- man armed forces which had been reintroduced in 1935. At the outbreak of the Second World War, the German authorities issued a ‘military order’ to all potential conscripts to leave Palestine for Germany. On August 31, 1939, 232 of them left the country, but a considerable number remained in Palestine and were arrested and interned by the British authorities a few days later; Balke, Hakenkreuz im Heiligen Land, pp. 74ff. 98 katharina lange

German) and instructions. However, Arab members of the unit seem to have experienced their attitudes as colonialist and racist. Ten years after the war, one Arab officer of the unit characterised the Arabic spoken by this group as crude and offensive, and some of their orders as intentionally debasing.50 Sometimes, it seems, Arabic as the language of the Qurʾān and the first language of Islam could build a (if temporary and fleeting) bridge, linking Muslim soldiers even across enemy lines. Muḥammad ʿAlī al-ʿAğlūnī for instance, an Arab officer serving in the Ottoman army during the First World War, describes an encounter with an Indian officer who had served with the British troops and was taken prisoner by the Ottoman army. As a Muslim, the Indian officer had studied high standard Arabic so that the two officers were able to enter into a conversation. Al-ʿAğlūnī casts the Indian officer in a prophetic role: We Indian Muslims are sympathetic to the Khalifate state and hope that it will continue to exist after the war. But the sad truth is that it will lose the war, together with its ally, Germany. The end of the Ottoman Empire will be the outcome [. . .] But your [i.e. the Arabs’] hopes will be fulfilled!51 A similar example is an event from the Second World War, recounted by Ḫ alīl, the Kurdish labourer. When he and his unit were taken prisoner by the German army, probably during the fights in southern Italy in winter 1943/1944, they were taken to a prisoner-of-war camp in the mountains. Ḫ alīl still remembers the terrible situation and oppressive atmosphere during his imprisonment, which lasted, he says, three months and seventeen days. When we arrived at the camp, I looked at the fence: seven rows of wire, one after the other. The first line was ordinary wire, after that only barbed wire. [. . .] There was no bread. There was a barrel of salt in which they poured the water—now drink! [. . .] And one day, I was sitting there like this [he crouches with his arms tightly wrapped around his body]. [. . .] Of course, if you had a cigarette and they caught you with it, they would shoot you! [. . .] And there is a guard, [on a watchtower] just beside me. And—I heard him recite the Qurʾān [. . .] in a beautiful manner! Just hearing it refreshed my spirit. [. . .] And I sat upright! I said [in Arabic]: There is no God but God, and Muḥammad is his prophet. Oh God,

50 Letter from Maḥmūd Rifāʿī to Felmy from Damascus (February 20, 1955), BArch- MArch ZA 1 / 2728. 51 Al-ʿAğlūnī, D̠ ikrayātī, p. 22. proud fighters, blind men 99

release me from this torture! [. . .] Then I saw the guard come down from his [tower]. He closed his Qurʾān and came down. He said: You Arabi? I said: No! Tcherkess? No. Christian? No. I said: Kurdi. Kurdish, Kurd- ish! He asked: What is your name? I said: Ḫ alīl Muḥammad. He made a gesture. I thought: Now he will kill me. [. . .] He said: Your name is Ḫ alīl Muḥammad? I said yes. [. . .] He was a German, a dark young man with a pointed mustache. A strong young man! He said: “Tu hungry?” That means: do you want to eat? I made a gesture with my hand, meaning: very! He went away—and came back with a plate—like this!—, full of rice and with a slice of margarine. And trousers, and a jacket, and shoes. He lifted me up. Did you think I was strong enough to stand up by myself?? He lifted me up, put the jacket on me and closed the buttons. Then, I put the trousers on by myself (pardon me!). I saw him thinking deeply. He went away again and brought me a pair of old socks—from where, I don’t know. Then I put on the socks and the shoes. Then he said: Ḫ alīl, when you are hungry, tell me! Then I will bring you food.Q.: in which language? A: In Arabic.52 Some time after this, ̮ Halīl was one of eleven prisoners who were let go in exchange for a number of German prisoners of war with the British army. Today, he suspects that his being Muslim may have been partly responsible for his good luck in being among the first to be exchanged.

Desertion, Avoidance and Refusal

Combatants from the Arab East responded to the pressures inherent in military service during the wars with a variety of actions. Many accounts of Arab soldiers’ war experiences include attempts to avoid or escape from military service or even conscription itself. Strategies to reach an—at least temporary—respite from the Ottoman army, for instance, ranged from hiding from the recruiting crews, appealing to either supernatural beings or influential patrons to intervene for an exemption, desertion and crossing the lines to join one of the enemy armies, to simulated illnesses or even self-mutilation.53

52 Interview in Sheikh Hemo (February 4, 2006). 53 For examples from the Ottoman army during the First World War, see ʿAbdallāh Ḥ annā, Dair ʿAtīya:̣ At-tārīḫ wa’l-ʿumrān min al-waqf ad̠-d̠arrī ila’l-muğtamaʿ al-madanī (awāḫir al-qarn at-t̠ ālit̠ ̠ ʿašar—muntasaf̣ al-qurn al-ʿišrīn) (Damascus, 2002), pp. 375f., 382ff.; Ğūrğ ̣ annā,H Qabla’l-maġīb, pp. 140, 156f., 163, 174f. 100 katharina lange

Similar actions, albeit on a numerically smaller scale, are reported from Arab combatants serving in the Second World War on both sides. Accounts of German officers indicate instances of self-mutilation by Arab combatants in the German-Arab Training Corps which occurred out of dissatisfaction, ‘violated honour’, or out of a wish to escape briefly from military duties: Ali ben Mohamed appears before the medical officer, wishes to be transferred to the hospital. The doctor examines him, Ali is completely healthy.—Why do you want to go to hospital?—But the others go to hospital, too!—You are healthy, you will not be sent to the hospital.— Ali goes to the glass door and suddenly hits his head against four glass panels. Blood streaming from his head, he goes back to the doctor, his scalp is full of glass splinters. Sick enough now? he asks. Another occurrence: The company is going through the drills, everything is working rather well. Suddenly, Machenith [sic!] drops his rifle, throws the steel helmet away, and falls down on the earth: I am not a soldier! he exclaims. Two hours later, out of anger and shame about this event his friend Mabrouk hits himself over the head with his bajonet so strongly that the skull bone lies bare.54 Desertions, which were a common feature in the Ottoman Army during the First World War and have been described often,55 also occurred among Arab combatants in the Second World War. During their deployment in Greece in 1943, a company of the German-Arab Train- ing Corps including their Alsatian officer are reported to have deserted from the unit—supposedly to join the Greek partisans.56 ‘Natives’ serving in the Troupes Spéciales commanded by the Vichy French in Syria were considered ‘largely unreliable’ and ‘prone to desertion’. In fact, before and during the fighting in 1941, considerable Druze and Cir-

54 Letter from F.J. von Voss, a former officer of the unit, to former general H. Felmy, Brakel/Westf. (March 4, 1955), BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2728. 55 See for instance Erik Jan Zürcher, “Between Death and Desertion: The Experi- ence of the Ottoman Soldier in World War I,” Turcica 28 (1996), 235–258; individual examples in ʿAbdallāh Ḥ annā, Al-fallāḥūn yiqraʾūna tārīḫahum, forthcoming, Ğūrğ Ḥ annā, Qabla’l-maġīb, see also Gerhard Höpp, “Frontenwechsel: Muslimische Deser- teure im Ersten und Zweiten Weltkrieg und in der Zwischenkriegszeit,” in Fremdein- sätze: Afrikaner und Asiaten in europäischen Kriegen, 1914–1945, eds. Gerhard Höpp and Brigitte Reinwald, Studien Zentrum Moderner Orient, Geisteswissenschaftliche Zentren Berlin e.V. 13 (Berlin, 2000), pp. 129–141. 56 Letter from F.J. von Voss to H. Felmy (March 4, 1955), BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2728. proud fighters, blind men 101 cassian contingents deserted and joined the Free French and British forces; these desertions were facilitated by ethnic and kin ties which linked Druze and Circassian communities across the mandate borders.57 In May 1941 five Cirassian escadrons defected to the Allies with their French commander, Collet; they re-entered Syria a month later as part of the Allied invasion,58 thus placing Circassian groupements of Syrian origin on opposing sides of the front.59 Besides desertion, there were also instances of open refusal to follow military orders. In June 1941, in the course of fighting between the Vichy French forces and the Allies in southern Syria, the Circassian units who had deserted from the Vichy French some weeks before refused to follow orders: being ordered to attack the Syrian Druze contingents who opposed them on the Vichy French side of the front, the Circassian objected, stating to their commander, Collet, that they did not want to attack their own ‘countrymen’. On the other side of the front, similar phenomena could be observed: the Druze on the Vichy French side not just ‘objected’, but mutinied, refusing to attack, and deserted, encouraging other Druze to join them.60 A similar case had occurred a few weeks earlier on the other side of the lines. The deployment to Iraq in support of the British forces had created dissent among the Arab soldiers of the Arab Legion as well as the Trans Jordan Frontier Force. Near the area of ‘H4’, a pumping station on the pipeline of the Iraq Petroleum Company on the Tran- sjordanian-Iraqi border, Arab soldiers and officers of the Trans Jordan Frontier Force refused to go on, stating that they had signed on with the force to guard and protect Jordan’s borders, but were not willing to fight against other Arabs outside of Trans-Jordanian territory. Their commanders finally gave in, the unit was drawn back.61 Another version emphasises the role of the Banī Ṣaḫr, naming their Sheikh Ḥ adīta̠ al-Ḫ rayšā—opposed to Emir ʿAbdallāh in conflicts over

57 Bou-Nacklie, “The 1941 Invasion,” p. 514, n 19. 58 Ibid., p. 515. 59 Ibid., p. 518. 60 Ibid., pp. 519f. 61 Sulaimān Mūsā, Dirāsāt fī tārīḫ al-Urdunn al-ḥadīt ̠ (Amman, 1999), pp. 208f., Abu Nowar, The Struggle for Independence, p. 53. Syed Ali El-Edroos, The Hashemite Arab Army, 1908–1979 (Amman, 1980), p. 225, quoting Šarīf Muḥammad Ḥ āšim who participated in the action, locates the incident near H3. In his account, there is no mention of the role of the Banī Ṣaḫr. 102 katharina lange control and especially taxation—as having been the actual “instigator” of the incident. Sheikh Ḥ adīta̠ reportedly said that it was wrong for Arab troops to fight their brothers at the command of the British, and called upon the members of his section of the tribe to resign from the Arab Legion.62 Yet Irfaifān al-Ḫ rayšā, the veteran quoted previously, did not participate in this ‘mutiny’ despite his Banī Ṣaḫr origin. More than six decades later, he presented his decision to follow orders and fight against the Iraqi forces on the side of the British as a result of his loyalty to the Hashemite family: after all,ʿ Abdulilāh, the regent of Iraq who had been deposed by the anti-British coup, was a cousin of the Transjordanian regent, Emir ʿAbdallāh, whose will—Sheikh Irfaifān indicates—the army was implementing by fighting in Iraq.63

Crossing Social and Cultural Boundaries: Presentations and (Self-) representations

Encounters with soldiers, as well as civilians, of a different cultural or linguistic origin took place in very different contexts and situations. The veterans describe encounters across cultural or ethnic boundaries within their own military units, or with inhabitants of areas they were stationed in, or with members of the enemy armies, mostly as prisoners-of-war. Often, their descriptions can be read (or heard) as part of the narrator’s self-presentation. Experiences of racist discriminations against Arab and other Mid- dle Eastern combatants are sometimes used to illustrate more general, sometimes political, points the authors try to make: al-ʿAğlūnīs description of ethnic and racist discrimination between Arabs and Turks in the Ottoman army, for instance, forms part of his negative picture of Ottoman rule over the Arabic provinces;64 Ğūrğ Ḥ annā, a medical doctor from Lebanese Shweifat who served with the Ottoman army during the First World War and was taken prisoner by the British in 1918, places his account of British discrimination between German and ‘Turkish’ prisoners-of-war in the context of British colonialist

62 Abu Nowar, The Struggle for Independence, p. 77. 63 Interview in Al-Muwaqqar (April 19, 2005). 64 Al-ʿAğlūnī, D̠ikrayātī, pp. 24ff. proud fighters, blind men 103 and racist attitudes in general.65 During the Second World War, as well, Arab and other Middle Eastern combatants experienced racism and discrimination in military life, as the memories of service in the German-Arab Training Corps quoted above indicate. But surprisingly often, descriptions of ‘foreign’ superior officers or even army systems are rather positive. Positive aspects may be presented in contrast to the narrators’ own society of origin and as an implicit or explicit critique of it. Thus, the veterans paint a picture in which the European war parties are characterised by ‘order’ and a strictly observed military discipline. “Their law is law, their order is order”, explained Ḫ alīl, and statements by Jordanian veterans of the Arab Legion about their British officers echo this perspective. Similar descriptions of the British army have been formulated by veterans of the First World War. Even Ğūrğ Ḥ annā, whose account of his imprisonment with the British vividly expresses his dislike of them, describes his favourable impression of the good British organisation regarding provisions and equipment. After having suffered from the lack of resources in the Ottoman army for years, he notes his exclamation after his arrest on 27 May 1918: “By God [. . .], if the Turkish army had had just one tenth of these resources, they would have pushed the British back to the shores of their isle.”66 Simi- larly, Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī’s account of von Leiser, a German officer with whom he served during his time with the Ottoman army, and whom he characterises as correct, goal-oriented and well-organised, contrasts with his description of the “extremely chaotic and over-worked” Otto- man military authorities, notably the Ministry of War, which according to his portrayal “resembled a market.”67 Individual accounts give not only different perspectives and evalu- ations of these encounters, they also emphasise aspects which may be unexpected to a European listener while neglecting others which appear to be of greater interest. One case in point is the frequent mentioning of provisions, food, as well as ways of eating—together or apart—while everyday routines and orders or individual, war-related actions are less predominant than might be expected.

65 Ḥ annā, Qabla’l-maġīb, pp. 194ff. 66 Ḥ annā, Qabla’l-maġīb, p. 188. 67 Qāsimīya, Mud̠akkirāt, 1, pp. 34f. 104 katharina lange

Ḫ alīl’s unequivocally positive evaluation of the British is one such example: Their customs and habits are very good. [. . .] Concerning the military service, there is certainly no one better than the British in the whole world. Concerning the food: whatever you could wish for was provided. With clothes, it was the same, and the salary as well. [. . .] There was a storage building, longer than this house [about 20 meters]. From floor to ceiling it was full of clothes, all hanging down—from stockings (pardon me [for mentioning such a profane garment]) to head coverings: whatever you liked, you could take. Any clothes you wanted—they were there. And their morals are equally high. God forbid, they are not like people here: never a dirty word or a beating—that was not possible. Their morals are humane. You and the one with the 2 or 3 stars [lieutenant and captain], the colonel, the major general and the gerenol [general] and the bergedi [brigadier]—you all eat together. They eat with you, don’t they? [. . .] The gerenol [sic] has 12 000 men under his command, but he has to eat together with you! The ‘equality’ of soldiers and officers, and especially the good material provisions, of the British army are remembered by veterans of both world wars. Irfaifān’s reminiscences of his former British commander, J. B. Glubb, also reflect a personal like and respect for him. According to Rfaifān’s recollections voiced in an interview with the Jordanian historian Sulaimān Mūsā in 1993, Glubb castigated and eventually even dismissed a recruit of sedentary background who had turned up his nose at a meal served by a Bedouin family because it did not conform to his standards of cleanliness.68 Anecdotes and quotes about Glubb show his personal qualities, especially his respect and interest for (Bedouin) Arabic culture, as well as his personal discipline and industriousness regarding his military duties. The political aspects of a British officer (who, incidentally, sent regular reports on the situation and events concerning the Arab Legion to British officials and institutions) being in charge of the— supposedly sovereign—Transjordanian army, which in 1956 led to Glubb’s eventual dismissal from Jordanian services, is downplayed in personal memories of other Arab Legion veterans as well who in con-

68 Irfaifān al-Ḫ rayšā told this anecdote on June 10, 1993 to Sulaimān Mūsā who generously gave me permission to write it down from his unpublished notes in Amman on November 22, 2005. proud fighters, blind men 105 versation emphasised Glubb’s personal sympathies for the Arab and, especially, Palestinian cause. Being stationed at places far from their places of origin meant that the soldiers got to know other, foreign worlds of everyday life at least briefly; descriptions of particular social and cultural circumstances are part of several personal accounts of the war years. The strange customs, habits and ways of the local population are sometimes presented in implicit or explicit contrast to the narrators’ own society of origin. An example is the account of Turkmen villages north of Alexandrette by Ğūrğ Ḥ annā. His observations ‘about the region’ in which he was stationed for several months describe the ‘primitiveness’, material poverty, lack of basic education and culture, and the resulting naiveté and ‘religious fanatism’ of the inhabitants which are a far cry from his native Lebanon. As in many other stereotypical presentations, in his account the villagers’ primitiveness goes hand in hand with their basic goodness and simpleness of mind.69 A returning theme that can be found in a number of war memories of the male combatants is that of romantic relationships with local women and girls. These accounts, it seems, add another facet to the image of the ‘masculine’ fighter as which the narrators of war memories present themselves. The described relationships cross multiple boundaries: besides the boundaries separating unmarried males and females, there are linguistic and cultural, but also religious ones. One example is Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī’s account of his relationship with a Christian woman from Beirut that lasted over several months between winter and spring 1915/1916 in Lebanon and Palestine and even detracted him briefly from his military duties.70 Ğūrğ Ḥ annā equally describes his relationship with one of the Turkmen village girls which crossed not only the boundaries of religion (Christian—Muslim), but also boundaries of language (Turkish—Arabic). Ḥ annā himself hints that this relationship, which would have been more than problematic in ordinary circumstances, was made possible by the war situation: his status as an Ottoman officer kept the girl’s relatives from intervening.71 At the

69 Ḥ annā, Qabla’l-maġīb, pp. 149ff. 70 Qāsimīya, Mud̠akkirāt Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī, 1, pp. 25ff. al-Qāwuqğī later married a German (see also letter from F. al-Qāwuqğī to general Felmy, dated Beirut (July 28, 1955), BArch-MArch ZA 1 / 2728). 71 Ḥ annā, Qabla’l-maġīb, p. 155. 106 katharina lange same time, the relationships described are ephemeral episodes in the sense that they do not outlast the war years. The narrative of ̮ alīl,H the Kurdish veteran of the British army, gives yet another example. During his stay in the British barracks in Bari, Ḫ alīl met an Italian woman named Giuseppina with whom he began a relationship. [. . .] Two months before [his unit was transferred back to Egypt], she said: Ḫ alīl, I might be pregnant! I said: Rely on God. They call God “Madonn” [sic]. Then I left, and did not know anything else. [. . .] Now I am going to tell you something which will make you laugh. Once, I went to Aleppo. At the bus station, when I was on my way back to the village—God is my witness!—I saw people crowded around a young man. [. . .] They said: that man speaks neither Arabic, nor Turkish, nor German. We have no idea to which nation he belongs! [I went to him] and greeted him: Marhaba! [. . .] You speak Ingliz? He said no. I said: Tu parle Alemani? He said no. I said: Tu parle italiani [sic]? He said: Si! [. . .] Where are you from?—From Bari. [. . .] I asked him about his name [. . .] and his address in Bari. He said: near the cinema. Aha!! I asked: Might your mother’s name be Giuseppina? He opened his eyes wide!! He looked at me—astonished! He said yes. I told him: You are my son, my boy! The boy was completely astonished. His face changed colour. [. . .] But as he stood there before me, I was sure: he looked exactly like our Hanan [his eldest son in the village, born after he returned from the war]. This, ̮ Halīl told me, was the only time he met his ‘Italian’ son—after this chance meeting, he never saw him again. This anecdote, however it may be interpreted, illustrates the vital importance of the world war for Ḫ alīl’s biography. If it was not told, the war years would appear as a transitory, ephemeral and, at the end of the day, inconsequential episode in Ḫ alīl’s life.

In Conclusion: Localising the Translocal

What does all this tell us about how translocal processes that occurred in the course of the two world wars were experienced by combatants from the Mashriq? While it seems easy to see how spatial flows caused by the world wars set not only European soldiers, technology, arms, and propaganda in motion, but also gripped Syrians and Jordanians who participated in the armies fighting in the two world wars, it is much more problematic proud fighters, blind men 107 to show the qualitative—much less quantitative—consequences that these movements had for the ‘consolidations’ of translocally effected transformations, or even for long-term social and cultural change. This difficulty arises mainly from the heterogeneity of the individual perspectives—a heterogeneity which is only emphasised by the diversity of the sources that were evaluated for this article. For some combatants from the Mashriq, serving in one of the world wars set the path for a military career which could last for most of a lifetime. Many of those who fought in the Second World War were veterans of the First, as (not only) the example of Fauzī al-Qāwuqğī demonstrates; equally, many who served during the Second World War continued their military career in the years following it in the armies of the newly independent Arab national states—many world war veterans for instance participated in the Arab-Israeli war in 1948/1949. Beyond the individual level, experiences and training which were accumulated during the world war years shaped the armies of independent Syria as well as Jordan, where the unchanged name and command structure of the Arab Legion demonstrated this continuity very clearly. The biographies of its veterans also show that military service in this unit contributed to the establishment of a new ‘national’ Jordanian elite which was recruited from different social backgrounds, including well-educated members of sedentary families as well as not formally qualified Bedouin. But for many other combatants—and this may especially be true for the lower ranks—participating in one of the world wars appears at first glance as a mere episode. After their military service, these soldiers returned to their places of origin and pursued their lives just as other members of their home communities. Over the years, only few of the personal relations, language skills, or material possessions dating to the war years persisted. This seems to have been the case with many rural recruits of the Ottoman army during the First World War, as cases collected by ʿAbdallāh Ḥ annā show.72 The volatileness of the war experience is also illustrated by ̮ alīl’sH biography: Shortly before the end of the war, he was asked if he would extend his service with the British army to go to a far-away place which, according to Ḫ alīl’s recollections, was called ‘the country of

72 ʿAbdallāh Ḥannā, Al-fallāḥūn yiqraʾūna tārīḫahum, forthcoming. 108 katharina lange monkeys’. He declined this offer and decided to leave the army and go home. Back in Syria, Ḫ alīl received a pension from the British for two more years. After it stopped reaching him, ̮ alīl’sH life went on much as it would have had he never joined the army—until today he lives in his native village, farming his own small plot as well as working for other villagers. Although a considerable number of former recruits from his region of origin share his experiences, Ḫ alīl is the only world war veteran in his native village; he told me that even those former comrades from other villages of the region are now “old, sick or dead”. After I had talked to him, some of ̮ alīl’sH fellow villagers approached me, jokingly asking if he had been “telling his usual lies”. They do not doubt that his service with the British did indeed take place: older villagers still remember the day Ḫ alīl joined the British army. Rather, the stories he tells of his army service are not appreciated by his neighbours, maybe because they do not relate to any experience which they share. In a way, Ḫ alīl is an isolated figure in his native village, alone with his world war experiences. Looked at in this light, Ḫ alīl’s narrative takes on a stronger, if somewhat poignant relevance: in the absence of a more ‘public’ history of war veterans like him, and lacking material changes to show for the years he spent with the British, telling about his journey through the war is the only way to recall a significant part of his life. Thus, his and other veterans’ own words are the most obvious, and possibly the most significant manifestation of the lasting effects of the war experience: participating in one of the two world wars of the twentieth century has left traces in the combatants’ biographies which are worthwhile remembering and presenting to others. Admittedly, as an outcome or ‘result’ of translocal processes as wide-reaching as the world wars, this individualist perspective may appear anticlimactic. However, it must be taken seriously if we follow Hynes in considering that each narrative is a commemoration of “one life lived in the mass action of a modern war, [as . . .] a monument of a kind to that one soldier [. . .] and no-one else.”73 As has become evident in the preceding paragraphs, representations of cultural and geographic ‘Others’ whom the soldiers encountered through the war—be it the ‘primitive’ rural populations depicted by

73 Hynes, “Personal Narratives and Commemoration,” p. 220. proud fighters, blind men 109

Ğūrğ Ḥ annā or the ‘organised and just’ British reminisced about by Ḫ alīl—are given not only as disinterested descriptions of strange lands and people, but are placed in relation to the narrators’ own environment. Depending on the medium of the narration, and the time and situation in which it is written or told, implicit and explicit comparisons are made between the unknown customs described and the situation ‘at home’—in a geographic as well as temporal sense; thus accounts of the German or British military machinery may be framed as criticisms of either past or present military and administrative systems in the speakers’ native lands. Their war time encounters with foreign orders give the veterans authority to address, and evaluate, their respective local contexts. On the other hand, the authors or speakers sometimes place their own actions in the context of continuities that are presented as independent from, or predating, the conditions that were shaped to a large extent by the powers of war. An example is Sheikh Irfaifān’s emphasis on his family’s tradition as ‘fighters’ which he followed by joining the army—even if it was acting against what he may have perceived as ‘Arab political interests’; or his emphasis that participating in the British fight against al-Kailānī in Iraq in 1941 was—from his point of view—a matter of personal loyalty (to the Hashemites) and their honour-bound duty to protect their relative, ʿAbdulilāh. In other cases, ethnic or tribal loyalties and continuities, but also nationalist considerations, influenced combatants’ actions (as in the mentioned Syrian troops’ desertions from Vichy France to the Allies, and the subsequent events on the front, as well as the Transjordanian troops’ discussions and partial refusal to enter Iraq; both in 1941). Beyond being a mere description of individual motivations and thoughts, the emphasis on continuities of loyalties and convictions that are rooted in ‘local’ ground and that tie the combatants to their communities of origin in different ways, may put feelings of uncertainty, powerlessness and uprootedness experienced in the service of ‘foreign’ armies into a familiar perspective. Thus, one way of interpreting some of the narratives told by combatants from the Mashriq could be to understand them as a way of appropriating experiences of translocal processes that were caused by the world wars. As Ḫ alīl said when he explained his refusal to extend his contract with the British army: “I refused to go on. Because after all: a stranger in a strange place is like a blind man.”

‘FOLLOWING THE HILLS’: GOLD MINING CAMPS AS HETEROTOPIAS

Katja Werthmann Johannes Gutenberg Universität, Mainz

Informal mining and the emergence of mining camps that may comprise tens of thousands of inhabitants has become a global phenomenon. It presently occurs all over the world, it is connected with the world market prices for diamonds, gold, and other precious metals or minerals, and it resembles other economic booms or crises that entail massive migratory movements. In the West African country Burkina Faso, a ‘gold rush’ began in the 1980s and continues to the present day. It resembles the gold and diamond booms of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries in North America, Canada, Australia, and South Africa. Mining is done both by local communities who happen to live near a mining site, and by a ‘fl oating population’ that is drawn to a new mining site in a matter of days. Mining camps are not self-evident objects of social anthropological research. Although the myth of a clearly demarcated ‘fi eld’ that contains a culturally homogenous unit of research has been dismantled,1 informal mining camps present a particular diffi culty for researchers who have to be as mobile as their fi eld.2 Gold mining camps are

1 If there ever was such a myth. Although presented as a critique, Gupta and Fergu- son seem to confi rm a biased picture of what is considered to be standard anthropological fi eld work by a few US-American anthropology departments that are accorded the status of “hegemonic centers”, while other approaches are referred to as “peripheral, heterodox, or subordinated”; Akil Gupta and James Ferguson “Discipline and Practice: ‘Th e Field’ as Site, Method, and Location in Anthropology,” inAnthropologi- cal Locations: Boundaries and Grounds of a Field Science, eds. Akil Gupta and James Ferguson (Berkeley, 1997), p. 42. 2 Katja Werthmann, Tilo Grätz and Hans Peter Hahn, “Mobilität in Afrika: Multi- lokale Feldforschungen. Editorial”, in Mobilität in Afrika, eds. Katja Werthmann, Tilo Grätz and Hans Peter Hahn, special issue of Afrika Spectrum 3 (2004), 325–333. 112 katja werthmann

“spaces on the move”3 or “nomadic spaces”4 in a very literal sense: they are both a physical structure and a form of social organisation that mushrooms in various places, independent of whether, or how, their founders and inhabitants are connected with each other. Th is is what makes them ‘translocal’:5 any concrete locality only matters as long as it provides certain resources (the metal or mineral, other profi table activities, or alternative lifestyles). Once these resources are depleted or no longer satisfactory, the sojourners of a mining camp relocate to another place where they reproduce similar structures of cohabitation and cooperation. Relocation also alters the combination of individual elements of the population that moves, but most likely some parts of it will be the same as in previous places. Th is article explores patterns of cooperation and cohabitation in gold mining camps in Burkina Faso, motives for migration to mining camps, and the stigmatisation of the people living in those camps.6 Th e stigmatisation is based on a prejudice against sojourners of mining camps who are viewed as a socially and morally deviant population.

3 Jan-Georg Deutsch and Brigitte Reinwald, eds., Space on the Move: Transforma- tions of the Indian Ocean Seascape in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Century (Berlin, 2002). 4 Michel Ben Arrous, “La translocalité, pour quoi faire?” in Les relations transsahariennes à l’époque contemporaine: Un espace en constante mutation, eds. Laurence Marfaing and Steff en Wippel (Paris, 2004), pp. 415–442. 5 Von Oppen defi nes ‘translocality’ both as a practice of transgression (e.g. spatial mobility) and a place or space that is characterised by this practice; Achim von Oppen, “L’évolution d’un programme de recherché: La ‘translocalité’ au Centre de Recher- che sur l’Orient Moderne (ZMO), Berlin,” in Les relations transsahariennes à l’époque contemporaine, eds. Marfaing and Wippel, pp. 401–414; cf. Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen, “Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verfl echtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), http://hsozkult.geschichte.hu-berlin.de/forum/id=632& type=artikel&sort=datum&order=down&search=translokalit%C3%A4 (accessed July 2006, 18). Ben Arrous, “La translocalité, pour quoi faire,” p. 415, comments rather dryly that “le succès de la translocalité doit beaucoup à son imprécision” and goes on to reconstruct diff erent meanings and applications of translocality and other related concepts. In conclusion, he points out that the common element of various defi nitions of translocality is “le voyage des lieux et leur fécondation réciproque”, ibid, p. 438. 6 Th e article is based on several fi eld trips between 1998 and 2001, and revisits in 2004 and 2008, in a number of mining sites in the provinces of Bougouriba, Houet, Ioba, Poni and Noumbiel, but mostly in the mine of V3 Sanmatenga (Ioba). Th e research was part of an interdisciplinary project about the West African Savanna (SFB 268) at the University of Frankfurt/Main, Germany, fi nanced by the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft . In the fi eld, I was assisted by Sibbila Dabilgou, Souleymane Komboudry, Dominique Tiendrebéogo, and Joël B. Somé. gold mining camps as heterotopias 113

I argue that mining camps are in fact “heterotopias of deviation”7— spaces that are both somewhere and nowhere. Th ese spaces also catalyse processes of urbanisation in non-urban places: they are characterised by size, density, and heterogeneity, and accommodate individuality, even anonymity.

Present-day Gold Mining in Burkina Faso

In contrast with neighbouring Ghana, industrial mining never played a signifi cant role in Burkina Faso. Since 1925, the French tried to maximise the exploitation of gold-bearing sites in their West African colonies by way of forced labour. In 1938, an industrial gold mine was established in Poura. Due to the lack of trained personnel and recurrent technical problems, the mine never really worked productively. It was closed in 1966, reopened in 1984, and closed again aft er the collapse of a shaft in 1989. Aft er EU-funded rehabilitation in the 1990s, the mine had to close again in 1999 when the price of gold dropped dramatically due to sales of gold reserves by several central banks. Over 300 mine workers were laid off . Likewise, the semi-industrial gold mine at Essakane in the north of the country was closed down, which included the dismissal of 230 mine workers.8 Non-industrial gold mining that involves tens of thousands of people is a recent phenomenon in Burkina Faso. It began in the northern parts of the country around 1980 during a drought that aff ected several West African Sahel and Savanna regions.9 Many people turned to gold digging as an alternative to farming, petty trading, or plantation

7 Michel Foucault, Of Other Spaces, Heterotopias (1967), http://www.foucault.info/ documents/heteroTopia/foucault.heteroTopia.en.html (accessed April 13, 2005). 8 Th e Economist Intelligence Unit, Country Report Burkina Faso/Niger (London, December 2000), pp. 18–19. 9 Hervé Badolo, Impact socio-économique de l’exploitation artisanale de l’or au Bur- kina Faso: Cas d’Essakane (Ouagadougou, 1988); Jean-Pierre Carbonnel, “L’orpaillage au Burkina Faso et au Mali,” in L’appropriation de la terre en Afrique noire: Manuel d’analyse, de décision et de gestion foncières, eds. Émile Le Bris, Étienne Le Roy and Paul Mathieu (Paris, 1991), pp. 122–130; ORSTOM, Projet de recherche pluridisciplinaire sur l’orpaillage: Compte rendu de la réunion du 5/11/1991 au centre ORSTOM de Ouagadougou (Ouagadougou, 1991); Yacouba Yaro, “Les jeunes chercheurs d’or d’Essakan: L’Eldorado burkinabè,” in L’enfant exploité: Oppression, mise au travail et proletarisation, ed. Bernard Schlemmer (Paris, 1996), pp. 135–149. 114 katja werthmann labour in neighbouring coastal countries like Ghana and Ivory Coast. Since then, gold mining has gradually spread over several regions of Burkina Faso reaching the south and west of the country by the end of the 1990s.10 Today, gold digging in Burkina Faso is pursued both as a dry-season craft by farmers, as a full-time occupation by professional itinerant gold diggers, and as a temporary activity by an assortment of fortune-seekers. Mining camps also attract providers of various goods and services. According to IMF estimates for the year 2006, 200,000 people were working in 200 non-industrial gold mines in Burkina Faso.11 Th is fi gure, however, has been cited for years in several documents without any empirical evidence. Although access to mineral resources is offi cially regulated by a Mining Code,12 informal gold mining oft en starts spontaneously and prior to any agreement between gold miners and rural communities or state authorities. Industrial exploration and exploitation of minerals require a mining title. Artisanal mining is legal without a mining title and only requires a license from the administrative authorities, except in protected zones like national parks, near property enclosed by a wall, or in areas considered sacred by the local population.13 Th e Mining Code stipulates that mining administration agents may act as criminal investigation police to search for and prosecute infractions of the Code.14 In the majority of non-industrial gold mines, this function is carried out by the agents of the parastatal gold marketing company Comptoir Burkinabè des Métaux Précieux (C.B.M.P.) in cooperation

10 Katja Werthmann, “Gold Rush in West Africa: Th e Appropriation of ‘Natural’ Resources: Non-industrial Gold Mining in Burkina Faso,” Sociologus 50, 1 (2000), 90–104. 11 International Monetary Fund, IMF Country Report 07/320 (Washington D.C., September 2007; http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft /scr/2007/cr07320.pdf) (accessed June 24, 2009); see also Eric Jaques, Blaise Zida, Mario Billa, Catherine Greffi é and Jean-François Th omassin, “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso: Today and Tomorrow,” in Small-scale Mining, Rural Subsistence and Poverty in West Africa, ed. Gavin Hilson (Rugby, 2006), pp. 115–134. 12 Th e following passage refers to the Mining Code that was in eff ect during the period of my research between 1997 and 2001. It has been modifi ed since (cf. Sabine Luning, “Artisanal Gold Mining in Burkina Faso: Permits, Poverty and Perceptions of the Poor in Sanmatenga, the ‘Land of Gold’,” in Small-Scale Mining, ed. Hilson, pp. 135–147). 13 Burkina Minier 98–99, Deuxième édition, Collection essentielle, Groupement professionnel des miniers du Burkina (GPMB) (Ouagadougou, 1998/1999), Art. 56, p. 150. 14 Ibid., Art. 89, p. 161. gold mining camps as heterotopias 115 with the gendarmerie and the police. Representatives of the state marketing company supervise the gold processing and buy gold from licensed gold traders. Th rough these agents the state tries to control the gold trade, but it is estimated that a large percentage of the gold is sold in the black market.15 Just as in the ‘Wild West’ one hundred and fi ft y years ago, the gold mining camps of Burkina Faso also attract desperadoes. In 1998, for instance, a small group of criminals terrorised a newly established camp in the southwest of the country. Th ey threatened gold diggers with weapons and took their gold. Some women from the neighbouring village were raped. Eventually a military unit was sent in, and four men who had allegedly fi gured on the gendarmerie’s ‘black list’ were shot.16 Similar instances were reported from gold mining camps in other regions.

Migration to Mining Camps

When gold mining began in the 1980s, it was a last resort for people in the northern and central regions that were most seriously aff ected by the drought. Since then, though, gold mining has become a permanent occupation for many men and women who have spent years ‘following the hills’, the idea being that gold miners follow the hills like pastoralists follow their cattle. However, the sojourners of mining camps are not professionally peripatetic (in spite of being frequently dubbed ‘modern nomads’ or ‘vagabonds’). Neither do they represent “cosmopolitanism from below”,17 because not all of them come from ‘below’—however that may be defi ned.

15 Badolo, Impact socio-économique de l’exploitation artisanale de l’or au Burkina Faso, p. 55; William C. Butterman, Th e Mineral Industry of Burkina Faso: US Geo- logical Survey–Minerals Information (1996), http://minerals.usgs.gov/minerals/pubs/ country/1996/9250096.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009); Pierre Englebert, Burkina Faso: Unsteady Statehood in West Africa (Boulder, Colorado, 1996), p. 96; Jaques et al., “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso,” pp. 122–123. 16 Th is incident was reported by Amnesty International as a case of extrajudicial execution. 17 Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, “Vers un cosmopolitisme par le bas?,” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahe: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing (Paris, 2007), pp. 7–22. 116 katja werthmann

Many gold diggers admit that they stay in the mining camps “despite themselves”. Some even refer to gold mining as a kind of addictive behaviour like smoking or drinking: Even if you strike it rich and buy real estate, you won’t escape. It [gold] is like something that draws you. You are like someone who has the habit of chewing cola nuts, or of drinking alcohol.18 Th e main reason for staying is the experience or the hope of being one of the lucky few to earn more money in a single day than in a whole season of strenuous farm work. However, those who are most likely to earn a steady living in the mining camps are the providers of goods and services. A new mining camp, even if it is in the middle of nowhere, soon attracts a wide range of commercial activities that can normally be found in urban settings. Th ose who pursue these commercial activities are as mobile as the gold diggers and may similarly have spent many years in mining camps. Mining camps provide economic opportunities for men, women, and children. Th ey also constitute a refuge for people who for one reason or another do not wish to remain in (or return to) their communities of origin. Corresponding to the national demographic composition, the majority of the inhabitants of mining camps are Mossi, but many other ethnic groups are represented too. In addition, a number of gold diggers come from the neighbouring countries of Niger, Mali, Ivory Coast, Ghana, Benin, or even Nigeria. Th e population of mining camp is as heterogeneous as any urban population. It consists, among others, of farmers who temporarily mine during the dry season, workers who have lost their jobs in the city, unemployed school leavers, ex-convicts, former labour migrants who had to leave Ivory Coast in the wake of the xenophobic attacks following the 1999 coup and the ensuing civil war, and even ex-civil servants. As in urban migratory settings, people from one particular region sometimes form loose networks, associations or neighbour- hoods in a mining camp. Relatives or friends may help out with cash or assistance, take a sick person to the hospital, or arrange for the burial of a deceased person. Many ordinary Burkinabè consider mining camps as ‘a world apart’ where drug abuse, criminality, and prostitution prevail. Contrary to

18 Interview V3 Sanmatenga (March 8, 2001), Elhadj. gold mining camps as heterotopias 117 this notoriously bad reputation, gold mining camps are not anarchic. Jaques et al. conducted a survey of 60 mining sites in Burkina Faso and found “surprisingly well-defi ned structures and (. . .) high degrees of organization.”19 In larger settlements, an elected representative (responsable or délégué) speaks for the gold diggers and serves as an intermediary between them, the state administration, and representatives of the gold marketing company.20 Th e speaker is responsible for the mediation of confl icts between the gold miners and the local communities on the one hand, and the settling of disputes among the gold diggers on the other hand. He may request that gold diggers perform communal work such as cleaning the processing and trading area. He is also entitled to demand that the pit owners make fi nancial contributions to cover the costs of renting or buying technical equipment for the mine. Even other professional groups such as traders or butchers may be asked to contribute, since they also profi t from the successful extraction of ore. A mining camp can comprise several thousand inhabitants and thus attain urban dimensions.21 Likewise, patterns of consumption and leisure are clearly urban: in the shops and stalls of a mining camp, commodities such as bottled beer, instant coff ee, white bread, cigarettes, clothing and shoes, electronic gadgets and so forth are available. In video centers customers can watch Kung Fu, Bollywood, or American movies, and there are many bars and places to eat. Th us, for people from more remote rural areas, going to the mines off ers access to an urban lifestyle without having to go to the cities. Young gold diggers, especially, emulate US-American popular culture and fashion. Th ey wear jeans, T-shirts, baseball caps, and sneakers, and they carry nick- names which refer, among others, to prominent actors, athletes or politicians.22 Adopting this urban lifestyle also includes a particular kind of speech. In Burkina Faso, some of the miners’ vocabulary is

19 Jaques et al., “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso,” p. 119. 20 Katja Werthmann, “Th e President of the Gold Diggers: Sources of Power in a Gold Mine in Burkina Faso,” Ethnos 68, 1 (2003), 95–111. 21 During the peak season in 1999–2000, there were about 10,000 inhabitants in V3 Sanmatenga. In Bouda (Passoré province), there were about 40,000 people in 1991 (Jaques et al., “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso,” p. 119). In Burkina Faso, there are two major cities: Ouagadougou (about 1 million inhabitants) and Bobo Dioulasso (about 500,000 inhabitants), and about a dozen secondary towns with 11,000 to 50,000 inhabitants. 22 Tilo Grätz, “Gold Mining and Risk Management: A Case Study form Northern Benin,” Ethnos 68, 2 (2003), 160–161; Katja Werthmann, Bitteres Gold: Historische, 118 katja werthmann imported from Nouchi, a sociolect spoken by street gangs in the ghettos of Abidjan in Ivory Coast, but there are also some terms and idiomatic phrases that are used only in the gold mines. A lot of this vocabulary is related to leisure activities such as drinking. For instance, a specifi c brand of beer is called “donkey piss”, Pastis is called “lion’s tears”, and a mixture of Nescafé and Pastis is simply referred to as “the drug.” If a gold miner wants to get a colleague to buy him a drink, he says “I need help,” “Give me water,” or “Do something!” If someone is really drunk, he is “at the top” or “dosed.” Many women who come to the mining camps have left an unhappy marriage, refused to get married to a brother of their deceased husbands,23 could not accept a second wife, or have been accused of witchcraft . For women in these situations, mining camps off er the opportunity to earn a living to support themselves away from their relatives’ constant scrutiny.24 Th e most lucrative occupation for women is the supervision of a stall in the comptoir where ore is processed. Usu- ally a pit owner erects such a stall and entrusts it to his girlfriend, who then recruits and supervises the labourers. As compensation, she gets the residual sand from the fi rst panning that still contains gold and will be dried, mechanically ground and washed again in a sluice. Becoming the partner of a pit owner thus provides an economic opportunity for many women. In fact, some women even own mining pits themselves but leave the actual management to their male partners, since women are not allowed in the mine. Economic and social relationships in the mining camps are oft en based on mutual obligations and debts. What Cleary noted in mining camps in eastern Brazil also pertains to other countries: “Credit is the lubricant of the economic system in all garimpos; without it, most operations would never get off the ground.”25 Newcomers get credit from traders or shop owners; shop owners help out pit owners, pit owners lend equipment to one another, and so forth. Friends help

soziale und kulturelle Aspekte des nicht-industriellen Goldbergbaus in Westafrika (unpublished Habilitation thesis, Johannes Gutenberg-University Mainz, 2003), p. 182. 23 Although prohibited by law, the levirate is still widely practiced in Mossi society. 24 Katja Werthmann, “Dans un monde masculin: Le travail des femmes dans un camp de chercheurs d’or au Burkina Faso,” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel, eds. Boesen and Marfaing, pp. 297–324; idem, “Working in a Boom- town: Female Perspectives on Gold-mining in Burkina Faso,” Resources Policy 34 (2009), 18–23. 25 David Cleary, Anatomy of the Amazon Gold Rush (London, 1990), p. 118. gold mining camps as heterotopias 119 each other out with cash, buying drinks for one another or covering up for each other in cases of absence from work or when organising pilfering ore.26 When a miner is sick or has an accident, workmates or friends collect money and organise transport to a hospital or the home town. Of course this does not mean that friendship and other social relationships in mining camps are always reliable and harmoni- ous. But it seems that petty theft , insults or brawls are forgiven more easily in the mining camps than, for instance, in the villages where the miners come from. Information circulates between diff erent and sometimes remote mining camps. If a gold miner has accumulated debts at the end of a season, he may promise the concerned trader or shop owner to pay them back next season. Th e creditor, for his part, may ask the debtor to leave a pawn such as a radio or a bicycle. Sometimes the creditor keeps these pawns for at least another season before selling them. But many people move away without notifying their creditors. Should a creditor fi nd out that the debtor has turned up in another mining camp, he may travel there to reclaim his money. If there is an elected speaker of the gold diggers, the case may be brought before him. But normally it is diffi cult to reclaim money from a person who has disappeared unless he or she comes back to the same camp in the next season. However, a person who notoriously disappears without settling debts will eventually be avoided and no longer gets credit from anybody in future.27

Th e Social Organisation of Gold Mining

Th e organisation of mining varies according to the type of gold deposit.28 Whereas alluvial (placer) gold can be worked individually or in small teams by washing, panning or shallow-pit surface mining,

26 Werthmann, Bitteres Gold, pp. 168–169. 27 Katja Werthmann, “Frivolous Squandering: Consumption and Redistribution in Mining Camps,” in Dilemmas of Development: Confl icts of Interest and their Resolu- tions in Modernizing Africa, eds. Jon Abbink and André van Dokkum (Leiden, 2008), pp. 60–76. 28 Th e following descriptions are mainly based on fi eldwork in one mining camp in south-western Burkina Faso. See also Jaques et al., “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso” and Grätz, “Gold Mining and Risk Management” for similar patterns of present-day gold exploitation in Benin. 120 katja werthmann lode (reef) gold requires deep shaft mining.29 If the gold deposit forms an underground ‘mat’, the surface above the deposit is pierced by narrow tubular shaft s that may branch out into underground galleries. If the gold deposit takes the form of a linear vein, tubular or rectangular shaft s along the vein will eventually merge to form one large open mine. In some Burkina gold mines, vertical shaft s reach a depth of more than 100 m. Claims in non-industrial gold mines are not normally established in writing. A claim is simply staked on a ‘fi rst come fi rst served’ basis. If anybody wants to claim a particular spot right aft er a discovery, he may have to literally sit on it until a friend or partner brings the tools for working it. Once individual parcels have been dug out for about one meter, ownership is normally recognised. If there is dispute about one pit, the case is brought before whatever authority is there—a police or gendarmerie post, the elected representative of the gold diggers, or whoever is recognised as a mediator by both parties, such as for instance a senior, experienced gold digger. In the beginning, individual pits are separated by a wall; later, confl icts frequently arise when someone starts removing this wall from his side of the pit and encroaches on what his neighbour considers as his part. Outbursts of violence can occur at all stages of a mining cycle, but once the mine has been there for some weeks, there will be accepted institutions or mechanisms for confl ict regulation. Th e owner of a mining pit may run it himself, or, should he lack the fi nancial means, lease it to a friend for a fi xed period of time. This may be a temporary agreement for one week only called tour that confi rms bonds between mining entrepreneurs. Th e owner or leaseholder hires a team of labourers who work the claim in day and night shift s. Depending on the type of deposit and the size of the pit, the crew can comprise as many as thirty or more labourers. Each crew consists of unskilled and skilled workers. Th ere is no formal training, but someone who eventually becomes a professional gold miner typically starts with unskilled work. If he is very young and not yet physically fi t for harder work, this can include bringing food to the workplace.

29 Cf. Raymond E. Dumett, El Dorado in West Africa: Th e Gold-Mining Frontier, African Labor, and Colonial Capitalism in the Gold Coast, 1875–1900 (Athens, 1998), pp. 29–31, 51–53; Jaques et al., “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso.” gold mining camps as heterotopias 121

He may then work his way ‘up the ladder’ through time, exercising different activities in the same or diff erent mines: scooping groundwater from the shaft with containers, cutting wood for supporting beams, removing earth and gravel outside the pit, or working inside the pit with sledgehammer, pickaxe, or chisel. If he is eventually both skilled and reliable, he may become one of the few team members who are entrusted with extracting the most valuable pieces of ore. With the rare exception of some women who dress and act like men, women do not normally work in the mining pits. In Burkina Faso, French terms are used for the team members, including the pit owner patron, the leaseholder gérant, the overseer chef de groupe, the clerk commis, skilled miners tapeurs, unskilled miners manœuvres, wood cutters mainteneurs, watchmen gardiens for the pit and the storing place for ore, and someone who brings food porteur de repas (usually a boy or a woman).30 In addition to the core team, there are blast men or blacksmiths and others who provide services that are contracted on the spot. Th e employer is responsible for food, clothing, shelter, and—in case of accident or illness—medical treatment. He may also provide alco- holic beverages and cigarettes. Until the gold-bearing vein is reached— which can take up to several weeks or even months—the gold diggers do not receive a salary. Once the pit starts ‘producing’ they will get a share of the ore. Aft er a certain quantity of ore has been amassed, the employer receives half of it and the crew is left to share the other half. For the most part the pit owners claim the most valuable pieces of ore for themselves, citing the overhead costs of running the mine to justify their larger share. Th e gold miners can sell their share of ore on the spot to professional ore buyers, or have it processed and sell the resulting amount of gold. Most gold miners do not store ore or gold. Th is is partly due to their need for cash, partly to avoid theft . Th e ore is crushed, ground, and washed in a fenced-in area, the comptoir, by people from the neighbouring villages who work in the mining camps as day labourers. Although it is offi cially prohibited, mercury is used to amalgamate the gold dust. Th e gold obtained is sold to the licensed gold traders who

30 In other francophone West African countries such as Benin, diff erent terms may be used, such as chef d’équipe for the pit owner, or sécrétaire for the overseer; Grätz, “Gold Mining and Risk Management,” pp. 195–196. 122 katja werthmann in turn sell it to the C.B.M.P. or another marketing company. In order to attract and keep customers, gold traders give out mercury for free, or they give credit to newcomers to the mine who are then obliged to sell their gold to them. However, a portion of the gold is also sold to black market traders. Th ese black market traders either come from the outside or they are the same offi cial gold traders who pursue this illegal activity at night. Black market traders acquire clients either by approaching a gold digger directly or via third parties who introduce potential clients to them. Oft en, these third parties are the women who run the stalls where the ore is processed. Th ese women are normally very well informed about the production of individual mining pits, and they are acquainted with both gold diggers and gold traders. Gold traders use simple pairs of scales with coins and matches as weights. Th e amount of gold sold can vary considerably depending on the pit’s production. Buying prices are set by the para-state marketing company C.B.M.P. in relation to the London fi xing. Th ere is no way to establish how much an individual gold digger can earn during one season (roughly November to May).31 In May 2000, a spot check of fi ve gold traders in the comptoir of a large mine showed that individual gold diggers had sold between 0.5 g and 10 g each that day, and this was during the end of the season when business was already low, because the rains started to fi ll the mining pits. In a report about mining in Burkina Faso, Guye writes: Although there are no specifi c statistics on revenues obtained by artisanal miners and their families in Burkina Faso, a study conducted in the sub-region (Burkina, Guinea, Cameroon) suggests that average earnings for those involved in gold mining are FF7 [c. 1€] per person per day (assuming gold is valued at FF44 per gram). Th e average production per person per day is 0.16g, giving an average annual produc tion of 35g per person.32 However, these are average fi gures based on estimates. Such guresfi do not allow for seasonal variation and the ‘lucky strike’ that may in

31 For a calculation of revenues see Jaques et al., “Artisanal and Small-scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso,” p. 122. 32 Djibril Gueye, Small-scale Mining in Burkina Faso/Études sur les mines artisanales et les exploitations à petite echelle au Burkina Faso, (Mining, Minerals, and Sustainable Development (MMSD)/International Institute for Environment and Development (IIED), Paper No. 73) (October 2001), http://www.iied.org/mmsd/mmsd_pdfs/asm_ burkina_faso_eng.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009), p. 25. gold mining camps as heterotopias 123 fact occur. Guye refers to the case of one gold digger who became a multi-millionaire in the gold mine of Bouda, one of the largest gold mines in central Burkina Faso that existed for almost ten years.33 Th is was not the only case, and it is precisely the possibility of striking it rich quickly that keeps drawing fortune seekers to the mines. Th ose who are moderately lucky may have enough money for a cow or a corrugated iron roof at the end of a season. Th is is more than they would have earned by cultivating one hectare of the main cash crop, cotton, or by working on a plantation in neighbouring countries during the same period of time. Dreams of a brand new moped maintain the drive of many young gold diggers. Although there is a clear hierarchy within the crew who works a mining pit, pit owners do not constitute a ‘dominant class’. Due to the unpredictability of chances and risks, workers can quickly become bosses and vice versa. Since everybody knows that a ‘rags to riches’ career is easily reversed, many pit owners refrain from abusing their temporary power, although there are of course some well-known ‘bad’ bosses. A good boss will see to his crew’s needs and tolerate minor cases of ore pilfering. Th e crew, on the other hand, will endure a lean period provided the boss will compensate them later. However, the transgression of certain limits will lead to a crew boycotting a pit owner or the boss fi ring a worker.34 Th is does not mean, of course, that cheating or theft do not occur. On the contrary, it may occur on all levels of ore processing. Gold diggers who sell their sack of ore on the spot may mix it with worthless stones in order to dupe the buyers who only take samples to estimate the sack’s value. Th e ore buyers, for their part, keep a poker face when paying a much lower sum than the actual value. Th e day labourers who crush and grind the stones may steal valuable stones—or, if they receive a wage, simply throw a portion away to lighten their workload. Th e women in whose stalls the ore is processed store worthless stones or stone powder in order to quickly switch it for the good ore brought by a customer as soon as his attention is diverted. Gold buyers can fool inexperienced gold diggers by manipulating their scales. Gold diggers, on the other hand, may sell counterfeit gold to inexperienced

33 Gueye, Small-scale Mining in Burkina Faso/Études sur les mines artisanales et les exploitations à petite echelle au Burkina Faso, http://www.iied.org/mmsd/mmsd_pdfs/ asm_burkina_faso_fr.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009), p. 48. 34 Werthmann, Bitteres Gold, pp. 174–175. 124 katja werthmann gold buyers. Of course, everybody is aware of the possibility of being cheated and invents ways of guarding against these possibilities. In order to survive—and possibly prosper—in a mining camp, one has to learn the rules of the game. Moreover, one needs at least one close relative, friend or colleague who may assist in various activities.

‘People of the Hills’: Stigmatisation

Regardless of the kind of profession carried out in a mining camp, all the people who live there are considered ‘gold diggers’ (Mooré: sanm tuuda) or ‘people of the hills’ (tang ramba). Th ese are terms that carry ambivalent meanings. In the mining camps, people may refer to themselves or address each other jokingly as ‘man of the hills’ or ‘woman of the hills’. Addressing another person as ‘man of the hills’ or ‘gold miner’ in a diff erent social context, such as for instance during an accidental encounter in the capital Ouagadougou, is understood as an insult and can provoke a quarrel. People who work in the mines oft en say that gold miners and other inhabitants of mining camps are viewed as criminals by the social mainstream. Th is view was shared by many of those working in the mines before they fi rst got there, or, as one of them put it: “Before I started going to the hills, I would not even shake hands with a gold digger”. Th erefore, many people who come to the gold mines do not inform their families of their real destination but say that they are going to Ouagadougou or to neighbouring countries for work. Where does this bad reputation come from? While mining camps off er economic opportunity and social independence to many, they are also a refuge for people who have been banished by their families. One of the main reasons for banishment is incest, which, in the cultural context of the Mossi majority, means sexual intercourse not only with blood relatives but also with specifi c categories of affi nal kin such as wives of one’s own father or brother, or with the mother or sister of one’s own wife. Women who had sexual relations with a relative of their husband are usually divorced and sent back to their parents, whereas men who are guilty of incest are banished from their families. Th ey may join other relatives who do not live in the same region, but they tend to leave the area altogether and migrate to the cities, to neighbouring countries or, more recently, to gold mining camps as heterotopias 125 the gold mines. Other causes for banishment are murder or witchcraft , but incest seems to be the most widespread reason. One example was related to me by a diviner/healer who worked in the gold camp: a young man had come to him searching for a remedy that would enable him to ask his family’s forgiveness. He had been banished because he had impregnated a girl and then her mother as well. Later the healer learnt that the remedy apparently had not worked and that the young man had moved on to another mining camp. People who have been banished do not talk openly about this fact in the mining camps, but since they cannot avoid people from the same region altogether, there is almost always someone who knows. Th is knowledge, however, only surfaces when there is an argument that gives rise to an exchange of insults. Verbal off ences, quarrels and brawls occur daily in the gold mines, but the worst off ence that will inevitably lead to serious fi ghting is yaglm tııga. Literally this means ‘[you have to be] hung in a tree’ and refers to deceased persons whose corpses were not buried properly but left to rot in the bush, because they were guilty of a serious infraction of social norms such as an act of zoophilia.35 Considering the fact that in many societies in Burkina Faso (as elsewhere) funeral ceremonies are among the most important rituals, the signifi cance of this off ence is evident. During funerals, the social status of the deceased person is memorialised, the ties among the bereaved are consolidated, and the link between the living and the ancestors is confi rmed. A person who is not buried properly has not only died physically but also socially and spiritually. To deny a person a proper funeral is to extinguish his/her existence altogether. Th erefore, the mere allegation of belonging to this category of persons can easily provoke people into a rage. Although everyone working in the mining camps is considered a ‘gold digger’ by society at large, socio-professional groups within the camps try to maintain a certain degree of diff erentiation. Shop owners, butchers, gold buyers or owners of grinding machines admit that they, too, are called ‘traders of the hills’ (tang commerçant) or ‘butchers of the hills’ (tang koasa), but they try to set themselves apart from the mine workers. Th ey deny having social relationships with the gold

35 Michel Izard, “Transgression, transversalité, errance,” in La fonction symbolique, eds. Michel Izard and Pierre Smith (Paris, 1979), pp. 289–306. 126 katja werthmann diggers beyond economic transactions and avoid frequenting bars, cinemas, or restaurants. Th is strategy of distinction is most visible in the dress code: whereas many gold diggers prefer US style ‘hip-hop’ fashion (jeans, T-shirts, baseball caps, sneakers), most shop owners dress in Muslim style (long gowns and caps). Th is distinction between gold diggers and other inhabitants of mining camps is maintained in spite of—or precisely because of—the fl uid boundary between these respective socio-professional groups. A trader may have been a former gold digger who managed to accumulate the means for establishing a business, and a gold digger may have been a trader who went broke. In any case, working in the gold mines in either profession can ruin one’s reputation at home. A fi ght between individual members of those socio-professional groups can lead to a confl ict involving entire groups. One gold buyer gave an example of how these confl icts may evolve: For instance, you are a gold buyer and you come across a gold digger who just climbed out of the pit and is dirty all over. You insult him by telling him to go away with his dirt. If he gets angry easily, he starts shouting at you, and soon all the other gold diggers are there and you are no longer safe. At that point they won’t ask any more which gold buyer precisely insulted the gold digger, they say it was all of them.36 In cases like this, it is the accusation of being “dirty” that especially angers the gold diggers. Real and metaphorical dirt is at the heart of other people’s prejudices against gold diggers. As one gold digger remarked bitterly in an informal conversation: “Th e people despise gold diggers because we crawl into holes like rats.” In an eff ort to counter these images, many gold diggers stress that gold digging is a respectable profession like any other, and that working with one’s own hands is better than stealing.

A Translocal Community

Gold booms are characterised by the astonishing speed of the rise and decline of mining camps. Because of their extreme fl uidity, mining camps are not normally accorded the status of a ‘community’, as Pfaff enberger observed:

36 Interview V3 Sanmatenga (April 3, 2001), Pullo. gold mining camps as heterotopias 127

Is the term ‘mining community’ an oxymoron? Any meaningful discussion must begin by challenging the myth of the isolated ‘mining camp’, in which are found—putatively—the rude cabins and tents of temporary residents, exclusively male. In place of community, or so goes this myth, there is only an aggregate of adventurous, violent men, united only by greed and the pursuit of some valuable metal. Th eir society, if it can be so dignifi ed by the use of that term, is controlled and shaped by its extreme dependence on resource extraction; if the resource disappears, what passes for community also disappears. To one rather unsympa- thetic observer, mining and its social relations more closely resemble an ‘addictive disorder’ than a normal human community.37 Resisting these stereotypes, Douglass argued that the sojourners in North American mining camps did in fact constitute a mining community. He sees the mining community as a “community without a locus” which was spread out over a wider area and “crystallized” temporarily in places where new discoveries were made.38 Although these places were transient, the community developed social norms and structures that “transcended the experience of any single camp”,39 partly by producing second and third generation gold diggers, partly by establishing network relations to the wider society. Th is also pertains to what is happening in contemporary West Africa. Mining camps in Burkina Faso—like elsewhere—have been commonly perceived as “a collection of strangers rather than a community of kinsmen, friends and neighbors.”40 A closer look, however, reveals that many of its temporary inhabitants have known each other for years, because they tend to meet again in new mining camps. Even people in positions that are structurally opposed to each other, such as representatives of the para-statal marketing board and black market traders, will reminisce about times they spent together in another mining camp, or swap news and gossip about common acquaintances. Sojourners of mining camps may appear as a haphazard combination of individuals, but many of them do develop friendships or partner- ships that may continue beyond one particular locality or activity.

37 Bryan Pfaff enberger, “Mining Communites, Chaînes Opératoires and Sociotech- nical Systems,” in Social Approaches to an Industrial Past: Th e Archaeology & Anthro- pology of Mining, eds. A. Bernard Knapp, Vincent C. Pigott and Eugenia W. Herbert (London, 1998), p. 291. 38 William A. Douglass, “Th e Mining Camp as Community,” in Social Approaches to an Industrial Past, eds. Knapp, Pigott and Herbert, p. 106. 39 Ibid. 40 Ibid., p. 100. 128 katja werthmann

Th e awareness of being despised by the social mainstream leads to a ‘stigma management’ that is expressed through the use of the name ‘people of the hills’.41 ‘People of the hills’ are united through the exploitation of a specifi c resource in changing localities, through relationships that continue beyond one particular locality, and through an urban life-style in spite of the remoteness and transience of some localities. In contrast with transnational migratory phenomena, mining communities are not diasporas where ethnic, religious, or territorial identity is (re-)constructed through ‘inventing tradition’. On the contrary, within the mining camps ethnic or regional origin is downplayed, while the nation-state or local rural communities may have an interest in the expulsion of ‘strangers’.42 According to Cohen, community is “a largely mental construct, whose objective manifestations in locality or ethnicity give it credibility”,43 and at the same time a “modality of behaviour”44 that defi es the homogenising forces of nation-states or globalisation processes. Cohen’s concept of community stresses its function as a place where one acquires culture and a “sense of a primacy of belonging.”45 Although he points to the perpetual transformation and reconfi guration of the communities that serve as examples in his book, he primarily refers to ethnic or local communities from where individuals originate. Clearly, contemporary non-industrial mining communities in West Africa or elsewhere lack both locality and ethnicity as defi ning features. If we use the term community in the narrow sense of ‘community/locality of origin’, social formations such as mining communities are excluded. But if we use the term ‘community’ in the broader sense of a group of people who have something in common which distinguishes them in a

41 Erving Goff man, Stigma: Notes on the Management of Spoiled Identity (Engle- wood Cliff s, NJ, 1963). 42 In Burkina Faso, as elsewhere, there have been cases of violent clashes between villagers and gold miners, or expulsion of foreign nationals from gold mining areas; Katja Werthmann, “Gold Diggers, Earth Priests, and District Heads: Land Rights and Gold Mining in South-Western Burkina Faso,” in Landrights and the Politics of Belonging in West Africa, eds. Richard Kuba and Carola Lentz (Leiden, 2005), pp. 119–136. 43 Anthony P. Cohen, Th e Symbolic Construction of Community (London, 1998), p. 198. 44 Ibid., p. 117. 45 Ibid., p. 15. gold mining camps as heterotopias 129 signifi cant way from other groups,46 mining camps in Burkina Faso do qualify. ‘People of the hills’ are united through an economic goal—the exploitation of a specifi c natural resource and associated commercial opportunities in changing places—and through the pursuit of alternative life-styles and social relations. In a way, the ‘mining community’ is as much a community as the ‘academic community’. Both of them are virtual in the sense of having no concrete physical or social boundaries. Th e academic community is a dispersed, imagined community that communicates via certain media and temporarily aggregates physically at conferences. Th e conference venues do not matter as such (although some of them clearly attract more participants than others). What matters there is my activity (or self-presentation) as a fellow academic, not my family tree, regional origin, biography, or other social roles I may play. Th e existence of the academic community does not depend on my actual physical presence at conferences or whether I count myself (or am counted by others) as a member or not. In a similar way, sojourners of mining camps share a common knowledge about a set of regulations of cohabitation and cooperation in a mining camp, regardless of whether they are actually staying there at a given moment. Individuals can opt in and out of this community, although not everybody has other options. Pre-existing social categories and ways of relatedness such as ethnicity, friendship, or kinship may shape evolving dyadic relationships, but these relationships are, in principle, independent of more conventional ways of belonging. Informal gold mining in Burkina Faso thus has led to the emergence of a poly-ethnic, multi-national, fl uctuating and extremely mobile translocal community. It is a “community without a locus”,47 an “aspatial community”48 that temporarily aggregates in boom regions, an “occupational community”49 defi ned by the distinct social

46 Ibid., p. 12; see also Dieter Goetze, “Gemeinschaft sbegriff e in der Soziologie und Sozialanthropologie,” in Gemeinschaft en in einer entgrenzten Welt, eds. Reinhart Kößler, Dieter Neubert and Achim von Oppen (Berlin, 1999), pp. 13–33. 47 Douglass, “Th e Mining Camp as Community,” p. 106. 48 Barry Wellman and Barry Leighton, “Networks, Neighborhoods, and Communi- ties: Approaches to the Study of the Community Question,” Urban Aff airs Quarterly 14, 3 (1979), 363–390. 49 M.I.A. Bulmer, “Sociological Models of the Mining Community,” Sociological Review 23 (1975), 78. 130 katja werthmann

organisation of exploiting a resource, and a “symbolic community”50 whose members call each other tang ramba—‘people of the hills’. It is not a network although relationships formed in mining camps may eventually result in a number of networks. Th e decision to join a mining camp may be more or less voluntary. Nevertheless, mining camps do give rise to a certain consciousness of particularity, even if it is by ascription (through stigmatisation), or because their inhabitants ‘get hooked’, or because they do not have the option to return to their communities of origin.

Mining Camps as Heterotopias

Th e establishment of mining camps does not entail the construction of localities that become saturated with identity, relationality, and history,51 although individuals may talk nostalgically of their stay in one particular mine. On the other hand, mining camps are not ‘non-places’ as defi ned by Augé52 either, since they are not places of transit. (Augé, however, writes from the perspectives of transients. People who spend most of their day in ‘non-places’ because they work there probably do develop a sense of identity, relationality, and history with regard to those places.) In contrast with non-places such as airports or shopping malls which are permanent physical structures even if their users are transients, mining camps themselves are transient. Aft er the boom, what remains may not even be a ‘ghost town’ but simply holes in the ground where there were none before. By ordinary citizens, mining camps are seen as places that diff er signifi cantly from what is considered as normal and respectable. Conse- quently, many people who go to work there camoufl age their activities as just another form of labour migration or trade journey, or they use a pseudonym, in order to avoid a bad reputation. Others have nothing to lose, or no place else to go, or are attracted to mining camps pre-

50 Cohen, Th e Symbolic Construction of Community; Albert Hunter, Symbolic Communities: Th e Persistence and Change of Chicago’s Local Communities (Chicago, 1974). 51 Marc Augé, Orte und Nichtorte: Vorüberlegungen zu einer Ethnologie der Ein- samkeit, (Frankfurt, 1994); Arjun Appadurai, “Th e Production of Locality,” in Coun- terworks: Managing the Diversity of Knowledge, ed. Richard Fardon (London, 1995), pp. 204–225. 52 Augé, Orte und Nichtorte. gold mining camps as heterotopias 131 cisely because they off er alternative ways of self-realisation, or at least tolerance vis-à-vis those who are ill-adapted to the social mainstream: men and women who refuse to comply with rigid social norms, whose consumption of alcohol surpasses what is normally accepted, who have a reputation of being violent, or who were banished by their families. In this sense, mining camps are ‘counter-sites’ or ‘heterotopias’,53 where ‘normal’ social behaviour is not only contradicted but sometimes inverted. Mining camps correspond with Foucault’s subtypes of ‘heterotopias of crisis’ and ‘heterotopias of deviation’: places where society isolates people who are in a state of transition or who are not consistent with general norms and expectations: rest homes, psychiat- ric hospitals, prisons, or retirement homes. One can easily add other kinds of spaces for parallel, deviant, or illicit activities and life-styles such as ghettos, red-light districts, or virtual worlds in the internet. Faubion pointed out the similarities between Foucault’s hétérotopie and Turner’s concepts of communitas and liminality.54 In fact, mining camps in Burkina Faso and elsewhere55 are sometimes identifi ed with sites for initiation into adulthood/manhood, or called ‘worlds apart’ where alternative modes of being are possible. Other concepts (or rather metaphors) for spaces that are open for alternative, ‘hybrid’, or deviant ways of life are ‘borderland’, ‘frontier’, or ‘liminal zone’.56 All of these metaphors have been criticised on the grounds of imply- ing a center-periphery model of society where cultural ‘impurity’, as well as creativity, is attributed to marginal zones. Th e concept of heterotopia seems more appropriate for this case, because heterotopias are both somewhere and nowhere. Although mining camps are physical arrangements that provide a point of aggregation for a dispersed

53 Foucault, Of Other Spaces. 54 Faubion attributes the simultaneous emergence of these concepts to “the intellectual ecology of the turbulent drift from the 1960s into the 1970s”; James D. Faubion, “Heterotopia: An Ecology,” in Heterotopia and the City: Public Space in a Postcivil Society, eds. Michiel Dehaene and Lieven De Cauter (London, 2008), p. 35; see also Kevin Hetherington, Th e Badlands of Modernity: Heterotopia and Social Ordering (London, 1997), pp. 32–34. 55 Cf. Filip De Boeck, “Domesticating Diamonds and Dollars: Identity, Expenditure and Sharing in Southwestern Zaire (1984–1997),” in Globalization and Identity: Dia- lectics of Flows and Closures, eds. Peter Geschiere and Birgit Meyer, special issue of Development and Change 29, 4 (1998), 777–810. 56 Ben Arrous, “La translocalité, pour quoi faire?” and Ulf Hannerz, Flows, Boundaries and Hybrids: Keywords in Transnational Anthropology, (WPTC-2K-02) (Stockholm, 2002), http://www.transcomm.ox.ac.uk/working%20papers/hannerz.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009). 132 katja werthmann community, they are outside society in a similar way as red-light districts to which they are oft en likened in conversations with ‘ordinary’ citizens. Mining camps in Burkina Faso are not recognised as cities in the sense of administrative units, but many of them are characterised by the standard features size, density, and heterogeneity. Life in mining camps clearly diff ers from life in the rural, face-to-face communities that still prevail in much of present-day Burkina Faso. Th us, mining camps appear as the ‘Other’ to generalised social and cultural norms that derive from the rural context. One of the most palpable diff erences is that people in mining camps interact with each other much more on the basis of roles, work relations, and assumed or invented identities, than on the basis of kin or ethnic bonds. Mining camps do not only off er economic opportunities, but— among other things—alternative life styles and anonymity. In this sense, mining camps are also spaces for catalysing processes of urbanisation. Even if it is not considered as a real city, a mining camp off ers the opportunity to acquire the city as a state of mind (Park 1967), and the possibility to live and behave as an urbanite even if it is in the middle of nowhere. PART TWO

SPACES ON THE MOVE

MAPPING THE OCEAN: VISUAL REPRESENTATIONS OF THE INDIAN OCEAN IN THE SWAHILI MILITARY PRESS DURING WORLD WAR II

Katrin Bromber ZMO, Berlin

It is true that Ceylon is an outpost of East Africa, but it is also in India’s front line, and the presence of the K.A.R. in Ceylon should suggest how unimportant frontiers are and geographical terms, or even Oceans and Continents, when the common nature of the cause is understood.1

Introduction

Academic interest in the history of the Indian Ocean has not only resulted in an astounding number of publications and conferences, but also triggered a major change in its historiography in the last two decades. While earlier works mainly focused on structures, recent publications have put agency to the forefront. Th is perspective nour- ished the tendency to conceptualise the Indian Ocean as ‘pluralised space’ with overlapping spatial and temporal layers.2 Th us, the Ocean can neither be defi ned by its geographic borders, nor is there any possibility to identify a single periodisation. Instead, it is conceptualised as a dynamic space, the changes of which are defi ned by concrete social practices. Using this conceptual approach, this contribution attempts to discuss maps which appeared in army newspapers for East and Central African soldiers, as part of the British military propaganda to legitimise

1 Editor, “Th e K.A.R. in Ceylon,” East African Standard (May 13, 1942), Under the Standard Clock, 3. K.A.R. is the abbreviation for Th e King’s African Rifl es. 2 For a critical review of recent literature on the Indian Ocean see Ravi Ahuja, Katrin Bromber, Jan-Georg Deutsch, Margret Frenz, Patrick Krajewski and Brigitte Reinwald, “Neuere Literatur zum Indischen Ozean: Eine kritische Würdigung,” Peri- plus. Jahrbuch für außereuropäische Geschichte 15 (2005), 141–172 and Markus P. M. Vink, “Indian Ocean Studies and the ‘New Th alassology’,” Journal of Global History 2, 2 (2007), 52–58. 136 katrin bromber the deployment of the so-called askari3 outside the continent during World War II. Th e fi rst part of the paper seeks to outline those conceptual aspects of spatial production which link spatial representations to power relations. It continues by briefl y sketching the incorporation of East African troops into the imperial forces, describing the areas of their deployment and giving a cursory outline of the journals and newspapers produced for East African soldiers during the Second World War. Th e third part discusses Indian Ocean maps in army newspapers as discursive attempts to provide the readership with arguments that give meaning to their out-of-area deployment. Arguably, they reproduced the dominant spatial scheme of a coherent British Empire in order to streamline the soldiers’ perception of their deployment within this wider framework. Th e contribution concludes with an attempt to relate the empirical fi ndings about cartographical representations with a clear persuasive function to the concept of the social production of space and the translocal aspects of ‘movement’ and ‘sedimentation’.

Th e Social Production of Space—Some Th eoretical Implications

Th e emphasis on non-territorial aspects of space provides a fruitful approach in at least two ways. First, it counters the inclination to handle the Indian Ocean as a mere “heuristic device”,4 as an ad hoc working concept which needs no further theoretical explanation, or to see it as an unchangeable geographical designation. Second, and conceptually of greater importance, it escapes the trap of seeing space as a container that one fi lls up with objects. Embedded into the Newtonian tradition of conceptualising spaces as homogenous and fi nite entities, the container-image contravenes a notion of space constituted by social processes. As an alternative to the concept of ‘absolute’ space in the Kantian sense, a ‘relativistic’ understanding of space has emerged over the past three hundred years especially in the fi eld of philosophy

3 Askari is the Swahili term for soldier which in the East African colonial context exclusively referred to African military personnel. It also became the name of the army newspaper of the East Africa Command. 4 David Parkin and Stephen C. Headley, eds., Islamic Prayer Across the Indian Ocean: Inside and Outside the Mosque (London, 2000), p. 2. mapping the ocean: visual representations 137 and physics.5 As a result, space was conceptualised as a relational confi guration of permanently moving objects (including living creatures) and, thus, linked to aspects of time and agency. Th e relation of the subject to space is of a transformative quality. Space does not become comprehensible to the subject by its being the space of movement; rather it becomes space through movement, and as such, it acquires specifi c properties from the subject’s constitutive functioning in it.6 Th e fact that the ‘constitutive’ is not ‘arbitrary’ was convincingly shown in Martina Löw’s attempt to conceptualise agency and structure as entangled aspects in the production of space. She argues that if “spacing” of objects or creatures results in permanent and normative acts of spatial syntheses, which are reifi ed by rules and institutions, spatial structures emerge.7 As other social structures, spatial structures are inseparable from power relations.8 Dominance is crucial in the production of space at all levels. Although they should not be rendered exclusive and unchallenged, the power of dominant spatial schemes should not be underrated. Th ey oft en fi nd their lasting expression in maps, which are the pre-occupation of this paper. Elaborating on the issue of the social production of space, the French philosopher Henri Lefebvre developed the idea that space is multifaceted, produced and maintained by the relations that govern the interactions within a society. Space as a social product reveals the multitude of ways in which such space might be confi gured. Th inking further in this direction, one can say that individual actors and groups produce their unique spaces which overlay one another. Th is approach should not be read as a subjectivist one, which states that there are as many spaces as there are individuals, and, thus, would make conceptualising spatial relations impossible. It rather emphasises the consideration of multiple perspectives and “the dialectical understanding of ‘space’ as a dynamic as well as unitary (yet by no means homogenous)

5 Th is development is extensively described in Martina Löw, Raumsoziologie (Frankfurt a.M., 2001), pp. 27–35. 6 Elizabeth Grozs, Space, Time and Perversion: Essays on the Politics of Bodies (N.Y., 1995), p. 92. 7 Löw, Raumsoziologie, p. 164. 8 Th e studies by Michel Foucault and Pierre Bourdieu are still considered path breaking in this fi eld. 138 katrin bromber phenomenon”.9 In Lefebvre’s words, this process can be described as “interpenetrating” or “superimposing” one layer of space upon or into another.10 Focusing on the social production of space does not only strengthen the perspective on agency, which is understood as a collective or individual acting out within structures, but links spatial categories to the individual level. Here, Henri Lefebvre outlined a three-dimensional space. He distinguishes between “lived”, “perceived” and “conceived” space. By “lived” or “representational space” he understands the “space as directly lived through the associated images and symbols, and, hence the space of the ‘inhabitants’ and ‘users’ [. . .] it is the dominated—and hence passively experienced—space which the imagination seeks to change and to appropriate.”11 “Perceived space” or “spatial practice” has a “certain cohesiveness” and can be observed in the “specifi c spatial competence of every society member”.12 Lefebvre’s notions of “conceived space” or “representations of space” are defi ned as “conceptualised space”, which is rendered in intellectual abstrac- tions. “Conceived space” is the “space of scientists, planners, urban- ists, technocratic sub dividers [. . .] all of whom identify what is lived and what is perceived with what is conceived.”13 He further argues that conceived or conceptualised space, which materialises in representations of space, is dominant in every society and invested with knowledge (savoir), which he describes as a mixture of understanding (connaissance) and ideology. It is exactly the representational level which allows the link of Lefebvre’s spatial theory with aspects of communication, in our case persuasive communication, namely military propaganda. Instead of narrowing down propaganda to the notion of temporally concentrated and limited campaigns, recent studies have conceptualised it as a process which is shaped by the interaction between persuasive messages

9 Ravi Ahuja, Pathways of Empire: Circulation, ‘Public Works’ and Social Space in Colonial Orissa, (c. 1870–1914) (Hyderabad, 2009), p. 21. 10 Henri Lefebvre, Th e Production of Space, trans. by Donald Nicholson-Smith (Oxford, 1991), p. 86. 11 Lefebvre, Production of Space, p. 39. 12 Lefebvre, Production of Space, p. 38. 13 Ibid. mapping the ocean: visual representations 139 and their addressees.14 Th is interaction is characterised by perception, appropriation and reaction. Within the process of appropriation, the persuasive messages are ordered according to the individual experiences.15 Although this paper will not focus on the perception of the military propaganda, one has to keep in mind that their producers— British intelligence, social welfare offi cers as well as African educational personnel—had to be aware of the African soldiers’ potential reactions in order to increase the eff ectiveness of their work. Represen- tations of space, such as maps, are a part of social and political practice because they follow a logic which establishes relations between people and objects, and which aims at long term eff ects.16 Military maps are drawn from a distinctive point of view; emphasising not simply the topographical, but also the political and moral.17 It is this ‘conceived space’ that the military enhances in order to unite its personnel around a desired spatial practice. Using Lefebvre’s notion of ‘conceived space’, I will discuss cartographical representations of space as part of imperial military propaganda for East and Central African soldiers to legitimise their out-of-area deployment with an imperial attitude. I will argue that forceful discursive strategies were designed as attempts to structure the self-positioning of East African soldiers within an Indian Ocean ‘territorial’ space, which the majority of the soldiers experienced as a permanently changing ‘warscape’.18 Th e argument continues that destructive encounters and violent power relations in everyday military life were legitimised in the propaganda by linking material individual experiences of African soldiers overseas to spatial representations.

14 Stanley B. Cunningham, Th e Idea of Propaganda: A Reconstruction (London, 2002). 15 Rainer Gries, “Zur Ästhetik und Architektur von Propagemen: Überlegungen zu einer Propagandageschichte als Kulturgeschichte,” in Kultur der Propaganda, eds. Rainer Gries and Wolfgang Schmale (Bochum, 2005), p. 23. 16 Th e term objects is understood in a broad sense which includes structures, institutions, etc. 17 Daniel Cosgrove, ed., Mappings (London, 1999). 18 Th e late historian Gerhard Höpp and Lutz Rogler, specialist in Islamic studies, coined this term to describe translocal landscapes which are produced by fl ows of military manpower, know-how and resources, and which produce more or less lasting institutions, e.g. military camps, newspapers, norm and regulations, myths, symbols. 140 katrin bromber

East African Soldiers in Out-of-Area Deployment

Seen in a long term perspective, the use of East and Central African soldiers outside East Africa was not peculiar to the Second World War. Nyasaland troops, for example, already did garrison duties on Mauritius and on the Gold Coast in the late nineteenth century.19 In contrast to World War I, when soldiers of the King’s African Rifl es and members of the Carrier Corps were employed in the East Afri- can theatre only, in the Second World War nearly 25 per cent of the troops, which amounted to 325,000 men, experienced out-of-area deployment.20 Aft er successfully completing the Abyssinian campaign (1940–41), where African contingents gained a reputation as excellent combat units, and facing a territorial expansion of the war, Winston Churchill ordered the transfer of East and Central African soldiers to theatres outside the continent.21 Arguably, this order is also linked to the fall of Singapore in early 1942 and, last but not least, to the forceful call for independence from the Indian subcontinent. Especially the latter aspect increased British fears that Indian troops might drop out of Allied (British) Command. Th us, men who were recruited in the East and Central African British colonies were to be turned into loyal soldiers to reinforce British positions elsewhere. Th ese men came from Kenya, Uganda, Nyasaland (Malawi) and the mandated Tanganyika. Th ey were grouped together with members of the Somaliland Camel Corps, the Northern Rhodesia Regiment and Rhodesian African Rifl es within the East Africa Command which was formed in 1941. In the course of war, a considerable number of them were transferred to North Africa, the Middle East, Madagascar, Reunion, Mauritius and Southern Asia, i.e. Ceylon, Northeast India, and Burma. Th e overwhelming majority of the men were transported by war- ships and had almost no experience of maritime life. What is more, a substantial number of them were reluctant to cross the Ocean. In

19 Risto Marjomaa, “Th e Martial Spirit: Yao Soldiers in the British Service in Nyasaland, 1895–1939,” Th e Journal of African History 44, 3 (2003), 428. 20 Timothy Parsons, Th e African Rank-and-File: Social Implications of Colonial Military Service in the King’s African Rifl es, 1902–1964 (Oxford, 1999), p. 35. 21 David Killingray, “Guarding Modern Empires,” in Guardians of Empire: Th e Armed Forces of the Colonial Powers c. 1700–1964, eds. David Killingray and David Omissi (Manchester, 1999), p. 4. mapping the ocean: visual representations 141

February 1942 four battalions which had been deployed in Abyssinia and Eritrea openly revolted to be transferred to places outside the East Africa Command.22 In an attempt to counter this attitude, the newspapers not only depicted the “travelling soldier” as a hero who fought alongside his British counterparts, but as somebody who had acquired knowledge. Th e following quote from a letter to the editor of Heshima described the deployment as something positive—as a unique chance. “Well my comrades and friends, I thank our British government which educated us about the modern world by sending us to places and showing us things unknown to our grandfathers and fathers”23 Askari, the newspaper of the East Africa Command, recur- rently reminded the soldiers of their duty to take an active role in post- war developments. Th ey should invest the knowledge they had gained elsewhere to improve their home societies, because “[. . .] the young people of today will be the elders of tomorrow and, thus, should know about the civilisational progress in other countries.”24 Th e voyage was presented in text and visuals as a rite de passage leading to the higher ranks of manhood. Similar to propaganda material as well as individual photographs elsewhere, the African soldiers on board were usually depicted as cheerful troops. Th ey showed African military personnel on leave in the Middle East or South Asia visiting famous places like the holy sites in Palestine or bargaining on the market in Calcutta. With two exceptions, the pictures did not reveal any trouble, fear or simply fatigue which are characteristics of a transfer under war conditions.25 One reason that oft en led to feelings of insecurity amongst the men was the fact that they did not know the area of deployment before boarding the vessels. For security reasons the destination was revealed to the troops only aft er departure. Th e danger of attacks by air or sea was permanently present and felt, especially aft er the destruction of the SS Khedive Ismail by Japanese torpedoes in February 1944.

22 2/4 KAR, War Diary, February 1942, PRO WO 169/7027; Kevin K. Brown, Th e Military and Social Change in Colonial Tanganyika: 1919–1964 (unpublished Ph.D. thesis, Michigan State University, 2001), p. 244. 23 Basi jamaa zangu na rafi ki tafadhalini, nami naishukuru serikali yetu ya Kiinger- eza ambayo ilituelimisha dunia ya leo na kutupitisha katika miji ambayo wababu na baba zetu hawajapita, na kuona mambo kama haya tuyaonayo sisi watoto. “Barua za Askari”, Heshima (May 30, 1945), 6. 24 [. . .] vijana wa sasa watakuwa wazee, na kwa hivyo yafaa kujifunza ustaarabu wa nchi nyingine. “Barua kutoka kwa askari wetu,” Askari (February 21, 1945), 10. 25 Picha za Vita (February 1944), 1. 142 katrin bromber

Th e vessel shipped from Kilindini harbour, near Mombasa, eastwards to Colombo carrying 1,511 people, the majority of them East African soldiers. Th ey were to reinforce the 11th East African Division in the Burma Campaign which had commenced earlier that year. Th e ship was attacked on the 12th February 1944, half way between Seychelles and Maldives. It sank within two minutes. No less than 1,297 people lost their lives.26 Th ree days later, Major General C.C. Fowkes, Com- mander of the 11th East African Division addressed his troops: On the way to CEYLON, a ship carrying our troops has been torpedoed and sunk by a Japanese submarine, and of the East African Forces on board 150 Offi cers and other British Ranks, over 60 Nurses and W.T.S. and nearly 700 Africans lost their lives as well as many brave Sailors and W.R.N.S. Th ese men and women were our comrades coming to join us and now they have given their lives to the cause for which we fi ght. May they rest in Peace. So the Japanese has scored against us fi rst and we must mercilessly pay him back with bullet and steel. Let us do our damndest to getting ready for the Day—not far off now—when we shall meet our enemy face to face. Th is is not the time for personal grievances; it is not the time for personal consideration of any kind. We must all British and Africans alike sacrifi ce everything to the plain duty, which our comrades handed to us, of driving these yellow hyenas back to the island dung heap whence they came. Not till then can decent people live their lives in peace and travel the seas in safety.27 Similar to this address, the rhetoric of the newspapers and broadcasts increasingly linked garrison duties in Ceylon and the actions lying ahead in Burma to the topos of safeguarding the Ocean. Keeping the enemy out of the Western Indian Ocean meant to protect one’s own family and community. However, the ‘conceived space’ of the propaganda material might have oft en clashed with the soldiers’ individual perceptions during the passage, the stay in military camps or at the frontlines, the ‘lived space’. Confi ned to a small bounded ‘territory’— the ship, the camp, the trench—their experiences were marked by

26 Brian James Crabb, Th e Sinking of the S.S. Khedive Ismail in the Sea War against Japan (Stampford, 1997); India and S.E.A.C.: East African Forces (1944), Public Record Offi ce (PRO); London, WO 106/4501. 27 Special Order by Major General C.C. Fowkes (February 15, 1944), PRO,WO 172/6536. mapping the ocean: visual representations 143 being crowded together, becoming (sea) sick, and their general uncertainty about the destination and actions lying ahead.28 Intelligence, welfare and education sections published personal propaganda, suitable descriptions of the sea voyage and, with regard to possible destinies, ethnographies or histories of places where other troops had already been employed.29 Hence, the newspapers produced a spatial confi guration for the soldier with an attempt to control his perception of space. Since the area of potential deployment corresponded with the scope of news and distribution, the respective newspapers’ spatial concepts and its terms of reference varied and changed accordingly. Th e Second World War, arguably, accelerated two parallel spatial trends which also left their traces in the content of military propaganda. Th e fi rst of these trends was expansion: the Indian Ocean as socially produced space was more closely integrated with the interior by an increasing movement of people and strategic goods. In East Africa, for example, thousands of soldiers were transferred to the coast by rail, and thousands of civilians fl ed from coastal towns with strategic importance, i.e. Mombasa and Dar es Salaam.30 Th e second tendency was fragmentation. From the military point of view the Indian Ocean was part of three Command Areas: Th e Middle East- ern Command (MEC),31 the East Africa Command (EAC)32 and the South East Asia Command (SEAC).33 What was designed and acted

28 Th e Journey of 1/1 Bn. K.A.R. from Yatta to Mombasa by Train and thence by Ship to Madagascar and the Reaction of the Troops to their New Experience, PRO WO 169/7020. 29 Th e publication of an African soldier’s account of the Burma Campaign is an exception to the rule that only ‘abstract’, emotionless war news informed the Afri- can readership about the course of war. Sgt. J. Sebanja, “Brigedi Yetu Vitani Burma,” Heshima (June 27, 1945), 1. 30 In May 1942 the East African Standard made the problem of ‘voluntary evacua- tion’ from Mombasa and Dar es Salaam one of its prime issues. 31 Th e Middle Eastern Command was established in 1939 and based in Cairo with responsibility for the Middle East theatre which included North Africa, East Africa, Persia, the Middle East and British troops in Greece and on the Balkans. 32 East Africa Command, with headquarters in Nairobi, came into being in September 1941. Its purpose was to free the Commander-in-Chief, Middle East, from East African aff airs. Th e new command comprised Ethiopia, Eritrea (for a short time only), Ital- ian Somaliland, British Somaliland, Kenya, Zanzibar, Tanganyika, Uganda, Nyasaland and Northern Rhodesia and the Island Area (Madagascar, Reunion, Seychelles). 33 In August 1943, the Allies created the combined South East Asian Command to take over from British India Command strategic responsibilities and command of the separate national commands in the theatre. 144 katrin bromber out on the Command level as division according to strategic space, projected onto parts of two continents adjacent to the Indian Ocean by the necessities of Allied warfare, might not have been felt in the same way by the African soldiers. Th e combat units especially saw rapid transfer from the Horn of Africa to Madagascar or Ceylon and from there to the Burma theatre—and a stopover in Kenya was in most cases included. Th e fragmentation they might have experienced was a sense of movement within and permanent observation of bounds and separation from home for a considerable period of time. What seemed to unite for the ‘common cause’, as the initial quotation of this chapter suggests, also seemed to separate for the same reason. Th e spatial coherence of the ‘common cause’ turned out to be one of the main strategies of a propaganda which was purposely designed for East and Central African soldiers. Using Swahili and Nyanja as means of communication, the military produced newspapers, broadcasts, fi lms, lectures and posters as attempts to infl uence the self-positioning of the African troops in a space absolutely dominated and structured by strategic considerations. Th e military necessity of keeping East African troops informed and motivated not only led to the emergence of an impressive mediascape34 for its own sake. It had a spatial expansion covering the Western Indian Ocean realm, North, East, South and Central Africa, the Levant and South Asia;35 it was also the place to invoke and test a distinct repertoire of symbols or audio-visual representations of a space off ered to large numbers of East African soldiers. Th e following section will demonstrate how cartographical representations were made part of this repertoire which constitutes a spatial notion conceived by the military with an attempt to structure the soldiers’ war experiences in line with the Imperial project.

34 With the term mediascape I refer to Arjun Appadurai’s defi nition of the term in his essay “Disjuncture and Diff erence in the Global Cultural Economy,”Public Culture 2, 2 (1990), 9. 35 For a detailed description of the media production for East African troops see Katrin Bromber, “Blühende Medienlandschaft en: Britische Informationspolitik für ostafrikanische Truppen während des Zweiten Weltkrieges,” Sozialgeschichte.extra (Dezember 10, 2007), http://www.stift ung-sozialgeschichte.de/?selection=17 (accessed July 2, 2008). mapping the ocean: visual representations 145

Indian Ocean Maps as Arguments for Strategic Intra-oceanic Movement

Th e front-page of the fourth issue of the weekly Heshima shows an African Sergeant of the East African Army Education Corps (EAAEC) in front of a map of the Greater Indian Ocean and Asia. His index fi nger points at Ceylon, where the troops listening had just arrived a few weeks ago. According to the subtitle the Sergeant explains to the soldiers the progress of war in the Southeast Asian theatre. Th e article explains that this kind of lecture is given once a week in the information room.36 Picture and text hint to the fact that the intellectual skill of map reading was not only demanded from specialised African personnel but was expected to a minimum degree of all troops. Th is was especially true for the infantry platoons who prepared for jungle warfare. Apart from the physical training, literacy courses, as well as language and arithmetic classes,37 the soldiers were instructed in jungle navigation, involving map reading and the use of a compass.38 Army education offi cers serving the Nyasaland troops, for example, trained their African personnel in topographic terminology and the use of cartographic symbols. Th e relevant vocabulary had to be learned by heart.39 Th us, it is not surprising that maps found their way into the military press and other propaganda material designed for the soldiers. Th ere was Askari, the weekly of the East Africa Command, which was distributed to all units irrespective of the Command area they were actually attached to. Pamoja and its Nyanja Version Pamodzi were produced in Diego Suarez and addressed to the East African troops serving in the Island Area (Madagascar, Seychelles, and Reunion). Habari Zetu was printed by the Directorate of Printing and Sta- tionary Services, Addis Ababa, and designed for the soldiers who fought during the Abyssinian Campaign. Heshima, the weekly for the

36 “Yako Maswali?” Heshima (August 25, 1943), Maswali na Majibu, 5. 37 Especially during World War II, the army provided basic education for thousands of East African soldiers. For further information see Timothy Parsons, “Danger- ous Education? Th e Army as School in Colonial East Africa,” Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History 8, 1 (2000), 113. 38 Timothy R. Moreman, Th e Jungle, the Japanese and the British Commonwealth Armies at War, 1941–45: Fighting Methods, Doctrine and Training for Jungle Warfare (London, 2005), p. 14. 39 I am grateful to Timothy Lovering, who had interviewed former colonial army offi cers, for this information. 146 katrin bromber troops serving in South Asia, was printed in Colombo and, later, in Calcutta. Out of these, only Askari and Heshima made use of maps, with a majority published in the latter. With the exception of a Burma map, Askari used them as mere icons. In 1945 maps of the East African colonies (Kenya, Uganda, and Northern Rhodesia) and Tanganyika Ter- ritory were attached to the header of the home news sections (map 1). Th e link between cartographical representations and texts was never made explicit, but rather derives from the simple fact that the map is followed by news from the respective home territories. Th e pattern of these ‘cartographic icons’ is uniform. Th e colonial or mandated territory is placed as a white contour drawing in the centre of the map with major cities and rivers indicated. Th e neighbouring territories are hatched. A scale is always added in one of the four corners, as well as the name of the territory itself, which is centred. Since the soldiers were, in the fi rst place, identifi ed by the military authorities according to colonial territories, one could argue that these icons were used as means of integration—as one strategy of building a ‘national myth’.40 For the East African reader these ‘cartographic icons’ could have served as markers to fi nd the relevant home news more quickly, which meant that the soldiers would identify the icon with ‘home’. Th is would presumably meet the editors’ intention to serve a post-war imperial project that increasingly emphasised the colonial state. Th ese icons could consequently be seen as attempts to legitimise colonial power in that maps “connect territory with the social order.”41 In the context of Indian Ocean history one might argue that it was the out-of-area deployment which created an excellent opportunity for imperial (post-war) policy makers to inscribe in the soldiers’ minds the notion of belonging to a bounded political entity, the colonial territory. Th is was worth defending and supporting in civilian as well as military post-war projects. In his study on Malawian soldiers during World War II, the British Historian Timothy J. Lovering shows that the war was an important source of developing a shared ‘Nyasa’

40 Winfried Speitkamp, “Grenzen der Hybridisierung? Symboltransfer in postkolonialen Staaten Afrikas,” in Kommunikationsräume—Erinnerungsräume: Beiträge zur transkulturellen Begegnung in Afrika, ed. Winfried Speitkamp (München, 2005), pp. 277, 289. 41 David Turnbull, “Cartography and Science in Early Modern Europe: Mapping the Construction of Knowledge Spaces,” Imago Mundi 48 (1996), 7. mapping the ocean: visual representations 147

L. RUDOLF

NORTHERN FRONTIER

TURKANA K E N KITALE Y ELDORET A AAPSABET

MERU

A A A

I I

I KISUMU

R R R NYERI

O EMBU

C EORT MALL I Tana V NAIROBI . L NAROK KITUI MACHAKOS KATIADO

LAMU Azhi 005050 100 VOI MALINDI Miles

MOMBASA

Map 3. East African Colonies (Kenya, Uganda, and Northern Rhodesia) and Tanganyika Territory 148 katrin bromber experience and a Nyasa/Malawian consciousness.42 Hence, the spatial propaganda could have contributed to this development. Th e use of ‘cartographic icons’ also served the spatial strategy of homogenisation. Since all maps in question followed the same pattern, the spatial representations produced a notion of we-are-all-in-the-same-boat. Th ey were introduced into the newspaper precisely when the preferential treatment of contingents from Uganda and Kenya threatened the discipline within the forces. Th e produced space was political and institutional. On the fi rst inspection it appears homogeneous; and indeed it serves those forces which make a tabula rasa of whatever stands in their way, of whatever threatens them—in short, of diff erences.43 Whereas in the beginning of the war British military propaganda preferred ethnic diff erentiation, dividing people into ‘martial races’ rather than playing the spatial card, they explicitly linked troops to the colonial (home) territory when demobilisation was put on the agenda.44 However, the majority of maps used in the Swahili military newspapers were thematically linked to the actual course of war. Th at most of them visualised the Southeast Asian and the Southwest Pacifi c theatres of war might be explained by the fact that they appeared in Hes- hima. Th e weekly was published for the African soldiers of the 11th East African Division which was attached to the SEAC. In contrast to Askari, where editors paid little attention as to whether a map matched the text to which it was linked, Heshima impresses by an excellent text—map—coherence. Whereas Askari only called the reader’s attention to the map while reading a text which oft en covered a much larger territory than visualised, Heshima produced a meta-language which carefully led the reader through the text—map—composition. Maps that represented the Indian Ocean as a ‘whole’ not only emphasised the connectedness between its western and eastern parts,

42 Timothy J. Lovering, “Military Service, Nationalism and Race: Th e Experience of Malawians in the Second World War,” in Th e World in World Wars: Experiences, Perceptions and Perspectives from Africa and Asia, eds. Heike Liebau, Katrin Bromber, Katharina Lange, Dyala Hamza, Ravi Ahuja (Leiden, forthcoming). 43 Lefebvre, Production of Space, p. 285. 44 Initially, the composition of the units mainly relied on British assumptions of tribal fi ghting qualities and inter-tribal relations. It was especially during World War II, when the inappropriateness of the whole idea of martial races became apparent. mapping the ocean: visual representations 149 but also showed the strategic link to the Southwest Pacifi c.45 Repre- sentations of this kind made the Indian subcontinent and especially Ceylon the centre of the Indian Ocean as a strategic space. Facing the Japanese entrance into the war and their successful and rapid west- ward advancement, the military importance of this area was made one of the prime news topics. In the second issue in August 1943, Hes- hima published a ‘relational’ Indian Ocean map with Ceylon clearly at its centre (map 2). Lines, which link major port cities, are inscribed with the distances in miles. On the visual level, locations are brought into relations with each other in order to produce a spatial notion of an Indian Ocean which is held together by strategic necessities. Th is concept stood in contrast to its lived fragmentation caused by the war, especially the long-term separation from home. Since the lines indicated distance and not sea routes they presented the connectedness on a completely abstract level. Th e interpretation of the map itself was structured by its subtitle and the text on the opposite page. Th e following subtitle puts the main message to the soldiers in a nutshell: Th is map shows the island of Ceylon which is half-way between Africa and those countries like Burma, Th ailand and Sumatra which are captured by the Japanese.46 Th e text on the opposite page spins this spatial argument further. It links the visual representation to the three main reasons for deployment of East African military personnel on the island. First, the enemy had to be approached half-way instead of waiting until he would invade East Africa. Second, Ceylon was not to be captured by the Japanese since that would enable them to dominate the Western Indian Ocean. As a consequence, all the fabrics and food that came from the Indian subcontinent could no longer be shipped to East Africa lest they would be seized by the Japanese. Th ird, Ceylon was near Burma, where East African units reinforced Imperial troops. Since the natural conditions were similar to a large extent to the potential area of the next battle contact, the island provided an excellent training terrain for jungle

45 For the Allied Command level conception of South East Asia forming a subsidi- ary theatre in the wider Pacifi c War see Timothy R. Moreman, Th e Jungle, p. 1. 46 “Ramani inaonyesha kisiwa cha Ceylon kilicho nusu ya njia toka Afrika na nchi zile kama Burma, Th ailand na Sumatra zilizokamatwa na Wajapani.” (Editor, “Sababu tatu kwa nini tumekuja Ceylon” Heshima (August 11, 1943), 7.) 150 katrin bromber Map 4. Indian Ocean mapping the ocean: visual representations 151 warfare.47 However, whereas the map presents the greater Indian Ocean as a unity with Ceylon and the Indian subcontinent as its centre, the text stresses fragmentation in that it communicates an India-Ceylon frontier. It is, as the initial quotation of this paper says, an “outpost of East Africa”, and this legitimated the island’s protection by East and Central African soldiers. Comparing the ‘protection argument’ of the text with the represented space on the map, it is striking that East Africa is hardly visible; a fact which might have undermined the argument itself. ‘Relational’ maps not only reveal a sense of distance but also of movement, i.e. shift ing battle fronts. In the course of Allied military success in 1944, Heshima increased this eff ect by publishing ‘vectorised’ maps. Huge vectors pointing from the margins (territories successfully liberated by the Allied forces) to the centre (Japanese held positions) indicating that the Allied forces now began to ‘squeeze’ the enemy (map 3). Interestingly, some ‘vectorised’ maps were addition- ally invested with radar half circles, which make them appear like radar pictures for air craft navigation (map 4). Since their appearance in the newspaper is restricted to the second half of 1945, it could be argued that they also represent the mastering of this new kind of technology. In maps which contain both ‘relational’ and ‘vectorised’ aspects, the latter exclusively signifi es real movement of troops while the former visualises the potential threat of (mostly) air borne attacks. Vectors always indicated who was in control of the situation. With regard to the Southeast Asian theatre, the strategic importance of islands was permanently stressed in both text and cartography. In December 1943 Heshima published a map showing the Andaman Islands as its centre (map 5). Lines with inscribed mileages point at major cities in the Gulf of Bengal (Calcutta, Madras) and Colombo. Th e attached text especially referred to the Japanese air raids against Calcutta exactly ten days before the publication of the issue. Th ick, bent arrows show the east-west advancement of the enemy forces. Military advancement by ‘isle hopping’ was a successful Japanese strategy, since islands form perfect military bases for invading large mainland territories. Th us,

47 Editor, “Sababu tatu kwa nini tumekuja Ceylon,” Heshima (August 11, 1943), 6–7. Jungle warfare training was not only restricted to Ceylon. In the winter of 1944, the 28th (EA) Independent Brigade got refresher training at Imphal and the 11th (EA) Division at Ranchi. 152 katrin bromber Map 5. Japanese and Allied Held Areas in the Pacifi c Ocean (Vectorised Map) Map 5. Japanese and Allied Held Areas in the Pacifi mapping the ocean: visual representations 153

Map 6. Pacifi c (Vectorised Map) 154 katrin bromber

Map 7. Bay of Bengal (Andaman Islands) mapping the ocean: visual representations 155 the text responded accordingly: “[. . .] if we launch our major attack it will be necessary to occupy these islands.”48 Arguably, whenever the Indian Ocean was conceived from a strategic perspective, e.g. navigation, piracy, invasion, the importance of islands was highlighted in textual and visual representations.49 With a few exceptions, Indian Ocean historiography largely marginalised islands to the point of their being completely left out.50 In the military context, ‘vectorised’ and ‘relational’ maps visualised the islands’ strategic importance. Since East and Central African troops were also based in Ceylon in order to guard the island, these maps stressed the importance of the geographical position of the East African troops. Th e men were in the right place. Th ey guarded the island and prepared themselves for further eastward movement. Th e to-be-in-the-right-place strategy was to counter increasing uneasiness by the troops about their extended stay on the island instead of being immediately transferred to the battle front. We have already seen that lines with mileages indicated distance across the Ocean and the inherent danger, i.e. the potentiality of attacks. We have also seen that vectors represented movement control and control of the military situation. Maps, however, which were invested with diff erent symbols of strategic connectivity and fragmentation, such as roads, railway tracks and rivers, could obviously dis- pense with additional visual indicators. It was the attached texts which streamlined the spatial presentation in two ways. First, they highlighted the function of this infrastructure as connections between the Ocean with the hinterland, or vice versa, and, through this representation, indicated directed movement. Second, explanations in the texts about frontlines made use of rivers, railway tracks and roads as spatial mark-

48 “[. . .] tutakapoanza shambulio letu kubwa itakuwa lazima tuvikamate visiwa hivyo,” Editor, “Mashambulio Karibu na Ceylon,” Heshima (December 30, 1943), Habari za Vita, 3. 49 For a critical discussion about islands in historiography see Rod Edmond and Vanessa Smith, Islands in History and Representation (London, 2003). 50 For a critique on the marginalisation of islands in recent Indian Ocean paradigms see Walter Schicho, “Die französische Kolonisierung der Inseln im Indischen Ozean: Der Mythos vom Glück und der leichten Liebe,” in Der Indische Ozean: Das afro-asiatische Mittelmeer als Kultur- und Wirtschaft sraum, eds. Dietmar Rothermund and Susanne Weigelin-Schwiedrzik (Wien, 2004), p. 228. Th e argument of the ‘all- round connectivity’ of the islands in general and in the Indian Ocean in particular was pronounced by Michael Pearson, “Littoral Society: Th e Concept and the Problems,” Journal of World History 4 (2006), 356. 156 katrin bromber ers. Th is might be due to the fact that frontlines oft en coincided with roads, rivers or railway tracks. Apart from air supply, which gained a tremendous importance especially for the Burma front, movement of troops, strategic material and information vitally depended on an infrastructure which was linked to the sea.51 In the Ceylonese case, Heshima explicitly pointed to this connection: “If you look at the map you see that all railway tracks end in Colombo.”52 Hence, one could argue that concepts of the Indian Ocean from the strategic point of view always included adjacent territories. However, in the Burma case one has to bear in mind that it was especially the African soldiers’ duty to hack open new paths into the jungle. All in all, the cartographic representations of the Indian Ocean or parts of it as can be found in the army newspapers generally included large parts of the interior. Th ey went beyond the movement of par- ticularised entities like people, objects, ideas and the like, simply by including the notion of permanent spatial shift s. From a cartographic point of view, it seems that the soldiers were presented with an Indian Ocean which stretched from the recruiting areas as far as Northern Rhodesia to the Southwest Pacifi c. However, whereas the ‘watery territory’ of the Ocean appears homogeneously, landmasses were not included or connected as such, but were only presented as particular networks of transport. In this respect, the Indian Ocean is conceived as a set of multilayered relations between concrete localities, which are constituted by transport networks.53

Conclusion

Th is article discussed how the Indian Ocean as a ‘space on the move’, a constructed and spatially varying concept, was transmitted by Brit- ish military propaganda for East and Central African soldiers in order to support a dominant, spatial scheme—a coherent part of the British

51 For techniques and training of East African troops regarding air supply see Moreman, Th e Jungle, p. 168. 52 “Ukiangalia ramani utaona njia za reli zinafi ka Colombo zote,” Editor, “Kisiwa cha Ceylon,” Heshima (August 4, 1943), 4. 53 Löw, Raumsoziologie, p. 111. mapping the ocean: visual representations 157

Empire. Maps, as cartographic representations of space, presented the Indian Ocean as a space with a connectivity that was determined by strategic necessities. On the visual level, this conception has led to the following aspects: it produced a strong visual link between the Eastern and Western Indian Ocean with a further extension to the Southwest Pacifi c. Furthermore, it suggested a centre, i.e. the Indian subcontinent and Ceylon both as a base (place within) and as a frontline (border of the Ocean) at the same time. Coastal towns and harbours were conceptualised as gateways and, thus, military targets. Islands were presented according to their special priority as the military bases per se. Th e maps represented adjacent land masses as connected to the ‘watery territories’ by networks of transport with strategic importance and with a signifying potential as frontiers. Maps of East and Central African colonial states served as icons and turned them into symbols of the post-war Imperial project by linking the movement and agency of the African military personnel in other parts of the Indian Ocean to demobilisation. On the textual level, editors used spatial arguments, which were produced in map-text-compositions, in order to legitimise out-of- area deployment, i.e. expansion of war theatres, the shrinking distance between the front and home, or the strategic importance of islands. All in all, they supported the argument that East and Central African soldiers abroad were in the right place, not only for current developments in the theatres of war, but also for the future of their home territories. Th e empirical fi ndings show that the British military propaganda for East African soldiers produced space on the conceived level in two ways. On the one hand, they presented the connectivity of the Indian Ocean as a ‘network of distances’ on the sea, which were connected to land routes by gateways on the coasts and overlaid by networks of military movements and attacks; this suggested the notion of a ‘structured space’. On the other hand, the military propagandists conceived of the Indian Ocean as an unbounded and ever expanding entity— amorphous and permanently changing. Both trends support the idea that in times of war the Indian Ocean underwent reconfi guration to the extreme with regard to expansion, connectivity and fragmentation. Th e fact that the addressees of such conceptions were soldiers who had various and mostly mainland identities, also gives rise to the assumption that wars set masses of people in motion, who would not occupy 158 katrin bromber the same spatial realm under peace time conditions. If we conceptualise translocality as dialectical process of ‘movement’ and ‘sedimentation’, one could argue that such representations helped to produce a lasting sense of group identity among East and Central African soldiers, which was based on their deployment ‘elsewhere’. Th e other side of the coin is that people like Indian Ocean trading communities, whose peace time biographies are characterised by a high degree of mobility across the Ocean, were faced with restrictions or prevention of movement in this direction. Instead they had to move further inland, especially if they were living on strategically important coastal towns. With regard to the circulation of ideas and information, it was defi - nitely World War II which increased the sheer amount of news and its transmission over huge distances by a rapidly advancing information technology. Th is process resulted in the spread of a body of already existing or newly created symbols among the East African military, but also tried to structure their self-positioning as an attempt to counter the uncertainty of belonging in a social space under permanent and drastic reconfi guration. REGIONAL ATTRACTIONS: WORLD AND VILLAGE IN KABYLIA (ALGERIA)

Judith Scheele All Souls College, Oxford

Manifestation et instrument d’un pouvoir organisé sur l’espace territorial et sur les gens qui y vivent, la frontière a pu prendre en eff et, selon les époques et selon les domaines géographiques, des visages aussi divers que ceux des Etats eux-mêmes et des sociétés concernées. Il n’est pas de réfl exion sérieuse sur le thème de la frontière qui ne conduise à porter l’investigation jusqu’au cœur même de l’état dont elle n’est à vrai dire que l’organe périphérique.1 Th ere have long been debates over the usefulness of the notion of ‘regions’ in the social sciences. Mostly these have been overridden by practical considerations, such as the categories used in academic administration, the challenges of linguistic training and the demands of the job-market that oblige social scientists to become regional special- ists whether they originally intended to or not. Yet regions are notoriously diffi cult to defi ne, and publications with a regional focus tend to open with painstaking discussions of boundaries without ever coming to any defi nitive conclusions.2 Furthermore, delimitations of regions oft en carry within them traces of past or present power relations and political projects, and might easily become self-fulfi lling prophecies; they are therefore easier to deconstruct than to defend. One way of avoiding these problems might be to adopt the notion of borders as suggested more than half a century ago by French geographers keen to dispel threatening German ideas about ‘natural borders’: to shift our focus of investigation away from a region’s boundaries towards its core and the forces that keep it together. Th us, in 1938, Jacques Ancel claimed that every kind of community necessarily produces its own kind of boundaries, and that the study of the former would necessarily

1 Pol Trousset, “L’idée de la frontière au Sahara et les données archéologiques,” in Enjeux sahariens, ed. Pierre-Robert Baduel (Paris, 1984), p. 50. 2 For an example of these diffi culties, see Dale Eickelman, Th e Middle East: An Anthropological Approach (Englewood, 1981). 160 judith scheele precede the latter: A border is a “political isobar that establishes, for a while, the balance between two pressures”.3 Decades later, similar notions were put forward by Braudel and Wallerstein, when attempting to defi ne the boundaries of the world-economy or world-system they were aiming to describe; these were seen to be situated where the ‘pull’ of the core was about to disappear or give way to the infl uence of another regional centre.4 In such an approach, regions are inevitably dynamic, not static, and contain diff erences of attraction that hold them together. Th ey are thus politically and economically charged and in themselves expressions of inequalities, rather than similarities; they are never only geographically or even historically determined, but are maintained by constant exchange, movement and activity; rather than as an area that could be coloured in on a map, they appear as signifi cant spheres of action and thought. Such an approach, however, as attractive as it might seem at fi rst, leads to severe methodological diffi culties, as regions might overlap or shift over time. Furthermore, if taken seriously, it demands that an in-depth local study precedes any attempt at regional inquiry. In this contribution, I would nevertheless like to try to apply this defi nition of a ‘region’ to a village in Kabylia, a Berber-speaking area in north-eastern Algeria, if only to see whether such an attempt might bear any fruit and further our understanding both of the village and Kabylia, and of the local signifi cance of ‘regions’. Kabylia, all French colonial and Kabyle contemporary sources agree, is remote, timeless, rooted, and static.5 Its population long resisted, it is claimed, both Ara-

3 Ancel, Jacques, Géographie des frontières (Paris, 1938), p. 195. 4 Fernand Braudel, Civilisation matérielle, économie et capitalisme, XVe–XVIIIe siècle , 3, Le temps du monde (Paris, 1979) and Immanuel Wallerstein, Th e Modern World System, vol. 1 (New York, 1974). See also Fernand Braudel’s earlier work, La Méditerranée et le monde méditerranéen à l’époque de Philippe II (1949; trans. and repr. Glasgow, 1975), in which the Mediterranean appears as the ‘sum of its movements’. 5 See for example Adolphe Hanoteau and Aristide Letourneux, La Kabylie et les coutumes kabyles (Paris, 1872–1873) and Emile Masqueray, Formation des cités chez les populations sédentaires de l’Algérie: Kabyles du Djurdjura, Chaouïa de l’Aourâs, Beni Mezâb (1886; repr. Aix-en-Provence, 1983), and Antoine-Ernest-Hippolyte Carette, Études sur la Kabilie proprement dite (Paris, 1848) for a notable exception; and Mouloud Feraoun, Jours de Kabylie (Algiers, 1954), Mouloud Mammeri, La colline oubliée (Paris, 1957) and, more diff erentiated, Alain Mahé, Histoire de la Grande Kabylie XIXe–XXe siècles (Paris, 2001). For an overview of the French colonial literature, see Patricia Lorcin, Imperial Identities: Stereotyping, Prejudice and Race in Colonial Algeria (London, 1995). For a thorough bibliography on Kabylia in general, see Mahé, Histoire. world and village in kabylia (algeria) 161 Cairo, Mecca Cairo, Tripoli Tūnis Bizerte S ̣ afāqis Qābis : Kabylia : TUNISIA Annaba Guelma Tabessa Oum el Bouaghi El-Oued Constantine Skikda Biskra Jijel Batna Paris, Ardennes Paris, Touggourt Ouargia Béjaīa : Taddart M’Sila Tizi Djelfa Ouzou Alger Laghouat Blida Akabli, Timbuktu, Ségou Timbuktu, Akabli, Tiaret El Asnam Saïda Mascara Tlemcen Map 8. Kabylia and Other Places Mentioned in the Text (Cartography: Judith Scheele) Mostaganem Oran Béchar Sidi BelSidi Abbes : Places mentioned in the text mentioned : Places Séguiet el-Hamra ALTAR (U.K.) ALTAR Fez, Marrakech Fez, 162 judith scheele bic and Islamic infl uence; it has always been independent, democratic, poor; its high mountains have preserved original North African or Roman ways—depending on the perspective adopted. Yet, geographically at least, Kabylia is also situated at the crossroads of several world civilisations; it has long overlooked the main inland roads from the Mediterranean to the Sahara and beyond; it has produced great Islamic scholars, scores of soldiers and, more recently, the fi rst wave of emigration to France. Kabylia is in itself generally treated as a region, although its regional unity might at closer look be less evident; however, through recent developments of political opposition and regional homogenisation, the status of Kabylia as a region in its own right seems to be less and less doubtful. Questions of what larger region Kabylia might belong to are less easily answered, as they feed into a long series of political debates about Kabyle and Algerian identity. Algerian nationalism is strong, and jealous; Algeria’s relationships with its neighbours have long been tense, and statements of regional belonging might easily be misread as claims to hegemony or separatism. Demands for a united ‘Berber homeland’ that would include all Berber-speaking populations of North Africa, are fi rst and foremost a political claim reacting to other hegemonic projects, and are widely understood as such. Claims that Kabylia is part of the Mediterranean might sound too close to French colonial rhetoric;6 while attempts to link it to the Middle East or, even worse, the ‘Arab world’ are resented for opposite reasons. Yet these categories cannot be rejected out of hand, as they form part and parcel of people’s lives and the ways in which they construe their own identities, ‘regional’ or not. Arguing from the inside out, this article aims to show what kind of region might have mattered to Kabyles throughout time, how and why these regions might have changed, and how they relate to the categories listed above. It thereby demonstrates that the ‘pull’ of various regions and their change over time are an integral part of lived reality that needs to be taken into account in order to fully comprehend Kabylia, both in the past and the present. Kabylia, then, constitutes a good example of the multiplicity of regions which a given place might be part of over time, and of how these

6 Braudel’s Méditerranée, published less than a decade before the Algerian war of independence broke out by a former (1923–1934) teacher in Constantine and Algiers and supporter of the Algérie française, is thus far from politically neutral. world and village in kabylia (algeria) 163 regions are constructed and maintained. At the same time, it shows the impact of such regional pulls on local life.

Grandfathers and Brides

My doctoral research was conducted in Taddart,7 a village of roughly 1,500 inhabitants overlooking the Soummam Valley, the geographical frontier between Greater and Lesser Kabylia. It is situated three hundred kilometres east of Algiers, and sixty kilometres southwest of the important harbour town of Béjaïa. One of my initial aims was to trace the history of the village, an undertaking with which I had but little luck, for reasons that I have tried to explain elsewhere.8 However, it soon became clear to me that the history of the village, as far as I could establish it, was a history of movement. None of the families in the village pretended to be of local origin,9 all claimed to have moved there in stages, from an area that extended far beyond the valley, but whose main place-names were surprisingly recurrent throughout most family histories. Th ese ancestors’ past itineraries were said to be dotted with material traces of their passage. Although sometimes forgotten by the younger generation, they are still alive in family names and in topographic terms that oft en take the names of the people who used to live there. Until today, some of these itineraries are revived through pilgrimages and marriage arrangements; several families continue to claim ownership of land they had once settled, although it might be too far away even to think about working it or ‘owning’ it in any practical way. If one were to map all these claimed places of origin, the map of the village and its surroundings would be covered in criss-crossing pathways, extending far beyond its borders. Th ese pathways might serve as an indication of the ‘region’ in which Taddart has evolved, at least according to contemporary local historical imagination. Th is region

7 All names have been changed. 8 “Generating Martyrdom: Forgetting the War in Contemporary Algeria,” Studies in Ethnicity and Nationalism 6, 2 (2006), 180–194 and Village Matters: Politics, Knowl- edge and Community in Kabylia (Algeria) (Oxford, 2009). 9 Th is observation has also been made elsewhere in Kabylia, see Masqueray, For- mation, for an early mention, and Nadia Abdelfettah-Lahri, “La ville, l’urbanité et l’autochtonie: Analyse des représentations dans les discours sur Béjaïa” (Mémoire de Magistère, University of Béjaïa, 2000) for a more recent analysis. 164 judith scheele does not correspond to present-day notions of Kabylia, but rather links the Soummam valley to the Arabic speaking areas to the East, stopping short of the city of Constantine: in other words, the area whose abundant production of cereals has long been indispensable for the economic survival of the area, and whose semi-urban civilisation clearly has left traces in the village.10 Rather than linking places that are today seen as very much alike, they created connections between areas that were inherently diff erent, and complementary. However, even within a community as small as Taddart, diff erent families would lay claim to diff erent areas both of origin and of privileged interaction; and some of those who said they arrived much later to Taddart link their own family histories to origins to the West, to Greater Kabylia—but then, as village sociology has it, they are ‘newcomers’, and this peculiar origin is but one indication proving this. Th ese historic ‘connections’ between families, villages and places were doubled up by repeated patterns of economic and matrimonial exchanges. Th e French colonial registers allow us to verify such claims from the second half of the nineteenth century onwards.11 Overall, frequent marriage patterns seem to confi rm the general layout of the region as established through family histories. Networks of traders, markets and peddlers seem to have followed similar lines, as older villagers remember their grandfathers and fathers conducting business from M’Sila to Sétif, Arabic-speaking markets to the southeast and east respectively. Th e marriage pattern of local religious families (marabouts), although they tended to locate their origin to the West and outside the area that seems to be of relevance to Taddart, similarly corresponded to village connections, as did the scope of their religious and intellectual activities and their choice of educational institutions for their children. Even the family of the local bach-agha Ben Aly Chérif,12 marabout of a neighbouring village and employed fi rst by the

10 Alan Christelow, Muslim Law Courts and the French Colonial State in Algeria (Princeton, 1985) notes the large number of minor ‘ulamâ’ active in the region of Constantine that were originally from Lesser Kabylia. 11 Th e Etat-civil de la commune mixte d’Akbou, douar de Chellata, 1892, held at the town hall of Chellata, and the Registre des mariages de la commune mixte d’Akbou, 1891–1963, held at the archives of the Akbou town hall; for recent changes, the Sijill al-zawâj baladiyya shallâta, 1985–2003, held at Chellata. For a full analysis of these documents, see Scheele, Village Matters. 12 Bach-agha was the highest rank in the French colonial administration given to an indigenous administrator. world and village in kabylia (algeria) 165

Ottomans and then by the French, based his infl uence on connections within the area indicated by village activity, though on a notionally much grander scale.13 With French colonial conquest, the area of village activity and alliance was gradually transformed. Movement became partly more restricted, partly easier due to increased security. Administrative boundaries started to have a real impact on people’s activities, as crossing them meant displaying the necessary paperwork that was notoriously diffi cult to obtain.14 New roads were constructed, oft en to refl ect administrative divisions. Over the years, marriage patterns changed imperceptibly, and were increasingly concentrated within the valley and the commune of Akbou, the larger administrative unit. Akbou itself blossomed into a large town that started to exert a considerable attraction on villagers. More generally, the rapidly growing towns in the valley, and the relatively easy means of transport that connected them, became central to village marital alliances. Unions with Kabyles from Greater Kabylia became also more common, as did connections with Algiers; while villages to the East, formerly rather ‘close’ to Tad- dart, came to be neglected and seem to have become increasingly inaccessible and ‘foreign’. Today, most marriages are concluded within the village or with one of the two neighbouring towns. With the exception of occasional marriages to emigrant cousins in France or Algiers, the ‘region’ covered by networks of kinship has thus shrunk considerably. Yet the web of past and present kinship, carefully tended and maintained through mutual visits, gift s and services, remains crucial to the way the world opens up to villagers. Th is is especially true for women and girls, for whom visits to relatives oft en constitute the only opportunity to travel and to acquire direct knowledge of places and people outside their immediate neighbourhood. For the younger generations, photo-albums of relatives rather than family histories seem to describe a region that is

13 See the description given of Ben Aly Chérif ’s sphere of infl uence, maintained through marriage as well as political alliance, in a letter by the Administrateur de la commune mixte d’Akbou to the sous-préfet de Bougie (February 24, 1953), held at the Archives d’outre-mer (AOM) in Aix-en-Provence, unclassifi ed folder on Akbou. 14 Th e code de l’indigénat, applied throughout Algeria as soon as civil administration was established from the 1870s onwards, required all non-naturalised Algerians (indigènes) to remain in their douar (district) of residence unless they had an offi cial permit to leave it (see Charles-Robert Ageron, Les algériens musulmans et la France (1871–1919) (Paris, 1968). 166 judith scheele relevant to them, more or less directly ‘known’, and within which they defi ne themselves. Th e fact that this area has been reduced over recent years thus means a contraction of the familiar for most villagers; at the same time, the ‘region’ that is of relevance to them, ‘known’ through television and especially internet, now also includes Algiers and parts of Paris, as inaccessible as these places might in actual fact remain.

Saints and Scholars

In addition to family histories, various saintly legends establish links between Taddart and certain places beyond its boundaries.15 Th e local saints are said to have come from Morocco, and to have led lives of wandering and searching, until they settled down to establish a village or open a zâwiya (pl. zawâyâ, in Kabyle taεmamart, from the Arabic ‘amara, to settle).16 Much as the itineraries of the village families mentioned above are dotted with places inevitably connected to them by their family history and names, the saints’ itineraries, as they appear in local legends, are marked by the physical proof, the burhân, of their passage: a spring they caused to yield water, a village they established, a rock they displaced. Th rough this emphasis on the saints’ individual itineraries through ‘known’ places, and on their faraway origin, the saints appear as mediators, or literally as ‘go-betweens’ between the local and the world;17 their itineraries are long lists of ‘familiar’ places that are seen as somehow connected to the present village and to its spiritual well-being:

15 In the colonial literature the veneration of saints has come to be seen as one of the distinguishing features of North African Islam, and as a more ‘appropriate’ form of religion for sedentary agriculturalists than the more ‘abstract’ Islam of the ‘nomadic civilisations’ of the hijâz (see for example Corneille Trumelet, Les saints de l’islam: Légendes hagiologiques et croyances algériennes (Paris, 1881), Alfred Bel, La religion musulmane en Berbèrie (Paris, 1938) and Emile Dermenghem, Le culte des saints dans l’Islam maghrébin (Paris, 1954). Th eir faraway origin has thereby oft en been ignored. 16 Th roughout the Maghrib, the zawâyâ fulfi lled a variety of functions in rural life: generally constructed around the tomb of a local saint, they served as teaching institutes of varying quality, where the teachers of the village Qur’ânic schools would be educated, as sites of pilgrimages, institutes of charity, hostels, and meeting places for religious brotherhoods. 17 See also Houari Touati, “Essor et fonction du saint homme,” Peuples méditer- ranéens 52, 3 (1990), 145–154. world and village in kabylia (algeria) 167

[Th e local saint] Si Mohand ou Messaoud belongs to the axxam [family, lit. house] Ben Aly Chérif. Like them, he came from Morocco, he went through the Beni Waghlis, via Smaoun, and he came along the path above the village. He stopped at Si Moussa ou Ali and sat there for some time. He made water fl ow at Si Mohand ou Messaoud, and then he stayed there and founded his zâwiya.18 Th e saints thereby link the area to the centres of the Islamic world, such as southern Morocco, Cairo and Mecca, and, ultimately, to God and all his saints. Th e origin of the zawâyâ, the most visible localities in the area, is seen as the result of past movement, channelling a central force—God’s baraka—to a place that thereby becomes specifi c, and named. Physically, the place so founded resembles all other zawâyâ: it evokes an architectural model that can be found throughout North Africa, and that North African scholars and saints took with them on their journeys to distant places, in particular the Algerian south and the Niger bend.19 By their uniformity, by the recurrence of their names and deeds, and by their genealogical connections, these saints create regional unity and a common feeling of familiarity, signifi cance and belonging, stretching from Morocco via Kabylia to Tunisia and beyond, and south across the Sahara. Although family histories are in structure very similar to saints’ stories, the latter thus describe a very diff erent kind of region, reaching much further, composed of inaccessible holy places, fi nding its earthly centre on the Atlantic coast in southern Morocco rather than in the East, and situating its spiritual source in the realm of the saints. Nevertheless, this region also has a direct impact on the movements of contemporary villagers by inspiring and directing their pilgrimages to nearby holy places. Many of the local saints only survive in legends, pilgrimages, songs, poems, and place-names. Others, however, can be identifi ed with regional Islamic scholars. Th eir zawâyâ oft en blossomed into Islamic teaching institutes, attracting students and teachers from throughout the Central Maghrib and beyond. Th ey were sometimes situated in villages, sometimes next to them; at times large landowners through religious endowments, they shaped the surrounding landscape, and oft en gave rise to considerable settlement and agricultural enterprise;

18 Th is local legend corresponds to the stereotypical saint legend that can be found throughout the Central Maghrib; for a collection of these legends, see Trumelet, Les saints de l’islam and Dermenghem, Le culte des saints. 19 Cf. Nadir Marouf, Lecture de l’espace oasien (Paris, 1980). 168 judith scheele but they remained, at least in local perception, places essentially representative of movement and circulation, deriving their legitimacy from their constantly maintained outside connections. Th ey functioned as hostels, put up travellers, and constituted privileged links with the world of Islam, thereby creating their own region, notionally independent of but in practice oft en interacting with that created by markets, kinship and mundane travel. Th ese zawâyâ conserve traces of the circulation they resulted from and gave rise to in their collections of manuscripts. Taddart houses three hundred manuscripts, dating mainly from a period stretching from the late seventeenth to the fi rst decades of the twentieth century. Th ese manuscripts were bought on local markets, brought by travelling students, passed on from teachers to students, or procured by scholars on their trips abroad. Despite their various origins, they bear witness to the existence of a region constituted through scholarly contacts and within which most intellectual exchange took place. Almost half of the manuscripts came from the area centred on Béjaïa, which in the past had been an important centre of Islamic learning. Th is area mainly included both mountain-slopes over-looking the Soummam valley. It therefore overlapped partly with the area of village activity described above, although it appears larger, extending further north. Another fi ft h of the manuscripts preserved in Taddart came from the Algerian East more generally. Eighty-fi ve percent of manuscript texts originated in the Maghrib, and the remaining fi ft een percent were constituted by standard Middle Eastern Islamic texts. Th e rare printed documents in the collection were published in the 1950s either in Algiers or Egypt. Despite the various origins of authors and texts, the copies themselves do not show any obvious signs of diff erent origin, indicating that they were produced in an area marked by a certain uniformity of materials and script, stretching from the Soummam valley to Constantine and Tunis. A village library ‘discovered’ recently on the other side of the valley owns an even larger collection of manuscripts, some of which have travelled for thousands of miles, but most of which equally seem to bear traces of a certain regional coherence.20 In addition to the area traced

20 See Djamil Aïssani and Djamel Eddine Mechehed, Manuscrits de Kabylie: Cata- logue de la collection Ulahbib (Algiers, 2007). world and village in kabylia (algeria) 169 by the manuscript collection in Taddart, Moroccan centres of scholarship such as Fez and Marrakech fi gure prominently in the inventory. Nevertheless, here as in Taddart, Béjaïa and its larger region, connected to the wider Algerian East, appear to have been central to local perceptions of Islam and scholarship more generally. Inversely, copies of manuscripts produced by local scholars could be found throughout the Islamic world, but with a clear emphasis on the Algerian East and South, and Islamic West Africa.21 Despite the decline of the zawâyâ following the French conquest, local French colonial archives abound in reports on the movement of students and teachers, to and from Kab- ylia; the circulation of manuscripts, both from Morocco and increasingly also from the Middle East, remained one of their chief worries. French reports, by retracing individual scholars’ careers, confi rm the importance of connections within the Algerian East.22 Many local zawâyâ were further linked among themselves through one of the various Sufi brotherhoods that were active in Kabylia at the time, and that yet again created and maintained their own ‘region’ within which they could be eff ective and link people and ideas across large distances. More conspicuous than other religious activities in the area, these orders were perceived as a latent threat by the French, precisely because they created regional allegiances that exceeded colonial boundaries and spheres of infl uence. Large colourful maps of the ‘regions’ they created are thus numerous both in French colonial archives and publications.23 Rather than clarifying the situation, these maps seem to further the reigning confusion, and at best appear to indicate a degree of actual fl exibility that surpassed French colonial epistemological categories. It seems nevertheless clear that the spiritual networks created by Sufi orders, in opposition to those of the saints, were centred on the Arab lands of the East rather than on Morocco. From the 1930s onwards, French reports and village memories allow us to guess at changes in these regional networks brought about by the emergence of Reformist Islam, which reoriented them once more,

21 Judith Scheele, “Al-Waghlîsî à travers le monde,” in Actes du colloque autour ‘Abd al-Rahmân al-Waghlîsî, tenu à Béjaïa du 13 au 15 octobre 2004, eds. Djamil Ais- sani and Judith Scheele (Algiers, 2009). 22 See for example AOM 93/1393 and B3 246. 23 See for example the maps in Louis Rinn, Marabouts et Khouan: Etude sur l’Islam en Algérie (Algiers, 1884) and Octave Depont and Xavier Coppolani, Les confréries religieuses musulmanes (Algiers, 1897). 170 judith scheele this time towards the cities of the littoral.24 Yet the same French documents and oral history also allow us to guess at the permanence in religious contacts that, although nominally within the Reformist connection, relied on links prior to it.25 Th roughout its history, Taddart thus appears as part of several overlapping, but never quite coextensive networks of religious and oft en also political transmission and allegiance, whose complexity allowed for considerable fl exibility on the ground, and never ceased to puzzle French observers. However, as hinted at in the introduction to this article, regions are never static; they are infl uenced by a certain ‘pull’ towards its centre, a pull that through its intellectual, imaginary and practical effi cacy creates and perpetuates ‘margins’. Indeed, despite the large choice of regions that was open to it, it seems that Taddart never ceased to be marginal. Scholarship acquired in Taddart clearly was not the same as scholarship acquired in Mecca or Cairo, and remained far less pres- tigious. Virtually all writings on Kabylia produced by local scholars represent it as an abode of wild mountain dwellers and heathens that need to be reformed; notions of the ‘un-Islamic’ Berbers clearly do not only date from the French conquest.26 And indeed, various reformers fl ocked to the Kabyle mountains in a never-ending stream that proved in itself their lack of success; while an equally dense fl ock of Kabyle scholars travelled each year to Cairo and Mecca to benefi t from the enlightenment of the centres of the Islamic world, and to boast on their return of their numerous links with the most well-known scholars in the world.27 True Islamic scholarship, most local sources seem to agree, could only be achieved in one of the centres of the Islamic world; any scholar with any ambitions needed to have been there, and ideally have produced a rihla (account of his journey) to prove the

24 See for example the anonymous report L’enseignement privé réformiste et l’Association des oulémas d’Algérie held at the Diocesan Archives in Algiers; and the police reports held in the folder Bougie: Associations at the Archives du département de Constantine in Constantine. 25 Judith Scheele, “Recycling baraka: Knowledge, Politics and Religion in Contem- porary Algeria,” Contemporary Studies in Society and History 49, 2 (2008), 304–328. 26 See for example al-Husayn al-Wartîlânî, Nuzhat al-ansâr fî fadl ‘ilm al-târîkh wa-l-akhbâr (Algiers, 1908) and Ibn al-Hâjj, Rihlat al-Abdarî: Al-musammat al-rihlat al-maghribiyya (Rabat, 1968). 27 For an example of this, see Jonathan Katz, Dreams, Sufi sm and Sainthood: The Visionary Career of Muhammad al-Zawâwî (Leiden, 1996). world and village in kabylia (algeria) 171 authenticity and great success of his travels.28 More or less directly, Kabyle scholars partook in the intellectual developments of the entire Islamic world, and learned to adopt its categories, even in reference to their own place of origin. Like the saints (who they oft en became), they derived their local legitimacy from their connection with the outside world, the relations they had established there, and their mastery of ‘universal’ categories they had brought back. Yet seen from the outside, Kabylia itself also had a certain ‘pull’ towards its own hinterland. Most students who travelled to Kabylia came from underprivileged areas in the Algerian South or beyond.29 Local libraries contain manuscripts by West African authors; however, as mentioned above, exchange seems to have been much more frequent in the other direction, and works by local ‘ulamâ, little known beyond their home region, can be found in West African libraries.30 Teachers travelled south from Kabylia to make their fortune and fi nd recognition as representatives of Islam, or of one of the various Sufi orders based in the North; while, save some rare exceptions, knowledge travelling in the other direction was branded sorcery or magic.31 As much as Kabylia received intellectual categories and legitimacy from its close contact with the centres of the Islamic world, it passed them on to places that were even more peripheral,32 thereby establishing a

28 Sami Bargaoui, “Sainteté, savoir et autorité en Kabylie au XVIIIe siècle: La rihla de Warthîlânî,” in L’Autorité des saints, ed. Mohamed Kerrou (Paris, 1999) and see also Dominique Urvoy, “Eff ets pervers du hajj, d’après le cas d’al-Andalus,” inGolden Roads: Migration, Pilgrimage and Travel in Medieval and Modern Islam, ed. Ian Rich- ard Netton (Richmond, 1993). Th e need to travel to acquire greater knowledge is of course not limited to Kabylia, but an integral part of Islamic scholarship, see e.g. Dale Eickelman and James Piscatori, Muslim Travellers: Pilgrimage, Migration and the Religious Imagination (London, 1990). As a whole, this tradition establishes an implicit (and fl exible) hierarchy of places to travel to (‘centres’) and places to travel from (‘margins’). Kabylia and most of the Central Maghrib clearly counted mainly among the latter. 29 Students in the zawâyâ in the southern Constantinois routinely were taught basic Kabyle words, to prepare them for their further study (Fanny Colonna, personal communication). See also the names and origins of students noted by Hanoteau and Letourneux, La Kabylie, and recorded in the French archives (AOM B3 246 and 93/1393). 30 See e.g. Noureddine Ghali, Sidi Mohammed Mahibou and Louis Brenner, Inventaire de la bibliothèque ‘Umarienne de Ségou, conservée à la Bibliothèque Nation- ale (Paris, 1985). 31 Cf. Emile Dermenghem, “Les confréries noires en Algérie,” Revue Africaine 97 (1953), 314–367. 32 Th ere was obviously also a direct route that linked the countries of the bend of the Niger to Cairo, Greater Syria and the hijâz. However, the North African connection 172 judith scheele graded network of intellectual exchange that spanned across a large part of the Islamic world.33

Migrants, Students and Politicians

From the 1920s onwards, migration to the Algerian cities and to France enlarged the ‘region’ that was known, used, and economically relevant to villagers to include parts of Paris and of the French mining towns in the Ardennes. Yet again, these parts were specifi c: one particular street in the nineteenth arrondissement in Paris, or a couple of houses in Charleville-Mézières. In Taddart, areas of Paris and the Ardennes became part of everyday life, through family events associated with them, through work accidents and scars brought home, through letters, pensions, trinkets on the newly constructed mantelpiece, and photos. Th ey eventually changed the village itself, as emigrants could aff ord to construct costly concrete villas instead of the old stone houses, and as the village baptised its back way, through which so many villagers had slipped away to go to France, the rue de Paris. Despite—or rather, because of—migration to France, from the fi rst decades of the twentieth century onwards, the Algerian nation was to become the most important ‘imagined community’ and imagined known region for most villagers. Th is development arguably lasts until today, and has, as it constitutes ‘nationalism’ rather than ‘regionalism’, been studied abundantly.34 In Algeria as elsewhere, one of its mainstays was state education. Th e French had invested early in primary education in Kabylia, and primary schools, leading up to teacher training in Algiers, quickly created their own region to mirror that of the colonial state. Aft er independence, this development was furthered by massive investment in national education, making it accessible to all.

seems to have been more important than is oft en thought, especially where less well- known students and scholars are taken into account. 33 According to Braudel, Méditerranée (1949, translated 1975), pp. 468–469, the Algerian Tell long fulfi lled a similar role of intermediary in the trade between the Western Sudan and the Mediterranean, thus forming ‘an ancient structured system’ to the overall benefi t of the Mediterranean. 34 It is impossible to provide a full bibliography, but see for example Gilbert Meynier, L’Algérie révélée: La guerre de 1914–1918 et le premier quart du XXe siècle (Geneva, 1981) and Omar Carlier, Entre nation et Jihad: Histoire sociale des radicalismes algériens (Paris, 1995). world and village in kabylia (algeria) 173

In the decades aft er the war of independence (1954–1962), education was about movement, and literally opened up new paths leading to the centres of the country, if not of the ‘world’, through the concentration of higher education in the large cities, and the generous attribution of scholarships to study abroad. While studying in the state system, pupils actively developed their own regional networks, following the well-trodden paths of national administration to the national centres of decision-making.35 Yet education also mirrors the ultimate failure of national integration and the reduction of the familiar mentioned above. Today, going to university usually means only to travel as far as the regional capital, Béjaïa, or maybe Tizi-Ouzou, the capital of the neighbouring department. Th ese restrictions of movement seem to have contributed to the popular devaluation of education as a means both of social mobility and the acquisition of knowledge quite as much as the numerical increase in students: much as observed above for religious learning, knowledge obtained ‘abroad’ carries more prestige than that acquired nearby. Diplomas from Algiers tend to be valued more highly than local ones; ‘true education’, everybody seems to agree, can only be achieved in Europe, if needs must even in Eastern Europe; and students deeply resent being ‘held back’ in Kabylia. Th e growing regional consciousness in Kabylia itself clearly stems partly from the reduction of most contacts and paths that are open to villagers in Kabylia itself. Th e same is valid for political movements: militant Berberism, a movement demanding offi cial recognition of Berber cultural identity, sprung up when access to the national administration was perceived to be increasingly restricted to the selected few. It succeeded in creating its own, regional hierarchy, pathways, accesses and regional boundaries. Today, these boundaries, which do not entirely correspond to those that used to be associated with ‘Kabylia’ before the 1980s, but include neighbouring parts of the country whose inhabitants are equally dis- satisfi ed with the current state of aff airs, are respected as such both by Kabyles and by government offi cials. Kabyle demonstrators going to Algiers tend to be stopped by national security forces at these boundaries, but never within them. Th e alleged government policy to ‘punish’ Kabylia for its unruliness by ‘letting it rot’ is limited to the

35 Cf. Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities: Refl ections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism (London, 1983), pp. 53–56. 174 judith scheele same areas. By now, although these boundaries continue to shift , their notional existence has become of central importance in local imagination and for notions of belonging and regional identity. Similarly, local accounts of political careers oft en seem to resemble a geographical description of a signifi cant region within which this political commitment has taken shape, and within which it carries meaning: At the beginning of the mouvement associatif [from 1989 onwards], I was mainly active in Akbou, with associations there. We moved around a lot: that’s how I came to know the universities of Bougie, Tizi Ouzou, Algiers, Boumerdes, all the universities and educational institutes in the region. We took the car, went off , to meet people, exchange ideas. . . . When the association culturelle [in Taddart] had to send a representative to Tizi Ouzou to take a training course in Berber, everybody suggested that I should go, maybe because I already had a certain experience of outside relations. We were put up at the student halls in Tizi Ouzou. Th at’s where I met everybody, and where I learnt everything I know about Berber.36 More generally, Berberism is a good example of how local political commitments strive to create a new region through the development of an independent set of networks that would create access to centres that might at times be situated outside national boundaries.FPO Berberism is a loose term for a complex of ideas centring mainly on the claim that the Berber language and Berber cultural heritage should be recognised and protected.37 Linked to this claim are demands for a more plural- ist form of government, and Berberism has thus, much like Islamism, become a vehicle for the expression of a whole series of dissatisfactions with the Algerian political system. Yet, as it has long been suppressed by the government, the most visible Berberist activities have taken place in France, and especially intellectual endeavours and research into Berber matters are usually conducted at French universities. Th is means that the prime references and linguistic and historical resources for local representatives of the Berber movement are French, and that access to French sources and contact with French academics is crucial to local Berberism, and tends to be displayed with as much publicity as possible. Similarly, one of the fundamental claims of Berberism is the overriding unity of Berber culture throughout the Maghrib. By

36 Interview in Taddart (April 2004). 37 For a well-known full exposition of this argument, see Salem Chaker, Berbères aujourd’hui: Berbères dans le Maghreb contemporain (Paris, 1999). world and village in kabylia (algeria) 175

claiming a certain regional affi liation for Kabylia, Berberism thus creates its own practically effi cient ‘region’, focussed on France, but that also at least notionally includes other Berber-speaking areas of Algeria and neighbouring countries. Th e development of this region shows once more the importance and the eff ects of tensions that are internal to it. Th e fact that its intellectual centres are seen to be in Paris has locally led to the assumption that true ‘local knowledge’, such as local language, history and customs, had better be studied there. During fi eldwork, villagers were reluctant to teach me the language they used, as it was not ‘proper’ Kabyle; local history could only be found in books and documents that had been ‘stolen’ from the village, and could certainly be found in Paris; local customs had been recorded long ago by French eth- nographers, and yet again the books would best be bought in Paris. Mecca might have been replaced by Paris, I felt, but intellectual legitimacy was maybe even more than ever bound up with real and putative outside connections, and ideally with past movement to the current centre of the world: the village had changed its region, but it had not changed its relatively marginal position within it. Th is does not mean that the inhabitants of Taddart are passive consumers of ‘universal’ truth; rather, it means that they are prone to dress up local knowledge in foreign categories in order to legitimise them beyond doubt, and that the fact of being consciously part of a larger whole, whatever whole that might be, infl uences the way many villagers tend to think and especially talk about themselves.

Th e View from the South

Th is picture changes, however, once we take into account how other people might relate to Kabylia. In addition to sending out migrants, Kabylia has also long received them. As late as the nineteenth century, reports of French soldiers who deserted to become Kabyle were legion.38 Long before then, Béjaïa was an important seaport, providing the wealth of the south, including slaves, to the desirous Medi- terranean, and attracting adventurers, merchants and Christian slaves

38 For individual examples, see Carette, Etudes, and Auguste Veller, Monographie de la Commune mixte de Sidi Aïch (1888; published Paris, 2004). 176 judith scheele coming the other way.39 As seen above, all local family histories speak of some kind of outside origin. In addition to this, a large number of contemporary Kabyle villages, in particular in the fertile plains of the valleys, are said to be of servile origin. Th e establishment of these villages is generally associated with the Turks,40 but might in some cases have preceded them. Several families in the area derive their family names from their black origins; there are vivid traces of black Sufi orders, West African musical, medical and magical traditions; certain occupations are associated with blackness. Students have long travelled to Kabylia to further their studies, initially in the search for religious knowledge, since independence more oft en hoping for good further education. Some come from other Berber-speaking areas in Algeria to study in one of the two recently opened departments of Berber study, others from West Africa to benefi t from French-speaking science courses at university. West African students become each year more numerous in the area, although their integration into the receiving society remains exceptional. For most of them, although they oft en stay for years, if not decades, Kabylia is perceived as a buff er zone, as a ‘Europe’ outside Schengen, rather than as an aim in itself. Th ey claim that they initially wanted to go to France, as everybody else, but their results were not good enough to get a scholarship, and they somehow got stuck half way. Th is means that Kabylia and Algeria as a whole oft en leads to bitter deceptions, as it is but a faint refl ection of France. ‘Th ey can’t even speak proper French here’, as almost all West African students I interviewed complained, but what would you expect—they are peasants, whereas we come from large cities and are more used to foreigners. But they don’t realise, they think of themselves as French, and they don’t even know how ridiculous this is.

39 See Robert Brunschvig, La Berbérie orientale sous les Hafsides des origines à la fi n du XVe siècle, 1 (Paris, 1940–1947), pp. 382–384, and the various notes on Saharan trade in the French archives, e.g. AOM 10H30 to 33, 22H13, 22H14, 22H26, 22H33, 22H38, 22H45, 22H46, 22H56 and 22H59. According to Diego de Haëdo, Topogra- phie et histoire générale d’Alger (1612, published Paris, 1998), p. 62, more than half of the population of Algiers in the late sixteenth century was composed of Christian renegades and slaves “as there is not one nation in Christendom that has not sent its share of renegades to Algiers”; the situation in Béjaïa must have been similar. 40 Henri Aucapitaine, “Colonies noires de Kabylie,” Revue Africaine 4 (1860), 73–77. world and village in kabylia (algeria) 177

For others, imbued with ideas of South-South cooperation or Islamic solidarity, Algeria is seen as a destination in itself, although yet again this might lead to deceptions: I have always admired Algeria, politically, aft er all, they fought for their freedom—and a large part of my family live on the other side of the border, so it seemed natural to come here . . . but most Kabyles don’t realise, all they know is France, they see themselves through France’s eyes, and they look at us without interest, although aft er all we are all Muslims, but they don’t care. Or, more poetically: “Kabyles are nomads, always on the move, but they face due north, and never look back . . .”41 As much as the multiple connections that link Kabylia to France and to the Middle East speak of and maintain certain power relations through fostering intellectual dependency, the South might look to Algeria, and certainly used to do so, while actually searching for the refl ection of something else, of one of the current centres of the world. Many migrants thus seem to experience a double displacement; whereas Kabylia remains, as it has long been, a vital intermediary.

Conclusion: An Intellectual World-system?

If we take as our working defi nition of a region an area that is of practical or intellectual and cultural signifi cance to a given set of people, the ways in which this region might be defi ned, and thus its geographical correlates, are varied, and depend both on the historical period and the aspect of social life taken into account. Th e above attempts may help us to defi ne some kind of area that, although it might not have any defi nite boundaries, does indicate patterns of signifi cance and relevance to daily practices and defi nitions in one particular locality. If nothing else, they describe a certain way of relating to the world, and show that regions are never given, but constructed, and that they need to be maintained in order to last: seen from the inside out, regions, if anything, are subject to historic circumstance, and need to be understood as such. Th e above example further shows that the notion of regional coherence does not preclude the existence of internal tensions and diff erences; indeed, it might be one of its defi ning features.

41 Interview in Béjaïa (April 2006). 178 judith scheele

Regions have centres, and centres exert a certain attraction on their margins. Regions are thus dynamic, and this dynamism might help us to delimit them. In the above examples, I have tried to show that this ‘pull-factor’ is not only economic, but might also be cultural and intellectual, while describing the implications this can have for life in the margins. Considering Kabylia from this aspect—the centres it might be attracted to and the margins it might attract from—shows it as an intermediate region that seems to derive much of its characteristics from such a position. Wallerstein’s and Braudel’s notions of world- systems might be useful here, mainly as ways to think through far- reaching connectedness and global inequality as a relational rather than an internal feature.42 Current ‘globalisation’ might displace these intermediate areas, and change their orientation and function, but cannot do without them. In the case of Kabylia, this seems to be even more striking: the centres of the world might have changed, and, as seen from Kabylia, have multiplied, but Kabylia remains in a similar position of dependent intermediary. Formerly acting as a link between West Africa and the centres of the Islamic word, it now acts as a buff er zone for the European Union, France, and all this represents on the other side of the Mediterranean. Mutatis mutandis, Kabylia remains unthinkable without the constant movement of people, goods and ideas, and the continuing pull towards one of the centres of the world, that have made it what it is.

42 Braudel, Méditerranée, p. 419 and Civilisation matérielle, pp. 11–55. TRANSLOCAL ‘KINSHIP’ RELATIONS IN CENTRAL AFRICAN POLITICS OF THE 19TH CENTURY*

Beatrix Heintze Frobenius Institute, Frankfurt

Introduction

Kin-based groups are amongst the oldest informal and formal mutual protection associations known to man. Ties based on kinship provide relative security in the face of external enemies and other dangers, as well as solidarity with the weaker members of the community in the event of illness, natural disaster and in other times of crisis. If one happened to meet relatives while travelling far from home, no matter how distantly related they might be, one could count on their support, at least for the time being. Groups that were bound to each other through kinship were able to secure political, economic and other opportunities which put them at an advantage vis-à-vis groups joined by association along other lines. However, kinship may be defi ned in various ways. Th e circle of those who may be included diff er from society to society, and range from narrow to very broad groups. Th e links between relatives, and indeed relationship systems as such are—contrary to what has been assumed for long—no perpetual law but, like all expressions of culture, subject to manifold processes of change. Relationships have not only regulated regional relations between people in a signifi cant manner, but also played an outstanding role in ordering relationships at supraregional and political levels, and they continue to be important in some areas

* I am grateful to Katja Rieck for rendering this text from the original German. All Portuguese citations were translated into English. Th is paper is the quintessence of a larger work, see Beatrix Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.: Politik und Verwandtschaft im vorkolonialen Zentralafrika,” (manuscript 2006). I have added in parentheses the Lunda rendering of the most important Lunda names and terms occurring in the Luso-African versions of the sources (according to James Jeff rey Hoover, Th e Seduction of Ruwej: Reconstructing Ruund History (the Nuclear Lunda; Zaire, Angola, Zambia) (PhD thesis Yale University, Ann Arbor, 1978). 180 beatrix heintze even today. Marriage politics were particularly signifi cant, especially in monarchies. But beyond such rather mundane strategies, the category ‘kinship’ could at the state level constitute a rather complex network of real and fi ctive kinship ties that could shape political life. Th is article focuses on the kinship networks operating at the state level in the great Lunda Commonwealth1 in Central Africa of the nineteenth century. I draw on an unusual source, namely the manuscripts and publications of Henrique Augusto Dias de Carvalho. Th ey cover several thousand pages2 and provide extensive and detailed reports covering a four-year Portuguese expedition into this region in the mid-1880s. Carvalho’s work not only gives insight into the principles of Central African politics at the time but also demonstrates their specifi c applications in day-to-day political aff airs. Moreover, the political climate at the time was crisis-ridden and the reports paint a gloomy picture of the Lunda Commonwealth just before the dawn of the colonial age as being eroded by Chokwe migrations and internal dynastic confl icts.

Th e Historical Context

Th e extensive and later famous Lunda Commonwealth had its origins in the small kingdom of the Rund, the heartland of Lunda, and its residence Musumba3 on the Kalanyi river. Th eir aggressive expansive policy was closely linked to the Atlantic slave trade and began around the middle of the seventeenth century. Th e warriors of the Rund kings,

1 A term introduced by Jan Vansina, “Government in Kasai before the Lunda,” International Journal of African Historical Studies 31, 1 (1998), 1, fn. 1. 2 See Henrique Augusto Dias de Carvalho, O Lubuco: Algumas oberservações sobre o livro do Sr. Latrobe Bateman intitulado Th e First Ascent of the Kasaï(Lisbon, 1889); Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda (Lisbon, 1890); A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, dominios da soberania de Portugal (Lisbon, 1890); Methodo pratico para fallar a lingua da Lunda contendo narrações historicas dos diversos povos (Lisbon, 1890); Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 4 vols. (Lisbon, 1890–1894); O Jagado de Cassange na Provincia de Angola. Memoria (Lisbon, 1898) and manuscripts in the Arquivo Histórico Ultramarino in Lisbon (hereaft er AHU). 3 Mussumba (luso-african) resp. musumb (Rund) connotes every fenced camp or settlement of a mwant yav (title of the Rund and Lunda kings) or an honorary mwant yav (Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, II, fn. 613). Mean- while, this term has become the proper name of a number of residential towns of the mwant yav on the river Kalanyi. When this meaning is intended, the term will be spelt with a capital M and without italics. ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 181 who carried the title of mwant yav in honour of their legendary fi rst king, gradually overran the entire eastern region up to the Kwango and established their own dominions in the conquered territories. Early references to these violent events in Central Africa can be found in the voluminous history written by António de Oliveira de Cadornega in 1680–16814 and later in numerous eighteenth-century Portuguese documents.5 Amongst the most famous emerging Lunda satellite dominions, which were sometimes more and sometimes less dependent on the Rund centre of power on the River Kalanyi, were Kumbana in the Pende area, the two Kaúngula (of the River Lóvua and of the state Mataba), Putu Kasongo of the Yaka on the middle Kwango, Kapenda ka Mulemba of the Shinje, Kimbundu in the territory belonging to the Minungu in the Southwest and many others.6 Signifi cantly the Portuguese received most of their early reports regarding the mwant yav and the Lunda Commonwealth from the Mbangala who had an important kingdom on the western side of the Kwango. Th ey traded with the Lunda and for a long time successfully defended their trading monopoly and their key position in these relations. Th ey therefore denied all other merchants/traders passage across the river—a very eff ective trade barrier, which they were able to maintain well into the nineteenth century. Th e Kwango thus proved to be fi rst and foremost a dividing line to be controlled which separated the Portuguese and the Luso-Africans in the West from the Lunda in the East. Aft er the slave trade had been offi cially abolished by the Portuguese government in 1836 the Angolan trade underwent a reorientation aff ecting the hinterlands, a trade which in the previous decades had become ever more dependent on supplies of slaves from the continent’s interior. Initially wax, ivory, but also palm fi bre textiles overshadowed

4 António de Oliveira de Cadornega, História Geral das Guerras Angolanas, 3 vols., (manuscript of 1680–1681), eds. José Matias Delgado and Manuel Alves da Cunha (Lisbon, 1940–1942), 3, p. 219. 5 See for example AHU, Angola, box 45, no. 42, Letter by Governor António de Vasconcellos (February 12, 1762). 6 On the early history of the Rund-Lunda-Expansion see Jan Vansina, “Du nouveau sur la conquête lunda au Kwango,” Congo Afrique 341 (2000), 45–58 and idem, How Societies are Born: Governance in West Central Africa before 1600 (Charlottesville, 2004), pp. 209–210, 244–259, 266–267. On the interaction with the Atlantic slave trade see Joseph C. Miller, Way of Death: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade 1730–1830 (London, 1988), especially the chapter “Th e Slaving Frontier,” pp. 140–153 which provides a useful map 5.1, p. 148. 182 beatrix heintze 24° Mussumba Luluaburg KETE Kambunje Capuco Sanburu 22° ai Capungo

Mukenge Kas Lulua MATABA

KUBA LUBUKU

Chicapa Luachimo

Lóvia Luangue 20° Quimbundo

Kasai Kaungula

Kwilo Kumbana

Munhango Kwengo 18°

Anzavo KASANJE Bié

Kwango Mputo Kasongo Mputo 16° Malanje Main: Lembeck, 2008, p. 146

Kwanza Madrid

Golungo Alto Golungo Zaire or Kongo or Zaire 14° Dondo Mbanza Kongo 300 km Luanda 12° N 0 Lisbon 4° 6° 8° 10° 12° Map 9. Principal Long-Distance Caravan Routes in West Central Africa (1850–c. 1890), Beatrix Heintze and Achim von Oppen, eds., Angola on the Move: Transport Routes, Communications and History , Frankfurt am ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 183 the trade in slaves in commercial signifi cance; copper continued to be important and later rubber joined salt and cattle as prominent goods. However, a revitalised inner African slave trade continued during this whole period. During the long reign of mwant yav Nawej a Ditend (ca. 1820/22– 1851/52) the fi rst Luso-Africans (the so-called Ambaquistas) followed in the footsteps of the Mbangala and settled in Musumba. At the time of Nawej a Ditend’s successor they established a trading and settler colony which existed there for about 30 years. It was the heyday of Lunda trade, which reached its peak in the 1860s and lasted until the closing of the southern trade route in the year 1881.7 Yet this was also the period during which the ivory trade grew in importance, and the Chokwe were searching for better hunting grounds and trading opportunities, following the northward migrations of the elephants from the upper Kwango, upper Kasai and Lungue-Bungu which had begun in the middle of the century.8 Th e markets of the Luluwa, Kete and Kuba, tapped by the Luso-Africans, Portuguese, Mbangala and later also the Germans, became more and more attractive to the west coast and increasingly marginalised the old Rund centre of power on the River Kalanyi. On top of all this, internal political intrigues and power struggles in the Lunda Commonwealth, aggravated by a series of unstable alliances with the advancing Chokwe, led to its erosion and ultimately its dissolution. At the same time the European colonial powers partitioned its territories amongst themselves, drawing new borders from their drawing tables.

Fictitious Translocal Kinship Ties: Positional Succession and Perpetual Kinship

In the nineteenth century the Rund, who had formed the core of the great Lunda Commonwealth, were characterised by their bilateral kinship system which caused much confusion amongst their

7 On this see Beatrix Heintze, Afrikanische Pioniere: Trägerkarawanen im westlichen Zentralafrika (ca. 1850–1890) (Frankfurt a.M., 2002) and idem, Pioneiros Africa- nos: Caravanas de carregadores na África Centro-Ocidental (entre 1850 e 1890), trans. Marina Santos (Lisbon/Luanda, 2004), chap. II.1 and III.1 and III.3. 8 Th e map in Joseph C. Miller, Cokwe Expansion 1850–1900, (Occasional Paper) 1 (Madison, 1969), p. 48 provides a clear depiction of the Chokwe’s rapid expansion in the second half of the 19th century. 184 beatrix heintze early European visitors. Paternal and maternal sides were principally equal, and collateral kin were assimilated into the nuclear family. As a result, all aunts and wives of uncles on both sides were called ‘mother’ (makw), and all paternal uncles and the husbands of all aunts on both sides were referred to as ‘father’ (tat’ukw). Cousins on both sides were considered ‘siblings’, which if they were of the same sex as ego were only distinguished by age. If, however, they were of the opposite sex there was no such distinction. Th e children of siblings and cousins were all classifi ed as ‘children’. Each father and each mother of any ‘father’ or ‘mother’ was consequently a ‘grandfather’ or ‘grandmother’. Th e only exception in this bilateral classifi catory system was the mother’s brother (mantw), which ego could not refer to as ‘father’.9 From this it is quite apparent that such a bilateral classifi catory system engendered innumerable close relations. In the political context, combined with the principle of ‘positional succession’ and ‘perpetual kinship’ (see below), this created a tightly meshed network of ‘relations’ in time and space, which the Rund applied in particular to their reigning royal family and its legendary origins. It was this network which long served to eff ectively stabilise the expansion of their rule. Th e concept of ‘positional succession’ implied that a successor to a particular (political) title literally became his (deceased) predecessor. He thus took on his predecessor’s name, his wife (or wives) and children, his social roles and part of his property.10 Th is also meant that all the children of any mwant yav (king) were considered to be the children of the reigning one. However, the ‘immortality’ of the fi rst title bearer only pertained to his political functions, not to his private endeavours, such as those he undertook as a businessman.11 To clarify this, Carvalho quotes the mwant yav Nawej a Ditend uttering the following words: “Th e Muatiânvua [mwant yav] never dies; he is always the same. What Chibinda, Noéji, Muteba did, I did; and that is what all those to come must do too.”12 Yet the full power of the ties that this concept could engender was only achieved if it was used together with its twin concept, that of ‘perpetual kinship’, which established relations between titles and not

9 Hoover, Th e Seduction of Ruwej, p. 85. 10 Ibid., p. 113. On this see also Vansina, “Government in Kasai before the Lunda,” p. 19. 11 With regard to the Chokwe title kisenge, see Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, p. 416. 12 Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, p. 540. ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 185 persons. Th is second concept established that the successor to a political title inherited not only the personal and social identity of his predecessor (with whom he oft en had no genealogical ties at all), but also all the social relations of the very fi rst title bearer. Th ese two concepts, which are quite common throughout Central Africa, were artfully used by the Rund/Lunda in securing and consoli- dating their position as the pre-eminent political power in the region. Hoover therefore also characterised it as the “constitutional idiom of Lunda political thought”.13 Th ey secured for themselves considerable room to manoeuvre in order to place in offi ces the most capable candidates or those which fulfi lled particular requirements, while all at once reinforcing and keeping alive close ties with the central ruling dynasty. At the same time, they also promoted the Lundaisation of peripheral areas, at least as long as the centre continued to exude allure and prestige. Th is centre focussed on the legendary mother of the rstfi mwant yav, Luéji (Ruwej) to whom everyone was related. Th us the fi rst Kaúngula, whose extensive dominions extended from the Luembe to the Kwilu, was, according to one oral tradition supposed to have been a descendant of Kandala, the brother of Luéji’s (Ruwej’s) father. According to another tradition he was the descendant of one of Luéji’s aunts. Whichever of these versions one lends credence to, from that point on this kinship made all Kaúngula ‘grandfathers’ to both the reigning mwant yav and all of his predecessors.14 Th is fi rst Kaúngula, ostensibly authorised by the mwant yav, is supposed to have shared his dominions with his brother and a son. Since then he was known as the Kaúngula of the River Lóvua, while his brother and all those successors (installed by the mwant yav), who were designated Kaúngula of the important state Mataba, always represented the younger brother of this fi rst Kaúngula of the Lóvua, regardless of whether he shared such or any other kinship ties with him. Consequently every reigning Bungulu represented the son of the Kaúngula of the Lóvua, since a Bungulu was regarded to be a son of the fi rst Kaúngula (or at least is supposed to have been).15

13 Hoover, Th e Seduction of Ruwej, p. 114. See also Vansina, “Government in Kasai before the Lunda,” pp. 19–21. 14 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, pp. 568, 621. 15 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, pp. 433, 568; 3, pp. 104, 919–923; Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, p. 235; A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, p. 231. 186 beatrix heintze

Th is political hierarchy, oft en derived from fi ctitious criteria, which was further gradated according to age (also oft en fi ctive) within the prevailing kinship system, found expression in all rankings visible in daily political life, such as seating arrangements, the ordering of speaking privileges, insignia, titles of address, interjections and other forms of etiquette. It did not matter how old a given title bearer was or what the relative ages of a number of congregating title bearers actually were. Th e place that a title bearer occupied in this hierarchy determined his political weight in the Lunda Commonwealth and at the court of the mwant yav. Since the formation of such kinship ties is a product of historical processes which were embedded in specifi c political contexts, it would be mistaken to assume that such ties are ‘artefacts’ of some by-gone age. Rather, in most cases they were political constructs which, like other constellations, were subject to change and could be adapted to meet the requirements of new political situations. Parallel to these oft en fi ctitious kinship ties in time and space there existed a further direct and controlled institutional link between the local Rund/Lunda potentates, who were installed or confi rmed by the mwant yav, and the political centre. All chiefs and other bearers of political titles kept personal representatives at court with full powers of authority and insignias to act as their ‘alter egos’. Th ese spoke not only in the name of the person they represented, but also in the ‘I’ form, since at that moment they in fact were considered to be this (political) persona.16 Because political and diplomatic demands were constantly reac- tivated in the present, this doubling of political titles, and with that all kinship links in time and space, kept alive a consciousness of the transmitted historical interrelationships and re-infused them with relevance. Th ese could even deliberately be made to serve a politics of remembering in the sense of a postulated collective identity (see below). Such asserted historical interrelationships further gained relevance whenever a diplomatic or other visitor arrived at any of the chieft aincies or at court as a representative of his master. Th ese fi ctitious links served as the basis upon which the tiny power centre of Rund-proper, was able to successfully extend its supremacy over a vast

16 Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, p. 231. ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 187 territory encompassing various languages and cultures. Th is supremacy was maintained for many decades practically unchallenged. To an outsider it might seem rather paradoxical that the lack of corporate lineages amongst the Rund/Lunda would be conducive to the emergence of such a formative kinship idiom. However, precisely because of this there were no rules that dictated appointments to political offi ces on the basis of strict, existing kinship criteria determined by lineage.17 Instead, the bilinear kinship system, in the guise of expansive (fi ctitious), ideological kinship ties expressed in the idiom of positional succession and perpetual kinship, made it possible for them to award political offi ces on the basis of qualifi cation and merit (abuse notwithstanding). Th is system also permitted the creation of new offi ces and titles as needed, and their attachment to the central authority. As long as the political and economic preconditions of this state remained favourable, this system provided a high degree of political fl exibility, which enabled it to expand, consolidate and maintain its predominance over an extended period of time. In the course of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries such kinship ties were able to aff ord the expanding Lunda dominions with a constitutional basis that supposedly extended back into the distant past which legitimised the balance of power and prestige of the mwant yav and his Musumba on the Kalanyi vis-à-vis their weaker neighbours and passing trading caravans.

Transethnic18 Kinship Ties

Th ese same principles could be employed to retrospectively link other ethnic groups with the Rund/Lunda centre of power. However, the initiative to do so oft en came from these groups themselves. Particu- larly during the nineteenth century it was economically advantageous to establish a historical tie that would serve as the basis for becoming privileged trading partners, opening up trade routes or minimising

17 Th is had already been pointed out by Hoover, Th e Seduction of Ruwej, pp. 362, 376. See also Vansina, “Government in Kasai before the Lunda,” p. 20. 18 Th is term is used here in analogy with ‘translocal’ or ‘transnational’ and denotes certain phenomena normally or allegedly associated to ethnicity, claiming that ethnic ties or barriers vis-à-vis other ethnic groups are, at least temporarily or partially, dissolved, transcended or minimalised. 188 beatrix heintze confl icts by settling in the Lunda Commonwealth. Since these other groups too were familiar with the twin concepts of positional succession and perpetual kinship, they used them as convenient idioms in which to cast such relationships. It seems that other ethnic groups did in fact take advantage of these two concepts quite frequently, at least much more frequently than modern historians have hitherto been aware of. Th us, a historical discourse emerged which put forward the notion of a common ancestral relationship of the Rund/Lunda and those groups. Th ey were only separated through the emigration of one or more ‘founding fathers’ of these other ethnic entities. Th is migration theme is a common topos in oral traditions, which is why it is no longer a surprise to historians that such asserted migrations are in Central Africa said to have taken place along what later became the great trade routes of the nineteenth century (see below).19 Such contrived interethnic kinship ties were not carved in stone. Whenever the political or economic winds shift ed, or when other shift s occurred that aff ected regional political constellations, such ties could be abandoned or replaced by new ones. For this reason the oral traditions upon which they are based are no longer regarded to be historical sources to be taken literally and are no longer used in reconstructing a corresponding history of the area. Today it is clear that the creation of such traditions is an ongoing process. In a few instances it is possible to uncover the steps involved in such a process. Th is includes the traditions of the Mbangala and Chokwe, who are both neighbours of the Lunda. Th ese nineteenth-century narratives relate the ancient genealogical links of fi rst the Mbangala rulers and second the various Chokwe chiefs with the Rund royal dynasty (see below). Today we know that this kinship was asserted for two reasons. For one, both the Mbangala and the Chokwe had close contacts with the Rund/Lunda in the nineteenth century: the former as savvy traders and the latter as immigrants who became increasingly more aggressive in staking their claims. Having said that, the reports from the interior all were transmitted by those Europeans who had close contacts both

19 Vansina, “Government in Kasai before the Lunda;” for the kingdom of Kongo see John K. Th ornton, “Th e Origins and Early History of the Kingdom of Kongo, c. 1350–1550,” International Journal of African Historical Studies 34, 1 (2001), 97; Wyatt MacGaff ey, “Changing Representations in Central African History,” Journal of African History 46, 2 (2005), 200. ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 189 with the Mbangala as well as with the Chokwe or who were more familiar with them than with any other groups. Th e story of the Mbangala is quite old and has left traces in countless sources of various forms and quality. Neither the early eyewit- ness accounts, which predate the settlement and the establishment of a Mbangala polity in the Baixa de Cassange nor the earliest records of oral traditions featured as yet any relationship of the Mbangala with Central Africa, much less with the Lunda. Th e fi rst Angolan ‘Jaga’, as the Portuguese referred to them, which, as we know today, have been the Mbangala, appeared in the documents of the 1580s and 1590s. It is fairly certain that the ethnogenesis of the fi rst Jaga/Mbangala took place in some pastoral area in the south not very far from the Atlantic coast, from where they migrated northwards. En route, they incorporated into their group inhabitants of the territories which they conquered, plundered and destroyed, particularly from the Sumbi region. Others were sold as slaves to the Portuguese.20 Later countless references in Portuguese documents, text fragments and compilations of Mbangala oral traditions provide glimpses into their eventful history, which became so signifi cant to Angola. But it was only in the middle of the nineteenth century that ties to the Rund were established via their leader and hero, Kinguri. At that point, both peoples were already very close trading partners. Lunda slaves lived in Mbangala villages, learned and worked in commercial settlements, occasionally freed themselves and then acted as intermediaries between the two peoples and cultures.21 According to a Mbangala tradition recorded around 1850/1851, one Kinguri kia Bangela in Central Africa lived in the vicinity of the mwant yav, where his father was chief. Although he should have been his father’s successor, his older sister Manyungo prevented this, supporting the mwant yav instead. Kinguri and a number of followers therefore emigrated to the west. Aft er a number of stopovers and the establishment of alliances with the Portuguese, his successor Kasanje fi nally established the Mbangala state of Kassanje in its current

20 Vansina, How Societies are Born, p. 197 and map 22; Beatrix Heintze, “Th e Extraordinary Journey of the Jaga through the Centuries: Critical Approaches to Pre- colonial Angolan Historical Sources,” History in Africa 34 (2007), 67–101. 21 On this see Heintze, “Th e Extraordinary Journey of the Jaga through the Centuries.” 190 beatrix heintze

location.22 By then, Kinguri had been elevated to the status of central character in the Mbangala state’s foundation myth and the Mbangala roots in Sumbi territory on the Atlantic Coast and the area further south had been eliminated from the tradition. Yet around the middle of the nineteenth century there emerged more than one version of this myth, depending on which ethnic-geographic context the story was used in.23 As the trade relations between the Mbangala and the Rund/Lunda intensifi ed, the myths of their Lunda origin became more and more linked to the Lunda dynastic tradition until Kinguri appeared in them as a brother of the dynastic founding mother of the Rund/Lunda, Luéji. In this particular version which is also told in several variants24 sibling rivalry over who would succeed to head of the Lunda state led to Kinguri’s emigration to the west and to the establishment of a state in the Baixa de Cassange in present-day Angola. When the German explorer Max Buchner travelled to the Lunda capital in 1879/80, he discovered that the story of a common Mba- ngala and Lunda past was widespread from both sides. Th is is confi rmed

22 Antonio Rodrigues Neves, Memoria da expedição a Cassange commandada pelo major graduado Francisco de Salles Ferreira em 1850 (Lisbon, 1854), pp. 96–108. For details and summaries see Jan Vansina, “La fondation du royaume de Kassanje,” Aequatoria 25, 2 (1962), 48–52 and for a new interpretation idem, “It Never Hap- pened: Kinguri’s Exodus and its Consequences,” History in Africa 25 (1998), 390–391, cf. also Heintze, “Th e Extraordinary Journey of the Jaga through the Centuries.” 23 See Joaquim Rodrigues Graça, “Descripção da viagem feita de Loanda com destino ás cabeceiras do rio Sena, ou aonde for mais conveniente pelo interior do continente, de que as tribus são senhores, principiada em 24 de Abril de 1843,” in Annaes do Conselho Ultramarino, Parte não offi cial, 1 (1855), p. 110. Another version which revolves around Kinguri and which dates from the mid-nineteenth century may be found in Ladislaus Magyar, Reisen in Süd-Afrika in den Jahren 1849 bis 1857 (Pest, 1859), pp. 266–269. On this see Vansina, “It Never Happened: Kinguri’s Exodus and its Consequences,” pp. 391–392; Heintze, “Th e Extraordinary Journey of the Jaga through the Centuries.” 24 See Buchner in Max Buchners Reise nach Zentralafrika 1878–1882: Briefe, Berichte, Studien, ed. Beatrix Heintze (Cologne, 1999), p. 445; Paul Pogge, Im Reiche des Muata Jamvo (Berlin, 1880), pp. 224–225; Otto H. Schütt, “Bericht über die Reise von Malange zum Luba-Häuptling Mai, und zurück, Juli 1878 bis Mai 1879,” Mitthei - lungen der Afrikanischen Gesellschaft 1 (1878–1879), 182; 175–176; idem, Reisen im südwestlichen Becken des Congo: Nach den Tagebüchern und Aufzeichnun gen des Reisenden, ed. Paul Linden berg (Berlin, 1881), pp. 60, 79, 82; idem, “Im Reich der Bangala,” Das Ausland 54 (1881), 381; Curt von François, “Geschichtliches über die Bangala, Lunda und Kioko,” Globus 53 (1888), 273–276; Hermann Wissmann et al., Im Innern Afrikas: Die Erforschung des Kassai während der Jahre 1883, 1884 und 1885 (1888, repr. 1891, Leipzig), p. 101; Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, pp. 60–85, 529. ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 191 explicitly and repeatedly by various reports received by Henrique Dias de Carvalho between 1885 and 1887 during his great expedition to Musumba through his Mbangala, Lunda, Chokwe and mostly from his Luso-African informants (most notably his interpreter). Already upon reaching the Kwilu in 1885, he noted that the Lunda, Chokwe, Shinje and Mbangala with whom he spoke were agreed on their common ancestry who had once lived together on the other side of the Kasai.25 Later in 1886, having reached the Chiumbue, Carvalho heard from the Lunda that they and the Mbangala were descended from the same mother,26 and even the mighty Chokwe chief Kisenge spoke (1886) of the kindred peoples of Lunda, Chokwe and Mabangala (see below).27 Th at the Rund/Lunda adopted this version, too, or at least used it in certain political contexts, is highly unusual since loyalists who remained behind rarely have reason to remember renegade dissi- dents. Th is points to feedback through the extended commercial contacts with the Mbangala, who were not only the authors but also the trans-ethnic disseminators (directly, and through the Luso-Africans indirectly) of this persuasion regarding the existence of such kinship ties.28 Unlike the Mbangala, the Chokwe refer to a founding mother as the origin of their rulers. Th e mythical ‘ancestral mother’ Tembo had apparently long fi gured prominently in the traditions from the area that corresponded to the former Chokwe homeland between the head- waters of the Kwanza, Kwango, Kasai, Lungue-Bungu and environs. Since the mid-nineteenth century, Tembo has been associated with the origins of the Chokwe group led by Andumba a Tembo, who was considered to be the oldest and most important of all Chokwe chiefs. At the same time, however, reference to two brothers born to this ‘ancestral mother’ explains the origins of other chiefl y families, such as that of the Lunda chief Kambunje.29 Th is incorporation of a minor Lunda chief into the Mbangalese story of origin is one of numerous

25 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, pp. 339–340. 26 Carvalho, A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, p. 191. 27 Ibid., p. 235. 28 Cf. Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” and idem, “Long-distance Car- avans and Communication beyond the Kwango (c. 1850–1890),” in Angola on the Move: Transport Routes, Communications and History / Angola em Movimento: Vias de Transporte, Comunicação e História, eds. Beatrix Heintze and Achim von Oppen (Frankfurt Main, 2008), pp. 144–162. 29 Neves, Memoria da expedição a Cassange, p. 98. 192 beatrix heintze indicators that sharp ethnic classifi cations and divisions were more a result of European classifi catory obsessions than of Central African realities. While ethnic diff erences were obviously noted and played a role particularly at times of confl ict, they could also be bridged where necessary. In July 1878, one of the ‘descendants’ of the emigrated Chokwe Chief Andumba a Tembo thus told the Portuguese explorers Capello and Ivens his version of this story: Luéji, from the Rund and Lunda traditions, appears as Tembo, whose sons, like her brother Kinguri in the Mbangala versions (with or without his siblings), emigrate and become the fi rst chiefs of the more important of the present-day ethnic groups residing in the area, namely the Chokwe, Songo and Mbangala.30 Another tradition is closely associated with Kisenge, the most powerful Chokwe chief between the Kwango and the Kasai at the time of Henrique Dias de Carvalho. His dominions stretched between the Chi- capa and Luembe Rivers.31 Th e fact that by this time the Chokwe had already been quite close to the Rund/Lunda elites for decades and the fact that they were dependent on each other in trade, most certainly explains the emergence of myths that link their ‘ancestral mother’ with the house of the mwant yav, which had so long been dominant and continued to be both acclaimed and feared. All Carvalho’s informants agreed that Kambamba, or Kambamba Mussopo uá Nama (which was her full name), was Kisenge’s mother. She herself was regarded a close older relative of the legendary Rund ‘ancestral mother’, Luéji luá Konti, most oft en as her ‘aunt’. According to tradition, she moved away aft er Kinguri’s falling out, accompanied by a group of Chokwe from Luéji’s court or from that of the fi rst mwant yav. However, the real founders of the various Chokwe states were actually her son Kisenge and his brothers, or other relatives who had accompanied her when she left .32

30 Hermenegildo Capello and Roberto Ivens, De Benguella ás terras de Iácca, 2 vols. (Lisbon, 1881), 1, pp. 173–174, cf. also pp. 143–144. 31 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, pp. 473, 517; A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, pp. 200, 370. Cf. Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” 32 See Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, pp. 441– 442, 469; 482, 778, 928; ibid., 2, pp. 502, 764; ibid., 4, p. 12; Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, pp. 87, 90–91; A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, p. 240; cf. Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 193

What is so unusual about Carvalho’s statements on these matters is that the underlying fragments of traditions were told to him by several Lunda as well as several Chokwe informants (in small variants) and that this tradition, as we shall see below, continued to play a signifi cant role in contemporary politics. Moreover during his day there continued to exist a Chokwe chieft aincy which was governed by a female chief, Kambamba. She resided between the Luembe and Kasai Rivers and by virtue of her being the fi rst Kisenge’s mother claimed for her son the Kisenge title, in opposition to the reigning Kingurika.33 Even into the second half of the twentieth century a female chief with this title who lived at the court of the mwant yav was responsible for the care of Chokwe guests.34

Transethnic Kinship Ties as Arguments in Central African Politics

Outside of special ceremonial occasions, such as the instalment of a new mwant yav,35 historical ‘memory’ was refreshed and oral traditions disseminated through the ubiquitous practice of public recitation. Visitors, such as caravan leaders, emissaries and messengers, were not permitted to simply storm in and get to the point regarding the reason for their visit. Instead, at their fi rst public audience they began their performance with a long, sweeping historical account. In this way information and various historical narratives were disseminated and discussed over a large area.36 A shared past, however distant, carried considerable political weight in the present. Firstly, it permitted one to share in the prestige of renowned states. Secondly such asserted kinship ties could be useful during periods of intensifi ed commercial contact (such as those between the Mbangala and the Lunda), as well as in times of violent confl ict (such as that between the Chokwe and the Lunda). While the assertion of such ties could not prevent clashes, it did serve to facilitate eff orts at rapprochement and provided a basis for re-establishing relations.

33 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 4, p. 12. 34 Hoover, Th e Seduction of Ruwej, p. 303. 35 Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, pp. 352– 354. 36 Ibid., p. 390. See also Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, pp. 580, 766–767; ibid., 4, pp. 55, 81, 564. 194 beatrix heintze

Th us it was particularly useful to the Lunda in the 1880s to emphasise the shared genealogical origins of their rulers with the Chokwe, who were at this time threatening or perceived as threatening Musumba and a number of Lunda chieft aincies.37 Th e appeal to an ancient genealogical connection with the guests thus became a strategy for confl ict resolution. As the caravan network became more developed frequent repetition of such traditions at public audiences in the centres of power disseminated certain versions of kinship links and history, which thus became known over vast areas, ultimately becoming common knowledge. Th e extent to which such ideas had already found their way into the general consciousness is apparent when one examines the countless stereotypical references which Carvalho noted in the course of exchanges with Mbangala, Lunda and Chokwe interlocutors, which he either led or participated in. Although Carvalho himself used such references quite emphatically in his responses, attempts at mediation and addresses, further boosting their popularity, it would be incorrect to see him as the originator and propagator of such notions of kinship, even though reports of their existence are to be traced back almost exclusively to him. Even a small selection38 from the corresponding traditions of more or less explicit references to the ancestral kinship linking the three ethnic groups upon which we have focussed here shows the extent to which these references were part of a collective identity and shared culture of remembering, as well as how these were brought into play on very mundane but also politically very critical occasions. As the Lunda would never cease to emphasise—whether in public audiences, or when receiving Chokwe emissaries, during emergency meetings to settle violent confl icts between Lunda and Chokwe, but also in conversations amongst themselves as well as with Carvalho— Chokwe and Lunda were kin and they should behave as such. Aft er all, their leaders all descended from the house of the mwant yav. More- over, the Lunda had not violently driven out the Chokwe but rather the latter had left Lunda of their own free will and had committed

37 For example see instances in Carvalho, A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, p. 123; Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, p. 723; cf. also Capello and Ivens, De Benguella ás terras de Iácca, 1, p. 173; Wissmann et al., Im Innern Afrikas, p. 101. 38 Details in Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 195 no crime in their homeland. Did they really want to attack their kin? Should they not instead live together in peace as all good kinsmen do? Th e Kaúngula of the Lóvua, for example, declined to go to war against the Chokwe Mushiku, because he regarded him to be kith and kin. Th e Mbangala under Kinguri too had left their Lunda kinsmen of their own accord and had subordinated themselves to the protection of Mwene Putu (King of Portugal/the Portuguese). But their founding father Kinguri was worth no more than his ‘sister’ Luéji, the mythical ancestral mother of the Lunda, and thus they would respectfully ask the Mwene Putu to please also send to the Lunda military and other assistance, just as he had done for the state Kasanje of the Mbangala. Th e designated mwant yav Ianvo also pointed to the existing ancestral kinship ties between Lunda and Mbangala to justify his having taken a Mbangala into his royal household. He referred to Kinguri as his “brother” and called the most powerful Chokwe ruler at the time, Kisenge, his “nephew and brother” and his “friend and family”.39 Th e Chokwe, for their part, at the time emphasised repeatedly that the violent confl icts between the kindred peoples of Lunda, Chokwe and Mbangala should fi nally stop, since the Lunda in particular were kith and kin. Since their forefathers were sons of Kabamba, a kinswoman of Luéji of Konti, they should not be treated badly, the way they had been treated by the ‘children’ (subjects) of the mwant yav. Aft er all they were all ‘children’ of the Lunda. In their dispatches and proceedings, the Chokwe rulers, Kisenge and Mukanjanga, referred to the designated mwant yav Ianvo as “kith and kin”. When a dispute arose between a Lunda and a Chokwe chief, which threatened to esca- late, one of the Chokwe elders asked the Lunda adversary whether he really intended to kill his “kith and kin”, our mwanangana (Chief), upon which tempers calmed.40

39 Ibid.; e.g. Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, pp. 502, 625, 664, 723, 764, 767; ibid., 3, p. 134; A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, pp. 123, 168, 234, 778, 921–922; AHU, room 12, batch 1092, Letter from Carvalho to Ministro e Secretario d’Estado dos Negocios de Marinha e Ultramar, no. 278 (Febu- rary 6, 1886), f. [4–5]; Carvalho to the same, ibid., no. 736 (June 19, 1886), f. [28]. 40 Details in Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.;” see Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, pp. 134, 159, 279–280, 523–524, 585, 778; A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, pp. 180, 235, 240; AHU, room 12, batch 1092, Letter from Carvalho to Ministro e Secretario d’Estado dos Negocios de Marinha e Ultramar, no. 736 (June 19, 1886, f. 11; Letter from Carvalho to Ministro e Secretario d’Estado dos Negocios de Marinha e Ultramar, no. 737 (June 27, 1886), f. 8; Letter from Carvalho to the same (January18, 1887), f. 6–7. 196 beatrix heintze

Th e elderly Chokwe chief Kiésse, who was highly regarded for his abilities as an adviser and for his war magic alike, was also particularly well-versed in the traditions of his people. According to his version of the tradition, the Mbangala Kinguri iá Konta left Lunda territory fi rst, because he did not want to subordinate himself to the reigning mwant yav Ilunga, who was his sister Luéji’s lover. Aft er that the Chokwe chiefs Ndumba, Kanyika, Mbumba, Kisenge, Kiniama and others followed. Kinguri placed himself under the protection of the Portuguese and it was under this benevolent protection that his descendants became the rulers of Kasanje. Later the Chokwe asked mwant yav Nawej a Ditend permission to settle once again in his dominions, pointing out that they were all his children.41 Th eir once having left his land to follow Kinguri was aft er all no crime, which would give him reason to deny them the right to return to the land of their forefathers. Th e tradition continued with Nawej a Ditend then having received them well and sending envoys to other Chokwe chiefs in order to settle the family feud which went back to the times of their forefathers and for which they themselves could not be blamed. Aft er all, Chokwe and Lunda were both the children of the mwant yav. For example, Kisenge—during Carvalho’s time the most powerful Chokwe chief between the Chicapa and Kasai Rivers—had been a relative by virtue of his descent from Kabamba (Kambamba Mussopo uá Nama), one of Luéji a Konta’s aunts, from which all mwant yav descended.42 Th is tradition led Chief Kiésse to conclude: Th e elders and I are like Mwene Putu convinced that we are all children of the mwant yav and that these lands belong to his dominions. We did not come here bearing arms; our fathers left their land to seek adventure; they were not driven out for any crime, and we are now returning, but do not deny that they [the areas in which we are now settling] belong to the mwant yav.43 Th e Mbangala in turn ostensibly remembered44 their founding father Kinguri who emigrated from Lunda and appealed to the resulting

41 Here and in what follows the term ‘fi lhos’ (children) encompasses both meanings: direct descendants and subjects. 42 AHU, room 12, batch 1092, Letter from Carvalho to Ministro e Secretario d’Estado dos Negocios de Marinha e Ultramar, no. 736 (June 19, 1886), f. 19–23. 43 AHU, room 12, batch 1092, Letter from Carvalho to Ministro e Secretario d’Estado dos Negocios de Marinha e Ultramar, no. 736 (June 19, 1886), f. 27. 44 On the fi ctitious nature of these traditions see Vansina, “It Never Happened”, How Societies are Born and Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 197 kinship ties with the Lunda in order to settle on-going disputes. Th e dominions of their ‘kinsman’, the designated mwant yav Ianvo, they dubbed the “State of Luéji”, “sister45 to our Kinguri”. Th ey complained that the Lunda, their kin, had treated them badly and that Ianvo, who even had sisters (married to Mbangala) on the Kwango, had permitted acts of robbery to be perpetrated against them. Th e assistance promised the Lunda by the Mwene Putu would most certainly benefi t the Mbangala too, since they needed commercial ties with their Lunda brothers.46 Th e degree to which the history shared by Lunda and Chokwe infl uenced every-day political aff airs at the time of Carvalho’s expedition is evident from the visit paid in April 1886 to the designated mwant yav on the Chiumbue by the representative of the female Chokwe chief Kambamba Mussopo á Nama. She “represented in the state the mother of the fi rst Kisenge”.47 Kambamba demanded that Ianvo, referred to as xa Madiamba, stop by her residence on his way to Musumba on the Kalanyi, where he was to be installed with full honours as the new mwant yav. She disapproved that “her kinsman xa Madiamba” would depart from tradition by travelling via Mataba before going to Musumba. “He should recall that she ranked as fi rst amongst his Chokwe kin, since she represented the mother of the fi rst Kisenge.”48 Fictitious kinship ties at the state level were reinforced in oral traditions, which were repeatedly instrumentalised in everyday political contexts for particular ends. Th is was achieved either through elaborate recitations or in stereotypical references or fi gures of speech. eyTh created an expansive, translocal and transethnic network of ‘kin’ who all were situated in a shared history through which a certain sense of togetherness, in some cases even a sense of collective identity, was created. Th is could defuse confl ict situations at least for a short while. Yet in addition to that, such symbolic politics were coupled with real politics that aimed to achieve the same objectives by creating real

45 Carvalho writes irmão, brother, but this was certainly a slip of the pen and should have been irmã, sister. 46 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 4, pp. 24, 593–594. Details in Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” 47 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, p. 469. 48 Ibid., p. 482. 198 beatrix heintze kinship ties at the level of government. It is this politics of marriage that we will now briefl y sketch in the fi nal section of this article.

Transethnic Marital Ties as Strategies in Central African Realpolitik

Marriage politics has always played an important role in Central Africa, particularly for elites. Th us the daughters of the mwant yav were supposed to marry high-ranking chiefs, who would thus be tied more closely to him and his policies.49 Because the number of foreign contacts increased dramatically in the course of the nineteenth century, there seems to have been an increase in the number of interethnic marriages as well. Th us two of the designated mwant yav Ianvo’s sisters were married to Mbangala on the west bank of the Kwango. On the basis of this kinship tie, Ianvo later asserted that the Mbangala were obligated to support him in his campaign against the Chokwe.50 In this manner an additional network of loyalties and dependencies was created. Th e institutionalised form of creating interethnic kinship ties, which is documented for the Rund, Lunda and Chokwe, was referred to as tombo (ntombw) and was characterised by Carvalho as a special form of paying tribute. It was deployed in the nineteenth century primarily to make peace or create alliances between the Chokwe and the Lunda. Lunda chiefs as a rule gave in marriage one or more close female kinswomen (such as a sister, daughter or niece) to Chokwe chiefs.51 In the course of their northward migrations, which began in the mid- nineteenth century, more and more Chokwe settled in the vicinity of Lunda villages, which led to numerous confl icts and oft en ended with the Lunda paying a fi ne to the aggressive Chokwe. And since the Chokwe were out to acquire women more than anything else,52 a tombo relationship was able to defuse the situation.

49 See for example Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, pp. 488, 492. 50 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, p. 511; ibid., 4, p. 571; O Jagado de Cassange na Provincia de Angola, p. 303. On this and for more details see Heintze, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.” 51 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, p. 327 fn. 2. 52 Carvalho fi rst heard of the squabbles between the neighbouring Lunda and Chokwe when he reached the Kwilu. When he asked the Lunda the reason for the strife, he was told, “they [the Chokwe] need women”. AHU, room 12, batch 1092, ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 199

To give close kin to a potentate makes him your brother. Th at means they may no longer declare war on each other and any demands made on members of the two peoples will be settled through arbitration.53 A number of cases of such tombo alliances during Carvalho’s Lunda expedition indicate how cohesive they were. On the one hand, they aff ected the relationship to the Chokwe, which began to shift against Lunda’s favour. On the other hand, the Lunda also found the Chokwe quite useful as allies in their own intra-Lunda intrigues and power struggles. Th e women who had been given by the Lunda as tombo were held by the Chokwe in high regard, and even in cases in which these women were not the principle wife they were treated as such. Th ey were never permitted to belong to another man regardless of the situation, even if they had been found guilty of a crime. In the latter case they were simply returned to the Lunda, but had to be replaced by another kinswoman.54 From the Lunda perspective the initiative to form and the advantages derived from such alliances rested entirely with them. Particu- larly detailed explanations regarding the motives, which underlay such gestures of subservience, were provided by Chibango, a Luba chief who was residing not far from the Chiumbue. Carvalho had expressed to him his astonishment that such a powerful ruler as Kaúngula of Mataba would deign to pay such a tribute to a Chokwe chief, in this case Muíokoto. But Chibango saw only advantages for Kaúngula, since this made Muíokoto an ally and the Chokwe who entered his dominions to do business did so as good friends, making no mischief amongst his people, nor pillaging their fi elds.55 Th e desire to avoid violent confl ict was the primary motive for the creation oftombo alliances, especially along the much travelled and important trade route from Kwango to Lubuku, where during Carvalho’s expedition more

Letter from Carvalho to Ministro e Secretario d’Estado dos Negocios de Marinha e Ultramar, no. 736 (June 19, 1886), f. 5. 53 Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, p. 566. 54 Carvalho, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, pp. 486–487; Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 2, p. 327 fn. 2; ibid., 3, pp. 266– 268; 378, 804; ibid., 4, p. 565; Henrique Augusto Dias de Carvalho (texts) and Manuel Sertorio de Almeida Aguiar (photographs), “Album de Fotografi as da Expedição Por- tuguesa ao Muatianvua 1884/88,” n.d. [1890], Arquivo do Ministério dos Negocios Estrangeiros, Lisbon, Secretaria de Estado, 3° P., A. 7, M. 108, text regarding image 20d (here the institution is referred to as sembo). 55 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, pp. 266–267. 200 beatrix heintze and more Chokwe settled.56 But such a strategy was used too in order to win dependable allies in intra-kin power struggles, such as those between Bungulu and his brother Mutashi.57 Lastly, I would like to mention one fi nal strategy for creating kinship ties which exerted great political infl uence, particularly in the nineteenth century. During this time innumerable Luso-Africans married close kinswomen of those Central African chiefs amongst whom they settled. Along with the Mbangala, these Luso-Africans, referred to as Ambaquistas, were the most highly regarded experts on Central African caravan trade between the Portuguese on the coast and in the Angolan hinterland and African chiefs in the interior.58 Th ey oriented themselves ‘upwards’ towards the Portuguese and regarded themselves to be both Portuguese and white, whereby whiteness referred not so much to a particular appearance but rather to specifi c cultural characteristics. Light skin colour was to be found amongst them only rarely. “I am black, but my heart is that of a white man”59 is how one individual characterised himself. Th eir mother tongue was most oft en Kimbundu, a Bantu language of present-day north western Angola, but they were proud to also speak Portuguese and many of them could both read and write. Th ey were baptised and held themselves to be staunch Christians. As outward signs of their high status these Luso- Africans wore shoes (which was a particular privilege) and European clothing. Amongst them were to be found countless specialised craft s- men, such as tailors, cobblers and carpenters. Th ey, however, gained quite a reputation for being savvy merchants, who pushed ever further into the African interior.60 Th eir routes took them via the Kwango to

56 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 4, p. 565. 57 Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 3, pp. 378–379. 58 For an extended discussion see Heintze, Afrikanische Pioniere and Pioneiros Africanos . 59 Th e porter Xavier Domingos Paschoal 1887 in a letter to Henrique Dias de Car- valho. Carvalho, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 4, p. 723. 60 On the Ambaquistas see Miller, Way of Death, chap. 8; Dias, “Angola,” pp. 363– 364; idem, “Changing Patterns of Power in the Luanda Hinterland: Th e Impact of Trade and Colonisation on the Mbundu ca. 1845–1920,” Paideuma 32 (1986), 291– 295, 298, 303; but especially Jill Dias, “Estereótipos e realidades sociais: Quem eram os ‘Ambaquistas’?” in Constru indo o Passado Angolano: As Fontes e a sua Interpre- tação, Actas do II Seminário Internacional sobre a História de Angola (Lisboa, 2000), pp. 597–623, Heintze, Afrikanische Pioniere and Pioneiros Africanos, chap. I.3 and III.1; Buchner in Max Buchners Reise nach Zentralafrika 1878–1882, ed. Heintze, pp. 177–178. ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 201 the East into Lunda territory and to the Luba, also to the Southeast along the Zambezi to the Lui and the Kololo, and to the northeast to the Luluwa and all the way to the Kuba. Th e Ambaquistas were quite oft en also the fi rst to test a new route, even before their Portuguese employers or the European explorers who followed them opened them ‘offi cially’. And many of these Ambaquistas settled for years or decades in African chieft aincies.61 Th eir hosts, whom they served as secretaries, held them in high regard for their ‘Portuguese’ culture. Th ey married their daughters, granddaughters or nieces and henceforward partook in their power as kinsmen and important advisers and acted as modernisers in manifold ways. Th ey were active precursors to subsequent globalisation.62 Besides their many other talents, Ambaquistas became sought-aft er partners, particularly for their commercial know-how and their contacts with the Western commercial centres in Portuguese Angola.63 Th e desire of many chiefs in the interior to have Luso-Africans settle amongst them was mostly due to commercial interests and to the resulting boost to their own prestige. But the role played by these so-called Ambaquistas in the African chieft aincies of the continent’s interior was much more far-reaching. Th ey enjoyed a high position of trust, which they were able to use as teachers and cultural ‘interpreters’.64 Th ey helped clear up misunderstandings, and, because of their interethnic skills, were able to make themselves useful to both sides.

61 See Beatrix Heintze, “Between Two Worlds: Th e Bezerras, a Luso-African Family in Nineteenth-Century Western Central Africa,” in Creole Societies in the Portuguese Colonial Empire, eds. Philip J. Havik and Malyn Newitt (Bristol, 2007), pp. 127–153. 62 On this see Beatrix Heintze, “A lusofonia no interior da África Central na era pré- colonial: Um contributo para a sua história e compreensão na actualidade,” Cadernos de Estudos Africanos 6/7 (July 2004/June 2005), 179–207. 63 See for example Heintze, Afrikanische Pioniere and Pioneiros Africanos, chap. II.5; see also II.7, III.3; Capello and Ivens, De Benguella ás terras de Iácca, 2, p. 39; Carvalho, Methodo pratico para fallar a lingua da Lunda contendo narrações historicas dos diversos povos, pp. 19–20. 64 See Beatrix Heintze, “Luso-afrikanische Dolmetscher und kulturelle Vermitt- ler in Angola im 19. Jahrhundert,” in Sprachgrenzen, Sprachkontakte und kulturelle Vermittler in der Geschichte der europäisch überseeischen Beziehungen: Beiträge zur europäischen Überseegeschichte, eds. Mark Häberlein and Alexander Keese, Stuttgart (2010, in print). 202 beatrix heintze

Conclusion

Kinship ties are the oldest basis for group solidarity, being the antecedents to economic, reproductive and defensive associations. Particularly in the more distant past they provided members with opportunities and options which they would not have enjoyed as individuals, although for this they had to submit to the stringent rules of the community. Th ese rules, therefore, were emphatically exclusive, a phenomenon one can still observe today amongst the European nobility, even in those houses where they have been stripped of many of their privileges and all their political power. In nineteenth-century Central Africa, however, things were quite diff erent. Here, the integrating function of ‘kinship’, both vertical and horizontal (i.e. in both time and space), predominated thanks to fl exibly defi ned real kinship systems and the fi ctitious kinship ties that served to complement them. Th e intensifi cation of such linkages in the nineteenth century has much to do with the history of this region, which is very complex, unravelling as it did at the interstices of transatlantic global markets and ideologies on the one hand and ‘traditional’ societies with ‘patri- monial structures’ on the other. Th e so-called ‘traditional’ structures of the African interior, which have so oft en served as a counterpoint to ‘modernity’ were certainly not static, but rather had been in constant fl ux since time immemorial. Th ese structures were not simply superseded by ‘modernity’, but rather were transformed in subtle and manifold ways. Th e Africans involved were by no means victims of such processes but rather actively shaped them in innovative ways. Historians have with good reason focussed primarily on the importance of long-distance trade with its rapidly changing imports and exports. Th ey have highlighted this as the most important dynamic factor in nineteenth-century Central African history.65 Th e network

65 See for example the following works, the richness of which is not limited to just this one aspect: Ingeborg Schönberg-Lotholz, “Die Karawanenreisen der Tjiaka um 1900,” in Estudos Etnográfi cos 1 (Memórias e Trabalhos do Instituto de Investi- gação Cien tí fi ca de Angola 2) (1960), 109–128; Miller, Cokwe Expansion 1850–1900 and Way of Death; Jean-Luc Vellut, “Notes sur le Lunda et la frontière luso-africaine (1700–1900),” Etudes d’Histoire africaine 3 (1972), 61–166; Achim von Oppen, Terms of Trade and Terms of Trust: Th e History and Con texts of Pre-Colonial Market Produc- tion around the Upper Zambezi and Kasai (Münster, 1993); Isabel de Castro Henri- ques, Commerce et changements en Angola au XIXe siècle: Imbangala et Tshokwe face à la modernité, 2 vols. (Paris, 1995); Maria Emília Madeira Santos, Nos Caminhos ‘kinship’ relations in central african politics 203 of merchant caravans grew in density and were joined by European expeditions,66 the harbingers of colonialism. Th is also led to a greater concentration of news and intelligence and to the creation of new communicative spaces.67 It was in this context of historical change that the kinship concepts discussed here were developed and transformed. Th eir emancipation from existing local embedment and transformation into expansive, translocal and even transethnic ideas and institutions are the result of interactions dating back to at least the seventeenth century caused by territorial mobility provoked by trade, other types of exchange, conquest and migration. Th ese real and fictitious kinship ties could serve as potential counterweights especially at the translocal level. Th ey worked in response to powerful processes of economic and political dissociation and exclusion such as the assertion of commercial monopolies, demands for tribute and political supremacy in conquered areas. Th is constituted an integrating force but could also defuse critical situations. ‘Positional succession’ and ‘perpetual kinship’ opened up avenues for upward mobility which under normal circumstances would have been impossible. Th is also created opportunities to partake in the distant centre’s power, even in conquered areas inhabited by peoples of a diff erent cultural and linguistic imprint. Members of other ethnic groups could, by reformulating their myths of origin, be adopted as ancestral ‘kinsmen’. Such concepts did not remain abstract, but rather shaped the politics and rhetoric of nineteenth century everyday life. Real kinship ties under the infl uence of more frequent and more extensive external contacts fortifi ed translocal fi ctitious notions of kinship in time and space. Th ese interlocking

de África. Serventia e Posse. Angola Século XIX (Lisbon, 1998); Heintze, Afrikanische Pioniere and Pioneiros Africanos. 66 See for example, Ilídio do Amaral, “Progressos do conhecimento geográfi co da África em fi nais do século XIX,” in História e Desenvolvimento da Ciência em Portu- gal, 2 (Lisbon, 1986), pp. 1141–1171; Maria Emília Madeira Santos, “Capelo e Ivens, um fecho europeu para uma tradição nacional,” Série Separatas 184 (Lisbon, 1987); idem, Viagens de exploração terrestre dos portugueses em África (1978; repr. Lisbon, 1988); Beatrix Heintze, Ethnographische Aneignungen: Deutsche Forschungsreisende in Angola (Frankfurt a.M., 1999, 2nd rev. edition 2007), Max Buchners Reise nach Zentralafrika 1878–1882 and “Colonial Ambitions as Blind Passengers: Th e Case of German Explorers in West-Central Africa (1873–86),” in A África e a Instalação do Sistema Colonial (c. 1885–c. 1930), 3, Reunião Internacional de História de África— Actas, ed. Maria Emília Madeira Santos (Lisbon, 2000), pp. 19–30. 67 See Heintze, Afrikanische Pioniere, Pioneiros Africanos, chap. III.5 and “Long- distance Caravans and Communication beyond the Kwango (c. 1850–1890).” 204 beatrix heintze

Central African kinship links of varying reach were thus, like other translocal phenomena, subject to constant processes of change in the context of a “dialectic of fl ux and constitution, of transfer and exclusion”.68

68 Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen, “Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verfl echtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), p. (16) and pas- sim [http://hsozkult.geschichte.hu-berlin.de/forum/type=artikel&id=632 (accessed June 29, 2009)]. PART THREE

LOCALITY AND BEYOND

AUTOCHTHONY: LOCAL OR GLOBAL?1

Peter Geschiere University of Amsterdam

Th e aim of this chapter is to explore the recent upsurge of the notion of ‘autochthony’ as a virulent political slogan in diff erent parts of Africa. Its forms may diff er but it always calls for excluding strangers (‘allogènes’ or ‘allochthons’), whoever they may be. It is worthwhile to place these African examples in a wider, comparative perspective. Indeed they fi t in with a much broader (one could say a truly ‘global’) obsession with belonging that seems to be the fl ip-side of intensifi ed processes of globalisation also in the richer parts of the present-day world. Th e contrast with the parallel notion of ‘indigenous’—also undergoing a recent renaissance, but following a striking diff erent trajectory—can help to outline certain ambiguities in this volatile quest for belonging and for limiting the ranks of those who can claim to be ‘real’ citizens. Th e terms ‘autochthony’ and ‘indigenous’ go back to classical Greece and have similar implications. ‘Autochthony’ refers to ‘self ’ and ‘soil’. ‘Indigenous’ means literally ‘born inside’, with the connotation in classical Greek of being born ‘inside the house’. Th us, both notions inspire similar discourses on the need to safeguard the ‘ancestral lands’ against ‘strangers’ who ‘soil’ this patrimony; they uphold fi rst-com- ers’ rights to special protection against later immigrants. Nonetheless these two terms followed quite diff erent trajectories and they impact diff erently on present-day issues of belonging. Over the last decades, the notion of ‘indigenous peoples’ acquired a new lease of life with truly global dimensions. Th is is especially so since the founding of the United Nations Working Group on Indigenous Populations (1982) representing groups from all six continents. Th e spread of the notion

1 Th is text contains a few sections—partly re-written—of a text I published with Bambi Ceuppens in Annual Review of Anthropology 34 (2005), 385–409, under the title “Autochthony: Local or Global? Struggle over Citizenship and Belonging in Africa and Europe.” Th e earlier version also contains a section written by Bambi Ceuppens on “Allochthons between Ethnic and Civic Citizenship in Flanders.” See also Peter Geschiere, Perils of Belonging: Autochtony, Citizenship and Exclusion in Africa and Europe (Chicago, 2009). 208 peter geschiere of ‘autochthony’ remained more limited. During the 1990s it became a burning issue in many parts of Africa, inspiring violent eff orts to exclude ‘strangers’, especially in Francophone areas, but with a spill- over into Anglophone countries. Roughly during the same years it became a key notion in debates on multiculturalism and immigration problems in several parts of Europe, notably Flemish Belgium and the Netherlands. Th e spread of the notion in Western contexts is of particular interest. While most Westerners think of ‘indigenous peoples’ as ‘others’ who live in far-out regions and whose cultures can only ‘survive’ if they receive special protection, the epithet of ‘autochthon’ is claimed by important groups in the West itself. Th is term thus highlights that the obsession with belonging and the exclusion of strangers have become major issues in everyday politics throughout the world, in the North as much as in the South. Th e new dynamics of autochthony discourse on a global scale can therefore serve as a strategic entry point for understanding the enigmatic intertwinement of globalisation with intensifi ed struggles over belonging and exclusion. Th e New World Order, announced by Presi- dent Bush, Sr. and others at the end of the Cold War, seems to be less marked by freely circulating cosmopolitans than by explosions of communal violence and fi erce attempts towards exclusion. Appadurai already signalled some years ago that globalisation and the undermin- ing of the nation-state inspire a vigorous “production of locality.”2 Meyer and Geschiere characterized globalisation as “a dialectic of fl ow and closure.”3 In a seminal contribution based on research in Indonesia on the politics of “indigenous peoples,” Tanja Murray Li evokes a “global conjuncture” of widely diff erent trends that all converge towards a growing concern with belonging.4 Neo-liberal economics inspiring new development policies of ‘by-passing the state’ and ‘decentralization’; political liberalization turning questions like ‘who can vote where?’ into burning issues; the global concern with ecological degradation; the strong interest in the West in ‘disappearing

2 Arjun Appadurai, Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimension of Globalization (Min- neapolis, 1996). 3 See the title and the introduction of Birgit Meyer and Peter Geschiere, eds., Glo- balization and Identity: Dialectics of Flow and Closure (Oxford, 1999). 4 Tania Murray Li, “Articulating Indigenous Identity in Indonesia: Resource Poli- tics and the Tribal Slot,” Comp. Stud. Soc. Hist. 42 (2000), 149–79. autochthony: local or global? 209 cultures’; all these trends seem to work towards a defence of local roots. It is also clear that this conjuncture creates great uncertainty and violent doubts. Belonging promises safety, but in practice it raises fi erce disagreements over who ‘really’ belongs—over authenticity and falsehood. Two points stand out with some urgency from the literature discussed below. First of all, notions like ‘autochthony’, or ‘indigenous’ appear to defend a return to the local, but in practice are more about access to the global. Th is point is made most explicitly for Africa by Achille Mbembe and Abdoumaliq Simone.5 It may seem logical to equate ‘autochthony’ with a celebration of the local and of ‘closure’ against global ‘fl ows’. Yet, in practice it is oft en directly linked to processes of globalisation. Simone is right to insist that “ . . . the fi ght is not so much over the terms of territorial encompassment or closure, but rather over maintaining a sense of ‘open-endedness’.”6 What is at stake is oft en less a closer defi nition of the local than a struggle over excluding others from access to the new circuits of riches and power. A second point is the surprising elasticity of autochthony discourses, allowing for constant shift s and re-defi nitions, but also making this discourse a somewhat empty one. It is striking that similar discourses, inspiring almost identical slogans, can have great mobilizing power in highly diff erent contexts, from present-day Africa to Europe. Stud- ies that place the notion in a longer historical perspective7 show how easily autochthony discourses can switch from one ‘Other’ to the next one, without losing their credibility. Th is may explain their great resilience in the face of modern changes, easily adapting to the constant re-drawing of borders that seem to be inherent to processes of globalisation. Th e fl ip-side is a certain fuzziness. In a given situation it may

5 Achille Mbembe, “Ways of Seeing: Beyond the New Nativism—Introduction,” African Studies Review 44, 2 (2001), 7; Simone AbdouMaliq, “On the Worlding of African Cities,” African Studies Review 44, 2 (2001), 25. 6 Ibid. 7 Karel Arnaut, Performing Displacements and Rephrasing Attachments: Ethno- graphic Explorations of Space, Mobility in Art, Ritual, Media and Politics (Ph.D. thesis, Ghent Univ., 2004); Peter Geschiere, Francis Nyamnjoh, “Capitalism and Autoch- thony: Th e Seesaw of Mobility and Belonging,” Public Culture 12, 2 (2000), 423–425; Jean-François Bayart and Peter Geschiere, eds., ‘J’étais là avant: Problématiques de l’autochtonie,” Critique internationale 10 (2001), 126–195; Antoine Socpa, Démocrati- sation et autochtonie au Cameroun: Variations régionales divergentes (Münster, 2003). Peter Geschiere, Th e Perils of Belonging: Autochthony, Citizenship and Exclusion in Africa and Europe (2009, Chicago). 210 peter geschiere appear to be self-evident who can claim autochthony. Yet, any attempt to defi ne the autochthonous community in more concrete terms gives rise to fi erce disagreements and nagging suspicions of ‘faking’. Indeed, autochthony discourse is of a segmentary nature: belonging tends to be constantly re-defi ned at ever closer range. It is an identity with no particular name and no specifi ed history, only expressing the claim to have come fi rst, which can constantly be contested. Precisely this emptiness can give it highly violent implications. Below, I will briefl y discuss the genealogy of ‘autochthony’ in Africa, notably its role in the imposition of French colonial rule, a crucial link to its present-day upsurge on the continent. Next I discuss its new dynamics in post-colonial Africa in the 1990s, in the context of what can be termed the new politics of belonging, using Cameroon, Ivory Coast and the ‘Great Lakes Region’ in Central Africa as specifi c examples.

Colonial Roots: Autochthony and French Rule in the Sudan

Like endogenès, the term autochtonos had quite positive implications in classical Greek. Th e Athenians justifi ed their claim to superiority over all other Greeks by emphasizing that only they were truly ‘autochthons’ of their area. To them, moreover, their autochthony explained their natural propensity for democracy.8 Yet Nicole Loraux also shows that this defence of rootedness was paradoxically balanced by a celebration of a “fundamental alterity” in the myths, highlighting the role of strangers as founders of the society. We will come back to both aspects. Th e term did not become current in English. Th e Oxford Dictionary does mention it, as “son of the soil” but gives only historical quotes on this meaning; interestingly, more recent quotes refer to its use in geology and botany (as in ‘autochthonous’ rock formations or plants). Jean and John Comaroff pick up this implication in an article on a popular panic created by a huge fi re on the Cape Peninsula.9 Th e fi re destroyed South Africa’s cherished heritage of fynbos (indeed, unique

8 Nicole Loraux, Né de la terre: Mythe et politique à Athènes (Paris, 1996). 9 Jean Comaroff , John L. Comaroff , “Naturing the Nation: Aliens, Apocalypse and the Postcolonial State,” J. Southern African Stud. 27, 3 (2001), 627–651. autochthony: local or global? 211 in the world). In the panic that ensued people started to associate this loss of an ‘autochthonous’ heritage with growing concerns about the post-Apartheid invasion of ‘aliens’ from other parts of Africa, which equally seemed to threaten the autochthons. Th e Comaroff s see this surprising convergence as a possible explanation for the haunting power of the autochthony discourse in present-day contexts. Th ey emphasize its “naturalizing” capacity—as a “naturalizing allegory of collective being-in-the-world”—that makes it “. . . the most ‘authentic’, the most essential of all modes of connection”.10 In the French understanding of the term, however, which is now prevalent in Francophone Africa, autochtones are people, rather than plants or rocks. It was introduced in Africa in the French Sudan by French military, researchers and administrators. Th is was already in use at the time of the colonial conquest (end of the nineteenth century), since it was meant to play a vital role in categorizing the new subjects in order to make the administration of the vast, newly conquered areas possible. For instance, for Maurice Delafosse, administrator cum ethnographer, and a towering fi gure in the imposition of French rule in West Africa, autochthony was a fi rst criterion in his infl uential book Haut-Sénégal-Niger (1912). He used the notion as a basic categorization within the dazzling variety of indigènes: some indigènes were autochthons, whereas others were defi nitely not.11 Th e background to the emphasis on this distinction was the politique des races, a fi xed principle for setting up a colonial administration during the early decades of French rule.12 Whereas the British with their Indi- rect Rule were preoccupied with fi nding ‘real’ chiefs, French policy was (at least initially) to by-pass chiefs (who might be troublesome) and instead form homogeneous cantons, populated by the same race; hence the need to separate ruling immigrant groups from true autochtones. Practice was diff erent: the French also soon began to involve local chiefs in the administration of the vast territories they had conquered.13 It is characteristic, therefore, that Delafosse, despite his search for autochtones in line with the politique des races, was clearly

10 Ibid., pp. 648–649. 11 Maurice Delafosse, Haut-Sénégal-Niger (1912; repr., 1972); Arnaut, Performing Displacements, p. 207. 12 See Jean Suret-Canale, Afrique noire occidentale et centrale II: L’Ere coloniale 1900–1945 (Paris, 1964), p. 103. 13 See Michael Crowder, “Indirect Rule: French and British Style,” Africa 33, 4 (1964), 293–306; Suret-Canale, Afrique noire; Jaques Lombard, Autorités traditionnelles et 212 peter geschiere much more interested in mobile groups who had created larger political units. For instance, in his book on Haut-Sénégal-Niger the Peul get nearly 40 pages—clearly the author is deeply interested in their peregrinations throughout West Africa and their reputation as empire builders—while most ‘autochthonous’ groups only get a brief mention.14 Striking also is Delafosse’s somewhat condescending language for these autochthonous groups, whom he describes, for instance, as malheureux.15 Th is paradox of looking for autochthons as an anchor for the administration, but at the same time treating them as some sort of humble group became more pronounced as the autochthon/non-autochthon distinction became canonized under French rule. In many societies in the Senegal-Niger area described by Delafosse, local patterns of organization were indeed dominated by a complementary opposition between ‘people of the land’ and ‘ruling’ groups who claimed to have come in from elsewhere. Th us, ‘the chief of the land’ formed (and still forms) a kind of ritual counterpoint to the chief of the ruling dynasty. To the French the term ‘autochthony’ proved to be an obvious one to describe this opposition. A good example is the vast literature on the Mossi (the largest group in present-day Burkina Faso). For generations of ethnologists this opposition between what they termed autochtones and “rulers” became the central issue inspiring highly sophisticated, structuralist studies.16 In this context the notion of autochthony again acquired somewhat condescending overtones. Luning, for instance, indicates that in the prevailing discourse of the Mossi Maana, the tengabiise (now translated as autochthons) were characterized as some sort of “pre-social” terrestrial beings, who had only became classifi ed as a

pouvoirs européens en Afrique noire: Le déclin d’une aristocratie sous le régime colonial (Paris, 1967). 14 Cf. Jean-Louis Triaud, “‘Haut-Sénégal-Niger’, un modèle positiviste? De la coutume à l’histoire: Maurice Delafosse et l’invention de l’histoire africaine,” in Maurice Delafosse—Entre orientalisme et ethnographie: Itinéraire d’un africaniste (1870–1926), eds. Jean-Loup Amselle and Emmanuelle Sibeud (Paris, 1998), pp. 210–233. 15 Cf. Triaud, p. 230. 16 Michel Izard, Gens du pouvoir, gens de la terre: Les institutions politiques de l’ancien royaume du Yatenga (Bassin de la Volta blanche) (Cambridge, 1985); Sabine Luning, Het Binnenhalen van de Oogst: Ritueel en Samenleving in Maane, Burkina Faso (Ph.D thesis, University of Leiden, 1997); Dominique Zahan, “Pour une histoire des Mossi du Yatenga,” L’Homme 1, 2 (1961 ), 5–22; cf. also Marc-Eric Gruénais, “Du bon usage de l’autochtonie,” Cahiers ORSTOM—Série sciences humaines 21, 1 (1985), 19–24. autochthony: local or global? 213 human society since the coming of the naam, their foreign rulers.17 She also notes that in practice naam power was in all sorts of ways limited by the tengabiise. Still, the naam, as foreign rulers, were formally on top in the prestige scale, decidedly above the ‘autochthons’.18 Th is stands in striking contrast with how the opposition autochthon— stranger came to be seen in later phases of post-colonial rule.

Autochthony in the Post-colony

In many parts of francophone Africa the autochthony notion, introduced by the French, was appropriated by the local populations, becoming an important principle for categorizing people. Yet aft er independence (for most countries around 1960) its role seemed to decline, at least formally. During the fi rst decades aft er independence in Cameroon, for instance, it was not done to talk about autochthons or allogènes, at least not in the open. ‘We are all citizens of Cameroon’ would be the inevitable, and the politically correct answer. Yet, this changed dramatically in the 1990’s aft er the end of the Cold War and the demise (at least formally) of one-party authoritarianism on the African continent. Under political liberalization, the seemingly matter-of-fact categorizations of colonial administrators according to the autochthons/non-autochthons divide turned out to be highly explosive. Recently the Ivory Coast made headlines because of the fi erce hatred behind the violence with which self-styled autochtones tried to push out immigrants. But similar outbursts are reported from elsewhere. One factor behind this was clearly the practical eff ect of the wave of democratization that overran the continent. Democratiza- tion as such was certainly welcomed. But several authors19 highlight

17 Luning, Het Binnenhalen van de Oogst, p. 11. 18 Th ere is an intriguing similarity between forms of ‘diarchy’ between land-chief and ruler (usually coming from elsewhere) described by anthropologists for SE Asia; for an overview article see Reimar Schefold, “Vision of the Wilderness on Siberut in a Comparative Southeast Asian Perspective,” in Tribal Communities in the Malay World, eds. Geoff rey Benjamin and Cynthia Chou (Singapore, 2001), pp. 422–437; see also Patricia Spyer, Th e Memory of Trade: Circulation, Autochthony and the Past in the Aru Islands (Eastern Indonesia) (PhD thesis, University of Chicago, 1992) and idem, Th e Memory of Trade: Modernity’s Entanglements on an Eastern Indonesian Island (Durham, 2000). 19 Arnaut, Performing Displacements; Geschiere and Nyamnjoh, “Capitalism and Autochtony”; Socpa, Démocratisation et autochtonie. 214 peter geschiere that the re-introduction of multi-partyism inevitably turned questions like “who can vote where?” and, more importantly “who can stand as a candidate where?”—that is, questions of where one belongs— into red-hot issues.20 Especially in more densely settled areas and in bigger cities, the locals’ fear of being outvoted by more numerous ‘strangers’—oft en citizens of the same nation-state—ran so high that the defence of autochthony seemed to take prevalence over national citizenship. A striking complication was that in many countries regimes in power encourage such strife over belonging: the old slogans of nation-building and reinforcement of national citizenship give away rapidly to a support for localist movements with the clear aim of trying to divide the opposition. A more hidden factor was an equally dramatic switch in the policies of the development establishment during the 1980s: from a decidedly statist approach to development (emphasizing ‘nation-building’ as a prerequisite for realizing progress) to an emphasis on decentralization, by-passing the state and reaching out to ‘civil society’ and NGOs. Several authors emphasize that this, again, almost inevitably triggered fi erce debates about belonging, that is, over who could or could not participate in a ‘project-new-style’.21 Yet, most importantly, nearly all authors warn that upsurges of autochthony during the 1990s are not simply triggered by political manipulations from above, but equally carried by strong feelings from below. Some authors discuss the proliferation of funeral rituals, turning the burial ‘at home’ (that is, in the village of origin) into a key moment in the contest over belonging.22 Others point to land23 or

20 Th is was certainly not limited to Francophone Africa. A notorious case was the ousting in Zambia of former President Kenneth Kaunda from political competition by his successor Frederick Chiluba on the ground of Kaunda’s descent of foreigners. 21 Jean-Pierre Chauveau, “Question foncière et construction nationale en Côte d’Ivoire,” Politique africaine 78 (2000), 94–126; Peter Geschiere, “Ecology, Belonging and Xenophobia: Th e 1994 Forest Law in Cameroon and the Issue of ‘Community’,” in Rights and the Politics of Recognition in Africa, eds. Harri Englund and Francis Nyamnjoh (London, 2004), pp. 237–261; Stephen Jackson, War Making: Uncertainty, Improvisation and Involution in the Kivu Provinces, DR Congo, 1997–2002 (Ph.D thesis, Princeton University, 2003). 22 Peter Geschiere and Joseph Gugler, eds., “Th e Politics of Primary Patriotism,” Africa 68, 3 (1998), 309–319; Célestin Monga, “Cercueils, orgies et sublimation: Le coût d’une mauvaise gestion de la mort,” Afrique 2000 21 (1995), 63–72; Claudine Vidal, Sociologie des Passions: Rwanda, Côte d’Ivoire (Paris, 1991). 23 On Ghana/Burkina Faso see Carola Lentz, “‘Premiers arrivés’ et ‘nouveaux venus’: Discours sur l’autochtonie dans la savane ouest-africaine,” in Histoire du peu- autochthony: local or global? 215 ritual associations24 as crucial issues in popular movements to defend autochthony. General studies of the autochthony explosion in post-colonial Africa are still scarce. Th erefore we will elaborate the themes outlined above for three specifi c regional contexts: Southern Cameroon, Southern Ivory Coast and the ‘Great Lakes Region.’

Cameroon: Autochthony versus National Citizenship Th e upsurge of autochthony as a virulent issue in Cameroon during the 1990s must be understood in relation to the determined, sometimes even desperate, struggle of President Paul Biya, the leader of the former single political party, to remain in power. Probably under direct pressure of François Mitterrand, the then President of France, Biya permitted only towards the end of 1990 freedom of association. Th is immediately brought a proliferation of opposition parties. How- ever, the regime’s stubborn refusal to meet the popular demand for a National Conference inspired the opposition to launch the “Operation Ghost Town,” blocking public life in the major cities for more than a year. Biya refused to give in and aft er 1992 the operation petered out. Th e crucial presidential elections of 1992 became a scandal since it was quite clear that Biya obtained his narrow victory over his main rival, John Fru Ndi, (38% against 35%) due to massive rigging. However, in following years Biya held out against all pressure, his party won all subsequent elections and the recent presidential election (October 2004) brought a landslide victory (more than 70%) over his main rival (still Fru Ndi, who now obtained only 17%). Biya’s capacity for political survival is, indeed, impressive, all the more so since this took place in the midst of a deep economic crisis. Th e regime is generally counted among the most worrying examples of the “criminalization” of the State.25 Indeed, under Biya Cameroon rapidly rose to the fi rst position on the list of the world’s most corrupt countries. Biya’s personal charisma is almost nil and he has become increasingly invisible to the

plement et relations interethniques au Burkina Faso, eds. Richard Kuba, Carola Lentz and Claude Nurukyor Somda, (Paris, 2003), pp. 113–134. 24 On Duala see Ralph A. Austen, “Tradition, Invention and History: Th e Case of the Ngondo (Cameroon),” Cahiers d’etudes africaines 32, 126 (1992), 285–309. 25 Cf. Jean-François Bayart, Stephen Ellis and Béatrice Hibou, Th e Criminalization of the State in Africa (Oxford, 1999). 216 peter geschiere population, spending much of his time abroad and limiting his public appearances to a minimum. Th is begs the question of how he and his team succeeded nonetheless in completely outmanoeuvring the opposition, which seemed to be in such a promising position in the early 1990s. For the authors quoted below an obvious answer is the regime’s success in playing the autochthony card. Indeed, Cameroon off ers a prime example of the eff ectiveness autochthony slogans can acquire in national politics. Geschiere and Nyamnjoh show how the regime used the growing fear among ‘autochthons’ in the Southwest Province and Douala city, the country’s economic core areas, that they would be outvoted under the new, more democratic constellation by more numerous immigrants from the highlands of the Northwest and West Province.26 Aft er the 1996 municipal elections, the government actively supported large- scale and quite violent demonstrations by ‘autochthons’ in Douala to protest against the fact that in four of the six communes of the city Bamileke had been elected as Mayor on an opposition ticket. Th e demonstrators’ slogans were all too clear: the came-no-goes (the evocative Pidgin term for immigrants) should go home and vote where they really belonged. Th e government defended its support for this view- point with reference to the new Constitution (1996) which emphasized the need to protect the rights of “minorities” c.q. “indigènes.” Th ere is a telling contrast here with the earlier Constitution of 1972, at the high tide of nation-building, which emphasized the right of any Cameroonian to settle anywhere in the country. Nyamnjoh and Row- lands show that the regime’s support for new-fangled elite associations created another arena for struggles over belonging and autochthony.27 Again, there was a striking reversal of former policies here. Under one-party rule any form of association outside the party was severely discouraged. But aft er the onset of democratization, the regime even obliged regional elites (mostly civil servants and therefore in the pay of the government) to constitute their own associations. Th ese associations oft en had ostentatious cultural aims, but in practice there was an underlying obligation to go home and campaign for the President’s party. Such regional associations off ered, therefore, a welcome channel

26 Geschiere and Nyamnjoh, “Capitalism and Autochtony”; Jean-François Bayart, Peter Geschiere, and Francis Nymanjoh, “Autochtonie, démocratie et citoyenneté en Afrique,”Critique Internationale 10 (2001), 177–195. 27 Francis Nyamnjoh and Michael Rowlands, “Elite Associations and the Politics of Belonging in Cameroon,” Africa 68, 3 (1998), 320–337. autochthony: local or global? 217 to mobilize votes and to neutralize the eff ects of multi-partyism. This was all the more so since they also served to exclude elites who were not ‘really’ autochthonous to the area and thus blocked the political participation of allogènes who mostly supported the opposition parties.28 Konings discusses how eff ective the regime has been in dividing the Anglophone opposition which in the early 1990s still seemed to form a solid front.29 Th ey achieved this through a tactical mix of support to elite associations and minority groups, coupled with a general emphasis on belonging. In subsequent years the Southwest’s autochthons (Anglophones)—fearing, like the (Francophone) Douala, to be overwhelmed by come-no-go immigrants—became the regime’s staunchest supporters.30 All this excitement triggered a fi erce debate among academics and other intellectuals over the rights of autochtones versus allogènes. Th e Cameroonian review La Nouvelle Expression off ered a seminal overview of various visions on this burning topic in its May 1996 issue. While several contributors (e.g. Ngijol Ngijol, Bertrand Toko and Philip Bissek) warned against the dangers of the political use of discourses on autochthony, the contribution by Roger Nlep was to attain a central position in the debates in Cameroon. With his ‘theory’ of le village electoral, Nlep takes a diff erent view, arguing that “integration” is the central issue in Cameroonian politics, and people can only be fully integrated in the place where they live if there is not un autre chez soi (another home). Th erefore, if a person runs for offi ce in Douala and still defends the interests of his village elsewhere, this must be considered as “political malversation.” Th e relation to the regime’s manipulation of voters’ lists, telling people to go ‘home’ and vote there is quite clear.31

28 See Geschiere and Nyamjoh, “Capitalism and Autochtony” and Piet Konings, “Mobility and Exclusion: Confl icts between Autochtons and Allochthons during Political Liberalization in Cameroon,” in Mobile Africa: Changing Patterns of Move- ment in Africa and Beyond, eds. Mirjam de Bruijn, Rijk van Dijk and Dick Foeken (Leiden, 2001), pp. 169–194 on the “Assocation of the Elites of the Tenth Province”, an imagined province (Cameroon has only nine provinces), proclaimed by elites who feel excluded from belonging anywhere else. 29 Konings, “Mobility and Exclusion.” 30 See also Piet Konings and Francis B. Nyamnjoh, Negotiating an Anglophone Iden- tity: A Study of the Politics of Recognition and Representation in Cameroon (Leiden, 2003). 31 For an overview of more extreme voices (for instance on the supposed ‘ethnofas- cism’ of Bamileke), see Geschiere and Nyamnjoh, “Capitalism and Autochtony.” 218 peter geschiere

However, other aspects of belonging, less directly linked to the vicissitudes of national politics, also emerged in these debates. A crucial statement, as seminal as it is succinct, came from Samuel Eboua, an éminence grise of Cameroonian politics, in an interview in the review Impact Tribu-Une: Every Cameroonian is an allogène anywhere else in the country . . . apart from where his ancestors lived and . . . where his mortal remains will be buried. Everybody knows that only under exceptional circumstances will a Cameroonian be buried . . . elsewhere.32 Such statements emphasize how strongly the Cameroonian version of autochthony opposes the very idea of a national citizenship and the principle that every Cameroonian “. . . has the right to settle in any place . . .,” celebrated by the earlier Constitution of the time of nation- building. Geschiere and Nyamnjoh highlight the growing emphasis, in the context of autochthony politics, on the place of funeral as the ultimate test of belonging.33 Protagonists of autochthony repeat time and again that as long as immigrants, even if they are Cameroonian citizens, still want to be buried back home in the village, it is clear that this is their home, where they should return to vote.34 Similar arguments play a central role in the confrontations between autochthons and allogènes studied by Antoine Socpa in two very different parts of the country: the capital Yaoundé and the Extrême Nord Province where the fi rst explosion of violence erupted aft er democratization.35 In both areas autochthony has a long history. In Yaoundé it were mainly the issue of land and the supposed tricks with which Bamileke immigrants succeeded in appropriating plots of land from the Beti autochthons. Th is created animosity between the groups ever since the French made the town the capital of the colony (1921). But it was the elections-new-style that made these tensions acute. Socpa shows that when Bamileke succeeded in buying a plot for building they continued to address the former owner as their ‘landlord’ (bailleur) while former owners talked about their ‘tenants’ (locataires) even though they had sold the land.36 Signifi cantly, this implies in the latter’s view

32 Interview with Samuel Eboua in Trbu-Une 5 (1995), 14. 33 Geschiere and Nyamnjoh, “Capitalism and Autochtony.” 34 See also Geschiere, “Funerals and Belonging” and Monga, “Cercueils, orgies et sublimation” on the proliferation of ‘neo-traditional’ funeral rituals in this context. 35 Socpa, Démocratisation et autochtonie. 36 Ibid., p. 117 ff . autochthony: local or global? 219 that these ‘tenants’ should behave as good ‘guests’ and not vote for the opposition—that is not try and rule in their ‘landlord’s house.’ Socpa also highlights the elusive nature of the notion despite all the emphasis it receives. In the competition for political posts, autochthons take it for granted that they should rule in their own area, but some are apparently more ‘autochthonous’ than others.37 Aft er Biya’s party and his Beti won the 1996 municipal elections in Yaoundé, furious fi ghts broke out between diff erent local clans who claimed the Mayor position on the grounds that they were the ‘real’ autochthons. Precisely in the bastion of autochthony that Yaoundé remains in the Cameroonian context, the discourse shows its ‘segmentary’ character, subject as it is to a constant tendency to redefi ne the ‘real’ autochthon at ever closer range. Socpa’s parallel study of the bloody collisions in the North between Kotoko and Arab Choa highlight another aspect of the malleability of the autochthony discourse.38 In sharp contrast to anywhere else in the country, the Biya regime is here clearly siding with the immigrants (the Arab Choa) against the Kotoko who claim autochthony. Th e background to this surprising volte-face is clearly the Biya regime’s determination to divide the northern bloc on which the power of Ahidjo, Biya’s predecessor, was built and in which the Kotoko sultans played a pivotal role. Th e consequence of Biya’s shift to the Arab Choa was an explosion of banditism. Th is is the area where les coupeurs des routes constantly threaten the highways.39 A series of bloody confrontations between Kotoko and their former subjects also resulted. Socpa shows in detail how easily the government’s arguments for determined support to autochthony movements in the South can be reversed in order to justify support for allogènes in the North. In a recent article I discussed the vicissitudes of autochthony in, again, a very diff erent part of the country: the sparsely populated forest area of the Southeast.40 Th is study highlights the impact of the new style of development politics emphasizing decentralization and “by-passing the state.” With the dramatic fall of world-market prices for Cameroon’s main cash-crops (cacao, coff ee and cotton), and the threatening depletion of its oil reserves, timber has become a crucial

37 Ibid., p. 208 ff . 38 Ibid., chapter 6, 7 and 8. 39 See Janet Roitman, Fiscal Disobedience: An Anthropology of Economic Regulation in Central Africa (Princeton, 2004). 40 Peter Geschiere, “Ecology, Belonging and Xenophobia.” 220 peter geschiere export product. Th us the Southeast, long seen as the most backward part of the country, became a region of central interest because of its rich forest resources. However, there was vehement opposition from global ecological movements, strongly supported by the World Bank in this area, against the further plundering of this ‘lung of the world.’ Th e result was the new forest law of 1994, which the Cameroonian government only accepted under heavy pressure from the Bank and the IMF. Typically for the new approach to development, the law emphasizes the role of local ‘communities’—unfortunately not further defi ned—as central stakeholders in the exploitation of the forest, advo- cating moreover far-reaching fi nancial decentralization. Thus, munici- palities of a few thousand inhabitants were to receive almost half of the taxes on logging in their areas. Th is no doubt well-meant insistence on redistribution and protecting the ‘community’ immediately triggered fi erce fi ghts over belonging in this sparsely populated area. Local communities here are notoriously diff use, constantly splitting up according to malleable oppositions between lineage branches. In practice, the village committees that are supposed to manage the new ‘community forests’ are constantly divided over accusations that some people do not ‘really’ belong. Even kin can be unmasked as allogènes who rather belong in another village and therefore should join the new development project there. Clearly the segmentary tenor of the autochthony discourse is never-ending, hence its violent implications. Even within the intimacy of these close-knit villages that seem lost in vast tracts of forest it has become possible to unmask one’s neighbor or relative as ‘really’ a stranger.

Ivory Coast: Autochthony and the Diffi cult Birth of a ‘New’ Nation Th e trajectory of the autochthony notion in the Ivory Coast, during the same troubled period of democratization is markedly diff erent, notably in its relation to the nation. In Cameroon, autochthony seems to be some sort of rival for citizenship, denying the formal equality of all citizens and defending special forms of access to the state. In the Ivory Coast, in contrast, it refers to eff orts to redefi ne or even ‘save’ the nation. In this country, the concept of autochthony, again introduced by French colonials, was quickly appropriated by local spokesmen. One of the fi rst signs of a new local élan was the foundation, already in 1934, of an association that baptized itself Association de défense des autochthony: local or global? 221 intérêts des autochtones de Côte d’Ivoire.41 In those days, Senegalese and Dahomean clerks occupying the lower ranks in the colonial administration were the main target for Ivorian autochthony. However, soon other ‘strangers’ were to replace them in the self-defi nition of autochthons. Since the 1920s, cocoa production in the southern part of the colony attracted ever greater numbers of immigrants from the North who fi rst came as labourers, but soon managed to create their own farms. Especially aft er Independence (1960) this immigration became one of the mainstays in the miracle ivoirien, the spectacular fl owering of the country’s economy. Both Dozon and Arnaut mention the role of President Houphouët-Boigny’s pan-African ideas in his conscious encouragement of immigrants to push the “frontier” of cocoa production ever further in the country’s southern parts.42 Local communities were encouraged to grant land to enterprising immigrants. Chauveau shows that the autochthons’ main chance to continue to profi t from their original rights was to hang on to their role as tuteurs, which allowed them to ask for regular ‘gift s.’43 Over time, with the value of land rising, this ‘tutorship’ became a “permanent and confl ict-ridden negotiation.”Immigrants came mainly from both the northern parts of the country and neighbouring countries (Mali and especially Burkina Faso). But Dozon emphasizes that southerners hardly distinguish between Ivorian citizens and others among these northerners.44 Com- monly called ‘Dyula,’ whether Ivorians or non-Ivorians, they all shared similar characteristics—many are Muslims—and this created an idea of le grand Nord from which all these people came down. However, towards the end of the 1980s Houpouët-Boigny’s miracle seemed to stagnate: the scarcity of land led to increasing tensions; world- market prices for cocoa collapsed; and because of the crisis, the return of young urbanites to the village increased rural tensions. Th is gave rise to a réactivation de l’idéologie de l’autochtonie.45 Aft er the 1990 elections, the southern opposition parties openly accused Houphouët-Boigny

41 See Karel, Performing Displacements, p. 208; Jean-Pierre Dozon, “La Côte d’Ivoire au péril de l’ivoirité: Génèse d’un coup d’Etat,” Afrique contemporaine 193 (2000), 16. 42 Dozon, “La Côte d’Ivoire au péril de l’ivoirité” and idem, “La Côte d’Ivoire entre démocratie, nationalisme et ethnonationalisme,” Politique africaine 78 (2000), 45–63; Arnaut, Performing Displacements. 43 Chauveau, “Question foncière,” p. 107. 44 Dozon, “La Côte d’Ivoire entre démocratie, nationalisme et ethnonationalisme.” 45 Chauveau, “Question foncière,” p. 114. 222 peter geschiere that he owed his re-election to the votes of ‘strangers’ and even that he himself was some sort of ‘allochthon’.46 Th e developments aft er his death in 1993 and especially since 2000 seem to reinforce the fears of several authors of a consolidation of a southern bloc of autochthons versus the North.47 It is important to signal that this broad trajectory, which in retro- spect appears almost inevitable, involved all sorts of curves and still contains other potentials. Chauveau highlights, for instance, that the defi nition of the autochtone keeps shift ing together with the moving frontier of the cocoa zone.48 Production began in the Southeast of the country and expanded from there gradually to the Southwest and the West. In earlier phases, Baule (in the center of the southern part of the country) were the main migrants. Th ey moved fi rst into the South- east when cocoa-production took off there. Later on, cacao entered their own region, but subsequently they expanded, following the cacao frontier, into the western and southwestern parts. Th us in the 1960s the claim to autochthony was mainly forwarded by groups in the southwest and west (Bete, Dida) against Baule ‘immigrants’. Now, terms like allogène or immigrant are nearly synonymous with Northerner. But Chauveau warns that Baule are very conscious of the fact that ‘real’ autochthons may at any time redirect their grievances against them.49 Since Houphouët-Boigny the Baule may have been highly represented in the national centres of power and they may have been in the forefront of defending the autochthony of the southerners against northern immigrants, yet they are increasingly reminded by the ‘true’ locals, especially in the Southeast, that they are also immigrants and could therefore be marked as ‘fake’ autochthons. Aft er 1993, the defence of autochthony was couched in more ideological terms when Houpouët-Boigny’s successor, Henry Konan Bedié launched the notion of ivoirité. He introduced this idea to oust one of his main rivals for the Presidency, Alassane Ouattara, from the electoral competition, on the grounds that both the latter’s parents came from Burkina Faso. Dozon and Arnaut show in rich detail that this

46 Arnaut, Performing Displacements, p. 216; Dozon, “La Côte d’Ivoire au péril de l’ivoirité,” p. 16. 47 Chauveau, “Question foncière”; Dozon, “La Côte d’Ivoire entre démocratie, nationalisme et ethnonationalisme”; Bruno Losch, “La Côte d’Ivoire en quête d’un nouveau projet national,” Politique africaine 78 (2000), 5–26. 48 Chauveau, “Question foncière.” 49 Ibid., p. 121. autochthony: local or global? 223 was part of a broader ideological off ensive, aiming to justify the need to distinguish Ivoiriens de souche (trunk) from others.50 Dozon speaks of an aéropage of intellectuals and writers around Bedié, brought together in Curdiphe.51 Politique Africaine published part of the Acts of a colloquium of this institute in which, for instance, professor Nian- goran-Bouah (the country’s fi rst anthropologist, as director of the pat- rimoine culturel of the Ministry of Culture) proposes a “regrouping” of “the ancestors of Ivorians, or Ivorians de souche.”52 Th us, he fi rst sums up “the autochthons with a mythical origin” and then les autochtones sans origine mythique. He insists—and this is clearly very important to him—that all these groups were already settled in the country on March 10, 1893 when “. . . Ivory Coast was born.”53 In such enumerations ivoirité seems to coincide with the notion of a Southern autochthony. But Dozon warns that, again, there are sub-texts hidden in Bédié’s celebration of ivoiriens de souche.54 At a deeper level it highlights the special vocation of the Baule (the group to which both Bédié and Houphouët-Boigny belonged) as some sort of super-autochthons. As part of the broader Akan group (which also includes, for instance, the neighbouring Ashanti in Ghana), Baule see themselves as blessed with state-forming talents which distinguish them from other Southern groups (like the ‘more segmentary’ Bete). Th us, the idea of Ivoiriens de souche implies a double exclusion: on the one hand of northern immigrants; on the other hand, also of other southerners, supposedly less capable because of their cultural heritage to lead the nation. Arnaut highlights that the discourse shift s not only per region but also over time. In 1999 Bédié was pushed aside by a military coup under general Guéï. In 2000, Laurent Gbagbo, another Southern politician (but a Bete from the Southwest) won the elections, from which Ouattara, the candidate of the North, was excluded. But in September

50 Dozen, “La Côte d’Ivoire au péril de l’ivoirité” and idem, “La Côte d’Ivoire entre démocratie, nationalisme et ethnonationalisme”; Arnaut, Performing Displacements, ch. 3. 51 Cellule universitaire de recherche et de diff usion des idées et actions du président Konan Bédié. 52 Curdiphe, “L’Ivoirité, ou l’esprit du nouveau contract social du Président H.K. Bédié,” Politique Africaine 78 (2000), 65–69. 53 Ibid., p. 66. See Arnaut, Performing Displacements, ch. 3 and 4, for a discussion of similar texts. 54 Dozen, “La Côte d’Ivoire au péril de l’ivoirité” and idem “La Côte d’Ivoire entre démocratie, nationalisme et ethnonationalisme.” 224 peter geschiere

2002, a military insurgency in the North eff ectively split up the country between North and South, “the kind of geographical framework within which the discourse of autochthony fl ourishes so well in Côte d’Ivoire”.55 Under Gbagbo the idea of ivoirité acquired a new lease of life, but Arnaut signals new aspects: the ivoirité of Gbagbo has a more global outlook, and it sets up the “frontier” in Bete land (rather than any Baule element) as a symbol of the nation, but then a new, emerging nation of “real” Ivorians.56 Arnaut concludes: “Autochthony is . . . . also a powerful discourse for a regional minority to reinvent itself as a ‘national’ majority . . .”57 In Ivory Coast, autochthony may remain more closely linked to the nation, albeit in purifi ed form. But it shows similar segmentary tendencies as elsewhere. Who the ‘real’ autochthon is remains an object of deep controversies, just as ‘the Other’ takes on constantly new guises.

Th e ‘Great Lakes Region’ and other African Settings Another hotbed of autochthony is the ‘Great Lakes Region’, notably Rwanda-Burundi and the adjacent parts of Congo (North and South Kivu). Stephen Jackson’s recent thesis (2003) on “War-Making” in Goma, the capital of North Kivu is based on research since the late 1990s when RDC ‘rebels’, backed by Rwandan and Ugandan troops conquered this part of Congo. He speaks of “. . . a breakneck chase to exert control over fl uctuating identity categories . . .”58 His second chapter on “Making History and Migratory Identities” evokes, indeed, a dazzling vortex of identities with constantly changing names and historical claims. However, a recurring dividing line in all this is apparently the opposition between ‘autochthons’ and ‘allochthons’; and a fi xed pole in defi ning the latter are the much resented ‘Ban- yarwanda’—‘Rwandophones’ who are constantly suspected of plotting to deliver the region to neighboring Rwanda. Yet, even this more or less fi xed beacon has its ambiguities: it can refer to recent Hutu refugees (who fl ed to Congo aft er the 1994 genocide of Tutsi in Rwanda and the subsequent takeover by Kagame and his Tutsi army); but it can also refer to their arch-opponents, the enigmatic Banyamulenge,

55 Arnaut, Performing Displacements, p. 240. 56 Ibid., pp. 242, 252. 57 Ibid., p. 254. 58 Jackson, War Making, p. 247. autochthony: local or global? 225 whom autochthons oft en call ‘Congolese Tutsi’. Jackson’s study highlights both the surprising resilience of the idea of a Congolese nation among the “autochthons” of this far-out part of the country and the fi erce debates over history in this context: where do these Banyamu- lenge come from? When did they settle in Congo? How can they claim to belong here as well? Like Jackson, Jean-Claude Williame highlights, as an important factor behind all these uncertainties, Mobutu’s volatile manipulations of national citizenship promised the Banyamulenge to recognize their Congolese citizenship when he needed their support; he then denied it when he rather betted upon the support of other groups.59 Liisa Malkki’s references to “autochtonisation” as a central trait in the construction of a group-history among Hutu refugees from Burundi similarly highlight the narrow link—albeit with a somewhat diff erent tenor—between autochthony claims and the struggle over national citizenship.60 Th e Hutu historical claim for autochthony is essential to their hope of being liberated one day from the domination by Tutsi with their false pretence of superiority. However, Malkki also shows that such claims to being autochthonous have their fl ip side: Hutu have to share their autochthony with Twa (‘Pygmies’). Th is indicates how easily this notion can be associated with ‘primitive’, as still being in a fi rst stage of development. Th ere is a return here to the connotations the notion acquired in the western Sudan, the fi rst area where the term was introduced to the continent by French civil servants: the almost “pre-human” autochthons were only socialized by incoming foreign rulers. Malkki is certainly right to emphasize that for the Hutu refugees, as well, “. . . autochthony can be a double-edged sword.”61 Various authors highlight the centrality of preoccupations with autochthony in recent political developments for other parts of Africa. Carola Lentz emphasizes the long history of these tensions, going back to pre-colonial times, in Burkina Faso and neighbouring parts of Ghana.62 But she also notes that ‘autochthony’ became a powerful

59 Jean-Claude Willame, Banyarwanda et Banyamulenge: Violences ethniques et gestion de l’identitaire au Kivu (Paris, 1997). 60 Liisa Malkki, Purity and Exile: Violence, Memory, and National Cosmology among Hutu Refugees in Tanzania (Chicago, 1996), pp. 63ff . 61 Ibid., p. 63. 62 Lentz, “‘Premiers arrivés’ et ‘nouveaux venus’.” 226 peter geschiere political slogan especially in the 1990s—in the competition for posts, but even more in struggles over access to land. Th e language of autochthony also seems to penetrate into Anglophone parts of the continent, not only in the Anglophone part of Cameroon (see above), but also in parts of North Ghana that border on Burkina and Togo.63 But even where the notions as such are not current, similar discourses prove to be highly mobilizing. Th e Comaroff s are certainly right to compare the threatening upsurge of xenophobia in South Africa against the makwere-kwere (African immigrants from across the Limpopo) to the autochthony obsession elsewhere on the continent.64 Especially their analysis of the “zombifi cation” of these makwere-kwere—the tendency to de-personalize immigrants—is highly relevant for the autochthony examples discussed above.65 Catherine Boone’s challenging comparison of developments in Senegal, Ivory Coast and Ghana shows how easily similar discourses, again centering on the access to land, cross- cut the border between Anglophone and Francophone Africa.66 Achim von Oppen’s recent Habilitationsschrift on Bounding Villages in Zam- bia similarly highlights the paradox of exclusionist discourses on locality and belonging that manage at the same time to remain open-ended and tuned in to globalisation.67 In general it might be useful to emphasize that this upsurge of autochthony in Africa is cause for surprise. Historians and anthropologists used to characterize African societies as oriented towards “wealth-in-people” in contrast to conceptions of “wealth-in-things” prevailing elsewhere.68 Africa would be characterized by its open forms of organization with special arrangements for including people into local groups. Th is would encompass elements such as very broad

63 See Martijn Wienia, Th e Stranger Owns the Land but the Land is for Us: Th e Politics of a Religious Landscape in Nanun, N. Ghana (Leiden, 2003). 64 Comaroff and Comaroff , “Naturing the Nation.” 65 Cf. on Ghanaian immigrants in Botswana also Rijk van Dijk, “Localisation, Gha- naian Pentecostalism and the Stranger’s Beauty in Botswana,” Africa 73, 4 (2003), 560–583. 66 Catherine Boone, Political Topographies of the African State: Territorial Authority and Institutional Choice (Cambridge, 2003). 67 Achim von Oppen, Bounding Villages: Th e Enclosure of Locality in Central Africa, 1890s to 1990s (Habilitation, Humboldt University of Berlin) 2003. 68 See Joseph C. Miller, ‘Way of Death’: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade 1730–1893 (Madison, 1988); Jane Guyer, “Wealth in People and Self-realisation in Equatorial Africa,” Man n.s. 28, 2 (1993), 243–265 and idem, Marginal Gains: Monetary Transactions in Atlantic Africa (Chicago, 2004). autochthony: local or global? 227 kinship terminology, adoption, forms of clientelism. Th e current emphasis on autochthony and local belonging seems, therefore, to be a quite dramatic turn towards closure and exclusion. However, the above analysis shows that such apparent closure may deceive in view of the extreme malleability of autochthony discourse. It is doubtful whether one can simply characterize it as a ‘retraditionalisation’ and a return to the village. Its exclusionary tenor is rather about limiting the access to the state and new global circuits.69 Autochthony can present itself as a rival to national citizenship, but it can also pretend to reinforce the nation (by ‘purifying’ it). Despite its appeal to local belonging as a self- evident criterion, its segmentary tenor creates nagging uncertainties: one always risks to be unmasked as ‘not really’ autochthonous. Indeed, its emptiness, the elusiveness of who is ‘really’ an autochthon, gives it a dizzy quality. African examples of recent autochthony movements suggest that the quest for belonging is a never-ending one, promising safety, yet raising basic insecurities.70 From all the variations discussed above, autochthony emerges as a never-ending mirror-game (but certainly not an innocent one). Its apparent ‘naturalness’ hides a constant fl ux of re-defi ning one’s belonging that seems to slip away as constantly. Striking are its highly diff erent implications for the nation-state. In Cameroon it presents itself as an alternative to the very idea of national citizenship. In Ivory Coast in contrast, it defi nes itself as the nation, albeit in a renovated, purifi ed form. In Europe it is caught between ‘civic’ and ‘ethnic’ defi - nitions of citizenship, while its target is rather the welfare state; that might be undermined more by the global economy than by the infl ux of immigrants. For the Athenians, long ago, it implied a kind of inborn

69 Cf. Mbembe’s and Simone’s emphasis, quoted above, on the open-endedness of these discourses. 70 For reasons of space we can not address here the relation with alternative notions of belonging that seems to feed on people’s perception that the continent is in crisis. Notably a comparison with the upsurge of Pentecostalism would be of interest since it clearly off ers a diff erent sense of belonging from autochthony. Most authors (cf. Birgit Meyer, Translating the Devil: Religion and Modernity among the Ewe in Ghana (Edinburgh, 1999)) signal Pentecostalists’ deep distrust of ‘the village’ and ‘the family’ equated with the Devil; instead they belong to a (global?) community of ‘born-agains.’ However, for Malawi, Harri Englund (“Cosmopolitanism and the Devil in Malawi,” Ethnos 69, 3 (2004), 293–316.) emphasizes the close links urban Pentecostalists retain with their village of origin. Apparently in the relation between autochthony and Pen- tecostalism, as seemingly opposite discourses on belonging, varying contradictions and articulations are possible. 228 peter geschiere propensity towards democracy. However, in modern Europe it rather seems to express a deep disappointment about what democracy has become. Yet the above also does suggest some general trends. A crucial one is highlighted by the classical glorifi cation of autochthony in early Athens, in the challenging interpretation of Nicole Loraux.71 She evokes the paradoxical instability of a discourse that celebrates stability. Autoch- thony may invoke staying-in-place as some sort of norm. But for historians—and certainly not only for academic ones—movement is rather the norm: any history starts with a migration. Even the Athe- nian families that were so proud of their autochthony had myths about origins from elsewhere. And even the Beti, who have now become the arch-autochthons of Cameroon, express their unity by a myth of an only partially successful crossing of the majestic Sanaga river on the back of a huge python. Autochthony needs movement as a counterpoint to defi ne itself. It is precisely this basic instability that makes it quite a dangerous discourse. It seems to off er a safe, even ‘natural’ belonging. But it is haunted by a basic insecurity: the worries about its own authenticity, the need to prove itself by unmasking ‘fake’ autochthons, and hence internal division and violence. Th is paradox between a promise of primordial security and a practice of basic insecurity seems to be of all times and places, whenever autochthony or similar notions (‘people from the land’) become current. Yet it is clear that the force of such notions and their emotional appeal can diff er greatly. An obvious question remains: Why was it especially in the 1990’s that such discourses of belonging and exclusion became suddenly so strong and began to dominate politics—not only in many parts of Africa but also elsewhere in the world? It is clear that there is a link with intensifi ed processes of globalisation. Yet it is clear also that this link can take very diff erent forms. For Africa democratisation and the new style of development policies were mentioned above as specifi c factors in this context. In Europe the growing concern about migrants, who supposedly refuse ‘cultural integration,’ seems to play a big role. Clearly we need to follow much more closely the diff erent historical trajectories in the articulation of globalisation and the preoccupation with belonging that always has exclusion as its fl ip side.

71 Loraux, Né de la terre, pp. 95–100. HERITAGE AND THE MAKING OF (TRANS-)LOCAL IDENTITIES: A CASE STUDY FROM THE CURONIAN SPIT (LITHUANIA)

Anja Peleikis Martin Luther University of Halle-Wittenberg, Germany

Introduction

In the context of globalisation debates, the examination of local spaces has also received new meanings. While ‘locality’ has been generally understood as a social space defi ned by direct face-to-face relations, by physical proximity and a form of everyday routine in the ‘here and now’, this equation has been called into question more and more. Locality in the sense of physical proximity is no longer the only model based on which local community is conceived. Empirical case studies have shown that social groups are also constituted beyond local, regional and national borders, a result of the reduction of geographic distances owing to new global information and transport technologies.1 Locality is imagined less and less as a static unit with clearly defi ned borders to the outside or as a ‘container’ in which local life manifests itself, but as an object of social practice and construction. Th us, it has become necessary to give up fi xed and stable conceptualisations of ‘locality’ and follow more dynamic and fl exible concepts. Appadurai has suggested asking how locality is in fact produced by diff erent social actors at diff erent points in time.2 He states that locality is always context-generative as well as context-driven.3 Con- text-generative images of locality are formed by local actors themselves, who in rituals, rites of passage, by way of festivals and shared work for example, generate their understanding of local identities

1 See for example Anja Peleikis, Lebanese in Motion: Gender and the Making of a Translocal Village (Bielefeld, 2003); Peggy Levitt, Th e Transnational Villagers (Berke- ley, 2001). 2 Arjun Appadurai, “Th e Production of Locality,” in Counterworks: Managing the Diversity of Knowledge, ed. Richard Fardon (London, 1995), p. 213. 3 Appadurai, “Th e Production of Locality,” p. 211. 230 anja peleikis

‘from below’.4 At the same time, local actors are also context-driven by forces ‘from above’, for instance by powerful national or global actors. By now it has become obvious, however, that a dichotomising contrasting of constructions of locality as ‘from below’ or ‘from above’ appears ambivalent. In many cases of constructions of locality originating ‘from below’ it can be observed how local actors take up global conceptions and ideas in order to integrate them, localise them and make them into components of essentialist defi nitions of local culture and identity. Th us, it has become a commonplace to say that global processes are expressed in the local, and local ways of life, on the other hand, may spread globally. Producing locality has actually become in many places a constant struggle where diff erent social actors mobilise and combine diff erent local and global resources creatively and strategically to stabilise their infl uence or obtain new power resources.5 Mobilising diverse interpretations and representations of the local past and heritage has actually become one important resource and instrument in negotiating local identities in times of globalisation.6 While until only a few decades ago the word ‘heritage’ was commonly used to describe an inheritance that an individual received in the will of a deceased ancestor or bequeathed when dead to descendants, the range of meanings attached to this formerly legal term has recently undergone an expansion to include almost any sort of intergenera- tional exchange or relationship.7 Following Graham et al. I will use the term ‘heritage’ to denote the contemporary use of the past.8 Hence, people are at the focus of this defi nition. Th ey are the creators of heritage, and not merely passive receivers or transmitters of it. People create representations and objects of heritage as they require it and manage it for a range of contemporary purposes.9 Two of these purposes will be delineated in more detail in the following, namely how creating heritage can serve economic interests in the context of tourism and how the making of heritage serves identifi cation processes at the local and national scale.

4 Ibid. 5 Arjun Appadurai, “Sovereignty Without Territoriality: Notes for a Postnational Geography,” in Th e Geography of Identity, ed. Patricia Yaeger (Ann Arbor, 1996), pp. 40–58. Akhil Gupta and James Ferguson, Anthropological Locations: Boundaries and Grounds of a Field Science (Berkeley, 1997). 6 Brian Graham, G.J. Ashworth and J.E. Tunbridge, A Geography of Heritage: Power, Culture and Economy (London, 2000). 7 Graham et al., A Geography of Heritage, p. 1. 8 Ibid., p. 2. 9 Ibid. heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 231

Map 10. Th e Curonian Lagoon Region and the Position of Nida (Cartography: Jutta Turner, Max Planck-Institute, Halle/Germany) 232 anja peleikis

Taking the ethnographic example of the Curonian Spit in present-day Lithuania which has been characterised by changing national affi liation, forced migration and a total population exchange in the course of the twentieth century, it is my interest to understand the process of making local heritage and by this producing (trans-)local identities at diff erent points in history given the tremendous ruptures in the region under study. How do people create their translocal identities aft er having been forced to leave their localities and live elsewhere? And how does a new population create local heritage and by this a new local identity at a place whose history and past is rather unknown to them? How do national narratives, ideologies and politics infl uence the making of local heritage and identity?

Th e Making of Curonian Heritage and Identity (1900–1945)

Th e area under study, the northern part of the Curonian Spit10 which belongs to the region of Lithuania Minor,11 has been characterised by an inconsistent national affi liation in the course of the twentieth century and the resulting change of population. For many centuries it was part of East Prussia12 and since 1871 the German Reich. Th e harsh living conditions on the narrow sandy peninsula between the Curonian Lagoon and the Baltic Sea marked the lives of the local fi shermen and women. Historically they had been of diverse ethnic background, e.g. German, Lithuanian and Curonian, but over the centuries they developed a specifi c local identity as ‘the people from the dunes’,13 with their distinct local habits, practices and Curonian language.14 With the

10 Presently, the 100 km-long, narrow peninsula is divided between the Lithuanian state and Kaliningrad Oblast (Russia). In this paper I focus exclusively on the Lithua- nian part of the Spit. 11 Depending on the historical and political contexts, this region was also called ‘Prussian Lithuania’ or Memelgebiet (Memel territory) and Memelland. 12 On the history of East Prussia see for example Andreas Kossert, Ostpreußen: Geschichte und Mythos (München, 2005). 13 See Nijolė Strakauskaitė, Th e Curonian Spit: Th e Old European Postal Road(Vil- nius, 2004). 14 Curonian is an old Indo-Germanic Baltic language, closely related to Latvian. See Richard Pietsch, Deutsch-kurisches Wörterbuch (Lüneburg, 1991); Paul Kwauka and Richard Pietsch, Kurisches Wörterbuch (Berlin, 1977); Christliebe El-Mogharbel, Nehrungskurisch: Dokumentation einer moribunden Sprache (Frankfurt a.M., 1993). During the fi ft eenth century Curonians from the Latvian region of Courland migrated to the Curonian Spit, where they were later Christianised and Germanised and also heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 233 formation of the German Reich and the introduction of ‘Germanisa- tion politics’, national identifi cation became stronger and more and more important. German education, administration as well as tourism to the Curonian Spit fostered German national identifi cation also on the side of the local population.15 Tourism to the Curonian Spit developed at the end of the nineteenth century, when German travellers and artists fi rst ‘discovered’ the beauty of the landscape and established the Niddener artists’ colony.16 In fact, from the beginning of the twentieth century up until the end of World War II, Nidden was an important meeting point for German painters, writers, scientists, journalists and fi lmmakers as well as for a German public seeking relaxation and tranquillity. All of them were attracted by the Spits landscape of mighty sand dunes, the Curonian Lagoon, dense pine forests and long, large bathing beaches on the Baltic Sea. Famous German painters, like Karl Schmidt-Rott- luff and Max Pechstein17 presented images of the Curonian population in their art, writers such as Th omas Mann18 described them in literature, and photographers produced photos and postcards depicting the ‘traditional world’ of the local Curonian population. Th is was oft en done in a manner reinforcing Western ideas of a romantic and exotic native ‘other’. Fascinated by shift ing light conditions, rich colours and atmosphere, the painters endlessly depicted the impressive landscape. Th e old, reed-covered wooden fi shermen’s houses, with their brown- ish-blue colour, the vivid fl ower gardens, and above all the Curonian fi shing boats (German: Kurenkähne) with the picturesque Kurenwim- pel (weathervanes) on the mast of every boat were favourite motifs, as were fi shermen and women themselves. Initiated through the painters mixed with Germans and Lithuanians who came to the Spit. See Evalds Mugurevics, “Ethnic Processes in Baltic Inhabited Territories and the Emergence of the Latvian Nation in the 6th to the 16th Century,” Humanities and Social Sciences Latvia 3 (1997), 75–92. Marija Gimbutas, Th e Balts (London, 1963). 15 Kossert, Ostpreußen, pp. 177–182. 16 Maja Ehlermann-Mollenhauer, ed., Ernst Mollenhauer: Ein Expressionist aus Ost- preußen (Heidelberg, 1992); Jörn Barfood, Nidden: Künstlerkolonie auf der Kurischen Nehrung (Fischerhude, 2005). On tourism on the Curonian Spit see Anja Peleikis, “Reisen in die Vergangenheit: Deutsche Heimattouristen auf der Kurischen Nehrung,” Voyage. Jahrbuch für Reise- & Tourismusforschung 8 (2009), 85–97. 17 See Max Pechstein, Erinnerungen, ed. Leopold Reidemeister (Stuttgart, 1993 [1960]). 18 See for example the writings of Th omas Mann on the Curonian Spit; Thomans Mann, Über mich selbst: Autobiographische Schrift en (Frankfurt a.M., 1994 [1983]). Mann visited Nidden for the fi rst time in 1929. In 1930 his summer house was built, in which he spent three summers with his family. Today the house is the most visited museum in Lithuania. 234 anja peleikis and photographers new images and external presentations of the fi sher locality appeared. Th e local inhabitants were not passive recipients of these infl uences but became agents in marketing ‘their tradition’ and ‘cultural heritage’ to the tourists. As the tourists were fascinated by the colourful Kurenwimpel on the fi shing boats—originally introduced by the fi shery inspectors so as to be able to recognise the boats—the local inhabitants started to carve small copies to sell them as souvenirs. A painter who came to live in Nidden, Ernst Mollenhauer, became active in the 1920s and initiated the Niddener Trachtenverein (Niddener association of traditional costumes) whose task was to preserve popular Curonian culture. Th e association was also active in the founding and organisation of the Nehrungsmuseum (Spit Museum).19 In this context processes of commodifi cation and heritagisation of local culture were initiated. It can be argued that the local population took up external interpretations of their past, localised them and in this process redefi ned their own local identities of that time.20 Th is example also indicates that the making of local identities is closely embedded into the wider societal and national contexts at any given time. Th is becomes even more obvious when focusing on the developments infl uencing the region under study aft er World War I. In 1919 the Curonian Spit was divided and the northern Spit which belonged to the Memelgebiet (Memel territory) was cut from the rest of East Prussia and came under a League of Nations Mandate. Shortly thereaft er, in 1923, Lithuania annexed the Memel territory, which received an autonomous status in the newly created Lithuanian state.21 Still, the inhabitants of the northern Spit further identifi ed with Ger- many and German nationalist ideology rapidly spread during those years. In 1939, following the Hitler-Stalin Pact, the Nazis reappropri- ated the Memel territory and incorporated it into Nazi Germany. I argue that with the rise of nationalist identifi cation, local ethnic identities became redefi ned. While on the one hand ‘being Curonian’ became a synonym for backwardness and out-dated traditions, at the same time ethnic and local identities became nationalised. While the

19 Jörn Barfood, Nidden, p. 42. 20 Anja Peleikis, “Tourism and the Making of Cultural Heritage: Th e Case of Nida/ Curonian Spit, Lithuania,” in Defi ning Region: Baltic Area Studies from Sociocultural Anthropology and Interdisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Rimantas Sliužinskas and Vytis Čiubrinskas (Klaipeda, 2006), pp. 101–114. 21 Before 1919 most of Lithuania was part of the Tsarist Russian Empire. heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 235 traditional Curonian costume, for example, was worn by girls and women during Sundays and special events before, during the 1930s it became more and more a tourist commodity. Th e girls went out in these costumes, so that the tourists could photograph them. Th e dress became a tourist commodity while at the same time it became a symbol of nationalist German folklore.

Th e Making of Translocal Curonian Heritage (1945–1990)

Th e end of the Second World War brought a brutal end to local life on the Curonian Spit when most of the inhabitants fl ed the area in fear of the Red Army, joining millions of others fl eeing Central and Eastern Europe. Most of them went to West and East Germany, where they had to cope with their experiences of displacement, the loss of their home localities, poverty and overall insecurity in an environment that tended to be hostile towards the newcomers from the East. For the refugees, East Prussia, the Curonian Spit and the village disappeared behind the Iron Curtain and only lived on in their memories and imaginations. However, despite the fact that it was impossible for the refugees to return to their locality during the Cold War, the local memory was continually relived, reimagined and shared with other former inhabitants over the years. People maintained contact with local kin and neighbours despite the fact that they were living in very diff erent places in West and East Germany. Th ey met in the course of family gatherings, in Heimat- vertriebenen (expellees) organisations, Memelland groups and Nid- den gatherings. Th ey developed a translocal village network of former inhabitants in which they renegotiated and remade their local identity in absentia from the actual place of reference. In this context the locality of origin developed more and more into a distant, unattainable and idealised home locality, an emotional landscape and projection site that met their needs to feel at home and rooted. Th e importance and activities of this translocal network has changed over time. Over the years ‘the Niddener’ like the other refugees from the East became more and more integrated into post-war German societies and developed new local identities in their new homes. Still, when in 1990 the former inhabitants were allowed to re-visit their place of origin for the fi rst time in 45 years, many took upon themselves a journey ‘home’, carrying their memories and place-images to the present-day locality. 236 anja peleikis

But not only Germans who originated from the Curonian Spit have started to travel to Eastern Europe. Many Germans interested in Ger- man cultural heritage in the East have carried out such trips. Some of these people had visited Nida as children before the Second World War, when Nidden was a well-known tourist spot. Others had also heard about the rich, unspoilt landscape of the Spit and kept these images in their minds over the years. In this way, images of the unique- ness and beauty of the Curonian Spit as an expression of Germany’s cultural heritage in the East had survived fi ft y years of Soviet closure in the collective German memory.

Th e Making of Local Identities during the Period of Soviet Sovereignty (1945–1990)

Aft er World War II Nidden became Nida, a village of the Lithuanian Soviet Socialist Republic, which imposed a new socialist legal and political order upon the place and its new population. At the beginning of 1945 there were hardly any people left in the villages of the Curonian Spit. However, some of the former local Curonian-German inhabitants did not manage to fl ee or they returned to their villages aft er the war.22 Since they still had their Lithuanian documents from the interwar period and spoke Curonian, they were considered Lithu- anians and thus allowed to stay. Although the local Curonian-Ger- mans never identifi ed themselves as Lithuanians, they mobilised their former Lithuanian citizenship as a survival strategy to counter Soviet persecution. Th ey were forced to hide their past local and national identities, which they could only express privately and in the context of religion. Church and family life constituted a small niche in which traces of the past local order could be experienced despite a repressive and all-encompassing Soviet state. In the late 1950s most of these remaining German-Curonians received the right to emigrate to West and East Germany. Only a few people were not allowed to emigrate or decided to remain because they had in the meantime developed familial

22 On the post-war situation in former East Prussia see Ruth Kibelka, Ostpreußens Schicksalsjahre, 1944–1948 (Berlin, 2000) and Eckhard Matthes, ed., Als Russe in Ost- preußen: Sowjetische Umsiedler über ihren Neubeginn in Königsberg/Kaliningrad nach 1945 (Ostfi ldern vor Stuttgart, 1999). heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 237 relationships with Lithuanians or Russians. Th ese people offi cially became Lithuanians and Soviet citizens. From the early 1950s onwards, people from all over the Soviet Union, but predominantly from various regions in Lithuania were settled on the Curonian Spit by order of the Soviet state. Fishermen were especially asked to move there as the interest was to increase fi sh production.23 Given the poverty and limited income possibilities in many regions of Lithuania, people were attracted to the Spit where they found accommodation in the empty houses of the former population and jobs in the fi shing kolkhoz. Over the course of time the ‘new’ population appropriated the village, ‘Lithuanianised’ it, and in this process produced narratives on the Lithuanian-Curonian heritage of the place. I argue that this was a major vehicle in the process of making new local identities for the newcomers. All of them had originated from very diff erent regions in Lithuania and in Russia. Place and landscape were unfamiliar for them and slowly they adapted to life in the foreign environment of ‘sand and water’. Narratives of the ancient Curonians with their impressive Curonian fi shing boats who also managed to survive in these severe circumstances, helped to identify with the past, construct a link to the present and contributed to the making of a new local identity as Nidiškės (the people of Nida). Th ese narratives on the local Curonian-Lithuanian past became especially important in the context of Soviet tourism that developed in the 1960s. Nida once again became a popular holiday resort—now for chosen Soviet citizens. While new narratives and presentations of the Curonian-Lithu- anian past developed, the legacy of the Curonian-German past on the Spit became politically ignored, persecuted and unmade. However, the most visible reminder of the German-Curonian heritage was to be found in local architecture: fi shermen’s houses, the local cemetery, the church, hotels and Th omas Mann’s summer house told the story of a vibrant pre-World War II tourist and artist village. Despite Soviet plans to completely demolish the old buildings and construct a Soviet holiday resort, local architects and parts of the new local population fought to preserve Nida’s old monuments. Th ey succeeded, and many of the old houses were saved from destruction. In this process, Nida’s

23 Arunė Arbušauskaitė, “Sociological Analysis of Family Cards of Neringa Resi- dents in 1956,” in Everyday Life in the Baltic States, ed. Meilute Taljunaite (Vilnius, 1997), p. 186. 238 anja peleikis architecture and local heritage was appropriated by the new Lithuanian inhabitants. Th ese narratives on the place’s heritage was presented to the ‘new’ tourists coming from all over the Soviet Union, from diverse Soviet Republics, from as far away as Kazakhstan or Uzbekistan, from Georgia or Armenia as well as from Leningrad and Moscow. Th ey travelled to the Curonian Spit and helped to construct Nida as the ‘pearl’ and the ‘most beautiful village’ of the Soviet Union. Th us, offi - cially Nida stood out as an exemplary Soviet tourist destination with a distinct Lithuanian heritage of Curonian fi shermen as people of the Soviet ‘working masses’. Th us, these heritage sites and monuments became the visual manifestations of an offi cial, public interpretation of the past—detached from the historical and political context in which they were built. Th us, monuments and heritage sites can be considered as vehicles for nation building, for constructing a new identity, and presenting this to the outside. In this process the tourist as ‘Other’ looks in and helps defi ne the local and national Self.24 Despite the Soviet state’s ideology and attempts to create a ‘mono- lithic community’ that had overcome ‘the national question’ by eliminating all social and most cultural diff erences between the nations within the Soviet Union,25 there was some room left for ‘national cultural forms’.26 Th ese were local languages and folk culture, which in Soviet ideology were defi ned as the culture and lore of the ‘working masses’.27 Generally speaking, representations of traditional folk culture were divided into those considered ‘progressive’—that is, those that expressed a consciousness of hard work and of exploitation and struggle against the exploiter—and those considered ‘repressive’—usually those associated with religion.28 Given this context, the local work culture of Curonian fi shermen and women was presented in the local Nida history museum established in the Protestant church between the end of the 1960s and the end of the 1980s. Th e material artefacts were presented without any reference to the political context in which they

24 Sabine Marschall, “Post-apartheid Monuments and Cultural Tourism in South Africa,” in Tourism and Postcolonialism, eds. Michael Hall and Hazel Tucker (Lon- don, 2004), p. 97. 25 On the formation of Soviet national identities see Francine Hirsch, Empire of Nations: Ethnographic Knowledge and the Making of the Soviet Union (Ithaca, 2005). 26 Vytis Čiubrinskas, “Identity and the Revival of Tradition in Lithuania: An Insider’s View,” Folk 42 (2000), 27. 27 Čiubrinskas, “Identity,” 27. 28 Ibid. heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 239 had developed but as an expression of the hardworking Soviet ‘working masses’. Th is example makes clear how local heritage can be used for local as well as for national interests. Next to this offi cial, state-authorised and legalised version of the Spit’s past, other narratives of the place’s ‘Curonian-Lithuanian’ past developed during Soviet times. Th is process has to be understood in the context of a growing Lithuanian nationalism that developed in opposition to Sovietisation processes. Starting in the 1970s, local history clubs and folklore ensembles sprang up all over Lithuania and there emerged a growing interest in pre-Soviet ethnic traditions. It became popular to trace the magic, ritual, myth and symbols of the ancient Lithuanians.29 Learning to understand and maintain one’s national and ethnic heritage contributed to the remaking of Lithu- anian nationalist identities and the drive for independence in the late 1980s. In this context, people became interested in the history, pagan rituals and symbols of the ancient Curonians, who like the Prussians and Lithuanians were a Baltic ethnic group living in the area of present-day Lithuania, Kaliningrad Oblast and Latvia.30 With this renewed interest in the pagan Lithuanian past, the local Curonian past became a focus of interest as well, and it was mobilised in this context for Lith- uanian national interests against the offi cial Soviet narrative. While the Soviet state proposed an offi cial and legalised version of the Lithu- anian past, segments of the Lithuanian population began to question and resist this Soviet narrative. Th ey considered the Lithuanian people the legitimate ‘owners’ of Lithuania’s Curonian past. In focussing on local heritage production in Soviet times, I have demonstrated that the local history of Curonian people was Lithuani- anised and depicted in a Soviet mode of presentation. At the same time the making of Lithuanian heritage served as an important means of articulating Lithuanian national identity and, by this, resisting the all-encompassing Soviet state and ideology. Th e narrative of Lithu- anian-Curonian heritage, which was produced in the Soviet political

29 Ibid., 19–40; Vytis Čiubrinskas, “Sovietmečio iššūkiai Lietuvos etnologijai: Dis- ciplina, ideologija ir patriotizmas,” Lietuvos Etnologija: socialinės antropologijos ir etnologijos studijos 1 (2001), 99–117. 30 Evalds Mugurevics, “Ethnic Processes in Baltic Inhabited Territories and the Emergence of the Latvian Nation in the 6th to the 16th Century,” Humanities and Social Sciences Latvia 3 (1997), 75–92. Th e Curonians were described as an infl uential and prosperous ethnic group engaged in pirating and trading across the Baltic Sea, fi rst mentioned in the ninth century. 240 anja peleikis and legal context, continued to be an important narrative in post-Soviet times. In fact interpretations of local heritage became nationalised and now contribute to the making of nationalist identities in independent Lithuania and to attracting international tourists.

Local Heritage in Independent Lithuania (1990–Today)

Th e mobilisation of the past for nation-building processes has been extensively documented and analysed.31 Focussing on nation-building processes in the post-Soviet space aft er 1989, it has been shown that there was a pervasive preoccupation with the recovery of histories and memories repressed under the Soviet regime.32 Social actors also draw on the distant (e.g. pre-Soviet) past to provide inspiration for breaking with the immediate past.33 When Lithuania regained independence in 1991, heritage politics and practices became an important and offi cial means of nation-building. In this context, readings of the past contributed to the legitimation of the nation’s claim to its territory. Presenting the local history of the ancient Curonians of Lithuanian descent inscribes Lithuanian territorial claims in the present-day region of Lithuania Minor including the northern part of the Curonian Spit, which once belonged to the Prussian State, the German Reich, independent Lithuania, Nazi Germany and later to the Soviet Socialist Lithuanian Republic. At the same time, the Lithuanian government asserts that as the national sovereign, it is the authority that creates and dictates the use of heritage within its borders. Th is also applies to movable and immov- able cultural heritage, and in this context to all of the heritage that was once created by non-Lithuanians and ethnic or religious minorities whose artefacts can be found on the territory of present-day Lithuania.

31 Eric Hobsbawn and Terence Ranger, eds., Th e Invention of Tradition (Cam- bridge, Eng., 1983). 32 Graham Smith, ed., Th e Nationalities Question in the Post-Soviet States (London, 1996); Graham Smith, Vivien Law, Andrew Wilson, Annette Bohr and Edward All- worth, Nation-building in the Post-Soviet Borderlands: Th e Politics of National Identi- ties (Cambridge, Eng. 1998); Chris Hann, “Postsocialist Nationalism: Rediscovering the Past in South East Poland,” Slavic Review 57 (1998), 840–863; Chris Hann, “Th e Cartography of Copyright Cultures versus Proliferation of Public Properties,” in Prop- erties of Culture: Culture as Property, ed. Erich Kasten (Berlin, 2004), p. 292. 33 Caroline Humphrey, “Th e Moral Authority of the Past in Post-socialist Mongo- lia,” Religion, State and Society 20 (1992), 375–389. heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 241

In this respect the Lithuanian state behaves according to international conventions, which support the tendency to retain cultural patrimony by declaring cultural property found within a nation’s territory as part of that state’s cultural heritage.34 Lithuania joined UNESCO in 1991 and accepted the International Convention concerning the World Cultural and Natural Heritage and the Convention of European Cul- ture. Furthermore, it received the opportunity to propose Lithuanian cultural objects and natural sites for the UNESCO World Heritage List. In 2000 the whole Curonian Spit, as a trans-border region belonging to Russia (Kaliningrad Oblast) and Lithuania, was accepted on the UNESCO World Heritage List as an outstanding example of a landscape of sand dunes under constant threat by natural forces.35 In this way Nida’s local heritage was offi cially globalised and made into ‘World Heritage’. Despite this process of globalising local heritage, it simultaneously contributed to nationalising local heritage. Shakley has stated that all World Heritage Sites are also national fl ag carriers, universally recognised symbols of national identity.36 In the same vein, I suggest that although the aims of UNESCO are to preserve global heritage, the Curonian Spit as a World Heritage Site represents a powerful evocative symbol of Lithuanian national identity. In fact, with the Curonian Spit’s emergence as an accepted World Heritage Site, the Lithuanian state demonstrates that it is the legitimate owner of the Spit’s cultural heritage. At the same time, Lithuanian tourist offi cials and politicians hope that this award will increase the interest of international tourists in visiting the country. Lithuania’s unspoiled nature as well as its cultural heritage is presented as its greatest tourist attraction. In tourist leafl ets, brochures and guidebooks, this cultural heritage, including the Curonian Spit’s fi shermen’s artefacts and architecture like the Nida church and the cemetery, as well as age-old traditions and folklore, is praised and marketed appropriately.

34 UNESCO, “Convention on the Means of Prohibiting and Preventing the Illicit Import, Export and Transfer of Ownership of Cultural Property,” United Nations Treaty Series 823 (1970), 238. 35 UNESCO World Heritage—Curonian Spit, http://whc.unesco.org/pg.cfm?cid= 31&id_site=994 (accessed June 12, 2009). 36 Myra Shackley, ed., Visitor Management: Case Studies from World Heritage Sites (London, 1998). 242 anja peleikis

Indeed, as Reinhard Johler has stated, ‘cultural heritage’ has become an important niche in the European tourist economy,37 and Lithuania has defi nitely sought out the ‘heritage industry’ for its economic development. Since independence, national and local political eff orts have concentrated on the implementation of a new touristic infrastructure on the Curonian Spit so as to meet Western European standards. Much attention was given to a redefi ned cultural infrastructure, new museums opened and cultural festivals take place during the summer months. Narratives of the age-old Curonian fi shing population and its specifi c and outstanding cultural heritage are mobilised as important cultural capital in the process of marketing the Curonian Spit. Th e typical Curonian boats (Ger.: Kurenkahn) are re-mobilised as the most important symbol of Curonian heritage. While the former German- Curonian population used them in fi shery, these boats have disappeared from the lagoon since they left and the fi shery was motorised. Only recently were a few of the boats rebuilt and used for tourist trips on the lagoon. Commodities that were popular tourist souvenirs during German sovereignty, like the Kurenwimpel (weather-vanes), are once again being sold as profi table tourist items.38 It is striking that these present-day Kurenwimpel carved by Lithuanian carpenters have acquired new Lithuanianised interpretations. Saleswomen working in small tourist boutiques in Nida, for example, explain the meaning of these ‘Curonian-Lithuanian’ objects to curious tourists: “You know, our ancestors, the Curonians, were pagans and they believed in the sun and moon; that’s why these symbols are presented on the weather-vanes.” In the redefi ned Lithuanian tourist market, artefacts, which once used to represent the German-Curonian heritage, are now being used and reinterpreted fl exibly. Th us, tourist items from pre-war times are remobilised and combined with heritage interpretations from Soviet and post-Soviet times, and in this way are made into typical present-day Lithuanian tourist souvenirs. In this way, traces from various periods of the past are mobilised for the present-day making and commodifi cation of Curonian heritage. Th ese examples demon-

37 Reinhard Johler, “Europe, Identity Politics and the Production of Cultural Heri- tage,” Lietuvos Etnologija, Lithuanian Ethnology. Studies in Social Anthropology and Ethnology 2 (2002), 10. 38 Anja Peleikis, “Tourism and the Making of Cultural Heritage: Th e Case of Nida/ Curonian Spit, Lithuania,” in Defi ning Region: Baltic Area Studies from Sociocultural Anthropology and Interdisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Rimantas Sliužinskas and Vytis Čiubrinskas (Klaipėda 2006), pp. 101–114. heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 243 strate that heritage in independent Lithuania has become an important resource of economic capital used by local and national actors in attracting tourists. Th e question appears as to how do the former German inhabitants who have returned as ‘roots-tourists’ since 1990 to the Curonian Spit as well as German heritage tourists encounter these Lithuanian narratives of their local heritage? And how do the Lithuanian tourist representatives manage heritage dissonance? With the following ethnographic example I will demonstrate how multiple versions and interpretations of the Curonian heritage co-exist in the present. While in many places the question ‘whose heritage?’ can lead to fi erce contestation and struggles, my case reveals that divergent heritage interpretations can also co-exist. Th ey contribute to the (re-)making of diverse (trans-)local identities and are multi-sold and multi-consumed by different groups of tourists.

Multiple Heritage Productions

During my fi eldwork in Nida I repeatedly accompanied tour guides. Once I followed a Lithuanian guide showing a group of German tourists around the so-called ‘Nida ethnographic cemetery’. Th ey were passing through the new cemetery gate, which carries a sign in German and Lithuanian reading: “I am the resurrection and the life.” (Ich bin die Auferstehung und das Leben.) Th e guide, Aušra Rimantienė,39 a woman in her 40s, provided explanations of the Spit’s old Curonian population and explained: Th e Curonians were an archaic Baltic tribe with very exotic habits and a very special tradition, very unique for Lithuania. Many of the crosses are Lithuanian krikštai. Krikštai can be shaped like a horse’s head, birds or plants and are placed at the foot of the grave. Th e Curonians believed that if the dead want to get up they can hold on to the krikštai to pull themselves up. She also explained that this is a historic cemetery and no longer in use: Th is cemetery is taken care of by the ‘National Department of Cultural Heritage protection’, which does its best to protect these wooden traces of Lithuania’s past.

39 All personal names have been changed in this text. 244 anja peleikis

While the guide was passing on her colourful information on the lives of the pre-Christian Curonians, just next to the tourist group an elderly woman was on her knees, cleaning a grave and planting some fl owers on it. When I later came to talk to this woman, she was very upset about the explanations of the Lithuanian guide: Look at this, here is the grave of my grandparents. I was born in Nidden and my parents and grandparents were born in Nidden as well. Have a look, there are crosses with German inscriptions all over. Th is was our local cemetery. We were good Protestants, we buried our dead in a Chris- tian way and we were Germans. Why do the Lithuanians only stress the archaic Curonian past and do not mention us, the former inhabitants? Th is example depicts various fractures and diff erent narratives of the local past. While the tour guide presents the cemetery as an ethnographic historical cemetery of the ancient Curonians of Lithuanian nationality, the old German woman who was born in Nidden remembers her Protestant family members who were buried in this local cemetery before World War II. Th e woman, 80-year-old Anna Pietsch, returned to Nida for the fi rst time—in 45 years—in 1990, and since then has returned nearly every year. Despite extensive destruction, some of the pre-war graves have survived the Soviet period,40 so that Anna Pietsch was able to fi nd the grave of her family. She then started to restore it. She commissioned a new cross, set it up, planted fl owers and redid the edging of the grave. Since Lithuania’s independence, the face of Nida’s cemetery has changed considerably. Every year new crosses are put up and new fl owers are planted by the former inhabitants. Th ey do not ask for permission but practise what they believe is their right and their moral duty. Th ey used to belong to the local families of Nidden and in their understanding, therefore, have ‘roots’ in the village, as demonstrated by the graves of their ancestors. Th is ancestral genealogy as well as their former citizenship legitimise, in their view, their claims to the present-day cemetery. Some of the former inhabitants express their wish to be buried in ‘their’ cemetery when they die, to rest close to their ancestors and in their Heimaterde (homeland soil).

40 On the post-war destruction of cemeteries in Lithuania Minor see Martynas Purvinas, “Die Vernichtung der Friedhöfe im Memelland nach 1944: Die politischen, ideologischen, sozialen, psychologischen und andere Gründe dieses Sakrile- giums,” Annaberger Annalen 8 (2000), http://jahrbuch.annaberg.de/jahrbuch/2000/ Annaberg%20Nr.8%20Kap4.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009). heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 245

I suggest that in revisiting the cemetery and caring for the graves they create an opportunity to symbolically reconnect to their ancestors and to their own local past. Th e cemetery and the church are in fact the strongest symbols of their local pre-World War II history and lives as well as the break and rupture they experienced in the context of war and displacement. With every visit Anna Pietsch walks across the cemetery—oft en together with a local friend from her school-days in Nidden. As not all the graves are reconstructed, they walk by and try to remember who was buried where. By recalling the names of the former Niddener it seems as if they symbolically try to bridge the gap of 60 years of absence. Th e local people who died before and ‘stayed behind’ and those who left appear closely linked in their present-day narrative. Th us, their practices in the Nida cemetery are a way of working through their own personal history. Meeting other former inhabitants in Nida has off ered them the possibility to remake their translocal identities in the context of new political changes and travel possibilities. In contrast to Anna Pietsch, who stands for many former inhabitants, the Lithuanian tourist guide Aušra Rimantienė actually speaks of a very diff erent past of the local cemetery. She describes the graveyard as a place of pagan, pre-Christian Curonians, who used exotic grave markers, referring to an ancient Baltic culture. In her descriptions, the Curonians were a Lithuanian tribe living side by side with many other ethnic groups in Lithuania. Furthermore, the cemetery appears as an ethnographic relic from a long distant past and not as a place with a ‘living memory’, where people mourn their relatives and ancestors. Aušra Rimantienė is not originally from Nida and has gathered her knowledge from information leafl ets she received during her training as a tourist guide. Th us, she represents the offi cial national narrative of the local past and heritage which is presented to tourists in Nida originating from all over the world. Th is narrative reveals much of the offi cial version presented and spread during Soviet-times when the German past of the place was ignored and untold. However, as most of the Western tourists on the Curonian Spit are Germans who are particularly interested in Germany’s cultural heritage in the region, tourist offi cials have started to consider the demands of well-off German tourists who partially question the age- old Lithuanianness of the place and search for traces of the German past. Th us, there have been some initial attempts to integrate interpretations of the German history of the place into some tourist information. Another example is the case of a hotel owner, whose hotel 246 anja peleikis was built in the place of another hotel where the famous Nidden artist colony was based before World War II. She asked the German granddaughter of the former German hotel owner to produce a small exhibition on the artist colony and the life-history of her family. Since then the exhibition as part of the hotel has attracted many—above all German visitors—and the present-day hotel owner has profi ted from the positive resonance. Th is example also makes evident the close connection between heritage representations and economic interests. Probably the temporal distance from Soviet times, the process of redefi ning Lithuanian national identities in the context of Euro- peanisation as well as the rising interest of Lithuanian historians in the East Prussian past may lead to new reinterpretations of the local heritage as well.

Concluding Remarks

Th is case study has revealed the multiple, contesting and changing production of local heritage and identities in the Curonian Spit over time. Since the early days of tourism, heritage has been eff ectively mobilised as a powerful economic and cultural resource in attracting tourists as well as producing local and national identities. While the Curonian heritage was depicted in national-socialist terms during the Nazi regime, it was represented through the lens of socialist ideology during Soviet times. Towards the end of the Soviet regime, Lithuanian nationalist interpretation of Curonian heritage found its expression and continued into Lithuanian sovereignty. Moreover, the designation of Curonian heritage as a World Heritage Site under the international legal regime of UNESCO has—somehow paradoxically—supported the Lithuanian national interests and attracted more international tourists towards the Spit. During these diff erent periods the respective local population has appropriated and localised external infl uences in their attempts to defi ne local identities which has produced at any time specifi c inextri- cable interdependencies of local, national and global elements in the making of localised heritage and identity. Th e case of the former German inhabitants has shown that—over many years of absence—people have continued to rework their translocal identities and narratives of local heritage which are contested by local heritage narratives of the present-day Lithuanian population. heritage and the making of (trans-)local identities 247

However, while confl icts over the interpretation of heritage are oft en vehement and linked to questions of violent and powerful struggles over ownership, the presented case rather reveals that contradicting heritage narratives and claims may also co-exist. Given our case this has to be understood against the background of socio-political as well as economic interests. As the heritage practices of the former inhabitants attract German tourists in search of a German-Prussian past, local and national Lithuanian representatives accept the practices of the former inhabitants. On the other hand, the former inhabitants generally do not question Lithuania’s present- day sovereignty and the consequences of the “Two Plus Four Agree- ments”,41 in which Germany renounced all territorial claims east of the Oder-Neisse line. Th ey do not come back to recapture their property but to re-visit their past and to symbolically re-link to it. Present-day local Lithuanians who themselves had experienced fl ight, migration and relocation to a new and unknown place generally understand and accept these heritage practices. Probably the heritage practices of the former inhabitants may also infl uence the contemporary local population who may pick up elements and integrate them into their present-day versions of the local past. Hence, the production of heritage appears to be mobile, highly fl exible and malleable. It can be interpreted in many ways for numerous purposes, sequentially or simultaneously. Th e same building, the same location can thus in many cases fulfi l the identifi cation needs of diff erent people or diff erent scales. Diff erent claims may be reconciled once the problems are recognised and mutual claims respected.*

41 Th e “Treaty on the Final Settlement with Respect to Germany”, also called “Two Plus Four Agreements”, is the fi nal peace treaty negotiated between the Federal Republic of Germany, the German Democratic Republic, and the Four Occupation Powers. It was signed in Moscow in September 1990. In this treaty Germany fi nally accepted the territorial losses imposed on it aft er 1945.

* Between 2002 and 2007, I carried out 16 months of anthropological fi eldwork in the village of Nida (Ger. Nidden), on the Curonian Spit, Lithuania. During this period I also visited former German inhabitants in their homes in Germany. Th e Max Planck Institute for Social Anthropology, Halle/Saale, Germany, funded this project within the framework of its research group ‘Legal Pluralism’. I thank Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen for their thoughtful comments on an earlier version of this article.

SHIFTING GLOBALITIES—CHANGING HEADGEAR: THE INDIAN MUSLIMS BETWEEN TURBAN, HAT AND FEZ

Margrit Pernau Max Planck Institute for Human Development, Berlin

Th e Mughals were the last in a succession of Muslim dynasties ruling over a large part of India. Th e fi rst emperor, Babur, invaded India at the end of the fi ft eenth century. His empire was consolidated under his grandson Akbar and nominally lasted until the British exiled the last ruler to Rangoon aft er the failed rising of 1857. Ruled by a Muslim dynasty, one might assume that the Mughal empire would form part of what John Voll called “Islam as a World System”, a world system which had its basis in the common religion, its centre in Arabia and the Arab language and culture as a common frame of reference.1 Th is constitutes an important challenge to our assumptions of globality in at least two respects. On the one hand, it opens up the possibility that globality might not uniquely be brought about by economics and, more concretely, the expansion of a capitalist world order, but permits us to take into consideration other factors shaping interaction and entanglement between localities. On the other hand, it questions the idea of a unique and homogeneous globality. Instead it becomes possible to think about plural and interacting globalities, of zones of intensive communication, but also of zones of non-communication, of fault-lines and of ruptures. However, posting Islam as the basis from which a world-system evolves is a highly problematic assumption, as it presupposes religion to be the central unifying force which links Muslims from diff erent regions. Moreover, the focus on Islam as the bonding infl uence leads to its homogenisation—the Islamic globality, no less than the religion, would thus of necessity be Arabo-centric. Th e present contribution aims at challenging these assumptions. My hypothesis would be that there was not one pre-modern Islamic world

1 John Obert Voll, “Islam as a Special World System,” Journal of World History 5, 2 (1994), 213–226. 250 margrit pernau system, but at least two (the Ottoman Empire oscillating between an orientation to either of them and the creation of a centre of its own) which partly overlapped: an Arabic one, centred on the sea trade of the Indian Ocean, stretching from the Arabian Peninsula to the East African coast in the west and to the Indian Coromandel coast, Malaysia and Indonesia in the east. Th e second, land-based one would encompass Central Asia, Persia and India; here the lingua franca, both linguistically and culturally would be Persian.2 Arabic was of course known to a good number of religiously learned men in India, but before the second half of the eighteenth century, even their knowledge was largely mediated by interpreters belonging to the Persianate and Central Asian world, Sufi s as well as scholars. Religion certainly was important to create a feeling of belonging, for some Muslims more and for others less and for some even not at all, but so were language, norms of social interaction and even knowledge of the same poems. While this hypothesis asks for serious research on Sufi networks and scholarly traditions, on trade routes, migration patterns, and on the creation of genealogies,3 my paper will proceed on a much lighter vein, following the changes in Indo-Muslim headgear. Th ough not as serious as following back lines of commentators on classical texts, I hope the topic nevertheless not to be trivial. Th e choice of headgear—whether imposed by the state, a ruling group or following fashion and individual taste—both creates and expresses an identity, at the personal as well as at the collective level.4 Wearing or not wearing a turban, tying it in a certain way or dropping it for a cap, a hat or a fez,

2 See the article by Sanjay Subrahmanyam, “Dreaming an Indo-Persian Empire in South Asia, 1740–1800,” in Explorations in Connected History: Mughals and Franks, ed. idem (Delhi, 2005), pp. 173–210, a fascinating counterfactual musing, posing the question, what would have happened if Nadir Shah had not only invaded North India in 1739 (which he did) but stayed on (which he didn’t, but which he might have done). Th is in turn serves as a starting point to challenge the teleological assumption that history of necessity evolved towards the creation of a nation encompassing the whole of South Asia and only South Asia. Instead, the cultural and economic links between India and its northern neighbours are drawn out, which might well have led to the formation of a very diff erent polity, encompassing North India (but not the south), Persia, Afghanistan and the southern fringes of Central Asia. 3 First steps in this direction have been taken in Pierre Chuvin, ed., Inde—Asie Centrale: Routes du commerce et des idées (Tashkent, 1996). On trade relations see Jos Gommans, Th e Rise of the Indo-Afghan Empire (Leiden, 1995). 4 Cornelia Bohn, Clothing as Medium of Communication, available on: www.unilu .ch/documente/docus_rf/clothing_as_medium_of_communication.pdf (accessed Feb- ruary 22, 2007). the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 251 is a reliable indicator of the community a person or a group claims to belong to. Th is community may be the Islamic umma, but it may also be regionally, ethnically, linguistically or socially defi ned. Focusing on the Indian Muslims, this paper aims to show the translocal movement of headgears and thereby to identify shift s in the boundaries of the global systems as well as in their cultural centres. Th e fi rst part looks at the early Mughal turban and tries to situate it in its Persian and Central Asian context; it then proceeds to consider the localisation of this global model in the turban of the emperor Akbar, which became the model for the Mughal elite, both Muslims and Hin- dus, for more than two centuries. Th e second part follows the loss of political and cultural hegemony of the Mughal Empire in the eighteenth century through the emergence of local traditions in headgear, which served to identify ethnical factions and rising provincial powers. Th e third part looks at the advent of the British colonial power, bringing with it a diff erent sartorial history and reference system. It shows how the British proceeded from adaptation by wearing turbans themselves, to the highly exclusionary symbol of the sun helmet. Th e fourth and last part follows the search for an Islamic identity on the part of the Indian Muslims under and aft er colonial rule, leading fi rst to spreading an unostentatious and plain turban, then to the adoption of the Ottoman fez. Some concluding remarks point to the development of a new global Islamic fashion, based on a literal interpretation of the hadith, the traditions of the Prophet considered normative. Th is interpretation nowadays is diff used widely through the internet.

Localising the Persianate Turban

Babur, the prince, who was to become the fi rst Mughal emperor of India, was the fi ft h in descent from Timur. It was as a Central Asian ruler that he saw himself and that he was perceived by others. In spite of the fact that his conquests led him to the south—fi rst to Kabul and then across the passes of the Hindukush to North India—it was the recovery of Samarqand which remained his life’s aim and the focal point of his mental map.5 Th e Chaghatai-Turk identity that this fi rst generation of the Mughal elite cultivated was profoundly impregnated

5 Richard C. Foltz, Mughal India and Central Asia (Karachi, 1998). 252 margrit pernau by Persian court culture, an infl uence which became even more deeply entrenched in the next generation, when Babur’s son Humayun suffered a series of defeat against the Afghan rulers of North India and had to take refuge at the Isfahan court of Shah Tahmasp. Unfortunately, contemporary Central Asian miniature portraits seem to be rare. An illustration of the diwan of Hafi z, originating from Herat in the early sixteenth century shows the men wearing the bulb-like Persian turbans, wrapped around a cap which ended in a stiff sheath, and, as a sign of distinction, ornamented with a feather.6 Th is is the turban Babur, Humayun and their entourage continued wearing in India. In an environment perceived as foreign, it marked their belonging to the Central Asian and Persianate cultural universe.7 Religion certainly did play a role—they were very well aware of being Muslims and thus distinct from their new Hindu subjects. However, their main opponents in India were not the Hindus, but those Muslim dynasties, mainly of Afghan origin, already settled in the country. From the early Mughal paintings onward the iconography depicting the fi rst two emperors with this turban remained constant.8 A miniature held by the National Museum at Delhi shows the crossing of a river, painting a vivid portrayal of Babur and his entourage. Th e entire upper half of the picture is taken up by the boat of the emperor, showing him sitting cross-legged under a richly decorated canopy, accompanied by his son and high dignitaries. Th e lower half shows the eff orts of the army fi ghting against the waves and a particularly vicious looking crocodile. Although the painting dates from the late sixteenth century, long aft er the sartorial style of the Mughal rulers had changed, most of the men are still depicted with the bulb-like Central Asian turban, either in white or in subdued colours, while Babur, his son and

6 Th e prince entertained on a terrace, from a manuscript of a diwan by Hafi z, dated 1523, Herat, http://www.asia.si.edu/collections, © Smithonian Institution. 7 Unfortunately, I have so far not been able to trace written sources for the early times, which would permit us to take into consideration the meaning the actors themselves accorded to their diff erent headgear. While a quick skimming of the memoirs of the fi rst Mughal rulers did not reveal any references to turbans, malfuzat, collections of the sayings of Sufi saints and fatwa collections might prove more useful. Th is however calls for the work of a specialist in medieval Indian history. 8 Babur crossing River Son. A folio from the Babur-nama, dated 1598. Daljeet, Mughal and Deccani Paintings from the Collection of the National Museum (Delhi, 1999), p. 38. the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 253 one of the high nobles are distinguished by the traditional turban with the stiff sheath and the ornamental feather. Th e Mughals always remained aware of their Central Asian origins, which bestowed them distinction in a social system in which the essential diff erence was held to be between those Muslims (the ashraf ) who immigrated from the Islamic heartlands—Central Asia, Afghanistan, Persia and to a very much lesser extent and rarely directly, but rather through Persia or Central Asia, Arabia—and those who converted locally (the ajlaf ).9 Miniatures depicting the genealogy of the dynasty, as in the painting of 1658, which shows the dynastic line from Timur to Aurangzeb, therefore take great care to visualise this status.10 Th e Mughal empire almost until its demise formed part of a Cen- tral Asian global world system, drawing a permanent fl ow of immigrants—soldiers, artists, scholars, saints and poets. Th eir infl uence is shown in the architecture and layout of a city like Delhi as much as in monuments like the Taj Mahal at Agra. It can be traced in the genealogies of the major Sufi orders as well as in the status Persian held as the language of the court and courtly society, but also of poetry and scholarship far into the colonial period. Having learned his art from a teacher born and bred in Persia was one of the claims to excellence brought forth by the poet Mirza Ghalib in the nineteenth century. However, the Mughal dynasty simultaneously struck deep roots in India. Akbar, the third emperor, to this day is known for his eff orts to bring forth a cohesive elite composed of Hindus, notably the rulers of the Rajput states, as well as Muslims, who were united by reference to a common Indo-Persian culture. In place of the close ties his family traditionally had cultivated with the Naqshbandi Sufi s, he favoured the Chishtis, who had opened up to the encounter with Hindu saints and

9 Imtiaz Ahmad, “Th e Ashraf-Ajlaf Dichotomy in Muslim Social Structure in India,” Indian Economic and Social History Review 3 (1966), 268–278. For the transformation of these categories see also Margrit Pernau, “Transkulturelle Geschichte und das Problem der universalen Begriff e,” in Area Studies und die Welt: Weltregionen und neue Globalgeschichte, ed. Birgit Schäbler (Wien, 2007), pp. 117–150. 10 A Dynastic Line from Timur to Aurangzeb, composition ca. 1685, Nour Founda- tion no. 874, in Sheila Canby, Humayun’s Garden Party: Princes of the House of Timur and Early Mughal Painting (Bombay, 1994), pp. 88–89. Th e painting shows Timur (Sahib-e Qiran) in the middle, Babur is the third to his left , Humayun the third to his right. While they are depicted with the Central Asian turban, the painter seems well aware of the change in fashion occurring over the centuries, as their descendants are correctly shown with the turban of their own time. 254 margrit pernau were held in veneration by both Hindus and Muslims. He patronised Indian artists, musicians, painters and artisans and his tomb remains a powerful symbol of the bringing together of the Central Asian concept of the garden tomb, Persianate architecture and Hindu craft smanship. Th ese developments are refl ected in the headgear. Under Akbar, the large Central Asian turban became much smaller and moved towards the back of the head. Its folds were held together by a strap, which by its elaborate ornamentation became an indicator of the social rank of the individual. A miniature from the Akbarnama, dated 1604, shows Akbar hearing a petition. While the petitioner by his beard and turban seems to be a Persian, Akbar and his entourage wear their turbans in the new style, which no longer permits a diff erentiation according to ethnic or religious criteria within the elite.11 Th e origins of this turban still remain to be researched more in detail. However, contemporary Rajasthani miniatures seem to indicate that Akbar might have been infl uenced by the sartorial style of his Rajput allies—possibly the Mughal turban could be traced back to the traditional headgear of the rulers of Jaipur and Jodhpur.12 Within a few years, this turban became dominant as the courtly headgear not only at Akbar’s court and throughout Rajasthan, but also far into the south of the subcontinent, in the Deccan.13 Although some changes occurred in the following centuries—initiated by the ruler and taken up by the nobility—notably in the breadth of the strap and in the size and shape of the rear folds, the cultural hegemony of the Mughal court held sway until well into the eighteenth century.14 If the symbolism of the headgear tells us anything at all, the elites of the Mughal Empire did not see themselves primarily as part of a world defi ned by Islam and centred in Arabia, but of a translocal and trans- imperial universe, based on the reference to Persianate culture, albeit in

11 Akbar hears a petition, from an Akbarnama, ca. 1604, http://www.asia.si.edu/ collections, © Smithonian Institution. 12 Miniatures at the National Museum in Delhi. An expert on Rajasthani history and painting, before and during the Mughal period might certainly provide further elucidation on this point. 13 Daljeet, Mughal and Deccani Paintings from the Collection of the National Museum. 14 Hermann Goetz, “Kostüm und Mode an den indischen Fürstenhöfen in der Großmogul-Zeit (16.–19. Jahrhundert): Ein Beitrag zur Chronologie und Kulturge- schichte der Indischen Miniatur-Malerei,” Jahrbuch der asiatischen Kunst 1 (1924), 67–101. the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 255 a strongly localised version. It has to be left to further research to spell out in how far this sense of belonging mirrored a system of interaction and whether it linked up with communication patterns of knowledge, directions of migration and trade routes. Although the Mughal elite was numerically dominated by Muslims, it was held together not by religion, but by a culture potentially open to other faiths. Notably the Mughlai turban was certainly not seen as a Muslim symbol—we even come across miniatures depicting Lord Krishna wearing it.15

Diversifi cation and Individualisation

Th e Mughal Empire reached its greatest extent with the conquest and incorporation of the Deccan by Aurangzeb, Akbar’s great-grandson (1618–1707). His religious policy is to this day the subject of intensive historiographical debate and it is still not possible to properly distinguish between the historical Aurangzeb and his image as an orthodox and fanatical Muslim, bent on subjugating the Hindus. Be it as a result of a reversal of the policy aiming at the creation of a composite elite or as a result of the economic overstretching of the empire, the fi ssures which had developed during his reign led to a rapid disintegration aft er his death, facilitated by a number of rapidly changing and weak rulers.16 What is interesting in respect to our topic is that the factions at court and the revived or newly created principalities (notably the kingdom of Awadh, the state of Hyderabad, the confederation of the Marathas and the Rajput states), almost immediately began to challenge the Mughal cultural hegemony of the courtly turban. It would be a most rewarding task to compare the detailed portraits of the assemblies of the nobility at the imperial court, which pay careful attention to the attire of the nobles and usually include the names of the individuals, in order to develop a typology of the headgears. As far as can be assumed at the moment, the tendency to demarcate ethnic and regional identity by diff erent ways of tying the turban, in most cases however without completely relinquishing the Mughal pattern, seems to have started in the

15 National Museum, Delhi, ed., Miniature Paintings of Rajasthan (Delhi, n.d.). 16 For an introduction into the diff erent interpretations brought forth as explanations for the decline of the Mughal Empire, see John F. Richards, Th e Mughal Empire (Cambridge, 1993). 256 margrit pernau eighteenth century already. Th is made it possible to distinguish a noble from Jodhpur from one hailing from Jaipur or Udaipur by his turban— not to speak of the Maratha turban or of Hyderabad and Awadh, which altogether gave up the turban in favour of a cap- or hat-like headwear. Th is development reached its height in nineteenth century British policy towards the so-called Indian states, those 500-odd principalities which were not incorporated into the system of direct rule, but governed by indigenous rulers, linked to the British empire by a sub- sidiary alliance based on treaties and controlled by a British Resident. In an eff ort to re-traditionalise these principalities and to demarcate their separate identity, the British paid much attention to upholding (or aiding in the invention of ) distinct headgears. Th e offi cial painting of the darbar on the occasion of the coronation of the British Emperor of India in 1911 is a wonderful suggestion of this creation of oriental magnifi cence and diversity. It underlined the diff erence between the oriental rulers and the political culture of the West, but also their distinctiveness from one another, which denied the idea of a unifi ed Indian nation.17 While this movement led to a diversifi cation according to regional, ethnic and at times religious criteria, a second movement occurred simultaneously at the centre. Here, the cultural hegemony of the Mughal turban since the eighteenth century gave way to individualisation even at the very centre. A miniature showing Shah Akbar II (r. 1807–1837) in court reveals an extraordinary diversity of headgear. While the ruler himself still held to a smallish version of the traditional turban, almost disappearing behind the broad and jewelled strap, even his sons standing next to him in front of the throne have taken to wearing a cap, though decorated with the traditional jewelled strap.18 Bahadur Shah, his eldest son, continued wearing this cap aft er his accession. Notwith- standing the cultural rivalry between Delhi and Lakhnau, this seems to have been the same cap, panels of four, sometimes fi ve identical parts sewn together (symbolising the panchia, the fi ve members of the Prophet Muhammad’s family), made fashionable by the Nawabs of

17 See Charles Allen, and Sharada Dwivedi, Lives of the Indian Princes (London, 1984), frontispiece. 18 Court of Akbar II, ca. 1825, www.columbia.edu/itc/mealac/pritchett/00routesdata/ 1700_1799/latermughals/akbar2nd/darbar.jpg (accessed April 22, 2008). the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 257

Awadh.19 Perhaps the Shi’a inclinations of the Mughal ruler may have determined this decision. While most of the nobles still donned some kind of a turban at court and for formal occasions, for everyday wear a formless cap became the usual headgear, either similar to the one worn by Bahadur Shah, or, especially in the heat, a small and thin cap made of muslin. Th e Central Asian world still held its place on the mental map of the Indian Muslim elite.20 Even under British rule the boundaries were never really closed, neither to trade nor to the wandering of scholars and religious leaders. At least until the middle of the nineteenth century, and at least in North India and in Hyderabad, Persian remained the language of the elite, even aft er the British abolished its use as offi cial language in 1835 and cut into its patronage. Nevertheless, compared to former centuries, these contacts were greatly reduced. Central Asia, but also the Indo-Persian culture of the Mughals were becoming objects of nostalgia, distant memories of a mythic past, but less and less of a lived reality—the fact that the poet Mirza Ghalib was so proud of his Persian teacher also shows how rare immigrants of the fi rst generation had become in nineteenth century Delhi. Two new global systems vied for the allegiance of the Indian Muslims, the colonial world, and a new form of Arabo-centric Islam. Both brought with them new headgears.

Turban, Top Hat and Sun Helmet

Recent research on European fashion in Europe has focused on the transition between the French Revolution and the 1830s.21 During this time, the clothing style of the nobility, its frocks made of costly and colourful material, its short trousers and silk stockings, were replaced as an ideal by the sober dressing of the middle classes, fi nding its expression in their grey or black frocks and long trousers. To this corresponded the replacing of the tricorne by the top hat.

19 Abdul Halim Sharar, Lucknow: Th e Last Phase of an Oriental Culture, trans. and ed. E.S. Harcourt and Fakhir Hussain (Delhi, 1994). 20 For the relative importance given to news from the diff erent world regions see Margrit Pernau, “Th e Delhi Urdu Akhbar: Between Persian Akhbarat and English Newspapers,” Annual of Urdu Studies 18 (2003), 1–27. 21 Sabina Brändli, ‘Der herrlich biedere Mann’: Vom Siegeszug des bürgerlichen Herrenanzuges im 19. Jahrhundert (Zürich, 1998). 258 margrit pernau

Th ough permitting for some local variations, these sartorial symbols quickly transcended national boundaries—the top hat marked the line which divided the new middle class male from the nobility as well as from the subaltern classes, from women, whose passion for fi nery contrasted with male sobriety and from the Orientals, whose colourful dressing showed their lack both of civilisation and of real manliness. Th ese changes took time to reach India. Longer than in Europe, colonial offi cers still subscribed to the life style of the nobility, not least in their dressing. A red frock, a waistcoat of brocade, silken stockings, wig and tricorne marked them out as Europeans and nobles at the same time.22 However, these early colonial offi cers were but ambivalent propaga- tors of the new, Western globality. Without relinquishing their claim to power, they at least partially adapted to Mughal courtly culture, speaking and writing Persian fl uently to the extent of participating at poetical gatherings, and adapting to the life-style and the dress-code of the local nobility. At least for informal occasions, the British preferred the loose garments made of light fabric, which their Indian counterparts wore and which were so much more comfortable than the tight coats made for a colder climate. Th e hubble-bubble and the turban completed their outfi t as local nobles.23 Th e evangelical movement, which reached North India in the 1830s, not only reminded the British of their Christian identity, and thus re-enforced the cultural boundary between them and the Indians, but also became one of the most important agencies for middle class values. On a miniature of 1825, which shows Akbar Shah II on his throne, the British resident for the fi rst time appears in a black frock and white collar, thus clearly demarcated both from the ruler and from

22 See the portrait of William Fullerton, ca. 1760–63, in Barbara Schmitz, ed., Aft er the Great Mughals: Painting in Delhi and the Regional Courts in the 18th and 19th Centuries (Mumbai, 2002), p. 39. 23 Wombwell, ca. 1760, in Schmitz, ed., Aft er the Great Mughals, p. 53. For the culture of this generation of colonial offi cers see William Dalrymple, Th e White Mughals: Love and Betrayal in 18th Century India (London, 2002). However, the cultural adap- tion, which Dalrymple so colourfully depicts, did not take place in a power-free vacuum, but formed part of the early colonial eff ort to rule the subcontinent at minimal costs, therefore preferring a system of indirect rule based on alliances to formal annexation and administration. the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 259 the courtiers.24 Very soon aft erwards the Napoleonic hat was to be replaced by the top hat, which remained part of the offi cial colonial dress code until the end of the empire25—the British rulers of India had eff ectively become part of the new global order. Unlike the Central Asian and the Indo-Persian translocal cultures, the British globality was highly ambivalent with regard to its own uni- versality and the inclusion or exclusion of the elites it had subjugated. Colonial offi cers certainly interpreted the top hat as a sign of their own cultural superiority with regard to the turban wearing Orientals. “Dressing for dinner in the bush”,26 keeping to the rigorous British dress code under all situations and never giving in to the temptation of wearing more comfortable clothes prevented all adaptation to regional circumstances and thus a localisation of the global standards and the evolution of a common frame of reference between ruler and ruled. Colonial offi cers were expected, and aft er the 1830s did keep to their own side of the boundary which separated them from their indigenous subjects. In the name of the civilising mission Indians were asked to take over the new values—manliness, sobriety and cleanliness—symbolised in the top hat. At the same time, however, those who followed the call and dressed like Englishmen, crossing and challenging the boundary, which divided coloniser and colonised, were despised for their ridiculous attempts at aping the British and depreciated as a de- nationalised minority, representing no one but themselves. ‘Moder- nity’ and ‘civility’ were the etiquettes for a new global order to which access was very unequal. Th e triumph of the sun helmet since the 1870s therefore refers to new medical insights on the danger of sun strokes only at a fi rst glance. Far more important was its symbolic value, both as a demarcation of the danger the Orient held for Europeans, and as a much more eff ective visualisation of the boundary separating the British and the Indians than the top hat had ever been.27

24 Akbar Shah II receiving the British Resident, Charles Metcalfe, in: Mildred Archer, Company Paintings: Indian Paintings of the British Period, (Victoria and Albert Museum, Indian Art Series) (London, 1992), p. 162. 25 Th e Delhi Sketchbook, vol. 1 (1850). 26 Helen Callaway, “Dressing for Dinner in the Bush: Rituals of Self-defi nition and British Imperial Authority,” in Dress and Gender: Making and Meaning in Cultural Contexts, eds. Ruth Barnes and Joanne B. Eicher (New York, 1991), pp. 232–248. 27 Francis A. de Caro and Rosan A. Jordan, “Topi: Personal Narratives, Ritual and the Sun Helmet as a Symbol,” Western Folklore (1984), 232–248. 260 margrit pernau

In Search for an Islamic Identity

Above it has been shown how the Central Asian/Persianate turban lost its position as courtly headgear at the time of the Mughal emperor Akbar. Actual portraits of religious scholars and Sufi saints are very rare, the ban on images naturally holding more importance for them then for the worldly elite. However, the emperor or one of the princes visiting a saint or otherwise, Sufi sheikhs or scholars coming to court, were traditional motifs oft en reproduced.28 While ascetics, both Hindus and Muslims, are oft en shown either without headgear or wearing a simple cap, scholars and Sufi s of the established orders held on to the Central Asian/Persianate turban, even aft er it went out of fashion at the court. No less than the beard, a large turban, usually in white or in muted colours, wrapped in regular folds, was the insignia of the orthodox in the Mughal Empire, mark- ing their ongoing integration into an Islamic world system. Th ough processes of localisation of spiritual and worldly knowledge certainly did take place—and the encounters between Sufi s and Hindu saints were by no means limited to the Chishti order—they never reached the same level of integration as the courtly culture. But it is of central importance that this Islamic world system, the integration into which formed an important part of the identity of the scholars, was not the Arabo-centric one, but had its focus on Persia and Central Asia. From the middle of the eighteenth century, religion’s place within the social system, but also the fundamental principles of interpretation of the canonical texts, underwent a sea change, in India no less than in much of the Islamic world. Contrary to the widely held opinion that it was in pre-modern times that religion had its greatest infl u- ence, slowly giving way to secularisation, it was now that Islamic piety became important to the everyday life of an increasing number of individuals. Moreover, this piety increasingly was no longer based on rituals hallowed by tradition, but on a literal reading of the canonical texts. Th e history of the theological arguments, of the ascent of the manqulat, favouring the exegesis of canonical texts over the exertion of the reasoning faculty, and of the renewal of the hadith scholarship

28 Jahangir preferring a Sufi Sheikh to Kings (detail), 1615–1618, www.asia.si.edu/ collections, © Smithonian Institution; A visit to the ascetic, Indian Painting, Mughal School, 17th century, no. 7170, Musée national des Arts Asiatiques—Guimet, Paris. the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 261 is well known and need not be repeated here.29 In India these changes are associated with the school of Shah Wali Ullah and the Naqshbandi mujaddidiyya. What is important for our argument is what this tells us about the transformation of the Islamic world system. Two developments deserve special mention: First, while the scholars, at least the elite among them, had certainly known Arabic and had been able to read and teach the classical texts and commentaries, the language of polite society, the language constituting the cultural reference system and binding a heterogeneous elite together and linking it with the cultural centres across the borders had been Persian. From the second half of the eighteenth century onward and even more pronouncedly in the nineteenth century, Persian lost this place—to the local Urdu as a language of everyday communication and of literature, to English as the new language to gain access to power and jobs, and to Arabic as the sacred language, the symbol of Islamic identity and the new medium of communication among Muslims from all regions of the world. Th e more Persian became associated with a decadent and eff eminised nobility, lost in the recitation of poetry, lax in the performance of their religious duties and unable to lead the community of believers, the more Arabic stood for manly piety and the belonging to the worldwide umma.30 Second, the increasing emphasis which was placed on the veneration of the Prophet Muhammad led to the attempt to follow his example, as described in the hadith, in the minutest details of everyday life. Wearing a turban now no longer was a way of referring back to a Central Asian homeland and holding on to the community of those who claimed the same buzurg, the same spiritual and genealogical forefathers, but resulted from a conscious decision to cover one’s head in the way hallowed by the Prophet. As the scholarly and the courtly turban had already grown apart since the sixteenth century, this change in symbolism could take place without much of a corresponding change

29 See introduction of Barbara Metcalf, Islamic Revival in British India: Deoband, 1860–1900 (Princeton, 1982); Saiyid Athar Abas Rizvi, Shah Wali Ullah and His Time (Canberra, 1980); idem, Shah Abd al-Aziz: Puritanism, Sectarian, Polemics and Jihad (Canberra, 1982); Jamal Malik, Islamische Gelehrtenkultur in Nordindien: Entwick- lungsgeschichte und Tendenzen am Beispiel von Lucknow (Leiden, 1997). 30 Marc Gaborieau, “Late Persian, Early Urdu: Th e Case of ‘Wahhabi’ Literature (1919–1857),” in Confl uences of Culture: French Contributions to Indo-Persian, ed. Françoise Delvoye (Delhi, 1994), pp. 170–195. 262 margrit pernau in the outward appearance. Th e turban of the scholars now at the same time consciously distinguished them from the Persianised nobility and marked them as sober members of the new middle class and as pious Muslims. Based on a tradition quoted by the medieval hadith scholar as-Sakhawi (1427–97) in his al-Maqasid al-hasana, it was the turban which now was held to constitute the dividing line between Muslims and unbelievers31 and the supreme visualisation of the Islamic identity. Th is symbolism worked out very well in most of the Muslim countries and also in India, as far as the division between the Muslims and the colonial power was concerned: the turban and the hat became the symbols demarcating the boundary between ruler and ruled. Th e ongoing struggle on this boundary is exquisitely played out in the novel Ibn ul Waqt, by the most famous Urdu novelist of the late nineteenth century, Nazir Ahmad.32 Like the author, the protagonist is an alumnus of the Delhi College, an institution hailed as the meeting ground between Oriental and Western knowledge. While he is drawn to British culture at an early age already, his family background and economic independence for some years prevent his becoming a moral slave to the colonial rulers, attempting at aping them. During the revolt of 1857 he saves the life of a wounded Englishman, Noble Sahib, nomen est omen. Soon a close friendship links both the men and Noble Sahib convinces Ibn ul Waqt that he is called to reform the Muslim community, a reform which in British eyes has of necessity to go hand in hand with its Anglicisation. Taken in by the arguments of his new friend and in spite of the warnings of his family and Muslim friends, Ibn ul Waqt gives up his house in the old city, moves to the cantonment and attempts to take up friendly intercourse with the Brit- ish community. He invites them to dinner and, most importantly, he adapts to their manner of dressing: “Th is was like a baptism, not into Christianity, but into Anglicism.”33 Th e Imam warns him that although this sartorial style is not forbidden by Islam, he nevertheless should keep in mind that “one who makes his resemblance with a particular community becomes one of them.”34 Ibn ul Waqt is confi dent that he

31 Fazlur Rahman Azmi, Turban, Kurta, Topee: In the Light of the Sunnah and Practice of the Sahaba and Tabieen (Delhi, 2003). 32 Nazir Ahmad, Ibn ul Waqt, trans. Muhammad Zakir (as: Th e Son of the Moment) (Hyderabad, 2002). 33 Ahmad, Ibn al Waqt, p. 35. 34 Ibid., p. 63. the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 263 will be able to keep apart religion and lifestyle, but the British clothes prevent him from being regular in his call to prayer: they are not cut in a way to permit a thorough ablution before the namaz and their tightness makes it awkward to bow and kneel properly. Th erefore, Ibn ul Waqt prays less and less and fi nally turns to an enlightened theism. Th is leads to the Muslims of Delhi no longer considering him as one of them, but rather as the founder of a new sect. Th e integration into the British community, on the other hand, is hardly less problematic. Only the personal infl uence of Noble Sahib had so far prevented criticism. Once he returned to England, those British gained ascendancy, who resented the crossing of the sartorial boundaries by a native: “[Ibn ul Waqt] wants to become an English Sahib. Maybe he does not think so, but we take it to be impertinence.”35 As always in the highly didactic novels of Nazir Ahmad, a happy end follows: Ibn ul Waqt returns where he belongs and forthwith, once again, wears the turban. While the turban thus was highly successful in demarcating the Muslims from their Christian colonial masters, it could not perform as a visual distinction between the Muslims and the Hindus, who also wore turbans. Th ough the turbans of the Rajputs or the Marathas were quite diff erent from the scholarly Muslim turban, this was an ethnic, rather than a religious diff erence. Muslims, Hindus, and even native Christians with a similar social and regional background could not be told apart by their headgear.36 It is here that the entangled history of the turban joins the equally entangled history of the fez. Th e origin of the fez cannot be established with certainty. Th e name would seem to indicate that this headgear had fi rst been worn in the Maghreb. Th is would tally with the story that it had been brought to Istanbul from the western Mediterranean by the Ottoman fl eet in the early decades of the nineteenth century.37 However, similar caps had also traditionally been worn by the Greek,

35 Ibid., p. 185. 36 Compare the pictures of Maulawi Muhammad Zaka Ullah (Sunni Muslim), in C.F. Andrews, Zaka Ullah of Delhi, ed. and intro. Mushirul Hasan and Margrit Pernau (Delhi, 2003), and Master Ramchandra (Kayastha Hindu, converted to Christianity) in Ewin Jacob, A Memoir of Professor Yesudas Ramchandra of Delhi (Kanpur, 1902). 37 Donald Quataert, “Clothing Laws, State and Society in the Ottoman Empire, 1720–1829,” International Journal of Middle East Studies 29 (1997), 403–425, reference to 412. 264 margrit pernau

Albanian and Bosnian peasants.38 As part of the move to eradicate the importance of ethnic and religious diff erences and loyalties within the Ottoman Bureaucracy, the fez was made the obligatory headgear for all offi cers in 1829. Only the ulama were henceforth allowed to wear their traditional turbans. While the turban now carried exclusiv- ist Islamic connotations, the fez was a symbol, which was perceived as both inclusive and religiously neutral.39 Th is however changed, once the Ottoman sultan began to emphasise his position as the universal Caliph, claiming allegiance from all of the world’s Muslims and becoming the rallying point for many of them. In the eyes of the European powers and most of the non-Arab Sunni Muslims, Ottoman, and Muslim identities were increasingly seen as coinciding. As an Ottoman symbol, the fez, too, became Islamised and transformed into the appropriate headgear for all Muslims. Th is held true for large parts of the British and French colonial armies, where the fez became part of the Muslims’ uniform. Its real triumph, however, came with the spreading of the Pan-Islamic movement. In India the fez fulfi lled the Muslims’ need for a type of headgear which distinguished them from both the Hindus and the British, while being at the same time close enough to the Western hat not to off end the colonizers’ tastes and susceptibilities. It permitted them to imagine themselves as participating in the global modernity, epitomised by their British rulers (and adopted and adapted through the Ottoman reforms).40 At the same time it visualised their belonging to the worldwide community of believers, to an Islamic world-system, which, though no longer Central Asian and Persian, still was not unequivocally Arab, but centred in Istanbul. As such it was adopted fi rst by Saiyid Ahmad Khan and the Aligarh movement in the 1870s. He held that the future of the Indian Mus- lim community lay in a close collaboration with the British colonial power, which would permit it to catch up with modern scientifi c and

38 Gabriella Schubert, Kleidung als Zeichen: Kopfb edeckungen im Donau-Balkan- Raum (Wiesbaden, 1993). For a slightly later period see also the excellent work of Mary Neuburger, Th e Orient Within: Muslim Minorities and the Negotiation of Nationhood in Modern Bulgaria (Ithaca, 2004). 39 Quataert, “Clothing Laws.” 40 Selçuk Esenbel, “Th e Anguish of Civilized Behavior: Th e Use of Western Cultural Forms in the Everyday Lives of the Meiji Japanese and the Ottoman Turks during the Nineteenth Century,” Japan Review 5 (1994), 145–185. the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 265 cultural developments and thus strengthen its position as a minority in the Indian subcontinent.41 In India, the fez experienced its widest diff usion during the time of the Khilafat movement, which brought the Muslims into a coalition with Mahatma Gandhi at the end of the First World War and merged the struggle against the British colonial power at home with the fi ght for the revision of the treaty of Sevres and the restoration of the Arab lands to the Turkish Sultan and Caliph. Th is commitment for the Caliph as the imagined symbol of the worldwide Islamic community was certainly important for the Indian Muslims. However, this importance accorded to the Caliph as a symbol was not matched by too great a knowledge or even interest in the actual developments taking place in the Ottoman Empire. Th e Khilafatists, in their very great majority, were as blissfully aware of confl icts between the rulers in Istanbul and Arab nationalists, as they were completely taken by surprise by the Kemalist drive towards secularism and laicism. Th e importance of the Caliph was primarily, if not exclusively, symbolic. He provided a rallying point, with which all the diff erent schools, groups and regions of Indian Muslims could identify and under the banner of which they would enter the anti-colonial struggle. More than a Pan-Islamic symbol, for the Indian Muslims he was a Pan- Indian one,42 the local once again in the same move referring to the global, and deeply transforming it. Unequivocal as the Ottoman symbols seemed to the Indian Muslims— the Caliph no less than the fez—in reality they were highly contested: by the Arabs, who rejected them as signs of the Turkish dominations and not less by the Kemalist Turks themselves, who fought to distance themselves from the Ottoman past. Th ough the Indian Khilafat movement lingered on longer than the Caliphate and the fez even survived until the eve of independence, the Pan-Islamic community with a centre at Istanbul, which they had stood for, had ceased to exist.43

41 David Lelyveld, Aligarh’s First Generation: Muslim Solidarity in British India (Delhi, 1996 [1978]). 42 Gail Minault, Th e Khilafat Movement: Religious Symbolism and Political Mobili- zation in India (Delhi, 1982). 43 Hamza Alavi, “Ironies of History: Contradictions of the Khilafat Movement,” in Islam, Community and the Nation: Muslim Identities in South Asia and Beyond, ed. Mushirul Hasan (Delhi, 1998), pp. 25–56. 266 margrit pernau

Conclusion

Th ough the fez is no longer worn in India today, it has remained the iconographic symbol identifying the Indian Muslims.44 But what do they wear on their heads? What is the headgear—if any—which distinguishes them from their neighbours and marks their Islamic identity? And to which communities does it refer them? At least in urban settings, the use of any kind of head covering has drastically gone down, for Muslims no less than for Hindus. Except for the consciously pious, Muslims wear a cap, usually white and crocheted, only when reading the Koran, praying or entering a mosque or shrine.45 While lower classes may wrap a shawl round their head, a proper and elaborate turban (in diff erent shapes) would point to a Sikh, a Rajasthani or to some Hindu religious leader, but only in few regions, as for instance in Kashmir, to a Muslim. At the same time books, pamphlets and above all the internet increase their eff orts to model pious Muslim behaviour on the traditions of the Prophet. Collections of hadith are easily available, especially focusing on the headgear of the Prophet, on the length of his turban, on its colour, on whether to keep a cap under the turban and how to wrap it, so that its loose ends come to hang between the shoul- ders, as the Prophet himself favoured.46 Th is might point to attempts to create a new Islamic world system, whose members’ outlook, everyday life, dress and headgear would be purged of all localisations and conform to a global and uniform Islamic standard, based on the model of the Prophet and highly Arabo-centric. As long as our research on Muslim cultures and societies focuses on theological and normative texts, evidences abound for the existence of an Islamic world-system, held together by the primary importance of religion.

44 Shahid Amin, “Representing the Musulman: Th en and Now, Now and Then,” in Subaltern Studies XII. Muslims, Dalits and the Fabrication of History, eds. Shail Mayaram, M.S.S. Pandian, and Ajay Skaria (Delhi, 2005), pp. 1–36. 45 I have so far not been able to trace the origin of this crocheted cap. While a cap in a similar shape was already popular in nineteenth century Delhi, it was at that time sewn of muslin. 46 Azmi, Turban, Kurta, Topee (several versions of which are on the internet); Shaikh Muhammad Hisham Kabbani, Questions on Islamic Dress and Head-dress for Men, http://sunnah.org/fi qh/islamic_dress.htm; http://shariahboard.com/fatwa/ Miscellaneous/i.html (accessed April 22, 2008). the indian muslims between turban, hat and fez 267

Social practices, however, may well point in quite a diff erent direction. Th e rising importance accorded to correct headgear and the attempts to mark people as Muslims by the way they dress, thus constituting a visualising global identity for all Muslims, is refl ected only to a very limited extent in their daily attire (Friday prayers being, of course, a case apart). If the sartorial code of the 140 million Indian Muslims counts for anything, if the identity markers they wear (or don’t wear) on their head tell us something about their sense of belonging, their wish to form part of an exclusively or even primarily Islamic globality, at the moment is not very strong—at least not strong enough to over- ride competing identities.

RECLAIMING THE AFRICAN CITY: THE WORLD AND THE TOWNSHIP

Terence Ranger Oxford

Introduction

Th e twenty-fi rst century has been hailed as the century of the Southern African city. Southern African cities are bursting through their colonial bonds; stimulated as well as distorted by neo-liberal globalisation. Th ey are not only bigger than colonial cities; it is said in the dominant literature, but qualitatively diff erent. Colonial cities were the receptacles of regional labour fl ows. Contemporary cities are the receptacles of global ones. Th e African populations of colonial cities could never stabilise nor create local urban identities. But contemporary African cities are creating multiple urban cultures. By contrast to their regional predecessors they are simultaneously essentially global and intensely local. It is the argument of this chapter, however, that the novelty of contemporary African cities is being over-stated. Th e regional model of the colonial city was always an intellectual construct rather than a refl ection of reality. I shall argue that colonial cities, too, were both global and local and that the methods and questions of the new urban scholarship, if applied to them, would prove immensely fertile.

Th e Propositions of the Recent Literature on African Cities

One of the many collective studies now under way on the African city is the Nordic Research Programme on ‘Cities, Governance and Civil Society in Africa’. A chapter in its fi rst volume is suggestively entitled “Between Ghetto and Globe”. Abdou Maliq Simone writes: Th e globalisation of economic transactions, on the other hand, creates new urban arrangements, which compels cities to consider their prospects, complementary to those of urban entities in other countries, rather than securing their development within national space. Erstwhile 270 terence ranger

connections between physical [ . . . ] and social allegiances are less rooted in specifi c localities than spread across multiple territories, sectors and nations.1 Simone concentrates on the ever-widening networks of informal and criminal activity within Africa itself and their connections with the global economy. He shows, for instance, how the Sufi brotherhoods in Dakar use “extensive networks to control much of the mercantile sector of the Sahel and more recently, the highly lucrative trade in con- sumables and electronics from Asia.”2 He describes how the inner city of Johannesburg has “become a staging area for individuals from Fran- cophone countries, Ethiopia, Somalia, Nigeria, Ghana and Kenya.”3 He brings his two national case studies together by remarking that “Soninke traders originally based in Dakar . . . [whom] I interviewed over ten years ago in Bangkok had built up substantial contacts in the port of Cape Town.”4 Simone concludes: If cities are increasingly characterised by parallel realities, Johannesburg harbours chasms in-between them, which, in turn, are being shaped as conduits that in small but signifi cant ways contribute to a re-spatialisa- tion of intra-continental contact . . . [ . . . ] to form an integrated urban system [of Johannesburg] but an almost built-in ability to ‘recognise’ where the city is located within a global urban system and within Africa itself. Johannesburg as an urban system seems to act like an ‘immigrant’ in its ‘own’ continent.5 A diff erent way of conceptualising South African cities in a global world is suggested by Robert Th ornton in his “step towards a theory of the social edge.”6 Th ornton suggests that South Africa is really not so much a nation as it is the hinterland of three city-states: South Africa is a country stretched as thin as a sheet over three points of power and wealth. [Th ey amount to city states, not just cities. They

1 Abdou Maliq Simone, “Between Ghetto and Globe: Remaking Urban Life in Africa,” in Associational Life in African Cites: Popular Response to the Urban Crisis, eds. Arne Tostensen, Inge Tvedten and Mariken Vaa (Uppsala, 2001), p. 46. 2 Simone, “Between Ghetto and Globe,” p. 52. 3 Ibid., p. 56. 4 Ibid., pp. 58–59. 5 Ibid., pp. 60–61. 6 Robert Th ornton, “Th e Potentials of Boundaries in South Africa: Steps towards a Th eory of the Social Edge,” in Postcolonial Identities in Africa, eds. Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger (London, 1996), pp. 136–161. reclaiming the african city: world & township 271

are Johannesburg, Durban and Cape Town] . . . the three main cities are all that matter, they mark the space around them and dominate their hinterlands, which look to them with desire and anticipation, loathing and disdain.7 Th e three city states look outwards—Cape Town and Durban to the Indian and Atlantic oceans, Johannesburg to the networks of all of continental Africa. Th e rest of South Africa looks to the cities.8 Kalipeni and Zeleza’s 1999 collection, Sacred Space and Public Quarrels, also sees African urban growth in the context of globalisation, but now as a constraining rather than a stimulating factor. Zeleza’s own chapter is entitled “Th e Spatial Economy of Structural Adjustment in African Cities”.9 Th is deals with what Zeleza calls “the ambitions of global capital to restructure the African material, symbolic and imaginary landscapes, through structural adjustment.”10 One result of structural adjustment, Zeleza says, was a demonisation of African cities, caricatured by their global rivals as “unproductive rent-seeking urban coalitions of corrupt elites and shift less workers, who thrived on the exploitation of the rural peasantry.”11 Advocates of modernising, industrial development in Africa had to contend with global ideologies which pretended to privilege the immiserated rural areas. Th e result was large-scale urban unemployment, the criminali- sation of the city, the expansion of urban agriculture,—“a ruralization of urban space.”12 Zeleza remarks that everywhere there was “destruction and recreation of urban social space and time by structural adjustment,” and instances Nairobi whose “colour, texture and vibrancy has changed noticeably since the late 1980s.”13 Structural adjustment, says Zeleza, fi rst checked the growth of African cities and then ensured that that it would re-commence on a distorted and violent basis. Th e contemporary African city is the site of violence and riot. Yet at the same time as they emphasise the perverse stimulus of globalisation, these studies—and many more—lay as much emphasis

7 Th ornton, “Th e Potentials of Boundaries in South Africa,” p. 154. 8 Ibid. 9 Paul Tiyambe Zeleza, “Th e Spatial Economy of Structural Adjustment in African Cities,” in Sacred Spaces and Pubic Quarrels: African Cultural and Economic Land- scapes, eds. Paul Tiyambe Zeleza and Ezekiel Kalipeni (Trenton, 1999), pp. 43–71. 10 Zeleza, “Th e Spatial Economy,” p. 44. 11 Ibid., p. 46. 12 Ibid., p. 54. 13 Ibid., p. 55. 272 terence ranger on the ‘local’ as they do on the global. Simone’s chapter, aft er all, is entitled “Between Ghetto and Globe” and having documented the sort of informal, criminalised activities that Zeleza’s analysis would suggest, it ends by emphasising the African city’s “enormous resilience and determination to use the symbolic, material and social resources at its disposal [ . . . ].”14 Th e question of where Africa’s cities are going, he suggests, “could be addressed by assessing [ . . . ] where African urban residents are going [ . . . ] Urban poverty is indeed growing worse [but] urban residents are not standing still. Th ere is something going on [ . . . ] eff orts are being made [ . . . ] to create interesting cities.”15 Zeleza argues that long regarded by the poor as a transit area, as a place that was not quite ‘home’, even for the middle class elites, the beleaguered structurally adjusted city increasingly came to be seen as ‘home’, a place that was worth struggling for. And so they sought to reinvent it, to reshape its spaces, signs, and symbols, to make it work for them.16 So current research projects focus on the ‘local’. Preben Kaarshom ends his paper on peri-urban space in South Africa and how to re-integrate it dynamically with old urban centres with these words: “For [our] research to make sense it seems necessary fi rst to know more about local perceptions of what are steps forward and steps backward.”17 Th e Nordic project concentrates on African urban associational life—some of it international, some of it national, but most of it local. As in so much other discourse on globalisation, then. Th e focus of the new studies of African cities is simultaneously concerned with the international and the local. Both, of course, can be studied in the same post-modern, post-colonial perspective. Bodil Folke Frederisken, writing on “popular culture in the south” in Livelihood, Identity and Instability, emphasises a “de-centring” which has replaced older ideas of imperial cultural hegemony and has “meant the return of actors—

14 Simone, “Between Ghetto and Globe,” p. 60. 15 Ibid., p. 61. 16 Zeleza, “Th e Spatial Economy,” p. 62. 17 Kaarsholm, “Instability, Migration and Violence: Notes on a South African Peri- Urban Situation,” in Livelihood, Identity and Instability, eds. Bodil Folke Frederiksen and Fiona Wilson (Copenhagen, 1997), p. 57. reclaiming the african city: world & township 273 those groups of people who carry and articulate the non-privileged discourses.”18

Th e Perspective of an Urban Social Historian

Urban Africanist discourse has moved, then, from an older literature on African cities which saw them regionally to one which sees them both globally and locally. Th e older historical sociology of African cities was both too broad and not broad enough in its perspectives. It focussed on African regions of migration rather than international connections. But it assumed that the oscillations of regional migration were incompatible with the creation of local African urban identities. Its discourse was that of de and re-tribalisation rather than of the emergence of African urban communities. Here I should declare my interest. I am not a student of the contemporary African city, still less a prophet of the shape of cities to come. I am in fact working at the moment on a social history of one particular African city—Bulawayo in south-western Zimbabwe—and mainly on its fi rst, and for a long time, its only African location, Makokoba. My book will stop in 1960 when Bulawayo was not yet a large city and when Makokoba was still a small location; when colonial infl ux controls, so far from being relaxed, were being intensifi ed and rigor- ously enforced. Th at does not seem to have much to do with the new patterns of rapid urban growth; the new networks of continental and inter-continental interaction; the new emphases on struggles for an urban home. To make matters worse, I am a micro-historian. I believe with Wil- liam Blake that all truth lies in minute particulars. My own inclination is to deal with what a recent Zimbabwean writer, Wonder Guchu, calls Sketches of High Density Life, carrying you into “a landscape where rumour, reality and urban myth converge”.19 My own book is to be entitled Bulawayo Burning, a title deliberately chosen to evoke

18 Bodil Folke Frederiksen, “Popular Culture in the South: Production and Recep- tion,” in Livelihood, Identity and Instability, p. 171. 19 http://newwritinginternational.com/2006/05/15/sketches-of-high-density-life/ (accessed June 11, 2009), describing Wonder Guchu, Sketches of High-Density Life (Harare, 2003). Guchu’s tales are set in Zimbabwe’s other main city, Harare, which, in his depiction, has attracted many newcomers and thus formed a mystifying and confusing mix of languages and traditions. 274 terence ranger

Butterfl y Burning, the brilliant novel of Makokoba life in 1946 by the late lamented Yvonne Vera.20 In this book I shall aspire to take advantage of some of the freedoms of the novelist—to hold up the story and to freeze scenes; to develop individual characters; to present counter and even contradictory narratives.21 Yet I rejoice in the new urban perspectives, not despite the fact that I am a social historian of colonial towns but because of it. I can perhaps explain this best with reference to the book edited by Richard Werbner and myself, Postcolonial Identities in Africa.22 Th e book has a divided personality with its two editors fi ring at each other over the heads of the surprised contributors. In his Introduction, “Multiple Identities, Plural Arenas”, Werbner rejoices in the rich combination of every meaning of post-colonial.23 In my postscript I warn against a too rigid distinction between colonial and post-colonial. Th e contrast is misleading. Colonialism was much less coherent, simple and lucid than such dualism suggests. Colonial Africa was much more like postcolonial Africa than scholars have hitherto imagined. Th e dynamics of colonial society have continued to shape post-colonial society.24 Th is argument certainly applies to urban history. Th e new perspectives of African urban studies are the best way not only of looking at the contemporary and future realities but also of looking at the past realities of African cities. Newly published studies of urban Africa lay a great deal of emphasis on recent change. In fact they make too much

20 Yvonne Vera, Butterfl y Buring (New York, 1998). Th e blurb says that the novel “captures the intense bitter-sweet fl avour of township life: its joys and sorrows, its freedoms and restrictions, it ebullience and disenchantments”; its heroine seeks to “fl y” but “the closely woven fabric of township life, where everyone knows everyone else, has a mesh too tight and too intricate to allow her to escape.” 21 So far I have published four examples of this Bulawayo work, “Dignifying Death: Th e Politics of Burial in Bulawayo, 1893–1960,” Journal of Religion in Africa 34, 1 (2004), 110–144; “Th e Meaning of Urban Violence: Th e Case of Bulawayo, 1929 to 1960,” Journal of Social and Cultural History 3, 2 (2006), 193–228; “City versus State in Zimbabwe: Colonial Antecedents to the Current Crisis,” Journal of Eastern African Studies 1, 2 (2007), 161–192; “Myth and Legend in Urban Oral Memory: Bulawayo, 1930–60,” Journal of Postcolonial Writing 44, 1 (2008), 77–88. 22 Richard Werbner and Terrence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa (London, 1996). 23 Richard Werbner, “Introduction: Multiple Identities, Plural Arenas,” in Postco- lonial Identities in Africa, eds. Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger (London, 1996), pp. 1–25. 24 Terence Ranger, “Postscript: Colonial and Post-colonial Identities,” in Postcolo- nial Identities in Africa, eds. Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger (London, 1996), pp. 271–281. reclaiming the african city: world & township 275 of recent change. South Africa was just as much a thinly stretched out country over the three great urban power points a hundred years ago as it is today—in fact it was even more so. Zeleza’s contrast between African perceptions of the colonial city as a “transit zone” and of the contemporary city as a place in which to create homes seems to me to be at best over-stated and at worst misleading.25 In Bulawayo, at least, Africans have been trying to create homes and to make an urban community for at least a hundred years. To do so they sometimes drew on international resources and sometimes on local. But both the internationality and the localism have been obscured by the hegemony of the regional paradigm.

Applying the New Perspectives to Urban History

Th ere was always a combination of globalism and of localism in the consciousness of some of the citizens in Bulawayo—but they were the white citizens. Th e white residents of Bulawayo, and of all other Central African towns, knew very well that that their incipient cities depended upon international networks of trade. Bulawayo may have been sited where it was—on barren veldt, with inadequate water supplies—because of the symbolic value of being built next to the ruins of King Lobengula’s capital. But it could only subsist as a rail-head; linked to the gold-mines and ports of the south and the copper-mines of the north. Its original white inhabitants—and for decades the great majority of its white residents—were immigrants, coming from all over southern Africa, from England, Scotland, Wales and Ireland, a handful from the United States, and later very many from Europe. Th e jingoistic mayor of the rival Rhodesian city of Salisbury, Charles Olley, alleged in the late 1940s that it was rare to hear English spoken by whites on the streets of Bulawayo! Bulawayo whites were acutely aware of that great globalised reality, the Empire, from which came other immigrants in the shape of Indian labourers, market garden- ers, eating-house keepers and merchants. Empire Day was their main annual celebration. Th eir young men participated in what were justly called two ‘World Wars’ in defence of the Empire and white society was held together by ex-service associations. Bulawayans might delight

25 Zeleza, “Spatial Economy,” p. 62. 276 terence ranger in the surprise of visitors at fi nding a city in the bush, but they were proud of being an outpost of global urban civilisation, securely established on the frontiers of the wild. At the same time as this internationalism, however, there arose an intense white localism in Bulawayo. Bulawayo was sturdy, shrewd, business-like by contrast to the eff ete bureaucrats and pseudo intellectuals of Salisbury. Th is self-image was partly derived from the commercial dominance of lowland Scots in Bulawayo, partly derived from a lingering sense of pioneering adventure. Bulawayo belonged to southern Africa, to the Empire and to the world. But it was very much its own self. All this changed when whites looked at the blacks who lived in and around the town. Africans, whites thought, had no part in international networks—and Rhodesians thought it positively dangerous when some African soldiers fought in the Middle East and Burma in the Second World War. A few educated Africans clung to the Imperial ideal of equal rights for all civilised men but they found that in this respect they were the only ‘imperialists’ in Rhodesia. By white defi nition Africans came to town not as immigrants but as foreigners to urban culture, whether they had travelled from the rural Matabeleland in which Bulawayo was set, or from Northern Rhodesia, Nyasaland and Mozambique. Africans were defi ned as regional men (with a few anomalous women). If Africans could not be international, still less could they be local. Whites felt passionately that blacks could not be citizens of Bulawayo; an African lacked the skills to make a home in the town. At least until the 1950s the Bulawayo Municipality took the view that it had no need to build houses in which married men could live with their families. Th e ideal worker was a short-term migrant, reliably returning to his ‘real’ world in the tribalised countryside.26 As Wambui Mwangi puts it in a recent paper on mid-colonial Kenya, the communitarian African admired by many whites was “inevitably rural. Any African existing in an urbanised context, or otherwise separated from his ‘natural’ tribal collective, was not only abnormal but irreparably damaged”.27

26 For these white municipal attitudes see Ranger, “City versus State,” pp. 178–182. 27 Wambui Mwangi, “Th e Colonial State and its Anti-Subjects: Blood Money and Bodily Value in Inter-War Colonial Kenya,” Paper presented at the African Studies Association & Canadian Association of African Studies, 47th / 37th Annual Meetings, New Orleans, November 12, 2004. She quotes a colonial ‘expert,’ Hugh Wyndham, reclaiming the african city: world & township 277

By such colonial defi nition no African in a city could possibly become ‘local’ let alone ‘global’. Hence to apply the new insights of African urban history to the colonial city—and to Bulawayo in particular—is to do a belated racial justice.28 It is see the black citizens of colonial towns as the white citizens saw themselves—simultaneously global and local people.29 But how is this to be done. How, fi rst, are we to see black residents in colonial southern African cities as ‘global’?

International Resources for Local Identities

Long before colonialism, African cities had been at a beginning or at an end or at a junction of fl ows of international trade, religion and ideas. North African cities, of course, had always been part of a Medi- terranean culture; East African coastal cities had been part of an Indian Ocean culture; West African cities of the western Sahel had been part of a trans-Saharan culture; West African coastal cities became part of an Atlantic culture. In all of them international people and ideas interacted with indigenous people and ideas to produce local urban identities.30 Historians have produced much sophisticated work on these

writing in 1925 about urban Africans: “he may end as a highly trained mechanic, dancing in evening clothes [ . . . ] But his mental and spiritual being is all the time in its primitive state. He becomes an individual drift ing about without any real anchor- age in the society.” Hugh Wyndham, “Th e Colour Problem in Africa,” International Aff airs 4, 4 (1925), 176. 28 Since I wrote this sentence an exploration of the same issues for the early history of Salisbury has been published, Tsuneo Yoshikuni’s African Urban Experiences in Colonial Zimbabwe: A Social History of Harare before 1925 (Harare, 2007). For the emergence of an African urban community see especially p. 56. 29 A good deal of recent work has adopted this problematic. James Brennan, Andrew Burton and Yusuf Lawi, eds., Dar es Salaam: Histories from an Emerging Metropolis (Dar es Salaam, 2007) declares that its approach is “representative od contemporary trends in urban Africa, notably those associated with ‘globalisation’ and the indigenous response.” It off ers “detailed accounts of social, political and cultural eff orts made by people to create pathways of urban belonging” and focusses on “the interplay between regional and cosmopolitan musical trends on the one hand and quite local traditions on the other”, pp. 2, 3, 7–8. 30 I have myself worked on these processes in East African coastal cities and my book, Dance and Society in Eastern Africa (London, 1975), is an account of how they continued into the colonial era. A splendid development and elaboration of that book is off ered by the essays edited by Sala Frank Gunderson and Gregory Barz in Mashindano! Competitive Music Performance in East Africa (Dar es Salaam, 2000). See also Alex Perullo, “Here’s a Little Something Local: An Early History of Hip-Hop 278 terence ranger pre-colonial cities and how they managed to retain their global/local dynamics under colonialism.31 Most of this work has been in reaction against “the over-mighty infl uence of Southern African anthropology” and its problematic of de-tribalisation.32 As a result we now face a diff erent problem—West, North and East African cities have come to seem quite diff erent from southern African ones. Th e danger is that the history of southern African towns will be left mired in the problematics of dysfunctional modernity and colonial spatial oppression, at least until the emergence of the ‘new’ conditions laid out in the recent work on African cities. Yet the black populations of colonial southern African cities had their own international cultural resources, quite apart from the fact that many of them came to work for international capitalist enterprise. I have myself proclaimed that I can understand the social history of colonial Bulawayo best in the comparative context of North, West and Eastern African city studies.33 South African urban history is moving in the same direction.34 Belinda Bozzoli in her marvellous recent book intensively studies the micro-politics and spatial symbolism of Alexandra township, a virtually enclosed and bounded entity literally surrounded by Johan- nesburg. She wonderfully evokes the evolution of successive local Alexandra cultures and the generational and gender struggles within them. In her account of the Alexandra rebellion of 1986 she is able

in Dar es Salaam, 1984–1997,” in Dar es Salaam: Histories from an Emerging Metrop- olis, eds. James Brennan, Andrew Burton and Yusuf Lawi (Dar es Salaam, 2007), pp. 250–272. 31 Two splendid examples for Ghana are Sandra Greene, Sacred Sites and the Colo- nial Encounter (Bloomington, 2002); Tom McCaskie, Asante Identities (Edinburgh, 2000). A recent general history of African cities is Bill Freund, Th e African City: A History (Cambridge, Mass., 2007). For a useful collection of essays on the ancient, medieval and modern history of African cities, see David Anderson and Richard Rath- bone, eds., Africa’s Urban Past (Oxford, 2000). 32 Ibid., p. 10. Anderson and Rathbone sum up the impact of southern African urban studies: “history had little place in towns because towns had little history.” 33 Terrence Ranger, “Book Review: Africa’s Urban Past,” African Aff airs 99, 396 (2000), 467–469. My article on the social history of burials in Bulawayo—“Dignifying Death,” Journal of Religion in Africa 34, 1 (2004), 110–144—is explicitly inspired by John Parker’s chapter in the Anderson and Rathbone collection, “Th e Cultural Politics of Death and Burial in Early Colonial Accra,” pp. 205–221. 34 Achille Mbembe and Sarah Nuttall, eds., Johannesburg: Th e Elusive Metropolis (Durham, 2004). Th eir own chapter in the book, “Writing the World from an African Metropolis,” pp. 347– 372, is “an exercise in writing the worldliness—or the being-in- the-world—of contemporary African life forms,” p. 347. reclaiming the african city: world & township 279 to map out in detail the radical reshaping of township space, symbol and ritual. She insists that any study of Alexandra must be particular, its history understood as diff erent from that of any other South Afri- can township and quite diff erent (she insists) from that of any other southern African town.35 But despite all these splendid Blakean “minute particulars”—“nothing entered the township without being given local meaning”,36 she writes—Bozzoli also shows Alexandra as an organising centre, recruiting area and clearing house of international crime, linking regions as far apart as the Cape, Angola and Kenya.37 Th is sounds very much like an antecedent of the great informal trading network which Simone describes for contemporary Johannes- burg. And Bozzoli’s list of the names of Alexandra’s youth gangs in the 1950s reads like a roll call of contemporary global consciousness—the Young Americans, the Berlins, the Black Koreans, the Mau-Maus, each with its own zone of domination inside Alexandra.38 Th e other great global imports into Alexandra were liberal, radical and revolutionary ideologies. White liberals, communists, trade union- ists, doctors and intellectuals were “active in township life, protest and politics on the ground”—but here too none of these ideologies entered Alexandra ”without being given local meaning.”39 Most of what Bozzoli writes about Alexandra is true about the Bula- wayo townships. In Bulawayo also the naming of African gangs and clubs showed an acute global awareness. Th e Bulawayo African football team in the 1950s was called the Red Army; its rival from Salisbury was known as the Yellow Peril. To this day the most popular black football team in Zimbabwe bears the Soviet name of Dynamos. Th e

35 Belinda Bozzoli, Th eatres of Struggle and the End of Apartheid (Edinburgh, 2004). 36 Bozzoli, Th eatres of Struggle, p. 27. 37 Ibid., p. 28. Bozzoli is here drawing on a local journalist, writing in Libertas (August 1942), quoted in Clive Glaser, Bostotsi: Th e Youth Gangs of Soweto, 1935–76 (Portsmouth, 2000). Th e Libertas article describes how there radiated from Alexandria “roads and paths, some marked on the map and some not, carrying the agents, spoils and instruments of crime.” Th e most eff ective account of early criminal networks, stretching between the South African townships and eastern Europe is Charles van Onselen, “Randlords and rotgut, 1886–1903,” in Studies in the Social and Economic History of the Witwatersrand, 1886–1914, 1, New Babylon, ed. idem (Harlow, 1982). In this case the controllers of the international informal liquor trading networks were white; the consumers largely black miners and township residents. 38 Bozzoli, Th eatres of Struggle, p. 28. 39 Ibid., p. 32. 280 terence ranger competitive dance associations in the cities of the East African coast in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries named themselves aft er imperial naval powers and did homage to that great imperial symbol, the kilt. In the same way southern urban African associations organised their own competitive sociality around the facts of imperial global power struggles. Of course this pretence assumed all too much reality during the liberation war of the 1960s and 1970s when Joshua Nkomo’s guerrilla forces were armed and trained by the Soviet Union while Robert Mugabe’s were armed and trained by China. Th e famous photograph of Nkomo, that quintessential Bulawayo man, dressed in a Soviet marshall’s uniform is both comic and deadly. Clothing has always been, indeed, one of the crucial dimensions of township globalisation. Nkomo’s Soviet photograph is one in a series of portraits of him wearing a whole variety of costumes, expressing a whole variety of international and local identities—the Saville Row suit topped off by the cultural nationalist fur hat. Th ere had been for decades signifi cant interactions of photography and fashion in black Bulawayo—the young male dandies of the late 1920s, strutting the townships streets in their black suits and white gloves, exclaiming “O, style Bulawayo!, O style Bulawayo!”; the savage attacks on their ‘ridiculous’ garments by white missionaries and other whites; the gender revolution which meant that by the 1950s it was black township women, hitherto shoe-less and un-photographed but now with some disposable income, who became the pea-cocking beauties.40 Historians have shown some unease in writing about township dress and fashion. Th e most spectacular example of globalised clothing have been the sapeurs of Brazzaville. Th e anthropologist Jonathan Friedman has written about these extraordinary young men in his “Narcissism, roots and postmodernity: the constitution of selfh ood in the global crisis”,41 though once again what he is describing is certainly not a

40 Terence Ranger, “Pictures Must Prevail: Sex and the Social History of African Photography in Bulawayo, 1930–1960,” Kronos (special issue Visual History) 27 (2001), 261–266; see also Terence Ranger, “Colonialism, Consciousness and the Cam- era,” Past and Present 171 (May 2001), 203–215. 41 Jonathan Friedman, “Narcissism, Roots and Postmodernity: Th e Constitution of Selfh ood in the Global Xrisis,” in Modernity and Identity, eds. Scott Lash and Jonathan Friedman (Oxford, 1992), pp. 331–366. reclaiming the african city: world & township 281 post-colonial phenomenon and has its roots deep in the leisure culture of colonial Brazzaville.42 A helpful summary of Friedman by Joanne Finkelstein runs: In the African Congo . . . there developed a cult around European luxury goods and, in particular, haute couture. At the time, the capital of the Congo, Brazzaville, was a French colonial outpost . . . European clothes, particularly those of haute couturiers, Yves Saint Laurent, Ver- sace, Uomo, were also in demand, but they were not being merchan- dised through stores. Th ey were the currency of a subculture of young, mostly unemployed men known as sapeurs, who valued elegant dress above all else. Th e traffi c in fashion took place in the ‘clubs des jeunes premiers’. . . despite being poor [ . . . ], the young Congolese devoted themselves to dressing well, in the labels of Parisian haute couturiers. . . . In the lives of these young, unemployed men, a pilgrimage to Paris, to the source of all things civilised and luxurious, was a necessity. And the fi nal achievement was the status of parisien or elder.43 Th is is undeniably bringing the township to the world and the world to the township. But Finkelstein betrays uneasiness at what seems senseless mimicry. Th e irreconcilability of a desire for French luxuries with the dismal economic future of the sapeur suggests such a degree of irrationality that the practice seemed almost magical, not unlike a cargo cult.44 In Bulawayo too the young men who rejoiced in the city’s ‘style’ were oft en those with the lowest wages—sometimes four men shared a suit and wore it on one weekend a month. But in assessing the rationality of this practice we should take into account the conclusion reached by Luise White in her recent brilliant essay about “Masculinity and Migrancy” in eastern Africa: Whose history do we write when we write history about clothes and canes?. . . Historical research is at its most intimate [in its most minute particulars, I would say], its most attentive to the complexity of people moving through the cycles of their complicated lives, when it can look at everyday practices not as a generalization, but in terms of the canes and jackets and tennis rackets that ordinary men used to off end their fathers and colonial offi cials [and to impress young women, I would add] in a

42 For which see Phyllis Martin, Leisure and Society in Colonial Brazzaville (Cam- bridge, Mass., 2002). 43 Joanne Finkelstein, “Chic Th eory,” Australian Humanities Review 5 (1997), 1. 44 Ibid. 282 terence ranger

single fashionable gesture . . . Th e history of canes and jackets and tennis rackets does make scholarship irrelevant to several agenda laid down for African history in the last 30 years [but] Africans’ own description of their own lives provides historians with tools to reconstruct social relations as they were lived and struggled over.45 In the Bulawayo townships, indeed, what old men and women want to talk about most is clothes—the women remembering the moment when they “were seen, really seen”.46 Listening to them does reconstruct lived and contested social relations. And it enables us to see the sense of these aspirations and memories. Sometimes the desire for high fashion led on to global economic activity. A review in Africa Today describes Congolese immigrant traders in Paris, “engaged in clandestine trans-national exchanges of goods and services”; many of the traders, says the review, are known as sapeurs, a term which illuminates “the trader’s world view.”47 And seen simply as clothes, Finkelstein tells us, “although the sapeur was black, unemployed, and a discarded colonial relic, he was existentially equal to his European master if he dressed in the same style.”48 But I think this underestimates the eff ect of township high style. In Bulawayo, certainly, by the 1950s some black women were dressed much more fashionably than white women. White Rhodesians were famously caught in a time warp which reproduced the styles of pre- war England; young black women were experiencing what Yvonne Vera calls “a kind of independence” by dressing internationally.49 “Th e body is fashionable”, writes Vera about township photographs of young black women in the 1950s.

45 Luise White, “Work, Clothes and Talk in Eastern Africa,” in African Historians and African Voices, ed. Atieno Odhiambo (Basel, 2001), p. 74. 46 Terence Ranger, “Myth and Legend in Urban Oral Memory,” Journal of Postco- lonial Writing (special issue African City Textualities) 44, 1 (2008), 77–88. 47 Karen A. Porter, “Review of Congo-Paris: Transnational Trader on the Margins of the Law,” African Aff airs 50, 1 (2003), 133–136. Th e review remarks that originally the term sapeur sprang from French slang, meaning ‘threads’, but that in Brazzaville it was turned into an acronym for Société des Ambianceurs et Personnes Elégantes. 48 Finkelstein, “Chic Th eory,” p. 1. 49 Yvonne Vera, “Introduction” to the catalogue of the 1999 Th atha Camera exhibition of township photographs in the National Gallery of Bulawayo of which she was Director. reclaiming the african city: world & township 283

It is a thing in itself, an entity presented as complete, as separate from the traditional concept of kinship [ . . . ] It is a freed climate. Th is is Bulawayo. Th is is the city. Th is is me. Th e photograph confi rms this identity.50 To the photograph must be added the fi lm. Hollywood fi lms made a much greater impact on the black residents of Bulawayo than they did on the white. Th ey transformed township musical performances for example. Th e synchronised singing and dancing of black American quartets produced many southern African imitators—in South Africa the famous Manhattan brothers; in Rhodesia the City Quads and the Black Evening Follies. And here one can make another point. It is far from the truth that a desire for fashion and an emulation of Ameri- can styles was an aspiration only of “black, unemployed and discarded colonial relics.”51 In Bulawayo it was the mission-educated youth elite who copied black American choirs and synchronised singing. It was the progressive Bantu Mirror which hailed a performance by the Fol- lies—with its perfect co-ordination and smart evening dress—as proving that ‘the race is rising’. In the 1950s it was even permissible for respectable girls to sing with these groups, earning themselves such accolades as ‘the Judy Garland of Bulawayo’.52 Th e fl ow of musical infl uence into South Africa, both from black and white North Amer- ica and over more than a hundred years has been described in splendid studies with titles very appropriate to this article—In Township Tonight! or Music, Modernity and the Global Imagination.53 Th e black urban jive culture of Bulawayo in the 1950s was in fact an early aspect of what Patrick Neate, in his remarkable study of our

50 Th e same point is made in the book of the exhibition of Seydou Keita’s late colonial portrait photographs from the city of Mali, Michelle Lamuniere’s You Look Beautiful Like Th at (New Haven, 2001). In Mali, however, unlike in Bulawayo, women developed modern forms of ‘traditional’ dress while men aimed at Western elegance. 51 Joanne Finkelstein, “Chic Th eory.” 52 For the making of black middle class culture see Michael West, Th e Rise of an African Middle Class: Colonial Zimbabwe, 1898–1965 (Bloomington, 2002). For Zim- babwean consumer culture see Timothy Burke, Lifebuoy Men, Lux Women (London, 1996). 53 David Coplan, In Township Tonight! South Africa’s Black City Music and Th eatre (Johannesburg, 1985); Veit Erlmann, Music, Modernity and the Global Imagination: South Africa and the West (Oxford, 1999). See also Gwen Ansell, Soweto Blues: Jazz, Popular Music and Politics in South Africa (New York, 2004). A study of the history of Zimbabwean township music is Joyce Jenje Makwenda, Zimbabwe Township Music (Harare, 2005). 284 terence ranger contemporary “Hip-hop Planet”,54 calls “glocalisation—the adaptation of worldwide products to indigenous needs.”55 What Neate’s publishers say about Hip-hop could just as well have been said about jive as it aff ected the cities of colonial Africa: Th e [American] born music and culture has woven itself into the local urban cultures of the distant corners of the globe in diff erent, consis- tently surprising, and provocative ways. What is cliche in one city is revolutionary in another, and completely meaningless in yet another.56 Th us the township culture of many diff erent groups—criminal gangs, the unemployed, the low-waged, aspirant young women, the striving middle class—drew upon global rather than regional infl uences. And this was true, too, of the last international infl uence I want to discuss—religion. Christian mission in the townships got off to a slow start. Mission- aries preferred the ‘real’ African societies of the ‘tribal’, rural areas, where their denomination might establish a monopoly. (Th ough it is worth remarking how global missionary societies were in Rhodesia— German, American, Swedish, Northern and Southern Irish, Welsh, Scottish). Once the Christian churches got to Bulawayo’s tiny Mako- koba Location, however, it became an intensely competitive market place, where once again costumes and music as well as theologies were on display: Th e Bulawayo African Township inhabitants had the opportunity of listening to religious teaching of all dogmas during the Easter holidays [wrote the Bantu Mirror on 22 April 1944], as many of the local churches conducted services in the streets. Various kinds of religious uniforms, badges and ribbons, according to the various religious faiths were worn; these seemed to attract the curiosity of onlookers more than the preaching and teaching [ . . . ] Th e climax of this religious activity came on Sunday morning—Resurrection Sunday—when blissful sleep- ers were welcomed by the strains of select religious tunes by worshippers parading the streets.57

54 Jonathan Friedman, “Narcissism, Roots and Postmodernity: Th e Constitution of Selfh ood in the Global Xrisis,” in Modernity and Identity, eds. Scott Lash and Jonathan Friedman (Oxford, 1992), pp. 331–366. 55 For an account of Yvonne Vera’s treatment of popular music in Bulawayo see Meg Samuelson, “Yvonne Vera’s Bulawayo: Modernity, (Im)mobility, Music and Memory,” Research in African Literatures 38, 2 (2007), 22–35. 56 Summary produced by Blackwell’s Book Services, http://www.princeton.lib.nj.us/ catelists/200505/Non-Fiction_-_Adult_Collection/169.html (accessed July 10, 2009). 57 Bantu Mirror (Bulawayo) (April 22, 1944). reclaiming the african city: world & township 285

And as the number of townships around Bulawayo and the size of its African population grew from the 1950s onwards, religious activity grew to keep pace. William Phiri, who has been writing a series of reminscences of eMalokishini, the townships, in the Bulawayo Chron- icle, produced on 26 April 2005 a memoir on black urban religion, still focussing on music, costume and performance: Growing up in eMalokishini, we were exposed to diff erent kinds of religious beliefs [ . . . ] Among the Christian churches, the Salvation Army was very popular with children. We used to love their smart uniforms, blood red fl ag, their processions and the bugle band. Men who used to play itolopito (the trumpet) always drew a lot of attention from the kids. So as the ‘Christian Soldiers Marched’ around eMalokishini we would join in their procession . . . from Magwegwe to their Mpopoma church . . . Th en there were the Methodist and Dutch Reformed Church members whose processions were characterised with lots of dancing and spiced with sharp tunes from animal horns. As for Catholics and Angli- cans, they were very popular with their Palm Sunday marches . . . Even more eye-catching were the long processions when Catholics from all over the diocese converged at St Patrick’s, Makokoba, celebrating Cor- pus Christi . . . altar servers, white and black priests and nuns in their colourful regalia and the scent of incense.58 And there were night-time Pentecostal services, with fascinating confessions blared through megaphones, which you ‘could not ignore even in your house’. It is clear that Bulawayo township Christianity lived up to Belinda Bozzoli’s insistence that everything that entered Alexandra from outside was absorbed into local culture. But it is also clear that Makokoba and the other townships were being off ered the whole range of global Christianities—the popular Catholicism and the slum Protestantism of the European nineteenth century; the ecstatic legacies of American revivalism; the cooler rituals of Anglicanism. William Phiri emphasises that “the infl uence of religion in our upbringing remains with us for the rest of our lives” and that even shebeen habiting men who “may be willing to compromise on what brand to drink” never abandon the signs of their faith imported from the outside world. Jehovah’s Witnesses never celebrate Christmas; those brought up in the Seventh Day never join ikhabhiza on Friday evenings. Th eir party time starts on Saturday aft er 6pm [ . . . ] Catholic-raised avoid eating meat on

58 William Phiri, Bulawayo Chronicle (April 26, 2005). 286 terence ranger

Good Fridays and SDAs would buy all the meat for everyone but stick to ama-salads.59 Of course in addition to these global signs and symbols the churches off ered many things essential to the emerging township culture— schools and moral teachings in particular. But in the context of this chapter, it is most interesting to note the importance of religious costumes. Th e diff erently uniformed women of the Methodist, Anglican and Roman Catholic churches made a contrasting self-assertion to that of the fashion conscious beauties of the 1950s. Th eir uniforms signalled the aspiration to be what Marja Hinfelaar in her recent book calls “Respectable and Responsible Women”—key participants in building homes in the townships.60

Local Resources for the Construction of Urban Identity

Even in discussing the global elements in African urban culture I have off ered quite enough minute particulars. As I turn to African urban local identities, I will satisfy myself by making one or two points and then by examining the key topic of recent urban studies—associational life. Th e fi rst point is merely to repeat my assertion that some Africans were striving to create local communal identities in Bulawayo from the end of the nineteenth century. Some of them were surviving members of the overthrown Ndebele royal family setting themselves up as house-holders in the Location; others were educated black migrants from Bechuanaland and South Africa, who later came to describe themselves as the ‘pioneers’ of Makokoba; others were landladies of various ethnicities who built houses and were patrons to their tenants; yet others were workers who had migrated from all over Central Africa. I have been emphasising the global and the local at the expense of the regional, but the regional was nevertheless very important. I have described the township galaxy of global Christian denominations. But there was also a world of ‘traditional’ regional denominations. One of our septuagenarian informants, Mrs Bhelamina Ndlovu, told us:

59 William Phiri, Bulawayo Chronicle (April 26, 2005). 60 Marja Hinfelaar, Respectable and Responsible Women: Methodist and Roman Catholic Women’s Organisations in Harare, Zimbabwe, 1919–1985 (Utrecht, 2004). reclaiming the african city: world & township 287

You know this Township, small as it may appear, is a vast place. It has many people of diff erent ethnicities, of diff erent cultures and beliefs, and it is very possible for one to stay in Makokoba for many years without knowing that something like funeral ceremonies are being held.61 My own article about “Th e Politics of Burial in Bulawayo” attempts to describe how township Africans drew on various global Christian traditions, various ‘local’ rural Ndebele traditions, and various regional ethnic traditions to create a broadly common local urban funeral culture.62 Th e same was true of all other aspects of ‘Bulawayo style’—dress, music, sport, sociality As far as the townships were concerned ‘local’ did not described an inherited tradition of urban life, nor did it describe continuous Ndebele traditions. It meant something continuously created and contested. Bulawayo urban style was self-consciously modern—“city life was fascinating” said an informant, “because to us most things were just new. Th at feeling of being part of a new city life was great.”63 Something of the complexity of the choices being made, and of the vast global, regional and traditional repertoire from which they were being drawn, can be seen from the material available on Bulawayo African voluntary societies in the 1950s.64 Th e 2001 Nordic research project volume is entitled Associational Life in African Cities: Popular Responses to the Urban Crisis. Th e assumption is that the existence of numerous and over-lapping voluntary associations betokens an urban ‘civil society’, the possibility of which had previously been denied. Per- versely, the wealth of associations in mid twentieth century Bulawayo and other southern African cities has been taken as evidence of the persistence of regional ethnic identities rather than of the emergence of local urban society or the proclamation of global solidarities.

61 Interview between Busani Mpofu and Mrs Bhelamina Ndovu, Makokoba (July 24, 2000). 62 Ranger, “Politics of Burial in Bulawayo.” Most of the fi gures who have appeared in this chapter participated in the process—Ndebele aristocrats, southern ‘pioneers’, landladies, uniformed Christian women. 63 Interview between Busani Mpofu and L.M. Ndelela, Makokoba (January 2000). See more generally Jennifer Robinson, Ordinary Cities: Between Modernity and Devel- opment (London, 2006). 64 Tsuneo Yoshikuni, African Urban Experiences in Colonial Zimbabwe (Zimba- bwe, 2007) has fascinating material on Salisbury voluntary associations in the 1920s. Yoshikuni sees these as evidence for a migrant worker class consciousness. 288 terence ranger

In the Housing Department of the Bulawayo Municipal offi ces are held a series of fi les containing applications for registration sent to Hugh Ashton, Director of Municipal Native Administration, by Afri- can voluntary societies in the 1950s.65 Many of them concerned that staple of associational life in southern African townships—the burial society—and many of these were certainly regional in character. Even with these, however, a fascinating process of defi ning fraternity is apparent—there is a hierarchy running from the Achewa North Rho- desia East Province Helping Society and the North Western Rhodesia Luka Movement to the Northern Rhodesian Association Club and from that and other territorial associations (including the Belgian Congolese Joint National Society) to the African Unity Burial Society. Th e right to represent all Northern Rhodesians was contested between the Northern Rhodesia Chiefs Unity Association and the Northern Rhodesian African National Congress. Th e former stood for a confederation of ‘tribal’ identities. Th e latter introduced into Bula- wayo some radical international ideologies—Kenneth Kaunda in a letter of 31 December 1956 cites a socialist friend for teaching him that the means of production should not be the property of any privileged person or class but should be owned and controlled by the whole community [ . . . ] A nation whose workers are dependent upon a small fraction of non-producers for access to the instruments of wealth production is a nation of slaves and tyrants.66 A similar hierarchy of burial and territorial societies existed for Nyasa- land and indeed for Southern Rhodesia itself. But in addition there were a multitude of other cross-cutting associations. Some represented occupations—the Fruit and Vegetable Hawkers Association; the Afri- can Traders Association; the Bulawayo African Carpenters Associa- tion; the Matabeleland African Vegetable Growers Association. Most of these also acted as burial societies; the Vegetable Growers Associa- tion demanded from its members “Education, Patriotism, Vegetable Experience”. Th en there were powerful trade unions like the Rhode-

65 Th ese were rescued from the old Municipal Native Administration archive by J.S. Ncube who permitted me to see them—the reference is S.O.8. Similar fi les exist for the 1960s and probably for the 1970s but since my projected book on Bulawayo takes its history only up to 1960 I did not note these. Th ey will be a rich resource for future urban social historians. 66 Letter of Kenneth Kaunda (December 31, 1956), see general fi le on associations S.O.8. Vol. 1, T Box 100, Bulawayo Municipality. reclaiming the african city: world & township 289 sia Railways African Employees Association, which regularly supplied Ashton with invaluable records of its proceedings. Th ere was even a Southern Rhodesia Unemployed Association, led by men who had been repatriated from South Africa and who had applied for multiple clerical jobs in Bulawayo without success. And then there were associations representing global culture. Th ere was, for instance, the African Jiving Society, whose aim was “to advance a high standard of jiving among the African people in Southern Rhodesia”; “gangs of law-breaking Africans are punished by sending them to the Police. Th e Society shall encourage every member to come the dance smartly dressed and if possible competitors should look respectable.” It also helped with “funeral business” and sickness. Th e De Tourist Brothers aimed “to keep Catholic boys away from busy streets during holidays [and] to entertain anyone who wants to be entertained”. Th e Smart Gents Dancing Competition Club wanted “to encourage Africans in the better way of dressing” and “to foster spirit of Love and Pride in Modern Dressing”. It, too, helped with sickness and burial.67 In short the voluntary associations of Bulawayo in the 1950s embodied a much wider variety of notions of communality than the ethnic or tribal. Sick and dying residents of the townships could be helped not only by rural kin but by those who shared their occupations and recre- ations and global religions—the uniformed church women’s organisations dominated the funeral services of their members. Many people belonged to more than one burial society. Th ere was a black urban civil society.

Conclusion

Of course I am not arguing that all of these associations came together naturally or spontaneously to create a single urban community. Many diff erent ‘styles Bulawayo’ could be constructed out of them and the other cultural resources available in the townships. Indeed there was fi erce contestation over what the dominant character of township culture should be and over who should dominate it. In a recent paper on “Th e Meaning of Urban Violence” I have argued against interpretations which seek to explain it solely in terms of anti-colonial protest, of

67 See general fi le on associations S.O.8. Vol. 1, T Box 100, Bulawayo Municipality. 290 terence ranger tribal rivalry or of political economy. Taking the two great violent outbursts in Bulawayo—in 1929 and in 1960—I have argued that they were essentially about who should control urban culture. In 1929 there was a generational struggle. Smart young men in their black suits, fi ghting in their boxing gloves and riding their bicycles, had overplayed their mastery of global symbols and were repaid for their boasting. Th ey were beaten up and their suits and bicycles piled up and burned. In 1960 there was a class struggle, between the impoverished have-nots and the too opulent haves, which ended with every African owned shop in the townships being burned down. Th e fi res of the culture wars justify the title of my own book, Bulawayo Burning.68 On September 25, 2004 the Guardian published an essay by the South African novelist Achmet Dangor. As a young man Dangor himself wrote poems and stories set in the city, in the dusty township, trying to fi nd beauty in dimly lit streets and the hard echo of asphalt. But the rest of the young writers wrote about “the savannah, the idyllic peaceful village”. For them the city was transiently evil, a gigantic asphalt salt mine into which Afri- cans had been thrust aft er imperial Europe had wrenched them from their rural innocence. Today Dangor has: Observed with some relief how other African writers have taken to the streets, as it were. Yvonne Vera beautifully evokes Bulawayo [ . . . ] Afri- can writers are starting to reclaim the African city from the colonialists who by their association with it had poisoned it as a centre of culture.69 Among these African (and Africanist) writers are social and cultural historians who are also reclaiming the African city by bringing together the world and the township.70 Th e twenty-fi rst century may be the century of the African city. But to understand that city’s relation to the world we need to ask both global and local questions about the towns of the twentieth century from which it is emerging.

68 Terence Ranger, “Th e Meaning of Urban Violence in Africa: Bulawayo, Southern Rhodesia, 1890–1960,” Cultural and Social History 3, 2 (2006), 193–228; idem, Bula- wayo Burning (Harare, 2010). 69 Achmet Dangor, “Another Country,” Th e Guardian (September 25, 2004). 70 Outstanding among these is Joyce Nyairo. She gave the Audrey Richards lecture to the United Kingdom African Studies Association in 2005 on Kenyan urban discourse. She and James Ogude have edited Urban Legends, Colonial Myths: Popular Culture and Literature in East Africa (Trenton, 2007). PART FOUR

ALTERNATE GLOBALITIES

‘ALTERNATE’ GLOBALITIES? ON THE CULTURES AND FORMATS OF TRANSNATIONAL MUSLIM NETWORKS FROM SOUTH ASIA

Dietrich Reetz ZMO, Berlin

Th is chapter explores the concepts and approaches of transnational Muslim groups from South Asia pursuing their own religious, cultural and political agendas from salvation to emancipation and development. While the rationale of their activities is largely group-specifi c and oft en ideology-driven, they apply a variety of public and political means and tools to achieve their objectives, sometimes seeking to replace western domination with their own hegemony. For many western observers, their activities remain suspicious and even threatening. It is felt that the West may have to work with these movements rather than against them if a painful long-term collision course is to be avoided. In order to succeed, however, it will be necessary to closely study the competing religious, cultural and political compulsions they face. While it is common place to argue that globalisation studies cannot be reduced to the subject of fi nance and the economy alone, nor to the impact of the West, we know very little as of yet about the infl u- ence of non-western forms of globalisation, how non-economic global processes function, how they interact with the economic processes and what drives them. Th is paper seeks to contribute to the understanding of Muslim global networks and how they are adapting to the current processes of globalisation creating separate visions of the world and ‘alternate globalities.’ It will focus on those emanating from South Asia, a region which on the back of an expansive South Asian diaspora has generated a rising number of translocal and transnational Muslim networks. It is intended to point out new trends and developments worthy of further study. A discussion of categories and the conceptual arguments will be followed by a review of the historical antecedents. Th e main focus will be on the new features and formats of this networking, how it is evolving and in what direction it is going. It is thus hoped that the paper contributes to mapping the directions of internal and external expansion of these networks. 294 dietrich reetz

Framing the Question

Muslim global networking is being discussed here for its contribution to globalisation. It symbolises a direction towards religious awareness and embeddedness, a sector representing Muslim actors and institutions and an outcome creating new structures and establishing new formats, channels and procedures. When we link Muslim global activism to the emergence of ‘alternate globalities’ we refer to the assumption that there is a main direction of globalisation to which other processes constitute some form of ‘alternative’. Th is assumption is based on the perceived or real domination of globalisation by western economic and fi nancial interests. Many Muslim agents and networks position themselves consciously as an imagined alternative, opposition or antidote against this direction of globalisation. At the same time Muslim actors who cross borders and regions in the pursuit of religious networking also follow economic compulsions and interests. On various levels they are also part of globalisation as driven by fi nancial and economic interests, even though from a weaker or disadvantaged position. Th eir disadvantages are oft en exacerbated by a colonial and dependent past within the world economic and political order. If we want to study non-economic forms of globalisation with their historical antecedents as a process in stages the categories of time and space become important parameters. In a more general sense globalisation can be perceived either as a compression of time and space pro- ceeding gradually or in leaps over a longer period of time.1 Th is would represent a macro perspective looking at global networking and activism ‘from above’. Such a perspective will have to be complemented with a perspective ‘from below’ where we can see globalisation as an extension of networks and values in space and time, or what Giddens calls time-space distanciation.2 It is against this background that Mus- lim networking constitutes a real or perceived alternative to economic globalisation as it largely seems to follow a non-economic rationale of religious and cultural interaction, at least as far as intention and main thrust are concerned.

1 David Harvey, Th e Condition of Postmodernity: An Enquiry into the Origins of Cultural Change (Oxford, 1990). 2 Anthony Giddens, Th e Consequences of Modernity (Cambridge, 1990), p. 64. ‘alternate’ globalities? 295

Using the term ‘globality’ is meant to highlight the results of global networking, the emergence of global conditions, structures, interaction and patterns of behaviour that exist because of their translocal and transnational reach. Global interaction has been dominated by structures and patterns resulting from both western-dominated and economy-centred activity.3 In this sense Muslim global networking creates ‘alternate’ globalities insofar as it positions itself against processes and conditions that have been dominated by the West and are centred on economy and fi nance. However this positioning can be only relative. It partly refl ects reality and partly the ideology of Muslim actors constructing a unitary understanding of the West and of economic activity. In reality, Mus- lim global networking is also partly and signifi cantly rooted in the West and becomes part of a highly diverse western agenda in terms of globalisation. It is also inherently related to economic and fi nancial fl ows, interests and institutions. Th ese refl ect trading networks, roots of migration, career paths and the need to fi nance the religious institutions constituting the backbone of Muslim global networking. But again, even as part of the West and any economic agenda, Muslim agents would be largely underrepresented, underprivileged and could therefore still be considered as ‘alternate’ agents. Th e term ‘alternate’ globalities could therefore be used to describe the perspective and intention of Muslim agents and agencies in global networking, to model their contribution and impact in a globalisation process that is hierarchical and uneven in terms of areas, impacts, participants and outcomes. When we talk about Muslim networks here, we are referring to repeated and relatively stable interaction and interrelation of social units such as agents, institutions, organisations, but also values, texts and concepts as mediated by Muslim activists.4 Translocal will be understood as pointing to an exchange or movement of these units, activity patterns or symbols across real or imagined boundaries, whereas transnational will emphasise the importance of crossing the

3 Martin Shaw, Th eory of the Global State: Globality as Unfi nished Revolution (Oxford, 2000). 4 Cf. Roman Loimeier, Die islamische Welt als Netzwerk: Möglichkeiten und Gren- zen des Netzwerkansatzes im islamischen Kontext (Würzburg, 2000). 296 dietrich reetz borders of nation states in the process.5 In this sense most globalising Muslim networks have to be seen as both translocal and transnational at the same time. Th e diff erence between the two terms is in pointing to diff erent directions and in the qualities of the interaction. Trans- locality transcends the limitations and boundaries of the local, but is not necessarily transnational, whereas all transnational interaction is probably also translocal. In comparison, the translocal will also include sociological, religious and cultural qualities and will be a reminder of its other side, the local, as well, whereas transnational more points to the political dimension and importance of crossing the borders of nation states creating a separate grit of references. Th e recent phase of globalisation has encouraged Muslim groups and sects to go out into the world and expand in new ways that go much beyond the traditional bounds and networks in which they organised historically. While references will be drawn from various ‘Muslim’ regions, the focus will be on Islamic groups from South Asia.6 Th ey are a good example of this trend as almost all sects and interpretations which developed there during the last 150 years or so have nowadays established branches and networks in other parts of the world. In this they not only follow the routes of migration of Indian Muslims within the former colonial British Empire and beyond. Th ey have also established a presence where Indian or Pakistani migrants had not settled in larger numbers such as Indonesia or North and West Africa. At the same time, South Asian Islam is not the only regional centre that has radiated such infl uence. Religious groups from Saudi Arabia, from Iran and Turkey, Sufi orders from North Africa and the Middle East, have followed suit. Th ey are currently operating translocal and transregional networks of signifi cant expanse. Th ey show that globalisation has not led to the homogenisation of Islam and of Muslim networks, as feared by secular and Islamist critics alike. While to the undiscerning observer from outside, the presence of Muslim actors and Islamic discourse in the public sphere has grown tremendously, it is a picture far from being uniform or homogeneous.

5 For the concept of translocality as a research perspective, see Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen,“Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verfl echtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), http://hsozkult.geschichte.hu-berlin.de/forum/id= 632&type=artikel&sort=datum&order=down&search=translokalit%C3%A4 (accessed July 2006, 18), and introduction to this volume. 6 Cf. Dietrich Reetz, Islam in the Public Sphere: Religious Groups in India 1900– 1947 (Delhi, 2006). ‘alternate’ globalities? 297

Antecedents

Th e current phase of transnational Muslim activism is undoubtedly building on a historical legacy. Transnational networks of Muslim activists have long existed throughout the Muslim world. Th ey are particularly well-known for Sufi scholars and their disciples.7 Graduates of established religious schools, madrasas and dar al-‘ulums, have stayed in contact with their alma mater and with each other. Also politically motivated global Islamic activity has existed before the current phase of ‘Islamism’. It had been the focus of international attention around the turn of the twentieth century in the shape of ‘Pan-Islamism’. Colonial powers felt that Muslim activists challenged their rule as they allegedly owed no allegiance to their country or the reigning sovereign, as they suggested, but to Mecca. Th e well-known British administrator William Hunter pointedly asked towards the end of the nineteenth century: “Our Indian Mussalmans: are they bound in conscience to rebel against the Queen?”8 It was during the early nineteenth century that modern Islamic mobilisation in South Asia split along sectarian lines. In quick succession a number of schools of thought and sectarian groupings emerged which started out as distinctly local phenomena. Th eir doctrinal ambitions soon shaped them into translocal forces. Th ey wanted to prove that they represented the only ‘true’ Islam, seeking to ‘re-convert’ other Muslims to their causes all over British-India and beyond. Th e reformist Deobandi and Tablighi networks (Hanafi Sunni) were centred on the Islamic Seminary in Deoband, North India, which was founded in 1866 by Muhammad Qasim Nanaotawi (1832–79) and Rashid Ahmad Gangohi (1829–1905), two conservative scholars. Th e school advocated a purist, scripturalist and revivalist Islam, invoking the Qur’an and Sunna. Many Islamic schools in South Asia follow its teaching.9 Th e Tablighi movement was created in north India in 1926 by Muhammad Ilyas (1885–1944) inspired by Deobandi teachings. Originally it was formed to oppose the re-conversion eff orts of

7 Miriam Cooke and Bruce B. Lawrence, eds., Muslim Networks from Medieval Scholars to Modern Feminist (Delhi, 2005); Martin van Bruinessen and Julia Day Howell, Sufi sm and the “Modern” in Islam (London, 2007). 8 W.W. Hunter, Our Indian Mussalmans: Are Th ey Bound in Conscience to Rebel Against the Queen? (London, 1871). 9 Barbara Metcalf, Islamic Revival in British India: Deoband, 1860–1900 (Princeton, 1982); Reetz, Islam in the Public Sphere, p. 64f. 298 dietrich reetz reformist Hindu preachers from the Arya Samaj (Society of the Nobles, 1875). Th e latter was seeking to return Muslim tribes, mainly from the Mewat region around Delhi, to the fold of Hinduism to which their ancestors had belonged. Th e missionary approach of the Tabligh Jama‘at (TJ)10 dispatching groups of lay preachers to other Muslim communities turned out to be highly successful. Th e TJ grew into a mainstream mass movement in India, Pakistan and Bangladesh.11 Th e Sufi -oriented traditionalist Barelwi School of thought goes back to the religious scholar and writer Maulana Ahmad Raza Khan Barewli (1856–1921) and fi rst appeared at the end of the 19th century in Bareilly, North India, close to Deoband.12 He defended Sufi -related practices of Pir- and shrine worship heavily attacked by Deobandi purists.13 Th e Ahl-i Hadith (AH, People of the Tradition) scholars and schools represent a minority purist Sunni sect rejecting all law schools but privileging the Prophetic traditions (hadith). It formed under the leadership of Siddiq Hasan Khan (1832–90) and Maulana Nazir Husain (1805–1902) in North India in Bhopal, the Punjab and the United Provinces around 1864.14 Th e AH network is polarised between a scholarly and a more radical, militant wing.15 Th e minority sect of the Ahmadiyya founded by Ghulam Ahmad Mirza (1839–1908) in 1889 also emerged in Punjab province. Most mainstream Muslim groups regard it as heretic. It is particularly the claims of its founder and his successors to some degree of Prophet- hood that have enraged radical Sunni Muslim activists. Since the 1920s Ahmadis were persecuted for their beliefs by Sunni radicals accusing

10 Urdu: Missionary Movement. 11 Muhammad Khalid Masud, Travellers in Faith: Studies of the Tablighi Jama‘at as a Transnational Islamic Movement for Faith Renewal (Leiden, 2000); Reetz, Islam in the Public Sphere, p. 75f. 12 Usha Sanyal, Devotional Islam and Politics in British India: Ahmed Riza Khan Barelvi and his Movement, 1870–1920 (Delhi, 1996). 13 Reetz, Islam in the Public Sphere, p. 64f. 14 Martin Riexinger, Sanaullah Amritsari (1868–1948) und die Ahl-i-Hadis im Pun- jab unter britischer Herrschaft (Würzburg, 2004); idem, “How Favourable is Puritan Islam to Modernity? A Study of the Ahl-i Hadīs ̣ in Late Nineteenth/Early Twenti- eth Century South Asia,” in Colonialism, Modernity, and Religious Identities: Reli- gious Reform Movements in South Asia, ed. Gwilym Beckerlegge (New Delhi, 2008), pp. 147–165. 15 Dietrich Reetz, “Kenntnisreich und unerbittlich: Der sunnitische Radikalismus der Ahl-i Hadith in Südasien”, in Sendungsbewußtsein oder Eigennutz: Zu Motivation und Selbstverständnis islamischer Mobilisierung, ed. idem (Berlin, 2001), pp. 79–106. ‘alternate’ globalities? 299 them of committing apostasy by subscribing to the Prophetic claims of their leaders. In 1924 an Islamic court in Kabul had sentenced one Ahmadi activist, Ni’matullah, to death for holding fast to key Ahmadi beliefs.16 Th e Jama‘at-i Islami (JI, Islamic Party) created in British India in 1941 and the legacy of its founder Abu’l Ala Maududi (1903–79) are at the core of a rather modernist network of affi liated groups and institutions. From the beginning, the JI being a ‘cadre party’ and religious organisation, staged claims to political and ideological hegemony in society.17 Sayyid Ahmad Khan (1817–1898) established a rationalist and modernist interpretation of Islam which was based on the dictum that God could not have given reason to man without wanting him to use it.18 His emphasis was on providing Muslims with modern western education in a religious environment where they would not be alienated from their cultural and religious traditions. For this purpose he established the Muhammadan Anglo-Oriental College in Aligarh in 1875, which was converted into a full-fl edged university in 1920. While his writings caused much controversy and created confl ict with the religious scholars of the time, his thinking deeply infl uenced the discourse and institution-building among Muslims of South Asia. Th is applied as much to the inception of the Pakistan movement as to modern Muslim educational institutions.19 Ubaidullah Sindhi (1872–1944), a left -wing Deobandi scholar, was considered a political radical in his time because of his staunch anti- colonialist and pro-socialist views for which he used classical theological arguments. His political discourse combined with a critical reading of the Islamic sources turned him into an icon of progressive Muslim thinkers of the Southasian subcontinent ever since. Along with religious scholars from Deoband and other schools, he was arrested in 1916 and interned in Malta until 1920 for participating in a plot to

16 Yohanan Friedmann, Prophecy Continuous: Aspects of Aḥmadi Religious Th ought and its Medieval Background (Berkeley, 1989), p. 28; Simon Ross Valentine, Islam and the Ahmadiyya Jama‘at: History, Belief, Practice (New York, 2008). 17 Seyyed Vali Reza Nasr, Mawdudi and the Making of Islamic Revivalism (New York, 1996). 18 Cf. Aziz Ahmad and Gustav von Grunebaum, eds., Muslim Self-statement in India and Pakistan 1857–1968 (Wiesbaden, 1970), pp. 25–48. 19 David Lelyveld, Aligarh’s First Generation: Muslim Solidarity in British India (Delhi, 1996 [1978]). 300 dietrich reetz overthrow colonial rule and to set up a nationalist Indian government in exile in Kabul.20 Since then these traditions and schools of thought have globalised themselves. Th e high global impact of groups from South Asia is largely explained by the fl ow of South Asian migrants, fi rst within the British colonial empire, and later within the Commonwealth and the globalising economy.21 Where British colonialism claimed that the sun never set down over the British Empire, today it is the Indian Minis- try for Overseas Indians, proudly rephrasing the slogan that the sun never sets down on the Indian diaspora.22 In 2005 alone it is calculated that the fi ve major South Asian countries sent over 1.5 million migrant workers abroad legally. In 2000, there were 24 million South Asians abroad, a fi gure that does not include the historic and the illegal migration.23 Indian Muslim groups shared in these dynamics which were strongly pushed by Gujarati trading castes, the Memons, Suratis, Kha- tris and others. Th omas Blom Hansen shows in his study of South African Muslims of South Asian origin how Gujarati origins are being refl ected by Muslim activists. Th ey undertake reformist eff orts of Ara- bisation with the slogan “We are Arabs from Gujarat”.24 Historically, the Deobandis, Tablighis and the Ahmadis were the fi rst to start globalising themselves towards the end of colonial rule. Th e seventies and eighties saw another phase of expansion on the back of the Islamisation policies of the Zia-ul-Haq administration in Pakistan, and new massive fl ows of labour migration from Pakistan, Bangladesh, and India, to the Gulf States, but also to Western Europe and North America. Th ese developments helped the political Islamists of the Jama’at-i Islami, groups such as the Ahl-i Hadith, the Barelwis

20 K.H. Ansari, “Pan-Islam and the Making of the Early Indian Muslim Socialist,” Modern Asian Studies 20, 3 (1986), 509–537; Reetz, Islam in the Public Sphere. 21 Crispin Bates, ed., Community, Empire, and Migration: South Asians in Diaspora (New York, 2001). 22 Th e Chairman of the High Level Committee on the Indian Diaspora, Dr. L.M. Singhvi, at a media briefi ng on 1 November 2002: “I have oft en said that the Sun never sets on the Indian diaspora from Fiji to Canada around the world.” At http://www .meaindia.nic.in/mediainteraction/2002/11/01m01.htm (accessed 17 June 2008). 23 “South Asia: A Special Report,” Migration News 14 (October 2008), 4. http:// migration.ucdavis.edu/mn/more.php?id=3446_0_3_0 (accessed November 11, 2008) 24 Hansen, Th omas Blom, “‘We are Arabs from Gujarat!’ Th e Purifi cation of Muslim Identity in Contemporary South Africa,” RAU Sociology Seminar Series (Edinburgh, February 14, 2003), http://www.ukzn.ac.za/CCS/default.asp?3,28,10,900 (accessed June 24, 2009). ‘alternate’ globalities? 301 and the Pakistani Shias expand their transnational activities, fi rst on a regional scale. Partly as an outfl ow of the civil war in Afghanistan, the proliferation of an internationalist Islamist ideology in relation to confl icts in the Middle East, the fi rst Gulf War, the confl icts in Kashmir and Chechnya, the nineties formed yet another phase of expansion of these groups to intense levels of global networking.

Doctrinal Diff erentiation

Th is process of expansion in South Asia and beyond was marked by a growing diff erentiation. It followed both doctrinal and cultural markers. From the perspective of Islamic doctrine and practice these groups positioned themselves in the ‘Islamic fi eld’25 in diff erent ways. More general markers to such positioning are claims by these groups to some form of reformism, ‘traditionalism’ or modernism. Many scholars point to the relative nature of such classifi cation.26 However it is believed that it could still serve as an indication of a general orientation of these groups within the Islamic fi eld. Th ese claims more oft en speak about the intentions than about the realities. We would use these terms here less as analytical categories from ‘outside’ rather than as refl ections of emphasis in Islamic doctrine and practice from ‘inside’ with a preference for ‘reformation’ (islah), ‘adherence’ (taqlid) or ‘independent reasoning’ (ijtihad). At the same time Muslim groups combined these orientations and developed sub-types of these concepts and practices. In the process of growth and global expansion we have seen gliding shift s of paradigm which require further exploration. Within this confi guration, the Deobandis, Ahl-i Hadith and Jama’at-i Islami broadly follow the doctrinal orientation of the reformists, cham- pioning islah as a way to return to the perceived or real original meaning of the teachings and practice of Islam. Th e term is used here with

25 Th e term ‘Islamic fi eld’ is used here with reference to Bourdieu’s theory of the fi eld of cultural production as a system of “objective relations” between agents or institutions and as the “site of struggles” over power to consecrate values and beliefs. Pierre Bourdieu, Th e Field of Cultural Production (New York, 1993), p. 78. 26 Cf. Benjamin F. Soares and René Otayek, Islam and Muslim Politics in Africa (New York, 2007); Roman Loimeier, “Patterns and Peculiarities of Islamic Reform in Africa,” Journal of Religion in Africa 33, 3 (2003), 237–262; Reinhard Schulze, Isla- mischer Internationalismus im 20. Jahrhundert: Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der Islamischen Weltliga (Leiden, 1990). 302 dietrich reetz reference to the movement of islah as associated with the Egyptians Muhammad Abduh (1849–1905) and, with a more conservative orientation, the Syrian Rashid Rida (1865–1935) making a strong impact on Asia and Africa outside of Arabia.27 In various ways they sought to intervene in Muslim society to bring it into conformity with their understanding of Islamic precepts. Inspired by the piety and practices of the fi rst three generations of Islam, the al-salaf, the reformist trend of the Salafi yya branched off from the islah movement and took on a life of its own.28 From the point of view of Islamic doctrine the revivalists have been critical towards the law schools rejecting blind adherence (taqlid) to them, although they still favoured some form of conformity. Instead many revivalists looked favourably at ‘independent reasoning’ (ijtihad) to apply the Qur’an and the Sunna to new and current circumstances, mostly in a more literal reading. Th e Deobandi school of thought considered itself thoroughly reformist, i.e. oriented towards islah, although it still followed taqlid with regard to its own concept. It never shared the ‘anti-Sufi ’ turn of many modern reformist movements as it advocated a balance between the law (shari’a) and the path (tariqa), between reformism (islah) and mysticism (tasawwuf ). Th e Deobandis accepted those forms of Sufi sm which they saw as compatible with the shari’a. A number of Deobandi scholars even saw tasawwuf as indispensable for bringing out the right character of students and followers.29 Such orientation is also refl ected in the creed of Deoband30 emphasising the unity of shari’a and tariqa, or in other words, reformism and spiritual mysticism. Th is double orientation is also visible in the promi-

27 Malcolm H. Kerr, Islamic Reform: Th e Political and Legal Th eories of Muḥammad ‘Abduh and Rashīd Riḍā (Berkeley, 1966); A. Merad, Hamid Algar, N. Berkes and Aziz Ahmad, “Islāḥ ̣,“ in Encyclopaedia of Islam 2, 4 (Leiden, 1990), pp. 141–171. 28 For a discussion of the many shades of the Salafi yya movement, cf. P. Shinar and Werner Ende, “Salafi yya,” in Encyclopaedia of Islam 2, 8 (Leiden, 1995), pp. 900–909; Werner Ende, Udo Steinbach and Renate Laut, Der Islam in der Gegenwart (München, 2005); Fritz Steppat and Th omas Scheffl er, Islam als Partner: Islamkundliche Aufsätze 1944–1996, (Beiruter Texte und Studien) 78 (Würzburg, 2001). 29 My interviews with leading Deobandi scholars at Deoband (December 2001). 30 Th e school adopted a formal document describing the ‘Tack’ of the Deoband school, highlighting the importance of (1) the law (shari’a), (2) the path (tariqa), (3) the custom of the Prophet (sunna), (4) the Hanafi legal tradition, (5) the dialectics of the classical Hanafi scholar al-Maturidi, (6) the ‘defence’ against ‘false’ beliefs, such as polytheism, and (7) the preference for the thought of the founders of the school, Muhammad Qasim Nanaotawi (1832–79) and Rashid Ahmad Gangohi (1829–1905), Reetz, Islam in the Public Sphere, pp. 316–318. ‘alternate’ globalities? 303 nence of Deobandi scholars known for their reformist writings and also for their extensive networks of Sufi disciples. Th e scholars Ashraf ‘Ali Th anawi (1863–1943) and Muhammad Zakariyya (1898–1982) are good cases in point. Th anawi’s and Zakariyya’s books are featured in various Deobandi seminars the world over. On the current website of the Deoband School, among the six books presented on the English- language interface, three are authored by Th anawi: “Rights in Islam”, “Masail of Hairs”, “Nikkah (Marriage) in Islam”.31 Th anawi’s writings are a source of reference for the Deoband-infl uenced Association of Religious Scholars of South Africa (Jam‘iatul ‘Ulama).32 Zakariyya penned the hadith selection commonly used by the Tablighi Jama‘at, the Fazail-e Amal. It is recommended by various Deobandi institutions around the world.33 Th e spiritual importance of these two scholars is amply demonstrated by Muft i Ebrahim Salejee who founded and heads the Deobandi School in Durban, South Africa. On his website, he lists his spiritual connection (silsila) with both Th anawi and Zakariyya.34 Th e Ahl-i Hadith are more rigid in their rejection of Sufi practices. Th ey also reject the law schools and go back to the Prophetic traditions. Th e Ahl-i Hadith believed they had direct access to the divine insight of the Prophet through the Prophetic traditions (hadith). Th is allowed them to circumvent the law schools. Th ey argued that Muhammad received the Prophetic traditions as part of the revelation (Qur’an 53:3, 4). For this reason they enjoined Muslims to follow all the Prophetic traditions.35 Th ey did not extend their reverence of the Prophet to saints and their shrines, regarding this as aberrant. Today they highlight the principle of tawhid (Unity of God), shared

31 http://darululoom-deoband.com/english/books/index.htm (accessed November 4, 2008). 32 A site-related search on Google reveals 18 such references: http://www.google.com/s earch?hl=de&q=thanwi+site%3Ajamiat.co.za&btnG=Suche&lr= (accessed November 4, 2008). 33 See the Deobandi Darul ‘Ulum in Holcombe, UK, on the website of which it appears in numerous references: http://www.inter-islam.org/Biographies/biohazrt- shyk.htm, http://www.inter-islam.org/Actions/ir105.html (accessed November 11, 2008). See also the Islamic bookshop trading in reformist literature at http://darul- ishaat.co.uk and http://www.iqra.org (accessed November 11, 2008). 34 http://alhaadi.org.za//index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=257&Ite mid=33 (accessed November 4, 2008). 35 Cf. Muḥammad Ibrāhīm Mīr Siyālkotị̄ , Tarīkh-e ahl-i ḥadīth (Urdu: History of the ‘People of the Traditions’) (Sargodha, 1953), pp. 168ff . 304 dietrich reetz with other Salafi groups. Other forms of devotion are regarded as shirk (polytheism) that should be actively countered.36 Th e Jama‘at-i Islami combines doctrinal orthodoxy that is not far removed from Deoband with an emphasis on the importance of political power and the state for the formation of an Islamic society. Maududi consciously shaped this group as a religious organisation and a political party.37 Th e party is eager to answer the modern challenges of politics by taking an active anti-western stand on issues of globalisation, anti-terror policies or the ‘hegemony’ of the United States. It embraces not only modern party politics, but also modern means of communication, catering to its middle class social basis. Th e Barelwis could be considered to follow a ‘traditionalist’ line. As ‘traditionalist’ we will regard the diverse forms of interpretation and practice based on adherence (taqlid) to legal opinion and established custom as they have been inherited in the historical process. Th is legacy was embodied in local rituals, saint and shrine worship, and was transmitted through local mosques and Quranic schools. Anthropolo- gists sometimes called it ‘lived’ or ‘living’ Islam.38 Th e Barelwis defend the traditions of lived Islam which they fi nd under attack from purists of the Deobandi and Ahl-i Hadith school. Th ey consider their approach as legitimate, i.e. being rightly guided by the Qur’an and the Sunnah, the tradition of the Prophet and his companions. Th eir customs include the veneration of Saints and shrines. Th ey believe in their power of intercession as followers plead with God through their donations to have their wishes granted. Th ey show special love and aff ection for the Prophet, and this is seen by their critics as detracting from the monism of Islam. Although they are attacked by the Deobandis for their alleged lack of ritual and doctrinal purity, most of their doctrinal and legal views are close to Deobandi orthodoxy.

36 See the declaration of their beliefs on their British website where principle no. one of their aims and objectives reads: “To spread the belief in Tawheed (the oneness of God) is the main purpose of the coming of the Prophets. It was their mission to wipe out Shirk (belief in other gods) from the lives of the people.” http://www.mjah .org/AboutMJAH/AimsandObjectives/tabid/60/Default.aspx (accessed November 11, 2008). 37 Nasr, Mawdudi. 38 Imtiaz Ahmad and Helmut Reifeld, eds., Lived Islam in South Asia: Adaptation, Accommodation and Confl ict (Delhi, 2004); Magnus Marsden, Living Islam: Muslim Religious Experience in Pakistan’s North-West Frontier (Cambridge, 2005). ‘alternate’ globalities? 305

Th e Ahmadiyya is seen by most Sunni and Shia Muslims as heterodox because of the claims of its founder and subsequent leaders to some degree of (minor) prophethood. It also renounced violent jihad in contrast to classical Islam which argues for both peaceful and violent jihad. Beyond that the Ahmadis combine doctrinal conservatism with social modernity and political loyalism. Th e Jama‘at-i Islami and the followers of the Aligarh school of thought would be considered here representing diff erent shades of modernism. Th is would be based on the understanding to call those scholars and trends modernist, which see no inherent contradiction between the confi rmation of the faith and the pursuit of rational, scientifi c thought. Th ey would share the method of ‘independent reasoning’ (ijtihad) with the revivalists. But their reading of the Qur’an and the Sunna was less literal and more allegorical and metaphorical. Th ey applied this method to a ‘rationalist’ reading of the Qur’an, striving to bring it into consonance with modern scientifi c and technological thought. In consequence, many accepted the political and economic requirements of modern industrial and capitalist societies. Th is process of diversifi cation has helped to intensify competition between them in a global ‘market’ of Islamic institutions and concepts. At the same time it has led to some form of ideological convergence. Every contestant is anxious to present his vision of Islam as the only ‘true’ Islam, as their very own reformist agenda. We see the concept of reformation, or islah, acquiring new meanings and connotations. In a more general sense for the Islamic networks the task of reformation, or islah, becomes synonymous with expansion of their global institutions. It is also equated with development eff orts in favour of Muslim communities which perceive themselves as being at ‘the receiving end’ of globalisation in Muslim minority societies and globally in relation to western domination. While such classifi cation was based on their major doctrinal beliefs (‘aqida) the groups also showed cross infl uences of other orientations in the Islamic fi eld. Reformist groups tackle modern topics and retain traditionalist infl uences. Modern groups develop reformist pretensions. Traditionalist scholars modernise themselves. Th e double trend of diversifi cation and convergence becomes more obvious if we look at the formation of ‘religio-cultural milieus.’ 306 dietrich reetz

Religio-cultural Milieus

In cultural terms, these groups grew into extended networks developing features of sects and clans. Some of them tended to become partly endogamous where followers would prefer to intermarry. Over time the groupings expanded into religio-cultural milieus. A ‘milieu’ is understood here as a religio-cultural life-world which expresses itself in preferences for a cluster of religious networks and affi liations sharing a common cultural, and sometimes regional-geographic profi le of origin and orientation. Such an understanding of the ‘milieu’ would connect with research in philosophical and social anthropology where a milieu would present a “world arranged and structured according to the predispositions of the actor.”39 In a globalising world translocal actors would carry these predilections with them forming what would be for Max Scheler a ‘milieu-structure’.40 In globalisation, it helps travellers, migrants and their descendents “to make themselves at home in various places in the world.”41 From the perspective of our research, it is felt that such preferences are not only subjective attitudes, but take on features of social structures and networks, spawning institutions accompanied by a distinct internal social and organisational culture. For the groups discussed here they would create competing religio- cultural milieus that formed separate segments of the ‘Islamic fi eld’. Th e milieus would adhere to the religious tradition and the cultural aspects associated with its implementation. In this process they would further diff erentiate reproducing the social and doctrinal diff erentiation of the Islamic fi eld within each milieu where we would ndfi reformist, orthodox-traditionalist and modernist elements side-by-side. Th e following listing includes samples of such diversifi cation within the translocal milieus of the South Asian Islamic groups:

39 Martin Albrow, John Eade, Jörg Dürrschmidt and Neil Washbourne, “Th e Impact of Globalization on Sociological Concepts: Community, Culture and Milieu,” in Living the Global City: Globalization as a Local Process, ed. John Eade (London, 1997), p. 30. 40 Albrow et al., “Impact of Globalization“; Max Scheler and Maria Scheler, Der Formalismus in der Ethik und die materiale Wertethik (Bern, 1966), pp. 148–172. 41 Albrow et al., “Impact of Globalization,“ p. 31. ‘alternate’ globalities? 307

Deobandis Th e Deobandi milieu nowadays encompasses madrasas, political groups, ideological organisations, (secular) school associations, social or cultural groups. Th e affi nities between those institutional networks are maintained by Deobandi theologians. Th ey concurrently get involved in diff erent forms of activism responding to broad-ranged needs. Th ey seek to serve local Muslim communities, build roads for the social and economic advancement of their followers and answer the missionary quest of spreading the ‘true’ Islam in Deobandi interpretation. Deobandi madrasas and mosques have established a global presence following in the footsteps of South Asian migrant communities. Th ey are prominently represented in Britain, Portugal, Spain, South Africa and South East Asia. In several places they have started attracting followers of non-South Asian descent, such as local Malay- and Bhasa- speakers in Malaysia and Indonesia, Muslims of Malay and North African descent in South Africa, East African Indians and Black Afri- can Muslims in Portugal, and Maghribean Muslims in Spain. Most students attending Deobandi madrasas follow a regular six- to eight-year religious degree course giving them the qualifi cation of an ‘alim (religious scholar). Others attend courses to become a Quranic memoriser (hafi z) or reciter (qari). Some of the more prominent and successful madrasas outside South Asia include the following: Darul ‘Ulum Dewsbury, UK Darul ‘Ulum Holcombe, Bury, UK Jami’atu’l Imam Muhammad Zakaria, Bradford, UK (for girls) Darul ‘Ulum Zakariyya, Lenasia, South Africa Darul ‘Ulum Azadville, South Africa Darul ‘Ulum Sri Petaling (Tablighi Markaz), Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Darul ‘Ulum al-Madania, Buff alo, NY, USA Darul ‘Ulum al Islamia de Portugal, Palmela (1994).42 Deobandi political and religious pressure groups include the parties of religious scholars, the Jam‘iat-ul ‘Ulama, which have formed in Paki- stan, Bangladesh, India, South Africa and Canada. Ideological bodies

42 Abdool Karim Vakil, “Do Outro ao Diverso: Islão e Muçulmanos em Portugal: História, discursos, Identidades,” Revista Lusófona de Ciência das Religiões 3, 5/6 (2004), 283–312, http://cienciareligioes.ulusofona.pt/arquivo_religioes/religioes5_6/ pdf/283–312Vakil.pdf (accessed October 4, 2008), p. 306. 308 dietrich reetz of Deobandi orientation can be found in the Khatm-e Nabuwwat councils and departments seeking to uphold the principle of Muham- mad being the ‘Seal of the Prophets.’ Th ey are chasing ‘deviant’ beliefs and groups seen as challenging this principle. Among those groups, the Ahmadiyya are their prime target as their founder and leaders supposedly claim some Prophetic faculties. Deobandi scholars also participate in the organisation and running of public and private Muslim schools teaching the secular curriculum for primary and secondary education, combined with religious instruction. Such schools have successfully been operating since the 1980s in Pakistan, India, Britain and South Africa. It is the Association of Mus- lim Schools in South Africa that is particularly active in this fi eld. For a long time it was run by a Deobandi ‘alim, Muft i Zubair Bayat.43 Th e South African schools accept a modernist perspective on society. Th ey view their service to the community as a means to provide Muslims with modern education in a religious environment. Any ideological pretensions about the ‘Islamisation’ of educational contents have been relegated to the background. Deobandi thinking also reaches out into the production of modern teaching material on Islam. Th e Iqra Foundation Mumbai produces high quality non-sectarian teaching and reading material on Islamic subjects for general Muslim schools, but also for adult education. It forms part of an Islamic educational trust in Mumbai (India) and Chi- cago (USA) extending its infl uence across the Muslim world. Its material is used for Islam classes in public and private secular schools in countries such as India, South Africa, Britain, and the US. Its Mumbai director Ms Usma Naheed is related to a Deobandi ‘alim and mediates Deobandi concepts.44

43 For a lecture on the Islamic Awareness Day 2003 in Tooting, UK (September 28, 2003), Bayat was introduced thus: “Muft i Zubair Ismail Bayat is presently the director of DIRECT (Darul-Ihsan Research and Education Centre). He is a former chairman of the Association of Muslim Schools in Kwa Zulu Natal, South Africa. He is a graduate of Darul-Uloom, Deoband and has a Masters in Islam Studies from Rand Afrikaans University. For six years he taught Advanced Islamic Studies at Madrasah Arabiyyah Islamiyyah, Azadville, South Africa. In 1994 he established Zakariyya Muslim School, where he is currently serving as an advisor and patron to the school. Since the early 90s he has been actively involved in Islamic Dawah, having delivered a series of lectures on a variety of Islamic topics in several countries. He also serves as editor of the Al-Jamiat newspaper. He is an active young scholar to whom many students of Islam turn for help and guidance.” http://www.ummah.net/forum/showthread.php?t=23542 (accessed November 4, 2008). 44 Cf. www.iqrafoundation.com for the US branch and its publishing house http:// www.iqra.org (accessed November 4, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 309

Today the missionary movement of the Tablighi Jama‘at is believed to be the largest translocal and transnational Muslim organisation. It is known for its association with Deobandi scholars around the world. It operates through Deobandi schools and mosques, although not exclusively. Religious scholars have a varying degree of infl uence in its activity. Its doctrinal orientation is reformist-Deobandi, but it keeps alive a certain Sufi legacy. That infl uence is embodied in ritual prayers invoking God’s name (zikr), in prayers of supplication (du’a) and in an emphasis on character and intention (niyyat)—practices and concepts common in Sufi Islam.45 Its outward appearance is marked by a preference for local Muslim dress, oft en the long white trousers and shirt common in North India. But the local Muslim dress from the Maghrib or West Africa, for instance, is also accepted in those regions. In Europe and North America or Australia western dress is not uncommon either.

Barelwis Th e Barelwis also extended their religious community to the South Asian diaspora. Th e teachings of the founder, Raza Ahmad Khan, his shrine and the madrasa in Bareilly related to his family have become the centre of a worldwide network of Islamic schools, shrines and organisations oft en competing with Deobandi institutions. Th eir milieu has expanded enormously and grown exceptionally diverse. Th eir main infl uence is felt in South Africa, Great Britain and North America. Th ey have formed institutions the world over, such as:46 World Islamic Mission, Wembley (UK)47 British Muslim Council, Derby (UK)48 Madrassa Ahle Sunny Jamat, Laranjeiro; Darul Ulum Kadria-Ashrafi a, Odivelas (Portugal)49

45 Cf. Dietrich Reetz, “Sufi Spirituality Fires Reformist Zeal: Th e Tablighi Jamaa‘t in Today’s India and Pakistan,” Archives de Sciences Sociales des Religions 135 (2006), 33–52. 46 Some of these links are owed to Martin Riexinger, South Asian Islam: Worldwide Movements and Organisations Centered in South Asia, Collection of Internet links, n.d., http://wwwuser.gwdg.de/~mriexin/sasislam.html (accessed November 11, 2008); http://wwwuser.gwdg.de/~mriexin/sasislam.html (accessed November 4, 2008). 47 http://www.wimuk.com (accessed November 11, 2008). 48 http://www.wimuk.com (accessed November 11, 2008). 49 Vakil, “Do Outro ao Diverso,” p. 306 (accessed November 11, 2008). 310 dietrich reetz

Masjid Abdul Aleem Siddique (Singapore)50 Imam Mustafa Raza Research Centre, Durban (South Africa)51 Most of their institutions are directly associated with Pakistan-based organisations. In the diaspora, they rarely transcend the limits of ethnic followers of South Asian descent, mostly from Pakistan. Similar to the Deobandi madrasas, their teaching is associated with the orthodox curriculum of the dars-e nizami. Ritual distinctions from the Deobandis are largely focused on special prayers in praise of the Prophet (nat, salami) and on the commemoration of the Prophet’s birthday (milad-un-nabi). Also the concept of intercession (tawas- sul) is a bone of contention as Barelwi followers believe in the power of saints and shrines to mediate God’s infl uence, a belief, strongly attacked by the Deobandis. Beside orthodox, scholar-based mosques and madrasas the Barelwis are running supplementary networks with a nuanced understanding of Islamic doctrine and practice. Recently the pietist network of the Barelwi missionary organisation of the Da‘wat-i Islami has become very prominent. Founded in 1980 by Muhammad Ilyas ul-Qadri,52 it was conceived as a counterweight to the Deobandi group Tablighi Jama’at. However, unlike the latter, it is mainly limited to migrants of South Asian origins and their descendents. Th e DI runs mosques and Quranic schools for children. Its style is conservative and pietist. While it follows the ritual spiritualism of the Barelwis with outbursts of emotions of joy and sorrow in their community meetings (ijtima), it also emphasises orthodox reformism in the tradition of islah. Th is emphasis on correct Islamic practice gives their activity a reformist ideological thrust turning them into some kind of ‘Deobandi’ force within the Barelwi camp. Th e group strictly emphasises traditional clothing in the style of North Indian Muslims (shalwar-qamis) combined with a trademark green turban.

50 http://aleemsiddique.org.sg/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 51 http://www.noori.org/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 52 See, http://www.dawateislami.net. Cf. Th omas Gugler, “Parrots of Paradise, Sym- bols of the Super-Muslim: Sunnah, Sunnaization and Self-Fashioning in the Islamic Missionary Movements Tablighi-i Jama‘at, Da‘wat-e Islami and Sunni Da‘wat-e Islami,” Paper presented at the 20th European Conference of Modern South Asian Studies, Manchester University, July 9, 2008. See, http://archiv.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/ savifadok/volltexte/2008/142/ (accessed November 11, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 311

Parallel to the DI, the comparatively modern network of the Min- haj-ul-Qur’an (MQ),53 founded in 1980 by Dr. Muhammad Tahir- ul-Qadri (b. 1951), has spread among diaspora Muslims of Pakistani descent. It grew out of an educational movement started in Lahore, Pakistan, where its schools teach secular courses of the secondary and tertiary level combined with religious instruction. In other countries they run cultural-cum-religious centres where migrants of Pakistani descent can also pray and retain the contact with their cultural and religious tradition back in Pakistan. Th e group acts as a migrant support network, but so does the DI in many places. Th e MQ channels resources collected from membership fees of its global branches into its missionary and educational activity. Th e movement is operating in more than 80 countries around the world. In 1989 Qadri also established a political party, the Pakistan Awami Tahrik (PAT),54 pursuing an “Islamic path of moderation, development, friendliness and peace.”55 Its distinct development orientation clearly gives it a modernist direction. Th e South Asian Barelwi tradition also gave birth to the international network of Islamic Propagation Centres founded by Ahmed Hoosen Deedat (1918–2005). As a child he migrated with his family from Gujarat in India to South Africa and established the Islamic Propaga- tion Centre International (IPCI) in Durban. Religious centres following his teachings are running in many Islamic and western countries.56 Th eir emphasis is on comparative religious discourse highlighting the superiority of the Qur’an as compared to the Bible. Th eir pamphlets teach ‘correct’ Islamic practice (prayer, dress, fasting, and education) in a modern setting. Doctrinally the centres operate across the conventional lines of orientation. Th ey combine propagation (da‘wa) with reformation eff orts (islah) and the observance of tradition (taqlid). For this reason they are sometimes counted with the modernist da‘wa of the JI variety or even the Salafi type. But the family network behind the organisation based in South Africa (Durban) is related to the Barelwi section of the South Asian diaspora.

53 Th e group’s website, http://www.minhaj.org/, calls itself proudly “Minhaj-ul- Qur’an International.” 54 http://www.pat.com.pk/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 55 Pakistan Awami Tehreek, Putting People First: [Election] Manifesto 2002 (Lahore, September 2, 2009), p. 6, http://pat.com.pk/campaign/20020902_pat_manifesto.pdf (accessed October, 26, 2008). 56 http://www.ahmed-deedat.co.za (accessed October 26, 2008). 312 dietrich reetz

Ahl-i Hadith Th e milieu of the modern Ahl-i Hadith is known for its strong orientation towards Saudi Arabia and its affi liation with Salafi networks. Th e AH movement established its overseas branches since the seventies. Outside South Asia it is active in the Gulf region and on the Arabian Peninsula as well as in Britain, North America and South Africa. It is strongly tied to Muslim communities of South Asian descent. Its main headquarters overseas is in Britain in Birmingham where the movement established the Green Lane Masjid as its headquarters. It is registered as Markazi Jamiat Ahl-e-Hadith, UK (Central Party of the People of the Tradition)57 which indicates the close connection with its Pakistani counterpart of the same name. In Britain it is running a network of over 40 affi liated mosques, community centres and basic Islamic schools. From this headquarters it publishes a modern English-language journal Th e Straight Path propagating its Salafi ideology. In Saudi Arabia it has recently established a highly ideological mission (da‘wa) centre stoking the fl ames of intersectarian dissent, the Jeddah Dawah Centre (JDC).58 It runs a separate TV channel on the video website YouTube.com—Noor TV9.59 Ahl-i Hadith scholars and graduates of their madrasas are also involved in setting up private (secular) Muslim schools in South Africa, Britain and the Gulf.

Ahmadiyya Due to the enormous pressure from its opponents, but also because of its ambitious programmes of expansion and conversion, the Ahmadis developed into a sect and closed community early on. Th ey took on features of a diversifi ed religio-cultural milieu complete with religious schools, ‘secular’ schools, separate organisations and institutions for men, women, youth and children, professional organisations, health facilities and training institutions for da‘wa preaching:60

57 http://www.ahlehadith.co.uk (accessed October 26, 2008). 58 http://www.jdci.org (accessed October 26, 2008). 59 http://www.youtube.com/user/NoorTV9 (accessed November 4, 2009). 60 Cf. its offi cial website: http://www.alislam.org (accessed October 26, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 313

Sadr Anjuman-i Ahmadiyya (1906) Atfal-ul-Ahmadiyya (boys 6–14 y.) Khuddam-ul-Ahmadiyya (boys/men 15–40 y.) Ansar-i Allah (1911, men, preaching and community service) Lajna Ama’ Allah (women) (Anjuman) Tahrik-i Jadid (1934, foreign mission) Taleemul Islam College, Jamia-Nusrat College, in Chenab Nagar (Pakistan) Waqf-e Jadid (1957, community service) Waqf-e Nau (1987, volunteers) Muslim Television Ahmadiyya Ahmadiyya Muslim Students Associations Fleeing from sectarian attacks and government persecution in Pakistan where they had moved aft er partition of the subcontinent in 1947, the Ahmadis shift ed their headquarters to Britain. Th e head of the community (khalifa) took permanent residence in Britain in 1984. Since then they established their centre in the English county of Surrey.61 Th ey have now established a worldwide presence with strongholds outside South Asia in South East Asia, West and East Africa, Western Europe and North America. As a result of longstanding opposition from Sunni radicals, a constitutional amendment declared the Ahmadis non-Muslims in Pakistan in 1974. Th e Ahmadis sometimes face violent repression in Pakistan, but have proven enormously resilient, particularly relying on their strong global missionary activities. For Ahmadis calling themselves Muslim has been made a criminal off ence under Zia’s Islamist dicta- torship through amendments of the Penal Code in 1982–86.62 In spite of strong political and religious pressures they still manage to uphold a traditional presence among the middle classes and in the administration, including the security forces.63

61 Simon Ross Valentine, Islam and the Ahmadiyya jama‘at: History, Belief, Practice (New York, 2008), p. 77. 62 Pakistan Penal Code (Amendment) Ordinance, I of 1982; Anti-Islamic Activi- ties of Qadiani Group, Lahori Group and Ahmadis (Prohibition and Punishment) Ordinance, XX of 1984; Criminal Law (amendment) Act, 111 of 1986; amending paragraphs 295 and 298 on off ences relating to religion. Cf. Pakistan Penal Code, at http://www.punjabpolice.gov.pk/user_fi les/File/pakistan_penal_code_xlv_of_1860.pdf (accessed August 15, 2008). 63 Simon Ross Valentine, Islam and the Ahmadiyya jama’at. 314 dietrich reetz

Th e Ahmadi network has been partly replicated by a split-off branch named aft er the city of Lahore, the Lahoris.64 Its leaders have less insisted on the Prophetic qualities of Ahmadi founders. Th ey have been more amenable to compromise with mainstream Sunni positions. But their following is considerably less numerous. Still they form part of the larger Ahmadi milieu. Due to the high degree of institutional diversifi cation there has been a functional diff erentiation of emphasis in doctrine and practice. While the training institutes for preachers would be more ideological, the professional organisations, health facilities and general Mus- lim schools would represent a more secularised face of the Ahmadi milieu.

Jama‘at-i Islami Th e JI has also turned into a religio-cultural milieu, the separate elements of which have started globalising. Th is is particularly evident in Pakistan, but also visible in India and Bangladesh. Th e organisation is running separate institutions for international religious and political training, for women and for students. It even runs its own housing society in Lahore where it created a separate middle class JI settlement complete with schools, hospital and security forces.65 Th e JI is an important political player in Pakistan and Bangladesh, while remaining a cultural and religious organisation in India. Th eir cultural style is modern and technical; their political approach is issue- based and power-oriented. Th e objective is to establish political and cultural hegemony, to form the government and rule the country in much the same way as the BJP did in India, which has greatly inspired them. Th e JI runs foreign branches and student groups under diff erent names developing into a globalising JI network of transnational political Islam. Th e network of its overseas institutions is most developed in Britain and North America, although the JI has developed a presence throughout the Pakistani diaspora.

64 Cf. its offi cial website: http://www.muslim.org (accessed October 26, 2008). 65 Cf. Farish Noor, “Th e Uncertain Fate of Southeast Asian Students in the Madra- sas of Pakistan,” in Th e Madrasa in Asia: Political Activism and Transnational Link- ages, eds. Farish A. Noor, Yoginder Sikand and Martin van Bruinessen (Amsterdam, 2008), pp. 141–162. ‘alternate’ globalities? 315

Th e JI’s UK branches play a key role through the UK Islamic Mis- sion in London66 and the Islamic Foundation in Leicester.67 Th ese branches have become centres in their own right not only for the JI’s infl uence in Europe, but they have also turned into a switchboard for reinforcing their impact in South Asia. Th e JI also developed close links with the system of the Interna- tional Islamic Universities. Th ese universities, off ering both religious and secular education, were established since 1980 as part of the movement of the ‘Islamisation of knowledge.’68 Th ey are closely connected with the Institutes of Islamic Th ought which emerged together with them. Despite its relatively close association with the JI ideology, the Inter- national Islamic University Islamabad (IIUI) is a transnational actor of Islam on its own. It teaches a whole range of secular courses (business and management administration, law, social science, engineering, applied sciences) combined with Islamic studies courses and extensive religious instruction.69 Its pan-Islamic agenda is promoted by the affi liated academies of Islamic Law (shari’a)70 and Mission (da‘wa).71 On one level, it is part of a multinational network of religious modernism, linking up to International Universities in Malaysia, Sudan or South Africa. Here it pursues a transnational concept of Islamic education and propagation that expands on its own religio-ideological rationale. On another level, the Islamabad University is a very Pakistan-centered organisation fully autonomous in its international activities (seminars, workshops, conferences, international students). It is nowadays almost totally fi nanced by Pakistan’s government acting more as a national educational institution than as an international agency. In the fi eld of transnational Islam, the IIUI’s agenda is driven both by the state and by Jama‘at-i Islami thinking—a legacy of the Zia-ul-Haq era.

66 http://www.ukim.org (accessed October 26, 2008). 67 http://www.islamic-foundation.org.uk (accessed October 26, 2008). 68 Cf. Leif Stenberg, Th e Islamization of Science: Four Muslim Positions Develop- ing an Islamic Modernity, (Lund Studies in History of Religions) 6 (Lund, 1996), pp. 153–219. 69 Cf. the university’s website at http://www.iiu.edu.pk (accessed October 26, 2008). 70 http://my.iiu.edu.pk/Academies/Shariah/tabid/326/Default.aspx (accessed Octo- ber 26, 2008). 71 http://my.iiu.edu.pk/Academies/Dawah/tabid/318/Default.aspx (accessed Octo- ber 26, 2008). 316 dietrich reetz

Aligarh thinking Even though the thinking of Sayyid Ahmad Khan and the activities of Aligarh graduates proved highly infl uential for institution-building within the Muslim body politics of South Asia, groups and institutions sharing this thinking have not yet been able to form a uniform and compact religio-cultural milieu. Yet the concept of a rationalist and modernist reading of the Qur’an has inspired thinkers and brought into existence a number of schools, publishing houses and think tanks gradually expanding from Pakistan and India to other parts of the Muslim world. Ghulam Ahmad Parwez (1903–86) was a critical thinker and activist who shared the critical attitude of Sayyid Ahmad Khan towards the hadith literature. Like Khan, he recognised only those which were not in contradiction with the Qur’an, while those discussing miracles and jinns would be interpreted in allegorical terms. In 1938 he started publishing his monthly Tolu-e-Islam where he propagated his interpretation of the Qur’an. He published a large number of books on Quranic studies. His views were popularised through religious study centres called Bazm-e-Tolu-e-Islam. Th ose have now gradually expanded to Muslim communities around the world and can be found in Can- ada, Denmark, India, Kuwait, Norway, South Africa, the UK and the US.72 Javed Ahmad Ghamidi (b. 1951) is an Islamic scholar, exegete and educationist from Pakistan who gained popularity during the reign of the former President Musharraf for his position of ‘enlightened moderation’ on the nature of Muslim activism. He inspired Musharraf in his own position to fi ght Islamic militancy. He frequently appeared on television where he took questions from the audience on Islam and Quranic studies.73 Ghamidi split away from the JI aft er he had originally worked closely with Maulana Maududi.74 He founded the Al-Mawrid Institute of Islamic Sciences in Lahore. He is teaching an online course on Islam at http://www.studying-islam.org. Th rough his TV appearances and his online teaching he reaches a broad audience across the Muslim world with connection to the South Asian diaspora.

72 http://www.tolueislam.org/bazms_worldwide.htm (accessed October 26, 2008). 73 http://www.al-mawrid.org/pages/tv_schedule.php (accessed October 26, 2008). 74 http://www.ghamidi.net/ (accessed November 4, 2009). ‘alternate’ globalities? 317

His emphasis on the historical contextualisation of Muhammad’s revelation puts him in the line of a rationalist interpretation of the Qur’an.75 Maulana Wahiduddin Khan (b. 1925) is a religious scholar from India and editor of the infl uential Urdu journal al-Risala serving as the platform of his rapidly expanding network of Muslim study circles. He is another important former member of the JI and critic of Maududi’s conservatism. Facing the Muslim-Hindu Confl ict in India he developed an interpretation of Islam aimed at living the religion, conducting peaceful dialogue and fi nding the place of Islam in the modern world. New study circles of his thought have now emerged outside South Asia in the Middle East.76 His views are being propagated through books, websites and video messages.77 Th e journal issued by his movement, al-Risala, has formed the core of an international organisation, the Al Risala Forum International which was formed in the US.78 Th ese scholars are using their very personal approaches to Quranic exegesis as a means to a critical and rational reconciliation of the Pro- phetic revelation with the modern world. Th eir personal ministries are expanding globally, only partially based on institutions, while more relying on modern media, including publications, books, television and the internet.

Progressive Muslims For Muslim thinkers and activists broadly belonging to the Southasian diaspora the thinking following the anti-colonial tradition of Obaidul- lah Sindhi led them to join a discourse and camp that nowadays has acquired the label of ‘progressive Islam’. Th is concept seeks to discuss social change and emancipation politics in classical Quranic terms.

75 Asif Ift ikhar, Jihad and the Establishment of Islamic Global Order: A Comparative Study of the Interpretative Approaches and Worldviews of Abu al-A‘la Mawdudi and Javed Ahmad Ghamidi (Master thesis, Montreal, 2005). 76 Irfan A. Omar, “Self-Reform or Missionary Work? Th e Al-Risala Movement’s ‘Moral Revolution’ of the 21st Century,” Paper presented at 19th European Confer- ence of Modern South Asian Studies, Leiden, 2006; www.milligazette.com/Archives/ 01032002/0103200280.htm (accessed November 10, 2008). 77 www.goodwordbooks.com (accessed November 10, 2008). 78 www.alrisala.org (accessed November 10, 2008). 318 dietrich reetz

However, it remains heavily contested.79 Tiesler calls this a political ‘ticket’ project formed on the lines of electoral politics. As it remains rooted in identity politics, its pragmatism will ultimately confi rm stereotypes of diff erence, rather than do away with them, she believes.80 Th e composition of this milieu is rather diverse. It is composed of activists holding up their credentials of religious training along with a political agenda, oft en in the sector of non-governmental organisations—NGOs. Th ey are engaged in social and educational activities, in local development work. Th e most prominent South Asian example of this tradition would be the Centre for the Study of Society and Secu- larism (CSSS), Mumbai (India).81 Th e CSSS has been working since May 1993. Th e executive director of the centre is Asghar Ali Engineer. Th e major aims are to spread the spirit of secularism,82 communal harmony and social peace, to study problems relating to Communalism and Secularism, to organise inter-faith and ethnic dialogue, but also to promote justice. Th e centre organises lectures and discussions. It publishes books and research materials. Engineer is known for his erudition in religious traditions, although his authority is strongly contested, if only on the grounds of his connection with the Bohra Ismaili community. In the wider Islamic fi eld these religio-cultural milieus related to South Asian descent have to position themselves towards other Mus- lim activists and institutions. Th is is a two-fold process of cooperation in managing their global presence and of competition for the commitment of fellow Muslims and the attention of non-Muslims. Both cooperation and competition are acted out in and between larger alliances of transregional Muslim networks.

79 Omid Safi , Progressive Muslims: On Justice, Gender and Pluralism (Oxford, 2003); Farid Esack, Qur’an, Liberation & Pluralism: An Islamic Perspective of Interreligious Solidarity against Oppression (Oxford, 1997); idem, On Being a Muslim: Finding a Religious Path in the World Today (Oxford, 1999); Manfred Sing, Progressiver Islam in Th eorie und Praxis: Die interne Kritik am hegemonialen islamischen Diskurs durch den “roten Scheich” ‘Abdāllah al-‘Alāyilī (1914–1996) (Würzburg, 2007). 80 Nina Clara Tiesler, Muslime in Europa: Religion und Identitätspolitiken unter veränderten gesellschaft lichen Verhältnissen, (Politik & Kultur) 8 (Münster, 2006), p. 140. 81 http://www.csss-isla.com (accessed November 10, 2008). 82 Secularism in India is not understood to be directed against religion and religiosity, but at the separation of religion and state mainly, promoting equal rights for all faiths and beliefs. ‘alternate’ globalities? 319

Ideological Alliances

In the process where Muslim networks and milieus globalise themselves they build alliances with networks from other regions, cultural backgrounds and interpretations. Here we would call such alliances ideological with a shared perspective and agenda based on common doctrinal grounds and their application to global conditions. Ideol- ogy here refers to a world view evolving from religious concepts and practices that extends beyond transcendental concerns to this-worldly objectives; that explains and maps the world with the aim of expanding presence and control in political and social categories. We are using it as an analytical approach with a connotation in political science and sociology. A growing number of Muslim actors also engage with the term. Th eir position is not uniform here. Some would see Islamic ideology as a positive value and argue that such an approach is inherent in Islam with a stipulated unity of religion (din) and world (duniya). Others would deemphasise it, concentrating on worship (‘ibadat) and faith (iman). Among the South Asia-based Muslim networks the fi rst position is exemplarily taken by the Jama‘at-i Islami, the second by the Tablighi Jama‘at. Th e policy of Islamisation as it was pursued in Pakistan was actively shaped by the JI. It brought into existence a Council of Islamic Ideology meant to oversee the compatibility of laws and regulations with Islamic injunctions. Th e JI pro-actively considers itself an ideological party (nazriyati). In one of its policy papers at its website it argues in favour of an Islamic revolution: “When the people rise in accord with an Islamic ideology and leadership, sure, no one will come in front of such a movement.”83 Th e Tablighis, as they emphasise worship and faith, would like to suggest that they have no ideological or political concerns. But they also develop a world view of expanding faith and religious compliance mapping the globe from which they derive practical policies of planning and implementation. Th is in our view would also see them develop a holistic ideological approach. But this interpretation of ideology has to be diff erentiated from the conventional negative interpretation of western political analysts. For western policy makers there is a tendency to demand a ‘non-ideological’ approach on behalf of their opponents whereas most of them also act within ideological paradigms. In fact, developing a

83 http://www.jamaat.org/crisis/revolution.html (accessed November 8, 2008). 320 dietrich reetz world view, or ideology, for actors in the public sphere is a common and probably unavoidable feature of public activism. It is with this utilitarian connotation that we look at the building of ideological alliances by Muslim global networks, and also by the religio-cultural milieus of Muslims of South Asian descent. Even though doctrinal markers oft en gain a prime importance for shaping the ideology of a group or network, we can observe a gliding shift of paradigm within such alliances. Th is also holds true for South Asian groups when they look for partners in global Muslim networking. Th e Deo- bandi-type of reformism, for instance, is seen as a partner by orthodox ‘ulama in South East Asia from the Nahdlatul ‘Ulama (NU). Estab- lished in 1926 in response to Muslim Brotherhood reformism, the NU claims a membership of 35 million at least. Socially it remained with the ‘traditionalists’ and was led by the local religious scholars (kyia). As compared to South Asia, doctrinally and politically the NU was probably closer to the Deobandi school, whereas culturally more akin to the Barelwi milieu. Th e original madrasas of the pondok-type have been gradually phased out, upgraded or expanded to include regular curricula. Several of them also took to the teaching of worldly school subjects. But as with South Asia, here too we have an ‘organised’ sector of the traditionalist approach, the institutions of the NU, and an ‘unorganised’ sector consisting of unaffi liated local schools and scholars, who however broadly identify with the NU system even if they are not formally affi liated. Th e Deobandis also cooperate with orthodox religious scholars from Afghanistan and Central Asia, even though their orientation is oft en more ‘Salafi ’. Issues of cooperation for the Deobandis also involve the question of the Islamic legal tradition. While in the past their adherence to the Hanafi code has sometimes limited their outreach, recent developments show that they become increasingly fl exible, ready to cater to other law schools within their own institutions and outside as well. In India, some Deobandi Muft is also specialise on the Shafi legal tradition to answer inquiries from the small Shafi minority in India, but also from international students. Th e same applies to South East Asia, where Deobandi graduates have implemented Shafi law in the Deo- bandi madrasa they established at the Tablighi centre in Kuala Lum- pur.84 In South Africa, the Deobandi-dominated Council of Religious

84 My fi eld research, Kuala Lumpur (September 2005). ‘alternate’ globalities? 321

Scholars (jam‘iatul ‘ulama) has also started off ering legal advice on the Maliki and Shafi schools of Islamic law for Muslims of Malay descent and black African Muslim migrants.85 Th rough the World Islamic Mission the Barelwis run their own international ministry.86 Th e Barelwis also cooperate with similar Sufi - related networks. Th e nature of such alliances becomes clear from the list of links at the website of the Rochdale-based British Sufi Muslim Council.87 It lists among others the Islamic Supreme Council of Amer- ica,88 the As Sunnah Foundation of America,89 the Crescent Network in the UK,90 the Minhaj-ul-Qur’an mentioned above, and the British Internet portal deenislam.co.uk.91 Barelwi groups also share references to Barelwi theologians and concepts with Sufi orders and Sufi -oriented websites operating independently with a vast network of international disciples and followers. One example is the Naqshbandiyya Owaisiah which emerged in Pakistan in the seventies.92 Another example is the Sufi -oriented Internet portal World of Tasawwuf featuring the biographies of the two sons of the Barelwi founder, Hamid Raza Khan and Mustafa Raza Khan, both renowned scholars and activists in their own right.93 Th e global cooperation of the Jama‘at-i Islami is embodied in international students attending courses at its headquarters in Lahore. Th is activism also shows in the JI’s strong connections with the Interna- tional Islamic Universities and the JI’s interest in international Islamic educational networking in general. Th e International Islamic Univer- sity Malaysia is a preferred partner here.94 It was founded in 1983. Th e affi liated International Institute of Islamic Th ought (ISTAC) has been a major proponent of the ‘Islamisation of Knowledge’ project.95 Th e shift of paradigm that can be observed here is in the decidedly more

85 My fi eld research, Johannesburg (February 2005). 86 http://www.wimnet.org/ (accessed November 11, 2008). It lists representation in Japan, Singapore, Pakistan, India, Dubai, Kenya, South Africa, Mauritius, Germany, the Netherlands, France, Denmark, Finland, Norway, Ireland, Canada, USA, Trinidad, Guyana, Suriname and the UK. 87 http://www.sufi muslimcouncil.org/links.php (accessed November 11, 2008). 88 http://www.islamicsupremecouncil.org/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 89 http://www.sunnah.org/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 90 http://www.crescentnetwork.co.uk/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 91 http://www.deenislam.co.uk/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 92 http://www.naqshbandiaowaisiah.com/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 93 http://www.spiritualfoundation.net/sufisshaykhs6.htm#111011443 (accessed November 11, 2008). 94 http://www.iiu.edu.my/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 95 http://www.iiu.edu.my/istac/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 322 dietrich reetz this-worldly orientation and sophistication of the Malaysian institutions which are embedded in the Malaysian context of strong economic development and educational achievements. Internationally, ‘progressive’ Muslims closely cooperate with secularised and liberal Muslim thinkers. Th ey do not disregard religion but would like to separate it from public and state activities which they feel are not only oppressive but would also corrupt the transcendental character of religion. Th ey regard their position as an emancipatory project where religious beliefs are mainly a private matter, not necessarily less intense than in the other groups, a fact oft en deliberately misconstrued by their Islamist critics. Th ese individuals are much less organised and only now start forming organisational backbones through NGOs which also link up internationally. Th eir networking primarily operates on the level of social and democratic activism.96 Prominent examples for the work of such groups can be found in Indonesia, Malaysia, and South Africa:97

– Th e International Centre for Islam and Pluralism (ICIP), Jakarta (Indonesia)98 Th e centre was established in Jakarta in July 2003. It is led by Syafi ’i Anwar. Th e goal of ICIP is to build a network of Islamic Non-Gov- ernmental Organisations (NGOs) and progressive-moderate Muslim activists and intellectuals in South-East Asia and beyond.

– International Movement for a Just World (JUST), Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia)99 Th is NGO was founded in 1992 by Chandra Muzaff ar aiming at creating a ‘spiritual and intellectual society’ which will seek, in a modest way, to develop global awareness of the injustices within the existing system with the aim of evolving an alternative international order which will enhance human dignity and social justice.

96 Cf. Abdulkader Tayob, “Modern Islamic Intellectual History in Comparative Perspective,” ISIM Review 17, 40 (2006), 63ff . 97 For a listing of websites, authors and organizations discussing or promoting liberal themes in relation to Islam, cf. the website compiled by Charles Kurzman, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill (http://www.unc.edu/~kurzman/Liberal- IslamLinks.htm) (accessed November 11, 2008). 98 http://www.icipglobal.org/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=28&I temid=70 (accessed November 11, 2008). 99 http://www.just-international.org/ (accessed November 11, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 323

– Positive Muslims South Africa, being the fi rst NGO taking care of HIV-positive Muslims100 It was founded in June 2000 and is led by Farid Esack. It is committed to raise awareness about Aids and offers support to Muslims living with HIV/AIDS. Working with a small staff and a lot of voluntary work the group tries to address all communities, linking all the relevant structures both in government and in civil society, particularly religious leaders.

Some authors interpret camp parameters more broadly. Charles Kurz- man would include in the liberal camp also Islamic institutions dedicated to the promotion of religious values as long as they include in their agenda ‘liberal themes’ such as the furtherance of democracy and individual rights. In his interpretation this group would also include Muslim intellectuals such as Abdolkarim Soroush and Ali Shariati.101

Formats and Channels

Th e emergence of religio-cultural milieus has highlighted the variety of forms in which translocal Muslim networks globalise and interact. In the process of adaptation they have developed new formats and channels of networking that are an important aspect of the quality dimension of translocal and transnational networking. Formats of interaction appear to be crucial ‘nodal points’ that make the network function in its inter-relational capacity. To qualify them as formats for this purpose they should mediate or facilitate the mutual connections and impact of various social units forming the network. In other words they are ways of connecting. For further research on Muslim translocal and transnational networks these formats could be a promising unit of analysis, as they can be described from an anthropological perspective, by their sociological parameters, with their historical antecedents or political impact. While certain movements have shown a preference for some well-known formats of local interaction, these movements should also be surveyed for formats of translocal and transnational interaction. Such connection

100 http://www.positivemuslims.org.za/ (accessed November 11, 2008). 101 Charles Kurzman, Liberal Islam: A Sourcebook (New York, 1998). 324 dietrich reetz is easier to see in movements such as the Tablighi Jama‘at. Despite their extensive local work the Tablighis developed a strong translocal and even transnational thrust of their work. But also activities such as the annual celebrations of the (mythical) birthday of saints at their shrines (‘urs) in the Sufi -related traditions of the Barelwis bear strong translocal and sometimes transnational aspects. Followers arrive from far-away places in a pilgrimage to the place binding them together in worship of a particular saint. And they carry this connection back to their home places where they interact with other devotees. For the networks related to South Asia, the most common formats would include:

– Religious schools and universities (madrasas, darul-‘ulums) Th ese play an important role particularly for the groups driven by theologians (‘ulama), the Deobandis, the Barelwis, and the Ahl-i Hadith. Th e format appeared very robust and belied speculations about a crisis of religious orthodoxy in teaching as it expanded to ever new regions of the globe. It now shows signs of crossing the borders of the South Asian diaspora attracting Muslims from diff erent backgrounds, such as some Deoband seminaries in Portugal, the UK or in South Africa.

– ‘Secular’ Muslim schools and universities combining the state curriculum with religious instruction As Muslim communities grow into the wider middle class and public education is increasingly seen to fail their aspirations, confessional private schools for Muslims have gained increasing importance. Th ey are seen as tools to enable followers of a particular doctrine or interpretation of Islam to pass on the values of this tradition to the next generation while enabling it to master social and economic challenges of modern life. Th e parents electing to send their children to these schools want them to be pious and advanced. As such most religio- cultural networks have recently chosen to get involved in the opening of schools teaching regular state curricula in a religious environment. Th e example of the Association of Muslim Schools in the UK shows the convergence of diff erent interpretations and milieus in this format.102 Th e format of the ‘secular’ Muslim school represents a global growth industry in the private educational market. Many new schools

102 http://www.ams-uk.org/ (accessed November 11, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 325 can hardly satisfy the demands and have long waiting lists of parents anxious to enrol their children.

– Social networks and institutions devoted to the advancement of women, youth/students, and children Such institutions are developed to strengthen the community aspect of the work. Th ey underline the readiness and ability to off er specifi c programmes to all of its sections, and not only to the male activists, as historically has been more oft en the case. Th e format refl ects the expansion of the social base of Islamic movements. Growing women’s participation in global Muslim networks carries strong emancipatory aspects in mostly conservative colours. It refl ects the strengthening of agency on behalf of pious Muslim women. As yet it is too early to judge the social and political consequences of this movement.

– Missionary grass-roots movements Besides the Tablighis and the Da‘wat-i Islami of South Asian provenance this format is adopted by new groups such as the East African street preachers.103 It seems ideal to mobilise mainly young followers. But also established movements such as the Ahmadiyya have long adopted this format which caters to their perceived need of off ensive propagation of their doctrine. Th e format helps bringing about mutual infl uences. Th e TJ activism served as a model for the DI to build a Barelwi-oriented preaching movement. Th e Ahmadis are reported to have infl uenced African movements such as the street preachers.104

– Institutionalised centres of religious propagation (da‘wa) and instruction Th is rather urban format has been adopted by the modernising groups among which the Jama‘at-i Islami, the Minhaj-ul-Qur’an or the Deedat centres are important. Th e modernist environment and clientele seem to shape the character of this format across dividing doctrinal and cultural lines.

103 Chanfi Ahmed, “Th e Wahubiri wa Kislamu (Preachers of Islam) in East Africa,” Africa Today 54, 4 (2008), 3–18. 104 Ahmed, “Th e Wahubiri wa Kislamu.” 326 dietrich reetz

– Public meetings and conferences for the purpose of reformation (islah) or education, particularly of young followers (tarbiyat) Religious scholars and activists have recently multiplied their eff orts to organise public events featuring religious themes. Th ey are somewhat modelled along the programme of the congregation (ijtima) that is so successful within the Tablighi Jama‘at. And they have taken on specifi c forms. A very successful format is the tarbiyati conference or meeting for students designed to remind Muslim students of modern, secular subjects at universities and colleges of their Islamic duties and enhance their religious knowledge.

– Personalised ministries of individual scholars A growing number of religious scholars run their personal ministries. Th ey are based on their personal charisma, network of disciples and activism. Th is applies to Sufi -oriented scholars such as Hakeem Muhammad Akhtar from Karachi who can count on followers not only in his own city but in faraway regions such as India, the UAE, South Africa, and the UK.105 But modernist and liberal thinkers like Ghamidi or Wahiduddin Khan also rely on this format.

– Media ministries driven primarily by electronic media, such as audio and video sermons on CDs, cassettes, or the Internet Th e expansion of global communication facilitates preachers who give preference to the dissemination of their sermons and other religious texts through websites, CDs or cassettes. Th is is either intentional as a ‘marketing’ strategy or unintentional, driven by curiosity and a growing fan-base. Th e latter is the case for Tariq Jameel, a Deobandi scholar, running his own Madrasa in Faisalabad, and a leading func- tionary of the Tablighi Jama‘at. His speeches can be downloaded from the Internet at http://www.maulanatariqjameel.net. Th ey are available on CD and cassettes, recently also at the social networking video sites Youtube.com and video.google.com. Tablighi followers (and their critics) run their own video channels there, for instance at http://www.you tube.com/user/munimmiah786 (as of November 2009). Th is YouTube

105 Cf. the websites featuring the Sufi hospice run by Akhtar: http://www.voiceofk han qah.com/ (accessed November 11, 2008), www.khanqah.org; and a blog of his followers: http://www.khanqahakhteria.blogspot.com/ (accessed November 11, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 327 user takes this channel as a chance to promote his own website off ering information and literature on Islam.106 Th ere are some forms of interaction which may more aptly be described as ‘channels’. Such can be written, oral, electronic or even visual communication weaving the ‘threads’ between the ‘nodal points’ of the network. While unknown to outsiders, a closer inquiry may in fact reveal that units of the network coordinate through—for instance—personal communication between various travelling scholars or preachers. Th is seems to be the case for the networking mode among Deobandi madrasas. In other cases we have learnt through inquiries that formal written communications provides crucial input into the network as with letters in the case of the Tablighi Jama’at, where this was hardly suspected before as the movement is otherwise focusing on oral communication.107

Globalisation has contributed to diversifying the formats and channels of interaction within these networks. Historical formats such as networks of scholars, graduates, or the universal use of certain legal rulings, or key texts have been complimented with media activities, journals, internet sites, and wallpapers, with audio and video material. New channels popular with Muslim network activists are no doubt mobile phones and laptops with internet connections, internet cafes, specialised internet portals and email traffi c in general. Th eir cultural specifi city in servicing various Muslim networks has still to be studied and brought out. Such studies can feed into a more nuanced understanding of the internal culture of translocal Muslim networks as mediating between various locations while creating new virtual spaces, cultures and concepts travelling within the network with a certain degree of fl exibility and yet stability.

Evolution and Change

In the process of going global, groups and networks underwent evolution and change that keeps altering the ‘alternate’ globalities. It is important to realise that these camps—or groups of networks have

106 http://www.fi ndthetruth.uni.cc (accessed November 11, 2008; defunct in November 2009). 107 Dietrich Reetz, “Keeping Busy on the Path of Allah: Th e Self-organisation (intizam) of the Tablighi Jama‘at,” Oriente Moderno 23, 1 (2004), 295–305. 328 dietrich reetz undergone a signifi cant evolution in the course of recent globalisation. I would date back a marked intensifi cation of these forms of advanced networking to the late seventies, early eighties. Th ey were part of the Islamic response to the perceived failure of the western-type ideologies of nationalism and socialism in connection with the confl ict between Israel and Palestine. Th e Islamic response was also symbolised in the ‘Islamic revolution’ in Iran (1979). Since then the diversity of the channels and formats for networking has grown tremendously. While in the seventies the transfer of religious knowledge, of Islamic education and of radical Islamic politics appeared to be on the upsurge, development issues became more prevalent themes of institution-building and networking since the late eighties. Political issues of religious, legal and social rights and the expansion of democracy seemed to become a growing factor in Muslim countries and among Muslim minority populations since the late nineties. Besides a multiplication of agents, institutions, and bonds, some trends across the diverse milieus of Muslim networking became apparent which I would like to discuss here. Th e global and translocal expansion seems to be driven by a variety of motives and developments. Some authors have tried to explain the mobilisation of religious movements in the paradigm of the market. Notably the model of ‘religious economies’ has argued that religious pluralism promotes religious participation.108 Th e capital- and market- driven modern phase of globalisation on the surface seems to be ideal to test the truth of this model. But this theory is based on the assumption that actors are generally free to choose which religious model to follow. Translocal Muslim networks have not generally corroborated this approach. A transfer between the various networks delineated before seems to be obstructed by various limitations. As many of these networks are conditioned by cultural and regional interpretations of Islam, loyalty within these groups is generally strong. Sectarian interpretations create distinct cultural and regio-geographic milieus between which it is diffi cult to switch. Th ey are marked by allegiance to certain doctrines, clan and family structures, but also to particular leaders and places of origin, languages or dialects. Th e networks from

108 Cf. Roger Finke, Avery M. Guest and Rodney Stark, “Mobilizing Local Religious Markets: Religious Pluralism in the Empire State, 1855 to 1865,” American Sociological Review 61 (1996), 203–218; James D. Montgomery, “A Formalization and Test of the Religious Economies Model,” American Sociological Review 68 (2003), 782–809. ‘alternate’ globalities? 329

South Asia (Deobandi, Barelwi, Ahl-i Hadith, Ahmadiyya), but also Turkey (Gülen) are obvious examples of such fi xation on the cultural parameters of the network. At the same time, these networks in their global expansion adopt similar modes of operation where they act in clear competition with each other. In particular, they copy each other in the modes of operation, in their media activities, on the internet, in setting up religious instruction in both modern and traditional formats, in their ways of distributing religious literature, in operating local branches, community centres etc. However, if they cannot hope to win over many adherents from other milieus, and if their members are not fully free to choose where to go, what can they hope to gain from such competition? Th eir competition seems, fi rst of all, to focus on establishing the superiority of their particular interpretation of Islam, its doctrines and practices, showing that they represent the only ‘true’ Islam. But they also appear to be in competition with non-religious and non- Muslim activist groups. Th ey hope to show that they are the more eff ective and correct form of mobilisation—with a clear reference to the desired emancipation of actors mainly from the global ‘South’ as opposed to the global ‘North’ with all its connotations of development, political domination and post-colonialism. Th eir competition appears more directed at shoring up support among their potential adherents and followers of their own milieu aiming also at secularised Muslims from a shared cultural background. In this they follow political parties which also establish their sociological identities by creating separate cultural and social milieus. Dur- ing elections they equally aim at shoring up support amongst their own followers which is usually seen as a key to success over rival groups. But while political parties gain access to power and control over resources through the political process, the expectations of Muslim networks are more ambivalent. On one level they want to use these resources to establish their superiority in terms of the ‘true’ Islam. It is the search for the transcendental truth and missionary goals in which they compete. Th is would be a situation radically diff erent from a ‘religious market’ as seen from the ‘end-user’ of ‘religious’ products. But on another level behind the transcendental motives, there seems to be competition for the emancipation and promotion of those separate cultural milieus which are represented by these networks. Th eir expansion promises greater social prestige, a larger share in local resources, greater mobility of its members and therefore 330 dietrich reetz greater promise of worldly success for the current and particularly for the future generations. Global connections and branches are nowadays paraded as markers of a more successful and adaptable form of self-organisation. Estab- lishing themselves globally with ‘foreign’ branches seems to be part of a competition by which they rival with other Muslim groups. Barelwis want to demonstrate to the Deobandis that they are as good in establishing an international presence or even better than their ‘rivals’. Th e superiority of their brand of Islam is measured in terms of the extent of media operations and the mastery of the internet. New formats of activism are being copied amongst each other and from non-Muslim forms of self-organisation. Aft er the Ahmadiyya community introduced some form of internet-based community television broadcasts, other groups followed suit. Th e modern religio-educational network of Barelwi institutions belonging to the group Minhaj-ul-Qur’an has established something similar through its multimedia department in connection with its website.109 Religious television has been much on the upsurge among international groups of Turkish affi liation, as can be seen on TV channels available in Berlin. Th e Gülen movement also has its own television station, Samanyolu. It also has its own daily newspaper, Zaman.110 Th eir distribution of audio and video tapes is a well-established feature of the media activities of most Muslim networks. Even the conservative missionary movement of the Tablighi Jama’at, despite its fear of global media activities, allows the distribution of audio tapes organised by followers. With tacit approval of its leaders the speeches of the annual congregations are popularised through the tapes. Th e orthodox Islamic seminaries of the Deobandi and Barelwi variety in South Asia where hardly any English is spoken have developed a propensity for publishing their own regular journals made easy through computer type setting. Th ey are increasingly made available on the internet also.111

109 http://www.minhaj.org/ (accessed November 4, 2009). 110 Bulent Aras and Omer Caha, “Fethullah Gulen and his Liberal ‘Turkish Islam’ Movement,” Middle East Review of International Aff airs 4, 4 (2000). 111 See, for example, the monthly of the higher Islamic college, Darul-Ulum Deo- band, coming out in Urdu since 1941 and reproduced on the website of the school at http://www.darululoom-deoband.com/urdu/magazine/index.php (accessed November 11, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 331

While the media revolution in Islamic circles and the concomitant diff usion of religious authority has been discussed by Eickelman and others extensively, it should be noted here how much these characteristics become a measure of success or failure, of the superiority of Islamic tenets in the process of global competition.112 Th is makes the process of the diff usion of religious knowledge more technical, potentially more uniform and ‘modernist’, although not less ideological. Th e heightened competition of these global Muslim networks along with the media revolution also seems to have a profound impact on the formats of interaction, and through these, on the profi le of these movements. In this way doctrinal orientations and interpretations are gradually changing. Th is can be clearly seen in the example of Sufi - oriented movements. Nowadays groups with a Sufi background have come to copy many of the formats of reformist and modernist Muslim groups. Traditionally, Sufi activism was known for its very private, oral and ritual forms focused on particular teachers and institutions. Today, Sufi -oriented groups are circulating religious tracts in large and growing numbers. Th ey have established regional offi ces and institutes where ‘modern’ Islamic education can be obtained which is also off ered in formats of regular academic courses offi cially recognised by the government, and partly combined with secular education. It increases their ideological catchment area, but it also heightens the danger of watering down their ideological profi le which is tied to a sectarian interpretation of Islam. Again, a typical example is the modern educational movement of the Minhaj-ul-Qur’an mentioned above. But here also the Deedat centres have to be mentioned which are organising their international activities from Durban. Deedat hailed from Surat (India) and followed the Sufi -oriented Barelwi tradition, although with a very broad modernist outlook. Th e Islamic Propaga- tion Centre International in Durban113 distributes large amounts of religious literature, audio and video tapes. It is linked to the network

112 Dale Eickelman and Jon W. Anderson, eds., New Media in the Muslim World: Th e Emerging Public Sphere (Bloomington, 1999). 113 http://www.ahmed-deedat.co.za (accessed November 11, 2008). 332 dietrich reetz of the Islamic Research Foundation run by Zakir Naik,114 who achieved enormous popularity as a television preacher on Q-TV,115 a channel run by the UAE-based private television consortium ARY, broadcasting to South and West Asia as well as to the Middle East, the UK and the US.116 Th e modus of operation of these two networks is very diffi cult to reconcile with the traditional format of Sufi practices. Their ideology and the format of their activities is at times reformist in its emphasis on scripturalism and reformation (islah), as it is modernist in its delib- erate service to a Muslim middles class aspiring to achieve social and economic success.

Conclusion

We have seen translocal and transnational Muslim networks adapt to changing circumstances of globalisation at an amazing pace. Th eir main characteristics have been expansion to ever new regions, fi elds and formats, and vibrant activism across the board. Th eir expansion has not necessarily led to a homogenisation of Islam. Diversity has increased in the sense that even remote and small translocal networks with few resources have been able to expand beyond their regions of origin, acting oft en globally among migrants, followers and converts. Yet the introduction of new formats and channels of interaction typical of the global and media age, but sometimes also specifi c to certain Islamic movements, has modifi ed the cultural and religious texture of their activism and messages. Particularly, folk and Sufi -oriented movements, but also scripturalist groups of Islamic reformation (islah), have grown into new and modern formats. Th ey provide religious education and knowledge which increasingly seek to link up with or compliment modern secular institutions. Th eir modernist and/or technological evolution gradually makes their structures and formats more similar, which is bound to have an eff ect on their transcendental quality. Th ere seems to be a strong tendency for them to grow more

114 http://islamicresearchfoundation.com (accessed November 11, 2008). 115 Its website http://www.qtvonline.com/ is not fi lled with content yet (accessed November 4, 2009). 116 http://www.arydigital.tv (accessed November 11, 2008). ‘alternate’ globalities? 333 ideological, but also more development-oriented. At the same time, movements relying on the devotional and spiritual appeal of religious practice, which include conventional shrines and Sufi movements as much as the missionary groups of the Tablighi Jama’at, still ride high on the popularity scale of Muslim youth worldwide regarding them as new countercultures of modernity. Th rough this process, a broader fi eld of heterogeneous networks is emerging. As many of them follow a broadly defi ned ‘reformist’ agenda to champion their own vision of Islam, they also share ‘modernist’ orientation. Its participants gradually become stake holders of development and politics in society. Th is is even true where they sometimes act from a very selective or local perspective, or limit themselves to an oppositional stand on public policies. Such may be one of the consequences of cross-border Muslim networking bringing the compulsions of today’s world closer to home, to the grass roots level of activism. But the study of these trends is only beginning. It requires a much more specifi c understanding of internal modes of operation as well as the emerging translocal and transnational culture of Muslim networking that facilitates much of the overlapping activities and concepts. Th ese groups increasingly produce a ‘travelling’ organisational culture specifi c to these camps and diff erent milieus that is no longer bound by one location of origin only. It is no longer solely determined by its new place of adaptation either. It is a culture that inhabits the ‘in-between’ spaces identifi ed by Homi Bhabha with a more abstract and yet equally eff ective nature of impact.117 To understand the future directions of Muslim networking these emerging translocal and transnational organisational cultures will have to be studied more closely and in detail. Th is should be done without prejudice and with an open mind. If indeed these groups could turn into stake holders of development and politics, they are more a potential for cooperation rather than a source of confl ict in the process of globalisation. Th is does not mean that they will not follow their own agenda of propagating religious tradition, practice and knowledge. But the ways they are doing it, through their evolving milieus, new formats and channels, increasingly modify and shape their agendas. Th e emergence of ‘alternate globalities’ in the vision of these groups implies their close interaction with mainstream globalisation from which they cannot separate and

117 Homi K. Bhabha, Th e Location of Culture (London, 1994). 334 dietrich reetz by which these globalities are driven. Globalisation thus produces its own alternatives and diversifi cation where uniformity was feared. In this context the emergence of particular milieus and formats gives substance to the allusion of ‘alternate globalities’. Inhabiting the global in-between places is no longer imagined only. It is no longer an experiment. It takes concrete shapes. Undertaking further study of the dynamics of these milieus and formats in a context of diversifi cation and convergence will reveal more insight into such non-economic forms of globalisation which are emanating from the global South while striking fi rm roots in the global North. GLOBALISATION IN THE MAKING: TRANSLOCAL GENDERED SPACES IN MUSLIM SOCIETIES

Gudrun Lachenmann Universität Bielefeld

Introduction

Th e study of processes of globalisation and localisation in a sense of empirically grounded globalisation theories requires new approaches in research design and methodology. Th is contribution will concentrate on how international concepts of gender are negotiated in social spaces constituted through local and translocal networking by women in the fi eld of development, thereby shaping translocal fl ows and landscapes in line with notions fi rst developed by Appadurai1 and others. Th e intention is twofold, to contribute to translocal methodologies as well as to a comparative perspective across ‘Muslim’ societies. Th is is achieved through a study of empirical interactions, exchanges by women’s movements, and of everyday life as phenomena of translocality and glocalisation; in this case in three countries which stand for rather contrasting cases, Sudan, Senegal and Malaysia, but which allow analysis on both the subnational and transnational level. Th e article begins with the elaboration of a methodology based on the concept of translocality and the constitution of social spaces which integrates sociology of knowledge, grounded theory, in addition to notions of agency and negotiation of meaning, notably at the interfaces of knowledge systems. Th ereby the most recent approaches in global ethnography are developed further. It then shows how women’s movements build special forms of translocal knowledge and capacity by integrating and translating concepts found in other locations or in global gender debates. Th is created one of the translocal spaces which allow the negotiation of gender constructs and relations. Notable examples of this, discussed in the following sections, are the evolution of translocal

1 Arjun Appadurai, “Grassroots Globalization and the Res Imagination,” Public Culture: Soc. For Transnational Cultural Studies 12, 1 (2000), 1–19. 336 gudrun lachenmann discourses from ‘vulnerability’ to ‘rights’, as well as the diversity of discourses on Islam by developing authority of knowledge. Finally, the importance of global networks between women activists will be acknowledged. Th e fi eld of gender has so far been hugely neglected in systematic studies and theoretical debates on these issues. Th e multifaceted nature of globalisation processes becomes particularly evident with regard to how diff erent Muslim societies construct gender and gender order and how women develop their own views on gender, feminism and Islamism and negotiate them with society and state. One aspect is the localisation of global concepts through key actors. Another is the very production of global concepts through the exchange of cosmopolitan epistemic communities and platforms of gender activists and development experts who come from very diverse backgrounds. Th us, the production of knowledge and its fl ows follow very complex relations which involve networking, transnational migration, and— indeed—development work. Th is has led to a breakdown of the older (clear) divides into ‘North’ or ‘South’, ‘East’ or ‘West’, even if there still exist clear hegemonic structures in the shaping of international ‘consensus’. Interestingly, however, while debates about gender are oft en framed in the context of international debates about (human, Islamic etc.) rights or ‘gender and development’, female agency in the translocal negotiations on these issues is hardly recognised in scholarship. Th e complex comparative approach is thus signifi cant for locating debates on development and civil rights, which are global and international, in local contexts. A particularly interesting feature is the overlap of two globalising trends: on the one hand, women of various religious and ethnic backgrounds come together at international platforms such as UN conferences including NGO fora on the basis of gender-specifi c concerns.2 On the other hand, the globalising trend of Islamisation and Islamic

2 Gudrun Lachenmann, “Weltfrauenkonferenz und Forum der Nichtregierungsor- ganisationen in Peking: Internationale Frauenbewegungen als Vorreiterinnen einer globalen Zivilgesellschaft ?” WP 251 (1996), www.uni-bielefeld.de/(de)/agsozanth/ publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009); idem, “Frauenbewegungen als gesellschaft liche Kraft des Wandels: Beispiele aus Afrika,” in Lokal bewegen—global verhandeln: Internationale Politik und Geschlecht, ed. Uta Ruppert (Frankfurt, 1998), pp. 208–233. translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 337 notions of the public sphere and common good bring together Mus- lim women and women’s organisations from very diff erent regions, claiming a ‘modernity’ (or ‘modernities’),3 or sometimes even ‘postmodernity’,4 which challenges mono-linear and culturalist notions of Western modernity.5 Th e following discussion draws mainly on results from the research project “Negotiating Development in Translocal Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”.6 Th is project compared and contrasted case studies from very diff erent societies, namely Sudan, Senegal and Malaysia. At the same time it showed certain typologies of networking and the generation of discourses which cross-cut the diff erent country-studies at institutional and intermediary level. Th e project also embraced the study of the forms of interaction between Islamism, state and women’s groups in diff erent contexts. For example, one fi eld of investigation was the way in which global frames of reference, such as women’s

3 Shmuel N. Eisenstadt, “Multiple Modernities in the Age of Globalization,” in Grenzenlose Gesellschaft ?, eds. Claudia Honegger, Stefan Hradil and Franz Traxxler (Opladen, 1999), pp. 37–50; Shalini Randeria, “Entangled Histories of Uneven Moder- nities: Civil Society, Caste Solidarities and Legal Pluralism in Post-colonial India,” in Unraveling Ties: From Social Cohesion to New Practices of Connectedness, eds. Yehuda Elkana et al. (Frankfurt, 2002), pp. 285–311. 4 Jane L. Parpart and Marianne H. Marchand, “Exploding the Canon: An Intro- duction/Conclusion,” in Feminism/Postmodernism/Development, eds. Marianne H. Marchand and Jane L. Parpart (London, 1999), pp. 1–22. 5 Armando Salvatore, “Th e Problem of the Ingraining of Civilization Traditions into Social Governance,” in Muslim Traditions and Modern Techniques of Power, ed. idem, Yearbook for the Sociology of Islam 3 (Muenster, 2001), pp. 9–42; Georg Stauth, “Islam and Modernity: Th e Long Shadow of Max Weber,” in Islam: A Motor or Challenge of Modernity, ed. idem, Yearbook of the Sociology of Islam 1 (Muenster, 1998). 6 Th is was fi nanced by the Volkswagen Foundation, directed by the author and Dr. Petra Dannecker who had been doing fi eldwork earlier in Malaysia. Dr. Salma Nageeb did fi eldwork in Sudan, Dr. Nadine Sieveking in Senegal, and Anna Spie- gel M.A. in Malaysia (6 months each); Salma Nageeb, “Empirical Findings from Sudan: Development Issues and Actors, Negotiating Development in Trans-local Gen- dered Spaces: Preliminary Results,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans-local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13– 15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009); Salma Nageeb, Nadine Sieveking and Anna Spiegel, “Negotiating Development: Trans-local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies,” WP 355 (2005), www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009) (Report on Workshop, October 13–15, 2005, Univ. of Bielefeld, SDRC); see also Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, eds., Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections (Lanham, 2008). 338 gudrun lachenmann rights, were taken up locally, and how this ‘localisation’ in turn travelled back to the global sphere.7 Overall, it was remarkable how diverse the situations were in the diff erent case studies, with regard to social and state structures, to the economic situations, the role of Islam in society and international constellations of confl ict. Th us, certain issues such as sexualised violence or children born out of wedlock were addressed in Malaysia, but not at all in Sudan. We were able to create certain ideal types regarding the national Islamisation processes, while at the same time tried to avoid sweeping generalisations, or a comparison of ‘Islam’ versus ‘the West’.8 Given the decidedly Islamist orientation of the Sudanese government, religion emerged as the major force against and/or with which women tried to negotiate room for manoeuvre in the context of comparisons and contrasts between global and local interpretations of the religion. At the same time, development concerned most women’s groups, regardless of their positioning within the religious debates. In the context of confl ict and attempts to resolve it by the international and donor community, women have managed to expand their social spaces, in line with a general growth of civil society and a restructuring of the public sphere.9 Th e national context of Malaysia, by contrast, is dominated by struggles over political ethnicity and a national Islam which is, moreover, linked to a debate on Asian values as expressing strong self-reliance in economic development. Feminist organisations and networks have tried to enter the debate on situated interpretations of Islam as to women’s rights and they thus seriously challenge hegemonic religious authorities and the state as well as Islamic practices. At the same time they seem to obtain their main legitimacy through their important transnational presence and reputation in networking. Th e feminist

7 Lachenmann and Dannecker, eds., Negotiating Development in Muslim Societ- ies; Gudrun Lachenmann: “Researching Translocal Gendered Spaces: Methodological Challenges,” in ibid., pp. 13–36. 8 Gudrun Lachenmann, “Introduction: Methodology and Comparison—Embed- ding the Research Project,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Develop- ment: Trans-local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009), p. 10. 9 Salma A. Nageeb, New Spaces and Old Frontiers: Women, Social Space and Islami- zation in Sudan (Lanham, Maryland, 2004); idem, “Empirical Findings from Sudan.” translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 339

Islamic exchange is one important fi eld, but at least as important is the participation in regional and global debates about globally defi ned rights (see CEDAW) from which they draw their power for national activism.10 Finally, Senegal is an example of a secular state in favour of liberal global concepts such as New Partnership for African Development (NEPAD), which is refl ected in modernist development programmes that are oriented towards the elimination of poverty, as well as encouraging democracy and decentralisation. However, Islam is omnipresent through a structure of Islamic brotherhoods which are closely entwined with the political elite, as well as some newly Islamising forces which have begun to compete on a national level with state legitimacy. Th is diminishes the possibility to negotiate development concepts pertinent to gender questions in the public sphere. An example is the very controversial tendencies regarding the reform of the family law, partly in the sense of ‘back to Sharia law’, but mostly regarding practical issues such as parental vs. paternal custody etc. As in many African countries, othering processes take place by women and women’s movements and organisations through embracing ‘African culture’ and ‘African feminism’, sometimes as against ‘Islamic feminism’ and/or against ‘the West’. Th e same occurs by the society and Islamic authorities accusing women of ‘Western feminism’.11

10 Anna Spiegel, “Women’s Organisations and their Agendas: Empirical Findings from Malaysia, Women’s Movement and Trans-local Networking in Malaysia,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans-local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc/projects; idem, “Women’s Organisations and Social Transformation in Malaysia: Between Social Work and Legal Reforms,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies, eds. Lachenmann and Dannecker, pp. 67–92; idem, “Negotiating Women’s Rights in a Translocal Space: Women’s Organisations and Networking in Malaysia,” in ibid., pp. 171–193; idem, Striving for Social Change in Translocal Spaces: Female Activism in Islamising Malaysia (Unpubl. Doct. Dissertation, Fac. of Sociology, Bielefeld Uni- versity, 2008). 11 Gudrun Lachenmann, “Civil Society and Social Movements in Africa: Th e Case of the Peasant Movement in Senegal,” Th e European Journal of Development Research 5, 2 (1993), 68–100; idem, “Decentralisation and Civil Society: Negotiating Local Development in West Africa,” WP 358 (2006), www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc(de)/ agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009); Nadine Sieveking, “Negotiating Development in Senegal: Women Organisations, Issues and Strategies,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans-local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc/ (de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009); idem, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space in Senegal,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies, eds. Lachenmann and Dannecker, pp. 37–66; idem, “Negotiating 340 gudrun lachenmann

Conceptualising Translocality in Globalisation: Methodological Considerations

Th e methodology used in the project discussed here was based on the analysis of social spaces and their translocal constitution.12 In all three case studies, the approach of the state was to place discourses on gender in the context of traditional debates about the status of women, the policies of women (instead of gender) in development and the notion of female vulnerability. Th is ignored both negotiation processes within the societies as well as transnational networks and international contexts (e.g. the debate about the Convention on all forms of Discrimina- tion against Women CEDAW) in which such concepts are shaped.13 Th e investigation showed not just the presence of female actors on these levels, but also that women were among the very early transnational actors. Diff erent voices have highlighted the necessity of a fundamental methodological reconsideration of approaches within a process of globalising social science.14 Elements in this debate are the increasing interest in strengthening qualitative methodology15 in what could be called transcultural (comparative) social research.16 Our analysis refers to concepts and phenomena considered to be constitutive of globalisation, such as social movements, networks, civil society, thereby avoiding dualisms of blocks, cultures etc. Globalisation is studied through its constitutional elements of interlinking and connectedness, fl ows17

Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives: Th e Campaign for the Reform of the Family Law in Senegal,” in ibid., pp. 145–170. 12 Gudrun Lachenmann, “Weibliche Räume in muslimischen Gesellschaft en West- afrikas,” Peripherie 24, 95 (2004), 322–340. 13 Vivienne Taylor, Marketisation of Governance: Critical Feminist Perspectives from the South. DAWN Development Alternatives with Women for a New Era (Cape Town, 2000); Maxine Molyneux and Shahra Razavi, “Beijing plus Ten: An Ambivalent Record on Gender Justice,” Development and Change 36, 6 (2005), 983–1010. 14 Martin Albrow, and Elizabeth King, eds., Globalization, Knowledge and Society: Readings from International Sociology (London, 1990). 15 Gudrun Lachenmann, “Intervention, Interaktion und Partizipation: Zu einigen Me tho denfragen der empirischen Entwicklungsforschung,” in Entwicklung: Th eorie— Empirie—Strategie—Institution, ed. Manfred Schulz (Muenster, 1997), pp. 99–114; Georg Elwert, Feldforschung: Orientierungswissen und kreuzperspektivische Analyse (Berlin, 2003). 16 Georg Stauth, “Globalisierung, Modernität, nicht-westliche Zivilisationen,” in Kleine Staaten in großer Gesellschaft , eds. Josef Langer and Wolfgang Pöllauer (Eisen- stadt, 1995), pp. 89–107. 17 Appadurai, “Grassroots Globalization and the Res Imagination.” translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 341 and translocal social spaces. At the same time, the making of globalisation can be considered from below, hence the discussions on glocalisation and localisation.18 Th e perspective—or even paradigm—of translocality19 could be used here to refer to the interactive “(social) construction of reality”.20 In order to study globalisation processes further, it is certainly fruitful to use hermeneutics in order to incorporate knowledge from non- Western societies. Th e sociology of knowledge has laid the necessary and still relevant methodological foundations rather early. Schuetz and Luckmann’s conceptualisation of the “structures of the life-world”21 is a very good basis from which to study translocality, as it can refer to worlds of diff erent reach. Of particular importance in the research on transcultural global phenomena have been ideas regarding communicative genres, construction of the other, new forms of sociability as well as attempts to understand diff erent possible interpretations of meaning, i.e. by authors of a ‘new’ sociology of knowledge and hermeneutics,22 although the danger of cultural relativism is not always recognised. “Grounded theory”23 has helped to develop key categories and working (hypo)theses within the framework of (repetitive) interpretation of empirical data. Th is process

18 Roland Robertson, “Glocalization: Time-Space and Homogeneity-Heterogene- ity,” in Global Modernities, eds. Mike Featherstone, Scott Lash and Robert Robert- son (London, 1995), pp. 25–44; Ulf Hannerz, “Transnational Research,” in Handbook of Methods in Cultural Anthropology, ed. H. Russel Bernard (Walnut Creek, 2000), pp. 235–256. 19 Ulrike Freitag and Achim von Oppen, “Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verfl echtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), http://hsozkult .geschichte.hu-berlin.de/forum/type=artikel&id=632 (accessed June 29, 2009). 20 Peter L. Berger and Th omas Luckmann, Th e Social Construction of Reality: A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge (Garden City N.Y., 1966). 21 Alfred Schuetz and Th omas Luckmann, Th e Structures of the Life-World (Evans- ton Ill., 1973). 22 Cliff ord Geertz, Dichte Beschreibung: Beiträge zum Verstehen kultureller Systeme (Frankfurt, 1983); Uwe Flick, Ernst von Kardoff and Ines Steinke, eds., A Companion to Qualitative Research (London, 2004); Ronald Hitzler and Anne Honer, eds., Sozial- wissenschaft liche Hermeneutik (Opladen, 1997); Hubert Knoblauch, ed., Kommunika- tive Lebenswelten: Zur Ethnographie einer geschwätzigen Gesellschaft (Konstanz, 1996); Th omas Luckmann, “Zum hermeneutischen Problem der Handlungswissenschaft en,” in Text und Applikation, eds. M. Fuhrmann et al. (München, 1991), pp. 513–523; Hans-Georg Soeff ner, “Social Scientifi c Hermeneutics,” in A Companion to Qualita- tive Research, eds. Flick, Kardoff and Steinke. 23 Anselm Strauss, Qualitative Analysis for Social Scientists (Cambridge, 1987); idem and Juliet Corbin, Basics of Qualitative Research: Techniques and Procedures for Developing Grounded Th eory (Th ousand Oaks, 1998). 342 gudrun lachenmann of confronting theory with empirical fi ndings also helps us to understand ‘diff erent meanings’ and the situatedness of actions and discourses, both issues of relevance to the constructivist approach. Th e phenomenological approach of interpretative sociology and sociology of knowledge embraces a theory and methodology of social action which integrates and necessarily goes beyond a merely actor- centred approach.24 I consider that agency and negotiation of meaning leading to institutionalisation and structuration must be the basis of looking at social spaces. Social space needs to be conceived as an operationalisation of the life-world concept, rather than as a static unit of analysis. By extension, the consideration of transnational space involves the analysis of dynamic interfaces of systems of knowledge.25 If globalisation and localisation are produced in a constructivist sense, i.e. by women activists and researchers, everyday life, organisational life and links between these have to be brought together. We capture the micro-macro relation through the approaches of structuration and institutionalisation.26 Regarding the defi nition of the various levels of interaction, we distinguish diff erent complexities of societal organisation. Given the global and translocal phenomenon of connectedness, relational studies can also overcome ‘methodological nationalism’, even when national cases serve as points of departure.27 By considering the negotiating processes in diff erent spheres we can render more visible the multitude of relations and interactions, and by systematic contextualisation we highlight those instances where national situatedness actually produces borders. In order to operationalise this type of analysis, concepts such as arena, platforms, public sphere(s) are helpful to denote spaces in which power relations are played out and are challenged, meanings of policy issues are negotiated as well as images of

24 Norman Long, “Introduction: From Paradigm Lost to Paradigm Regained? Th e Case for an Actor-Oriented Sociology of Development,” and “Conclusion,” in Th e Battlefi elds of Knowledge: Th e Interlocking of Th eory and Practice in Social Research and Development, eds. idem and Ann Long (London, 1992), pp. 3–15, 16–46, 268–277; Norman Long, “Exploring Local/Global Transformations: A View from Anthropol- ogy,” in Anthropology, Development and Modernities: Exploring Discourses, Counter- Tendencies and Violence, eds. Alberto Arce and Norman Long (London, 2000), pp. 184–222. 25 Long, “Exploring Local/Global Transformations.” 26 Anthony Giddens, Th e Constitution of Society: Outline of the Th eory of Structura- tion (Berkeley, 1984). 27 Nina Glick Schiller, Linda Basch and Christina Szanton Blanc, Towards a Trans- national Perspective on Migration: Race, Class, Ethnicity and Nationalism Reconsidered (New York, 1992). translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 343 gender constructed. Th is brings into focus the negotiation of meaning of institutions in translocal/transnational spaces and the creation of new forms of social cohesion and collective action, social movements and civil society organisations. Th e production of hybridity, a concept which is supposed to overcome old dichotomies between developed and underdeveloped countries28 can be used as the concept of glocalisation to show how translocality is produced in translocal spaces. Th e processes of ‘localisation’ and ‘glocalisation’ can be linked to the concept of ‘politics of the place’. Harcourt and Escobar and Gupta and Ferguson characterise these as the perceived need to defend local identities.29 Consequently, communities will try to uphold certain characteristics even in global processes of negotiation, but at the same time contribute to social transformation by translating global issues— something which our approach brings out nicely through the linking of various life-worlds. Th is methodology further takes up current concerns about the necessity of multi-sited research and respectively about global ethnography and anthropology of globalisation.30 In this project, a more sociological perspective is taken by combining “thick and complex methods” such as trajectories, multi-level analysis, mobile research,31 complex designs etc. Rather than a single researcher undertaking multi-sited research, systematic comparison was chosen, off ering a wider perspective on developments. Th e comparative aspect, based on intense exchange amongst members of the research team, allowed them to elaborate grounded theories, develop typologies and identify interstices. Th us, it helps to understand modes of the constitution of translocal public spheres through “translocalising networks, issues and bodies”.32

28 Jan Nederveen Pieterse, Development Th eory: Deconstructions/Reconstructions (London, 2001). 29 Wendy Harcourt and Arturo Escobar, “Lead Article: Women and the Politics of Place,” Development 45, 1 (2002), 7–13; Akhil Gupta and James Ferguson, eds., Cul- ture, Power, Place: Explorations in Cultural Anthropology (Durham, 1997). 30 George E. Marcus, Ethnography through Th ick and Thin (Princeton, N.J., 1998); Michael Burawoy et al., eds., Global Ethnography: Forces, Connections, and Imagi- nations in a Postmodern World (Berkeley, 2000); Jonathan Xavier Inda and Renato Rosaldo, eds., Anthropology of Globalization (Maiden, MA, 2002). 31 Guenther Schlee, “Mobile Forschung bei mehreren Ethnien: Kamelnomaden Nordkenias,” in Feldforschungen: Berichte zur Einführung in Probleme und Methoden, ed. Hans Fischer, (Berlin, 1985), pp. 203–218. 32 Regarding Malaysia, see Spiegel, Striving for Social Change in Translocal Spaces, p. 331; Th is approach resembles in both its concern as well as its methodology that of Michael Burawoy (Burawoy et al, Global Ethnography), in addition to further 344 gudrun lachenmann

Our research has shown how not just Islamist networks, but also critical feminist organisations such as the Malaysian Sisters in Islam (SIS) have managed to build special forms of translocal knowledge and capacity by translating their concerns in ways relevant to organisations elsewhere. Such links are enforced by ‘travelling activists’ who through their personal and professional trajectories establish a multitude of connections, but receive also feedback which is re-inserted at a variety of local levels.

Women’s Organisations and Th eir Agendas: Between Local Concerns and Global Gender Concepts

Th e following description of the women’s organisations and movements, as well as their typology is based on a qualitative analysis of their own conceptualisations of activities in the fi eld of development, of their agency, as well as on their translocal connections and references.33 In order to situate these, however, it is necessary to characterise the diff erent contexts somewhat further. In Malaysia, gender discourse is infl uenced by a high rate of urbanisation and participation of women in the industrial workforce, whereas the issue of poverty takes the prime place in Senegal, and questions of confl ict and peace dominate Sudanese concerns. Similarly diff erent are the moral discourses on gender and religion by society and state. Th e ‘good Muslim woman’ has become a standard reference in (otherwise quite diverse) discourses in Malaysia, where neither Islam nor ethnic Malayness are uncontested in terms of the composition of the population. In Senegal, where such concerns play a minor role, it takes a more or less secular stance on the basis of a classical ‘women in development’ approach, while feminism is regarded as Western or non- African. In Sudan, ethnic and religious diff erences are highly politi- cised and confl ictive. In this context, the Islamist government takes a stance of complete othering as Western and un-Islamic global gender concepts, although more and more local NGOs are created which position themselves accordingly and cooperate with external donors.

systematization of translocal relations and contextualisation through the a.m. complex methods. 33 Lachenmann, “Introduction: Methodology and Comparison,” pp. 13ff . translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 345

Th e civil society context also varies greatly between the three countries of our case study. In Malaysia, successful economic development has tended to de-politicise civil society. Development discourses outside the state hardly exist. Instead, civil society organisations with outside links focus on violence against women (VAW) and human rights. In Senegal, the (state co-opted) women’s movement rather has lost its force in the public sphere. Th e issue of livelihoods is very prominent due to the great and growing poverty; however discourses on vulnerability play a major role as against agency and policy changes, notably in the context of the “Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper”.34 Finally, in Sudan, the state has tried to instrumentalise civil society, and notably the women’s movement. Civil society is mostly concerned with income generating activities and confl ict transformation. In all three countries, foreign NGOs are co-operating with civil society organisations, albeit under diff erent conditions. While women’s NGOs in Senegal have been mostly co-opted by the state, Malaysia tries to control and limit such co-operation. Th e widest space exists, somewhat surprisingly, in Sudan, where the international cooperation contributes to the opening and restructuring of the public sphere.

Senegal What do these general observations mean more specifi cally for the ways in which women strategise gender and development? In Sen- egal, the state took the classical developmentalist approach by ‘organising the women’ in a way to improve their domestic skills within the state services. Th is was done in the context of separate activities for the ‘promotion of women’, which excluded them from mainstream (especially agricultural) activities. Th is caused the sometimes very open confrontation with urban secular feminism, which used to be very strong, but has lost importance of late. Supported by the classical ‘women in development’ approach of international donors, women have been advised to establish women’s organisations as target groups for these state services and conventional women’s projects (small credit etc.). Th ese Groupements de Promotion Féminine (GPF)

34 Th is was elaborated according to the strategy of the World Bank, incorporating other donors, although other action plans already existed before, and the participatory approach was not seriously followed, see République du Sénégal, Document de Stratégie de Réduction de la Pauvreté (Dakar, 2002). 346 gudrun lachenmann

(as against Groupements à Intéret Économique (GIE) mainly founded by men) still form the basis of the National Federation of Groups for Promoting Women (FNGPF). In spite of being very close to the state, it is nevertheless oft en considered to “have given women a voice”.35 In the context of the crisis of the groundnut-based economy, the peasant movement gained high organising power.36 Th e defi ning power of concepts of sustainable development and societal solidarity in the 1980s was very important in creating platforms allowing women to enter into certain negotiations regarding gender relations, development concepts and work. Women’s groups within peasant organisations as well as the a.m. GPF recognised by the state oft en coincided. Currently, however, there is a clear void as regards their future as a societal force. Th e local WID organisations have lost much legitimacy and have not (yet) found a way to interact with the democratic Community Councils established with decentralisation. On the contrary, their offi - cial organisations were left in an insecure position aft er the regime change in 2000. In the rural areas, even those groups which were set up by women and which promoted collective action, such as health committees, volunteer midwives, leaders of re-established rice schemes, operators of collective gardens, water supply or cereal banks were not integrated into the newly elaborated local development plans. Th ese plans are currently void of any female perspective which would include grain mills, cereal banks etc.; instead they concentrate mainly on infrastructure.37 Th ere are some women’s organisations which seem to be able to combine revivalist and reformist Islamic movements with the a.m. eff orts of secular social and economic organisation, as well as with traditional local institutions of female cooperation (oft en attached to religious occasions). Th e Association pour la Promotion de la Femme Sénégalaise (APROFES) is a case in point. Th is organisation is based

35 Sieveking, “Negotiating Development in Senegal,” p. 7. 36 Lachenmann, “Civil Society and Social Movements in Africa”; idem, “Decentrali- sation and Civil Society.” 37 Lachenmann, “Weibliche Räume in muslimischen Gesellschaft en Westafrikas”; idem, “Decentralisation and Civil Society”; idem, Frauke Bleibaum, Judith Ehlert, Lalla Khadeija ElOumrany, Daniel Krenz-Dewe, Sascha Vennemann, and Bertrand Zohy, “Décentralisation, société civile, développement au Sénégal, Projet de recherche d’étudiant(e)s 2004/2005: Rapport d’étude de terrain,” WP 357 (2006), www.uni- bielefeld.de/tdrc(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 347 in the regional capital Kaolack, and I have been following its activities since 1994.38 It grew out of the developmentalist approach to women by explicitly taking into account religious considerations as well as discussing and challenging ‘tradition’. Th is evolution is refl ected in the trajectory of the founding president, who had received a technical education and nowadays works in order to accommodate the felt need of the women to embed all development eff orts in everyday religiosity. One could call it a certain degree of Islamic revival. Th e organisation succeeded in creating a space for the negotiation of new concepts of gender relations and rights, but also created adequate formal new institutions such as local health insurance etc. Th is represents a new mode of interacting with the state by accepting its modernistic approach and challenging its balancing act between its traditional good relations with the classical brotherhoods and ambivalent relation to the groups propagating Islamic revival and reform. Th ese latter are clearly following the well known strategy of instrumentalising the woman question in order to protest against state secularism and Western development concepts. Th is helps create new female spaces and modes of entering the public sphere at diff erent interfaces, such as inviting secular and religious authorities and developing a clear localising relationship with regard to (global) development and gender concepts (see below). Th is constitution of local female spaces for the negotiation of concepts of development in the broadest sense which are considered local rather than foreign proved very important to foster a sense of social cohesion. APROFES clearly works in the direction of an inclusive approach, rather than the earlier approach to Women in Develop- ment, which segregated the male and female spheres. Th ey focus on classical approaches of establishing health care centres. At the same time, however, networking takes place with midwives’ organisations on the national as well as on the local level. In these meetings two diff erent systems of knowledge are clearly interfacing. Th e question, however, is in how far this cooperation and the reference to the male connoted Marabout authority, that integrates state and development representatives of the laicist state and development institutions, can be upheld in the sense of negotiating gender order. Amongst development experts and critical academic circles, the power structure and

38 Lachenmann et al., “Décentralisation, société civile”; extensively Sieveking, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space.” 348 gudrun lachenmann infl uence of religious authorities are considered advancing and even as menacing. In the urban sphere, local governance has long been in the hands of the religious brotherhoods. Women have increasingly participated in public religious ceremonies such as pilgrimage, but remain without further authority. Women’s organisations have, in their own public events, tended to emphasise strongly the inclusion of religious authorities who support the gender agendas put forward through progressive religious interpretations. Although this might seem to occur on a less intellectual and more popular level than in the other two case studies, it is an important feature of the new women’s NGOs which are not explicitly ‘Islamic’. Contrary to these new forms of combining development and piety,39 the Islamic revivalism and reform in Senegal has led to diff erent organisational forms which do not provide women with much public visibility. On the one side, there is a certain recovery and institutionalisation of the brotherhood contexts in the form of the cult of Mam Diara (the mother of the Murid founder A. Bamba). Th ey organised dahiras, i.e. local Koranic schools, with little relationship to modern Islamic education. Th ey show, however, the transformative potential with regard to societal development of the Sufi Brotherhoods.40 On the other hand, the diversity and pluralism of Muslim society in Senegal includes the new movement of Jama’aatu Ibadu Rahmane (JIR), the ‘Ibadous’, where women become more visible through wearing the veil (oft en by the older generation othered as ‘Arabic’) and receiving good formal education.41 Th e revivalist and reformist Islamic movement stands up as a clear opposition to the state’s secular ‘Western’ development model as well as the Sufi movement by demonstrating the ‘right social order’. But female Islamic movements are largely excluded from the interaction with secular authorities and politics.

Malaysia In the much better economic circumstances of Malaysia, negotiation of development concepts in traditional women’s groups is much more

39 Saba Mahmood, Politics of Piety: Th e Islamic Revival and the Feminist Subject (Princeton, 2005). 40 Sieveking, “Negotiating Development in Senegal,” pp. 2ff . 41 Sieveking, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space,” p. 53. translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 349 confi ned to marginal areas and strata of the population than in Senegal and Sudan. Spiegel’s study has shown that in Kelantan, one of the two states in Malaysia that are governed by the Islamist opposition party Parti Islam Se Malaysia (PAS), women from the upper classes have founded charities and women’s centres to “help poor women”.42 With- out challenging it, their approach follows the classical global Women in Development concept combined with moral discourse through the implementation of income generating programmes, training and legal counselling. Th ese programmes mainly address women who are clearly at the margins of Islamic society, i.e. divorced women or widows, enabling them to maintain their own families—a case not foreseen in traditional Islamic visions of the family. Th ese NGOs co-operate with the regional government, so to speak as state proxies, although they have started to develop certain critical positions with regard to the quality of society and social reality including the practical implications of Islamic institutions. Overall, however, this charitable approach has been criticised by feminists for its failure to address fundamental economic and social injustices. Indeed, these women’s organisations have more recently begun to apply the global concept of ‘empowerment’ advocated by global women’s action programmes (UN conferences in Nairobi, Beijing) as an integral element in eliminating discrimination of women and as a step towards fundamentally changing the gender orders of societies in development. Th is is a clear sign of the usefulness of the concept of translocality for analysis as the contact with feminist groups such as Sisters in Islam (SIS) in the capital has led them to critically refl ect on the situation. A completely diff erent type of approach is represented by feminist organisations in urban settings, such as Women’s Aid Organisation (WAO), All Women’s Action Society (AWAM) and especially the aforementioned SIS, whose orientation is clearly translocal. Th e latter has been very active in networking with all types of local and international organisations.43 One example is their active collaboration with

42 Spiegel, “Women’s Organisations and Social Transformation in Malaysia,” pp. 69ff . 43 Norani Othman, “Islamization and Modernization in Malaysia: A Compet- ing Cultural Reassertion and Women’s Identity in a Changing Society,” in Women, Ethnicity and Nationalism, eds. Rick Wilford and Robert L. Miller (London, 1998), pp. 170–193; Norani Othman, “Introduction: Muslim Women and the Challenge of Political Islam and Islamic Extremism,” in Muslim Women and the Challenge of Islamic Extremism, eds. idem and J. Petaling (Kualalumpur, 2005), pp. 1–10. 350 gudrun lachenmann the research team in translocal events such as Summer Schools (see below).

Sudan In Sudan there exists an even deeper distinction between women’s organisations oriented towards charity and ‘gender NGOs’.44 Th e former usually work on the basis of Islamic notions of supporting the needy. Given the character of the state, they mostly sympathise with its Islamist orientation and thus can oft en be regarded as semi-offi cial welfare organisations. Th e latter group of organisations basically focus on advocacy work. Th ey have lately gained room for manoeuvre within the framework of peace and human rights discourses and depend on support from international organisations. Within the former, the Islamic organisations, the debate about gender issues is appropriated by a strong fraction of women who are clearly interested in and prepared for translocal exchange. Th e diversity of Islamic discourses refl ects the diff erent positions which these women adopt vis à vis global gender concepts (see below).

Production of Translocality through Localising and Popularising Global Concepts: Female Social Spaces and Modes of Interaction, Communication and Networking

Th e popularisation of global gender concepts observed in all three countries can be said to have created one of the translocal spaces which allow the negotiation of gender constructs and relations.45 Th e explana- tory power of this process, as well as the innovative and creative forms in which it sometimes resulted, have proved very surprising. Biographic interviews and trajectories of activists have shown how diff erent types of Islamic discourses and affi liations have developed. For Senegal this is seen by elaborating on three diff erent types of

44 Nageeb, “Women’s Organisations and Th eir Agendas in Sudan,” pp. 95ff . 45 Petra Dannecker and Anna Spiegel, “ ‘Let’s not rock the boat’: Frauenorganisa- tionen und Demokratisierung in Malaysia,” Internationales Asienforum 37, 3–4 (2006), 297–319; idem, “Women’s Organisations and the Reshaping of the Public Sphere: A Comparative Analysis,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies, eds. Lachen- mann and Dannecker, pp. 123–144. translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 351

“rebellion of the daughters”46 with regard to Islam and the personal vision of gender in society as against the generation of the mothers. Th eir post-independence generation was mostly active in the modern, secular state institutions and promoted (feminist) conceptions of self- identity, activism and political struggle. Th e fi rst type of daughter is clearly wearing the veil both against her rather feminist mother and her secular father who interestingly criticise this style as Arabic. Th e second type concerns women in so-called reformist Islamic organisations, who sometimes call themselves Muslim feminists and have a discourse of enlarging their space within the rather tough and aggressive masculine modern, mainly urban environment. Th e third type are women in Islamist groups, directly connected to male authorities who are at the same time restructuring the traditional Islamic institutions of male teaching such as dahiras. Contextualisation of the local debates, as a methodological principle, was done by relating them to the way in which the discriminations and inequalities characterising women’s everyday life are articulated in popular discourses. To explain why the abstract global notion of equality is oft en rejected in local contexts by Senegalese women,47 they oft en refer to religiously prescribed diff erences between men and women. At the same time, however, women refer to the injustice of their obligations and workload and uphold that their specifi c claims are “perfectly in line with the Quran”. Without laying claim to profound religious knowledge themselves, they oft en leave this fi eld to Islamic authorities who are asked to support the women in their campaign. In addition, they introduce translocal examples of developments in other Muslim countries (especially from Morocco, but also non-African countries) in order to show the legitimacy of their discourse. Th us, the weak position of women with regard to claims to a hegemonic discourse is demonstrated by a certain ambivalence in their claims which actually enlarges their room for manoeuvre. An important event which was studied is the global institution of Women’s Day. In Senegal it has even acquired the quality of a fort- night during which women are celebrated. In the last year of the fail- ing socialist development regime under Abdou Diouf, the women’s

46 Nadine Sieveking, Country Report Senegal (unpubl. paper, Univ. Bielefeld, Soci- ology, Transnationalisation and Development Research Centre, 2006), pp. 79ff . 47 Sieveking, “Negotiating Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives,” pp. 153ff . 352 gudrun lachenmann organisations invited to be honoured by the president on the national level clearly demonstrated the cooptation of these organisations by the regime in an eff ort to shore up its legitimacy.48 However, the celebration organised aft er Diop’s fall in 2004 by APROFES showed a clear translocal approach of localising development concepts in a dynamic religious and traditional surrounding.49 Th e same occasion in Malaysia in 2004 took on the very spectacular form of popular consumer culture including actors and singers.50 Nev- ertheless, this rather post-modern event very clearly raised the issue of the contestation of certain institutions of gender order and of the relevance of the global concept of gender equality.51 Th e organiser was in this case the internationally active organisation of Sisters in Islam in Kuala Lumpur. It combined Islamic authority, which was used to seek public exchanges and discussions with Islamic and state authorities, with popular culture, consumerism and lifestyle. Th e staging in a shopping mall was symptomatic for the event’s character, as were the actors, a famous popular female singer, combined with speakers about gender and women’s rights in an Islamic and multiethnic-religious society. Th is was typical of attempts to defend traditional female spaces and practices, such as dancing, by bringing them into the open and stressing their local and traditional character. Th ereby, SIS counters the declaration of such practices as ‘non-Islamic’ by Islamist groups which claim to refer to universal Islamic norms. SIS follows the same strategy with regard to dress, which it presents as an issue of national heritage—versus those who seek to impose a ‘foreign’ (in this case Arabic) dress code which includes veiling. No similarly dramatic strategies have been found in the other two cases. A contrasting space of popularising gender has been extensively studied in Sudan. Th ere, women’s groups have slowly and quietly begun to appropriate mosques as their social space, starting during the strictest

48 Lachenmann, Gudrun, “Transformation der Frauenoekonomie und Dimensio- nen der Einbettung in Afrika,“ in Die geschlechtsspezifi sche Einbettung der Ökonomie: Empirische Untersuchungen über Entwicklungs- und Transformationsprozesse, eds. idem and Petra Dannecker (Hamburg, 2001), p. 85. 49 Sieveking, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space in Senegal,” pp. 41ff . 50 Spiegel, “Women’s Organisations and Social Transformation in Malaysia,” pp. 69ff . 51 Spiegel, “Women’s Organisations and Social Transformation in Malaysia,” pp. 69ff .; idem, Striving for Social Change in Translocal Spaces, pp. 97ff .; Dannecker and Spiegel, “Let’s not Rock the Boat,” pp. 312ff . translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 353

‘Neo-Harem’ regime of the fundamentalist Government.52 Whereas in former times women hardly attended evening prayers, religious or Quranic groups in Khartoum (also reported from Egypt)53 began to meet in local mosques at particular times of the week to realise their objective of studying the Quran and the religion of Islam. Th ereby they accumulated knowledge and a certain authority, while situating themselves within the competing forces of Islamism. Th e groups observed were residentially based and of mixed social backgrounds. Th ey were not offi cially registered and had their own teachers, usually educated women from the neighbourhood, but also occasional invited carriers of authoritative knowledge, i.e. male Islamic scholars, in order to sharpen their arguments regarding specifi c claims. Although they did debate societal gender issues which occurred in their daily lives, their activities were embedded within the context of Islamisation politics and only to a certain extent implicitly went against the cultural homogenisation guided by the notion of Islamic society. In this process, they distanced themselves from ‘traditions’ viewed as un-Islamic, while at the same time helping them to master modernisation without losing their identity.54

From ‘Vulnerability’ to ‘Rights’: Translocal Discourses by Civil Society Confronting the State

We have demonstrated how women create translocal gendered spaces through diff erent forms of interaction and discourses, thereby entering and restructuring the public sphere.55 Our focus lay on development concepts in the broadest sense, to which women gave new meaning in increasingly Islamised surroundings and thus contributed to a process of diff erentiating the local discourses on Islam. By doing so they enlarge their room for manoeuvre through seeking alternative approaches to women and gender issues based on agency instead of

52 Nageeb, New Spaces and Old Frontiers; idem, “Appropriating the Mosque: Women’s Religious Groups in Khartoum,” Afrika Spectrum 42, 1 (2007), 5–27. 53 Mahmood, Politics of Piety. 54 Nageeb, “Appropriating the Mosque,” p. 9. 55 Anna Spiegel, “Public Spheres, Public Islam, and Modernities,” WP 347 (2005), www.uni-bielefeld/trdc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). 354 gudrun lachenmann victimisation, and on rights instead of notions of vulnerability.56 As a consequence, these global concepts of rights also became increasingly diff erentiated, according to their multiple local experiences. Th is, as in other societies, shows the social transformation going on through active involvement of women’s organisations in development policies and thereby of the gender order of society.57 Overall, the situation in the three countries under investigation differed greatly. In Sudan, criticism of violence against women was seen by the regime as fundamentally opposed to the national construction of an Islamic umma.58 In spite of this, activists and NGOs have begun to work on the localisation of global development concepts by interpreting the agenda of VAW in a new way in relation to local politics and development. In this, they even touch the (still hardly touchable) question of what goes on in Darfur59 where the Government refutes the international accusation of systematically applying sexualised violence (rape) as a tool of combat, and women’s organisations broaden the concept of VAW in the direction of general hardships and displacement. At the same time, in Malaysia the debate of women’s and (especially) human rights was seen to be very critical by the regime, and thus used only sparingly,60 whereas in Senegal the rights discourse is the most easily acceptable with regard to local milieus and concepts of tradition. By adopting the agenda of VAW, women activists have begun in all three countries to renegotiate the relationship between civil society and the respective states, and are implicitly or explicitly contributing to processes of democratisation and peace building. Th e integration of VAW in female activists’ agendas is the result of translocal networking. For Sudan, this becomes evident through the trajectories of typical activists61 who represent diff erent backgrounds and epistemic communities, even including Marxists. Th is variety helps to spread VAW, and is of particular importance in the light of

56 Salma A. Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development: Constituting Translocal Spaces through Agency,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies, eds. Lachenmann and Dannecker, pp. 224. 57 Diane Elson, “Gender Justice, Human Rights, and Neo-liberal Economic Poli- cies,” in Gender Justice, Development, and Rights, eds. Maxine Molyneux and Shahra Razavi (Oxford, 2002), pp. 78–114; Molyneux and Razavi, eds., Gender Justice, Devel- opment, and Rights. 58 See Nageeb, New Spaces and Old Frontiers. 59 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 193ff . 60 Spiegel, “Negotiating Women’s Rights in a Translocal Space,” p. 178. 61 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 200ff . translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 355 the enmity of the regime which represents VAW as a ‘foreign agenda’, and ‘anti-Islamic vision’, not relevant to ‘Sudanese culture’ and ‘Islamic society’. Th us non-Islamist women’s NGOs who were able to maintain some activities around the concept of VAW nevertheless avoided the open adoption of human and women’s rights as well as VAW. Th e translocality of the feminist, respectively Islamic, reinterpretative positions of women’s organisations on the political level is clearly strength- ened through connections with institutions of the African region and thereby with national politics. Given the above-mentioned dominance of the vulnerability discourse in Senegal, the debate about women’s rights is a clear step towards overcoming the view of women as weak subjects needing help and denying them agency. From the NGO perspective, which here includes those affi liated to the state, it is not the government but local socio- cultural patterns that constitute the major constraint for women in claiming their rights. Th is implies the well known contradiction consisting in blaming local cultural institutions on the one hand, but at the same time stressing the autonomy of women in the frame of ‘traditional’ female spaces on the other. In my opinion, this situation is to a large extent due to the economic crisis, aft er which women through informal economic activities ( petit commerce) tend to contribute signifi cantly more to the family income and adopt more and more the position of the head of the household. Also, the experiences during and aft er the droughts within the peasant movement and even the forms of offi cial organisation in women’s groups made a lot of difference regarding the recognition of women’s economic importance. However, the informalisation of these institutions and the dwindling of ‘traditional’ female spaces in the decentralisation processes endan- gers their livelihood capacity as well as their capacity to enter the public debate, e.g. on land tenure etc., and especially on Family Law. As mentioned before, the latter is claimed to offi cially recognise these contributions of women towards the well-being of the family. Th e global notion of gender equality has a very confrontational ring in the Senegalese context. In the public political fi eld, it is strongly associated with Western feminism and can thus be easily turned against certain female actors, whereas in development policies this concept plays no role.62 Instead, the concept of ‘gender equity’ is better

62 Sieveking, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space in Senegal.” 356 gudrun lachenmann understood, as is globally the case, as corresponding to culturally different societies in the world. Th is is based on notions put forward at the Beijing Conference on Women in 1995 by an alliance of Islamic countries and the Vatican.63 Th e National Strategy for Equity and Gender Equality in Senegal (Stratégie Nationale pour l’Égalité et l’Équité de Genre au Sénégal, SNEEG) has been elaborated with the support of the United Nations Fund for Population (UNFPA/Senegal) in a cooperation of diverse ministries, together with political parties, trade unions, a range of national and international NGOs, networks and various international donor institutions.64 However, the strategy can be hardly called analytical. It mentions some basic facts concerning the “fundamental inequality” between men and women, but does not really explore gender relations and concrete policy issues and institutions. Th us in its outlook the SNEEG refers to a global development discourse and responds to the expectations of Senegal’s international partners, but hardly refl ects on the dynamics at the interfaces between the state and local organisations which are actually involved in the implementation of national legislation and development plans. An earlier offi cial publication, which had been coordinated by critical Senegalese social scientists,65 had a distinctly more radical outlook. Th e process of ‘translating’ state development concepts into local discourses is mainly left to the NGOs as the classical women’s extension services have widely failed. A telling example is the ongoing discussion concerning the reform of the Family Law,66 which the SNEEG characteristically ignores. Th e network organisation Réseau Siggil Jigeen (RSJ),67 of which APROFES is a member, had cooperated in the elaboration of SNEEG. Th ey started the campaign regarding family law reform. Th is is opposed by Islamic circles such as the Comité islamique pour la réforme du code de la famille du Sénégal (CIRCOFS) who would like to see family law conforming more to Sharia law. Both sides refer to global discourses. Meanwhile, the Sufi brotherhoods have

63 Lachenmann, “Weltfrauenkonferenz und Forum der Nichtregierungsorganisa- tionen in Peking.” 64 Sieveking, “Negotiating Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives,” pp. 152ff . 65 République du Sénégal, Senegalese Women by the Year 2015, abridged version (co-ordinated by Fatou Sow, and Mamadou Diouf) (Dakar, 1993). 66 Sieveking, “Negotiating Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives,” pp. 150ff . 67 Sieveking, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space in Senegal,” p. 42; idem, “Negotiating Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives,” p. 152f. translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 357 kept conspicuously silent, while the government pronounced itself clearly against the reform. Th e localisation of the concepts can also be observed at the level of everyday life, which we distinguish methodologically from the level of organisations and movements. In the city of Kaolack, life in one quarter of the city is very much shaped by the mosque which is linked to a special branch of the traditional brotherhoods. Th e translocal relations of the Marabout link this locality with other Senegalese and foreign countries. Interestingly, the Marabout’s local activities are based on the cooperation with an American NGO. Th ey use the argumentation from ‘progressive Islamic scholars’, e.g. the Secretary General of the Islam and Population Network founded with the support of the UN Population Fund. Th us, translocal discourse enters the national space through a decidedly Islamic network.68 An important point of reference for debating local issues based on translocality is CEDAW, which has been referred to as containing valid arguments by women’s groups by its very existence. Its role was enhanced by the Platform of Action of the Beijing Conference for Women in 1995, as well as the globally established ‘post-Beijing’ process of regional debates and global connectedness.69 Whereas in Beijing Islamist participants had still been marginalised and not given a voice, as religion was regarded as leading to culturalist argumenta- tions, this position changed in the process of the formation of epistemic communities of women activists. It is now argued that there is a two-way negotiating process of meanings and concepts which needs to take religion into account.70 In Malaysia, the participatory observation of the process of prepar- ing and debating a so-called shadow report on the country’s situation with regard to CEDAW showed very clearly the diversity of women’s groups and their agendas.71 It also confi rmed the authority gained in the national public sphere from basing certain positions on global concepts and regional networks.

68 Sieveking, “Negotiating Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives,” pp. 154ff . 69 Christa Wichterich, “Strategische Verschwisterung, multiple Feminismen und die Glokalisierung der Frauenbewegungen,” in Frauenbewegungen weltweit: Aufb rue- che, Kontinuitäten, Veraenderungen, eds. Ilse Lenz, Michiko Mae and Karin Klose (Opladen, 2002), pp. 257–280; Women Watch—Beijing+10 Global Forum, http:// www.un.org/ womenwatch/ followup/beijing10/#to (accessed March 1, 2008). 70 Nageeb, Sieveking and Spiegel, “Negotiating Development.” 71 Spiegel, “Negotiating Women’s Rights in a Translocal Space,” pp. 172ff . 358 gudrun lachenmann

Regarding the situation in Sudan, Nageeb has also presented an interesting event analysis of a meeting which discussed women’s rights and CEDAW.72 It took place in the relatively protected space of an international organisation as part of its programme to support the process of democratisation and peace building. Her analysis reveals subtle but distinct diff erences between women activists regarding how their religious position framed their interpretations of rights. Inter- estingly, the international organisation included Islamic authorities in the event, who were treated as most honoured guests and speakers. A prominent woman activist appeared in traditional Sudanese (not Islamic) dress, talking in Arabic and thus demonstrating political and religious allegiance to Sudanese society and culture as against global homogenisation. Nevertheless, she was criticised for her close cooperation with international organisations. Th is implied also a critique of her reference to global development concepts. Th e second speaker was an Islamic scholar known for his position against FGM/C (female genital mutilation/circumcision), as well as his outspoken views on HIV/AIDS and reproductive health. Th is ‘Imam of the women’s NGOs’ transmitted the important message that there is no contradiction between women’s rights and Islam. Th e most explicitly glocal form of localisation studied at the interface between women’s civil society organisations and the state, and respectively the political situation, has thus been clearly seen in Sudan. As mentioned before, it seems that the particular confl uence of the peace process between North and South, as well as foreign cooperation in the exploitation of oil has opened up space for women’s organisations to participate in the public sphere. In the course of this, it is also possible to adapt such controversial concepts as VAW. Th e large-scale presence of international development agencies and donors creates a supportive environment for civil organisations, particularly women’s NGOs working in the area of human and women’s rights.

Diversity of Discourses on Islam and Negotiation of Authority of Knowledge in Translocal Spaces

When examining how connections between globalised concepts and local discourses are established within an Islamic societal framework,

72 Nageeb, “Women’s Organisations and Th eir Agendas in Sudan,” pp. 95ff . translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 359 we can identify diff erent modes of intensity of negotiation and of translation. Th e most intensive and publicly established form can be found in Sudan where fundamentalist concepts have penetrated not only politics but every sphere of life. On all levels of society permanent disputes regarding authoritative knowledge and the right to interpretation take place. In Malaysia the political struggle to defi ne the connection between religion and society is very acute. It includes political parties in power and in opposition, and struggles to maintain concern about diff erent regions and legislations. Astonishingly enough, in both Malaysia and Sudan economic liberalisation is to a certain extent excluded from such debates. As has been shown, the campaigning for women’s rights and gender equality in Senegal takes place at a very local level, embedded in everyday Islam. Such a local interpretation of gender, however, seems oft en to be one of the basic barriers to advancing creative understandings of new forms of interaction. Th us, ‘patriarchy’ is oft en seen as a very local issue which has no translocal relevance and is considered as ‘culture’, not as part of ‘religion’.73 Of course this is due to the apparent opposition between religion, considered to be sacred, as against culture, which can be more easily blamed for shortcomings in the relations between men and women, even if the need to defend it against West- ernisation is also stressed. Women’s organisations legitimise their global development agendas oft en through a diff erentiated discourse on Islam. Nageeb distinguishes two diff erent patterns. She calls the fi rst one a “progressive interpretation of Islamic sources”, in accordance with the use of this term in the countries studied. Women “seek to legitimise these development goals or visions by linking global politics and concepts of moderate Islamic ethics and interpretations of religious sources”. Th ey do this “by emphasising its compatibility with general Islamic ethics”.74 Th ereby they contest current global Islamisation fl ows. Th e second mode is to “advocate Islamisation politics, projects, and Islam reformist discourse and movements” as, contrary to the a.m. orientation, they believe that they

73 See Ulrike Schultz, “Report on the Summer School ‘Perspectives of Feminism and Politics of Identity in Africa: Finding a Common Ground, 27 August–7 Septem- ber 2007’,” Usmanu Danfodiyo University Sokoto, Nigeria, Free University Berlin, http://userpage.fu-berlin.de/Sokoto/ (accessed March 1, 2008). 74 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” p. 225. 360 gudrun lachenmann

off er the appropriate frame to address the issues they want to address, especially regarding gender. Th is means they move within the context of Islamic movements and politics, but at the same time they work on changing gender relations.75 Th e progressive Islamic discourse is represented in Senegal where, as shown above, women adopt an Islamist argumentation for gender equity embedded in the local norms of solidarity, thereby transcending more traditional Sufi notions.76 However, this discourse is diff erent from the Islamic reform discourse which on the global level represents an alternative concept of gender and rights. Senegalese women do not challenge the position of the state which shift s ambiguously between its secularity and its strong links to the local Sufi orders, but opposes Islamist orientation. In Malaysia and Sudan the situation is diff erent due to the Islami- sation processes of the states. Women either criticise the process of Islamisation in general as leading to the control of women, or they consider Islam in the framework of the ongoing ethnicised diff erentiation processes. In Sudan, women’s NGOs can adopt a translocal discourse on Islam thereby contesting the state’s control on religion and the profound process of cultural change it promotes. Here development cannot publicly be discussed without reference to Islam, including very particular gender issues such as reproductive health etc.—mostly referring to progressive interpretations mainly taken from the Maghreb. Like in the debates about Islamic reforms of civil society and the defi - nition of the common good,77 the contest is about authoritative knowledge and its diff erent representatives/carriers. It is clear that translocal knowledge provides authority and structures the public sphere as well as social order. Women activists and social science scholars are constructed by their opponents as ignorant and not legitimised to talk

75 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” p. 225, following Roman Loimeier, “Islamic Reform and Political Change: Th e Example of Abubakar Gumi and the Yan Izala Movement in Norther Nigeria,” in African Islam and Islam in Africa: Encounters between Sufi s and Islamists, eds. Eva Evers Rosander and David Westerlund (London, 1997), pp. 286–307; Salvatore, “Th e Problem of the Ingraining of Civilization Tradi- tions into Social Governance.” 76 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 226f. 77 Salvatore, “Th e Problem of the Ingraining of Civilization Traditions into Social Governance.” translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 361 about Islam in public challenging their public position.78 We have seen that in Malaysia, organisations such as SIS have acquired Islamically relevant authority at least in certain fi elds (family, the social). isTh consciously female intervention in scholarly debates on the basis of textual knowledge seems, however, to be limited to Malaysia. More common are situations like those in the Sudan, where there clearly are Islamically educated women as well.79 Nevertheless, women typically make strategic use of specifi c liberal male scholars, as has been discussed above. Th is strategy was widely used in all countries studied, in addition to Nigeria. Only in Malaysia SIS dares to claim, at least partly, the knowledge and authority to argue with a rather theoretical reference to scholars and texts, but their analysis is linked to the social reality of phenomena such as wife battering, polygyny, inheritance etc. In all cases, women very clearly avoid any rhetoric of radical change (or liberalism in Sudan) of the existing social and gender order, but base their arguments on an everyday logic of rights and obligations in gender relations. Further arguments refer to the societal image of motherhood, of suff ering, of carrying the increasing responsibilities for livelihood provision of families in all countries. However, the problem of political motherhood in the sense of instrumentalisation and nationalist ideology including diff erences in Family Law looms large in many countries. In the Senegalese case, the debate clearly draws on locally established cultural norms and values concerning women’s duties and obligations in the framework of the traditional family on the one hand, and an ideal of social solidarity and moral economy based on reciprocity on the other. Th is has been very much advanced by the peasant movement including women’s groups. In this context I oft en observed consultation with local Marabouts about how to bring about local socio-economic change without going against ‘rules of Islam’ (such as the issue of paying interest etc.). In Senegal, as mentioned above, sympathetic speakers of Islamic authority are also brought into the discussion. Th is means there is no female epistemic religious community entering the general debate and public sphere. Female Islamic scholars take part in global debates on Islamisation. As far as such debates take place in the transnational public sphere of UN conferences and women’s fora, they are very oft en based in

78 Spiegel, “Striving for Social Change in Translocal Spaces,” pp. 275ff . 79 Nageeb, “Appropriating the Mosque.” 362 gudrun lachenmann non-Muslim countries or limited to the academic sphere. Th is oft en shapes the positions taken, and might on occasion contribute to defensive reactions. Where there are long-established links of co-operation, and where women activists participate, debates oft en become much more open and controversial, i.e. with regard to the question of what should or should not be explained (and/or changed) in terms of religion.80 Badran makes the strong argument that “Islamic feminism” can be considered to be more radical than “Muslims’ secular feminisms”.81

Constituting Translocality through Global Connections and Knowledge Spaces

As has been shown above, global concepts of women’s rights and gender policies are developed in translocal spaces and through translocal networking relations. Women are doing this by negating the homogenisation of Islamic discourses and of identities, thereby restructuring the global sphere.82 Th is allows for the creation of a global discourse on Islam which includes critical consideration of the growing infl uence of Islamist thought and movements, and of the general opposition contained in the discourse on ‘Islam and the West’. Nevertheless, these negotiation processes may also lead to comparisons between societies, and to discursive hierarchisations positioning Muslim societies morally above ‘the West’ which becomes identifi ed with negative impacts of globalisation and neo-liberalism.83 In Senegal, translocal networking is not limited to the urban-based women’s movements. Activists of rural background and with a less formal education participate in peasant organisations and in networks created aft er the Beijing conference such as Women in Law and Devel- opment in Africa (Wildaf ).84 Similar observations apply to Malaysian activists, who, at the Bangkok meeting of the Asia-Pacifi c NGOs plat-

80 Balghis Badri, “Feminist Perspectives in Sudan,” gender politik online (2006), http://web.fu-berlin.de/gpo/pdf/tagungen/fatima_l_adamu.pdf. 81 Margot Badran, “Islamic Feminism: What’s in a Name?” Al-Ahram Weekly Online 569 (January 17–23, 2002). 82 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 240f. 83 See fi nal workshop of the a.m. research project bringing together researchers and activists from the three countries, Nageeb, Sieveking and Spiegel, “Negotiating Development.” 84 See Christine Mueller, Local Knowledge and Gender in Ghana (Bielefeld, 2005). translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 363 form of action, participated in the shaping of a collective identity of sisterhood through contributing their local experiences when participating in the framing of a joint women’s agenda.85 Th e aforementioned processes of diff erentiation and hierarchisation between societies on the basis of specifi c understandings of ‘good Islam’ were particularly obvious in two cases regarding Sudan and Malaysia. Th us, Nageeb gives an interesting account of an international meeting of the Muslim Women International Bond, an Islamist women’s NGO whose head offi ce in Khartoum organised a meeting to “bring Muslim women together and unify their eff orts to improve the status of the Muslim in the world”.86 Nevertheless, during the meeting, categories such as ‘traditional’, ‘westernised’, ‘ignorant’ and ‘lazy Muslims’ were used to establish hierarchies between Muslim societies. In the Malaysian example, the situation in Malaysia was compared to that of Tanzania and Lebanon.87 Th e strife for authoritative knowledge shows how important it is for women to participate in translocal interactions, be it at the national or the transnational level. In Sudan the translocal activity is used to widen the room for manoeuvre, and legitimise activities at the national level. Th is is also the case in Malaysia, where especially regional activities are so important that the government is unable to suppress them. A case in point is the local discussions of the shadow report on CEDAW. Th us, the investigation of knowledge production has enabled us to uncover diff erent forms of Islam and claims of everyday Islam as against evidence of global homogenisation and fundamentalism(s). Th e same applies to diff erent types of feminism as regards regional and political diversity. Within the various debates on Islamic feminism, I could observe on the occasion of international workshops that some representatives want to include the offi cial statement of faith and groundedness of rights in religion, whereas many others (including participants from Sudan, Iran, and most clearly from Senegal or Egypt) insist on not being labelled ‘Muslim women’. Here there is of course a large fi eld of possible confl ict and separation of platforms. Some activists and feminist scholars have started to describe themselves as “Islamic feminists”,

85 Spiegel, “Negotiating Women’s Rights in a Translocal Space,” pp. 185ff . 86 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 241ff . 87 Spiegel, “Negotiating Women’s Rights in a Translocal Space,” pp. 185ff . 364 gudrun lachenmann some as “Muslim feminists”88 which would imply an internal debate within global female networking, possibly but not necessarily excluding non-Muslims. Although there is consensus on the diversity of feminism in the global arena, this can create certain new boundaries and produce new types of othering and exclusion. Th e Malaysian women’s movement claims that there is a global solidarity of women and sisterhood,89 i.e. that they are not anti-Western but—as is oft en the case in global feminist discourse—anti-neoliberalism and critical of the impact of globalisation. In Senegal, the process of othering at the local level works through the diff erent cultural constructions of gender and equality, without taking into account global feminist discourses on difference. Th is debate takes place between claiming universal negotiation on the one hand, and working for the consideration of specifi c, nationally relevant contexts of culture and tradition on the other. In the emerging concept of ‘African feminism’90 othering is more cultural than religious and refers more to gender concepts with regard to development, while it is oft en still linked to the colonial past and being defi ned from the outside. However, here too some women activists and scholars claim to have reached the very important stage of being able to discuss Muslim interpretations with (male) Islamic authorities.91 However, the label of ‘feminist’ seems to become more contested in this context. Overall, the relatively young epistemic community focusing on debates about African and Islamic feminism is very pluralistic in its approaches and strategies.92 Th is became evident at a summer school at the University of Sokoto in 2007. Th e concept of African feminism was only upheld at all among those directly struggling within an Islamist state university who faced diffi culties with

88 See Othman, “Islamization and Modernization in Malaysia” and idem, “Intro- duction: Muslim Women and the Challenge of Political Islam”; Ziba Mir-Hosseini, “Stretching the Limits: A Feminist Reading of the Shari’ah in Post-Khomeini Iran,” in Islam and Feminism: Legal and Literary Perspectives, ed. Mai Yamani (London, 1996); Valentine M. Moghadam, “Islamic Feminism and its Discontents: Towards a Resolu- tion of the Debate,” in Gender, Politics and Islam, eds. Th erese Saliba, Carolyn Allen and Judith A. Howard (New Delhi, 2002), pp. 15–52. 89 Chandra Talpade Mohanty, Feminism without Borders: Decolonizing Th eory, Practicing Solidarity (Durham, 2003). 90 Rosander, Evers and Westerlund, eds., African Islam and Islam in Africa. 91 E.g. Fatima Adamu, Universitiy of Sokoto, Nigeria, during a workshop in Biele- feld in 2005 and a conference in Berlin 2006. 92 See Ali Mari Tripp, “Transnational Feminism, Regional Networking and Women’s Political Representation in Africa,” Feminist Africa 4 (2005). translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 365 other Nigerian researchers and activists present. Scholars like Adamu, the main organiser, would represent the necessity of a translocal feminism,93 but at the same time used the marker of ‘African feminism’ as against ‘Islamic feminism’ to distance herself from global Islamist homogenisation. In diff erent working groups some participants pleaded clearly for dropping the concept altogether. Another opinion was to maintain it in a qualifi ed manner. Th is position was supported by arguments about important elements of African feminism such as the notion of balance between the sexes, the ability of negotiation and diplomacy, as well as an emphasis on African history, culture and religion. Feminism was seen as needing to integrate socio-economic aspects, notions of daughterhood, intuition, and to find a common ground. Furthermore, as feminism was seen to be fraught with negative connotations in Africa due to the men’s fear of losing power, there was a felt need to modify its connotations. Alternatively, there was the suggestion to use the term of ‘Afro-central gender movements’. Th is concept was criticised for its (African) particularity. Interestingly, the politics of global development funding entered the debate through the argument that ‘African feminism’ might attract donors. When searching for commonalities regarding African feminism, Sudan’s proximity to the Arab world proved divisive.94 Equally contested was the question of the in- or exclusion of some Nigerian religious movements (of which quite a number of the participants were members), depending on whether they were seen to fi ght for women’s rights or not. A dominant notion was that while Western feminist movements were seen to exclude men, the “African reality” demanded collaboration, rather than confrontation, with them. Our research project has thus shown that the strategy of actively pursuing a progressive Islamic discourse is very much contested by liberal feminists from Muslim countries.95 Diff erences within Islamic

93 Joy Ezello, “Feminism and Islamic Fundamentalism: Some Perspectives from Nigeria and beyond,” Signs. Journal of Women in Culture and Society 32, 1 (2006), 40–47. 94 See also the longstanding Link Programme between Ahfad University for Women, Sudan and Humboldt University of Berlin fi nanced by DAAD German Academic Exchange Service, to which I participated extensively; see Parto Teherani-Kroenner and Brigitte Woerteler, eds., Gender Research and Networking: You Can’t Clap with One Hand, 1, Gender Studies (Herbolzheim, 2008). 95 Badri, “Feminist Perspectives in Sudan”; Othman, “Introduction: Muslim Women and the Challenge of Political Islam”; Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 230ff .; 366 gudrun lachenmann discourses are certainly reinforced by the ‘gender question’ which con- nects to our discussion regarding the authority of knowledge. Th ere is a growing epistemic community which is “re-reading the foundational and canonical Islamic texts from a gender perspective which does not essentialize ‘Islam’ ”. Th is is part of a “ ‘new’ critical Islamic scholarship engaged in re-dynamizing Islamic thought within the framework of a double critique of modernity and Islamic orthodoxies”.96 Mir-Husse- ini, who was one of the fi rst to use the term ‘Islamic feminism’, draws legitimacy from Islam regarding justice and equality and at the same time insists to introduce her faith into her scientifi c position.97 Th e forces to combat through this argumentation are supposed to be Mus- lim traditionalism, Islamic fundamentalists who hold political power, as well as secular/enlightened fundamentalists who conceive religion to be inherently patriarchal and in a non-historical essentialist way. Th is position is represented by Norani Othman, a member of SIS in Malaysia. She argues that there is a “cultural battle” to be fought in order to retain religion in modernity and democratisation. At a talk on Islamic feminism she gave in Bielefeld in May 2007 on the basis of her publication “Muslim Women against Islamic Extremism”,98 she traced back the debate on interpretation from a women’s perspective. Th e example of Malaysia is indeed very interesting and leads to her recent challenge of what is supposed to be an ‘Islamic state’,99 arguing that it had been meant to guarantee freedom of religion and social justice as well as gender equality. A group within the Malaysian Association of Women Lawyers had reacted against the ‘patriarchalisation’ of Islamic family law during the process of political Islamisation because they felt the need to address the Quran from a historical perspective. Th ey distinguish between Islamic and Muslim feminism, the fi rst compris- ing classical Islamic scholars and the second all feminists using Islamic sources which in practice were not universalist regarding other epis-

Fatou Sow, Fundamentalisms, Globalisation and Women’s Human Rights in Senegal,” Gender and Development 11, 1 (2003), 69–76. 96 Gudrun Krämer et al., “Reconsidering ‘Islamic Feminism’: Deconstruction or the Quest of Authenticity?” Call & Programme workshop, Berlin, April 26–28, 2007 (Europe in the Middle East. Th e Middle East in Europe, Berlin-Brandenburgische Aka- demie der Wissenschaft en, Fritz Th yssen Stift ung, Wissenschaft skolleg zu Berlin). 97 Mir-Husseini, “Stretching the Limits” and a talk in Berlin 2006. 98 Othman and Petaling, eds., Muslim Women and the Challenge of Islamic Extremism. 99 Talk given May 2008, Humboldt University Berlin. translocal gendered spaces in muslim societies 367 temic cultures or even non-Muslim women. In this surrounding, ‘liberal Islam’ is rejected as referring to political Islam. In guise of conclusion we can say that our methodology of studying translocal social spaces constituted by women’s movements in very diff erent societies has allowed us to gain a very diversifi ed picture of global concepts of development being negotiated within a framework not of globalisation forces and processes, but of processes of glocalisation which do neither imply homogenisation, nor clashes of dualistic positions of cultures or religion. So we have found reference to diff erent ‘Islams’, and claims of everyday Islam as against global homogenisation and fundamentalisms, diff erent feminisms as regards regional and political diversity. Also, the question of diff erent modernities as regards public space, secularism, and economic institutions is very relevant. At the same time, translocality is clearly discernable in all social spaces constituted through women negotiating development in the widest sense, whereby globalisation can be observed in the making. Transnationally women in their multiple encounters and interactions deconstruct Islam as well as development concepts; they transcend global dichotomies and dif- ferentiate Islamic discourses upholding global gender agendas, even if fragmentation of identity politics is going on.100 Th e structuring of the global sphere through diff erence goes against homogenisation of identities and religious discourses by making diversity a feature to be used against all forms of clashes.

100 Nageeb, “Diversifi ed Development,” pp. 244ff .

ABOUT ‘TURKS’ AND ‘GERMANS’: THE TURKISH PRESS IN GERMANY AND THE CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPLE MEMBERSHIPS*

Christoph Schumann Universität Erlangen-Nürnberg

Introduction

“Will Turks decide the election?” Th is was the disturbing question asked on the front-page of Germany’s biggest and most infl uential tabloid newspaper Die BILD-Zeitung on September 14, 2005, just eight days before Germans went to the polls for federal elections. Of course, the idea that Turks could decide German elections was more than just unfamiliar for most Germans. So far, Turkey has not had a record of direct interference in German electoral politics. In addition, the large majority of Turkish citizens residing in Germany, i.e. the former ‘guestworkers’, have not gained German citizenship yet. Th eir electoral participation in Germany is therefore restricted to the so- called ‘aliens councils’ (Ausländerbeiräte). However, these institutions have little political impact. For this reason, the turn-out of voters (only citizens of non-EU member countries) has been dwindling for years. Yet, the front-page story of the BILD-Zeitung was not based on nothing. It rather responded to Germany’s biggest Turkish-language newspaper, Hürriyet, which had stated in its headline of the preceding day: “Th e vote of the Turks shift s to the SPD1 (Türkler’in oyu SPD’ye kayıyor)”. Th is contention referred to a telephone poll conducted among its readers which had concluded that 77 percent of German citizens of Turkish descent would cast their vote for the Social Demo- crats. Th e poll did not even claim to meet scientifi c standards. Most importantly, it was not clear whether the people polled by Hürriyet did, in fact, hold German citizenship and, thus, were allowed to vote. However, apart from this, the headline was clearly meant to give the

1 Social Democratic Party of Germany, led by the then-chancellor Gerhard Schröder. 370 christoph schumann then-chancellor Gerhard Schröder a warm welcome on his visit at the Frankfurt-based headquarters of Hürriyet that same day. In the following days, the ostentatious exchange between the two papers triggered some debate in the German public sphere on whether German citizens of Turkish origin should be called ‘Turks’ and whether they really constitute a decisive voting block. Eventually, the election turned out to be rather undecided: neither the Red-Green government nor the Christian Democrat-Liberal opposition could win a majority. In the aft ermath, the noisy struggle for the chancellorship superseded any debate on the actual role of ethnic Turks in the elections. Nevertheless, this brief anecdote sheds light on two interesting developments. First, Turkish media and particularly the Turkish press have established themselves in Germany. Far from being a mere extension of the Turkish public sphere into German territory, Turk- ish newspapers have taken root by adapting themselves to the specifi c situation in the diaspora. Th ey became a vibrant part of the German public sphere in two ways: by giving a voice to the Turkish community vis-à-vis the receiving society and by providing a forum for internal discussions among ethnic Turks. Second, it is generally agreed that the former Turkish guestworkers and their descendants have become ‘members’2 of German society. Th e large majority of them hold the right of permanent residency and, resulting from it, signifi cant social rights. Beyond this, there is an obvious inclination to identify with certain aspects of German society such as the city or region of residence or certain companies with a longer local tradition (e.g. AEG, Opel). Yet, since only a minority of them have also become ‘citizens,’3 they have remained disenfranchised politically. In the following article, I will discuss the interconnection between ethnic media and the construction of ‘multiple memberships’ in more depth. Questions of belonging, membership, and citizenship are crucial topics in the European editions of the Turkish press, because they are connected to the demand for recognition and equal rights. Analysing the discourse of the most infl uential Turkish newspaper on the German market, Hürriyet, from the 1970s to the present, I will show how the mono-national concept of citizenship has given way to

2 Roger Brubaker, “Introduction,” in Immigration and the Politics of Citizenship in Europe and North America, ed. idem (Lanham, 1989), p. 16. 3 Ibid. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 371 a complex notion of membership. Today, I argue, Hürriyet describes ethnic Turks in Germany simultaneously as members of Germany and Turkey, as a distinct ethnic community, and as belonging to particular localities. In this sense, membership can imply the legal status of citizenship, but it can also refer to an affi liation in a wider sense. For this reason, the discourse in Hürriyet challenges the idea of a homogeneous nation—be it Turkish or German—in its core belief, namely the co-extension of the national community, the national territory, and the national culture.

Th eoretical Perspectives: Citizenship between ‘Mediascapes’ and ‘Ethnoscapes’

In his book Modernity at Large, Arjun Appadurai theorises the combined eff ects of migration and media on the production of modern subjectivity.4 He applies the neologism ‘ethnoscapes’ to global movements of individuals and groups like tourists, guestworkers, refugees and exiles. Similarly, he uses the notions ‘mediascapes’ and ‘ideoscapes’ to describe the technical facilities to distribute information and “images of the world” created by the media. In both cases, the suffi x -scape allows him to stress two aspects. On the one hand, media and migration have fl uid and irregular shapes like a landscape. On the other hand, these phenomena cannot be described ‘objectively’ from one single point of view. Instead, they are “deeply perspectival constructs, infl ected by the historical, linguistic, and political situatedness of diff erent sorts of actors.”5 Th e individual actor is, according to Appadurai, the last locus of these landscapes since actors are part and parcel of these formations. Moreover, actors navigate these formations according to their own perspectival perceptions and their expectations of what these landscapes might off er them. Th e connection between mass mediated communication and collective imagination is an established fact since Benedict Anderson’s seminal book on the emergence of nations as “imagined communities”. 6

4 Appadurai, Arjun, Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization (Minneapolis, 1998), p. 3. 5 Ibid., p. 33. 6 Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities: Refl ections on the Origins and Spread of Nationalism (London, 1991). 372 christoph schumann

Appadurai expands Anderson’s theory in several directions. First, he points out that media and cultural artefacts such as movies travel together with the migrants and thus transcend the boundaries of the nation-state. Accordingly, media producers systematically take into account the distribution of their products to the diaspora communities beyond the national boundaries. By doing so, some media such as movies maintain their specifi c form and content, while other media, most notably the press, adapts to the particular environment of the diaspora. In both cases the appropriation and reception of this media is likely to be diff erent in the homeland and abroad. Second, Appadurai agrees with Anderson that mass media induce the emergence of imagined communities, but he adds that this imagination applied not only to national communities but more generally to what he calls “imagined worlds”. Following Appadurai, these imagined worlds provide people with interpretations of their environments; they create “communities of sentiment;”7 and they feed collective memories and expectations. Yet, the sheer multiplicity of diff erent media and contents provides not only shared imaginations but also individual imaginations. Th e latter off er “resources for self-imagining as an everyday project” thus facilitating the imagination of individual life- projects. Hence, mass mediated communication shapes communal and individual imaginations alike, while both are tightly interwoven. Th e individual decision to emigrate is, according to Appadurai, the most striking example for an individual life-project based on imagination: Th ose who wish to move, those who have moved, those who wish to return, and those who choose to stay rarely formulate their plans outside the sphere of radio and television, cassettes and videos, newsprint and telephone. For migrants, both the politics of adaptation to new environments and the stimulus to move or return are deeply aff ected by a mass- mediated imaginary that frequently transcends national space.8 In short, mass mediated communication is eff ective in a seemingly paradoxical way: on the one hand, it supports the emergence and reproduction of imagined communities and, on the other, it creates a fertile ground for the imagination of individual life-projects such as

7 Arjun Appadurai, “Disjuncture and Diff erence in the Global Cultural Economy,” in Global Culture: Nationalism, Globalisation, and Modernity, ed. Mike Featherstone (London, 1990), pp. 296–310. 8 Appadurai, Modernity at Large, p. 6. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 373 the decision to migrate. As a result, the constant movement of people disperses communities world-wide, while mass media allows for their collective sentiments to prevail. Having this in mind, Benedict Anderson’s Imagined Communi- ties raises important questions which are relevant in our context.9 Anderson puts much emphasis on the link between mass mediated communication, the use of a common language, and the emergence of imagined communities. However, migrants, and even more their off spring, are usually exposed to media in more than one language and from more than one source. It is well known, for instance, that ethnic Turks in Germany and particularly the younger and well- educated among them read newspapers in both German and Turk- ish. So, what kind of eff ect does this have on their sense of membership and belonging? Th e majority of ethnic Turks in Germany are still Turkish citizens. However, their participation in Turkish politics is severed by the fact that they live outside the national territory. At the same time, they are politically active in Germany and demand more rights there—despite the fact that they are not German citizens. Peter Mandaville has called this poignantly the “disjuncture between one’s legal identity as a citizen and one’s political identity as an actor in the public sphere.”10 Th is picture is rendered even more complex by the consumption of mass media in several languages and from multiple sources. I will argue below that this media consumption creates a variety of imagined communities and, hence, more complex notions of membership. Some of them are in contradiction with one another, while others are not. Of course, not all ‘imagined communities’ are ‘nations’ with a claim to sovereignty, in the sense of Benedict Anderson. Th e idea of a ‘community’ of ethnic Turks in Germany exists in the ethnic media and among many of its readers, even though it is well known that the group of immigrants and post-migrants from Turkey in Germany is fragmented along religious, ideological, and even ethnic lines. Never- theless, the mere imagination of a community is the prerequisite for the expression of shared experiences and the formulation of common goals.

9 Anderson, Imagined Communities. 10 Peter Mandaville, Transnational Muslim Politics: Reimagining the Umma (Lon- don, 2001), p. 12. 374 christoph schumann

On the other hand, mass media, and particularly the press, is usually dominated by the political agenda of one particular nation-state. Ger- man media, for instance, cover mainly German politics thus addressing mainly an audience of German citizens. Likewise, Turkish media assume that its readers are Turkish citizens. Th e motto of Germany’s Frankfurter Allgemeine is “Zeitung für Deutschland (newspaper for Germany)” and Hürriyet still uses its old slogan “Türkiye Türkler’indir (Turkey for the Turks).” Yet how do these concepts relate to the political and social realities of ethnic Turks in Germany? Or, to put it dif- ferently, in how far do ethnic Turks in Germany fi nd their specifi c situation and their experiences refl ected in the Turkish and German media? Do they have a chance to make their own voices heard?

Hürriyet and the Turkish Mediascape in Germany

Today, the Turkish mediascape in Germany has become extremely diverse by the import of video tapes from Turkey, the proliferation of satellite dishes and local TV and radio networks, and, of course, the internet. Nevertheless, print-media have maintained a crucial function by addressing ethnic Turks of all generations in Germany as one audience. By doing so, they create a “partial public sphere (Teilöff entlichkeit)”11 where political views and arguments on the situation and prospects of ethnic Turks in Germany can be exchanged. Of course, the communicative realities fall short of Jürgen Habermas’s ideal of a public sphere, but the press meets many of these criteria better than any other ethnic media.12 Th e satellite TV, for instance, which is broadcast from Turkey, is completely dominated by the coverage of Turkish society while neglecting the concerns of the Turkish audiences abroad, let alone giving them a voice. On the other hand, German-Turkish TV

11 Bernhard Peters, “Der Sinn von Öff entlichkeit,” in Öff entlichkeit, öff entliche Mei- nung, soziale Bewegung, ed. Friedhelm Neidhardt, special issue of Kölner Zeitschrift für Soziologie und Sozialpsychologie 34 (1994), 42–76; Christoph Schumann, “Th e Turkish Press in Germany: A public in-between two Publics?,” in Islam and Muslims in Ger- many, eds. Ala al-Hamarneh and Jörn Th ielmann, Minorities in Europe 7 (Leiden, 2008), pp. 441–461. 12 Jürgen Habermas, Faktizität und Geltung: Beiträge zur Diskurstheorie des Rechts und des demokratischen Rechtsstaats (Frankfurt a.M., 1992), esp. pp. 399–467; Lutz Wingert and Klaus Günther, eds., Die Öff entlichkeit der Vernunft und die Vernunft der Öff entlichkeit. Festschrift für Jürgen Habermas (Frankfurt a.M., 2001). about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 375 and radio stations have emerged, but their distribution is restricted to local cable networks.13 For this reason, they constitute only local public spheres. Last, but not least, the internet has become a cheap and eff ective platform for communication. However, its use is still mainly confi ned to the younger generation, while Turkish-German web-pages like vaybee.de are remarkably apolitical. Th e history of Turkish newspapers on the German market began in the 1960s. Th e fi rst copies were brought from Turkey to Germany by air. In 1971, Hürriyet established its fi rst printing plant in Zeppelin- heim, Neu-Isenburg which was used by other Turkish newspapers as well. From then on, Hürriyet established itself as the dominant Turk- ish paper on the German market. Hürriyet has adapted itself successfully to the needs and expectations of its readers in Germany and, beyond this, in Europe. In fact, all the Turkish newspapers available on the German market are distributed throughout Europe. Hürriyet’s European edition consists of two parts: the main part, which consists of 33 pages, is produced in Turkey. Th e second part is a supplement of four to fi ve pages, which is dedicated to covering the Turkish diaspora in Europe. Here, the main focus of this coverage is directed at Ger- many, but there are also reports on Turkish communities in neighboring countries, particularly Austria, Belgium, and the Netherlands. In line with the general conception of the paper, this part consists of news, human interest stories, interviews, entertainment, and some commentaries. Besides, Hürriyet addresses the political, legal, and social concerns of its readers on a regular basis. Th is format allows, at least, for some diversity of opinions. Th e spectrum of voices in Hürriyet includes the paper’s own columnists, German politicians and bureaucrats, ethnic Turkish members of the Bundestag and the state parliaments as well as representatives of other public and private organisations. Also the readers can voice their opinions—of course within the due limits of the Kemalist mainstream—in the section “Your Words (söz sizin)”. Since late 2007, these letters can also be downloaded from hurriyet.de. Th is webpage, which is mostly in Turkish, corresponds to the main webpage of Hürriyet, www.hurriyet.com.tr. For a long time the German-based website has been kept very simple.

13 Kira Kosnick, Migrant Media: Turkish Broadcasting and Multicultural Politics in Berlin (Bloomington, Indianapolis, 2007). 376 christoph schumann

During the last year, however, there has been a remarkable eff ort to improve the internet presence of Hürriyet in Germany. Nevertheless, a major shortcoming of Hürriyet’s print and online versions are, in my view, the insuffi cient adoption of the German language. Hürriyet has only a thin weekly German supplement prepared with fairly low quality around TV programs, some life style news, and commercial advertisements. However, an important step in the right direction was taken in summer 2007 with the new weekly supplement called Young Hürriyet. Th is new publication tries to attract the attention of young readers using German and an extremely colorful layout. Its contents are more or less apolitical and rather centered around sports and entertainment. In May 2008, the German Frankfurter Allge- meine Zeitung accused Young Hürriyet of a very sharp form of plagiarism. Soon aft er, the Turkish left ist paper Evrensel made this allegation known to the Turkish reading public.14 Subsequently Young Hürriyet was suspended for a while and restarted with a new staff in 2009. Hürriyet is certainly the best-known Turkish paper among ethnic Turks in Germany.15 Although, the German market has been extremely volatile for Turkish papers in the last decade, Hürriyet’s presence in Germany has been uninterrupted since the early 1970s. During the same period, other papers such as Cumhuriyet or Sabah had to be withdrawn temporarily from the German market for economic reasons. During the 1970s and 80s, Hürriyet’s main competitor in the German market was the conservative-religious paper Tercü- man. Aft er Tercüman ceased to exist, the liberal tabloid paper Sabah gained strength rapidly, but it was withdrawn in 2001.16 Since then,

14 Th omas Th iel, “Die Gedanken der Anderen: Plagiatsfall bei Hürriyet,” Frankfur- ter Allgemeine Zeitung (May 9, 2008), http://www.faz.net/s/Rub475F682E3FC24868A8 A5276D4FB916D7/Doc~EB77AD11 D682F45659EF6F0ED6DADDB6E~ATpl~Ecom mon~Scontent.html; “Hürriyet yorum hırsızı,” no author, Evrensel (May 14, 2008), http://www.evrensel.net/haber.php?haber_id=30814. On the “art” of plagiarism see Kevin Kopelson, “Confessions of a Plagiarist,” London Review of Books (May 22, 2008), http://www.lrb.co.uk/v30/n10/kope01_.html (all websites accessed May 23, 2008). 15 Ferda Ataman, “Das Leid-Medium: ‘Hürriyet’ wird 60,” Süddeutsche Zeitung (April 29, 2008), http://www.sueddeutsche.de/kultur/artikel/426/171820/print.html (accessed April 30, 2008); Martina Sauer, “Perspektiven des Zusammenlebens: Die Integration türkischstämmiger Migrantinnen und Migranten in Nordrhein-West- falen,” (Essen, 2007), http://www.zft -online.de/index.php?site=31 (accessed May 2, 2008), p. 178. See the numbers in more detail below. 16 Sabah was re-launched once more in 2006, but in Germany it never could gain the strength it has in Turkey. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 377 the moderate Islamist paper Zaman has stepped in and expanded its circulation constantly. Today, Hürriyet and Zaman are the only two Turkish papers in Germany which publicise their circulation fi gures. Th ese numbers give some insight into the composition of their audiences. In the fi rst quarter of 2008, the printed edition of Hürriyet was 75,249 of which 38,171 copies were sold, while the printed edition of Zaman was 20,414 of which 20,302 were sold.17 So, Hürriyet’s number of sold papers is almost double that of Zaman’s. Yet the diff erence between printed and sold papers is remarkable in the two cases. Readers of Hürriyet purchase their paper almost exclusively at (urban) newsstands. Most of them do this irregularly. Since Hürriyet is known to be passed on from hand to hand in Turkish associations, tea houses, mosques and in private homes, each issue reaches more than just one reader. Observers estimate that Hürriyet reaches up to 200,000 readers this way.18 In contrast with this, Zaman relies almost exclusively on distribution by subscription. Despite its remarkable growth during the last years, the paper has been unable to transcend the boundaries of its religious-ideological milieu shaped by the teachings and writings of Fetullah Gülen, a neo-Nurcu Sufi now resident in the United States. Hürriyet has—very much like most other Turkish newspapers—a sharp ideological profi le, which it propagates in its news section and, of course, in the commentaries. However, the cutting edge of Hürriyet’s ideological discourse is moderated by the large non-political sections fi lled with sports news, societal gossip, human interest stories, bikini girls, etc. Even those readers who are unlikely to agree with Hürriyet’s political line will probably fi nd some entertainment there. This makes Hürriyet a newspaper for the whole family. Most of its competitors lack this popular mixture. Particularly the radical papers such as the Islamist Millî Gazete, the Kurdish nationalist Yeni Özgür Politika, the left ist Evrensel, and to some extent also the moderate Islamist Zaman address their readers by a never-ending fl ow of ideological indoctrina- tion while allowing for little light relief. In the research literature, the role of the Turkish press in Germany has been discussed controversially. Until the present day, most discussions revolved around the overwhelmingly dominant paradigm of

17 Numbers according to IVW (Informationsgemeinschaft zur Feststellung der Verbreitung von Werbeträgern e.V.), www.ivw.de (accessed April 29, 2008). 18 Ferda Ataman, “Das Leid-Medium.” 378 christoph schumann

‘integration’ versus ‘segregation’. In other words, it is asked whether the Turkish press serves the goal of ‘integration’ of migrants (and post-migrants) into German society. Many researchers try to address the fears of the public by using notions like “demarcation”,19 “media isolation,”20 “parallel society,”21 and “media ghettoization”22 in the titles of their publications. Notwithstanding the merits of these studies, they contribute implicitly to the endless reproduction of German society’s worried perspective of the Turkish minority including its implicit dichotomy of ‘we-versus-them’. Th is narrow research paradigm leaves little room for demonstrating the actual complexities of the ethnic press such as its transnational dimensions.23 With regard to the Turkish press, the fear of a possible ‘media ghet- toisation’ of ethnic Turks in Germany can be easily refuted by some basic fi gures. Th e Essen-based Center for Studies on Turkey (Zentrum für Türkeistudien) has conducted detailed quantitative studies on the social and cultural situation of Turkish migrants in North-Rhine Westphalia.24 Its report shows that 96 percent of the ethnic Turks in Germany use Turkish-language media and 90 percent use German- language media.25 Th is is to say that, on average, 87 percent use media in both languages. Of course, the relative number of those who read newspapers is lower than the number of consumers of broadcast media. 64.5 percent of the respondents read Turkish and 46.4 German newspapers, while every second person (52.3 percent) claims to read

19 “Abgrenzung” as opposed to “integration”. Cf. Jörg Becker and Reinhard Benisch, eds., Zwischen Abgrenzung und Integration. Türkische Medienkultur in Deutschland, (Loccumer Protokolle) 03/00 (Loccum, 2001). 20 Reyhan Güntürk, “Mediennutzung der Migranten—mediale Isolation?” in Medien und multikulturelle Gesellschaft , eds. Christoph Butterwege, Gudrun Hentges, and Fatma Sarigöz, Interkulturelle Studien 3 (Opladen, 1999), pp. 136–143. 21 Kai Hafez, “Globalisierung, Ethnisierung und Medien: Eine ‘Parallelgesellschaft ’ durch türkische Medien in Deutschland?” in Zwischen Abgrenzung und Integration, pp. 37–48. 22 And reas Goldberg, “Mediale Vielfalt versus mediale Ghettoisierung,” Zeitschrift für Migration und soziale Arbeit 2 (1998). 23 Lars Heinemann and Fuat Kamcılı, “Unterhaltung, Absatzmärkte und die Vermittlung von Heimat: Die Rolle der Massenmedien in deutsch-türkischen Räu- men,” in Transstaatliche Räume: Politik, Wirtschaft und Kultur zwischen Deutschland und der Türkei, ed. Th omas Faist (Bielefeld, 2000), pp. 113–158; Betigül Ercan Argun, Turkey in Germany: Th e Transnational Sphere of Deutschkei (New York, 2003). 24 Sauer, “Perspektiven des Zusammenlebens.” 25 Ibid., p. 172. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 379 newspapers in both German and Turkish.26 Of the German publications, most popular are regional and tabloid papers. Of all the Turkish newspapers, 60.6 percent of the respondents read Hürriyet, while signifi cantly fewer mention the more liberal paper Milliyet (13.5 percent) or the conservative Islamic Zaman (12.6 percent).27 If one compares media consumption of Turks in Germany and Tur- key, it can be said that Turks living abroad read signifi cantly more than the average population at home, even though the level of education is higher in Turkey than among ethnic Turks in Germany.28 Th is points to the fact that the Turkish press in Germany has a function that is different from the mother papers in Turkey. In the diaspora, the function of the Turkish press is twofold. (1) Most importantly, of course, the Turkish newspapers satisfy a need for information: on the homeland, on the daily aff airs of the community, and on issues of German politics and society. It is important to know that this function has not always been fulfi lled by Turkey-based media. Since the 1960s, public German broadcasting agencies have been providing foreign-language programs for the ‘guestworkers’. Th is paternalistic eff ort had three main goals: to provide information on work-related issues in Germany; to preserve the guestworkers’ assumed inclination to return to their homelands; and, last but not least, to protect them against communist propaganda broadcast in Turkish by the neighboring socialist countries, particularly Hungary and the German Democratic Republic.29 Th e supply of German state programs declined with the increasing import of media products from Turkey: newspapers in the 1970s, videotapes in the 80s, and satellite TV and the internet from the 90s onward. During the process, Turkish media from the homeland adapted to the particular circumstances in Europe and, thus, changed. Today, the focus of Hürriyet’s news coverage, for instance, diff ers in its European editions from the Turkish edition.

26 Ibid., p. 177. See also Rainer Geissler and Horst Pöttker, eds., Integration durch Massenmedien: Medien und Migration im internationalen Vergleich (Bielefeld, 2006). 27 Sauer, “Perspektiven des Zusammenlebens,” p. 178. 28 Şeref Ateş, “Welches Bild verbreiten türkische Medien von der deutschen Gesell- schaft ?” in Zwischen Autonomie und Gängelung: Türkische Medienkultur in Deutsch- land, ed. Jörg Becker and Reinhard Benisch, Loccumer Protokolle 12/01 (Loccum, 2002), p. 88. 29 Arbeitsgemeinschaft der Öff entlich-Rechtlichen Rundfunkanstalten der Bundes- republik Deutschland, ed., ARD Jahrbuch 1969 (Hamburg, 1969), p. 100; Selçuk Isken- der, Medien und Organisationen: Interkulturelle Medien und Organisationen und ihr Beitrag zur Integration der türkischen Minderheit (Berlin, 1983), pp. 27ff . 380 christoph schumann

(2) Furthermore, the self-proclaimed function of the Turkish papers in Germany diff ers from papers in Turkey. In Germany, the Turk- ish press sees itself as an advocate or rather an intermediary between the Turkish community and the German government. Of course, it is a matter of debate whether Hürriyet is able to fulfi ll this function. Nevertheless, Hürriyet’s aspiration shapes its journalistic discourse signifi cantly. Hence, its eagerness to demonstrate that it pursues the interests of its readers vis-à-vis the government and public institutions.30 In general, intermediary politics was not invented by Hürri- yet but is rather rooted in Germany’s peculiar ‘immigration’ history, i.e. the recruitment of the guestworkers and their partial integration into German society. From the beginning, the German government and bureaucracy treated the migrants as supposedly coherent ethnic groups: the Italians, the Greeks, the Serbs, the Croats, and the Turks. German offi cials addressed these groups by a whole range of intermediary persons and institutions such as charitable organisations (the Workers’ Welfare Association, for instance), social workers, labour unions, the Turkish consulates, and most notably, the Federal Com- missioner for Foreign Aff airs (Bundesausländerbeauft ragter).31 Th e Turkish press merely joined this pre-existing system of intermediary co-optation by claiming to represent the interests of the community more authentically than other institutions. Th is whole system of intermediary politics is based on the fact that the former immigrants remained disenfranchised and thus unable to pursue their own interests as full citizens. From this perspective, intermediary politics by paternalistic institutions is a surrogate for citizenship. In Turkey, for obvious reasons, the press does not claim to have the function of representing civil society vis-à-vis the government. For this reason, the Turkish press in Germany is more than just the ‘extension’ of the Turkish public sphere to Germany.32 In the process of adaptation, the press assumed a specifi c political function, which shapes its focus, its discourses, and its attitudes towards Turkey and Germany.

30 Faruk Șen and Andreas Goldberg, Türken in Deutschland: Leben zwischen zwei Kulturen (Munich, 1994), p. 121. 31 Christian Joppke, Immigration and the Nation-State: Th e United States, Germany, and Great Britain (Oxford, 1999), pp. 187–222. 32 Argun, Turkey in Germany. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 381

Hürriyet and ‘Integration’

Th e 1970s At the end of the 1970s, a group of students of the Berlin Institute of Technology (TU Berlin) conducted a survey on the media supply for Turkish citizens in West Berlin. Th eir advisor, Prof. Knilli, drew a bleak picture in his introduction to the study. In contrast to the strong and well-established presence of foreign language media of the West- ern allies in West Berlin, he stated: Only the Turks live in Kreuzberg under terrible circumstances without modern media and, thus, are exposed to the pre-industrial fl ow of information in the streets and backyards, bazaars and dives, Koran schools and mosques.33 Th is description was obviously exaggerated. By then, it was already driven by the fear that “fanatical religious groups of Moslems” and “fascist organizations” such as the Grey Wolves could gain followers by ‘pre-modern’ means of communication, i.e. mouth-to-mouth propaganda.34 At that time, the Turkish media had just entered the German market. During this fi rst decade, the coverage on Turkey dominated the contents of all papers. Th e European headquarters of the papers consisted mainly of the former bureau of foreign correspondents in addition to a number of freelance journalists. Only some papers—among them Hürriyet—provided a thin section on German and European aff airs at all. In 1979, the European edition of Hürriyet comprised 16 pages of which only one was designated for West Germany.35 Th is section was mainly focused on activities of the community. Th ereby, the paper provided at least some means for “internal communication between Turks abroad.”36 Apart from this, the Turkish papers made little eff ort to provide orientation for the immigrants in German society. Th is

33 Dietrich Klitzke, ed., Das Medienangebot für die Bevölkerung aus der Türkei in Berlin (West): Eine Dokumentation (Berlin, 1980), p. 6. 34 Ibid., p. 14. 35 Ibid., p. 67ff . 36 Mehmet Aktan, Das Medienangebot für die ausländischen Arbeitnehmer in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland: Untersucht am Beispiel türkischsprachiger Zeitungen und Hörfunksendungen, (Doctoral thesis, Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München, Munich, 1979), p. 197. 382 christoph schumann fi eld was completely left to German publications. During this period, the periodicals of the German labour unions fi lled this void most effi ciently. Th eir publications in Turkish (and other languages of the guestworkers) such as DGB Haberler (1973–1990; circulation in 1979: 200,000) and Metall Haberler (since 1964; circulation in 1979: 175,000) encouraged social and political participation of the guestworkers in German society.37

Th e 1980s During the 1980s, ethnic Turks in Germany faced a surge of anti- immigrant sentiments which was accompanied by electoral gains of right-wing parties. Th is development had an important impact on the change of the Turkish press and particularly Hürriyet. It was when Hürriyet increasingly assumed the role of a speaker for the community. A major part of the articles was aimed mainly at documenting the activities of Hürriyet on behalf of its readers such as, for instance, letters to German offi cials, bureaucrats or other persons or institutions.38 In this, Hürriyet tried to demonstrate that it was “playing an active role in societal development.”39 Initially, Hürriyet drew a rather simplifi ed picture of both Germans and Turks. It depicted Germans as rather ill-willing and jealous of their Turkish colleagues.40 On August 20, 1982, for instance, Hürriyet explained the anti-Turkish feelings of Germans as follows: Th e Germans envy us because the Turkish population here has gained a standard of living that is in great part equal to Germans. Germans envy

37 Aktan, “Das Medienangebot für die ausländischen Arbeitnehmer,” p. 69; Hans- Wolf Rissom, “Arbeitnehmer im Ausland,” a documentation, German UNESCO commission and Friedrich-Ebert-Foundation (Köln, 1974); Faruk Șen, Türkische Arbeitnehmergesellschaft en: Gründung, Struktur und wirtschaft liche Funktion der tür- kischen Arbeitnehmergesellschaft en in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland für die sozio- ökonomische Lage der Türkei (Frankfurt, 1980). 38 Karl Binswanger, “Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland,” in Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und ihr Einfl uß auf die Inte- gration von Türken—Standpunkte und Analysen (Bonn, 1988), pp. 16–38. 39 Șen and Goldberg, Türken in Deutschland, p. 121. 40 Wolfgang Scharlipp, “Aufmachung, Inhalt und Sprache türkischer Tageszeitun- gen in Deutschland,” in Begegnung mit Türken—Begegnung mit dem Islam, eds. Hans- Jürgen Brandt and Claus-Peter Haase (Hamburg, 1984), pp. 213–221; Hans-Günter Kleff , “‘Die Deutschen’ in türkischen Tageszeitungen: Eine Untersuchung am Beispiel der Europa-Ausgaben von Hürriyet und Tercüman,” Deutsch lernen 1 (1989), 34–63; Binswanger, “Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland,” pp. 30ff . about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 383

us because many Turks work hard at their work places for the construction of the German economy, while many Germans are unemployed. Many Turks have even succeeded in becoming employers.41 Hürriyet and other secular papers addressed their readers as ‘fellow citizens’ (vatandaşlar) in contrast to the religious papers which used the notions ‘Muslims’ (Millî Gazete) or ‘Turkish Muslims’ (Tercü- man). Semantically, the bond to the ‘homeland’ (vatan) is a basic constituent of the Turkish word for ‘citizen’ (vatandaş). During the 1980s, Hürriyet still assumed that the majority of its readers wished to return to Turkey at some later point. Th e preservation of their identity was therefore a stated goal of the paper, while naturalisation in Ger- many remained anathema then. Th e second notion used by Hürriyet to address its readers was ‘gurbetçi’, evoking the image of a person living in an alien environment (gurbet), lonely and in need of help.42 Of course, this notion reinforced the paternalistic claim of the paper to mediate between the guestworkers and public institutions of both Germany and Turkey. In the late 1980s, Hürriyet became more aware of the changing composition and, thus, changing demands of its readership.43 At that time, ethnic Turks perceived the program of the Kohl government to encourage their return to Turkey by fi nancial aid, the so-called ‘Rückkehrförderung’, as guided by xenophobia rather than a real will- ingness to assist. Partly in response to this, Hürriyet encouraged the settlement process by family reunifi cation and promoted adaptation with a simultaneous call for the preservation of Turkish culture. Last, but not least, it tried to persuade its readers to invest their savings in Turkey.

41 Quote following İskender, Medien und Organisationen, p. 62, translated from German to English by the author. 42 Binswanger, “Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland;” Kleff , “‘Die Deutschen’ in türkischen Tageszeitungen.” 43 Ahmet Külahçı (Hürriyet), “Wie müssen uns an den Erwartungen, Bedürfnis- sen und Wünschen unserer Leser orientieren,” in Die türkische Presse in der Bun- desrepublik Deutschland und ihr Einfl uß auf die Integration von Türken: Standpunkte und Analysen, ed. Zentrum für Türkeistudien [Center for Studies on Turkey] (Bonn, 1988), pp. 42–49; Zentrum für Türkeistudien, ed., Zum Integrationspotential der tür- kischen Tagespresse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland: Ergebnisse einer quantitativen und qualitativen Inhaltsanalyse türkischer Tageszeitungen (Opladen, 1991), pp. 48ff . 384 christoph schumann

Th e 1990s Th e 1990s, until the end of Helmut Kohl’s chancellorship, can be called a lost decade for the integration of ethnic Turks in Germany.44 From the fall of the Berlin Wall onward, the infl ux of ethnic Germans from the collapsing GDR, fi rst, and the former Soviet Union, later on, absorbed most of the government’s attention. Since these immigrants were considered to be Germans, they not only gained citizenship immediately, but also received the fi nancial support and the language courses that the former ‘guestworkers’ had desired for so long. Simul- taneously, the Kohl government initiated a public debate on the need to reduce immigration and particularly the infl ux of asylum seekers. Th e discussion was accompanied by a wave of racist violence which peaked with arson on private houses in Mölln and Solingen in 1993. By the time the asylum law was fi nally changed, forty-nine persons had been murdered in racist attacks—most of them foreigners.45 Th e extremely negative impact of these events on the Turkish community was refl ected in all the Turkish papers in Germany.46 Th e immediate result was a deep feeling of insecurity and helplessness. Th e German government was criticised for not intervening decisively against the violence. In addition, it was pointed out that no leading representative of the government came to the scene of the crimes in the aft ermath to pay tribute to the victims. Besides, the press directed its criticism also at the Turkish government for its insuffi cient eff orts to defend the security of its citizens abroad. Some voices even spoke about the necessity to re-migrate to the Turkish homeland, but the Turkish papers calmed these fears and no such migration took place.47 Instead, the tragic events of Mölln and Solingen became a cornerstone of a distinct collective memory of Turks in Germany. Since then, Hür-

44 See the piercing critique of the Green politician of Turkish descent, Cem Özdemir, ‘Deutsch oder nicht sein?’ Integration in der Bundesrepublik (Bergisch Glad- bach, 2000). 45 Ulrich Herbert, Geschichte der Ausländerpolitik in Deutschland: Saisonarbeiter, Zwangsarbeiter, Gastarbeiter, Flüchtlinge (München, 2001), p. 320. 46 Makfi Karacabey, “Türkische Tageszeitungen in der BRD: Rolle—Einfl uß—Funk- tionen. Eine Untersuchung zum Integrationsverständnis türkischer Tageszeitungen in der BRD,” (unpublished doctoral thesis, Johann Wolfgang Goethe-Universität, Frank- furt/Main, 1996), pp. 176–237. 47 Gülay Durgut, “Tagsüber Deutschland, abends Türkei? Türkische Medien in Deutschland,” in Deutsche Türken: Das Ende der Geduld (bi-lingual, Turkish-German), eds. Claus Leggewie and Zafer Șenocak (Reinbek, 1993), p. 117. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 385 riyet has reported annually on the commemoration ceremonies celebrated publicly.48 While these ceremonies refer to a common identity based on shared suff ering, they also establish a link to Germany’s political culture of public commemoration. German-Turkish Alevis even take this one step further and criticise Hürriyet for only com- memorating the racist attacks in Germany but not the simultaneous Islamist attacks on secular/Alevi intellectuals in Sivas, Turkey.49 Another ramifi cation of the xenophobic wave in the early 1990s was the fact that citizenship became a primary political goal of the Turkish community in Germany and a common demand in all Turkish papers. It has already been pointed out above that the Turkish press in Ger- many did not always promote naturalisation. Instead, the return to the homeland was, for a long time, a dominant theme. German citizenship seemed, therefore, only necessary for the second and third generations of those born in Germany. Th e political shift to embrace naturalisation in Germany was, therefore, the most notable public admission that the guestworkers had settled in Germany and that re-migration was nothing but a nostalgic dream. Th e ‘guestworkers’ had already become ‘members’ of German society and most of them had gained the right of permanent residency. What citizenship promised, beyond this, was offi cial recognition and electoral leverage. Aft er the negative experiences of the 1980s and 1990s, direct political participation was seen as an absolute necessity. Th e ethnic Turks did not want to become the object of anti-immigration campaigns any longer or, at least, they wanted to have the option to use their votes as a counter-balance.

Hürriyet’s Current Discourse on Citizenship

In the mid-1990s, all Turkish newspapers in Germany—from the Islamist Millî Gazete to the left ist-Kemalist Cumhuriyet—took part in a broad campaign for a reform of the German citizenship law including the option of dual citizenship. Th e Red-Green government, which

48 E.g.: Osman Korutürk (at that time Turkish embassador in Berlin), “Benzer olay- lar hic yașanmasın” [Similar events must not happen again], Hürriyet (November 23, 2001), 18. 49 Bektaş Doğru, “Hürriyet’in ‘Editör’ü neyi arzuluyor?” alevilerin sesi 12, 70 (2003), 22f. Reply in Hürriyet: Murat Ince, “Almanca Alevi (Din) dersleri üzerine,” Hürriyet (February 19, 2004), 18. 386 christoph schumann came to power in 1998, embraced this demand. Yet, during the legis- lative process, the power balance in the Upper House of the German Parliament (Bundesrat) changed aft er elections in the state of Hesse. Th e eventual law of citizenship disgruntled the Turkish community and the Turkish press. It did not allow for dual citizenship—not even for the fi rst generation of guestworkers. In addition, suffi cient skills in the German language and loyalty to the Basic Law were made pre- requisites for naturalisation without, however, defi ning the concrete regulations for the verifi cation of these demands. In the following years and up until the present day, there have been controversies on the implementation of the law. Th is has been framed by more general debates on the integration of immigrants on the job market and in the educational system. In the following section of this paper, I will analyse the discourse in Hürriyet on these issues. Th e analysis is based on my reading of Hürriyet from 2001 to 2005. Th e discussions mostly took place in the daily columns of professional journalists and in the section for readers’ letters. Th e readers’ section entitled “söz sizin” (literally, ‘the word is yours’) is particularly open to academics of ethnic origin like the director of the Center for Studies on Turkey in Essen, Prof. Faruk Șen,50 German party politicians with a Turkish background such as the former member of the European Parliament, Ozan Ceyhun,51 or leaders of ethnic associations such as the president of the European Federation of Associations for the Promotion of Atatürk’s Th ought, Dursun Atılgan.52 Many other authors, however, are more or less unknown. If at all, they introduce themselves only by mentioning their city or country of residence.

Th e Expectations of German Offi cials from the Ethnic Turks Besides the Turkish contributors and the readers’ section, Hürriyet regularly gives German politicians and bureaucrats the opportunity to promote their opinions in interviews. Sometimes Hürriyet even trans- lates and publishes their op-ed articles. Most German representatives appreciate this occasion to address the Turkish residents directly in their native language. Of course, the variety of views presented by

50 Cf. Hürriyet (January 6, March 5, and April 21, 2008). 51 Cf. Hürriyet (December 6, 2007, March 18, 28, and 31, 2008, April 4, 8, 14, 18, 20, 24, 29, and 30, 2008, May 2, 2008). 52 Cf. Hürriyet (December 28, 2007). about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 387

Hürriyet is as broad as the political spectrum in Germany—with the obvious exception of the far right. Seen from a general perspective, the statements made in Hürriyet have some remarkable commonalities. One aspect of the offi cial German rhetoric directed at a Turkish audience is the assurance that Turks in Germany should no longer be regarded as “guests” (“misafi r değilsiniz”), but as permanent residents.53 Some even add a notion of aff ection for the Turks. eTh former Federal Commissioner of Foreign Aff airs, Cornelia Schmalz-Jacobson, for instance, was quoted as saying that the Turks came as “friends and will stay on as friends.”54 Th e Christian Democrat Dr. Kuno Böse, formerly Bremen’s Senator of the Interior, stated that the “Turks are our biggest friends (Türkler en büyük dostumuz)”.55 Th is language refl ects the problem of identifying the status of the ethnic Turks who live ‘with us’, but are not completely a ‘part of us’. With a diff erent emphasis, German offi cials repeat ‘German society’s’ expectations of the ‘Turks’ over and over again. Th ese expectations are generally formulated in the language of ‘integration policies’ (Integrationspolitik). Th e underlying assumption is always that ‘integration’ is not a fact but rather a goal that needs to be realised in the future. Although the word ‘integration’ is seldom properly defi ned, it is generally meant as a political answer to an astonishing variety of societal pathologies attributed to the migrants and post-migrants such as: the poor performance of young ethnic Turks in the educational system, high unemployment rates among the youngsters, defi cits in German language skills, honor crimes, and political extremism particularly Islamism—just to mention some frequent topics. Th e remedies under discussion include language courses, Islamic religious instruction in the German language, better vocational training, political education, etc. Th e potential effi ciency of all these proposals, however, is rather limited due to the shortage of public funds. Simultaneously, integration by political participation is much less an issue in the offi - cial discourse, since this would highlight the fact that most ethnic

53 “Misafi r değilsiniz” [You are not guests (anymore)], Hürriyet (December 28, 2001), 17. From an article on a symposium in Ahlen titled “From Working Class to Citizenship” [Von der Arbeiterschaft zur Staatsbürgerschaft ]. MP Reinhard Schulz (SPD) argued that the notion ‘guestworker’ should be abandoned. 54 Hürriyet (November 7, 2001), 18. 55 “Türkler en büyük dostumuz” [Th e Turks are our biggest friends], interview with Bremer Innensenator Dr. Kuno Böse (CDU) conducted by Recep Şeplin, Hürriyet (January 13, 2002), 6. 388 christoph schumann

Turks do not enjoy the same political rights as Germans. Th e ‘integration process’ is not even meant to lead routinely to naturalization. Dr. Kuno Böse (Bremen), for instance, who was already quoted above, described for Hürriyet the attitude he would like to hear from young ethnic Turks as follows: “I want to live here and I want to be a part of this society. I want to respect the constitution and the laws. I want to contribute whatever I can.”56 Here, ‘integration’ sounds more like peaceful coexistence rather than political inclusion.

Ethnic Turks and Membership in German Society At this point, it is important to underline that the German discourse on ‘integration’ sets the general framework for almost all public discourses of ethnic Turks on their situation in Germany. Of course, this is not to say that they would accept all expectations and preconditions set by Germans right away. Yet, in order to gain a voice in the German public sphere, ethnic Turks must connect their statements to the dominant German discourses—be it in a critical or in an affi rma- tive way.57 Th e notion of ‘integration’ as a general goal and a positive value is, therefore, hardly ever questioned. Th e Turkish words used in this context, uyum sağlamak, uyumak or entegrasyon etmek, have an overall positive connotation of ensuring harmony (uyum) by adaptation. Nevertheless, by using these notions Turks imbue their specifi c understanding of integration and, with it, their notion of citizenship. Most ethnic Turks who have a voice in Hürriyet such as commentators, selected readers, leaders of ethnic associations, and party politicians emphasise that ‘integration’ of the Turks into German society is not only a desirable goal, but is already a fact. Th is stands in contrast to the aforementioned tendency of German offi cials to refer constantly to the defi cits, problems and abnormalities in the integration process. For years Ali Gülen ran a regular column in Hürriyet called “Letters from Europe (Avrupa’dan mektuplar)” until his recent move

56 Ibid. 57 See Christoph Schumann, “Integration aus Sicht von Muslimen in Deutschland,” in Integration von Muslimen, eds. Petra Bendel and Mathias Hildebrandt, Schrift en- reihe des Zentralinstituts für Regionalforschung 1 (München, 2006), pp. 53–75. A counter-discourse that rejected all notions of integration and adaptation could be found, earlier on, in the publications of radical Islamist organizations such as the Caliphate State (hilafet devleti) and the Hizb ut-Tahrir. Both have been banned in the years following September 11, 2001. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 389 to Sabah. While he was still working for Hürriyet, he claimed that Hürriyet made more eff orts for ‘integration’ than most German newspapers.58 With this argument, Gülen implicitly responded to a statement that Christian Wulff , the prime minister of Lower Saxony, had made earlier in an interview with Hürriyet. Th ere, Wulff lamented the negative eff ects of foreign-language media consumption on children’s integration. “Concerning Hürriyet,” Gülen continued, “we are always on the side of ‘integration’; always on the side of a multicultural society (Hürriyet olarak, her zaman “uyum” dan, her zaman multi-kulti [sic]59 bir toplumdan yanayız).” Gülen’s reaction to Wulff is typical of the discourse on integration in the Turkish press regarding the following three arguments. First, Turkish speakers frequently point out that the eff orts of their community to integrate have not been suffi ciently appreciated by Germans. Second, there is an underlying suspicion among ethnic Turks that Germans actually think ‘assimilation’ when they say ‘integration’. Th erefore, Gülen’s avowal of integration is immediately followed by the emphasis on Hürriyet’s commitment to cultural diversity. Th ird, there is a constant irritation between Ger- man offi cials and ethnic Turks about the role of the native language. Both agree on the crucial role of the German language for integration. While German offi cials give clear priority to education in German, most writers in Hürriyet emphasise the need to know one’s native language in order to learn any second language. What is not discussed, however, is the fact that the Turkish language skills of ethnic Turks are, in the long run, also a crucial prerequisite for the economic survival of the Turkish press in Germany as long as Hürriyet and the other Turkish newspapers continue to rely almost exclusively on Turkish language editions at the expense of supple- ments in German. Apart from the role of Turkish media, the value of Turkish cultural contributions to German society is another point of controversy. In the readers’ section (söz sizin), Zeki Önsöz, who does not specify where in Germany he lives, argued that the fi rst generation of Turk- ish ‘guestworkers’ had to maintain their culture and values in an alien

58 Ali Gülen, “Genç başkanın iki hatası” [Th e two errors of the young prime minister], Hürriyet (August 24, 2003), 18. 59 Th e usual Turkish expression for the English word ‘multicultural’ is ‘cok kül- türlü’. 390 christoph schumann environment.60 Th eir desire to cultivate their language did not result from a nationalistic attitude but rather from the human desire to preserve their language that was also felt by the German poet Heinrich Heine during his exile in Paris. Yet, instead of appreciating the enrich- ment of German culture by the Turks, Germans would discriminate against Turkish culture in schools, in the public, and in the movie theatres.61 Contrary to what he sees as a prevalent misconception of many Germans, Önsöz argued that Turkish culture had been Euro- pean since the fourteenth century. “To ask them [i.e. the Turks] to abandon this culture,” he continues, “is against human rights and it means not recognizing Turks as human beings.” In spite of all this, ethnic Turks made “major economic and social contributions to the society they live in”: Successful persons emerged in sports, arts, trade, the craft s and other fi elds. At the same time, they founded associations to maintain their own particular culture and values. Some Germans hold a negative attitude towards Turks and their culture based on outdated prejudices. Th ey are angry because Turks in Germany are successful without giving up their culture.62 Forty years aft er the recruitment, the author pointed out, Germany had still not yet recognised that “specifi c societies of the Turks have become a reality” (Türkler’in kendi toplumlarının bir gerçeği olduğunu). Although German society was, for demographic reasons, in need of the immigrants and their children, the German educational system had not yet adapted to these circumstances and there was widespread discrimination. Turks who live in Germany, Önsöz sums up, should use all democratic and legal means possible to change this situation to their favor. Overall, the author draws on some argumentative patterns that have been familiar to the readers of Hürriyet for many years. Th e explanation of German xenophobia as a result of envy at the material success of Turks was already mentioned. More important today

60 Zeki Önsöz (Almanya), “Almanya’da Türk Kültürü” (söz sizin), Hürriyet (March 31, 2006), 19. 61 At the time of Önsöz’s article, there was much discussion about the Herbert Hoover middle school in Berlin where teachers, students and parents agreed on a pact to use only the German language during the classes and the breaks. In addition, the Turkish fi lm Kurtlar Vadisi triggered much controversy for its alleged or real anti-Americanism. 62 Zeki Önsöz (Almanya), “Almanya’da Türk Kültürü” (söz sizin), Hürriyet (March 31, 2006), 19. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 391 is the argument of Hürriyet and the other Turkish newspapers that ethnic Turks are ‘members’ of German society by virtue of their contributions to it. With a view to the concerns of Germans about their economy, ethnic Turks in Germany frequently mention taxes, social security payments, and the creation of jobs. Remarkable, however, is the aptness of Önsöz of justifying the attachment of Turks to their language by using Heine to remind the Germans of their own attachment to their language. Another argument that is made regularly in the Turkish press is the claim that it was a ‘human right’ of the Turks to maintain their cultural distinctiveness, particularly their language. Önsöz refers to human rights as well, but he adds that the goals should be achieved on the basis of the German Basic Law. It seems to be obvious to relate this issue to the German constitution, but, in fact, this second argumentative step has rarely been made. Th e reason for this might be the fact that ethnic Turks in Germany, due to their predominant lack of German citizenship, still have not embraced the German Basic Law as their own constitution. Instead, they refer to an abstract universalism or wait for the Turkish consulates or other intermediaries to help them realise their goals. Another site where the discursive construction of membership in German society takes place is the local level. Although Hürriyet has a German or even European scope, it reports regularly on local activities such as labour disputes and strikes. While the coverage of the workers’ demands is generally friendly, the main news is always the fact that Turks participate in these activities—shoulder to shoulder with their German colleagues. A recent example was the strike of the Electrolux workers against the closing down of the production plant in Nuremberg, which had formerly been an independent company known as AEG. Th is aspect of local identifi cation gave the strike a remarkable intensity vis-à-vis the despised headquarters of Electrolux in Stockholm. In Hürriyet, Gökhan Özkan from Nuremberg described the ongoing strike in a letter to the editor entitled “AEG’s Turks are not ‘guestworkers’ (AEG’li Türkler ‘Misafi r işçi’ değil).”63 He praised the solidarity between the workers disregarding their descent or gender: “Th ere is only localism (yerlilik). Instead of foreignness (yabancılık), there is

63 Gökhan Özkan (Nuremberg), “AEG’li Türkler ‘Misafi r işçi’ değil,” (söz sizin), Hürriyet (February 7, 2006). 392 christoph schumann only Nurembergism (Nürnberg’lilik).” Th is solidarity and local rootedness, he continued, was rapidly aff ecting the public opinion while the feeling of solidarity was spreading like an “avalanche”. In his last paragraph, Özkan went on to attack the production manager, Horst Winkler, whom he quoted as saying “You can take your compen- sations, go back to your countries, or rather open a taxi company.” Özkan responded angrily: I think Horst Winkler mistakes us, who live in Germany these days, for the fi rst earn-some-money-and-return generation. Yes, those came, worked, earned money, and returned. But we, who still live here in the second, third, and even fourth generation, we are local (buralıyız). Dear Mr. Winkler, we are not guestworkers anymore whom you can tell ‘Take the money and go back!’ We are, at least, as local as you are.64 Today, the membership of ethnic Turks in German society is uncontested in the Turkish press. ‘Integration’ is generally accepted as a positive value, even though the precise meaning is a matter of controversy. A future return to the former homeland may still be a dream of some individuals, but it is anathema in the press. More than that, Turkish newspapers and Hürriyet in particular contribute actively to constructing membership of ethnic Turks in German society. As was argued above, this is done in several ways and on diff erent levels. Most common are references to contributions to German society and the coverage of diverse forms of participation and collaboration. Further- more, the levels of justifi cation can be local such as by reference to rootedness, universalistic by reference to human rights, or national by reference to citizenship. Of course, the last mode is precarious, since most ethnic Turks in Germany are “denizens”65 rather than citizens, i.e. they enjoy the right of long-term residence but lack the fundamental rights and duties of citizens.

Ethnic Turks and German Citizenship It is generally agreed among theorists of citizenship that the principle of equality, which is basic to any concept of democracy, stands in stark

64 Ibid. 65 Tomas Hammar, “State, Nation, and Dual Citizenship,” in Immigration and the Politics of Citizenship in Europe and North America, ed. Roger Brubaker (Lanham, 1989), pp. 81–95. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 393 contradiction to the division of the population into citizens and denizens.66 It is controversial, however, when and under which conditions denizens should be naturalised and thus made citizens. Th e former guestworkers’ campaign for dual citizenship was so important because, in this way, they acknowledged publicly that they had defi nitely settled down in Germany. From their perspective, their demand for dual citizenship merely refl ected the societal realities they live in. It was their implicit assumption—which eventually turned out to be wrong—that they had gained the right to dual citizenship aft er 40 years by their economic contributions to German society. Together with the Red- Green government, they were overwhelmed and shocked by the massive popular resistance against the idea of dual citizenship orchestrated by Roland Koch of the Christian Democratic Union in his campaign for the state elections in Hesse in 1999. It was in the course of these events that the bill that included the option of dual citizenship was withdrawn. In spite of this, the Turkish demand for equal political rights continued to be a major issue in the Turkish press. Th e demand for citizenship was mainly fostered during the 1990s when ethnic Turks in Germany had two painful experiences. First, ethnic German immigrants from the Eastern European countries obtained German citizenship immediately and received the bulk of state funding for language courses and other integration measures. Second, permanent residents from EU member states were allowed to participate in municipal elections, while Turkish citizens remained restricted to the marginal ‘aliens councils’. ‘Equality’ (eşitlik) was, therefore, another demand that became tightly attached to the concept of ‘integration’ in the Turkish press. “Integration can only work with equality (Uyum ancak eşitlik ile olur),”67 for instance, was the telling title of an article on the diff erential treatment of German immigrants and the previous generations of Turkish immigrants. Th e author argued that only 10 percent of non-German immigrants had the opportunity to attend so- called integration classes, while all ethnic Germans could do so.

66 Hammar, “State, Nation, and Dual Citizenship;” Brubaker: “Introduction;” Yase- min Nuhoglu Soysal, Limits of Citizenship: Migrants and Post-national Membership in Europe (Chicago, 1994); Ruth Rubio-Marin, Immigration as a Democratic Chal- lenge: Citizenship and Inclusion in Germany and the United States (Cambridge, USA, 2000). 67 Celal Özcan (Munich), “Uyum ancak eşitlik ile olur,” Hürriyet (May 23, 2001), 15. 394 christoph schumann

In an op-ed article of May 2002, the vice president of the Turkish Society of Hanover (Hannover Türk Toplumu), Remzi Kocak, drew a disillusioned picture of 40 years of Turkish immigration to Germany, while searching for a political solution to this situation. In the fi rst half of his article, he described the “bitter situation” of the Turks. Accord- ing to Kocak, they were treated as second or even third class “human beings” administered by specifi c laws [i.e. the foreigner law]. In addition, migrants were blamed for all kinds of societal problems such as the bad performance of German pupils in the PISA test, a comparative international survey on educational systems. Even the former political allies in the governing Red-Green coalition were now placed in the position of defending the “German race” against the Turks. For this reason, Kocak continues, the new citizenship law had turned out to be a “law for the prevention of Turks (Türkleri Engeleme Yasası)” and the immigration bill under discussion would make it much more diffi cult for Turkish immigrants to obtain permanent residency. Th e basic reason for all these problems, Kocak argued, was the fact that all political parties in Germany could do without taking the potential votes of the Turks into consideration. Th is would lead to paternalistic politics for foreigners rather than with foreigners. In this “bogus democracy”, some parties used foreign born persons as “fi g leaves” to cover this structural defi cit without, however, changing the general situation. Although Germany presented itself to the world as a teacher of democracy, 7.5 million of its own population were disenfranchised and, therefore, could not participate in the “formation of a public opinion (siyasi iradenin oluşumu).” Even if the whole foreign- born population in Germany had German citizenship, they would make up only 3.5 percent of the electorate. Of course, this would hardly be enough to change German politics, Kocak concludes, but it would, at least, make it more diffi cult for the German political parties to run their election campaigns on the backs of the immigrants. Hence, a sense of belonging to German society could only be created by political equality on the basis of citizenship. On the whole, the discourse on citizenship and political rights in the Turkish press has two remarkable aspects. First, the demand for political equality is synonymous with the demand for public recognition of the ethnic Turks as full members in German society, thereby also acknowledging their contributions to this society. Contrary to the offi cial German discourse, equality of political rights is therefore seen as a precondition for the integration process rather than its fi nal about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 395 goal. In this sense, ‘integration’ is understood as a movement in which two sides encounter and approach one another on an equal basis.68 ‘Assimilation,’ however, is not only associated with the eventual loss of identity but also with unfavorable power relations. Secondly, and complementary to this fi rst observation, elections on all political levels are covered extensively in the Turkish press, whereas the role of the Turkish candidates is always a key issue. It is also remarkable that the infl uence of the Turkish vote tends to be largely overstated. Appar- ently, the wish for more political rights is the source of this estimation.

Th e Expectations of Turkish Offi cials from the Ethnic Turks Th e relationship between the Turkish Republic and its citizens in Europe has changed tremendously over the years. Its whole breadth is too complex to be reviewed at this point, but the regular statements of Turkish offi cials in the Turkish newspapers allow for some analytical remarks. Th e group of Turkish offi cials featured regularly in the Turkish press consists of diplomats and government representatives. Hürriyet tends to cover the predominantly Kemalist establishment of diplomats rather favorably, while it is oft en more critical with regard to the current AKP government. Apart from the legal aspects of citizenship and naturalization, Turk- ish offi cials use the Turkish press to highlight the important role the Turkish diaspora should play in support of Turkey’s application for EU-membership. Ethnic Turks in Europe, they argue, gave Turkish culture and Islamic religion a signifi cant presence in Europe. erefore,Th the diaspora should function as a bridge between Turkey and the EU. Mehmet Ali Irtemçelik, the former ambassador of Turkey,69 expressed this idea in his New Year’s address of January 2004 in the words “every European Turk is a Turkey (Her Avrupalı Türk bir Türkiye’dir).”70 With a view to the awaited decision of the European Commission to start accession negotiations with Turkey, the ambassador reminded his compatriots of Kemal Atatürk, who had led the nation towards

68 Cf. Özdemir Ince, “Göçmenin entegrasyon işleri,” Hürriyet (February 25, 2002), 18. 69 Mehmet Ali Irtemçelik served as Turkish ambassador to Berlin from September 12, 2003 until March 18, 2008. Being a member of the Turkish Motherland Party (ANAP), Irtemçelik was a member of the Turkish parliament from 1999 until 2002 and minster of European aff airs and human rights in the government of Bülent Ecevit between May 1999 and May 2000. 70 “Her Avrupalı Türk bir Türkiye’dir,” Hürriyet (January 3, 2004), 15. 396 christoph schumann the West. Today, the ambassador continued, it was the duty of every individual to work on behalf of this goal. Disregarding citizenship, the voices of all “our human beings who settled in Europe (Avrupa’da yerleşik insanlarımız)” are useful. In addition, Irtemçelik called upon the Turkish associations to overcome their quarrels and rather unite in order to change the prejudices in European public opinion. Th e idea that ethnic Turks should form a lobby for their homeland in their countries of residence is frequently discussed in the Turkish press, but it always remains vague. During a visit of Tayyip Erdoğan to Berlin, the prime minister addressed this issue in a speech he gave on a meeting with German-Turkish economic associations. He welcomed the ongoing foundation process of the European Turkish Union (Avrupalı Türk Demokratlar Birliği) by saying: “I call upon all organizations of the civil society to develop a lobby. I want a mobilization for the support of Turkey. Similar organizations should unite . . .”71 He recently repeated his call for building an ethnic lobby in a speech before an audience of 16,000 visitors in the soccer stadium of Cologne.72 Although this proposition is convincing in theory, it is diffi cult to realise in practice. Th e extreme political diversity of the Turkish associations in Germany has been an almost insurmountable barrier to unifi cation ever since. In addition, the priority of homeland politics became more contested over the years. With good reason, some activists argue that issues in Germany like unemployment, education and the struggle against discrimination should have precedence over the interests of the mother country.73 Abdullah Gül, then Turkish foreign minister,74 seemed to support this orientation when he advised his compatriots to seek their future where they reside and become happy there (“Bulunduğunuz yerde mutlu olun!”).75 Of course, Gül emphasised that there was a need to integrate (entegre olması gerek) in those

71 Ali Gülen, “Tepsi parasından profesyonelliğe,” Hürriyet (October 5, 2004), 18. 72 “Das sagte Ministerpräsident Erdogan in Köln,” documentation, Welt online (February 11, 2008), http://www.welt.de/meinung/article1660510/Das_sagte_Minter- praesident_Erdogan _in_ Koeln.html (accessed May 7, 2008). 73 Ertekin Özcan, Türkische Immigrantenorganisationen in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland (Berlin, 1989); Murat Cakir, Die Pseudodemokraten: Türkische Lobby- isten, Islamisten, Rechtsradikale und ihr Wirken in der Bundesrepublik (Düsseldorf, 2000). 74 Abdullah Gül, member of the moderate Islamist AKP, Turkish prime minister 2002–2003, minister of foreign aff airs 2003–2007, president of the Turkish Republic since August 28, 2007. 75 Abdullah Gül, “Bulundugunuz yerde mutlu olun,” Hürriyet (February 19, 2003), 15. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 397 countries and he encouraged political engagement. At the same time, however, he admonished the European Turks not to lose their distinct identities (kimliklerini) but to maintain their bonds with Turkey particularly by investing there. Especially those with dual citizenship would face no obstacles at all. At the time of this speech, in 2003, this implicit encouragement to seek dual citizenship was very problematic, because it was already illegal under the new German citizenship law of 2000. Th e re-application for Turkish citizenship aft er naturalisation in Germany confronted the ethnic Turks with the risk of losing their German citizenship again—a problem that has fi lled the pages of Hür- riyet for months in the last years. Very similar to Abdullah Gül’s line of argument, in February 2008 Erdoğan called upon his “fellow citizens” in the Cologne area to integrate and participate in German society. He also emphasised the necessity to learn German. Simultaneously, he told them that he was fully aware of their fears about cultural assimilation: No one can expect from you to tolerate assimilation. No one can expect that you submit to assimilation, because assimilation is a crime against humanity (bir insanlik suçudur). [. . .] Of course, your children will learn Turkish. It is your native tongue and it is your most natural right to pass it on to your children.76 While this brief passage drew fi erce criticism in the German public and particularly from conservative politicians, Ahmet Külahçı, one of Hürriyet’s columnists,77 could not understand where this anger came from.78 It is clear for him—and Külahçı supposes the same for his readers—that “integration” could only include the preservation of one’s “culture and identities.” In this sense, all ethnic Turks were against assimilation.

Ethnic Turks and Turkish Citizenship Th e statements of the Turkish offi cials in Hürriyet usually draw mixed responses. On the one side, it is being criticised that Turkey had done little for its citizens abroad, even though ethnic Turks in the diaspora

76 “Erdoğan’ı 20 bin kişi dinledi,“ Hürriyet (December 22, 2008), 15. 77 Ahmet Külahçı is responsible for the coverage of German politics in Hürriyet since 1987. 78 Ahmet Külahçı, “Bu öfk e niye” [Why this anger], Hürriyet (February 19, 2008), 18. 398 christoph schumann had always supported Turkey politically. Dr. Yüksel Cavlak, president of the Atatürk Th ought Association (ADD), wrote an article in Hür- riyet, criticising that all governments so far, disregarding their composition, had little interest in the “pitiable expatriates (zavallı gurbetçi)” except for their foreign currency transfers and the military duty of the young men.79 Yet, when Turkish citizens became victims of racist attacks and discrimination, the same governments had done little on their behalf. Now, Cavlak demanded, the Turkish associations in Germany should concentrate on the tremendous problems of the third generation that might end up torn between the two cultures. He added angrily that the “empty talk” of Turkish offi cials and diplomats was of no use at all in this regard. On the other side, critics claim that the Turkish government would not suffi ciently look aft er expatriates’ interests back home in matters like social security or the pension system. In a letter to the editor, Murat Bozkaya reminded Prime Minister Erdoğan of the fact that not only Turks in Turkey should enjoy full rights but also “we Turkish citizens abroad (biz gurbetçi Türk vatandaşları).”80 Rather than taking care of all Turkish compatriots, Bozkaya continued, those abroad would be looked upon as parasites. Zeynel Lüle, correspondent of Hürriyet in Brussels, argued recently in the same line while adding an interesting demand to it.81 Lüle agreed with Abdullah Gül that Turkish expatriates should integrate in their countries of residence, get involved in politics there, and work for the benefi t of Turkey. Yet, this engagement was not at all detrimental to their continuing participation in Turkish politics. Aft er all, Turkish media and particularly the press enabled the emigrants to trace current events in the homeland. In order to allow them to pursue their interests in Ankara, Turkey should follow the recent example of Italy and grant the diaspora communities seats in the Turkish National Assembly. If there were between fi ft y and one hundred seats reserved for deputies from abroad, Lüle concluded, the Turkish government would certainly listen more carefully to the voices of the expatriates. Although the Grand National Assembly of Turkey has not yet allotted special seats for expatriates, Hürriyet and Sabah have made the voting rights of Turkish expatriates a major issue very recently, during the run-up to the Turkish parliamentary election

79 Dr. Yüksel Cavlak (Almanya / ADD Başkanı), Hürriyet (November 5, 2001), 18. 80 Murat Bozkaya (Erlenbach), “Başbakana mektup,” Hürriyet (October 25, 2005), 18. 81 Zeynel Lüle, “Darisi bizim başımıza,” Hürriyet (April 8, 2006), 16. about ‘turks’ and ‘germans’ 399 of July 22, 2007.82 Both papers demanded that Turkish citizens who reside abroad be allowed to cast their votes not only at the Turkish border station but also by absentee ballot.

Conclusion

In conclusion I would like to highlight three main points of my argumentation concerning (1) the connection between migration and media, (2) the role of Hürriyet in the German public sphere, and (3) its discourse on citizenship. (1) Migration and mass mediated communication are two key forces of the globalisation process. In this sense, Turkish media followed the ‘guestworkers’ to Germany, adapted there, and fi nally took root. During this process, the Turkish press in Germany took on a particular shape that is remarkably diff erent from the press in Turkey concerning its contents and its social role. Today, the Turkish press in Germany fulfi lls three basic functions. First, it serves as a forum for the exchange between ethnic Turks in Germany thus enabling them to imagine themselves as a distinct community. Second, it provides its readers with information on German society; it gives German offi - cials the opportunity to address the community in its native language; and it functions as a mouthpiece for the community vis-à-vis German institutions. Th us, the Turkish press helps to construct the membership of ethnic Turks in German society. Th ird, Turkish newspapers provide their readers with information on Turkey which they cannot fi nd in the German media. By doing so, they help the emigrants to maintain their bonds with the homeland. (2) Th e discourse on the European pages of the Turkish press in Germany and Hürriyet in particular provides an interesting insight into the development of the community during the last few decades. It documents the change of the dominant notions (e.g. from gurbetçi- lik to yerlilik), the developing membership in the receiving society, and the migrants’ change of priorities, memories, and expectations. Yet it cannot be said that the Turkish press was the driving force in this development. By and large, Turkish newspapers in Germany have adopted the dominant German discourse on ‘integration’ while merely

82 “Hürriyet und Sabah schüren Vorurteile,” Evrensel (March 3, 2007), http://www .evrensel.de/index.php?news=804 (accessed May 2, 2008). 400 christoph schumann trying to imbue some specifi c meanings. Most of the time, the papers respond to challenges rather than work proactively. During the last decades, major challenges came in the form of racist attacks and discrimination from the German environment or in the form of political instability and economic crisis from the homeland. Last, but not least, Hürriyet does not speak with one voice but rather includes a variety of voices: its own commentators, German and Turkish offi cials, German politicians from Turkish descent, the readers, and activists of the civil society. Th e views presented on its pages are not representative of the Turkish population in Germany but, at least, they refl ect some ongoing discussions within an important spectrum of the ethnic Turkish population in Germany. (3) Benedict Anderson has established the connection between print- capitalism and the emergence of nations as ‘imagined communities.’ Today, international migration and globalised communication by mass media have obviously made matters more complex. In this sense, the discourse on the pages of Hürriyet challenges both the traditional German and Turkish ideas of nation and citizenship with their emphasis on ethnic homogeneity and unilateral loyalty. Th e ‘we-versus-them’ notion appears frequently in Hürriyet, albeit in many diff erent ways. Most important are the following three lines of distinction. First, the Turkish press in Germany refl ects a particular identity that is diff erent from the majority of societies of Germany and Turkey. Its particularity results from common experiences of living as an ethnic and religious minority in Germany. However, this feeling of distinctness has not yet found an expression in a common voice or in strong organisations. Second, the discourse in the Turkish newspapers emphasises that ethnic Turks have indeed become members of German society. Integration, for them, is a fact that can be improved, but cannot be put into question. As a consequence, ethnic Turks demand equal rights as the most visible form of their public recognition. Beside the legal and political equality, they demand the right of cultural diff erence—ethnically, linguistically, and religiously. In this context, they see their preeminent bonds with Turkey as one feature of their cultural and political distinctness in Germany. Th ird, ethnic Turks conceive their relationship to Turkey not at all as exclusive and at odds with integration in Germany and loyalty to the Basic Law. Th eir political support for Turkey is strong, but not unconditional. In return, they demand from Turkey to be treated as equals rather than being paternalised as ‘pitiable’ expatriates. REFERENCES

Abdelfettah-Lahri, Nadia, La ville, l’urbanité et l’autochtonie: Analyse des représenta- tions dans les discours sur Béjaïa, unpubl. Master thesis, Béjaïa: University of Béjaïa, 2000. Abu Lughod, Janet, Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250–1350, Oxford, New York: Oxford University Press, 1989. Abu Nowar, Maan, The Struggle for Independence 1939–1947: A History of the Ha - shemite Kingdom of Jordan, Reading: Ithaca Press and Garnet Publishing, 2001. Adamu, Fatima L., “Woman’s Struggle and the Politics of Difference in Nigeria,” gender politik online, Freie Universität Berlin (2006), http://web.fu-berlin.de/gpo/pdf/ tagungen/fatima_l_adamu.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009). Adepoju, Aderanti, “Patterns of Migration by Sex,” in Female and Male in West Africa, ed. Christine Oppong, London: Allen & Unwin, 1983, pp. 54–66. Ageron, Charles-Robert, Les algériens musulmans et la France (1871–1919), Paris: PUF, 1968. al-ʿAǧlūnī, ʿAlī Muḥammad, D̠ikrayātī ʿan at-t̠ aura̠ al-ʿarabīya al-kubrā, Amman: Maktab al-Ḥ urrīya, n.d. Aguilar, Mario I., “Pastoral Disruption and Cultural Continuity in a Pastoral Town,” in Rethinking Pastoralism in Africa: Gender, Culture, and the Myth of the Patriar- chal Pastoralist, ed. Dorothy L. Hodgson, Oxford: Currey, 2000, pp. 249–264. Ahmad, Aziz and Gustav von Grunebaum, eds., Muslim Self-Statement in India and Pakistan 1857–1968, Wiesbaden: Harassowitz, 1970. Ahmad, Imtiaz and Helmut Reifeld, eds., Lived Islam in South Asia: Adaptation, Accommodation and Conflict, Delhi: Social Science Press, 2004. Ahmad, Imtiaz, “The Ashraf-Ajlaf Dichotomy in Muslim Social Structure in India,” Indian Economic and Social History Review 3 (1966), 268–78. Ahmad, Nazir, Ibn ul Waqt, trans. Muhammad Zakir (as: The Son of the Moment), New Delhi: Orient Longman, 2002. Ahmed, Chanfi, Les conversions à l’Islam fondamentaliste en Afrique et au sud du Sahara: Le cas de la Tanzanie et du Kenya, Paris: L’Harmattan, 2008. ——, “The Wahubiri wa Kislamu (Preachers of Islam) in East Africa,” Africa Today 54, 4 (2008), 3–18. ——, “Entre Da’wa et Diplomatie: Al-Azhar et l’Afrique au Sud du Sahara d’après la revue Madjallat al-Azhar dans les années 1960 et 1970,” Islam et Sociétés au Sud du Sahara 14/15 (2000/01), 57–80. Ahuja, Ravi, “Mobility and Containment: The Voyages of South Asian Seamen, c.1900–1960,” International Review of Social History 51 (2007), 111–141. ——, Pathways of Empire: Circulation, ‘Public Works’ and Social Space in Colonial Orissa (c. 1870–1914), Hyderabad: Orient Blackswan, 2009. —— with Heike Liebau, Katrin Bromber, Katharina Lange, Dyala Hamzah, eds., The World in World Wars: Experiences, Perceptions and Perspectives from Africa and Asia,, Leiden: Brill, forthcoming. —— with Katrin Bromber, Jan-Georg Deutsch, Margret Frenz, Patrick Krajewski and Brigitte Reinwald, “Neuere Literatur zum Indischen Ozean: Eine kritische Würdi- gung,” Periplus. Jahrbuch für außereuropäische Geschichte 15 (2005), 141–172. Aïssani, Djamil and Djamil Eddine Mechehed, Manuscrits de Kabylie: Catalogue de la collection Ulahbib, Algiers: CNRPAH, 2007. 402 references

Aktan, Mehmet, Das Medienangebot für die ausländischen Arbeitnehmer in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland: Untersucht am Beispiel türkischsprachiger Zeitungen und Hörfunksendungen, unpubl. PhD thesis, Munich: Ludwig-Maximilians-Univer- sität München, 1979. Alavi, Hamza, “Ironies of History: Contradictions of the Khilafat Movement,” in Islam, Community and the Nation: Muslim Identities in South Asia and Beyond, ed. Mushirul Hasan, Delhi: Manohar, 1998, pp. 25–56. Albrow, Martin and Elizabeth King, eds., Globalization, Knowledge and Society: Read- ings from International Sociology, London: Sage, 1990. Albrow, Martin, John Eade, Jörg Dürrschmidt and Neil Washbourne, “The Impact of Globalization on Sociological Concepts: Community, Culture and Milieu,” in Living the Global City: Globalization as a Local Process, ed. John Eade, London: Routledge, 1997, pp. 20–36. Allen, Charles and Sharada Dwivedi, Lives of the Indian Princes, London: Century Publishing, 1984. Amaral, Ilídio, “Progressos do conhecimento geográfico da África em finais do século XIX,” in História e Desenvolvimento da Ciência em Portugal, 2, Lisbon: Academia das Ciências de Lisboa, 1986, pp. 1141–1171. Amenda, Lars and Malte Fuhrmann, eds., Hafenstädte: Mobilität, Migration, Globa- lisierung, special issue of Comparativ 17, 2 (2007). Amin, Shahid, “Representing the Musulman: Then and Now, Now and Then,” in Subaltern Studies, 12, Muslims, Dalits and the Fabrication of History, eds. Shail Mayaram, M.S.S. Pandian and Ajay Skaria, New Delhi: Permanent Black and Ravi Dayal Publisher, 2005, pp. 1–36. Amselle, Jean-Loup and Emmanuelle Sibeud, eds., Maurice Delafosse—Entre orientalisme et ethnographie: Itinéraire d’un africaniste (1870–1926), Paris: Maisonneuve, 1998. Ancel, Jacques, Géographie des frontières, Paris: Gallimard, 1938. Anderson, Benedict, Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism, London: Verso, 1983. Anderson, David and Richard Rathbone, eds., Africa’s Urban Past, Oxford: James Currey, 2000. Andrews, C.F., Zaka Ullah of Delhi, eds. and intro. Mushirul Hasan and Margrit Pernau, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2003. Ansari, K.H., “Pan-Islam and the Making of the Early Indian Muslim Socialist,” Modern Asian Studies 20, 3 (1986), 509–537. Ansell, Gwen, Soweto Blues: Jazz, Popular Music and Politics in South Africa, New York: Continuum, 2004. Appadurai, Arjun, “Grassroots Globalization and the Research Imagination,” Public Culture. Soc. for Transnational Cultural Studies 12, 1 (2000), 1–19. ——, Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimension of Globalization, Minneapolis: Univer- sity of Minnesota Press, 1996. ——, “Sovereignty without Territoriality: Notes for a Postnational Geography,” in The Geography of Identity, ed. Patricia Jaeger, Ann Arbor: The University of Michigan Press, 1996, pp. 40–58. ——, “The Production of Locality,” in Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization, ed. Arjun Appadurai, Public Worlds 1, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1996, pp. 178–199. ——, “Disjuncture and Difference in the Global Cultural Economy,” in Global Culture: Nationalism, Globalization, and Modernity, ed. Mike Featherstone, London: Sage, 1990, pp. 296–310. ——, “The Production of Locality,” in Counterworks: Managing the Diversity of Knowl- edge, ed. Richard Fardon, London: Routledge, 1995, pp. 204–225. Appiah, Kwame Anthony, Cosmopolitanism: Ethics in a World of Strangers, London: Allen Lane, 2006. references 403

Aras, Bulent and Omer Caha, “Fethullah Gulen and his Liberal ‘Turkish Islam’ Move- ment,” Middle East Review of International Affairs4, 4 (2000). Arbeitsgemeinschaft der Öffentlich-Rechtlichen Rundfunkanstalten der Bundesrepublik Deutschland, ed., ARD Jahrbuch 1969, Hamburg: Verlag Hans-Bredow-Institut, 1969. Arbuđauskaitë, Arunë, “Sociological Analysis of Family Cards of Neringa Residents in 1956,” in Everyday Life in the Baltic States, ed. Meilute Taljunaite, Vilnius: Lithu- anian Institute of Philosophy and Sociology, 1997, pp. 185–193. Archer, Mildred, Company Paintings: Indian Paintings of the British Period, (Victoria and Albert Museum, Indian Art Series), London: Mapin Publishing, 1992. Ardener, Shirley, “Ground Rules and Social Maps for Women: An Introduction,” in Women and Space: Ground Rules and Social Maps, ed. Shirley Ardener, New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1993, pp. 11–34. Argun, Betigül Ercan, Turkey in Germany: The Transnational Sphere of Deutschkei, London: Routledge, 2003. Arnaut, Karel, Performing Displacements and Rephrasing Attachments: Ethnographic Explorations of Space, Mobility in Art, Ritual, Media and Politics, unpubl. PhD thesis, Ghent: Ghent University, 2004. —— with Bambi Ceuppens, “Het Vlaams Blok als mysterie: Wetenschappelijke en politieke uitwegen,” Sa-menleving en Politiek 11 (2004), 38–45. al-Askari, Jafar Pasha, A Soldier’s Story: From Ottoman Rule to Independent Iraq. The Memoirs of Jafar Pasha Al-Askari, trans. Mustafa Tariq Al-Askari, eds. William Facey and Najdat Fathi Safwat, London: Arabian Publishing Ltd., 2003. Ateş, Şeref, “Welches Bild verbreiten türkische Medien von der deutschen Gesell- schaft?” in Zwischen Autonomie und Gängelung: Türkische Medienkultur in Deutschland, eds. Jörg Becker and Reinhard Benisch, Loccumer Protokolle 12/01, Rehburg-Loccum: Evangelische Akademie, 2002, pp. 79–94. Aucapitaine, Henri, “Colonies noires de Kabylie,” Revue Africaine 4 (1860), 73–77. Augé, Marc, Non-Places: Introduction to an Anthropology of Supermodernity, trans. John Howe, London: Verso, 1995. ——, Orte und Nicht-Orte: Vorüberlegungen zu einer Ethnologie der Einsamkeit, Frank- furt a.M.: S. Fischer, 1994. ——, Non-lieux: Introduction à une anthropologie de la surmodernité, Paris: Seuil, 1992. Augustin, Laura Maria, “Cessons de parler de victimes, reconnaissons aux migrants leur capacité d’agir,” in Genre, nouvelle division internationale du travail et migrations, eds. Christine Verschuur and Reysoo Fenneke, special issue of Cahier genre et développement 5 (2005), 109–118. Austen, Ralph A., “Tradition, Invention and History: The Case of the Ngondo (Cam- eroon),” Cahiers d’etudes africaines 32, 126 (1992), 285–309. Azarya, Victor, “The Nomadic Factor in Africa: Dominance or Marginality,” in Nomads in the Sedentary World, eds. Anatoly M. Khazanov and André Wink, Rich- mond: Curzon, 2001, pp. 250-284. Azmi, Fazlur Rahman, Turban, Kurta, Topee: In the Light of the Sunnah and Practice of the Sahaba and Tabieen, Delhi: Idara Isha’at-e-Diniyat, 2006. Badolo, Hervé, Impact socio-économique de l’exploitation artisanale de l’or au Burkina Faso: Cas d’Essakane, Mémoire de fin de cycle supérieur, Ouagadougou: École nationale d’administration et de magistrature (ENAM), 1988. Badran, Margot, “Islamic Feminism: What’s in a Name?” Al-Ahram Weekly Online 567 (January 17–23, 2002). Balke, Ralf, Hakenkreuz im Heiligen Land: Die NSDAP-Landesgruppe in Palästina, Erfurt: Sutton Verlag, 2001. Bantenga, Moussa, “L’or des régions de Poura et de Gaoua: Les vicissitudes de l’exploitation coloniale, 1925–1960,” The International Journal of African Historical Studies 28, 3 (1995), 563–576. Barfood, Jörn, Nidden: Künstlerkolonie auf der Kurischen Nehrung, Fischerhude: Ate- lier im Bauernhaus, 2005. 404 references

Bargaoui, Sami, “Sainteté, savoir et autorité en Kabylie au XVIIIe siècle: La rihla de Warthîlânî,” in L’Autorité des saints, ed. Mohamed Kerrou, Paris: Editions Recher- ches sur les civilisations, 1999, pp. 249–71. Bates, Crispin, ed., Community, Empire, and Migration: South Asians in Diaspora, New York: Palgrave, 2001. Battegay, Raymond, “Die Gruppe als zeitloses transkulturelles Lebensmillieu des Men- schen,” Curare 23, 2 (2000), 123–131. Baumann, Zygmunt, “Vom Pilger zum Touristen,” Das Argument 36 (1994), 389–408. Bayart, Jean-François, Le gouvernement du monde: Une critique politique de la globalization, Paris: Fayard, 2004. —— with Peter Geschiere, eds., “‘J’etais là avant’: Problématiques politiques de l’autochtonie,” Critique Internationale (special issue ‘J’etais là avant’: Probléma- tiques politiques de l’autochtonie) 10 (2001), 126–95. —— with Peter Geschiere and Francis Nyamnjoh, “Autochtonie, démocratie et cito- yenneté en Afrique,” Critique Internationale (special issue ‘J’etais là avant’: Problé- matiques politiques de l’autochtonie) 10 (2001), 177–95. —— with Stephen Ellis and Béatrice Hibou, The Criminalization of the State in Africa, Oxford: Currey, 1999. Beck, Ulrich, “The Cosmopolitan Perspective: Sociology in the Second Age of Moder- nity,” in Conceiving Cosmopolitanism: Theory, Context, and Practice, eds. Robin Cohen and Steven Vertovec, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002, pp. 61–85. Becker, Jörg and Reinhard Benisch, eds., Zwischen Abgrenzung und Integration: Türkische Medienkultur in Deutschland, Loccumer Protokolle 03/00, Loccum: Evangelische Akademie, 2001. Bel, Alfred, La religion musulmane en Berbèrie, Paris: Geuthner, 1938. Ben Arrous, Michel, “La translocalité, pour quoi faire?” in Les relations transsahariennes à l’époque contemporaine: Un espace en constante mutation, eds. Laurence Marfaing and Steffen Wippel, Paris: Karthala-ZMO, 2004, pp. 415–442. Berger, Peter L. and Thomas Luckmann, The Social Construction of Reality: A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge, Garden City N.Y.: Doubleday, 1966. Bhabha, Homi K., The Location of Culture, London: Routledge, 1994. Bian, Yianjie, John Logan and Xialoling Shu, “Wage and Job Inequalities in the Work- ing Lives of Men and Women in Tianjin,” in Re-drawing Boundaries: Work, House- holds and Gender in China, eds. Barbara Entwisle and Gail Henderson, Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000, pp. 111–133. Billiet, Jaak and Hans de Witte, “Wie stemde in juni 1999 voor het Vlaams Blok en waarom?” Tijdschrift voor Sociologie 1 (2000), 5–36. Binswanger, Karl, “Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland,” in Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und ihr Einfluß auf die Integra- tion von Türken: Standpunkte und Analysen, Bonn: Zentrum für Türkeistudien, 1988, pp. 16–38. Bjerén, Gunilla, “Gender and Reproduction,” in International Migration, Mobility and Development: Multidisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Tomas Hammar et al., Oxford: Berg, 1987, pp. 219–246. Blommaert, Jan and Jef Verschueren, Debating Diversity: Analysing the Discourse of Tolerance, London: Routledge, 1997. Blommaert, Jan and Albert Martens, Van blok tot bouwsteen: Een visie voor een nieuw lokaal migrantenbeleid, Berchem: EPO, 1999. de Boeck, Filip, “Domesticating Diamonds and Dollars: Identity, Expenditure and Sharing in Southwestern Zaire (1984–1997),” in Globalization and Identity: Dialec- tics of Flows and Closures, eds. Peter Geschiere and Birgit Meyer, special issue of Development and Change 29, 4 (1998), 777–810. Boesen, Elisabeth, “Gleaming Like the Sun: Aesthetic Values in Wodaabe Material Culture,” Africa 78, 4 (2008), pp. 582–602. references 405

——, “Des localités nomades: Les “maisons” Wodaabe en brousse et en ville,” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, Paris: Karthala, 2007, pp. 209–231. ——, “Pastoral Nomadism and Urban Migration: Mobility among the Fulbe-Wodaabe from Central Niger,” in Cultures of Migration: African Perspectives, eds. Hans Peter Hahn and Georg Klute, Hamburg: Lit, 2007, pp. 32–60. —— with Laurence Marfaing, “Vers un cosmopolitisme par le bas?” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, Paris: Karthala-ZMO, 2007, pp. 7–22. ——, “Identität und Pluralität: Die Fulbe in Zentralniger,” Paideuma 50 (2004), 101– 126. Bohn, Cornelia, Clothing as Medium of Communication, Luzern: University Luzern, www.unilu.ch/documente/docus_rf/clothing_as_medium_of_communication.pdf (accessed February 22, 2007). Bollig, Michael, “The Metamorphosis of Peripatetic Peoples in Africa,” in Customary Strangers: New Perspectives on Peripatetic Peoples in the Middle East, Africa, and Asia, eds. Joseph C. Berland and Aparna Rao, London: Praeger, 2004, pp. 195– 231. ——, “Ethnic Relations and Spatial Mobility in Africa: A Review of the Peripatetic Niche,” in The Other Nomads: Peripatetic Minorities in Cross-Cultural Perspective, ed. Aparna Rao, Kölner Ethnologische Mitteilungen 8, Cologne: Böhlau, 1987, pp. 179–228. Bonfiglioli, Angelo, Dudal: Histoire de famille et histoire de troupeau chez un groupe de Wodaabe du Niger, Oxford: Blackwell, 1988. Boone, Catherine, Political Topographies of the African State: Territorial Authority and Institutional Choice, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. Botsch, Gideon, “Neues vom Mufti? Palästina und der Nationalsozialismus,“Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte 61, 3 (2009), 280–286. Bou-Nacklie, Nacklie Elias, “The 1941 Invasion of Syria and Lebanon: The Role of the Local Paramilitary,” Middle Eastern Studies 30, 3 (1994), 512–529. ——, “Les troupes spéciales: Religious and Ethnic Recruitment, 1916–1948,” Interna- tional Journal of Middle Eastern Studies 25 (1993), 645–660. Bourdieu, Pierre, The Field of Cultural Production, New York: Columbia University Press, 1993. Bowden, Brett, “Nationalism and Cosmopolitanism: Irreconcilable Differences or Pos- sible Bedfellows?” National Identities 5 (2003), 235–249. Bowen, John R., “Islam in/of France: Dilemmas of Translocality,” Paper presented at the 13th International Conference of Europeanists, Chicago, March 14–16, 2002, www.europanet.org/conference2002/papers/g4_bowen.doc (accessed June 24, 2009). Bozzoli, Belinda, Theatres of Struggle and the End of Apartheid, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2004. Brändli, Sabina, ‘Der herrlich biedere Mann’: Vom Siegeszug des bürgerlichen Herren- anzuges im 19. Jahrhundert, Zürich: Chronos, 1998. Braudel, Fernand, Civilisation matérielle, économie et capitalisme, XVe–XVIIIe siècle, 3, Le temps du monde, Paris: Armand Colin, 1979. ——, The Mediterranean and the Mediterranean World in the Age of Philip II, 2nd ed., Glasgow: Fontana Press, 1975 [1949]. Brennan, James, Andrew Burton and Yusuf Lawi, eds., Dar es Salaam: Histories from an Emerging Metropolis, Dar es Salaam: Mkuki na Nyola, 2007. Bromber, Katrin, “Blühende Medienlandschaften: Britische Informationspolitik für ostafrikanische Truppen während des Zweiten Weltkrieges,” Sozialgeschichte.extra (2007), 1–25, http://www.stiftung-sozialgeschichte.de/?selection=17 (accessed July 2, 2008). 406 references

Brubaker, Roger, Citizenship and Nationhood in France and Germany, Cambridge, USA: Harvard University Press, 1992. ——, ed., Immigration and the Politics of Citizenship in Europe and North America, Lanham: University Press of America, 1989. de Bruijn, Mirjam, “The Hearthhold in Pastoral Fulbe Society, Central Mali: Social Relations, Milk, and Drought,” Africa 67 (1997), 625–651. —— with Han Van Dijk and Rijk Van Dijk, “Cultures of Travel: Fulbe Pastoralists in Central Mali and Pentecostalism in Ghana,” in Mobile Africa: Changing Patterns of Movement in Africa and Beyond, eds. Mirjam De Bruijn, Rijk van Dijk and Dick Foeken, Leiden: Brill, 2001, pp. 63–88. —— with Rijk van Dijk and Dick Foeken, “Mobile Africa: An Introduction”, in Mobile Africa: Changing Patterns of Movement in Africa and Beyond, eds. idem, Leiden: Brill, 2001, pp. 1–7. —— with Rijk van Dijk and Dick Foeken, eds., Mobile Africa: Changing Patterns of Movement in Africa and Beyond, Leiden: Brill, 2001. —— with E.A. van Wouter and Han van Dijk, “Antagonisme et solidarité: Les relations entre Peuls et Dogons du Mali Central,” in Peuls et Mandingues: Dialectiques des constructions identitaires, eds. Mirjam de Bruijn and Han van Dijk, Paris: Karthala, 1997, pp. 243–264. Bruinessen, Martin van and Julia Day Howell, Sufism and the “Modern” in Islam, London: I.B. Tauris, 2007. Brunschvig, Robert, La Berberie orientale sous les Hafsides des origines à la fin du XVe siècle, Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve, 1940–1947. Brydon, Lynne, “Who Moves? Women and Migration in West Africa in the 1980s,” in Migrants, Workers, and the Social Order, ed. Jeremy Eades, London: Tavistock, 1987, pp. 165–180. Buhl, Solveig, “Gender Equality? No! What Fulbe Women Really Want,” in Rural Resources and Local Livelihoods in Africa, ed. Katherine Homewood, New York: Palgrave, 2005, pp. 137–154. —— with Katherine Homewood, “Milk Selling among Fulani Women in Northern Burkina Faso,” in Rethinking Pastoralism in Africa: Gender, Culture, and the Myth of the Patriarchal Pastoralist, ed. Dorothy L. Hodgson, Oxford: Currey, 2001, pp. 207–226. Bulmer, M.I.A., “Sociological Models of the Mining Community,” Sociological Review 23 (1975), 61–92. Burawoy, Michael, “Introduction: Reaching for the Global” and “Grounding Global- ization,” in Global Ethnography: Forces, Connections, and Imaginations in a Post- modern World, eds. idem et al., Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000, pp. 1–40; 337–350. —— et al., eds., Global Ethnography: Forces, Connections, and Imaginations in a Post- modern World, Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000. Burke, Timothy, Lifebuoy Men, Lux Women, London: Leicester University Press, 1996. Buschmann, Nikolaus and Aribert Reimann, “Die Konstruktion historischer Erfahrung: Neue Wege zu einer Erfahrungsgeschichte des Krieges,” in Die Erfahrung des Krieges: Erfahrungsgeschichtliche Perspektiven von der Französischen Revolution bis zum Zweiten Weltkrieg, eds. Nikolaus Buschmann and Horst Carl, Krieg in der Geschichte 9, Paderborn: Schöningh, 2001, pp. 261–271. Butterman, William C., The Mineral Industry of Burkina Faso: US Geological Survey– Minerals Information, 1996, http://minerals.usgs.gov/minerals/pubs/country/1996/ 9250096.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009). Cadornega, António de Oliveira de, História Geral das Guerras Angolanas , 3 vols., eds. José Matias Delgado and Manuel Alves da Cunha, Lisbon: Divisão de Publicações e Biblioteca-Agência Geral das Colónias, 1940–1942 [manuscript of 1680–1681]. references 407

Caestecker, Frank, “Grensoverschrijdende migraties uit en in Vlaanderen,“ in Wat weten we (niet) over allochtonen in Vlaanderen? Komende generaties, eds. Jan Vran- ken, Christiane Timmerman and Katrien Van der Heyden, Leuven: acco, 2001, pp. 228–260. ——, Alien Policy in Belgium, 1840–1940: The Creation of Guest Workers, Refugees and Illegal Aliens, Oxford: Berghahn, 2000. ——, “Vakbonden en etnische minderheden, een ambigue verhouding: Immigratie in de Belgische mijnbekkens, 1900–1940,” Brood en Rozen 2, 1 (1997), 51–63. Çağlar, AyȘe, “Media Corporatism and Cosmopolitanism,” in Conceiving Cosmo- politanism: Theory, Context, and Practice, eds. Robin Cohen and Steven Vertovec, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002, pp. 180–190. Cakir, Murat, Die Pseudodemokraten: Türkische Lobbyisten, Islamisten, Rechtsradikale und ihr Wirken in der Bundesrepublik, Düsseldorf: Föderation der Immigrant/ innenvereine aus der Türkei e.V., 2000. Callaway, Helen, “Dressing for Dinner in the Bush: Rituals of Self-definition and Brit- ish Imperial Authority,” in Dress and Gender: Making and Meaning in Cultural Contexts, eds. Ruth Barnes and Joanne B. Eicher, New York: Berg Publishers, 1993, pp. 232–48. Canby, Sheila, Humayun’s Garden Party: Princes of the House of Timur and Early Mughal Painting, Bombay: Marg Publications, 1994. Capello, Hermenegildo and Roberto Ivens, De Benguella ás terras de Iácca, 2 vols., Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1881. Carbonnel, Jean-Pierre, “L’orpaillage au Burkina Faso et au Mali,” in L’appropriation de la terre en Afrique noire: Manuel d’analyse, de décision et de gestion foncières, eds. Émile Le Bris, Étienne Le Roy and Paul Mathieu, Paris: Karthala, 1991, pp. 122–130. Carette, Antoine-Erneste-Hippolyte, Études sur la Kabilie proprement dite, Paris: Imprimerie nationale, 1848. Carlier, Omar, Entre nation et Jihad: Histoire sociale des radicalismes algériens, Paris: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques, 1995. de Caro, Francis A. and Rosan A. Jordan, “Topi: Personal Narratives, Ritual and the Sun Helmet as a Symbol,” Western Folklore (1984), 232–48. Carvalho, Henrique Augusto Dias de, O Jagado de Cassange na Provincia de Angola: Memoria, Lisbon: Christo vão Augusto Rodrigues, 1898. ——, Ethnographia e História Tradicional dos Povos da Lunda, Lisbon: Im prensa Nacional, 1890. ——, A Lunda ou os Estados do Muatiânvua, dominios da soberania de Portugal, Lis- bon: Adolpho, Modesto & Ca, 1890. ——, Methodo pratico para fallar a lingua da Lunda contendo narrações historicas dos diversos povos, Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1890. ——, Descripção da Viagem à Mussumba do Muatiânvua, 4 vols., Lisbon: Im prensa Nacional, 1890–1894. —— (texts), and Manuel Sertorio de Almeida Aguiar (photographs), “Album de Fotografias da Expedição Portuguesa ao Muatianvua 1884/88,” n.d. [1890], Arquivo do Ministério dos Negocios Estrangeiros, Lis bon, Secretaria de Estado, 3° P., A. 7, M. 108. ——, O Lubuco: Algumas oberservações sobre o livro do Sr. Latrobe Bateman intitulado The First Ascent of the Kasaï, Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1889. Catarino, Christine and Mirjana Morokvasic, “Femmes, genre, migration et mobilités,” Revue européenne des migrations internationales 21 (2005), 7-27. Cattelain, Chloé, ed., Les modalités d’entrée des ressortissants chinois en France, Paris: Rapport DPM, Ministère des Affaires Sociales, du Travail et de la Solidarité, unpublished document, 2002. 408 references

Ceccagno, Antonella, “Compressing Personal Time to become Successful Migrants: Ethnicity and Gender among the Chinese in Italy,” Journal of Ethnic and Migration Studies 33, 4 (2007), 635–654. Certeau, Michel de, L’invention du quotidien, 1, Arts de faire, Paris: Gallimard, 1980. Ceuppens, Bambi, Congo made in Flanders? Vlaamse koloniale visies op ‘blank’ en ‘zwart’ in Belgisch Congo, Ghent: Academia Press, 2003. ——, “Le Vlaams Blok et le Flamand ‘naturel’,” Critique Internationale 10 (2001), 143–57. Chaker, Salem, Berbères aujourd’hui: Berbères dans le Maghreb contemporain, Paris: L’Harmattan, 1999. Chakrabarty, Dipesh, Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and Historical Dif- ference, Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2000. Chamberlayne, Prue, Joanna Bornat and Tom Wengraf, “The Biographical Turn,” in The Turn to Biographical Methods in Social Science: Comparative Issues and Exam- ples, eds. Prue Chamberlayne, Joanna Bornat and Tom Wengraf, London: Rout- ledge, 2000, pp. 1–30. Chant, Sylvia and Sarah A. Radcliffe, “Migration and Development: The Importance of Gender,” in Gender and Migration in Developing Countries, ed. Sylvia Chant, London: Belhaven, 1992, pp. 1–29. Chauveau, Jean-Pierre, “Question foncière et construction nationale en Côte d’Ivoire,” Politique africaine 78 (2000), 94–126. Chen, Da, Emigrants Communities in South China, New York: Institute of Pacific Relation, 1940. Christelow, Alan, Muslim Law Courts and the French Colonial State in Algeria, Prince- ton: University Press, 1985. Chuvin, Pierre, ed., Inde – Asie Centrale: Routes du commerce et des idées, Tashkent: L’Institut, 1996. Čiubrinskas, Vytis, “Sovietmečio iđđűkiai Lietuvos etnologijai: disciplina, ideologija ir Patriotizmas,” Lietuvos Etnologija. Socialinës antropologijos ir etnologijos studijos 1 (2001), 99–117. ——, “Identity and the Revival of Tradition in Lithuania: An Insider’s View,” Folk 42 (2000), 19–40. Clark, Constance D., “Foreign Marriage, Tradition and the Politics of Borders Cross- ing,” in China Urban: Ethnographies of Contemporary Culture, eds. Nancy N. Chen, Constance D. Clark and Suzanne Z. Gottschang, Durham: N.C. Duke University Press, 2001, pp. 104–122. Cleary, David, Anatomy of the Amazon Gold Rush, London: MacMillan, 1990. Cleveland, David, “Migration in West Africa: A Savanna Village Perspective,” Africa 61 (1991), 222-246. Clifford, James, “Traveling Cultures,” in Routes, Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century, ed. idem, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Univ. Press, 1997, pp. 17–46. ——, ed., Routes, Travel & Translation in the Late 20th Century, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1997, pp. 299–347. Cohen, Anthony P., The Symbolic Construction of Community, London: Routledge, 1998 [1985]. Cohen, Robin and Steven Vertovec, eds., Conceiving Cosmopolitanism: Theory, Con- text, and Practice, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002. Comaroff, Jean and John L. Comaroff, “Naturing the Nation: Aliens, Apocalypse and the Postcolonial State,” Journal of Southern African Studies 27, 3 (2001), 627–51. Conrad, Sebastian and Dominic Sachsenmaier, eds., Competing Visions of World Order: Global Moments and Movements, 1880s–1930s, New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007. references 409

Conrad, Sebastian and Jürgen Osterhammel, Das Kaiserreich transnational: Deutschland in der Welt 1871–1914, Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 2004. Conrad, Sebastian and Shalini Randeria, “Einleitung: Geteilte Geschichte—Europa in einer postkolonialen Welt,” in Jenseits des Eurozentrismus, eds. idem, Frankfurt a.M.: Campus Verlag, 2002, pp. 9–49. Cooke, Miriam and Bruce B. Lawrence, eds., Muslim Networks from Medieval Scholars to Modern Feminist, Delhi: Permanent Black, 2005. Cooper, Barbara, “Gender, Movement, and History: Social and Spatial Transforma- tions in 20th Century Maradi, Niger,” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 15 (1997), 195–221. Cooper, Frederick, “What is the Concept of Globalization Good for? An African His- torian’s Perspective,” Asian Affairs 100 (2001), 189–213. Coplan, David, In Township Tonight! South Africa’s Black City Music and Theatre, Johannesburg: Raven, 1985. Cordell, Dennis and Victor Piché, “Un siècle de migration au Burkina: Inclusion ou exclusion,” in Être étranger et migrant en Afrique au XXe siècle: Enjeux identitaires et modes d’insertion, 2, Dynamiques migratoires: Modalités d’insertion urbain et enjeux d’acteurs, ed. Cathérine Coquery-Vidrovitsch, Paris: L’Harmattan, 2003, pp. 207–237. Cosgrove, Daniel, ed., Mappings, London: Reactions Books, 1999. Coward, Harold G., John R. Hinnells and Raymond Brady Williams, eds., The South Asian Religious Diaspora in Britain, Canada, and the United States, (SUNY Series in Religious Studies), Albany, NY: State University of New York Press, 2000. Crabb, Brian James, The Sinking of the S.S. Khedive Ismail in the Sea War against Japan, Stamford: Paul Watkins, 1997. Cresswell, Tim, “Imagining the Nomad: Mobility and the Postmodern Primitive,” in Space and Social Theory: Interpreting Modernity and Postmodernity, eds. Georges Benko and Ulf Strohmayer, Oxford: Blackwell, 1997, pp. 360–379. Crowder, Michael, “Indirect Rule, French and British Style,” Africa 33, 4 (1964), 293–306. Cunningham, Stanley B., The Idea of Propaganda: A Reconstruction, London: Praeger Publishers, 2002. ‘Curdiphe’, “ L’Ivoirité, ou l’esprit du nouveau contrast social du président H.K.Bédié,” Politique africaine 78 (2000), 65–74. Daljeet, Mughal and Deccani Paintings from the Collection of the National Museum, Delhi: Prakash, 1999. Dalrymple, William, The White Mughals: Love and Betrayal in 18th Century India, London: Flamingo, 2003. Dannecker, Petra and Anna Spiegel: “Women’s Organisations and the Reshaping of the Public Sphere: A Comparative Analysis,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 123–144. ——, “Let’s not Rock the Boat: Frauenorganisationen und Demokratisierung in Malaysia,” Internationales Asienforum, 37, 3/4 (2006), 297–319. Darling, Linda T., “Ottoman Politics through British Eyes: Paul Rycaut‘s the Present State of the Ottoman Empire,” Journal of World History 5 (1994), 71–97. Darrah, Allan C., A Hermeneutic Approach to Hausa Therapeutics: The Allegory of the Living Fire, PhD thesis, Northwestern University, Ann Arbor: University Micro- films International, 1980. David, Parkin and Stephen C. Headley, eds., Islamic Prayer across the Indian Ocean: Inside and outside the Mosque, London: Curzon Press, 2000. Davin, Délia, Internal Migration in Contemporary China, New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1999. 410 references

——, “Gender and Migration in China,” in Village Inc. Chinese Rural Society in the 1990s, eds. Christiansen Flemming and Junzuo Zhang, Richmond: Curzon, 1998, pp. 230–240. Day, Sophie and Helen Ward, eds., Sex, Work, Mobility and Health in Europe, (Euro- pean Studies Series), London: Kegan Paul, 2004. Delafosse, Maurice, Haut-Sénégal-Niger, Paris: Maisonneuve, 1972 [1912]. Deleuze, Gilles and Felix Guattari, Mille plateaux: Capitalisme et schizophrenie, Paris: Minuit, 1980. Demeyere, Frank, ed., Over pluralisme en democratie: Verzuiling en integratie in een multiculturele samenleving, Brussels: VUB Press, 1993. Depont, Octave and Xavier Coppolani, Les confréries religieuses musulmanes, Algiers: Jourdan, 1897. Dermenghem, Emile, Le culte des saints dans l’Islam maghrébin, Paris: Gallimard, 1954. ——, “Les confréries noires en Algérie,” Revue Africaine 97 (1953), 314–367. Deutsch, Jan-Georg and Brigitte Reinwald, eds., Space on the Move: Transformations of the Indian Ocean Seascape in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Century, Berlin: Schwarz, 2002. Dias, Jill, “Estereótipos e realidades sociais: Quem eram os ‘Ambaquistas’?” in Constru- indo o Passado Angolano: As Fontes e a sua Interpre tação, (Ac tas do II Seminário International sobre a História de Angola), Lisbon: Comissão Nacional para as Co memorações dos Des cob rimentos Portu gueses, 2000, pp. 597–623. ——, “Angola,” in O Império Africano 1825–1890, eds. Valentim Alexandre and Jill Dias, Nova História da Expansão Portuguesa 10, eds. Joel Serrão and A.H. de Oliveira Marques, Lisbon: Editorial Estampa, 1998, pp. 319–556. ——, “Changing Patterns of Power in the Luanda Hinterland: The Impact of Trade and Colonisation on the Mbundu ca. 1845–1920,” Paideuma 32 (1986), 285–318. Dijk, Rijk van, “Localisation: Ghanaian Pentecostalism and the Stranger’s Beauty in Botswana,” Africa 73, 4 (2003), 560–583. Diouf, Mamadou, “Engaging Postcolonial Cultures: African Youth and Public Space,” African Studies Review 46 (2003), 1–12. ——, “Senegalese Murid Trade Diaspora and the Making of a Vernacular Cosmopoli- tanism,” Public Culture 12 (2000), 679–702. Dobbin, Christine, Asian Entrepreneurial Minorities: Conjoint Communities in the Making of the World-Economy, 1570–1940, Richmond: Curzon, 1996. Douglass, William A., “The Mining Camp as Community,” in Social Approaches to an Industrial Past: The Archaeology & Anthropology of Mining, eds. A. Bernard Knapp, Vincent C. Pigott and Eugenia W. Herbert, London: Routledge, 1998, pp. 97–108. Dozon, Jean-Pierre, “La Côte d’Ivoire au péril de l’ivoirité: Génèse d’un coup d’Etat,” Afrique contemporaine 193 (2000), 13–23. ——, “La Côte d’Ivoire entre démocratie, nationalisme et ethnonationalisme,” Poli- tique africaine 78 (2000), 45–63. Driessen, Henk, “Mediterranean Port Cities: Cosmopolitanism Reconsidered,” History and Anthropology 16, 1 (2005), 129–141. Dumett, Raymond E., El Dorado in West Africa: The Gold-Mining Frontier, African Labor, and Colonial Capitalism in the Gold Coast, 1875–1900, Oxford: James Currey, 1999. Dupire, Marguerite, Peuls nomades: Etude descriptive des Wodaabe du Sahel nigérien, Paris: Institut d’Ethnologie, 1962. ——, “Situation de la femme dans une société pastorale, Peul WoDaaBe, nomade du Niger,” in Femmes d’Afrique Noire, ed. Denise Paulme, Paris: Mouton, 1960, pp. 51–91. ——, “Pharmacopée Peule du Niger et du Cameroun,” Bulletin de l’IFAN 19 (1957), 382–417. references 411

Durgut, Gülay, “Tagsüber Deutschland, abends Türkei? Türkische Medien in Deutsch- land,” in Deutsche Türken: Das Ende der Geduld (bi-lingual, Turkish-German), eds. Claus Leggewie and Zafer Șenocak, Reinbek: Rowohlt, 1993, pp. 112–122. Edholm, Felicity, “The View from Below: Paris in the 1880s,” in Landscape Politics and Perspectives, ed. Barbara Bender, Oxford: Berg, 1994, pp. 139–168. Edmond, Rod and Vanessa Smith, Islands in History and Representation, London: Routledge, 2003. Ehlermann-Mollenhauer, Maja, Ernst Mollenhauer: Ein Expressionist aus Ostpreußen, Heidelberg: Edition Braus, 1992. Ehrenreich, Barbara and Arlie Russell Hochschild, eds., Global Women: Nannies, Maids and Sex Workers in the New Economy, New York: Holt, 2002. Eickelman, Dale, The Middle East: An Anthropological Approach, Englewood: Prentice Hall, 1981. —— with Jon W. Anderson, eds., New Media in the Muslim World: The Emerging Public Sphere, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1999. —— with James Piscatori, eds., Muslim Travellers: Pilgrimage, Migration and the Reli- gious Imagination, London: Routledge, 1990. Eisenstadt, Shmuel N., “Multiple Modernities in the Age of Globalization,” in Gren- zenlose Gesellschaft?, eds. Claudia Honegger, Stefan Hradil and Franz Traxxler, Opladen: Leske & Budrich, 1999, pp. 37–50. Elchardus, Mark and Wendy Smits, Anatomie en oorzaken van het wantrouwen, Brus- sels: VUB Press, 2002. Elchardus, Mark, Luc Huyse and Marc Hooghe, Het maatschappelijk middenveld in Vlaanderen: Een onderzoek naar de sociale constructie van democratisch burgerschap, Brussels: VUB Press, 2001. Elchardus, Mark, Marc Hooghe and Wendy Smits, Participatie in Vlaanderen: Een beschrijving van de deelname aan het verenigingsleven en vrijwilligerswerk in Vlaan- deren, Brussels: Vrije Universiteit Brussel, Vakgroep Sociologie, 1999. El-Edroos, Syed Ali, The Hashemite Arab Army, 1908–1979, Amman: The Publishing Committee, 1980. Elmhirst, Rebecca, “Daughters and Displacement: Migration Dynamics in an Indone- sian Transmigrant Area,” The Journal of Development Studies 38 (2002), 143–166. El-Mogharbel, Christliebe, Nehrungskurisch: Dokumentation einer moribunden Sprache, Frankfurt a.M.: Wissenschaftliche Buchhandlung Theo Hector GmbH, Forum Pho- neticum, 1993. Elson, Diane, “Gender Justice, Human Rights and Neo-Liberal Economic Policies,” in Gender Justice, Development, and Rights, eds. Maxine Molyneux and Shahra Razavi, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002, pp. 78–114. Elwert, Georg, Feldforschung: Orientierungswissen und kreuzperspektivische Analyse, (Sozialanthropolog. Arbeitspapiere, Free University Berlin, Inst. f. Ethnologie) 96, Berlin: Hans Schiler, 2003. Ende, Werner, “Salafiyya,” in Encyclopaedia of Islam, 2nd ed., 8, Leiden: Brill, 1995, pp. 900–909. —— with Udo Steinbach and Renate Laut, Der Islam in der Gegenwart, München: Beck, 2005. Englebert, Pierre, Burkina Faso: Unsteady Statehood in West Africa, Boulder, Colorado: Westview Press, 1996. Englund, Harri, “Cosmopolitanism and the Devil in Malawi,” Ethnos 69, 3 (2004), 293–316. ——, “The Politics of Multiple Identities,” in Associational Life in African Cites: Popu- lar Response to the Urban Crisis, eds. Arne Tostensen, Inge Tvedten and Mariken Vaa, Uppsala: Nordiska Afrikainstitutet, 2001. Erlmann, Veit, Music, Modernity and the Global Imagination: South Africa and the West, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999. 412 references

Esack, Farid, On Being a Muslim: Finding a Religious Path in the World Today, Oxford: Oneworld, 1999. ——, Qur’an, Liberation & Pluralism: An Islamic Perspective of Interreligious Solidarity against Oppression, Oxford: Oneworld, 1997. Esenbel, Selçuk, “The Anguish of Civilized Behavior: The Use of Western Cultural Forms in the Everyday Lives of the Meiji Japanese and the Ottoman Turks during the Nineteenth Century,” Japan Review 5 (1994), 145–85. Ezello, Joy, “Feminism and Islamic Fundamentalism: Some Perspectives from Nigeria and beyond,” Signs. Journal of Women in Culture and Society 32, 1 (2006), 40–47. Faist, Thomas, Transnationale Migration als relative Immobilität in einer globalisierten Welt, (Working Papers, Center for Migration, Citizenship and Development) 11, Bielefeld: COMCAD, 2006. ——, The Volume and Dynamics of International Migration and Transnational Social Spaces, Oxford: Oxford Univ. Press, 2000. ——, “The Crucial Meso-Level,” in International Migration, Immobility and Develop- ment: Multidisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Tomas Hammar et al., Oxford: Berg, 1997, pp. 187–218. Farrer, James, Opening Up: Youth Sex Culture and Market Reform in Shanghai, Chi- cago: University of Chicago Press, 2002. Farschid, Olaf, Manfred Kropp and Stephan Dähne, eds., The First World War as Remembered in the Countries of the Eastern Mediterranean, (Beiruter Texte und Studien) 99, Würzburg: Ergon Verlag, 2006. Fealy, Greg, “Islamisation and Politics in Southeast Asia: The Contrasting Cases of Malaysia and Indonesia,” Islam in World Politics, eds. Anthony H. Johns and Nelly Lahoud, London: Routledge, 2005, pp. 152–169. Feraoun, Mouloud, Jours de Kabylie, Algiers: Editions Baconier, 1954. Ferguson, James, “Of Mimicry and Membership: Africans and the ‘New World’ Society,” Cultural Anthropology 17, 4 (2002), 551–569. Finke, Roger, Avery M. Guest and Rodney Stark, “Mobilizing Local Religious Markets: Religious Pluralism in the Empire State, 1855 to 1865,” American Sociological Review 61 (1996), 203–18. Finkelstein, Joanne, “Chic Theory,” Australian Humanities Review 5 (1997). Flick, Uwe, Ernst von Kardoff and Ines Steinke, eds., A Companion to Qualitative Research, London: Sage, 2004. Flusser, Villem, Von der Freiheit des Migranten: Einsprüche gegen den Nationalsozia- lismus, Cologne: Bollmann, 1994. Foltz, Richard C., Mughal India and Central Asia, Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1998. François, Curt von, “Geschichtliches über die Bangala, Lunda und Kioko,” Globus 53 (1888), 273–276. Frederiksen, Bodil Folke, “Popular Culture in the South: Production and Reception,” in Livelihood, Identity and Instability, eds. Bodil Folke Frederiksen and Fiona Wil- son, Copenhagen: Centre for Development Research, 1997, pp. 167–177. Freitag, Ulrike, Indian Ocean Migrants and State Formation in Hadhramaut, Leiden: Brill, 2003. ——, “Der Orientalist und der Mufti: Gelehrtenbeziehungen im Mekka des 19. Jahr- hunderts,” Die Welt des Islams 43,1 (2003), 37–60. ——, “Inter-Oceanic Migrations from an Indian Ocean Perspective,” in Connecting Seas and Connected Ocean Rims, eds. Marcel van der Linden, Dirk Hoerder and Gisela Mettele, Leiden, forthcoming. —— with Malte Fuhrmann, Nora Lafi and Florian Riedler,Migrations and Urban Government in the Ottoman Empire, London: Routledge, 2010. —— with Achim von Oppen, “Translokalität als ein Zugang zur Geschichte globaler Verflechtungen,” H-Soz-u-Kult (June 10, 2005), http://hsozkult.geschichte.hu-berlin references 413

.de/forum/id=632&type=artikel&sort=datum&order=down&search=translokalit% C3%A4 (accessed July 2006, 18). Freund, Bill, The African City: A History, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007. Friedmann, Yohanan. Prophecy Continuous: Aspects of Aḥmadi Religious Thought and its Medieval Background, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1989. Fuccaro, Nelida, “Understanding the Urban History of Bahrain,” Critique. Journal of Critical Studies of the Middle East 17, 2 (2000), 49–81. Fuchs-Heinritz, Werner, Biographische Forschung: Eine Einführung in Praxis und Methoden, 2nd ed., Wiesbaden: Verlag für Sozialwissenschaften, 2000. Fuhrmann, Malte and Lars Amenda, eds., Hafenstädte: Mobilität, Migration, Globa- lisierung, special issue of Comparativ—Zeitschrift für Globalgeschichte und vergleichende Gesellschaftsgeschichte17, 2 (2007). Fürtig, Henner, Abgrenzung und Aneignung in der Globalisierung: Asien, Afrika und Europa seit dem 18. Jahrhundert. Ein Arbeitsbericht, Berlin: Das Arabische Buch, 2001. Gaborieau, Marc, “Late Persian, Early Urdu: The Case of ‘Wahhabi’ Literature (1818– 1857),” in Confluences of Culture: French Contributions to Indo-Persian Studies, ed. Françoise Delvoye, New Delhi: Manohar, 1994, pp. 170–95. Gallais, Jean, Pasteurs et paysans du Gourma: La condition sahelienne, Paris: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, 1975. Gao, Yun and Véronique Poisson, Le trafic et l’exploitation des immigrants chinois en France, Genève: ILO, 2005. Geaves, Ron, Markus Dressler and Gritt Maria Klinkhammer, Sufis in Western Society: Global Networking and Locality, New York: Routledge, 2008. Geertz, Clifford, Dichte Beschreibung: Beiträge zum Verstehen kultureller Systeme, Frankfurt a.M.: Suhrkamp, 1983. Geissler, Rainer and Horst Pöttker, eds., Integration durch Massenmedien: Medien und Migration im internationalen Vergleich, Bielefeld: transcript, 2006. Gemmeke, Amber, “The Map of Magic: Migrating Marabouts in Dakar,” inLes nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisa- beth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, Paris: Karthala, 2007, pp. 233–255. Geschiere, Peter, The Perils of Belonging: Autochthony, Citizenship and Exclusion in Africa and Europe, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009. ——, “Funerals and Belonging: Different Modalities in South Cameroon,” African Studies Review 48, 2 (2005), 45–64. ——, “Ecology, Belonging and Xenophobia: The 1994 Forest Law in Cameroon and the Issue of ‘Community’,” in Rights and the Politics of Recognition in Africa, eds. Harri Englund and Francis Nyamnjoh, London: Zed Books, 2004, pp. 237–261. —— with Francis Nyamnjoh, “Capitalism and Autochthony: The Seesaw of Mobility and Belonging,” Public Culture (special issue Millennial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism) 12, 2 (2000), 423–5. —— with Joseph Gugler, eds., “The Politics of Primary Patriotism,” Africa 68, 3 (1998), 309–319. Ghali, Noureddine, Sidi Mohammed Mahibou and Louis Brenner, Inventaire de la bibliothèque ‘Umarienne de Ségou, conservée à la Bibliothèque Nationale, Paris: Edi- tions du CNRS, 1985. Giddens, Anthony, The Consequences of Modernity, Cambridge: Polity in association with Blackwell, 1990. ——, The Constitution of Society: Outline of the Theory of Structuration, Berkeley: Uni- versity of California Press, 1984. Gimbutas, Marija, The Balts, London: Thames and Hudson, 1963. Glick Schiller, Nina, Linda Basch and Cristina Blanc-Szanton, Towards a Transna- tional Perspective on Migration: Race, Class, Ethnicity and Nationalism Reconsid- ered, New York: New York Academy of Sciences, 1992. 414 references

Glubb, Brigadier John Bagot, The Story of the Arab Legion, London: Hodder & Stough- ton, 1948. Gmelch, Sharon Bohn, “Groups that Don’t Want in: Gypsies and Other Artisan, Trader, and Entertainer Minorities,” Annual Review of Anthropology 15 (1986), 307-330. Goetz, Hermann, “Kostüm und Mode an den indischen Fürstenhöfen in der Großmo- gul-Zeit (16.–19. Jahrhundert): Ein Beitrag zur Chronologie und Kulturgeschichte der indischen Miniatur-Malerei,” Jahrbuch der asiatischen Kunst 1 (1924), 67–101. Goetze, Dieter, “Gemeinschaftsbegriffe in der Soziologie und Sozialanthropologie,” in Gemeinschaften in einer entgrenzten Welt, eds. Reinhart Kößler, Dieter Neubert and Achim von Oppen, Berlin: Das Arabische Buch, 1999, pp. 13–33. Goffman, Erving, Stigma: Notes on the Management of Spoiled Identity, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1963. Goldberg, Andreas, “Mediale Vielfalt versus mediale Ghettoisierung,” Zeitschrift für Migration und soziale Arbeit 2 (1998), 35–41 . Gommans, Jos, The Rise of the Indo-Afghan Empire, C 1710–1780, Leiden: Brill, 1995. Graça, Joaquim Rodrigues, “Descripção da viagem feita de Loanda com destino ás cabeceiras do rio Sena, ou aonde for mais conveniente pelo interior do continente, de que as tribus são senhores, principiada em 24 de Abril de 1843,” in Annaes do Conselho Ultramarino, Parte não official1, Lisbon, 1855, pp. 101–114, 117–129, 133–146. Gräf, Bettina, “IslamOnline.net: Independent, Interactive, Popular,” Arab Media and Society (January 2008), http://www.arabmediasociety.com/?article=576 (accessed November 10, 2008). Graham, Brian, G.J. Ashworth and J.E. Tunbridge, A Geography of Heritage: Power, Culture and Economy, London: Arnold, 2004. Grätz, Tilo, “Gold Mining and Risk Management: A Case Study from Northern Benin,” Ethnos 68, 2 (2003), 179–191. ——, Gold Mining Communities in Northern Benin as Semi-Autonomous Social Fields, (Working Paper) 36, Halle: Max-Planck-Institute for Social Anthropology, 2002. Green, Nancy, Repenser les migrations, (Coll. Le Nœud Gordien), Paris: PUF, 2002. Greene, Sandra, Sacred Sites and the Colonial Encounter, Bloomington: Indiana Uni- versity Press, 2002. Greenblatt, Stephen, “Culture,” in Critical Terms for Literary Study, eds. Frank Len- tricchia and Thomas McLaughlin, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995 [1990], pp. 225–232. Gries, Rainer, “Zur Ästhetik und Architektur von Propagemen: Überlegungen zu einer Propagandageschichte als Kulturgeschichte,” in Kultur der Propaganda, eds. Rainer Gries and Wolfgang Schmale, Bochum: Verlag Dr. Dieter Winkler, 2005, pp. 9–36. Grozs, Elizabeth, Space, Time and Perversion: Essays on the Politics of Bodies, London: Routledge, 1995. Gruénais, Marc-Eric, “Du bon usage de l’autochtonie,” Cahiers ORSTOM. Série sciences humaines 21, 1 (1985), 19–24. Grundmann, Johannes, Islamische Internationalisten: Strukturen und Aktivitäten der Muslimbruderschaft und der Islamischen Weltliga, Wiesbaden: Reichert, 2005. Guchu, Wonder, Sketches of High-Density Life, Harare: Weaver Press, 2003. Guerassimoff, Eric, Les dynamiques migratoires chinoises: Propositions pour un renouvellement des approches historiques, unpublished document, Paris: HDR, University of Paris 7, 2004. Guerassimoff-Pina, Carine, “Le renouvellement des perspectives transnationales de la Chine,” Critique Internationale 32 (2006), 39–52. ——, “Genre et réseaux migratoires: Jalons pour une approche institutionnaliste des nouvelles migrations chinoises,” Migrations-Société 18 (2006), 17–32. ——, “Gender and Migration Networks: New Approaches on Chinese Migration to France and Europe,” Journal of Chinese Overseas 2 (2006), 134–145. references 415

——, “République populaire de Chine-Union européenne: Vers un partenariat stra- tégique en matière migratoire?” Hommes & Migrations (special issue Chinois de France, ed. Véronique Poisson) 1254 (2005), 65–73. ——, “Circulation migratoire chinoise, informations et échanges,” in Migrations internationales, mobilités et développement au sud: Les migrants chinois, ouest africains et mexicains, ed. Eric Guerassimoff, Paris: L’Harmattan, 2004, pp. 169–189. ——, “The New Chinese Migrants in France,” International Migration (special issue Understanding Migration between China and Europe, ed. Frank Lascko) 41, 3 (2003), 135–154. ——, ed., Les nouvelles migrations chinoises en Europe au début du XXIe siècle, special issue of Migrations-Société 15, 89 (2003). ——, L’État chinois et les communautés chinoises d’outre-mer, Paris: L’Harmattan, 1997. —— with Eric Guerassimoff and Nora Wang,La circulation des nouveaux migrants économiques chinois en France et en Europe, Paris: Ministère de l’Emploi et de la Solidarité, unpublished document, 2002. Gueye, Djibril, Mining, Minerals, and Sustainable Development (MMSD), ed. Inter- national Institute for Environment and Development (IIED), Paper 73, October 2001, www.iied.org/mmsd/mmsd_pdfs/asm_burkina_faso_eng.pdf (accessed June 24, 2009). Gugler, Thomas, “Parrots of Paradise, Symbols of the Super-Muslim: Sunnah, Sun- naization and Self-Fashioning in the Islamic Missionary Movements Tablighi-i Jama‘at, Da‘wat-e Islami and Sunni Da‘wat-e Islami,” Paper presented at the 20th European Conference of Modern South Asian Studies, Manchester University, July 9, 2008, http://archiv.ub.uni-heidelberg.de/savifadok/volltexte/2008/142/ (accessed November 11, 2008). Guilmoto, Christophe and Frédéric Sandron, “Approche institutionnelle de la migration dans les pays en développement,” Economie rurale 252 (1999), 47–54. Gunderson, Sala Frank and Gregory Barz, eds., Mashindano! Competitive Music Per- formance in East Africa, Dar es Salaam: Mkuki Na Nyota, 2000. Güntürk, Reyhan, “Mediennutzung der Migranten: Mediale Isolation?” in Medien und multikulturelle Gesellschaft, eds. Christoph Butterwege, Gudrun Hentges and Fatma Sarigöz, Interkulturelle Studien 3, Opladen: Leske & Budrich, 1999, pp. 136–143. Gupta, Akhil and James Ferguson, “Discipline and Practice: ‘The Field’ as Site, Method and Location in Anthropology,” in Anthropological Locations: Boundaries and Grounds of a Field Science, eds. idem, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1997, pp. 1–46. ——, eds., Culture, Power, Place: Explorations in Cultural Anthropology, Durham: Duke University Press, 1997. ——, Anthropological Locations: Boundaries and Grounds of a Field Science, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1997. Guyer, Jane, Marginal Gains: Monetary Transactions in Atlantic Africa, Chicago: Chi- cago University Press, 2004. ——, “Wealth in People and Self-Realization in Equatorial Africa,” in Man n.s. 28, 2 (1993), 243–265. de Haan, Arjan and Ben Rogaly, eds., Labour Mobility and Rural Society, (Develop- ment Studies) 38, London: F. Cass, 2002. de Haan, Arjan, Karen Brock and Ngolo Coulibaly, “Migration, Livelihoods and Insti- tutions: Contrasting Patterns of Migration in Mali,” in Labour Mobility and Rural Society, eds. Arjan de Haan and Ben Rogaly, Development Studies 38, London: F. Cass, 2002, pp. 37–58. Haëdo, Diego de, Topographie et histoire générale d’Alger, Paris: Bouchène, 1998. Hafez, Kai, “Globalisierung, Ethnisierung und Medien: Eine ‘Parallelgesellschaft’ durch türkische Medien in Deutschland?” in Zwischen Abgrenzung und Integration: Türkische Medienkultur in Deutschland, eds. Jörg Becker and Reinhard Benisch, Loccumer Protokolle 03/00, Rehburg-Loccum: Evangelische Akademie, 2001, pp. 37–48. 416 references

Hahn, Hans Peter, “Zirkuläre Arbeitsmigration in Westafrika und die ‘Kultur der Migration’,” Afrika Spectrum 39 (2004), 381–404. Hamer, Alica, “Diola Women and Migration: A Case Study,” in The Uprooted of the Western Sahel: Migrants’ Quest for Cash in the Senegambia, eds. Lucie Gallistel Colvin et al., New York: Praeger, 1981, pp. 183–203. Hammar, Tomas, “State, Nation, and Dual Citizenship,” in Immigration and the Poli- tics of Citizenship in Europe and North America, ed. Roger Brubaker, Lanham: Uni- versity Press of America, 1989, pp. 81–95. Hampshire, Kate, “Fulani on the Move: Seasonal Economic Migration on the Sahel as a Social Process,” Journal of Development Studies 38 (2002), 15–36. —— with Sara Randall, “Seasonal Labour Migration Strategies in the Sahel: Coping with Poverty or Optimising Security,” International Journal of Population Geogra- phy 5 (1999), 367–385. Hann, Chris, “The Cartography of Copyright Cultures versus Proliferation of Public Properties,” in Properties of Culture—Culture as Property: Pathways to Reform in Post-Soviet Siberia, ed. Erich Kasten, Berlin: Reimer, 2004, pp. 280–304. ——, “Postsocialist Nationalism: Rediscovering the Past in South East Poland,” Slavic Review 57 (1998), 840–863. Ḥ annā, ʿAbdallāh, Dair ʿAtīya:̣ At-tārīḫ wa’l-ʿumrān min al-waqf ad̠-d̠urrī ila’l- muǧtamaʿ al-madanī (awāḫir al-qarn at-t̠ ālit̠ ̠ ʿašar—muntasaf̣ al-qarn al-ʿišrīn), Damascus: Institut Français d’Etudes Arabes à Damas, 2002. ——, Al-fallāḥūn yiqra’ūna tārīḫahum, forthcoming. Ḥannā, Gūrǧ ,̌ Qabla’l-magṙ īb: Tagārub̌ wa-d̠ikrayāt min ḥayātī, Beirut: Dār at-t̠ aqāfa,̠ n.d. Hannerz, Ulf, “Media and the World as a Single Place,” in idem, Foreign News: Explor- ing the World of Foreign Correspondents, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004, pp. 15–38. ——, Flows, Boundaries and Hybrids: Keywords in Transnational Anthropology, (WPTC-2K-02), Stockholm: Department of Social Anthropology, Stockholm Uni- versity, 2002. ——, “Transnational Research,” in Handbook of Methods in Cultural Anthropology, ed. Bernard H. Russel, Walnut Creek: Altamire Pr., 2000, pp. 235–256. Hanoteau, Adolphe and Aristide Letourneux, La Kabylie et les coutumes kabyles, Paris: Challamel, 1872–1873. Harcourt, Wendy and Arturo Escobar, “Lead Article: Women and the Politics of Place,” Development (special issue Place, Politics and Justice: Women Negotiating Globalization ed. Wendy Harcourt) 45, 1 (2002), 7–13. Harders, Cilja, “Dimensionen des Netwerkansatzes: Einführende theoretische Über- legungen,” in Die islamische Welt als Netzwerk, ed. Roman Loimeier, Würzburg: Ergon, 2000, pp. 17–51. Haron, Muhammed, “Da’wah Movements and Sufi tariqahs: Competing for Spiritual Spaces in Contemporary South(ern) Africa,” Journal of Muslim Minority Affairs 25, 2 (2005), 261–285. Harvey, David, The Condition of Postmodernity: An Enquiry into the Origins of Cul- tural Change, Oxford: B. Blackwell, 1990. Hasan, Noorhaidi, “The Salafi Movement in Indonesia: Transnational Dynamics and Local Development,” Comparative Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East 27, 1 (2007), 83–94. Heinemann, Lars and Fuat Kamcili, “Unterhaltung, Absatzmärkte und die Vermitt- lung von Heimat: Die Rolle der Massenmedien in deutsch-türkischen Räumen,” in Transstaatliche Räume: Politik, Wirtschaft und Kultur zwischen Deutschland und der Türkei, ed. Thomas Faist, Bielefeld: transkript, 2000, pp. 113–158. Heintze, Beatrix, “Long-Distance Caravans and Communication beyond the Kwango (c. 1850–1890),” in Angola on the Move: Transport Routes, Communication and His- tory / Angola em Movimento: Vias de Transporte, Comunicação e História, eds. Bea- trix Heintze and Achim von Oppen, Frankfurt a.M.: Lembeck, 2008, pp. 144–162. references 417

——, “Luso-afrikanische Dolmetscher und kulturelle Vermittler in Angola im 19. Jahrhundert,” in Sprachgrenzen, Sprachkontakte und kulturelle Vermittler in der Geschichte der europäische-überseeischen Beziehungen: Beiträge zur europäischen Überseegeschichte, eds. Mark Häberlein and Alexander Keese, forthcoming. ——, Ethnographische Aneignungen: Deutsche Forschungsreisende in Angola, Frankfurt a.M.: Lembeck, 1999 (2nd rev. edition as eBook: Deutsche Forschungsreisende in Angola: Ethnographische Aneignungen zwischen Sklavenhandel, Kolonialismus und Wissenschaft, Frankfurt a.M.: Lembeck, 2007). ——, “The Extraordinary Journey of the Jaga through the Centuries: Critical Approaches to Precolonial Angolan Historical Sources,” History in Africa 34 (2007), 67–101. ——, “Between Two Worlds: The Bezerras, a Luso-African Family in Nineteenth- Century Western Central Africa,” in Creole Societies in the Portuguese Colonial Empire, eds. Philip J. Havik and Malyn Newitt, Lusophone Studies 6, Bristol: Bristol University Press, 2007, pp. 127–153. ——, “Luéji, Quinguri, Tembo & Co.: Politik und Verwandtschaft im vorkolonialen Zentralafrika,“ manuscript 2006. ——, “A lusofonia no interior da África Central na era pré-colonial: Um contributo para a sua história e compreensão na actualidade,” Cadernos de Estudos Africanos 6/7 (July 2004/June 2005), 179–207 (published in 2006). ——, Pioneiros Africanos: Caravanas de carregadores na África Centro-Ocidental (entre 1850 e 1890), trans. Marina Santos, Lisbon: Editorial Caminho, 2004. ——, Afrikanische Pioniere: Trägerkarawanen im westlichen Zentralafrika (ca. 1850– 1890), Frankfurt a.M.: Lembeck, 2002. ——, “Colonial Ambitions as Blind Passengers: The Case of German Explorers in West-Central Africa (1873–86),” in A África e a Instalação do Sistema Colonial (c. 1885–c. 1930): III Reunião Internacional de História de África—Actas, ed. Maria Emília Madeira Santos, Lisbon: IICT, Centro de Estudos de História e Cartografia Antiga, 2000, pp. 19–30. ——, ed., Max Buchners Reise nach Zentralafrika 1878–1882: Briefe, Berichte, Studien, Cologne: Köppe, 1999. Hellermann, Christiane, “Gendered Margins: Immigrant Women in Portugal,” Ethno- logia Europaea 34 (2004), 17–28. Henriques, Isabel de Castro, Commerce et changements en Angola au XIXe siècle: Imbangala et Tshokwe face à la modernité, 2 vols., Paris: Editions L’Harmattan, 1995. Herbert, Ulrich, Geschichte der Ausländerpolitik in Deutschland: Saisonarbeiter, Zwangsarbeiter, Gastarbeiter, Flüchtlinge, München: Beck, 2001. Hershatter, Gail, “State of Field: Women in China’s Long Twentieth Century,” The Journal of Asian Studies 63 (2004), 991–1065. ——, “Chinese Sex Workers in the Reform Period,” in Putting Class in its Place: Worker Identitites in East Asia, ed. John Perry, California: Institute of East Asian Studies, University of California, 1996, pp. 199–224. Heuler-Neuhaus, Werner, “Mit den Frauen verliert auch die dörfliche Gemeinschaft die Initiative: Gesellschaftliche und ökologische Auswirkungen von Emigration in der Provinz Yatenga (Burkina Faso),” in Wandern oder bleiben? Veränderung der Lebenssituation von Frauen im Sahel durch die Arbeitsmigration der Männer, ed. Elke Grawert, Münster: Lit, 1994, pp. 131–156. Hily, Marie-Antoinette and Christian Rinaudo, “Cosmopolitisme et altérité: Les nouveaux migrants dans l’économie informelle,” Tsantsa 8 (2003), 48–57. Hinfelaar, Marja, Respectable and Responsible Women: Methodist and Roman Catholic Women’s Organisations in Harare, Zimbabwe, 1919–1985, Utrecht: Bockencentrum, 2004. Hirsch, Francine, Empire of Nations: Ethnographic Knowledge and the Making of the Soviet Union, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 2005. Hirszowicz, Lukasz, The Third Reich and the Arab East: Studies in Political History, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul; Toronto: Toronto University Press, 1966. 418 references

Hitzler, Ronald and Anne Honer, eds., Sozialwissenschaftliche Hermeneutik, Opladen: Westd. Verlag, 1997. Hjort Af Arnäs, Anders, “Town-Based Pastoralism in Eastern Africa,” in Small Town Africa: Studies in Rural—Urban Interaction, ed. Jonathan Baker, Uppsala: Nordiska Afrikainstitutet, 1990, pp. 143–160. Ho, Engseng, The Graves of Tarim: Genealogy and Mobility across the Indian Ocean, Berkeley: University of California Press, 2006. ——, “Empire through Diasporic Eyes: A View from the Other Boat,” Comparative Studies in Society and History 46 (2004), 210–246. Hobsbawm, Eric and Terence Ranger, eds., The Invention of Tradition, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1983. Hodgson, Dorothy L., “Gender, Culture and the Myth of the Patriarchal Pastoralist,” in Rethinking Pastoralism in Africa, ed. idem, Oxford: Currey, 2000, pp. 1–28. Holmes, Douglas R., Integral Europe: Fast-Capitalism, Multiculturalism, Neofascism, Princeton and Oxford: Princeton University Press, 2000. Hooghe, Marc, Sociaal kapitaal in Vlaanderen: Verenigingen en democratisch politieke cultuur, Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press, 2003. ——, ed., Tijdschrift voor Sociologie(special issue Sociaal kapitaal en democratie: Verenigingsleven, sociaal kapitaal en politieke cultuur) 20, 3/4 (2000), 227–617. Hoover, James Jeffrey, The Seduction of Ruwej: Reconstructing Ruund History (the Nuclear Lunda; Zaire, Angola, Zambia), PhD thesis, Yale University, Ann Arbor: UMI, 1978. Hopkins, A.G., ed., Globalization in World History, New York: Pimlico, 2002. Höpp, Gerhard, “Der verdrängte Diskurs: Arabische Opfer des Nationalsozialismus,” in Blind für die Geschichte? Arabische Begegnungen mit dem Nationalsozialismus, eds. Gerhard Höpp, Peter Wien and René Wildangel, Studien Zentrum Moderner Orient, Geisteswissenschaftliche Zentren Berlin e.V. 19, Berlin: Das Arabische Buch, 2004, pp. 215–168. ——, “Frontenwechsel: Muslimische Deserteure im Ersten und Zweiten Weltkrieg und in der Zwischenkriegszeit,” in Fremdeinsätze: Afrikaner und Asiaten in europäischen Kriegen, 1914–1945, eds. Gerhard Höpp and Brigitte Reinwald, Studien Zentrum Moderner Orient, Geisteswissenschaftliche Zentren Berlin e.V. 13, Berlin: Das Ara- bische Buch, 2000, pp. 129–141. ——, “Ruhmloses Zwischenspiel: Fawzi al-Qawuqji in Deutschland, 1941–1947,” in Al-Rafidayn: Jahrbuch zu Geschichte und Kultur des modernen Iraq, 3, ed. Peter Heine, Würzburg: Ergon Verlag, 1995, pp. 19–46. ——, “Araber im Zweiten Weltkrieg: Kollaboration oder Patriotismus?” in Jenseits der Legenden: Araber, Juden, Deutsche, ed. Wolfgang Schwanitz, Berlin: Dietz Verlag, 1994, pp. 86–92. Humphrey, Caroline, “The Moral Authority of the Past in Post-Socialist Mongolia,” Religion, State and Society 20 (1992), 375–389. Hunter, Albert, Symbolic Communities: The Persistence and Change of Chicago’s Local Communities, Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1974. Hunter, W.W., Our Indian Mussalmans: Are They Bound in Conscience to Rebel Against the Queen?, London: H.M.S.O, 1871. Huyse, Luc, Passiviteit, pacificatie en verzuiling in de Belgische politiek: Een sociolo- gische studie, Antwerp: Standaard Wetenschappelijke Uitgeverij, 1970. Hynes, Samuel, “Personal Narratives and Commemoration,” in War and Remem- brance in the Twentieth Century, eds. Jay Winter and Emmanuel Sivan, Studies in the Social and Cultural History of Modern Warfare 5, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000, pp. 205–220. Ibn al-Hâjj, M., Rihlat al-Abdarî: Al-musammat al-rihlat al-maghribiyya, Rabat: Jâmi‘a Muhammad al-Khâmis, 1968. Iftikhar, Asif, Jihad and the Establishment of Islamic Global Order: A Comparative Study references 419

of the Interpretative Approaches and Worldviews of Abu al-A‘la Mawdudi and Javed Ahmad Ghamidi, unpubl. Master thesis, Montreal: McGill University, 2005. Inda, Jonathan Xavier and Renato Rosaldo, eds., Anthropology of Globalization, Maiden, MA: Blackwell, 2002. Irek, Malgorzata, Der Schmugglerzug: Warschau—Berlin—Warschau: Materialien einer Feldforschung, Berlin: Das Arabische Buch, 1998. Iskender,̇ Selçuk, Medien und Organisationen: Interkulturelle Medien und Organisa- tionen und ihr Beitrag zur Integration der türkischen Minderheit, Berlin: Express Edition, 1983. Izard, Michel, Gens du pouvoir, gens de la terre: Les institutions politiques de l’ancien royaume du Yatenga (Bassin de la Volta blanche), Cambridge: Cambridge Univer- sity Press, 1985. ——, “Transgression, transversalité, errance,” in La fonction symbolique, eds. Michel Izard und Pierre Smith, Paris: Gallimard, 1979, pp. 289–306. Jacka, Tamara, “Back to the Wok: Women and Employment in Chinese Industry in the 1980’s,” Australian Journal of Chinese Affairs 24 (1990), 1–23. Jackson, Stephen, War Making: Uncertainty, Improvisation and Involution in the Kivu Provinces, DR Congo, 1997–2002, unpubl. PhD thesis, Princeton: Princeton Univer- sity, 2003. Jacob, Edwin, A Memoir of Professor Yesudas Ramchandra of Delhi, Kanpur: Christian Church Mission Press, 1902. Jacobs, Dirk and Jean Tillie, “Introduction: Social Capital and Political Integration of Migrants,” Journal of Ethnic and Migration Studies 30, 3 (2004), 419–427. Janson, Marloes, “Roaming about for God’s Sake: The Upsurge of the Tabligh Jama‘at in The Gambia,” Journal of Religion in Africa 35, 4 (2005), 450–481. Jaques, Eric, Blaise Zida, Mario Billa, Catherine Greffié and Jean-François Thomassin, “Artisanal and Small-Scale Gold Mines in Burkina Faso: Today and Tomorrow,” in Small-Scale Mining, Rural Subsistence and Poverty in West Africa, ed. Gavin Hilson, Rugby: Intermediate Technology Publications, 2006, pp. 115–134. Jeffreys, Elaine, China, Sex and Prostitution: Studies in China in Transition, London: Routledge Curzon, 2004. Jiang, Yongping, “Employment and Chinese Urban Women under Two Systems,” in Holding up Half the Sky: Chinese Women, Past, Present, Future, eds. Jie Tao, Bijun Zheng and Shirley Mow, New York: Feminist Press, 2004, pp. 207–220. Johler, Reinhard, “Europe: Identity Politics and the Production of Cultural Heritage,” Lietuvos Etnologija, Lithuanian Ethnology. Studies in Social Anthropology and Eth- nology 2 (2002), 9–18. Joppke, Christian, Immigration and the Nation-State: The United States, Germany, and Great Britain, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999. Judd, Ellen, Gender and Power in Rural North China, Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1994. Kaarsholm, Preben, “Instability, Migration and Violence: Notes on a South African Peri-Urban Situation,” in Livelihood, Identity and Instability, eds. Bodil Folke Fred- eriksen and Fiona Wilson, Copenhagen: Centre for Development Research, 1997, pp. 37–57. Kandhelwi, Muhammad Zakariyya, Shamaa-il Tirmidhi, with Commentary, Noida: New Era Publishers, 2001. Kaptein, Nico, ed. and introd., The Muhimmât al-Nafâ’is: A Bilingual Meccan Fatwa Collection for Indonesian Muslims from the End of the Nineteenth Century, Jakarta: INIS, 1997. Karacabey, Makfi, Türkische Tageszeitungen in der BRD: Rolle—Einfluß—Funktionen. Eine Untersuchung zum Integrationsverständnis türkischer Tageszeitungen in der BRD, unpubl. PhD thesis, Frankfurt a.M.: Johann Wolfgang Goethe-Universität, 1996. 420 references

Karl, Rebecca E., “Creating Asia: China in the World at the Beginning of the Twentieth Century,” American Historical Review 103 (1998), 1096–1118. Kartal, Celalettin, “Die doppelte Staatsbürgerschaft als Integrationsfaktor in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland,” Zeitschrift für Türkeistudien 15 (2002), 221–239. Katz, Cindi and Janice Monk, eds., Full Circles: Geographies of Women Over the Life Course, London: Routledge, 1993. Katz, Jonathan G., Dreams, Sufism and Sainthood: The Visionary Career of Muham- mad al-Zawâwî, Leiden: Brill, 1996. Kerr, Malcolm H., Islamic Reform: The Political and Legal Theories of Muḥammad ‘Abduh and Rashîd Riḍâ, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966. Kesteloot, Christian, “Stedelijkheid in Vlaanderen: Een nieuwe politieke inzet,” Vlaams Marxistisch Tijdschrift 4 (1999), 18–29. Kibelka, Ruth, Ostpreußens Schicksalsjahre: 1944–1948, Berlin: Aufbauverlag, 2000. Killingray, David, “Guarding Modern Empires,” in Guardians of Empire: The Armed Forces of the Colonial Powers (c. 1700–1964), eds. David Killingray and David Omissi, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1999, pp. 1–24. Kleff, Hans-Günter, “‘Die Deutschen’ in türkischen Tageszeitungen: Eine Untersu- chung am Beispiel der Europa-Ausgaben von Hürriyet und Tercüman,” Deutsch lernen 1 (1989), 34–63. Klitzke, Dietrich, ed., Das Medienangebot für die Bevölkerung aus der Türkei in Berlin (West): Eine Dokumentation, Berlin: Institut für Medienwissenschaft, Technische Universität, Berlin, 1980. Klute, Georg, “Flucht, Karawane, Razzia: Formen der Arbeitsmigration bei den Tuareg,” in Systematische Völkerkunde: Völkerkundetagung 1991, eds. Matthias S. Laubscher and Bertram Turner, Munich: Akademischer Verlag, 1994, pp. 197–216. Knoblauch, Hubert, ed., Kommunikative Lebenswelten: Zur Ethnographie einer geschwätzigen Gesellschaft, Konstanz: Universitätsverlag, 1996. Knörr, Jacqueline and Barbara Meier, eds., Women and Migration: Anthropological Perspectives, Frankfurt a.M.: Campus, 2000. Konings, Piet and Francis B. Nyamnjoh, Negotiating an Anglophone Identity: A Study of the Politics of Recognition and Representation in Cameroon, Leiden: Brill, 2003. ——, “Mobility and Exclusion: Conflicts between Autochtons and Allochthons during Political Liberalization in Cameroon,” in Mobile Africa: Changing Patterns of Movement in Africa and Beyond, eds. Mirjam de Bruijn, Rijk van Dijk, Dick Foeken, Leiden: Brill, 2001, pp. 169–194. Kosnick, Kira, Migrant Media: Turkish Broadcasting and Multicultural Politics in Ber- lin, Bloomington, Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 2007. Kossert, Andreas, Ostpreussen: Geschichte und Mythos, München: Siedler, 2005. Kuah-Pearce, Khun Eng, ed., Chinese Women and their Cultural and Networks Capi- tals, (Asian Women and Society Series), Singapore: Marchall Cavendish Interna- tional, 2004. Külahçı, Ahmet, “Wie müssen uns an den Erwartungen, Bedürfnissen und Wünschen unserer Leser orientieren,” in Die türkische Presse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und ihr Einfluß auf die Integration von Türken: Standpunkte und Analysen, Bonn: Zentrum für Türkeistudien, 1988, pp. 42–49. Kurzman, Charles, Liberal Islam: A Sourcebook, New York: Oxford University Press, 1998. Kwauka, Paul and Richard Pietsch, Kurisches Wörterbuch, Berlin: Verlag Ulrich Camen, 1977. Lachenmann, Gudrun, “Researching Translocal Gendered Spaces: Methodological Challenges,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. idem and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 13–36. ——, “Decentralisation and Civil Society: Negotiating Local Development in West Africa,” WP 358 (2006), www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc(de)/agsozanth/publications/ references 421

workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009) (=Paper presented at 11th EADI General Conference Bonn, September 21–24, 2005). ——, “Introduction: Methodology and Comparison – Embedding the Research Project,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans-Local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/ tdrc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). ——, “Weibliche Räume in muslimischen Gesellschaften Westafrikas,” Peripherie 24, 95 (2004), 322–340. ——, “Transformation der Frauenökonomie und Dimensionen der Einbettung in Afrika,” in Die geschlechtsspezifische Einbettung der Ökonomie: Empirische Unter- suchungen über Entwicklungs- und Transformationsprozesse, eds. idem und Petra Dannecker, Market, Culture and Society 12, München: Lit, 2001, pp. 83–110. ——, “Frauenbewegungen als gesellschaftliche Kraft des Wandels: Beispiele aus Afrika,” in Lokal bewegen—global verhandeln: Internationale Politik und Geschlecht, ed. Uta Ruppert, Frankfurt a.M.: Campus, 1998, pp. 208–233. ——, “Intervention, Interaktion und Partizipation: Zu einigen Methodenfragen der empirischen Entwicklungsforschung,” in Entwicklung: Theorie—Empirie—Strategie— Institution, ed. Manfred Schulz, Muenster: Lit, 1997, pp. 99–114. ——, “Weltfrauenkonferenz und Forum der Nichtregierungsorganisationen in Peking: Internationale Frauenbewegungen als Vorreiterinnen einer globalen Zivilgesell- schaft?” WP 251 (1996), www.uni-bielefeld.de/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). ——, “Civil Society and Social Movements in Africa: The Case of the Peasant Move- ment in Senegal,” The European Journal of Development Research 5, 2 (1993), 68–100. Lachenmann, Gudrun and Petra Dannecker, eds., Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, Lanham: Lexington, 2008. ——, “Introduction,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. idem, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 3–12. Lachenmann, Gudrun, Frauke Bleibaum, Judith Ehlert, Lalla Khadeija ElOumrany, Daniel Krenz-Dewe, Sascha Vennemann and Bertrand Zohy, “Décentralisation, société civile, développement au Sénégal, Projet de recherche d’étudiant(e)s 2004/2005: Rapport d’étude de terrain,” WP 357 (2006), www.uni-bielefeld.de/ tdrc(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). Laffan, Michael F., Islamic Nationhood and Colonial Indonesia, London: Routledge Curzon, 2003. Lambert, Michael C., Longing for Exile: Migration and the Making of a Translocal Community in Senegal, West Africa, Portsmouth: Heinemann, 2002. Lamuniere, Michelle, You Look Beautiful Like That, New Haven: Yale, 2001. Lamy, Steven, “Policy Responses to Ethnonationalism: Consocational Engineering in Belgium,” in The Primordial Challenge: Ethnicity in the Contemporary World, ed. John F. Stack, New York: Greenwood Press, 1986, pp. 115–137. Lascko, Frank, “Understanding Migration between China and Europe,” International Migration 41, 3 (2003), 5–19. Lash, Scott and Jonathan Friedman, eds., Modernity and Identity, Oxford: Blackwell, 1992. Launay, R. and B.F. Soares, “The Formation of an ‘Islamic Sphere’ in French Colonial West Africa,” Economy and Society 28, 4 (1999), 497–519. Lecoq, Baz, “Fieldwork ain’t always Fun: Public and Hidden Discourse on Fieldwork,” History in Africa—A Journal of Method 39 (2002), 272–283. Leed, Eric J., Die Erfahrung der Ferne: Reisen von Gilgamesch bis zum Tourismus unserer Tage, Frankfurt a.M.: Campus, 1991. Lefebvre, Henri, The Production of Space, trans. Donald Nicholson-Smith, Oxford: Blackwell, 1991. 422 references

Leichtman, Mara, A Tale of Two Shi’isms: Lebanese Migrants and Senegalese Converts in Dakar, unpubl. PhD thesis, Providence, RI: Brown University, Department of Anthropology, 2006. ——, “Defying Sufism? Senegalese Converts to Shiite Islam,” ISIM Review 17, 40 (2006), 40–41. Lelyveld, David, Aligarh’s First Generation: Muslim Solidarity in British India, Delhi: Oxford University Press, India, 1996 [1978]. Lentz, Carola, “‘Premiers arrivés’ et ‘nouveaux venus’: Discours sur l’autochtonie dans la savane ouest-africaine,” in Histoire du peuplement et relations interethniques au Burkina Faso, eds. Richard Kuba, Carola Lentz, and Claude Nurukyor Somda, Paris: Karthala, 2003, pp. 113–134. Levitt, Peggy, The Transnational Villagers, Berkeley: University of California Press, 2001. Levy, Florence, “Les femmes du Nord: Une migration au profil atypique,” Hommes & Migrations 1254 (2005), 45–57. Li, Tania Murray, “Articulating Indigenous Identity in Indonesia: Resource Politcs and the Tribal Slot,” Comparative Studies in Society and History 42 (2000), 149–179. Lia, Brynjar, The Society of the Muslim Brothers in Egypt: The Rise of an Islamic Mass Movement 1928–1942, Reading: Ithaca-Press, 1998. Lijphart, Arend, “Introduction: The Belgian Example of Cultural Coexistence in Com- parative Perspective,” in Conflict and Coexistence in Belgium: The Dynamics of a Culturally Divided Society, ed. idem, Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, 1981, pp. 1–12. ——, Democracy in Plural Societies: A Comparative Exploration, New Haven: Yale University Press, 1977. van der Linden, Marcel, Workers of the World: Essays toward a Global Labor History, Leiden: Brill, 2008. ——, “Global Labour History: The IISH Approach,” Amsterdam 2002, http://www.iisg .nl/publications/globlab.pdf (accessed June 30, 2009). Ling, Huping, Surviving on the Gold Mountain: A History of Chinese American Women and their Lives, New York: State University of New York Press, 1998. Little, Kenneth, African Women in Towns: An Aspect of Africa’s Social Revolution, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1973. Liu, Wei, Nouvelle immigration et prostitution chinoise à Paris, unpubl. Master thesis, Paris: University of Versailles, 2005. Loftsdottir, Kristin, “Knowing What to Do in the City,” Anthropology Today 18 (2002), 9–13. Lohnert, Beate, “Städtische Marginalität und Sozialpolitik: Die Lebenswelt von Dürre- flüchtlingen im Sahel. Beispiele aus Mopti/Mali,” in Staat und Gesellschaft in Afrika, ed. Peter Meyns, Münster: Lit, 1996, pp. 510–520. Loimeier, Roman, “Translocal Networks of Saints and the Negotiation of Religious Disputes in Local Contexts,” Archives de Sciences Sociales des Religions 135 (2006), 17–32. ——, “Patterns and Peculiarities of Islamic Reform in Africa,” Journal of Religion in Africa 33, 3 (2003), 237–262. ——, Die islamische Welt als Netzwerk: Möglichkeiten und Grenzen des Netzwer- kansatzes im islamischen Kontext, Würzburg: Ergon, 2000. ——, “Islamic Reform and Political Change: The Example of Abubakar Gumi and the Yan Izala Movement in Norther Nigeria,” in African Islam and Islam in Africa: Encounters between Sufis and Islamists, eds. Rosander, Eva Evers and David Westerlund, London: Hurst & Company, 1997, pp. 286–307. Lombard, Jaques, Autorités traditionnelles et pouvoirs européens en Afrique noire: Le déclin d’une aristocratie sous le régime colonial, Paris: Colin, 1967. Long, Norman, “Exploring Local/Global Transformations: A View from Anthropol- ogy,” in Anthropology, Development and Modernities: Exploring Discourses, Counter- references 423

tendencies and Violence, eds. Alberto Arce and N. Long, London: Routledge, 2000, pp. 184–222. ——, “Introduction: From Paradigm Lost to Paradigm Regained? The Case for an Actor-Oriented Sociology of Development,” in Battlefields of Knowledge: The Inter- locking of Theory and Practice in Social Research and Development, eds. idem and Ann Long, London: Routledge, 1992, pp. 3–46. ——, “Conclusion,” in Battlefields of Knowledge: The Interlocking of Theory and Prac- tice in Social Research and Development, eds. idem and Ann Long, London: Rout- ledge, 1992, pp. 268–277. —— with Anne Long, eds., Battlefields of Knowledge: The Interlocking of Theory and Practice in Social Research and Development, London: Routledge, 1992. Loraux, Nicole, Né de la terre: Mythe et politique à Athènes, Paris: Le Seuil, 1996. Lorcin, Patricia, Imperial Identities: Stereotyping, Prejudice and Race in Colonial Alge- ria, London: Tauris, 1995. Losch, Bruno, “La Côte d’Ivoire en quête d’un nouveau projet national,” Politique africaine 78 (2000), 5–26. Lovering, Timothy J., “Military Service, Nationalism and Race: The Experience of Malawians in the Second World War,” in The World in World Wars: Experiences, Perceptions and Perspectives from Africa and Asia, eds. Heike Liebau, Katrin Brom- ber, Katharina Lange, Dyala Hamza, Ravi Ahuja, Leiden: Brill, forthcoming. Löw, Martina, Raumsoziologie, Frankfurt a.M.: Suhrkamp, 2001. Luckmann, Thomas, “Zum hermeneutischen Problem der Handlungswissenschaften,” in Text und Applikation, eds. Malte Fuhrmann et al., München: Fink, 1991, pp. 513–523. Ludwar-Ene, Gudrun, “Sind Frauen urbaner als Männer? Eine These zum Urban- isierungsprozeß im subsaharischen Afrika,” in Ethnologische Stadtforschung: Eine Einführung, eds. Waltraud Kokot and Bettina C. Bommer, Berlin: Reimer, 1991, pp. 123–144. Luning, Sabine, “Artisanal Gold Mining in Burkina Faso: Permits, Poverty and Per- ceptions of the Poor in Sanmatenga, the ‘Land of Gold’,” in Small-Scale Mining, Rural Subsistence and Poverty in West Africa, ed. Gavin Hilson, Rugby: Intermedi- ate Technology Publications, 2006, pp. 135–147. ——, Het Binnenhalen van de Oogst: Ritueel en Samenleving in Maane, Burkina Faso, unpubl. PhD thesis, Leiden: University of Leiden, 1997. MacGaffey, Wyatt, “Changing Representations in Central African History,”Journal of African History 46, 2 (2005), 189–207. Maddens, Bart, Jaak Billiet and Roeland Beerten, “National Identity and the Attitude towards Foreigners in Multi-National States: The Case of Belgium,”Journal of Eth- nic and Migration Studies 26, 1 (2000), 45–60. Magyar, Ladislaus, Reisen in Süd-Afrika in den Jahren 1849 bis 1857, Pest: Lauffer & Stolp, 1859. Mahé, Alain, Histoire de la Grande Kabylie XIXe–XXe siècles, Paris: Bouchène, 2001. Mahmood, Saba, Politics of Piety: The Islamic Revival and the Feminist Subject, Prince- ton: Princeton University Press, 2005. Makwenda, Joyce Jenje, Zimbabwe Township Music, Harare: Storytime, 2005. Malik, Jamal, Islamische Gelehrtenkultur in Nordindien: Entwicklungsgeschichte und Tendenzen am Beispiel von Lucknow, Leiden: Brill, 1997. Malkki, Liisa, Purity and Exile: Violence, Memory, and National Cosmology among Hutu Refugees in Tanzania, Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1996. Mallmann, Klaus Michael and Martin Cüppers, Halbmond und Hakenkreuz: Das Dritte Reich, die Araber und Palästina, Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesell- schaft, 2006. Mammeri, Mouloud, La colline oubliée, Paris: Gallimard, 1957. Mandaville, Peter G., Transnational Muslim Politics: Reimagining the Umma, London: Routledge, 2001. 424 references

Manela, Erez, “Dawn of a New Era: The ‘Wilsonian Moment’ in Colonial Contests and the Transformation of World Order, 1917–1920,” in Competing Visions of World Order: Global Moments and Movements, 1880s–1930s, eds. Sebastian Conrad and Dominic Sachsenmaier, New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007, pp. 121–149. Mann, Michael, “Globalizations: An Introduction to the Spatial and Structural Net- works of Globality,” 2000, www.sscnet.ucla.edu/03F/soc197h-1/Globalizations.htm (accessed June 29, 2009). Mann, Thomas, Autobiographische Schriften, Frankfurt a.M.: Fischer Verlag, 1994 [1983]. Marcus, George E., Ethnography through Thick and Thin, Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1998. ——, “Ethnography in/of the World System: The Emergence of Multi-Sited Ethnogra- phy,” Annual Review of Anthropology 24 (1995), 95–117. Marfaing, Laurence and Steffen Wippel, eds.,Relations transsahariennes aux 20ième et 21ième siècles: Réorganisations et revitalisations d’un espace transrégional, Paris: Karthala, 2004. Marjomaa, Risto, “The Martial Spirit: Yao Soldiers in the British Service in Nyasaland, 1895–1939,” The Journal of African History 44, 3 (2003), 413–432. Markovits, Claude, The Global World of Indian Merchants, 1750–1947: Traders of Sind from Bukhara to Panama, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 2000. Marouf, Nadir, Lecture de l’espace oasien, Paris: Sindbad, 1980. Marques, Margarida M. et al., “Ariadne’s Thread: Cape Verdean Women in Transna- tional Webs,” Global Networks 1 (2001), 283–306. Marschall, Sabine, “Post-Apartheid Monuments and Cultural Tourism in South Africa,” in Tourism and Postcolonialism, eds. Michael Hall and Hazel Tucker, Lon- don: Routledge, 2004, pp. 95–112. Marsden, Magnus, Living Islam: Muslim Religious Experience in Pakistan’s North-West Frontier, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005. Martens, Albert, “Burgerschap en inburgering in België: Een stand van zaken. De caleidoscoop als perspectief. De onanie als vuistregel,” in Nieuwe burgers in de samenleving? Burgerschap en inburgering in België en Nederland, eds. Marie-Claire Foblets and Bernard Hubeau, Leuven: acco, 1997, pp. 63–72. —— with Frank Caestecker, “De algemene beleidsontwikkelingen sinds 1984,” in Komende generaties: Wat weten we (niet) over allochtonen in Vlaanderen?, eds. Jan Vranken, Christiane Timmerman and Katrien Van der Heyden, Leuven: acco, 2001, pp. 99–127. Martiniello, Marco, “The Dilemma of Separation Versus Union: The New Dynamic of Nationalist Politics in Belgium,” in Rethinking Nationalism and Ethnicity: The Struggle for Meaning and Order in Europe, ed. Hans-Rudolf Wicker, Oxford: Berg, 1997, pp. 287–301. Masqueray, Emile, Formation des cités chez les populations sédentaires de l’Algérie: Kabyles du Djurdjura, Chaouïa de l’Aourâs, Beni Mezâb, Aix-en-Provence: Édisud, 1983 [1886]. Masud, Muhammad Khalid, Travellers in Faith: Studies of the Tablighi Jama‘at as a Transnational Islamic Movement for Faith Renewal, Leiden: Brill, 2000. Matthes, Eckhard, ed., Als Russe in Ostpreußen: Sowjetische Umsiedler über ihren Neubeginn in Königsberg/Kaliningrad nach 1945, Ostfildern vor Stuttgart: edition tertium, 1999. Mauss, Marcel, “Essai sur les variations saisonnières des sociétés eskimo: Étude de morphologie sociale,” L’année sociologique 9 (1904–5), 39–132. Mazlish, Bruce and Akira Iriye, eds., The Global History Reader, London: Routledge, 2005. Mbembe, Achille and Sarah Nuttall, eds., Johannesburg: The Elusive Metropolis, Dur- ham: Duke University Press, 2004. references 425

——, “Les nouveaux Africains: Entre nativisme et cosmopolitanisme,” Esprit 10 (2002), 1–10. ——, “Ways of Seeing: Beyond the New Nativism—Introduction,” African Studies Review 44, 2 (2001), 1–14. McCaskie, Tom, Asante Identities, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2000. Meinecke, Friedrich, Cosmopolitanism and the National State, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1970. Méndez-Lago, Mónica, “Electoral Consequences of (De-)pillarization: The Cases of Austria, Belgium and the Netherlands (1945–96),” in Party Elites in Divided Soci- eties: Political Parties in Consociational Democracy, eds. Kurt R. Luther and Kris Deschouwer, London: Routledge, 1999, pp. 51–67. Metcalf, Barbara, Islamic Revival in British India: Deoband, 1860–1900, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1982. Meyer, Birgit, Translating the Devil: Religion and Modernity among the Ewe in Ghana, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1999. —— with Annelies Moors, eds., Religion, Media, and the Public Sphere, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 2006. —— with Peter Geschiere, eds., Globalization and Identity: Dialectics of Flow and Clo- sure, Oxford: Blackwell, 1999. Meynier, Gilbert, L’Algérie révélée: La guerre de 1914–1918 et le premier quart du XXe siècle, Geneva: Droz, 1981. Miller, Joseph C., ‘Way of Death’: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade 1730–1893, Madison: Wisconsin University Press, 1988. ——, Cokwe Expansion 1850–1900, (Occasional Paper) 1, Madison: University of Wis- consin, 1969. Minault, Gail, The Khilafat Movement: Religious Symbolism and Political Mobilization in India, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1982. Mir-Hosseini, Ziba, “Stretching the Limits: A Feminist Reading of the Shari’ah in Post-Khomeini Iran,” in Islam and Feminism: Legal and Literary Perspectives, ed. Mai Yamani, London: Ithaca Press, 1996. Mohamed-Salih, Mohamed A., “Pastoralist Migration to Small Towns,” in The Migra- tion Experience in Africa, eds. Jonathan Baker and Tade Akin Aina, Stockholm: Nordiska Afrikainstitutet, 1995, pp. 181–196. Moghadam, Valentine M., “Islamic Feminism and its Discontents: Towards a Resolu- tion of the Debate,” in Gender, Politics and Islam, eds. Therese Saliba, Carolyn Allen and Judith A. Howard, New Delhi: Orient Longman Press, 2002, pp. 15–52. Mohanty, Chandra Talpade, Feminism without Borders: Decolonizing Theory, Practic- ing Solidarity, Durham: Duke University Press, 2003. Molyneux, Maxine and Shahra Razavi, “Beijing plus Ten: An Ambivalent Record on Gender Justice,” Development and Change 36, 6 (2005), pp. 983–1010. ——, eds., Gender Justice, Development, and Rights, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002. Monga, Célestin, “Cercueils, orgies et sublimation: Le coût d’une mauvaise gestion de la mort,” in Afrique 2000, 21 (1995), 63–72. Montgomery, James D., “A Formalization and Test of the Religious Economies Model,” American Sociological Review 68 (2003), 782–809. Moreman, Timothy R., The Jungle, the Japanese and the British Commonwealth Armies at War, 1941–45: Fighting Methods, Doctrine and Training for Jungle Warfare, Lon- don: Frank Cass, 2005. Morokvasic, Mirjana, “Birds of Passage are also Women,” International Migration Review (special issue Women in Migration) 18 (1984), 886–907. ——, “Women in Migration: Beyond the Reductionist Outlook,” in One Way Ticket: Migration and Female Labour, ed. Annie Phizacklea, London: Routledge, 1983, pp. 13–31. 426 references

Mueller, Christine, Local Knowledge and Gender in Ghana, Bielefeld: transcript, 2005. Mugurevics, Evalds, “Ethnic Processes in Baltic Inhabited Territories and the Emer- gence of the Latvian Nation in the 6th to the 16th Century,” in Humanities and Social Sciences Latvia 3 (1997), 75–92. Mūsā, Sulaimān, Dirāsāt fī tārīḫ al-Urdun al-ḥadīt,̠ Amman: Wizārat at-t̠ aqāfa,̠ 1999. Nageeb, Salma A., “Women’s Organisations and Their Agendas in Sudan: Interfaces in Different Arenas,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lan- ham: Lexington Books, 2008, pp. 93–122. ——, “Diversified Development: Constituting Translocal Spaces through Agency,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington Books, 2008, pp. 223–266. ——, “Appropriating the Mosque: Women’s Religious Groups in Khartoum,” Afrika Spectrum 42, 1 (2007), 5–27. ——, “Empirical Findings from Sudan: Development Issues and Actors, Negotiating Development in Trans-Local Gendered Spaces: Preliminary Results,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans-local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/(de)/ agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). ——, New Spaces and Old Frontiers: Women, Social Space and Islamization in Sudan, Lanham: Lexington Books, 2004. —— with Nadine Sieveking and Anna Spiegel, “Negotiating Development: Trans- Local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies,” WP 355 (2005), www.uni-bielefeld.de/ tdrc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009) (= Report on workshop October 13–15, 2005, Univ. of Bielefeld, SDRC). Nasr, Seyyed Vali Reza, Mawdudi and the Making of Islamic Revivalism, New York: Oxford University Press, 1996. National Museum, Delhi, ed., Miniature Paintings of Rajasthan, Delhi: n.d. Ndoye, Omar, Le sexe qui rend fou: Approche clinique et thérapeutique, Paris: Présence africaine, 2003. Neate, Patrick, Where You’re at: Notes from the Front-Line of a Hip-Hop Planet, Lon- don: Bloomsbury, 2004. Nederveen Pieterse, Jan, Development Theory: Deconstructions/Reconstructions, Lon- don: Sage, 2001. Neuburger, Mary, The Orient Within: Muslim Minorities and the Negotiation of Nationhood in Modern Bulgaria, Ithaca, New York and London: Cornell University Press, 2004. Neudt, Dany and Zarhoni Younes, “Naar een radicale ommekeer van het Belgische integratieconcept?” Vlaams Marxistisch Tijdschrift 36, 3 (2002), 26–35. Neulen, Hans Werner, An deutscher Seite: Internationale Freiwillige von Wehrmacht und Waffen-SS, München: Universitas, 1985. Neves, Antonio Rodrigues, Memoria da expedição a Cassange commandada pelo major graduado Francisco de Salles Ferreira em 1850, Lisbon: Imprensa Silviana, 1854. Niezen, Ronald, The Origins of Indigenism: Human Rights and the Politics of Identity, Berkeley: University of California Press, 2003. Noor, Farish, “The Uncertain Fate of Southeast Asian Students in the Madrasas of Pakistan,” in The Madrasa in Asia: Political Activism and Transnational Linkages, eds. Farish A. Noor, Yoginder Sikand and Martin van Bruinessen, Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press, 2008, pp. 141–162. Nyairo, Joyce and James Ogude, eds., Urban Legends, Colonial Myths: Popular Culture and Literature in East Africa, Trenton: Africa World Press, 2007. Nyamnjoh, Francis and Michael Rowlands, “Elite Associations and the Politics of Belonging in Cameroon,” Africa (special issue The Politics of Primary Patriotism, eds. Peter Geschiere and Joseph Gugler) 68, 3 (1998), 320–337. references 427

Nyiri, Paland Igor Saveliev, eds., Globalizing Chinese Migration: Trends in Europe and Asia, (Research on Migration and Ethnic Relations Series), Aldershote: Ashgate, 2002. O’Fahey, Rex S., Enigmatic Saint: Ahmad Ibn Idris and the Idrisi Tradition, London: Hurst, 1990. Omar, Irfan A., “Self-Reform or Missionary Work? The Al-Risala Movement’s ‘Moral Revolution’ of the 21st Century,” Paper presented at 19th European Conference of Modern South Asian Studies, Leiden, 2006. Ong, Aihwa, Flexible Citizenship: The Cultural Logics of Transnationality, Durham: N.C.: Duke University Press, 1999. van Onselen, Charles, “Randlords and Rotgut, 1886–1903,” in Studies in the Social and Economic History of the Witwatersrand, 1886–1914, 1, New Babylon, ed. idem, Harlow: Longman, 1982. von Oppen, Achim, “L’évolution d’un programme de recherché: La ‘translocalité’ au Centre de Recherche sur l’Orient Moderne (ZMO), Berlin,” in Les relations transsahariennes à l’époque contemporaine: Un espace en constante mutation, eds. Laurence Marfaing and Steffen Wippel, Paris: Karthala-ZMO, 2004, pp. 401–414. ——, Bounding Villages: The Enclosure of Locality in Central Africa, 1890s to 1990s, unpubl. Habil. thesis, Berlin: Humboldt University of Berlin, 2003. ——, Terms of Trade and Terms of Trust: The History and Contexts of Pre-Colonial Market Production around the Upper Zambezi and Kasai, Münster: Lit, 1993. ORSTOM, Projet de recherche pluridisciplinaire sur l’orpaillage: Compte rendu de la réunion du 5/11/1991 au centre ORSTOM de Ouagadougou, 1991. Osos Casas, Laura, “Femmes, actrices des mouvements migratoires,” in Cahier genre et développement (special issue Genre, nouvelle division internationale du travail et migrations, eds. Christine Verschuur and Reysoo Fenneke) 5 (2005), 35–54. Osterhammel, Jürgen, “Transnationale Gesellschaftsgeschichte: Erweiterung oder Alter- native?” Geschichte und Gesellschaft 27 (2001), 464–479. Othman, Norani, “Introduction: Muslim Women and the Challenge of Political Islam and Islamic Extremism,” in Muslim Women and the Challenge of Islamic Extrem- ism, eds. idem and Jaya Petaling, Kualalumpur: Sisters in Islam, 2005, pp. 1–10. ——, “Islamization and Modernization in Malaysia: A Competing Cultural Reas- sertion and Women’s Identity in a Changing Society,” in Women, Ethnicity and Nationalism, eds. Rick Wilford and Robert L. Miller, London: Routledge, 1998, pp. 170–193. —— with Petaling Jaya, eds., Muslim Women and the Challenge of Islamic Extremism, Kualalumpur: Sisters in Islam, 2005. Özcan, Ertekin, Türkische Immigrantenorganisationen in der Bundesrepublik Deut- schland, Berlin: Hitit, 1989. Özdemir, Cem, ‘Deutsch oder nicht sein?’ Integration in der Bundesrepublik, Bergisch Gladbach: Lübbe, 2000. Parish, William L. and Sarah Busse, “Gender and Work,” in Chinese Urban Life Under Reform: The Changing Social Contract, eds. Wenfang Tang and William L. Parish, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000, pp. 209–231. Parker, John, “The Cultural Politics of Death and Burial in Early Colonial Accra,” in Africa’s Urban Past, eds. David Anderson and Richard Rathbone, Oxford: James Currey, 2000, pp. 205–221. Parkin, David, “Fieldwork Unfolding,” in Anthropologists in a Wider World, eds. Paul Dresch, Wendy James and David Parkin, New York: Berghahn Books, 2000, pp. 259–273. Parpart, Jane L. and Marianne H. Marchand, “Exploding the Canon: An Introduction/ Conclusion,” in Feminism/Postmodernism/Development, eds. Marianne H. Marchand and Jane L. Parpart, London: Routledge, 1999, pp. 1–22. Parsons, Timothy, “Dangerous Education? The Army as School in Colonial East Africa,” Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History 8, 1 (2000), 112–134. 428 references

——, The African Rank-and-File: Social Implications of Colonial Military Service in the King’s African Rifles, 1902–1964, Oxford: James Currey, 1999. Pearson, Michael, “Littoral Society: The Concept and the Problems,” Journal of World History 4 (2006), 353–373. Pechstein, Max, Erinnerungen, ed. Leopold Reidemeister, Stuttgart: Deutsche Verlags- Anstalt, 1993. Peleikis, Anja, “Tourism and the Making of Cultural Heritage: The Case of Nida/ Curonian Spit, Lithuania,” in Defining Region: Baltic Area Studies from Sociocul- tural Anthropology and Interdisciplinary Perspectives, eds. Rimantas Sliužinskas and Vytis Čiubrinskas, Klaipėda: Klaipėda University Press, 2006, pp. 101–114. ——, Lebanese in Motion: Gender and the Making of a Translocal Village, Bielefeld: transcript, 2003. Pelleriaux, Koen, Demotie en burgerschap: De culturele constructie van ongelijkheid in de kennismaatschappij, Brussel: VUB Press, 2001. Penrad, J.C., “La présence isma’ilienne en Afrique de l’est: Note sur l’histoire commerciale et l’organisation communautaire,” in Marchands et hommes d’affaires asiatiques dans l’Océan Indien et la Mer de Chine 13e–20e siècles, eds. Denys Lombard and Jean Aubin, Paris: Éd. de l’École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales, 1988, pp. 221–236. Pernau, Margrit, “Transkulturelle Geschichte und das Problem der universalen Begriffe Muslimische Bürger im Delhi des 19. Jahrhunderts,“ in Area Studies und die Welt: Weltregionen und neue Globalgeschichte, ed. Birgit Schäbler, Wien: Mandelbaum Verlag, 2007, pp. 117–150. ——, “The Delhi Urdu Akhbar: Between Persian Akhbarat and English Newspapers,” Annual of Urdu Studies 18 (2003), 1–27. Perullo, Alex, “Here’s a Little Something Local: An Early History of Hip-Hop in Dar es Salaam, 1984–1997,” in Dar es Salaam: Histories from an Emerging Metropolis, eds. Andrew Burton, James Brennan and Yusuf Lawi, Dar es Salaam: Mkuki na Nyola, 2007. Peters, Bernhard, “Der Sinn von Öffentlichkeit,” Kölner Zeitschrift für Soziologie und Sozialpsychologie (special issue Öffentlichkeit, öffentliche Meinung, soziale Bewegung, ed. Friedhelm Neidhardt) 34 (1994), 42–76. Pfaffenberger, Bryan, “Mining Communites, Chaînes Opératoires and Sociotechnical Systems,” in Social Approaches to an Industrial Past: The Archaeology & Anthropol- ogy of Mining, eds. A. Bernard Knapp, Vincent C. Pigott and Eugenia W. Herbert, London: Routledge, 1998, pp. 291–300. Pfeffer, Anthony, If They Don’t Bring Their Women Here: Chinese Female Emigration before Exclusion, Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1999. Phizacklea, Annie, ed., One Way Ticket: Migration and Female Labour, London: Rout- ledge, 1983. Phyllis, Martin, Leisure and Society in Colonial Brazzaville, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002. Pieke, Frank, ed., Recent Trends in Chinese Migration to Europe: Fujienese Migration in Perspective, (Migration Research Series) 6, Geneva: IOM, 2002. —— with Gregor Benton, eds., The Chinese in Europe, Basingtoke: St. Martin’s Press, 1998. Pietsch, Richard, Deutsch-kurisches Wörterbuch, Lüneburg: Nordostdeutsches Kultur- werk, 1991. Piot, Charles, Remotely Global: Village Modernity in West Africa, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999. Piper, Nicola and Mina Roces, eds., Wife or Worker? Asian Women and Migration, Oxford: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, 2003. references 429

Piper, Nicola and Prapairat R. Mix, “Does Marriage ‘Liberate’ Women from Sex Work? Thai Women in Germany,” in Wife or Worker? Asian Women and Migra- tion, eds. Nicola Piper and Mina Roces, Oxford: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, 2003, pp. 53–71. Pittin, Renée, “Migration of Women in Nigeria: The Hausa Case,” International Migration Review (special issue Women in Migration) 18 (1984), 1293–1314. Pogge, Paul, Im Reiche des Muata Jamvo, Berlin: Reimer, 1880. Poisson, Véronique, ed., Chinois de France, special issue of Hommes & Migrations 1254 (2005). ——, Franchir les frontières: Le cas des Chinois du Zhejiang en Diaspora, unpubl. PhD thesis, Paris: EHESS, 2004. Popovic, A. and G. Veinstein, eds., Les voies d’Allah: Les ordres soufis dans l’islam, Paris: Fayard, 1996. Purvinas, Martynas, “Die Vernichtung der Friedhöfe im Memelland nach 1944: Die politischen, ideologischen, sozialen, psychologischen und andere Gründe dieses Sakrilegiums,” Annaberger Annalen 8 (2000), http://jahrbuch.annaberg.de/purvinas .html (accessed June 24, 2009). Qāsimīya, Ḫairīya, ed., Mud̠akkirāt Fauzī al-Qāwuqǧī, 1: 1914–1932; 2: 1936–1948, Beirut: Dār al-Quds, 1975. Quataert, Donald, “Clothing Laws, State and Society in the Ottoman Empire, 1720– 1829,” International Journal of Middle East Studies 29 (1997), 403–425. Randeria, Shalini, “Entangled Histories of Uneven Modernities: Civil Society, Caste Solidarities and the Post-Colonial State in India,” in Unraveling Ties, eds. Yehuada Elkana et al., Frankfurt a.M. and New York: Campus, 2002, pp. 285–311. Ranger, Terence, “Myth and Legend in Urban Oral Memory: Bulawayo, 1930–1960,” Journal of Postcolonial Writing 44, 1 (2008), 77–88. ——, “City versus State in Zimbabwe: Colonial Antecedents of the Current Crisis,” Journal of East African Studies 1, 2 (2007), 161–192. ——, “The Meaning of Urban Violence in Africa: Bulawayo, Southern Rhodesia, 1890– 1960,” Cultural and Social History 3, 2 (2006), 193–228. ——, “Dignifying Death: The Politics of Burial in Bulawayo,” Journal of Religion in Africa 34, 1–2 (2004), 110–144. ——, Bulawayo Burning, Harare: Boabab, 2010. ——, “Colonialism, Consciousness and the Camera,” Past and Present 171 (2001), 203–215. ——, “Pictures Must Prevail: Sex and the Social History of African Photography in Bulawayo, 1930–1960,” Kronos (special issue Visual History) 27 (2001), 261–266. ——, “Book Review: Africa’s Urban Past,” African Affairs 99, 396 (2000), 467–469. ——, “Postscript: Colonial and Post-Colonial Identities,” in Postcolonial Identities in Africa, eds. Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, London: Zed Books, 1996, pp. 271–281. ——, Dance and Society in Eastern Africa, London: Heinemann, 1975. Rao, Aparna, “The Concept of Peripatetics: An Introduction,” in The Other Nomads: Peripatetic Minorities in Cross-Cultural Perspective, ed. idem, Cologne: Böhlau, 1987, pp. 1–32. ——, “Des nomades méconnus: Pour une typologie des communautés péripatétiques,” L’homme 95 (1985), 97–120. Reetz, Dietrich, “From Madrasa to University: The Challenges and Formats of Islamic Education,” in Handbook of Islamic Studies, eds. Akbar Ahmed and Tamara Sonn, Thousand Oaks, CA, forthcoming 2010. ——, “The ‘Faith Bureaucracy’ of the Tablighi Jama‘at: An Insight into their System of Self-Organisation (intizam),” in Colonialism, Modernity, and Religious Identi- 430 references

ties: Religious Reform Movements in South Asia, ed. Gwilym Beckerlegge, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008, pp. 98–124. ——, “Change and Stagnation in Islamic Education: The Dar al-‘Ulum of Deoband after the Split in 1982,” in The Madrasa in Asia: Political Activism and Transna- tional Linkages, eds. Farish A. Noor, Yoginder Sikand and Martin van Bruinessen, Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press, 2008, pp. 71–104. ——, “The Deoband Universe: What Makes a Transcultural and Transnational Edu- cational Movement of Islam?” Comparative Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East 27, 1 (2007), 139–159. ——, Islam in the Public Sphere: Religious Groups in India 1900–1947, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2006. ——, “Sufi Spirituality Fires Reformist Zeal: The Tablighi Jamaa‘t in Today’s India and Pakistan,” Archives de Sciences Sociales des Religions 135 (2006), 33–52. ——, “Aktuelle Analysen islamistischer Bewegungen und ihre Kritik,“ Forschungsjour- nal Neue Soziale Bewegungen 17, 4 (2004), 61–68. ——, “Keeping Busy on the Path of Allah: The Self-Organisation (intizam) of the Tablighi Jama‘at,” Oriente Moderno 23, 1 (2004), 295–305. ——, ed., Sendungsbewußtsein oder Eigennutz: Zu Motivation und Selbstverständnis islamischer Mobilisierung, Berlin: Das Arabische Buch, 2001. ——, “Kenntnisreich und unerbittlich: Der sunnitische Radikalismus der Ahl-i Hadith in Südasien,” in Sendungsbewußtsein oder Eigennutz: Zu Motivation und Selbstver- ständnis islamischer Mobilisierung, ed. idem, Berlin: Das Arabische Buch, 2001, pp. 79–106. —— with Bettina Dennerlein, eds., South-South Linkages in Islam, special issue of Contemporary Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East 27, 1 (2007). Renard, John, Historical Dictionary of Sufism, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2005. République du Sénégal, Senegalese Women by the Year 2015, abridged version (coordinated by Fatou Sow, and Mamadou Diouf), Dakar: Ministère de la Femme de l’Enfant et de la Famille, Population Council, 1993. ——, Document de Stratégie de Réduction de la Pauvreté, Dakar, 2002. République du Sénégal: Stratégie Nationale pour l’Égalité et l’Équité de Genre au Séné- gal: SNEEG 2015, Dakar: Fond des Nations Unies pour la Population (UNFPA/ Sénégal), 2005. Rheinisches Journalist Innenbüro, Recherche International e.V., “Unsere Opfer zählen nicht”: Die Dritte Welt im Zweiten Weltkrieg, Berlin: Assoziation A, 2005. Riccio, Bruno, “ ‘Transmigrant’ mais pas ‘nomades’,” Cahiers d’études africaines 46 (2006), 95–114. Richards, John F., The Mughal Empire, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1993. Riedler, Florian, “Public People: Seasonal Work Migrants in Nineteenth Century Istanbul,” in Public Istanbul: Spaces and Spheres of the Urban, eds. F. Eckardt and K. Wildner, Bielefeld: transcript, 2008, pp. 233–253. Riexinger, Martin, “How Favourable is Puritan Islam to Modernity? A Study of the Ahl-i Hadīs ̣ in Late Nineteenth/Early Twentieth Century South Asia,” in Colo- nialism, Modernity, and Religious Identities: Religious Reform Movements in South Asia, ed. Gwilym Beckerlegge, New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2008, pp. 147–165. ——, Sanaullah Amritsari (1868–1948) und die Ahl-i-Hadis im Punjab unter britischer Herrschaft, Würzburg: Ergon, 2004. ——, South Asian Islam: Worldwide Movements and Organisations Centered in South Asia, Collection of Internet links, n.d., http://wwwuser.gwdg.de/~mriexin/sasislam. html (accessed November 11, 2008). Rinn, Louis, Marabouts et Khouan: Etude sur l’Islam en Algérie, Algiers: Jourdan, 1884. references 431

Rizvi, Saiyid Athar Abbas, Shah Abd al-Aziz: Puritanism, Sectarian, Polemics and Jihad, Canberra: Marifat, 1982. ——, Shah Wali Ullah and His Time, Canberra: Marifat, 1980. Robertson, Roland, “Glocalization: Time-Space and Homogeneity-Heterogeneity,” in Global Modernities, eds. Mike Featherstone, Scott Lash and Robert Robertson, London: Sage, 1995, pp. 25–44. Robinson, Jennifer, Ordinary Cities: Between Modernity and Development, London: Routledge, 2006. Rocca, Jean-Louis, La Condition chinoise: Capitalisme, mise au travail et résistances dans la Chine des réformes, Paris: Karthala, 2006. Roitman, Janet, Fiscal Disobedience: An Anthropology of Economic Regulation in Cen- tral Africa, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2005. Roopnaraine, T., “Symbolising Value: Culture and Economy among Guyanese Gold and Diamond Miners,” Cambridge Anthropology 19, 3 (1996), 22–42. Rosander, Eva Evers and David Westerlund, eds., African Islam and Islam in Africa: Encounters between Sufis and Islamists, London: Hurst and Co, 1997. Rosenthal, Gabriele, “Methodologische Implikationen,” in Erlebte und erzählte Lebens- geschichte: Gestalt und Struktur biographischer Selbstbeschreibungen, ed. Gabriele Rosenthal, Frankfurt a.M.: Campus-Verlag, 1995, pp. 186–226. Rubio-Marin, Ruth, Immigration as a Democratic Challenge: Citizenship and Inclu- sion in Germany and the United States, Cambridge, Mass.: Cambridge University Press, 2000. Ryan, Jan, “Chinese Women as Transnational Migrants: Gender and Class in Global Migration Narratives,” International Migration 40 (2002), 93–114. as-Ṣ abbāg̣ ̇, Sulaimān ʿAlī, Mud̠akkirāt ḍābit ̣ ʿarabī bi-ǧaiš al-intidāb al-firansī, ed. Ibrāhīm as-Ṣ abbāg̣ ̇, [Damaskus: Matbạ ʿat Karam], n.d. [1978]. Safi, Omid, Progressive Muslims: On Justice, Gender and Pluralism, Oxford: Oneworld, 2003. Salaff, W. Janet, W. Salaff and Arent Greve, “Family Role as Social Capital: Chinese Women Abroad,” in Chinese Women and their Cultural and Networks Capitals, ed. Khun Eng Kuah-Pearce, Asian Women and Society Series, Singapore: Marchall Cavendish International, 2004, pp. 70–100. Salvatore, Armando, “The Problem of the Ingraining of Civilization Traditions into Social Governance,” in Muslim Traditions and Modern Techniques of Power, ed. idem, Yearbook for the Sociology of Islam 3, Münster: Lit, 2001, pp. 9–42. ——, Islam and the Political Discourse of Modernity, Reading: Ithaca Press, 1997. —— with Dale F. Eickelman, eds., Public Islam and the Common Good, Leiden: Brill, 2004. Samuelson, Meg, “Yvonne Vera’s Bulawayo: Modernity, (Im)mobility, Music and Memory,” Research in African Literatures 38, 2 (2007), 22–35. Sakr, Naomi, Satellite Realms: Transnational Television, Globalization and the Middle East, London and New York: Tauris, 2001. ——, Arab Television Today, London: Tauris, 2007. Santos, Maria Emília Madeira, Capelo e Ivens, um fecho europeu para uma tradição nacional, (Série Separatas) 184, Lisbon: Junta de Investigações Científicas do Ultra- mar, 1987. ——, Viagens de exploração terrestre dos portugueses em África, 1978; repr. Lisbon: Centro de Estudos de História e Cartografia Antiga, 1988. ——, Nos Caminhos de África: Serventia e Posse. Angola Século XIX, Lisbon: Instituto de Investigação Científica Tropical, 1998. Sanyal, Usha, Devotional Islam and Politics in British India: Ahmed Riza Khan Barelvi and his Movement, 1870–1920, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1996. aš-Šaraʿ, Sāliḥ ̣, Mud̠akkirāt Gundī̌ , [Amman]: [Matbạ ʿat aš-Šarq wa-Maktabatuhā], 1985. 432 references

Sarasin, Philipp, “Diskurstheorie und Geschichtswissenschaft,” in Handbuch Sozial- wissenschaftliche Diskursanalyse, 1, Opladen: Leske + Budrich, 2001, pp. 53–79. Sauer, Martina, “Perspektiven des Zusammenlebens: Die Integration türkischstäm- miger Migrantinnen und Migranten in Nordrhein-Westfalen,” Essen: Zentrum für Türkeiforschung, 2007, http://www.zft-online.de/index.php?site=31 (accessed May 2, 2008). Scharlipp, Wolfgang, “Aufmachung, Inhalt und Sprache türkischer Tageszeitungen in Deutschland,” in Begegnung mit Türken: Begegnung mit dem Islam, eds. Hans- Jürgen Brandt and Claus-Peter Haase, Hamburg: ebv Rissen, 1984, pp. 213–221. Scheele, Judith, “Recycling baraka: Knowledge, Politics and Religion in Contemporary Algeria,” Contemporary Studies in Society and History 49, 2 (2008), 304–328. ——, Village Matters: Politics, Knowledge and Community in Kabylia (Algeria), Oxford: James Currey, 2008. ——, “Al-Waghlîsî à travers le monde,” in Actes du colloque autour ‘Abd al-Rahmân al-Waghlîsî, tenu à Béjaïa du 13 au 15 octobre 2004, eds. Djamil Aissani and Judith Scheele, Algiers: Ministère des affaires religieuses, 2008, pp. 106–117. ——, “Generating Martyrdom: Forgetting the War in Contemporary Algeria,” Studies in Ethnicity and Nationalism 6, 2 (2006), 180–194. Schefold, Reimar, “Vision of the Wilderness on Siberut in a Comparative Southeast Asian Perspective,” in Tribal Communities in the Malay World, eds. Geoffrey Benjamin and Cynthia Chou, Singapore: Inst. for Southeast Asian Studies, 2001, pp. 422–437. Scheler, Max and Maria Scheler, Der Formalismus in der Ethik und die materiale Wertethik, Bern: Francke, 1966. Schicho, Walter, “Die französische Kolonisierung der Inseln im Indischen Ozean: Der Mythos vom Glück und der leichten Liebe,” in Der Indische Ozean: Das afro- asiatische Mittelmeer als Kultur- und Wirtschaftsraum, eds. Dietmar Rothermund and Susanne Weigelin-Schwiedrzik, Wien: Promedia, 2004, pp. 227–246. Schiffauer, Werner, “Cosmopolitans are Cosmopolitans: On the Relevance of Local Identification in Globalizing Society,” in Worlds on the Move: Globalization, Migra- tion, and Cultural Security, eds. Friedman, Jonathan and Shalini Randeria, London: I.B. Tauris, 2004, pp. 91–101. ——, Die Migranten aus Subay: Türken in Deutschland. Eine Ethnographie, Stuttgart: Klett-Cotta, 1991. Schlee, Guenther, “Mobile Forschung bei mehreren Ethnien: Kamelnomaden Nordke- nias,” in Feldforschungen: Berichte zur Einführung in Probleme und Methoden, ed. Hans Fischer, Berlin: Reimer, 1985, pp. 203–218. Schmitz, Barbara, ed., After the Great Mughals: Painting in Delhi and the Regional Courts in the 18th and 19th Centuries, Mumbai: Marg Publications, 2002. Schmitz, Jean, “Des migrants aux «notables» urbains: Les communautés transnationales des gens du fleuve Sénégal (Sénégal/Mali/Mauritanie),” inLes nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, Paris: Karthala, 2007, pp. 91–134. Schmoll, Camille, “Pratiques spatiales transnationales et stratégies de mobilité des commercantes tunisiennes,” Revue européenne des migrations internationales 21 (2005), 131–154. ——, “Cosmopolitisme au quotidien et circulations commerciales à Naples,” Cahiers de la Méditerranée 67 (2003), 345–360. Schönberg-Lothholz, Ingeborg, “Die Karawanenreisen der Tjiaka um 1900,” Estudos Etnográficos I, Memórias e Trabalhos do Instituto de Investigação Científica de Angola 2 (1960), 109–128. Schönfeld, Anne, “Islamdebatten in der deutschen Öffentlichkeit,” unpubl. MA thesis, Berlin: Freie Universität Berlin, 2008. Schubert, Gabriella, Kleidung als Zeichen: Kopfbedeckungen im Donau-Balkan-Raum, Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 1993. references 433

Schuetz, Alfred and Thomas Luckmann, The Structures of the Life-World, Evanston, Ill.: Northwestern University Press, 1973. Schultz, Ulrike, “Report on the Summer School “Perspectives of Feminism and Politics of Identity in Africa: Finding a Common Ground, 27 August–7 September 2007,” Usmanu Danfodiyo University Sokoto, Nigeria, Free University Berlin, http://userpage.fu-berlin.de/Sokoto/ (accessed March 1, 2008). ——, “ ‘One Day We Will Return Home’: Turkana Women Migration and Remigra- tion,” in Women and Migration: Anthropological Perspectives, eds. Jacqueline Knörr and Barbara Meier, Frankfurt a.M.: Campus, 2000, pp. 164-180. ——, Nomadenfrauen in der Stadt: Die Überlebensökonomie der Turkanafrauen, Berlin: Reimer, 1996. Schulze, Reinhard, Islamischer Internationalismus im 20. Jahrhundert: Untersuchun- gen zur Geschichte der Islamischen Weltliga, Leiden: Brill, 1990. Schumann, Christoph, “The Turkish Press in Germany: A Public in-between two Publics?” in Islam and Muslims in Germany, eds. Ala al-Hamarneh and Jörn Thiel- mann, Minorities in Europe 7, Leiden: Brill, 2008, pp. 441–461. ——, “Integration aus Sicht von Muslimen in Deutschland,” in Integration von Musli- men, eds. Petra Bendel and Mathias Hildebrandt, Schriftenreihe des Zentralinstituts für Regionalforschung 1, München: Allitera-Verlag, 2006, pp. 53–75. Schütt, Otto H., “Bericht über die Reise von Malange zum Luba-Häuptling Mai, und zurück, Juli 1878 bis Mai 1879,” Mittheilungen der Afrikanischen Gesellschaft 1 (1878–1879), 173–207. ——, Reisen im südwestlichen Becken des Congo (based on the traveller’s diaries and records), ed. Paul Lindenberg, Berlin: Reimer, 1881. ——, “Im Reich der Bangala,” Das Ausland 54 (1881), 381–384. Sedgwick, Mark J., Sufism: The Essentials, Cairo: American University in Cairo Press, 2003. Selden, Mark, “Families Strategies and Structures in Rural North China,” in Chinese Families in the Post Mao Era, eds. Deborah Davis and Harrell Stevan, Harrell, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993, pp. 139–164. Şen, Faruk, and Andreas Goldberg, Türken in Deutschland: Leben zwischen zwei Kul- turen, München: Beck, 1994. ——, Türkische Arbeitnehmergesellschaften: Gründung, Struktur und wirtschaftliche Funktion der türkischen Arbeitnehmergesellschaften in der Bundesrepublik Deutsch- land für die sozioökonomische Lage der Türkei, Frankfurt a.M.: Lang, 1980. Seydou, Christiane, Dictionaire pluridialectale des racines verbales du peul, Paris: Karthala, 1998. Shackley, Myra, ed., Visitor Management: Case Studies from World Heritage Sites, London: Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd, 1998. Sharar, Abdul Halim, Lucknow: The Last Phase of an Oriental Culture, trans. and eds. E.S. Harcourt and Fakhir Hussain, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1994. Shaw, Martin, Theory of the Global State: Globality as Unfinished Revolution, Oxford: Cambridge University Press, 2000. Shinar, P. and Werner Ende, “Salafiyya,” in Encyclopaedia of Islam 2, 8, Brill: Leiden, 1995, pp. 900–909. Sidahmed, Abdel Salam, Islamic Fundamentalism, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press, 1996. Sieveking, Nadine, “Women’s Organisations Creating Social Space in Senegal,” in Nego- tiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 37–66. ——, “Negotiating Women’s Rights from Multiple Perspectives: The Campaign for the Reform of the Family Law in Senegal,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 145–170. 434 references

——, Country Report Senegal, unpubl. paper, Univ. Bielefeld, Sociology, Transnation- alisation and Development Research Centre, 2006. ——, “Negotiating Development in Senegal: Women Organisations, Issues and Strategies,” Paper presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans- local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www .uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). Sikand, Yoginder, “Stoking the Flames: Intra-Muslim Rivalries in India and the Saudi Connection,” Comparative Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East 27, 1 (2007), 95–108. Simon, David, Urbanisation, Globalisation and Economic Crisis in Africa, London: University of London, 1994. Simone, AbdouMaliq, “Between Ghetto and Globe: Remaking Urban Life in Africa,” in Associational Life in African Cites: Popular Response to the Urban Crisis, eds. Arne Tostensen, Inge Tvedten and Mariken Vaa, Uppsala: Nordiska Afrikainstitutet, 2001, pp. 46–63. ——, “On the Worlding of African Cities,” African Studies Review 44, 2 (2001), 15–43. Simpson, Edward and Kai Kresse, eds., Struggling with History: Islam and Cosmopoli- tanism in the Western Indian Ocean, London: Hurst, 2007. Sing, Manfred, Progressiver Islam in Theorie und Praxis: Die interne Kritik am hegemonialen islamischen Diskurs durch den „roten Scheich“ ‘Abdâllah al-‘Alâyilî (1914– 1996), Würzburg: Ergon, 2007. Siyâlkotî,̣ Muḥammad Ibrâhîm Mîr, Tarîkh-e ahl-i ḥadîth (Urdu: History of the ‘Peo- ple of the Traditions’), Sargodha: Maktaba-ur-Raḥman, 1953. Smith, Graham, ed., The Nationalities Question in the Post-Soviet States, London: Longman, 1996. —— with Vivien Law, Andrew Wilson, Annette Bohr and Edward Allworth, Nation- building in the Post-Soviet Borderlands: The Politics of National Identities, Cam- bridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998. Soares, Benjamin F. and René Otayek, Islam and Muslim Politics in Africa, New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007. Socpa, Antoine, Démocratisation et autochtonie au Cameroun: Variations régionales divergentes, Münster: Lit, 2003. Soeffner, Hans-Georg, “Social Scientific Hermeneutics,” in A Companion to Quali- tative Research, eds. Uwe Flick, Ernst Kardoff and Ines Steinke, London: Sage, 2004. Sow, Fatou, “Fundamentalisms, Globalisation and Women’s Human Rights in Sen- egal,” Gender and Development 11, 1 (2003), 69–76. Soysal, Yasemin Nuhoglu, Limits of Citizenship: Migrants and Post-National Member- ship in Europe, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994. Speitkamp, Winfried, “Grenzen der Hybridisierung? Symboltransfer in postkolonialen Staaten Afrikas,” in Kommunikationsräume—Erinnerungsräume: Beiträge zur transkulturellen Begegnung in Afrika, ed. Winfried Speitkamp, München: Martin Meiden- bauer, 2005, pp. 277–290. Spellman, Kathryn, Religion and Nation: Iranian Local and Transnational Networks in Britain, New York: Berghahn, 2004. Sperling, Louise and John G. Galaty, “Cattle, Culture, and Economy: Dynamics in East Africa,” in The World of Pastoralism: Herding Systems in Comparative Perspective, eds. John G. Galaty and Douglas L. Johnson, New York: Guilford, 1990, pp. 69–98. Spiegel, Anna, “Women’s Organisations and Social Transformation in Malaysia: Between Social Work and Legal Reforms,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 67–92. references 435

——, “Negotiating Women’s Rights in a Translocal Space: Women’s Organisations and Networking in Malaysia,” in Negotiating Development in Muslim Societies: Gendered Spaces and Translocal Connections, eds. Gudrun Lachenmann and Petra Dannecker, Lanham: Lexington, 2008, pp. 171–193. ——, Striving for Social Change in Translocal Spaces: Female Activism in Islamis- ing Malaysia, unpubl. PhD thesis, Bielefeld: Faculty of Sociology, University of Bielefeld, 2008. ——, “Public Spheres, Public Islam, and Modernities,” WP 347 (2005), www.uni- bielefeld/trdc/(de)/agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). ——, “Women’s Organisations and their Agendas: Empirical Findings from Malaysia, Women’s Movement and Trans-Local Networking in Malaysia,” Papers presented at the workshop “Negotiating Development: Trans-Local Gendered Spaces in Muslim Societies”, Bielefeld, October 13–15, 2005, www.uni-bielefeld.de/tdrc(de)/ agsozanth/publications/workingpaper (accessed May 22, 2009). Spyer, Patricia, The Memory of Trade: Modernity’s Entanglements on an Eastern Indo- nesian Island, Durham: Duke University Press, 2000. ——, The Memory of Trade: Circulation, Autochthony and the Past in the Aru Islands (Eastern Indonesia), unpubl. PhD thesis, Chicago: University of Chicago, 1992. Stauth, Georg, Politics and Cultures of Islamization in Southeast Asia: Indonesia and Malaysia in the Nineteen-Nineties, Bielefeld: transcript, 2002. ——, “Islam and Modernity: The Long Shadow of Max Weber,” in Islam, a Motor or Challenge of Modernity, ed. idem, Yearbook of the Sociology of Islam 1, Münster: Lit, 1998. ——, “Globalisierung, Modernität, nicht-westliche Zivilisationen,” in Kleine Staaten in großer Gesellschaft, eds. Josef Langer and Wolfgang Pöllauer, Eisenstadt: Verl. f. Soziologie u. Humanethologie, 1995, pp. 89–107. —— with Helmut Buchholt, eds., Investigating the South-South-Dimension of Moder- nity and Islam Circulating Visions and Ideas, Intellectual Figures, Locations, (Year- book of the Sociology of Islam) 2, Münster: Lit, 2000. Stenberg, Leif, The Islamization of Science: Four Muslim Positions Developing an Islamic Modernity, (Lund Studies in History of Religions) 6, Lund: Religionshisto- riska avdelningen, Lunds universitet, 1996. Stenning, Derrick, Savannah Nomads, London: Oxford University Press, 1959. Steppat, Fritz, and Thomas Scheffler, Islam als Partner: Islamkundliche Aufsätze 1944– 1996, (Beiruter Texte und Studien) 78, Würzburg: Ergon Verlag, 2001. Stouthuysen, Patrick and Christian Deschouwer, “Verzuilen om te integreren? Kant- tekeningen bij een gedachtenexperiment,” in Over pluralisme en democratie: Ver- zuiling en integratie in een multiculturele samenleving, ed. Frank Demeyere, Brussels: VUB Press, 1993, pp. 51–58. Strakauskaitė, Nijolė, The Curonian Spit: The Old European Postal Road, Vilnius: Ver- sus Aureus, 2004. Strauss, Anselm, Qualitative Analysis for Social Scientists, Cambridge: Cambridge Uni- versity Press, 1987. —— with Juliet Corbin, Basics of Qualitative Research: Techniques and Procedures for Developing Grounded Theory, Thousand Oaks: Sage, 1998. Subrahmanyam, Sanjay, “Dreaming an Indo-Persian Empire in South Asia, 1740– 1800,” in Explorations in Connected History: Mughals and Franks, ed. Sanjay Sub- rahmanyam, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2005, pp. 173–210. Sultan, Talat, “The Role of Islamic Universities in the Islamization of Education,” Muslim Education Quarterly 14, 3 (1997), 57–63. Suret-Canale, Jean, Afrique noire occidentale et centrale II: L’Ere coloniale 1900–1945, Paris: Éditions socials, 1964. 436 references

Swyngedouw, Marc, “Anvers: Une ville à la portée du Vlaams Blok,” in L’extrême droite en France et en Belgique, eds. Pascal Delwit, Jean-Michel De Waele, and Andrea Rea, Brussels: Éditions Complexe, 1998, pp. 291–314. ——, “Verkiezingen in Antwerpen: Het Vlaams Blok, Islamitische minderheden en kansarmoede,“ Tijdschrift voor sociologie 5/6 (1990), 401–429. Taher, Mohamed, Sufism: Evolution and Practice, (Encyclopaedic Survey of Islamic Culture) 7, New Delhi: Anmol Publications, 1997/98. Tarrius, Alain, Les nouveaux cosmopolitismes: Mobilités, identités, territoires, Paris: Editions de l’aube, 2000. Taylor, Vivienne, Marketisation of Governance: Critical Feminist Perspectives from the South. DAWN Development Alternatives with Women for a New Era, Cape Town: SADEP, University of Cape Town, 2000. Tayob, Abdulkader, “Modern Islamic Intellectual History in Comparative Perspec- tive,” ISIM Review 17, 40 (2006), 63. Teherani-Kroenner, Parto and Brigitte Woerteler, eds., Gender Research and Network- ing: You Can’t Clap with One Hand, 1, Gender Studies, Herbolzheim: Centaurus, 2008. The Delhi Sketchbook, vol. 1 (1850). Thornton, Robert, “The Potentials of Boundaries in South Africa: Steps towards a The- ory of the Social Edge,” in Postcolonial Identities in Africa, eds. Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, London: Zed, 1996. Thornton, John K., “The Origins and Early History of the Kingdom of Kongo, c. 1350– 1550,” International Journal of African Historical Studies 34, 1 (2001), 89–120. Tienda, Marta and Karen Booth, “Gender, Migration and Social Change,” Interna- tional Sociology 6 (1991), 51–72. Tiesler, Nina Clara, Muslime in Europa: Religion und Identitätspolitiken unter verän- derten gesellschaftlichen Verhältnissen, (Politik & Kultur) 8, Münster: Lit, 2006. Tostensen, Arne, Inge Tvedten and Mariken Vaa, “The Urban Crisis, Governance and Associational Life,” in Associational Life in African Cites: Popular Response to the Urban Crisis, eds. Arne Tostensen, Inge Tvedten and Mariken Vaa, Uppsala: Nor- diska Afrikainstitutet, 2001, pp. 7–26. Touati, Houari, “Essor et fonction du saint homme,” Peuples méditerranéens 52, 3 (1990), 145–154. Triaud, Jean-Louis, “‘Haut-Sénégal-Niger’, un modèle positiviste? De la coutume à l’histoire: Maurice Delafosse et l’invention de l’histoire africaine,” in Maurice Dela- fosse—Entre orientalisme et ethnographie: Itinéraire d’un africaniste (1870–1926), eds. Jean-Loup Amselle and Emmanuelle Sibeud, Paris: Maisonneuve, 1998, pp. 210–233. Tripp, Ali Mari, “Transnational Feminism, Regional Networking and Women’s Politi- cal Representation in Africa,” Feminist Africa 4 (2005), http://www.feministafrica .org/index.php/regional-networking (accessed July 5, 2009). Trousset, Pol, “L’idée de la frontière au Sahara et les données archéologiques,” in Enjeux sahariens, ed. Pierre-Robert Baduel, Paris: Editions du CNRS, 1984, pp. 47–78. Trumelet, Corneille, Les saints de l’islam: Légendes hagiologiques et croyances algéri- ennes, Paris: Didier, 1881. Turino, Thomas, Nationalists, Cosmopolitans and Popular Music in Zimbabwe, Chi- cago: University of Chicago Press, 2000. Turnbull, David, “Cartography and Science in Early Modern Europe: Mapping the Construction of Knowledge Spaces,” Imago Mundi 48 (1996), 5–24. UNFAP, Vers l’espoir: Les femmes et la migration internationale, Annual Report, Genève, 2006, http://www.unfpa.org/about/report/2006/french/pdf/unfpa_ar2006_ fre.pdf (accessed October 20, 2008). references 437

UNRISD, Gender Equality: Striving for Justice in an Unequal World, Geneva, 2005, http://www.unrisd.org/ (accessed October 20, 2008). Urvoy, Dominique, “Effets pervers du hajj, d’après le cas d’al-Andalus,” inGolden Roads: Migration, Pilgrimage and Travel in Mediaeval and Modern Islam, ed. Ian Richard Netton, Richmond: Curzon Press, 1993, pp. 43–56. Vakil, Abdool Karim, “Do Outro ao Diverso: Islão e Muçulmanos em Portugal: História, discursos, Identidades,” Revista Lusófona de Ciência das Religiões 3, 5/6 (2004), 283–312, http://cienciareligioes.ulusofona.pt/arquivo_religioes/religioes5_6/ pdf/283–312Vakil.pdf (accessed October 4, 2008). Valentine, Simon Ross, Islam and the Ahmadiyya jama‘at: History, Belief, Practice, New York: Columbia University Press, 2008. Vansina, Jan, “La fondation du royaume de Kassanje,” Aequatoria 25, 2 (1962), 45–62. ——, “Government in Kasai before the Lunda,” International Journal of African His- torical Studies 31, 1 (1998), 1–22. ——, “It Never Happened: Kinguri’s Exodus and its Consequences,” History in Africa 25 (1998), 387–403. ——, “Du nouveau sur la conquête lunda au Kwango,” Congo Afrique 341 (2000), 45–58. ——, How Societies are Born: Governance in West Central Africa before 1600, Charlot- tesville: University of Virginia Press, 2004. Veller, Auguste, Monographie de la Commune mixte de Sidi Aïch, Paris: Ibis Presse, 2004 [1888]. Vellut, Jean-Luc, “Notes sur le Lunda et la frontière luso-africaine (1700–1900),” Etudes d’Histoire africaine 3 (1972), 61–166. Vera, Yvonne, Butterfly Burning, New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1998. ——, “Introduction,” in Thatha Camera: The Pursuit of Reality, Bulawayo: National Galery Bulawayo, 1999. Verhoeven, Marie, “Minorité musulmane en ville,” in Facettes de l’Islam belge, ed. Felice Dasetto, Lou-vain-la-Neuve: Bruylant-Academia, 1997, pp. 123–139. Verschuur, Christine, and Reysoo Fenneke, eds., Genre, nouvelle division internationale du travail et migrations, special issue of Cahier genre et développement 5 (2005). Vidal, Claudine, Sociologie des Passions: Rwanda, Côte d’Ivoire, Paris: Karthala, 1991. Vink, Markus P.M. “Indian Ocean Studies and the ‘New Thalassology’,”Journal of Global History 2, 2 (2007), 52–58. Viti, Fabio, “Dans un ‘chaos des races’: Note sur Maurice Delafosse, administrateur des Anno-Mango (Côte d’Ivoire, 1904–1906),” in Maurice Delafosse—Entre orientalisme et ethnographie: Itinéraire d’un africaniste (1870–1926), eds. Jean-Loup Amselle and Emmanuelle Sibeud, Paris: Maisonneuve, 1998, pp. 49–65. Voll, John, “Islam as a Special World System,” Journal of World History 5, 2 (1994), 213–226. Wallerstein, Immanuel, The Modern World System, 3 vols., San Diego: Acad. Press, 1974, 1980, 1989. Wang, Xingjuan, “Domestic Violence in China,” in Holding up Half the Sky: Chinese Women, Past, Present, Future, eds. Jie Tao, Bijun Zheng, and Shirley Mow, New York: Feminist Press, 2004, pp. 179–192. Warren, James Francis, Ah Ku and Karayaki-san: Prostitution in Singapore 1870–1940, Singapore: Oxford University Press, 1993. al-Wartîlânî, al-Husayn, Nuzhat al-ansâr fî fadl ‘ilm al-târîkh wa-l-akhbâr, Algiers: Bencheneb Editions, 1908. Weber, Eugen, Peasants into Frenchmen: The Modernization of Rural France, 1870– 1914, Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1976. 438 references

Wellman, Barry and Barry Leighton, “Networks, Neighborhoods, and Communities: Approaches to the Study of the Community Question,” Urban Affairs Quarterly 14, 3 (1979), 363–390. Werbner, Richard, “Introduction: Multiple Identities, Plural Arenas,” in Postcolonial Identities in Africa, eds. Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, London: Zed Books, 1996, pp. 1–25. —— with Terrence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa, London: Zed Books, 1996. Werner, Michael and Bénédicte Zimmermann, “Beyond Comparison: Histoire Croi- sée and the Challenge of Reflexivity,” History and Theory 45 (2006), 30–50. ——, eds., De la comparaison à l’histoire croisée, (Le Genre humain) 42, Paris: Seuil, 2004, pp. 15–49. Werthmann, Katja, “Frivolous Squandering: Consumption and Redistribtion in Min- ing Camps,” in Dilemmas of Development: Conflicts of Interest and their Resolutions in Modernizing Africa, eds. Jon Abbink and André van Dokkum, Leiden: Brill, 2008, pp. 60–76. ——, “Dans un monde masculin: Le travail des femmes dans un camp de chercheurs d’or au Burkina Faso,” in Les nouveaux urbains dans l’espace Sahara-Sahel: Un cosmopolitisme par le bas, eds. Elisabeth Boesen and Laurence Marfaing, Paris: Karthala, 2007, pp. 297–324. ——, “Gold Diggers, Earth Priests, and District Heads: Land Rights and Gold Mining in South-Western Burkina Faso,” in Landrights and the Politics of Belonging in West Africa, eds. Richard Kuba and Carola Lentz, Leiden: Brill, 2005, pp. 119–136. ——, “The President of the Gold Diggers: Sources of Power in a Gold Mine in Burkina Faso,” Ethnos 68, 1 (2003), 95–111. ——, Bitteres Gold: Historische, soziale und kulturelle Aspekte des nicht-industriellen Goldbergbaus in Westafrika, unpubl. Habil. thesis, Mainz: Johannes Gutenberg- University, 2003. ——, “Gold Rush in West Africa: The Appropriation of ‘Natural’ Resources: Non- industrial Gold Mining in Burkina Faso,” Sociologus 50, 1 (2000), 90–104. —— with Tilo Grätz and Hans Peter Hahn, “Mobilität in Afrika: Multilokale Feld- forschungen. Editorial,” in Mobilität in Afrika, eds. Katja Werthmann, Tilo Grätz and Hans Peter Hahn, special issue of Afrika Spectrum 3 (2004), 325–333. West, Michael, The Rise of an African Middle Class: Colonial Zimbabwe, 1898–1965, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 2002. Westerlund, David, “Ahmed Deedat’s Theology of Religion: Apologetics through Polemics,” Journal of Religion in Africa 33, 3 (2003), 263–278. Wette, Wolfgang, ed., Der Krieg des kleinen Mannes: Eine Militärgeschichte von unten, 2nd ed., München: Piper, 1995. White, Luise, “Work, Clothes and Talk in Eastern Africa,” in African Historians and African Voices, ed. Atieno Odhiambo, Basel: Schlettwein, 2001, pp. 69–74. White, Cynthia, “The Effect of Poverty on Risk Reduction Strategies of the Fulani Nomads in Niger,” Nomadic Peoples N.S. 1 (1997), 90–107. White, Thyrene, “Domination, Resistance and Accomodation in China’s One-Child Policy,” in Chinese Society: Change, Conflict and Resistance, eds. Elisabeth J. Perry and Mark Selden, London: Routledge Curzon, 2003, pp. 183–203. Wichterich, Christa, “Strategische Verschwisterung, multiple Feminismen und die Glokalisierung der Frauenbewegungen,” in Frauenbewegungen weltweit: Aufbrüche, Kontinuitäten, Veränderungen, eds. Ilse Lenz, Michiko Mae and Karin Klose, Opladen: Leske + Budrich, 2000, pp. 257–280. Wienia, Martijn, The Stranger Owns the Land but the Land is for Us: The Politics of a Religious Landscape in Nanun, N.Ghana, Leiden: Inst. for Social and Cultural Studies, 2003. references 439

Wiktorowitz, Quintan, “The New Global Threat: Transnational Salafis and Jihad,” Middle East Policy 3, 4 (2001), 18–38. Willame, Jean-Claude, Banyarwanda et Banyamulenge: Violences ethniques et gestion de l’identitaire au Kivu, Paris: L’Harmattan, 1997. Wilson, Kathleen, ed., A New Imperial History: Culture, Identity and Modernity in Brit- ain and the Empire, 1660–1840, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2004. Wingert, Lutz and Klaus Günther, eds., Die Öffentlichkeit der Vernunft und die Vernunft der Öffentlichkeit: Festschrift für Jürgen Habermas, Frankfurt a.M.: Suhrkamp, 2001. Wissmann, Hermann von, Ludwig Wolf, Curt von François and Hans Müller, Im Innern Afrikas: Die Erforschung des Kassai während der Jahre 1883, 1884 und 1885; Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus, 1888, repr. 1891. Wolf, Eric, “Inventing Society,” American Ethnologist 15 (1988), 752–761. Wolff, Janet, “On the Road Again: Metaphors of Travel in Culture Criticism,” Cultural Studies 7 (1993), 224–239. Women Watch—Beijing+10 Global Forum, http://www.un.org/womenwatch/followup/ beijing10/#to (accessed June 24, 2009). Wyndham, Hugh, “The Colour Problem in Africa,” International Affairs 4, 4 (1925), 174–190. Xiang, Biao, Transcending Boundaries-Zhejiangcun: Story of a Migrant Village in Bei- jing, (China Studies) 5, Leiden: Brill, 2005. Xiong, Yu, “The Status of Chinese Women in Marriage and the Family,” inHolding up Half the Sky: Chinese Women, Past, Present, Future, eds. Jie Tao, Bijun Zheng, and Shirley Mow, New York: Feminist Press, 2004, pp. 172–178. Yaro, Yacouba, “Les jeunes chercheurs d’or d’Essakan: L’Eldorado burkinabè,” in L’enfant exploité: Oppression, mise au travail et proletarisation, ed. Bernard Schlem- mer, Paris: Karthala/ORSTOM, 1996, pp. 135–149. Yavuz, M. Hakan and John L. Esposito, Turkish Islam and the Secular State: The Gülen Movement, Syracuse, NY: Syracuse University Press, 2003. Yoshikuni, Tsuneo, African Urban Experiences in Colonial Zimbabwe: A Social History of Harare before 1925, Harare: Weaver Press, 2007. Yung, Judy, Unbound Feet: A Social History of Chinese Women in San Fransisco, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1995. Zahan, Dominique, “Pour une histoire des Mossi du Yatenga,” L’Homme 1, 2 (1961), 5–22. Zeleza, Paul Tiyambe, “The Spatial Economy of Structural Adjustment in African Cit- ies,” in Sacred Spaces and Pubic Quarrels: African Cultural and Economic Land- scapes, eds. Paul Tiyambe Zeleza and Ezekiel Kalipeni, Trenton: Africa World Press, 1999, pp. 43–71. —— with Ezekiel Kalipeni, “Rethinking Space, Politics, and Society in Africa,” in Sacred Spaces and Pubic Quarrels: African Cultural and Economic Landscapes, eds. Paul Tiyambe Zeleza and Ezekiel Kalipeni, Trenton: Africa World Press, 1999, pp. 1–13. —— with Ezekiel Kalipeni, eds., Sacred Spaces and Pubic Quarrels: African Cultural and Economic Landscapes, Trenton: Africa World Press, 1999. Zentrum für Türkeistudien, ed., Zum Integrationspotential der türkischen Tagespresse in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland: Ergebnisse einer quantitativen und qualitativen Inhaltsanalyse türkischer Tageszeitungen, Opladen: Leske & Budrich, 1991. Zhang, Li, Strangers in the City: Reconfiguration of Space, Power and Social Networks within China’s Floating Population, Standford: Standford University Press, 2001. Zhuang, Guotu, Researches on Emigrants’ villages, Xiamen: Xiamen University Press, 2000, (Chinese: Zhongguo Qiaoxiang Yanjiu, Xiamen, 2000, Xiamen daxue Chu- banshe). 440 references

Zubaida, Sami, “Cosmopolitanism and the Middle East,” in Cosmopolitanism, Identity and Authenticity in the Middle East, ed. Roel Meijer, Surrey: Curzon Press, 1999, pp. 15–33. Zürcher, Erik Jan, “Between Death and Desertion: The Experience of the Ottoman Soldier in World War I,” Turcica 28 (1996), 235–258. INDEX OF PERSONAL NAMES

ʿAbduh, Muhammad 302 Chiluba, Frederick 214 Abu Lughod, Janet 1 Churchill, Winston 140 Adamu, Fatima 365 Cleary, David 118 al-ʿAğlūnī, Muḥammad ʿAlī 98, 102 Clifford, James 26 Ahidjo 219 Cohen, Anthony P. 128 Akbar 249, 251, 253–255, 260 Comaroff, Jean 210f., 226 Akhtar, Hakeem Muhammad 326 Comaroff, John 210f., 226 Ancel, Jacques 159 Cooper, Frederick 1 Anderson, Benedict 11, 371–373, 400 Anwar, Syafiʾi 322 Deedat, Ahmed Hoosen 311 Appadurai, Arjun 5, 144, 208, 229, Delafosse, Maurice 211f. 335, 371f. Diouf, Abdou 351 Arnaut, Karel 221–224 Ditend, Naweja 183f., 196 Ashton, Hugh 288f. Douglass, William A. 127 Atatürk, Mustafa Kemal 91, 386, 395, Dozon, Jean-Pierre 221–223 398 Atılgan, Dursun 386 Eboua, Samuel 218 Augé, Marc 50, 130 Edholm, Felicitas 27 Aurangzeb 253, 255 Englund, Harri 227 Erdoğan, Tayyip 396–398 Babur 249, 251f. Esack, Farid 323 Badran, Margot 362 Bahadur Shah 256f. Farrer, James 66 Bamba, A. 348 Finkelstein, Joanne 281f. Barewli, Ahmad Raza Khan 298 Folke Frederisken, Bodil 272 Baudelaire, Charles 27 Fowkes, C.C. 142 Bayat, Zubair 308 Freitag, Ulrike 85 Bedié, Henry Konan 222 Friedman, Jonathan 280f. Ben Aly Chérif 164f., 167 Fru Ndi, John 215 Bissek, Philip 217 Biya, Paul 215, 219 Gandhi, Mahatma 265 Böse, Kuno 387f. Gangohi, Rashid Ahmad 297, 302 Bozzoli, Belinda 278f., 285 Gbagbo, Laurent 223f. Braudel, Fernand 160, 172, 178 Geschiere, Peter 9, 12, 208, 216, 218 Buchner, Max 190 Ghalib, Mirza 253, 257 Bungulu 185, 200 Ghamidi, Javed Ahmad 316, 326 Buschmann, Nikolaus 87 Glubb, John Bagot 91, 97, 104f. Bush, George W. Sr. 208 Green, Nancy 72 Guchu, Wonder 273 Cadornega, António de Oliveira de 181 Guéï, Robert 223 Capello, Hermenegildo 192 Gül, Abdullah 396–398 Carvalho, Henrique Augusto Dias de Gülen, Ali 388f. 180, 184, 191–194, 196–199 Gülen, Fetullah 329, 377 Cavlak, Yüksel 398 Guye, Djibril 122f. Ceyhun, Ozan 386 Chakrabarty, Dipesh 21 Habermas, Jürgen 374 Chauveau, Jean-Pierre 221f. Hafiz, Muhammad Shams al-Din 252 442 index of personal names

Hamid Raza Khan 321 Mugabe, Robert 280 Ḥ annā, ʿAbdallāh 107 Murray Li, Tanja 208 Ḥ annā, Ğūrğ 102f., 105, 109 Mūsā, Sulaimān 104 Heine, Heinrich 390f. Musharraf, Pervez 316 Hinfelaar, Marja 286 Mutashi 201 Ho, Engseng 14 Muzaffar, Chandra 322 Höpp, Gerhard 85, 94f., 139 Mwangi, Wambui 276 Houphouët-Boigny, Félix 221–223 Humayun, Nasir ul-Din Muhammad Nadir Shah 250 252f. Nageeb, Salma A. 337, 358f., 363 al-Ḫ rayšā, Sheikh Ḥadīta̠ 101 Naheed, Usma 308 Husain, Maulana Nazir 298 Naik, Zakir 332 al-Ḥ usaynī, Ḥağğ Amīn 93 Nanaotawi, Muhammad Qasim 297, Hynes, Samuel 83, 87, 108 302 Ibn Ḥ usayn, ʿAbdallāh 91, 101f. Nazir Ahmad 262f. Ibn Khaldun, Abd al-Rahman Ibn Neate, Patrick 283f. Mohammad 32 Ngijol, Ngijol 217 Irtemçelik, Mehmet Ali 395f. Niangoran-Bouah, Georges 223 Ivens, Roberto 192 Niʾmatullah 299 Nkomo, Joshua 280 Jacka, Tamara 65 Nlep, Roger 217 Jackson, Stephen 224f. Nyamnjoh, Francis 216, 218

Kaarshom, Preben 272 Olley, Charles 275 Kagame, Paul 224 von Oppen, Achim 85, 112, 226 Kalipeni, Ezekiel 271 Othman, Norani 366 Kaunda, Kenneth 214, 288 Ouattara, Alassane 222f. al-Kailānī, Rašīd ʿAlī 92f., 95, 109 Kocak, Remzi 394 Parwez, Ghulam Ahmad 316 Koch, Roland 393 Pechstein, Max 233 Külahçı, Ahmet 397 Phiri, William 285 Pittin, Renée 29 Lefebvre, Henri 137–139 Lentz, Carola 225 ul-Qadri, Muhammad Ilyas 297, 310 Loraux, Nicole 210, 228 ul-Qadri, Muhammad Tahir 311 Lovering, Timothy J. 146 al-Qaradawi, Yusuf 14f. Luckmann, Thomas 341 al-Qāwuqğī, Fauzī 94, 96, 103, 105, 107 Lüle, Zeynel 398 Rahn, Rudolf 88 Malkki, Liisa 225 Raza Khan, Hamid 321 Mandaville, Peter 373 Raza Khan, Mustafa 321 Mann, Thomas 233, 237 von Ribbentrop, Joachim 95 Manyungo 189 Rida, Rashid 302 Maududi, Abu’l Ala 299, 304, 316f. Rifāʿī, Maḥmūd 96 Maulana Wahiduddin Khan 317 Rogler, Lutz 85, 139 Mauss, Marcel 51f. Rowlands, Michael 216 Mbembe, Achille 209 Rushdie, Salman 15 Meyer, Birgit 208 Mir-Husseini, Ziba 366 as-Sakhawi, Shams al-Din Muhammad Mirza, Ghulam Ahmad 298 ibn ʿAbd al-Rahman 262 Mitterrand, François 215 Salejee, Ebrahim 303 Mollenhauer, Ernst 234 Sayyid Ahmad Khan 299, 316 Morokvasic, Mirjana 25 Schmalz-Jacobson, Cornelia 387 index of personal names 443

Schmidt-Rottluff, Karl 233 Vera, Yvonne 274, 282, 284, 290 Schröder, Gerhard 369f. Voll, John 14, 249 Schuetz, Alfred 341 Şen, Faruk 386 Wahiduddin Khan 317, 326 Shah Akbar II 256, 258f. Wallerstein, Immanuel 1, 160, 178 Shah Tahmasp 252 Werbner, Richard 274 Shah Wali Ullah 267 White, Luise 281 Siddiq Hasan Khan 298 White, Thyrene 68 Simone, Abdou Maliq 209, 227, 269f., Williame, Jean-Claude 225 272, 279 Winkler, Horst 392 Sindhi, Ubaidullah 299, 317 Wulff, Christian 389 Socpa, Antoine 218f. Spiegel, Anna 337, 349 Yongping, Jiang 65

Thanawi, Ashrafʿ Ali 303 Zakariyya, Muhammad 303 Thornton, Robert 270 Zeleza, Paul 271f., 275 Timur (Timur Lenk) 251, 253 Zia-ul-Haq, Muhammad 300, 313, Toko, Bertrand 217 315 INDEX OF PLACE NAMES

Abalak 31 Atlantic Coast 167, 189f. Abidjan 33, 118 Atlantic Ocean 271 Abyssinia 140, 141, 145 Australia 111, 309 Accra 39 Awadh 255–257 Addis Ababa 145 Azadville 307f. Afghanistan 250, 253, 301, 320 Africa 1, 3, 8f., 11, 21, 144, 149, Baixa de Cassange 189f. 207–211, 213, 215, 225f., 228, 270–272 Baltic Sea 332f., 239 Central Africa 144, 179–182, 185, Bangkok 270, 362 188f., 198, 202, 210, 286 Bangladesh 298f., 307, 314 East Africa 34, 135f., 140f., 143, 145, Bareilly 298, 309 149, 151, 277, 281, 313 Bari 89, 106 North Africa 140, 143, 162, 167, Bechuanaland 286 277, 296 Beijing 59, 349, 356f., 362 South Africa 111, 210, 226, 270–272, Béjaïa 161, 163, 168f., 173, 175f., 177 275, 283, 286, 289, 303, 307–312, Belgium 208, 375 315, 320–324, 326 Benin 38, 116, 119, 121 West Africa 10, 26, 28, 33, 36, 40, Berlin 3, 12, 15, 36, 44, 303, 259, 364, 43, 127f., 169, 176, 178, 211f., 277, 366, 381, 384, 390, 395f. 296, 309, 313 Bhopal 298 Agra 253 Bielefeld 335, 338f, 364, 366 Aleppo 88f., 106 Birmingham 312 Alexandra 278f., 285 Bobo Dioulasso 117 Alexandrette 105 Bougie 165, 170, 174 Aley 90 Bougouriba 112 Algiers 162f., 165f., 168, 170, 172–174, Boumerdes 174 176 Bradford 307 Aligarh 264, 299, 305, 316 Brazil 118 America 321 Brazzaville 280–282 Latin America 3 Bremen 387f. North America 25, 55, 59, 111, 283, Britain, cf. England 11, 57, 93, 300, 309, 312–314 307–309, 312–314 United States 72, 275, 304, 377 British Empire 136, 256, 296, 300 Angola 181f., 189f., 200f., 279 Bulawayo 273–290 Arabia, cf. Saudi Arabia 249, 253f., Burkina Faso 6, 16, 33f., 111–115, 302, 312 117–123, 125, 127–129, 131f., 212, Ardennes 161, 172 214, 221f., 225 Armenia 238 Burma 140, 142,–144, 146, 149, 156, Asia 1, 3, 11, 21, 59, 77, 145, 270, 302, 276 323 Burundi 224f. Central Asia 250, 253, 257, 260, 320 South Asia 140f., 144, 146, 250, 293, Cairo 143, 161, 167, 170f. 296f., 299–301, 307, 312f., 315–317, Calcutta 141, 146, 151 320, 324, 329f., 332 Cameroon 33, 122, 210, 213–217, South East Asia 72, 143, 149, 213, 219f., 226, 228 307, 313, 320, 322 Canada 111, 300, 307, 316, 321 index of place names 445

Cape Peninsula 210 Fujian 61 Cape Town 270f. Fushun 59 Cape Verde islands 47 Casamance 28 Georgia 238 Ceylon 136, 142, 144f., 149, 151, 155, Germany 15, 29, 57, 93–95, 97f., 234, 157 236, 240, 245, 247, 321, 369–371, Chechnya 301 373–385, 387–394, 396–400 Chenab Nagar 313 German Democratic Republic Chicago 12, 308 (East Germany) 235f., 247, 379 Chicapa 182, 192, 196 German Federal Republic (West China 16, 55, 57f., 60–68, 73–82, 280 Germany) 235f., 381 Chiumbue 191, 197, 199 Ghana 38, 113f., 116, 214, 223, 225f., Colombo 142, 146, 151, 156 270, 278 Congo 224f., 281 Goma 224 Constantine 161f., 164, 168, 170 Great Lakes Region 210, 215, 224 Coromandel Coast 250 Greece 96, 100, 143, 207 Curonian Lagoon 231–233 Guangxi 59 Curonian Spit 229, 232–238, 240–243, Guangzhou 59 245f. Gujarat 300, 311 Gulf region 312 Dakar 31, 33, 38, 40, 43, 52, 270 Gulf states 300 Dakoro 31, 38 Damascus 89, 94, 96, 98 Haut-Senegal-Niger 211f. Dar es Salaam 143 Hebei 59 Darfur 354 Heilongjiang 59 Deccan 254f. Herat 252 Delhi 252–257, 262f., 298 Hesse 386, 393 Denmark 15, 316, 321 Hijâz 166, 171 Deoband 297–299, 302, 304, 308, 324 Hindukush 251 Derby 309 Holcombe, Bury 303, 307 Dewsbury 307 Houet 112 Donezk, see Stalino Hungary 379 Dongbei 59, 61, 66, 70, 73–76, 79–81 Hyderabad 255–257 Douala 216f. Durban 271, 303, 310f., 331 India 48, 135, 140, 142f., 151, 249–253, 256–262, 264–266, 297–300, 307–309, East Prussia 232, 234–236 311, 314, 316–318, 320f., 326, 331 Egypt 89, 106, 168, 253, 363 Indian Ocean 7f., 135f., 139, 142–146, England, cf. Britain 263, 275, 282 148–151, 155–158, 250, 271, 277 Eritrea 141, 143 Indonesia 208, 250, 296, 307, 322 Essakane 113 Ioba 112 Essen 378, 386 Iraq 91–94, 101f., 109 Europe 1, 11f., 21, 25, 55, 57–59, 61, Ireland 57, 275, 321 64, 67, 69–71, 73, 76–80, 84, 173, 176, Isfahan 252 208f., 227f., 257f., 275, 290, 309, 315, Islamabad 315 375, 379, 395f. Italy 44, 57, 74, 76, 89, 98, 398 Eastern Europe 173, 235f., 279 Ivory Coast 38, 114, 116, 118, 210, Western Europe 300, 313 213, 215, 220, 223f., 226f.

Fez 161, 169 Jaipur 254, 256 France 6, 12, 16, 55, 57–59, 61, 64, Jakarta 322 69–71, 73f., 76–78, 80f., 95, 109, 162, Jerusalem 90 164, 172, 174–178, 215, 321 Jiangsu 59 446 index of place names

Jiangxi 59 Luluwa 183, 201 Jilin 59 Lungue-Bungu 183, 191 Jodhpur 254, 256 Johannesburg 270f., 278f., 321 M’Sila 161, 164 Jordan 86, 101, 107 Madagascar 140, 143–145 Makokoba 273f., 284–287 Kabul 251, 299f. Malawi 140, 227 Kabylia 159–165, 167, 169–173, Malaysia 250, 307, 315, 321f., 335, 175–178 337f., 343–345, 348f., 352, 354, 357, Kalanyi 180f., 183, 187, 197 359–361, 363, 366 Kaliningrad Oblast 232, 239, 241 Maldives 142 Kanyika 196 Mali 35, 38, 116, 221, 283 Kaolack 347, 357 Malta 299 Karachi 326 Marrakech 161, 169 Kasai 182f., 191–193, 196 Mashriq 83, 86, 106f., 109 Kasanje 182, 189, 195f. Mataba 181f., 185, 197, 199 Kashmir 266, 301 Mauritius 140, 321 Kazakhstan 238 Mecca 161, 167, 170, 175, 297 Kelantan 249 Mediterranean 160, 162, 172, 175, 178, Kenya 140, 144, 146–148, 270, 276, 263 279, 321 Memel territory 232f. Kete 182f. Mewat 298 Khartoum 353, 363 Middle East 3, 11, 21, 83, 86, 93–95, Kilindini 142 140f., 143, 162, 169, 177, 276, 296, Kimbundu 181, 200 301, 317, 322 Kiniama 196 Mölln 384 Kisenge 184, 191–193, 195–197 Mombasa 142f., 147 Kivu 224 Morocco 166f., 169, 351 Kongo 182, 188 Moscow 238, 247 Kuala Lumpur 307, 320, 322, 352 Mozambique 276 Kuba 182f., 201 Mumbai 308, 318 Kurd Dagh 89f. Musumba 180, 182f., 187, 191, 194, 197 Kuwait 316 Mussumba, see Musumba Kwango 181–183, 191f., 197–200 Kwanza 182, 191 Nairobi 143, 147, 271, 349 Kwilu 185, 191, 198 Netherlands 57, 208, 321, 375 Neu-Isenburg 375 Lahore 311, 314, 316, 321 New York 48 Lakhnau 256 Nida, see Nidden Laranjeiro 309 Nidden 233f., 236, 244–246 Latvia 232, 239 Niger 30, 33, 35, 37f., 40, 116, 167, Lebanon 105, 363 171, 212 Leicester 315 Central Niger 31, 33, 35, 37, 39 Lenasia 307 Nigeria 28f., 33, 37–40, 116, 270, 361 Leningrad 238 North-Rhine Westphalia 378 Levant 144 Norway 316, 321 Liaoning 59 Noumbiel 112 Lithuania 9f., 230, 232–234, 237, Nuremberg 391 239–245, 247 Nyasaland 140, 143, 276, 288 Lóvua 181, 185, 195 Lubuku 182, 199 Odivelas 309 Lucknow, see Lakhnau Ottoman Empire 11, 98, 250, 265 Luembe 185, 192f. Ouagadougou 117, 124 index of place names 447

Pakistan 298, 300, 307f., 310f., Soviet State, see Soviet Union 313–316, 319, 321 Spain 57, 74, 307 Palestine 86, 89f., 92f., 97, 105, 141, 328 Sri Petaling 307 Palmela 307 Stalino 95 Paris 12, 16, 27, 48, 59, 57, 77f., 161, Stockholm 391 166, 172, 175, 281f., 390 Sudan 33, 172, 210f., 225, 315, 335, Persia 143, 250, 253, 260 337f., 344f., 349f., 352, 354, 358–361, Poni 112 363, 365 Portugal 31, 36, 46, 57, 307, 309, 324 Suez 89 Poura 113 Sumatra 149 Punjab 298 Sumbi 189f. Putu Kasongo 181 Surat 331 Syria 86, 88–90, 92f., 95, 100f., 107f., Qingdao 59 171 Qingtian 58 Taddart 161, 163–166, 168–170, 172, Rangoon 249 174f. Reunion 140, 143, 145 Tanganyika 140, 143, 146f. Rhodesia, cf. Zimbabwe 143, 146f., Tanzania 363 156, 276, 283f., 288 Thailand 149 Russia 232, 234, 237, 241 Tianjin 59, 76 Soviet Union 236, 237–239, 280, 384 Tizi-Ouzou 161, 173f. Rwanda 224 Togo 226 Rwanda-Burundi 224 Touba 51 Transjordan 88, 91, 101 Sahara 8, 162, 167 Tunis 96, 161, 168 Sahel 35–37, 51f., 113, 270, 277 Tunisia 96, 161, 167 Salisbury 275–277, 279, 287 Turkey 89, 296, 329, 369, 371, Salt 90 373–381, 383, 385f., 395–400 Sanaga 228 Saudi Arabia 296, 312 Udaipur 256 Scotland 275 Uganda 140, 143, 146–148 Senegal 38, 212, 226, 335, 337, 339, Uzbekistan 238 344f., 348–351, 354–356, 359–364 Sétif 164 Wales 275 Seychelles 142f., 145 Warsaw 44 Shandong 59 Wembley 309 Shanghai 59, 76 Wenzhou 58 Shenyang 59 Siberia 59 Yantai 59 Sicily 96 Yaoundé 218f. Singapore 140, 310, 321 Yugoslavia 96 Sivas 385 Sokoto 39, 364 Zambia 214, 226 Solingen 384 Zeppelinheim 375 Somalia 270 Zhejiang 58f., 61, 64 Soummam Valley 163f., 168 Zimbabwe, cf. Rhodesia 273, 279

Studies in Global Social History

Series Editor Marcel van der Linden

Until recently, the North Atlantic perspective dominated the mental world order: the “modern” period was believed to have started in Europe and North America and to have spread gradually throughout the rest of the world; the temporality of the core area was considered to have defined developmental periods elsewhere as well. This Eurocentrism is now under fire, and many attempts to circumvent it are in progress. The Studies in Global Social History figure within these new trends. Each volume in this series addresses at least two continents and aims to visualize contrasts and similarities and to reveal long-distance connections to demonstrate how our present global society has materialized from uneven and combined developments and from interaction between acts “from above” and “from below”.

1. Linden, M. van der. Workers of the World. Essays toward a Global Labor History. 2008. ISBN 978 90 04 16683 7 2. Borges, M.J. Chains of Gold. Portuguese Migration to Argentina in Trans- atlantic Perspective. 2009. ISBN 978 90 04 17648 5 3. Lucassen, J., Lucassen, L., and Manning, P. (eds.). Migration History in World History. Multidisciplinary Approaches. 2010. ISBN 978 90 04 18031 4 4. Freitag, U. and Oppen, A. von (eds.). Translocality. The Study of Globalising Processes from a Southern Perspective. 2010. ISBN 978 90 04 18116 8

brill.nl/sgsh